IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
v
A
:/.
%o
1.0
I.I
1.25
1^1^ 12.5
2.2
1^1
Hi 1^
11=
U ill 1.6
V]
/a
% >
>^
^^
'^
'/
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14S80
(716) 872-4503
^o
U.X
CIHM/ICMH
Microfiche
Series.
CIHiVJ/ICIVIH
Collection de
microfiches.
Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques
:\
Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques
The Institute has attempted to obtain the best
original copy available for filming. Features of this
copy which may be bibliographically unique,
which may alter any of the images in the
reproduction, or which may significantly change
the usual method of filming, are checked below.
D
n
n
D
Coloured covers/
Couverture de couleur
I I Covers damaged/
Couverture endommag6e
Covers restored and/or laminated/
Couverture restaur^e et/ou pelliculde
I I Cover title missing/
Le titre de couverture manque
□ Coloured maps/
Cartes gdographiques en couleur
"I Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/
Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire)
I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/
n
Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur
Bound with other material/
Relid avec d'autres documents
Tight binding may cause shadows or distortion
along interior margin/
Lareliure serrde peut causer de I'ombre ou de la
distortion le long de la marge intdrieure
Blank leaves added during restoration may
appear within the text. Whenever possible, these
have been omitted from filming/
II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajoutdes
lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte,
mais, lorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont
pas 6t6 filmdes.
Additional comments:/
Commentaires suppl^mentaires;
L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaire
qu'il lui a 6t6 possible de se procurer. Les details
de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-dtre uniques du
point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier
une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger une
modification dans la mdthode normale de filmage
sont indiquds ci-dessous.
□ Coloured pages/
Pages de couleur
□ Pages damaged/
Pages endommagdes
I I Pages restored and/or laminated/
G
D
Pages restaur6es et/ou pellicul6es
Pages discoloured, stained or foxec
Pages ddcolordes, tachetdes ou piqu^es
Pages detached/
Pages d^tachdes
Showthrough/
Transparence
Quality of prir
Qualitd indgale de I'impression
Includes supplementary materii
Comprend du matdriel suppidmentaire
I Tj Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/
I I Pages detached/
r~7| Showthrough/
I I Quality of print varies/
I I Includes supplementary material/
Only edition available/
Seule 6dition disponible
Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata
slips, tissues, etc., have been refilmed to
ensure the best possible image/
Les pages totalement ou partiellement
obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure,
etc., ont 6x6 fiim^es 6 nouveau de fapon &
obtenir la meilleure image possible.
Th<
to 1
Th«
poi
of 1
filn
Ori
be{
the
sioi
oth
firs
sioi
or i
Th€
sha
TIN
whi
Mai
diff
enti
beg
righ
reqi
met
This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/
Ce document est film6 au taux de reduction indiqu6 ci-dessous.
10X
14X
18X
22X
26X
30X
>/
12X
16X
20X
24X
28X
32X
aire
details
ues du
t modifier
ger une
I filmage
i^es
The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanl<s
to the generosity of:
National Library of Canada
The images appealing here are the best quality
possible considering the condition and legibility
of the original copy and in keeping with the
filming contract specifications.
Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed
beginning with the front cover and ending on
the last page with a printed or illustrated impres-
sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All
other original copies are filmed beginning on the
first page with a printed or illustrated impres-
sion, and ending on the last page with a printed
or illustrated impression.
re
The last recorded frame on each microfiche
shall contain the symbol — ^> (meaning "CON-
TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"),
whichever applies.
Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at
different reduction ratios. Those too large to be
entirely included in one exposure are filmed
beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to
right and top to bottom, as many frames as
required. The following diagrams illustrate the
method:
L'exemplaire filmd fut reproduit grSce d la
g6n6rositd de:
Bibliothdque nationale du Canada
Les images suivantes ont 6x6 reproduites avec le
plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et
de la nettetd de l'exemplaire filmd, et en
conformity avec les conditions du contrat de
filmage.
Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en
papier est imprimde sont filmds en commenpant
par le premier plat et en terrninant soit par la
dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second
plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires
originaux sont filmds en commenpant par la
premidre page qui comporte une empreinte
d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par
la dernidre page qui comporte une telle
empreinte.
Un des symboles suivants apparaitra sur la
dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon le
cas: le symbole --► signifie "A SUIVRE ', le
symbole V signifie "FIN".
Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre
film6s d des taux de reduction diffdrents.
Lorsque le document est trop grand pour gtre
reproduit en un seul clichd, il est filmd d partir
de Tangle sup6rieur gauche, de gauche 6 droite,
et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre
d'images ndcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants
illustrent la m^thode.
ly errata
ed to
int
ne pelure,
apon d
1
2
3
32X
1
2
3
4
5
6
ijl>^'.
PIIILOL
I, A 11, i'i:r,i,(jw
IN IMV
l4 lllvN
•20
H^>
^
1> i; s c u I A
ESSAYS
CIIUOFLV
PIlILOLOIilCAL AND ETIINO(iRAI>!ll(;AL
BY
ROBERT GORDON LATHAM
M.A., M.I)., I'. U.S., KTC.
i.Aii, i'i:r,i,u\v (ii- ivi.\(i;s (nij.iuii.: ( AMr.uiiKii: , i,,\
w. i'i;'iKi;ss(iii III'' KNci.isii
JN rMVKKHlTV CuM.Ki;!; , I.ONDIJN, I.AIK ASSISTAM' I'llvyiCIAN
AT illlO Mli>lH.lC.SK.\ llUSrilAh.
WILLIAMS i^ XOIKJATK,
14 IIKXUIETTA STKKKT, (.'OVENT (JAK'DKN, LONDON
AM)
'20 SOUTH KUEDEKiriv STKEET, EDIKHUKGII.
LKH'/KJ, 1(. llAirr.MAN.N.
'J. 7
»— — «
159756
'^2-
■ - . ■ I /J I
llio essay
pg'ical and ci
he earliest ■
l))iie cases tl
Ippenclices t
onsists of p
London ; a so
p Coniparati
liad merely
c late Mr.
justify its
As a {^enei
31110 definite
Ittention of t
iccause there
jerning it wli
learchcs condr
liitli any very
Ire supposed
Avide field
u the same tii
lines , and
I'liere the ligl)
['anting, and,
Irtilicial light.
Igations may
\m\ their obs(
ciurity which i
^le more incun
needless to
Iinographical
li'c disco verabl
Y excuse be n
Ipoii obscure j
lif'v have not
rilEFAC E.
Tin; essays in the j)resent volume are eliiefly upon pliilo-
|)<'ical and etlniograjiliieal subjeets: tliougli not exclusively.
jlio earliest was published in 1S40, the latest in lbr»(). In
1)1110 eases they luive formed separate treatises and in some
Ippendices to larger works. The greater jiart, howev(!r,
)nsists of papers read heforc the Philological Society of
London; a society Avhich has materially promoted the growth
k Comparative Philology in Great Jiritain, and wliich^ if
had merely given to the world the valuable researches of
ic late IMr. (airnett; would have done more than enough
justify its existence and to prove its usefulness.
As a general rule these pa})ers address themselves to
)nio definite and special question, which commanded the
[ttention of the author either because it was obscure, or
lecause there was something in the current opinions con-
loniing it which, in his eyes, required correction. Ke-
loarches conducted on this principle can scarcely be invested
nth any very gcuieral interest. Those who tidvo them up
Ire supposed to have their general knowledge beforehand.
Avide field and a clear view, they have already taken.
Lt the same time there are, in the distant horizon, imperfect
liitlines , and in tlu; parts nearer to the eye dim spots
diere the light is uncertain , dark spots where it is Avholly
[anting, and, oftcner still, spots illumined by a false and
Irtificial light. Some of the details of the following invcs-
ations may be uninteresting from their minuteness; some
iin their obscurity; the minuteness however, and the ob-
mrity Avhich deprive them of general interest make it all
le more incumbent on soi.ie one to take them u}) : and it
3 needless to add that for a full and coniphle system of
jthnugraphical or philological knoAvledge all the details that
re discoverable sliould be discovered. This is my excuse
t excuse be needed) for having spent some valuable time
poll obscure points of minute interest. Upon the whole,
ley have not been superlluous. This means that J have
t !l
w
Titr.i'Acr,.
rarely, or never, found i'roni any subsequent readln;;- tlmt
tliey liiid be(Mi anticipated. Wliei'e this lias been the easel
the artiehi has been omitted — being treated as a iion srri-\
/)/iim. An elaborate train of reasoning submitted to tin!
Fithnograjjliieal Society has on this principle been ignored
It M s upon th(! line of migration by which the Poiynosiaiij
portion of tlu; Facitic islands was peopled. It deduced I'tily
nosia from the Navigator's Islands: the Navigators Islands]
or Samoan Archi})elago , from the Italik an I Radak chains:!
the Ralik and lladak chains from Micronesia; Micronesial
from the Philippines, via Sonsoral and the Pelews. Soinci
time after the paper Avas read 1 found that Forstcr has pro
nuilgated the same doctrine. 1 ought to hnvc. known it be-
fore. II(!nce the paper is omitted : indeed it was (though read
never published.
In respect to the others the cliief writers who have workl
ed in the same iield are Dr. Scouler, Professor Turner, amlj
Professor Busclnnann, — not to mention tlu; bibliographical
labours of Dr. Ludwig, and the second paper of Galla-
tin. 1 have no hesitation in exi)ressing my belief tliatj
where they agree with me they do so as independent inves-i
tigators; claiming for myself, where I agree, with tliciu,
the same consideration.
Of Hodgson and Logan, Windsor Earlo, and other invos-l
tigators I should have much to say in the way of botli
aknowledgemcnt and criticism, had India and the Indiauj
Arcliipelago taken as large a portion of the present volumel
as is taken by North America. As it is, it is only in
few points that I touch their domain.
The hypotliesis that the Asteks (so-called) reached Me-
xico by sea I retract. Again — the fundamental affinitvl
of the Australian language was a doctrine to which butlii
Teichelmann and Sir G. Grey had conuiiitted themselvetj
when the paper on the Negrito languages Avas written. TIkI
papers, however, stand as they stood: partly because thcyl
are worth something in the way of independent evidence,
and partly because they illustrate allied subjects.
I. Pnocleiitica
VII. Qeograp!
CONTENTS.
ir inves-
I. PaDcIeiitica ,.„g.,.
lii!iii;;Mir.'il Lecture 1
Oil t.lie study ot' M(!(lii'iiie If*
On the study ot' LiuiK'Hiig-c 2?
II. Logica
On the word Dislrihiiird \\\)
III. Grammatiea
On tile reciiirocul JM-onouiis, and the refh'etive Verh . . . /if)
On the connexion Ix-twecMi tlie Idois ol" Associ.'ition nnd I'ln-
riility as an iulhieuee in tlie ICvohition of inlleclion . . "iT
On the word ciijinn i;i)
On tlie Aorists in KA (li
IV. Metrica
On the Doctrine of the Ca'sura in the (Jreek senarius . . (\S
On tlu! use of the si^-ns of Accent and Quantity as o-uides
to the pronunciation of words diM-ived from the classical
Langiiafi'es 74
V. Chronologica
On the Meaning' of the word IJAPOi; St
\\. Bibliographica
Notice of works on tlie I'rovincialisms of Holland .... 8.")
VII. Geographica
On the lOxistence of a nation IxN'iring the name of Seres . S9
On the evi<lence of .a connection hetween the Ciinhri and
the Chersoncsus Cinihrica 0.'?
On the original extent of the Slavonic area 10S
On the terms Gof/ii and fic/uc 129
On the .Jajiodes and Ge]iidae I;; I
VIII. Ethnologica
On the suhjectlvity of certain classes in Ethnology . . . 118
(ieneral principles of jiliilological classilication and the va-
lue of groups, with particular reference to the Languages
of the Indo-European Clas.s i.\l\
Traces of a hilingual town in England 1^2
On the Ethnological position of certain trihes on the (Jarrow
hills ^ry]
\ I
CiiNIKNI S.
On the traiisilidii lii'twri'ii tlic 'rilMtiiii .'iiiil Iinliiiii l''iiiMilii.s
ill i'i'S|irct to (•(»iit"nriii;iti()ii 1.
• hi tile An'iiiilics (if llic IjMiiii'iimocs of ('aiicasiis witli tlic
■II
iiiuMiisylliilnc li!iiii:iia^rs
On tlic 'I'lislii liini;;!!!!^;!'
On llii! Name and Natiun of the Daciau Uiwj: l»cccliahi,s,
witli iKituTS ol' flic A;;atiiyisi ami Alani
On llic l/an;;ua!i(' of Lancasliir<' (unlcr the lioiiians .
On tin' N('};'iato Ijanj^'ua^cs
On tin' "'fncral afl'initics of flic l.anii'iiay'cs of the oceanic
I Mi
liliicks
licniarks on flic Wicalmlarics of flic ^'oy.'lJ^■c of flic IJatfl
snake
(hi ii Z
i/.a \'ocal»iilarv
:.'i,'
On flic Personal I'rcmoinis am! Xnnicrals of flic Mallicolk
ami JOrromanj^o Lan^'iia;ics, by flic K'ev. ('. Miraliaiii .
On tin: Lan^Miaji'i'S of flic <)reL;(Mi 'l'criif(n'\-
On the Ktlniof^raiiliy of Iviissian America 'Jiii
Miscellaneous contrilmtions to the Kthnof-Tupliy of Xortli
Auicriea
On a short Vocabiilarv of the Ihiiu'Iu'iix {.ani^ua^e, by J
A. [sbistt'r
On the, Lan^'uajjes of New Califoiiiia
On I'.ertaiii Additions to tli(,' (^tlinoftTujiliicjiI ]ihilolo<.''y of
Cential America, with remarks on the so-calli'd Astek
ill II'
Cominest of Jlexi
CO
Note upon a paper of the Hon. Captain I''it/,roy on the Isth-
mus of I'anania '"I'i]
On the Lanaiiai;'es of Northern, Western and Central America '.\%[
luKtoacl of
laims and tli
jettcr to phinj
|u lay l)ei"oro
lubstauce of s
juysolf the li(
last iinportan
loudiiv^-, in it
li'litli , the lai
Ko all (in dii
kavc (icoasion
\\)i>\i true f^'v
liich we are
iiiportance ot
|iii;;lc fact, tli
lith the P^ngl
|f a liberal i
urthor prefae
|ious of writii
ho write it
ational Litei
Thus havin
liul the subd:
|ui'|)oscs it is
(•ration of tl
T.
r.EDKlTK A.
I X A L (il K A L I.T:( Tl IM<:
r>i;MVi:iiKU at
IJNUEKSITV COLLKIJE, I.O^IXJN,
ocTOiii'.K 14, \H'M).
lustoad of (Ictuiniiig- you uitli u dissertjition u])on tlie
laims and the uuuits of our J.an^U!>ji,o, it nuiy porJiaps ho.
jcttcr to plunge at onc(! into the middle of niy sul>joct, and
lu lay before you, as succinctly as I am able, the plan and
jubstance of such I^ectures a;s, within these walls, 1 promise
lysolf the honour of delivering'. For 1 consider that the
list importance of thoroughly understanding, of compre-
|i('ii(ling, in its whole length, and breadth, and height, and
li'ptli , the language -svhich we all speak, we all read, and
*ci all (in different degrees, but still each in our degree)
►ave ((ccasion to write — the importance also of Justly and
Ipnii true grounds, valuing the magnificent literature of
Uiicli we are the inheritors — I consider, I say, that the vast
kiiportance of all this is sufliciently implied by the simple
[iii^lc fact, that, in this Institution, the iMiglish Language,
lith the English Literature, is recognized as part and parcel
f a liberal education. It may also be assumed, without
jiu-tlier preface, that every educated man is, at once, ambi-
[ions of writing his own Language AV(dl ; of criticizing those
lio write it badly; and of taking up his admiration of our
ational Literature, not upon Trust but upon Knowledge.
riius having premised, I now proceed to the divisions
[nd the subdivisions of my subject. P^or certain practical
juiposes it is found expedient to draw, bc.'twcen tlie consi-
[cration of the English Language, and the consideration ol"
1
iNAi <;iu.\i, i.iuriKi;.
till' I"!n;;lisli Literature, n liroiul liin; (A' (leiiiMrcation. Tl |
kiHiU le(lji,'e of hnuUs is one tliiiii;'; the know le(l;^(! ot' tlie ni|i
of j;(ioil coiiiposition is aiiotiier tirni,n'. It is one tliiiii; i.
know wliat (•tiier men have written; it is another tliinj;' t
know how you slioiihl yourselt' write. Tlie one is a pnji a
ot' Literary History, or ot" Literai'y l>io;;ra|ihy ; the other
a point ot ]{hetorie, or a point ot (irannnar. I (h» not .sm
that tho two studies do not mutually assh^-t each othei'. A
stmlies do so: these in a j>reat dei;ree. l''amiliarity with tl
works of a Shakspeai'c or a Milton, is an ai'e<)niplishment
an ai^uoniplishmont that dejtends u[)ou our taste, and ni,
Avhit'li do])cnd8 also upon our loisun* — an ae( ouiplisjniici
winch cannot be too highly valued, ])ut still an ac'eonipli>l
ment. Familiarity, however, with tlu; rules of i:;ood writini
is not a unn'o acc-oniplishment. It is a nceessary (lualitieatioi
whic'li comes ho)n(^ to us all. Now if 1 am convinced lO
one thin;^ more than of an(»fher, 1 am con\inced of the tnit j
of this assertion; liz.: that a j^ood style conu'S not of itscjl
it comes not uncalled tor; and it comes neitlun* by insliiii
nor by accident. It is the result (d' art, and the r(\^ult <•
])ractise. The Rules of ^ood Composition are the rules i
Ivhetoric; and it is very necessary that they be. neither m
f;lected nor undervalued. Two classes of men, and tw
classes only, can ])retend to dispense with them — those tliiii
can write well, and those that cannot write at all.
Tiio Knglisli Jjan<;ua;^(? is pre-eminently a mixed Liiiij
^uage. Its basis indeed is Saxon, but ujion this basis licl
a very varied superstructure, of Danish and of I^orinniii
Fi'cneh, of ]\rodorn French and of (ir(^ek, o\' Classical Liitiij
and of the Latin of the i\Iiddle A^cs imported at differcii:!
periods and upon ditfcu'cnt occasions. ^Vor(ls from thosij
languages are comprehended by the writer just in the ])i'o
portion tliat he coinprehends their origin and their dcriva]
tion. Hence it is that the knowledge of isolated words it
siibordinatc to the formation of a style; and hence it is tli;i;|
tlio rules for their investigation are (their aim and objeiil
being alone considered) akin to the rules of Khetoric.
This however is but a small part of what may be oui|
studies. It is well to know how Time atfects Languagi?
and in wliat way it modifies them. It is well to know howl
one dialect grows out of another, and how its (dder sta<re!l
differ from its newer ones. It is w( 11 if avc can perceive tli.i;[
these variations are in no wise arbitrary; but it is betttJ
still if we can discover the laws that regulate them. Vj
all this is but a knowledge of the changes that words i
dergo, a knowdedge of the changes in their form, and j
t
|knn\\ ledge
^loiiits are p<
vrrv laxest !
jiiiibt . in no
Lectures u
i;il j»art of a
he llhetorie;
hvill ;;ive a e<
liiiction to oi
la res[)ect
kilMiu some 1
||)cst of my )
'flms mucl
Bcct-iiialter.
The consid
si(hi'ations of
)\' the knowl
tjiiiis of the
There arc
lie tau<;ht. i\
like the p
kvc are born t
tl wit once s;
iH'ci'ssary to
this he true, \
Ito say the vei
;'lciu- uuderst
liiiwover, set
m inctxperieni
Iwoll you mut
L'iii/ii. Thus 1
i\n(l with resp
KU'ination of
puiavailing, a
Towards ae
^ably essentia
Barily a habit
[(lUf'ntly than
I'vontually, p
hwito accurat(
it' attention e
l|K'rson is, I
Bon should be
Iniii
?'ea
: even, as
th only,
the mor(
INAtMilllM, I.r.( Tl'lU:.
;{
hini'wlcd^^o t' tlio cliaii^cs
111 tlicll
nluiiV. tll(! word I
iii('iuiiii<;'.
Nnw tI|(>S('
Kiiiits arc i>niiits of l'.tyiintln;;y , tli(! word Ix'iii;;' used ill its
,rr\- laxcst and its largest sense; and points nt" Mtyimdo^y
iiii>t , ill n(» wiso, 1)0 ne^lei'ted or niidervalued.
ill
•ctnros upon tlioso (juestions will t'oi-ni tlie Mtyiiioiojj,!-
,, part ol' a course; and Lectuivs upon I'rose (.'oniposilioii
V IJlictorieal part oloiie; whilst the twi), taken to,:;(tlier,
vill ;:ive a course upon the l'!ii;;lish Lan^uajjjo, in coutradis-
liiiictioii to one upon the Kii;j,lisli Literalurti.
I In respect to the latter, I shall, j.t rej^ular iiiter\als, jix
luiou some new period, or soiiie new suhjcct, and, to the
Tjjcst ot" my power, ilhustrate it.
'I'lius niiicli I'or th\! divisions and sulxUvisions ot the sub-
I't-iiiatter.
The eonslderati(ins that come next in order are the i(»n-
sidinitions of tin; manner of exhibitin";' it, the considerations
Jit' the knowledp,e that can be detailed, and the considera-
rmns of the trains of thouf;lit th.'it can be inculcated.
! Tliero are those wlio believe that a good styhj is not to
ho taught. ]Many think that tlie habit of writing good I'rose,
h like the poAVcr of creating good J'oetry; a privilege that
kve are born to, and not a ])os^e.ssion that we can earn; and
ti wit once said that, in order to write clearly, it Avas only
[iifcessary to understand what you would write about. If
Itliis Ije true, then is composition an easy matter indeed; or,
in say the very least, a perspicuous style is as common as a
rlcar understanding. Tlu! experience of the world has,
iiwever, set aside tlu; d(!i'ision of the Avit, and the practice
f inexperienced writers has bcdied his d(»gmji. To write
you must understand not only tin; iiuilirr but the ntr-
Thus then it is, that, with resjx'ct to the use (d books,
111
I'
ivell
nd with respect to the use of rules, in our attempts at the
.(innation of a good style, some jjersons neglect them as
iiiavailing, and some despise; them as superlluous.
I Towards accurate writing Habit of some sort is indispon-
pably essential. Yet tlii« indis})ensable habit is not neces-
parily a liabit of tvriliiKj. A ])ersou wlio writes no more fr(>-
fjucntly than the common occasions of life demand, sliall
'vcutually, j)rovided that lie will habitually write his best,
\\\'\\o accurately. Now the habit of criticism , and the habit
if attention essential to habits of Avriting our best , a second
person is, I think, able to inculcate. iSucli a second perr-
on should be familhar with bad as well as Avith good Avri-
ing; even, as the ])hysician sliall grow conversant, not Avitli
ealtli only, but Avitli disease also. lie should knoAV Avhat
re the more egregious errors in composition ; he should
I*
INAlKiUli.VL I.KC'TIIU;.
know also whiit are tlio more usual ones. He should I
learn(Hl in the inaccuracies of good authors, and dccplvi
eruditci in the absurdities of bad ones; recognii'.ing' f'alstl
taste under all its disguises, and holding up, as a boaeoif
to avoid, the pitiful and)ition of niarmerisni and of writiiij.1
tinely. The principles by which he tries these things, liJ
cfin lay before his hearcirs: and he can illustrate ■ lem witlj
a prodigality of connnentary. And those who hearkini slial
tluis grow critical. And, mark — the reader that continually!
and habitually criticizes others, soon comes to, continually
and habitually, criticize himself. He grows fastidious, ii-
it were, perforce.
In this way two things may be done : our criticism ni.iyi
be sharpened, and its edge niay be turned upon ourselv(;;,
At this I aim, and not at teaching liluitoric systematica. r,.
The father vi' Horace, as we learn from the testimony oil
his son, was peculiar in his notions of education. Jn lii>|
eyes it was easier to eschew Vice than to imitate Virtiio.|
Too wise a man not to know that an unapproachable mod<
was no model at all, he let (for instance) the modesty ofl
Virgil (as modest virtues generally coiitrive to do) spc . furl
itself. But he counselled his son against the prodigality nl
Ijarrus, and held up, with parental prudence, the dctecteili
peccadilloes of Trebonius.
Now the system, that produces a negative excellence iiii
morals, may produce also a negative excellen e in literal
ture. More than tiiis (for the truth must be ti d) Art can!
not do. For Wit, and Vigour, and Imaginati t we musti
be indebted to Nature.
/ /iiioiv that the system of picking out, and h ding up,
(uther a neighbour's foibles, or an author's inele< ncies, \>\
not a gracious occupation; the question, howeve , is, iiol|
wliether it be gracious or ungracious but whether t be effi-
cient or inefficient.
Whosoever is conversant with the writings o etymolo-
gists must be well aware, that there are few subjects wlioro-
in men run wild to the degree that they run wild in 7s7'/
molor/y. A little learning, dangerous everywhere, is preemi-
nently dangerous in Etymology. There has been in tl!e|
world an excess of bad etymology for two reasons.
The discovery of remote analogies is not only mental ox- 1
ercise, but, worse luck, it is a mental amusement as wcI'
The imagination is gratified, and ('riticism thinks it liarsli|
to interpose.
Again, there is no language that a nuin so willingly illu-
strates as lu! illustrates his own. He knows it best, and ho
INAUOIIUAI- m;( ruiiK.
i)
itiulios it with tlic greatest case. He loves It not wisely
)ut too well. lie iiiids in its structure now j'.nd peculiar
[icauties; he overvalues its excellenee, and he exaggerates
|ts autifiuity. iSueh are the men who talk in Wales, of the
ibiqiiity ol the Celts; in (lerinany, of the Teutonic (Jrigin
[)f the Konians ; and in Ireland of the Phoenician extraction
)t' the Milesians.
Thus then, two out of the Thousand and One causes of
)a(l Etymology are the reason psychological, and the rea-
son patriotic. Nciiiini cicdctidum cle Palria sua.
i think that at the entrance upon an unsettled su]>jeet,
uijin should boldly say, and say at the very onset of his
iarccr, upon Avhese opinions he relies, and whose opinions
lie distrusts, lie should profess himself, not indeed the
liiiplicit folloAver of any School, but he should name the
?ciiool that he preferred. He should declare whose books
lie could reconunend, and whose he would eschew. Thus,
If 1 were lecturing upon (Jeology, I should say, at once,
Ivliotlier 1 were what is called a Scriptural Ocologist or a
l-atituc'iinarian one: And thus, in the department in point,
name the writers I put faith in. In the works of Grimm
uid Rask 1 place nuuh trust; in those of Home Tooko
tome; and in those of Whiter and Vallancey (to name small
liioii along with great) none whatsoever.
In the studv of the Laniruaiies that have ceased to bo
kpokon we find, in an Etymological view, one thing, and
line tiling only; words as they have been affected by prc-
,ious processes of change; in other terms, the reatdls of thcs<'
i)rocesses. But in the Language that we hear spoken around
lis, and, still more, in the Language that we ourselves speak,
[\e rind something more than rcsiiKs; avc find the jtroresst's
that give occasion to them; in other terms, we see the change
\is il lala's place. Within the lifetime of an individual, within
■ven a Vi>ry few years, those that look may find, not only
hat certain words are modified in respect to their meaning,
\n(l certain letters modified, in respect to their pronuneia-
1, but they may also see haiv these modifications arc
iirought about, ascertaining — of words the intermediate
Ineanings, and of letters the intermediate sounds. We nmy
trace tlie gradations throughout. A\'e can , of our own Lan-
jiuage, and in our own Times, see, with a certainty, what
thange our Language more especially affects; wo can ob-
serve its tendencies. And we can do this because Ave can
ind towards what particular laxities (be they of meaning or
!»(' tlioy of pronunciation) ourselves and our neighbours more;
I'-^pfcially have a bias. We can, as it were, inr,phesij. ^^'c
6
INAlIcrilAI. I,K< TlIliK.
(li
I
1
I
cannot do this -svitli tlu; Latin of Augustus ; wc cannot
it Avitli the CJrcek of Pericles.
Hence it is tliat wliat we ■will know, to a certainty, i
Ktyniological processes, must be collected from Cotenipo
rary Languages. Those who look for them elsewhere s('uli
for the Living among the Dead; arguing from things un-
known (at least unknown to a certainty), and so speculatinj;
laxly, and dogmatizing unphilosophically. Hence it is, tiuii!
in (Jotcmporary Languages, and of those Cotemporan
]janguages, in our own most especially, Ave may lay do{|
and strong, and as the only true substratum of accurati
criticism, the foundations of our knowledge of Etymoloj;!
cal Processes. And, observe, avc can find them in a .sut'ti
cient abundance provided that wc sul'ticiontly look out for
them. For Processes, the same in kind, though not tlie
same in degree, are found in all languages alike. No pro-
cess is found in any one language that is not also fouml
(in some degree or other) in our own; and no process can
be found in our own language which does not (in some
degree or other) exist in all others beside. There arc m
such things as Peculiar Processes: since Languages differ
from each other, not in the nature of their Processes, but in
the degrees of their development. These are Ijold , perhaps
novel, assertions, but they are not hasty ones. (1)
Simjily considered as an Tnslrumeiil of Etymology I iiiia-
gino that the study of Cotemporary Languages is, in its
importance, of tlie very first degree; while next in value
to this (considered also, as an Instrutnenl of Etymology,) is
the study of Languages during what may bo called tlicii
breakings -up, or their transitions.
There arc; two stages in Language. Through these two
st.iges all Languages, sooner or later, make their way; suim
sooner than others, but all sooner or later. Of this lln;
Latin language may serve as an illustration. \n the time
of Augustus it expressed the relations of Time and Plan,
in other words, its Cases and Tenses, by Declension am!
(Jonjugation , or, broadly speaking, by Inflexion. In tin
time of Dante there was little or no LiHexion, but there wa?
an abundance of Auxiliary Verbs, and an abundance ot
i'repositions in its stead. The expression of Time and l*lacc
by independent words supers(M]c(l the expression by Liflcc-
tions. Now in all Tjanguages the inflectional stage conios
first. This is a Law. There are Languages that stay f(ir
ever (at least for an indefinite time) in their earlier sta;;p.
Others there arc again, that we nevtsr come in contact witli
before they have proceeded to their later one. Language?
i> I
IXAL'fiUUAr, LKCTLMU:.
c cannot
f tliis latter kind nrc of subordinate value to the Ktyniolo-
jist. Those that he values most are such as he sees in tlie
|\vo stages : so beinj,' enabled to watch the breaking-u]) of
\wQ, the constitution of the other, and the transition inter-
iic(liatc to the two.
Now our own lanf^uaao (the Anglo Saxon being borne
|n mind) comes under the conditions that constitute a good
md sufticient language as a disciplinal foundation in Ety-
iidlogy. // ra/i be studied in Itvo slof/cs. When we come
Id the Times of the (,'onquest we must gird up our loins for
Ijio acquisition of a new Jjanguago.
The breaking -up of the Latin (I speak for the sake of
Illustration and comparison) is a study in itself. It is a
^tiidy complete and sufticient; not, however, more so than
s the study of the J>reaklng-uj> of the Gothic. For in this
stock of Tongues, not only did the Saxon pass into the
Kiiulish, but the Ma^sodothic, the Scandinavian, and the
I'risian , i-ach gave origin t(» some new Tongue; the first to
ho High German, the second to the Languages of Scandi-
navia, and the third to tlic jSIodern Dutch. The study then
if the Languages of the Gothic stock is something more
than a sufticient disciplinal foundation in Etymology. (2)
111 matters of pronunciation, living Languages have an
Icxelusivc advantage. For dead Languages speak but to
ho eye; and it is not through the eye that the ear is to be
linstrncted.
It is well for the Geologist to classify rocks, and to ar-
Irangc strata, to distinguish minerals, and to determine fos-
Isils; but it is far better if, anterior to this, he will study
Itho Powers of Nature, and the Processes that are their ope-
jrations: and these he can only study as ho sees them in
Ithc times wherein he lives, or as he finds them recorded in
lauthontic and undis])utod iiistories. AVith this knowledge
he can criticize, and construct; without it he may invent
and imagine. Novel and ingenious he uiay, perchance, be-
Icome: but he can never be philosophical, and he can never
he Scientific. So it is with the Etymologist. Whenever,
I in a dead Language, he presumes a Process, which he has
looked for in vain in a living one,' he outruns his data.
The basis of Etymology is the study of existing Processes.
Our Ijanguage has had its share; 1 must hasten to the
consideration of our Literature.
The Early Literature of most modern Nations consists of
the same elements ; of Legends concerning their Saints, of
('hronicles, and of llynnis and Romances. Too much of
till;-! fell into the hands of the Monks; and these Avere, too
8
INAIMJIIIAI, r.KCTl'RK.
I
1 1
and l*agan times of our ancestor?,!
often, the pro.saic writcM's of l)arl>uroiis l^atinity; for I'ms
(if not in languafijo at least in idea) was, with tlieni, ll'
rule; and Poetry the cxeeption. Sucli is the j2,eneral elia
raeter of the Karly Modern Literature; in which, however,
our Saxon ancestors were, somewhat (indeed much) nidn
fortunate than their neighboinvs. ]\Ionkish writing was will
theni an inijtortant element; but it was not the only oiif,
They had an originality besides. And the Scandinavian,^
were more fortunate still. The worshippers of Odin am!
Thor had a JlJi/f/io/nf/fj; and jMythologies are the Creator
and Creations of Pocjtry. The Norse ^fythology is as jxw-
tical as tlie (Irecian. 1 speak this advisedly. Now tlii>
Mythology was connnon to all the Gothic Tribes. Tin
Saxon and the Norse Literatures dealt (each in their degrcci
with the same materials; they breathed the same spirit; and
they clothed it in an allied Language. But the Saxon ]\Iy-
thology is fragmentary ; while the Norse IMythology is a
whole. For this reason Scandinavian (or Norse) Literature
is not extraneous to my subject
These, th(^ primeva
must claim and arr(^!-t our attention; since it is from tlusr
that our characteristic modes of Thought (call them (lothic,
or call them Romantic) arc derived, [n the regions of Pa-
ganism lie the dark fountains of our Nationality.
Pesidc this, I consider that, even in the matter of Jjan-
guagc, the direct Scandinavian element of tlie English is
much underrated ; (3) and still more imderrated is the in-
direct Scandinavian element of the Norman-French. And
here, again, when we come to the Conquest, we nmt<t grapple
Avith new dialects, irregular imaginations, and mystical
and mysterious Mythologies; for the things that have a value
in J^anguage, have a value in History also.
Now come, in due order, and in lineal succession, the
formation of our Early English Literature, and the days of
Chaucer; and then those of Spenser: ])eriods necessary to
be illustrated , but which may be illustrated at a future tinio.
And after these the ^Era of Elizabeth, fertile in great men,
and fertile in great poets; so much so, that (the full view
being too extensive) it nuist be contemplated by instalments
and in sections.
There are many reasons for choosing as a subject for
illustration the Dramatic Poets of this Period. They stood
as great men amid a race of great men; so doing, they have
a claim on our attention on the simple s(ditnry grounds of
their own supereminent excellence. But, besides this, they
are, with the exception of their one great representative,
known but
„f Klizabetll
jmany of us I
I tlic Shakspc
mania of thl
(11 ant, biit d|
who knows
1 writings arcl
malignity off
This, \\o^
oitlicr wholl;
it with us a
tlios(! connn(
neglect of P(
antiquarian,
and be our
I errors of Fa
Vet here v
liis compeers
Drama, just
idol, (liffor
ti|.;ht on the
I lio fought it
Editors are ^
[those whom 1
Ics Lamb ; >
more neglecti
[beauties, or
I groat degree
Be there
i eulogies mori
The Eliza
lispre-eminer
It is deeply,
plexion of th
[and much 1
is Shirley.
I The transitic
eays; Wit
tlu'y wore t
I had grown i
1)0 sobered :
[of tlie write
passes into
diato. The.
Hchool of C
IVArcl'R.U, LKC'irilK.
known l)ut impcrfoctly. Too many of us considor the Ag'O
(if l''.li55al>eth as the Ago of vSliakspoarc exclusively. Too
iiiiuiy of us have been luir^kMl by the one-sided partiality of
the Sliakspearian coninientators. 1'liese men , in the mono-
mania of their idolatry, not only elevate their author into a
(iiant, but dwarve down his cotemporaries into pigmies. And
who knows not how (on the moral side of the question) their
writings are tilled even to nauseousness, with t!ie imputed
maiignity of JJen .Jonson V Themselves being most malignant.
This, however, has been, by the labor of a late editor,
oitlicr wholly done away -with, or eonsiderably diluted, lie
it with us a duty, and he it with us a labour of love, to seek
those commentators who have rescued great men from tho
iioglect of Posterity ; and be our sympathies with the diligent
antiquarian, Avho shows that obloquy has originated unjustly;
ami bo our a])probation Mith those who have corrected the
errors of Fame, loosely adojjted, and but lately laid aside.
Vet here we must guard against a reaction. JNIalone, and
liis compeers, valued, or seemed to value, the Elizabethan
Drama, just for the light that it threw up(»n the text of tlunr
idol. GifFord, goaded into scorn by injustice, fought the
tight on the other side, with strength and "with spirit; l)ut
lie fought it like a partizan: reserving (too much, but as
Kditors are wont to do.) his admiration and his eulogy for
those whom he himself edited. Next came Hazlitt and (Char-
les Lamb; who found undiscovered beauties in poets still
more neglected. 1 think, however, that they discovered these
lieauties, or at any rate that they exaggerated them, in a
j^roat degree on account of their being neglected.
lie there here a more (\atholic criticism ! be there here
eulogies more discriminate I l)e there here tastes less exclusive I
The Elizabethan Drama is pre-eminently independent, it
is pre-eminently characteristic, it is also pre-eminently English.
It is deeply, very deeply, imbued, with the colours and com-
[ilexion of the age that gave it origin. It has nuudi Wisdom,
and much Imagination. The last of our Early Dramatists
is Shirley. With him terminates the School of Shakspeare.
The transition hence is sudden and abrupt. Imagination d(^-
lavs; Wit predominates. Amatory })oets write as though
tliey Avore their liearts in their heads. Wit is i)erfected. Jt
had grown out of a degeneracy of Imagination; it w^ill soon
l)e sobered into Sense; Sense the predominant characteristic
of tlie writers under Queen Anne. The school of Dryden
passes into that of Pope, Prior being, as it were, interme-
diate. The A\ra of the (Charleses comprises two Schools; the
pcliool of Cowley, falsely called IMetaphysical , with an ex-
10
INAUO UUAL I.KCTURE.
hi!
i '
i
cess of Fancy, and a deficiency of Taste, and tlio Scliool of
Dry den, whose masculine and fiery intellectuality simulates,
aye! and is, ji;enius. Traf^edy has run retrograde; but Co-
medy is evolving itself towards a separate existence, ami
towards its full perfection. The Spirit of Milton stands apart
from his cotcmporaries; reflecting nothing of its age but its
self-relying energy, moral and intellectual.
Kow, although, the Sehools ofC-dwIey and the Schools of
Dryden, differ essentially from that j)articular- section of the
Elizabethan A'lra, which Ave have just contemplated, they
do not differ, essentially, from anotlier section of that saiiio
lera. Be this borne in mind. There are in Literature, \\u
precipitate transitions. The greatest men, the most original
thinkers, tiie most creative spirits stand loss alone than tho
world is inclined to imagine. Styles of composition, that in
one generation are rife and common , always exist in the
age that went before.
Thev wore not indeed its leadin-j
The
characteristics, but still they were existent within it
metrical IMetaphysics of Cowley were the metrical metaphy-
sics of Donne: the versified Dialectics of Dryden may he
found, with equal condensation but less harmony, in the
Elizabethan writings of Sir John Davics. The section of
one age is the characteristic of the next. This line of cri-
ticism is a fair reason (one out of many) for never overlook-
ing and never underrating obscure composers and obsolete
literature.
The School of Pope, and the School of our own days, arc
too far in the prospective to claim any immediate attention.
And here I feel myself obliged to take leave of a subject,
that continually tempts me to grow excursive.
There are two sorts of lecturers; those that absolutely teach,
and those that stinuilato to learn; those that exhaust their
subject, and those that indicate its bearings; those that in-
fuse into their hearers their own ideas, and those that set
them a-thinking for themselves. For my own part, it is, 1
confess, my aim and ambition to succeed in tho latter rather
than in the former object. To carry such as hear me throuuli
a series of Authors, or through a course of Languages, in
full detail, is evidently, even if it were desirable, an impos-
sibility; but it is no impossibility to direct their attention
to th(3 prominent features of a particular subject, and to in-
stil into them the im])erious necessity of putting forth their
own natural pow-ers in an independent manner, so as to read
for themselves, and to judge for themselves. Noav as 1
would rather see a man's mind active than capacious; and.
as I love Self-reliance better than Learning, I have no more
NOTI'.S.
n
sfinmurK! cxj)CC'tiition, than, that instead of exhausting my
siihjcct I may move yon to exhaust it tor yourselves, may
sharpen crilieism, may indieate orij'inal sources, and, above
all, suggest trains of honest, earnest, patient and persevering
rcHeetion.
N T K 8.
XUTK 1 , p. ('.. !. '21.
Tn ),(• ll
i('l■tiull^S.
itil
iK(l
('!U(1 witli coiihdciice wo imist pruv i:
tliat
'riicri- are tli
ose who
(• Iiavo aiiticipii
toil
lew rcasiiii
for lielii'viiisr that tli
iiitlci.'tioiial t'l(;?iioiits wen; once iiKlcpciKlciit roots: in otlu^r words (or
rntlicr in a formal ('xj)ressi()n) that a ^ivcii case = the root -|- a jircjK)-
sitidu, and that a fi-iven tcnso -- tlic root -f- tin; suhstantivo vorli. Now
liL'lievin;;' tliat, althotigh two forms may lie thiis accounted for, the
third may have a very ditl'crt'nt orijj'in, in other words, drawin;^ a dif-
ference Iietween /t metliod of aecotintin^' for a i-'iven part of speecli,
1 l/ic nu'thod of so doin}>', I lind that the heariii^-s of tlie (dtjection
am
ar(; as follows
The inde))endent words, anterior to their amalj^'amation with the root,
ver as elements in intiection were either, lilve
lid anterior to their
till' jtresent prejiositions and the verli siihstantive , e.\]n)nents of the
relations of Time and Place, or they were, like the present nouns and
veibs, names expressive of ideas: and iiresiimin^' tlu; former to have
been the ease, the old inHectcd fian^'iia^-es may have <rrown out of
Liiiiiiuaffes like our own;
least comi»ara
tivel
and, vice rrrsii, Lanjiuai^es unintiected for at
V sol, like our own, niav <jive rise to intlia'ted ones
like till' Latin: in which case, a Cvcle is estalilislieil ,
am
I the assertion
':oiiee
rninf^' the scipience falls to the ground.
New the assertion concerning the two staj^es ]irofesses to he true only
as far as it goes. 'J'lu; fact that certain nations are even now evolving-
a iiiiliinentary inflection out of a vocahulary of indeiiiMident roots, g-ives
us, as an etymological phenomenon, a third, and an earlier stage of
Language; a stage, however, of which cognizance, out of a work on
Ktyiiiology , would have been HuperHuoiis. The inde|)endent routs , how-
ever, in these Languages coincide, not with the prepositions and the
verbs substantive of (coinparati\ely'i iininfleeti'd Languages, but with
their Nouns and ^'erbs.
To an objector of another sort who should ini(uire ifiu' instance)
where was the Passive \'oice in Knglish, or the J)etiiute Article in
Latin, the answer would be that tlie ipiestioii shewed a misajiprehen-
i<ion of the statement in the text, which is virtually this; not that there
is either in Ihiglish or Latin, res|)ectively, I'assive A'oices, or Detinite
Articles, but that there are iii the two Languages the processes that
evelvc them. It may also be added, that (an apparent truisnO the
•inantity of Processes depends upon the rr/pfiriti/ of the Language. A
dialect consisting (as some do) of about ten-score words can hc/ir but
a pnijiortionate number of Processes. The truth, however, of the state-
12
iNAi (ji UAL i.r.crinr,.
inoiits in fjnostinii (1(>|K'ii<1s niioii tliis: viz. tluit Jill tlic prncosscs tlmrp
oxistiiifj; .'ire tlic proi'csst's tluit exist clscwlit'rc , ••iiid tli.nt nil i)r(>c("*sf's
wliieli, with a ^ivcii incrcuse of liiiiiffiiiif^o miiy at any fiitmt! time
lie (Irvclopcil, uliall c.iiiicido, in kind, witli the iinuM'sscs of olhcr Laii-
<rniii,n's.
It niMv !»(• satisfactoTN' to tlio Author of the I'lini-ipli's of (Jor)lo)ry ir
disco\cr tiiat liis critic
sni
aifiM'ts otlicr scioin-es hcsidcs liis own.
N'ot-
an(
1 I
crrow sansriiinc w
lien I renienilicr that liv no one so well a^
an I'liifrlishiuan can n<!SO ))roecsses he collected. With the exeeption
of the Rnssian (a doiihtfnl exc('])tion) wo come in contact with nioro
Lang'iiafjces than any nation under the Sun. Hero then we ha\o an
advanta<i'e in externals. The details of ICtymoloj^y 1 can wiilin^ly givd
up to the scholars of the Continent; in these they have already reajied
a harvest: hut for tho Principles of Ktyniolo^y, I own to the hope tiiat
it may hi\ the Kn<;lish School that shall he the tirst to bo referred to
and the last to he distrusted. In sketchini^ tJie outline of a system of
Scientilic l']tymolo<;\v , T again horrow u)y analog;ics from Geolojiy. Its
)>rimary divisions Avould he two: Istly, The processes that clianjre tii
form of words, or the /'(irmal processes.
[idh
Th
di
• •liaufje tlieir vwaninfjs , or
the /.
1
irocesses
that
jiiijiriil processes.
Tho lirst of these
would I)(^ based upon the afHnities and interidianpes of soiindn. tho so
cond u])on the affinities and interchanijes wi ideas: tlu; sciences (amongst
others) which they were erected on bein^, respectively, those of Acoust-
ics and Metaphysics; and the dcfj^rees of Iltymolofjical probability
would then coincide with the corn'spondence of the two sorts of pro-
cesses.
Few l^tymolofifiHts liavo any concojition of the enormous influence of
small and common i)rocesses, provided that tho (;xtent of Lanf^uajrc
that they affect be considerable. In the very ^eneralizin<^ classifica-
tion of Langfua<res into ^lonosyllabic, Trilitorai, and I'olysynthetic, I
put no trust; for I can refer (to my own satisfaction at least) the dil'-
ferences that are <i-cnerally attributed to an orijrinal diversity of com-
])osition, to a diversity in the develo]Muent of processes: in other words,
I know of j)rocesses which with a <>'iven de<i-ree of dev(dopment render
the three classes convertible each in the other. With these notions I,
of cour.so, take o.xcejitions to tho Principle of the classification; for 1
deny that the Poini of a Lang'uap:e is, in any ilegree, an essential
characteristic. Tho axiom is not Propter f'ormitni lAnijua est id (iiinrl est,
but Propter elemenlti /jinfjiui est id f/i/otl est. The (piestion concerning'
the Classification in point is analojrous to the ((uestion concerning'' the
Chemical and the Natural-History Classification in Mineralo;j;-y,
NOTIO '->,
1'-
1. T2.
ec-
,s'
Were it not for tho admixture of other ((uestions, the present L
ture mifrht have been entitled 77ie Sn/'/irienc>/ of lite Kn/pis/i /jonijiKUjc ir
II Disiiplinid Sliidj/ in (jrammar iind hltiin:(diii]ii , ir respect ire of the fact oj
its being the native Lonijiiage oj hlnylishnten. The ajipended (pialiticatimi
is in no wis(
iiiciit in Disc
I'oh', a Spani
(iraiiiiiiar from
Laii;4iia;i'es re
fore we can
have acipiirei
withstanding^ the industry, and acumon of continental critics, it may ^ tempt to collc(
be doubted wh(!tlior tho rrinciples of ICtymolou-y (as a Science) havii
not y(!t to be exhibited. 1 use the word e.rhihiled intentionally. 'J'liat
many I',t,\ niologists apphj them I am most certain; where, however, do
we tinil them detaileil in system, or nM'ojj-nised as tests?
We draw too much \\\iii\\ the I'hilolo<rists of (jlerinany; and wlieri!
men draw iiidi^tiiiitely tliiiy trust implicitly. I bidieve that the founda-
tions of i-;tymolopfy are to be laid upon tho stiiily of existiiif;- proci-sscs;
I>angaia>-e , wi
ticc; in otlie
we shall do oi
Kii^laiid, of
|ii.s('i|dinal In
its (ilistracl nu
Of these ab
extent of lirtn;;'
tiif Two Sta;;'e
ill, it is more
tiian it has j-'ci
(iiilv) it is infer
tlic (jiiantity of
(ifcliaiij^e. Co
ra;ii;'c of allie(l
a iliti'erent slu
(lotliic Stock II
Greek ISrantdi
DLsciplinal mei
Let the Lan
sake ; and by
inii;lit think th
and Cicsar, we
tiinial hands th
arc I he told tl
i cidouce for the
I tiou that in tii
instead of bofi-i
iliiig' our studio
look illy' with CO
ai'([uii'eiiients a
I fc.d that tl
in<r. I should
Motion that in a
ostciisihlc admi
I ticipate in the
jllioir so-called
lisni that refers
Aiifrliaii, and !!*
till' extreme Lo'
1 making it (ndi)
uiudilied but n
[ijui'iitly ill the
I Iraees of the gl
I I'assive Michllo
NOTKS.
i;{
i, ill lit) wise ii siijifrllully. Our iiativf Lfiiiffimjji' is tlic licst instrii-
iiiciit in |)i.s('i|iliii;il .Study fsiiiiiily IxTfiust^ it is our initisc oiif; ami a
I'olf, a .Spauianl, or lliiii<fariau i-aii liest lay in tlirir ideas of (ii'iicral
(iiaiiiiiiar tVum tlic s|>ci'iai study of the I'olisli , Spanish, and lliin^'ariau
l,!in^uaji"(;s ri'S|ii'utivt'ly. The very |ial|ialjlo reason for this is tliat, Ix:-
I'liit! we can advantau^coiisly study the System of a Laii;;iiaj;e , we must
lidve aciiuired a eertain (luantity of tiie detail of it. Now, in the at-
tiiiijit to coUuct ideas of (ieniirul (iranunar from tlie study of a Forei;^n
I,an;;iia};e, we shall liml that the Theory will be swamped by the I'rae-
ticc; in other words, that, by attem|)tinj;- to do two thin^i's at once,
\v(! shall do one of them iiadly. McM'cly, then, to liavc; predicated in
llii^iand, of the i;ni;-lish Jjan<;iiaj;i! , that it was a good and suflicient
jiisciplinal Instrument would have been to have remained silent as to
its (ilistrnrt merits as such.
Of these ai)Straet merits the def^'ree depends Up(^n the chronolojiieal
extent of Lxnii'iiajic that we make use ot". To j^et them at their m<i.viiiiiim
the Two Staj;;es must be taken in: and tlu; Two Stafres beinij taken
ill, it is more on a par with the iian^^iia^^'es of Classical Antiijuity,
tiifin it has generally 1)eeu considered to be. Still (considered thus far
(iiilv) it is inferior \o them. For the (Jreidi ami Latin, excecMliiig it in
the ((uantity of original Inllection, have run through an eipial ipiantity
prciiaiitre. Considerine' , however
ran
a (II
IK
)t the Kny'lish onlv, but the whole
ge of allied Languages forming the Gothic Stock, the question takes
tl'erent shape. As a ^lagaziiu; of Processes and Principles, the
(idtliic Stock not only e((uals the Classical, but exceeds, by far, the
(Ireek l.iranch of it. Tla^ Hebrew from its yw^.vtsymbolie form has
Disiiidinal merits of its own.
Let the Languages of (Jreeee and Italy be learned for their own
sake; and by those who have tin- privilege to appreciate them. One
might think that the works of Homer and Demosthenes, of J^ucretius
and Ciesar, were a suflicient reason for turning with diurnal and noc-
turnal hands tiu^ c(ii)ies that exhibit them. ]!ut let us not (as we often
arci lie told that it is necessary to study the Latin or the (jJreek Ac-
lideuce for tlie sake of learning grammar in general. Tlic self-decejt-
tioii that in taking up Latin and Creek we are studying a Cranunar,
instead of beginning a Literature, is too often tlit; excuse for <-on('Iu-
iling our studies just where they might advantageously begin, and for
hiukiug with complacency upon limited aciiuirements just where liinite<l
aii|iiireiiieuts are pre-eminently of little use.
Nun-: 3, p. S, 1. 27.
I tied that the assertion hei'c made requires modifying iind explain-
ing. I should be sorry to be supposed to have made it, under the old
iicitidii that in any written records of the Saxon Ijitorature there is any
Dstuusilile admixture of Danish (/. e. Scandinavian); still less do 1 par-
Iticipate in the belief of the early Gothic Scholars in the existence of
I ilioir so-called Dano-Saxon Dialect. I recognize, moreover, the criti-
lisin that refers the apparent Danish (Scandinavian! element of the Kast-
Anglian, and >iorthumbrian (Glossaries to the original affinity iietweeu
j tile (xtrcune Low' tJerman and the extreme Scandinavian Dialects: thus
1 auikiiig it indivect. It was once my opinion (out; which 1 have sinci;
nidililied but not given up) that in the jtreseut English, and conse-
[iliieiilly ill the IjOw Cicinianic Uranch of the Ciothic Stock, obscure
hiacesof the great Scandinavian characteristics unz. the existtMice of a
assive Middle or Ketlective Voice, and the peculiar exjiressioii of the
w
iNAL(ii;i{Ai. ij:('Ti;uK. noti;s.
fJi'iiHc of tlic Definite Articiei coiild lie discovered: lint it was not ii|i(iii|
tliis ideu tiiat I t'i)iiuiied the asseitioii in the text.
'J"he ([lU'Htion liuH its petrniiar diflieiiities. Words that have lonj,' pas
se<l for Scandinavian , are continnaiiv' lieinj; detecli'd in tlie Saxon: .n.
tiiat tlie l'liilolo;i-ist wiio slionid say l/iis ivunl is Scinn/innritiii timt null
iSn, roil lias tlie difticiilt task of proviiif; a ne^^ative, A},'ain , the piiiiu
is one upon which no sin^jlc )ii!rsoti's assertion siionld he received. liiiJ
stiness of Indnction, in favonr of particular TianijuaseH, when we knowl
these Lan<i:ua<;es (as cvi'ry ljaiif>'na}^'e. indeed as every kind of Kncnv-I
leil^fe, ninst he knowni at the expense of some other, comes upon wA
nneonscionsly. The l>an;riiajrt'^ of tin' (iotliic Stock that I know hcsil
are tho.se of Scandinavia ; the I'rovincial Dialect of lln^land which ||
have most stndied is that of Lincolnshire, and the neinhbonrinfr mari-
time (.'onnti(!S. Mere the preeminence', of the Danish (Scandinavian
element heinji' acknowledi>'e(i , the qnestion is whether it hi? Divvct or /h-I
dhcrt. I am free, to confess that this circumstanci! sharpens my si<,dit
for the perception (trne or false) of direct l>anish idements. As w c(nni|
terbalanco, however, the consciousness of it enp^onders a projiortionatc
self-distrust.
rpon the whole, 1 wouhl rather that the sentence had run thus: Ih
hircvt Sciiniliniirinn rlri/ii'/if in llir Hiinlisli is slid In he dclcvtiiini'il , iimlX
licvi' (as i/i many other places) llwre is iiiic/i (jruiind I'uv the orifjiiial invcs-l
lifiutor.
duties of OV
creatures arc
IN'IKODIKTOKV Li:(Tl KK,
j)i;i.ivi;i!i:i)
AT TllK ^IIDDLKSKX HOSPITAL,
OCTOJiKlt I, |>S47.
1'lioro arc certiiin facts of sucli ])arainoniit iinportanco, that
thoy not only boar, but rcMpiirc, repetition. Tlie common
duties of evcry-day life, and the connnon rules of social po-
licy, arc matters -svliicli no moralist states once for all: on
tli(; contrary, tliey are roitcratotl as often as occasion requi-
res — and occasion requires tliom very often.
Kow it is from the fact of certain medical duties, both
on the part of those who teach and those who learn, bein^
(if this nature, that, with the great schools of this metropo-
lis, every year brings along with it the necessity of an ad-
dress similar to the one which I have, on this day, the ho-
nour of laying before you.
You that come here to learn, come under the pressure of
a cogent responsibility — in some cases of a material, in
')tliors of a moral nature — in all, however, most urgent
and most imperative.
To the public at large — to the vast mass of your fellow-
croaturcs around you — to the multitudinous body of human
beings that sink under illness, or sutler from pain — to tin*
whole of that infinite family^ which has bodily, not unmixed
with mental affliction , for its heritage upon earth — to all who
live, and breathe, and feel, and share with yourselves the
connnon lot of suffering — here, in their whole height and
depth, and length and breadth, are your responsibilities of
one kind. You promise the palliation of human ailment:
hut you break that high [)romise if you act unskilfully. You
call to you all those that are oppressed ; but you may aggra-
vate the misery that you should comfort and relieve. You
lioar with you the outward and visible signs, if not of the
high wisdom that heals, at least of the sagacious care that
16
INTIloDrc'TuKV l.l'C'l I lu:.
iilloviatcs. Less tlijui tlii.s is a stoiu' in tln' plac(; of hrcad
and less tliaii this is poison in the t'onntain-sprin^s of Ikijx'
Not at i>r('S('nt, indccMl, but within a few hricf y.ars it wiln
1)1' so. Shoit as is human lifi', tho jKM'iod for the h'arniiii;
of your proiV'ssion is but a frartion of th<! time that niustl
1m^ spent in tin; practii'o of it. A little \\hil(', and you niavi
ti ;uh \vh('r(! you now learn. Within a It^ss period still, yuii
will praetiso what you arc now taught.
And prai'tie(! must not he he^un Ijcfore you have the fit]
ness that is suflieient f(»r it. (iuard against some of ilic
current I'oninionphu'es of carelessness , and jirocrastinatioii.
Lawyers soniotlines say "that no man knows his professidiu
wln^n h(! bejiins it." And what lawyers say of law, medicM
nuin repeat ai)out physic. Men of that sort of standin;^ in]
medicine which, like tin; respectability of an old error, is
measured by tiin > alone, are i'ondest of talkiu;;' thus; and
men (»f no standin;i' of any soi't are fondt st of bein;^' their!
echoes. It is the current paradox of your practical men, i. v. oi
men who can b(! taught ity practice alone. Clear your heaiUj
of this nonsense. It will make you e^^otists, and it will make
you empirics: it will make you nu'u of onr; idea: it will niakf
you, even when you iancy it would do you just the contrnrv.j
th<^ wildest of speculators. The practice of practical men, in
the way I now use; the words, is a capital plan for makiiii:
anythini;- in the world, save; and except practitioner.*.
Weill this has seemed excursive, but it is not so: it is ;i
reason a<^ainst the j)uttin^' otV of your l<'arnin;;-time. When
vour lirst case comes, xou nmst be as tit I'or it as you arc
rciady tor it.
A difference between old practitioners and bej^inners tlicro
always will be — so lon^- at least as there is value in expe-
rience, and a difference between a<;(' and youth; hut tlii>
ditferenco, which is necessary, nmst be limited as much as
possible, nmst bo cut down to its ])i'oper dimensions, and
nmst by no means whatever be i»crnuttod to exa!j,geratc it-
self into an artificial magnitud(^ If it do so, it is -svorsc
than a simple speculative error, — it is a mischievous delusion:
it engenders a pernicious procrastination, Justifies supineness,
and creates an excuse for the neglect of opportunities: it
wastes time, which is bad, and encourages self-deception,
which is worse.
A difference between old practitioners and beginners there
always will be: but it should consist not so much in the
(|uality of their work as in tlie ease Avith which it is done.
It should be the gain of the practitioner, not the loss of
the patient.
UN I'ln: Nil i»v or Mi'Licisr.
17
Nuw, if I d'u\ tliotio wlioiii 1 liJiNc tlic Ikiuoiu' to adilrc.'ss
jiu injustice! ol' bm)j)osiii}4- tliiit the iiioi'iil roasoii.s tor disi'i-
|liii:il j»n;|iariition, (liiriii};' tlic course' of study now {il)out to
entered iut«t, were thrown awny upon tlieir minds and
jDiiseiiiu'es, I slu)uid l)i' at IHm riy to inai<.i' slioit woriv ottliis
[lilt ot' my ar;;unient, and to di>[tos(^ ol mucli ot" it in a most
Iriet' and .summary manmr. I should b^ !»t liUt-ify to say,
|i hni;;iia^c more phiin and eomidimcntary , a., 1 uiorc^ co^;f'nt
jian |)eisuasiv(' , that you mi/s/ he nj. to your v ^ik wlien
lull bef^in it. It' you 8tund)b' at the ibj shoM, you linve
Irokcn (bjwn tor at'ti'r-litV. A bbnub'r .at the ( Mmmcncomont
taihu'c tor the tinu' to come, l-'urthcrmore; mahi praxis
a niisib-mcanor in tb(! eyes id' the haw, tor whicdi you may
|r>t l)c mulcted by a jtiry, and afterwards be j^ibbcted by
lie press. This fact, which there is no (b'uyin;;', ou^ht to
ic conchisive aj^ainst thi; })reposterous docti in<( wlii(di 1 liave
pcpu.seil: coiu'hisive, however, as it Is, it is one whicii I
lave not chosen to put prominent. Let a better feolin<i,' stand
listcad of it. Honesty is tlu; best policy; but he is not ho-
• st who acts upon that policy only.
Al' this may be true; yet it m;iy be said that the respon-
lihility is prospective. "'Sutticient lor the day is the evil
licrcof.' We'll think .about this when we have ^ot through
l\o. Halls and (.'olleges. Y'ou must give us better reasons
)Y saeriticing- our inclinations to our duty than those of a
\(i\il(t-liijil-fulurum resjauisibility." lie it so: you have still
duty, urgent and ausoluti; — not prospective, but imme-
jiato— not in the distance, with contingent patients, but close
[t Iiand, with the realiti<'s of friend and family — not abroad
ritii the pulilic, but at hoim; with your private circle of i)a-
Icnts, relatives, and guardians. \\\ them you are entrust(ul
[ore with the special, definite, une(|ui vocal , undoubted ob-
^(•t — an object which no ingenuity can refine away, and no
lubtlety can denuir to — of instruction, discipline, preparation.
nu not only conw up here to learn, but you are soil up to
lo .so: and anxious wishes and reasonabh^ hopes accompany
[on. Vou are connnissioned to avail yourself of a time which
Ixperience has shcAvn to be sufficient, and of opportunities
rIhcIi are considered necessary: and there is no exciisc for
foglect.
(ireat as are the 0})portunities, they are not numerous
[uongh to be wasted ; and limited as is the time in the eyes
t those who only know it in its misapplication, it is the p(n'iod
nut a considerable amount of experience has sanctioned as
lair and average time for fair and average abilities, and
la- fair and average industry: not a w//</w///// period nuidc
IS
iNi'itoDfcn'oKv i-i:cTi:PvF..
for iron assiduity on tlio one liand, or for fiery talent on
other, but a poriod adapted to the common ea})acitios of t[|
common mass of inankind — a coinmon-sense time, — a tiJ
too lon^;; or too short o y for the extremes of intellect — U
short for the slowness of confirmed duh)ess, too loiij^ for il
rapid proj^ress of extraordinary and rarely-occurring i^cniii ^
Of this time you are bound to make the most. It is ym
interest to do so ^'or your own sakcs ; it is your duty to
so for the sake of your friends.
You come to the hospital to learn — you come to the li'
spital to learn in the strictest sense of the word. You coiii
to learn medicine, as you would go -r- if instead of pliyv
your profession were the law — to the chambers of a spcci,!
pleader, a common lawyer, or an equity draughtsman. !
this strict sense does your presence here imply study -^
study exclusive, and study without any loss of time, and wittj
out any division of attention. You do not come here
a clergyman goes to the University; but as artists got!
Rome — not to keep terms, but to do work.
I must here guard against th*^ misinterpretation of an ed
pression used a few sentences back. 1 wish to let notliir]|
drop that may encourage the germs of an undue presumptioa
I expressed an opinion — which 1 meant to be a decidfi
one — that the time allowed for your medical studies was in
fair, and sufficient, — so nuich so that if it prove ?V/sufii!iw|
the fault must lie in the neglect of it. Sufficient, howcvi
as it is, it gives no opi)ortunity for any superfluous leisuri
It nmst not be presumed on. You have no odd months, >
weeks, ov days, or even hours, to play with. It is a sufficin
space for you to lay in that knowledge of your profcssid
which the (sxperience and opinion of your examining boaiv
have thought proper to require. 1 believe the amount thus re
quired, to be, like the time granted for the acquisition li
it, a fair amount. But it is not a high one, and it is ikI
right that it should be so. Standards of fitness that arc sij
np for the measure of a body of students so numerous ;ii
those in medicine, rarely err on the side of severity. Tiiol
favour mediocrity; and they ought to favour it. It is satd
and that is all they have a right to look to. AVhat tliel
profess is never very formidable; and what they require
generally less than what is professed. But the time that it
sufficient for this modicum (or minimum) of professional Icani
ing is not the time sufficient for the formation of a pract
tioner of that degree of excellence whicli the competition >
an open profession, like that of medicine, requires as tli]
guarantee of success. An examining board has but one poiil
ft\ I'MK STl 1»V <»F MI'.DICINi;.
19
Lo liink to — it must son that you can ])racti.so with safety to
he public. It iicvor ensures, or professes to ensure, that
.on shall practise with success to yourself, or even that you
i-liiill practise at all. In tlu; eyes of an Examiner, as in those
rf a commissioner of lunacy, there are but two sorts of in-
lli\i(luals; those that can be let loose upon the public, and
Ihosc that cannot. In the (>yes of the ])ublic there is every
[Iciirec of excellence, and every variety of comparative merit
br demerit.
Now as to the way of attaininfj; tliese lii<^-hcr degrees of
[ncrit, and the rewards, moral or material, which they ensure
which follow tliem as truly as satisfaction follows riglit ac-
rions, and as penalties follow wroni;- ones. The opportunity
i\(' have spoken of. It consists in the whole range of means
nid ap[)liances by which we hero, and others elsewhere,
nail ourselves of those diseases that humanity has suffered,
Hid is sntfering, for the sake of alleviating- the misery that
hey seem to ensure for the future. Disease with us is not
riiily an object of direct and immediate relief to the patient
kvii(» (>ndures it, l»ut it is an indirect means of relief to suf-
ferers vet untouched. Out of evil comes good. We make
c helpful to the sound; the dead available to the li-
inn'. Out of pestilence comes healing, and out of the cor-
hiption of death the laws and rule of life. SuH'ering we
liavo, and teaching we have, and neither must be lost upon
run. It is too late to find that these ol)jects, and objects
like them, are repugnant and revolting. These things should
liavo been thought of before. Your <'hoice is now taken, and
|t must be held +o The discovery that learning is unplea-
sant is the discovery ofani'stake in the choice of your pro-
fession; and the sooner you remedy such a mistake the l)etter
the better for yourselves, the better for your friends, the
jf^'ttor for the public, and the better for the profession itself.
Steady work , with fair opportunities — this is what nnikes
M'actitioners. The one without the other is insufficient. There
|s ail expenditure of exertion where your industry outruns
rour materials, and there is a loss of useful facts when oc-
casions for observation are neglected.
.Se(! all you can, and hear all you can. It is not likely
tiiat cases will multiply themselves f(»r your special obser-
ptions, and it is neither the policy n<n' the practice of those
Ivliii are commissioned with your instruction to open their
HKintlis at random.
See all you can. If the case bo a conuiion one, you get
^0 much familiarity with a phenomenon that it will be conti-
2*
20
i\iiuHii(; loiiv i.KcTuni:.
iiually presfnitinj^' itself, [f a rare out', you have soon wliui
you may seUloni .soo a<^ain. 'J'lierc is every reason for takinjj
the practice of the hospital exactly as you liiul it. It ropre-i
seats the diseases of the largest class of mankind — the pooiJ
and, althou;!h in some of tiie details there may be a diftVi'l
once, upon the whole the forms of disease that are the coiiij
monest in hospitals are the couunonest in the world at largi-;
and vice versa. Hence, what you see here is the rule ratliwl
than the exception fur what you will see hereafter. Tlie|
diseases are not only essentially the same, but the propor-
tion which they bear to one another is nearly so. 1 nieiil
tion this, because there is often a tendency to run afterl
rare cases to the neglect of connnon ones; whilst, on tlnj
tither hand, remarkable and instructive forms of disease artj
overlooked, simply because they are thought the curiositicjl
rather than the elements of practice. Vou may carry yourl
neglect of common cases, on the strength of their bein;;!
common, too far. You may know all about catale])sy an
nia\
hydrophobia,, and nothing about itch or measles. You
find that, of the two parties concerned, the patient and your
self, it is the former that knows the most about his com-
plaint. You may live to have your diagnosis corrected liv I
the porter, your prognosis criticised by the nurse. On tli ^
other hand, by missing single instances of rare disease, yn:
may miss the opportunity of being able to refer to your iiic
mory rather than to your library.
I have given you reasons against being afraid of over-ob
servation, and against the jjornicious habit of noglectiiiL
this case because it is connnon, and that because it is rare-
a common excuse for neglecting a// diseases, and a po})ulai
reason for doing so. Mcdicus sum, nihil in re medico a m\
alienum pulu^ <k^. Some minds, indeed, are so constituteiij
that they can make nmch, very much, out of single cascsj
out of solitary specimens of diseases. The power of minutcj
analysis is the characteristic of this sort of observation. li|
is just possible so to seize upon the true conditions of a dis-
ease, as to satisfy yourself, once for all, of its real perma-i
nent attribute — of its essence, if 1 may so express myselt
And this being seen, you may, for certain purposes, liav
seen enough ; seen it at one glance ; seen it at a single view]
as well as others see it at a hundred. I say that certainj
minds are thus constituted ; but they are rarely the miiidJ
of many men in a single generation, and never the miiul>|
of beginners. 13eforo this power is attaiiuMl your observationj
must be disciplined into the accuracy and the rapidity ofaii]
instinct; and to this power of observation — attainable niih
ox Tin: sirDV oi- Micnrcixr:.
)v lons^ prnotico, and nfto.r lono; practieo — a liigli power of
fc'riectiou must be superadded.
Xo pucli power must be presumed on. If the student de-
liiilc liimself, the disease will undeceive him. The best
[iractitiouers, in tlie lon<^' run. are those Avliose memory is
Jtnrod with the greatest number of indiN'idual cases — indivi-
llnal cases well observed, and decently classified. It is cur-
Mitlv stated that the ])eculiar power of the late 8ir Astlcy
["onper was a ])0wer of memory of this sort, and I presume
\]\!\i no better instance of its value need be adduced. Now
memory for cases implies the existence of cases to re-
Inoniher; and before you arrange them in the storehouse of
!\our thoughts you must have seen and considered; must have
iisod both your seiises and your understanding; must have
loen. touched, ami handled with the one, and must have
Mndorstood and reflected witli the other.
I ain talking of these things as they exist in disciplined
intellects, and in retentive memories; and, perhaps, it may
11)0 objected that I am talking of things that form the ex-
Iception rather than the rule; that I am measuring the power
lof common men by those of extraordinary instances. 1 weigh
juiv words, when I deliberately assert, that such, although
])nrtinlly the case, is not so altogether; and that it is far less
ilio case than is commonlv imaf-ined. In most of those in-
stances whore avc lose the advantage of prior experience,
hy omitting the application oj' our knowledge of a pi'cvious
similar case, the faidt is less in the laxity of memory than
[in the original incompleteness of the observation. Observe
iclnsely, and ponder well, and the memory may take care
if itself. Like a well-applied nick-name, a Avell-made ob-
jsorvation will stick to you — whether you look after it or ne-
;:lo('t it. The best way to learn to swim is to try to sink,
and it is so because floatation, like mennu'y, is natural if
yiiu set a])out it rightly. L-^i those who distrust their re-
niond)rance once observe closely, and then forget if they can.
Ther(> are good reasons for cultivating this habit at all
times, but there are especial reasons whv those who are on
the threshold of their profession should more particularly
cultivate it. Not because you have much to learn — we have
all that — nor yet because you have the privilege of great
opportunities — we have all that also — nmst you watch , and
rotloct, and arrange, and remember. Your time of life
S'ives you an advantage. The age of the generality of you
is an age when fresh facts are best seized: and best sei/.ed
hecansc they are fredi. Wlutlu'r you are prepared to un-
derstand their whole import, as you may do at some future
22
IXTRftDI*! roliV LKCTlur..
! i
i !
li
period, is doubtful. It is c(3rtain tlint tlio effect of their no-
velty is to impress them more eogently on your reeolleetioii,
And this is praetiee — practice; in the j^ood sense of tlK[
term, and in a sense ^vlJich induces mo to guard against thej
misconstruction of a previous application of it. A few .soiij
tonces back 1 used tin; phrases prdvtical men, adding- thai
those so called weu men who could be taught l»y practitd
only. I confess that this mode of expression Avas dispamj
ging. For the purpose to -which it was applied it was mcantl
to be so. It is a term you must be on your guard against.
Praclice is so good a thing of itself that its name and ajjpoll
lation are applied to many bad things. Slovenliness is jdiic-
tice, if it suits the purpose of any one to call it so; con-
tempt for reading is practice; and bleeding on all occasions!
Avhen you omit to purge is |)ractice; — and bad practice ton
Be on your guard against this: but do not be on your guaii
against another sort of practice: the practice of men avIioI
first ol)serve, and then reflect, and then generalise, and tlim
reduce to a habit their results. This is the true light for yim|
to follow, and in this sense practice is not only a safe guid'
but the safe guide. It is experience, or, if you choose al
more })hilosopliic term, induction. Theoretical men can bi|
taught by this, and the wisest theories are taught by it.
When I said that practical men wore taught by practito
only, I never implied that they were the only men that prac-
tice could teach. Experience makes fools wise; but fools arc
not the only persons who can profit by experience.
See and hear — the senses must administer to the under-
standing. Eye, and ear, and finger — exercise these that
they may bring in learning.
See and hear — the senses must administer to their own
improvement. Eye, and ear, and finger — exercise these,
that they may better themselves as instruments. The knoAv-
ledgc! is much , but the discipline is more. The knoAvledgc
is the fruit that is stored, but the discipline is the tree that
yields. The one is the care that keeps, the other the cul-
tivation that supplies.
The habit of accurate observation is l)y no means so dif-
licult as is darkly signiiied by logicians, nor yet go easy
as is vainly fancied by empirics. It is the duty of those
Avho teach you to indicate the medium.
Tlic tenor of some of my observations runs a risk of mis-
reprcsentation. It has I'cen limitr'd. It has spoken of cases
as if there was nothing in the Avhole range of medical study
but cases; and of observation, as if the faculties of a me-
dical man Averc to take a monomaniac form, and to run upon
Ihe illustration
O.N 'J'HK SltDY Ol' AIKIMCINK.
23
)serv.'itiori only; of hospitals, as if tlioy consisted of beds
iti ])atients alone; and of clinical medicine and of clinical
rgfiy, as if tlievcj was no such a paramount subject as phy-
jlduy. and no such important subsidiary studies as chemistry
[id botany. It is all hospital and no school — all wards and no
jusc'um —all sickness and no health. This has been the lino
lat 1 have run on; and I feel that it may be imputed to mo
hat I liave run on it too long and too exclusively. Whether
untlcrvalue the acquisition of those branches of knowledge
lliic'li are collateral and subordinate to medicine, rather than
clcinonts of medicine itself — which are the apju'oaches to
po temphi rather than the innormosst shrine — will be seen in
lie t^C'cjuel. At present 1 only vindicate the prominence which
jiis been given to clinical observation, by insisting upon the
liburdinate character of everything that is taught away from
lie bed, and beyond the sensible limits of disease. No single
libjeet thus taught is tin; direct and ])rimary object of your
(arning. The art of healing is so. Y(i ■ learn other things
liat you may understand this; and in hu itals at least you
Lara tliem Avith that \lew exclusively, i you Avish to be
physiologist, chemist, or botanist, irrespectivelv of the
liedical application of the sciences of physiology, chemistry,
Ind botany, there are better schools than the MidtUesex llos-
lital, or, indeed, than any hospital Avhatever. There they
ay be studied as nu\theniatics are studied at Cambridge,
r as classics at Eton — simply for their own great and in-
creiit values. But here you study them differently , that is,
^ mathematics are taught at a military college, or as clas-
ics are taught at the College of Preceptors, for a specific
mpose, and Avith a limited vicAv — Avith a view limited to
he illustration of disease, and Avith the s|)ecific ])urpose of
endering them indirect agents in therapeutics. If you could
ontrive the cure of disease Avithout a knowledge of morl:>id
rocesses, it Avould bo a Avaste of time to trouble yourself
ivith pathology; or if you could bottom the phenomena of
'lliseased action Avithout a kiinwlcdge of the actions of health,
jhysiology would be but a noble science for philosophers,
r if you could build up a system of physiology , dotermin-
nn; the functions of organs and the susceptibilities of tis-
iies, inde})endent of the anatomy^ of those organs and those
issues, scalpels Avould be as irrelevant to you as telescopes;
ind if these three sciences received no elucidation from che-
mistry, and botany, and physics, then Avould chemistry, and
lotany and physics, have the value — neither more nor less —
f the art of criticism or of the binomial theorem. What
Jyoii arc taught in the schools is taught to you, not because it
!l
21
lNTRnT)r('I'OKV I.Kf'l I lil".
is ■worth knowing;- — for Latin, and Gvock, and Mathcniatk}
are worth knowing' — but becanso, bcloro patients can \\
cured, thoy are necessary to be learned.
And, in order to be taught at all, they must be ti\\\<:\\
systematically. It is an easy matter to ask for a certaii
amount of these two collateral sciences — to pick and cho(J
just the parts wanted for use, to require just that 7n<)(Hni'
"of botany which illustrates the PharmacopaMa, and just tlm-
fraoincnts of chemistry that )nake prescriptions safe, :ii
urine intelligible. It is easy, I say, to ask for all this: li
the art of thus teachin<^ per sn//nfn has yet to be discovcvi
The -svhole is more mana.f^eable than the half. AVhat it in;
bo with others is more than 1 can tell; l)ut, for my dv, ?
particular teaching, 1 would sooner take tlie dullest boy iVi:-
the worst school, and start him in a sul)ject at the ri-!
end, than begin at the wrong end with the cleverest priz
man that ever flattered parent or gratifi<Hl instructor. I'liil
of botany and crumbs of jjiemistry are less digestible tlia;|i
Avliole courses. ^
Thus much for those studies tliat make your therapentitl
rational. Some few have spoken slightly of thoni — as kSyf
denham, in the fulness of his knowledge of symptoms, spoKfj
slightingly of anatomy, or as a Greek sculptor, familiar wi
the naked figure, might dispense with dissection. They ai'.
necessary, nevertheless, for the groundwork of your pracl
tice. They must serve to underpin your observations.
And now we may ask, whether, Avhen a medical educatiorj
has been gone through, you have collected from it, (ncrl
and above your professional sufficiency, any secondary ail
vantages of that kind which are attributed to education itsoli|
taken in the abstract? Whether your knowledge is of tli'
soi't that elevates , and Avhether your training is of the kir,il|
that strengthens?
Upon the whole, you may be satisfied with the reflex ac]
tion of your professional on your generfol education — that h.\
if you take a practical and not an ideal standard. It wil!
do for you, in this way, as much as legal studies do fori
the barrister, and as much as theological reading does fori
the clergyman; and perhaps in those points not common to tli
three professions medicine has the advantage. Its chemistn,
which I would willingly see more mixed with physics, cavi
ries }0U to the threshold of the exact sciences. Its botany
is pre-eminently disciplinal to the faculty of classification:!
indeed,, for the natural-history sciences altogether, a medifall
education is almost necessary. Clear ideas in physIo'i'[;^(
are got at only through an exercised power of abstraction!
ox THK sriKV OF MKldClN'i:.
25
iinil iionoralizalion. The plionoincna of insanity can 1)0 ap-
jpreciatod only -when the general ])lipnoinona of healthy men-
tal function arc understood, and when the normal actions
of the mind are lof^ically analyzed. Such is medical educa-
tion as an instrument of self-culture: and as education stands
at present, a man Avho has made the most of them may
walk amon^ the learned men of the Avorld with a bold and
coiitidinfi- front.
I insist upon thus nmch justice beinp^ done to the intel-
lectual character of my profession — viz. that it V)e measured
1)V a practical, and not an ideal, standard. Too nmch of
tlio spirit of exapf^eration is abroad — of that sort of exajz,-
gcration which makes men see in the requisites for their own
proi'ession the requisites for half-a-dozen others — of that sort
of exa^i'^'cration Avhich made Vitruvius , himself an architect,
prove elaborately that before a man could take a trowel in
liis hand ho must have a knowledp;e of all the sciences and
a habit of all the virtues. Undoubtedly it Avould elevate
niodieine for every mend)er in the profession to know much
more than is required of him — yet this is no reason for our
requirinfi' much more than wo do. Such a notion can be
ontortained only through a confusion of duty on the part of
those who direct medicine. Their business is the public safety ;
and the position of their profession is their business onl;/
so far as it affects this. Trusts arc intended for the benefit
of any one rather than the trustee.
Two objections lie against the recommendation of extra-
iioons branches of learning in medicine: in the first place,
hy insisting upon them as elements of a special course of
instruction, they are, by implication, excluded from a ge-
neral one; in the second place, they arc no part of a three
years' training.
(Vmcentratc your attention on the essentials. I am quite
satisfied that as far as the merits or demerits of an education
contribute to the position of a profession , we may take ours
as we find it, and yet hold our own. Nevertheless, lest the
position given to medicine by its pre-eminent ])rominence, in
conjunction with the cliurch and bar, as one of the so-called
learned professions, should encourage the idea that a mul-
tiplicity' of accomplishments should be the character of a full
and perfect medical j)ractitioner, one or two important r(^a-
lities in resj)ect to our position should be indicated. \\q
are at a disadvantage as compared with both the church and
the bar. AVe have nothing to set against sutdi great political
prizes as chancellorships and archbishoprics. AVe are at
this disf.dvan+age; and, in a country like England, it is
26
iN'inom'{ roiiY ij:ctithi:.
a great one: so that what y\o gain by tlic connection, in tlio
eyes of the |)n1)lic, is more than what we give; and the con-
nection is itself aitificial, and, as such, dissoluble. It is
best to look the truth in the face — we must stand or fall hy
our own utility.
Proud t(» l»«' useful — scovniu*^ to he niore
— must be the motto of him Avhose integrity should be on a
level with his skill, who should win a double conlidenco, and
who, if he do his duty well, is as sure of his proper influence
in society, and on society — and that influence a noble one —
as if he were the member of a profession ensured to respecta-
bility by all the favours that influence can extort, and all
the prerogatives that time can accumulate. As compared
with that of the church and bar, our hold upon the public is
by a thread — but it is the thread of life.
Such are the responsibilities, the op])ortunities, and tlio
prospects, of those who are now about to prepare themsel-
ves for their future career. AVe who teach have our res])on-
sibilities also; we know them; Ave are teaching where Ikll
taught before us; we are teaching where ground has been
lost; yet we are also teaching with good hopes, founded
upon improved auguries.
A LECTUK'I
ON THE sTi i)v OF lan(uia(;e as a
BKAN(;n OF EI)l(JAlION.
A LKCTUKI': DJOLIVHliEl) A'l' TIIH K'OVAL IXSTITL'TION
OF (iUKAT liJ{I'l'AlN.
MAV 13, I8J4.
The .subject I have the honour of ilhi.strating is The Im-
jjiortaiico ot" the Study of Language as a means of Education
Itbr all (Classes,
1 o})en it by drawing a distinction.
A little consideration will show that that difference be-
tween the study of a given subject in its general and abstract,
land the study of one in its applied or concrete, form, which
llinds ])lace in so many departments of human knowledge,
llinds place in respect to Language and Languages. It finds
|])lnc'C in the subject before us as truly as it does in that
jseiencc, which one of my able successors will have the ho-
jnour of illustrating, — the science of the laws of Life — Phy-
Isiology or Biology. Just as there is, therein, a certain series
lof laws relating to life and organization, which would com-
Imand our attention, if the whole animal and vegetable world
[consisted of iDut a single species , so the study of Speech
Iwoiild find place in a Avell-devised system of education, even
[if the tongues of the whole wide world were reduced to a
[single language, and that language to a single dialect. This
lis because the science of life is one thing, the science of
[the forms under which the })honomena of life are manifested,
[another. And just as Physiology, or Biology, is, more or
[less, anterior to and independent of such departments of study
jas I'otany and Zoology, so, in the subject under notice, there
lis the double division of the study of LaiujiuKje in respect to
structure and development, and the study of Langnafjes as in-
stances of the variety of form in Avhicli the phenomenon of
Ihmnan speech exhibits, or has exhibited, itself. Thus —
When (as I believe once to have been the case) there was
28
ON iiir: sri'Dv <»i' f.ANOfAfii;.
but n sinfjlo laiif-ungo on tlio face of tlm onrtli, tlic foriiKrl
of tlu'sc, divisions liad its sul)j('('t-inattor. And —
^^'ll('n (as is by no nifans iMi|irobnbl(') on(> paramonnt an!
cxclnsivo t<»n;:n(', dcvclojicd. at Hrst, rapidly and at the n-
pf-nso of tlic smaller lan;;na^'r's of tin; world, and, suhst;.
qucntly, slowly anfl at that of tlio innr(> wicbdy-diiVusod oiie;i,[
shall have roplacod tlif still nunnTous ton^nos of tho niiv-l
toontli contniy; and whon all tin; dialocts of tlu; world sIimI!
be nior;;,od into ono Universal Lnn^nafjo, tin; sanii^ snlijctt-l
matter for tho study of tho structuro of Lan<i^nago, its <^'rowtli[
and chaniios, Avill still exist.
So that tho Klady of Language is one thing, the study oil
Languages , another.
They are different; and the int(dlectual powers that tliiyi
require and exercise are ditferent also. The; greatest cdin-
i)arative ])hilologists have, genei'ally, beai but modonitcj
lingiusts.
A certain familiarity with different languages they havi
of course, liad ; and as compared with that of the spedalj
scdiolar — tho Classic or the ( )ri(Mitalist, for instance — tli-rj
range of language (so to say) has been a, wide one; h'lt i'l
has rarely been of that vast compass whicdi is found in nifij
after the fashion of ^NFezzofanti, i^e. — men who have spokenl
languages by the dozen, or the score; — but who haAc loft
comparative philology as little advanced as if their learning
had been bounded by the limits of their own mother tonguo,
Now this difference, always of more or less importance* inl
itself, increases when Ave consider Language as an object
of education; and it is for the sake of illu^t/ating it that |
the foregoing preliminaries have been introduced. No epij
ni(ui is given as to the comparative rank or dignity of tin
two studies; no decision ujion tho nobility or ignobility ct
the faculties involved in the attainment of excellence in eitlu r
The illustration of a difference is all that has been aiinoil
at. There is a difference between the two classes of sub-|
jects, and a difference between the two kir.ds of mental fa-
culties. Let us make this difference clear. Let us also glvc|
it prominence and importance.
One main distinction between the study of Langiuige and I
the study of Languages lies in the fact of the value of the
former being consfa?it, that of the latter, lh(ctualin(i. The re-|
lative importance of any two languages, as objects of spe-
cial attention, scarcely ever remains steady. The value, for|
instance, of tho German — to look amongst the cotemporavv
forms of speech — has notably risen within the present (cn-
tury. And why? Because the literature in which it is cm-
Greece and K
"N 1111:: SlIHY i!l' LAN(.iL'A<;i:.
2P
lie foniifrl
rioiint ;in<!
lit tll(> C\.
(1, suhst.j
isod Olios,
tlio iiiiif..
oriel slinll
i> subject-l
:ts growtlil
study of|
that tli(yi
t(,'.St coil].
iiiodora!
ley li,'i\>,
o sp(>c;,r
CO — tl-
e; l>"t. /
d in liii,
spokrr
ll<1^ I( t;
' 1 earn ill::
r toniruf.
rtari('(> in
an oljjcot
ig- it thai
No o]ii-
ty of the
ability of
in eitlier.
3n {\\mPi\
i of siiii-
lontal fa-
also ,^ivi'
lag'o and
le of the
The re-
> of spc-
alue, for
smporavy
!oiit cen-
it is em-
liotlii'd lias inipru\(;d. J>ecaii.s(j the iscii'iititic kiioulcd;^*! whiidi
lio all w ho want thu key , is (so to sayj locked up in it, luib
iiKi'i'ascid some hundred per cc^ut.
15ut it may go down again. Suppose, for instance, that
jiiuw writers of pre-eminent merit, eniiobhi some of the mi-
liior languages of Europe — the Danish, Swedish, Dutch, (&.c.
ISiK'li a fact would divide the attention of surans — attention
Iwhicli can only be bestowed upon some second, at the ex-
liK'iiije ol' some first, object. In such a ease, the extent to
jwiiich the German language got studit.'d would be affcfcted
jiiiucli in the' same way as that of the French lias been by
Itlic (levelo[tment of the literature of (jerniany.
Or the area over whi(di a language is s[)okeii may increase;
las it may, also, diminish.
Or the number of indivitluals that speak it may niultipiy —
|lhi' area being the same.
; Or the s])ecial application of the language, whether for the
]iiir[ioses of commerce, literature, science, or politics, may
linoiiie changed. In this way, as well as in others, tlie
IJiglish is becoming, day by day, more important.
There are other inHuenees.
; High as is the value of the great classical languages of
(ircoce and Kome, we can easily conceive how that value
I mi;^lit be enhanced. Let a manuscript containing the Avorks
|uf some of the lost, or imperfectly preserved, writers of an-
tiquity be discovered. Let, for instance, (iibbon's desitlerala —
the lost !>icads uf Livij , the Oriilions of J/yperides, or the Dra-
iiHis of Mcnander — be made good. The per-centage of classi-
cal scholars would increase; little or nnich.
Some years back it was announced that the Armenian
i language contained translations, made during the earlier
centuries of our era, of certain classical writings, of which
[the originals had been lost — lost in the interval. This did
not exactly make the Armenian, with its alphabet of six-
aiid-tliirty letters, a popular tongue; but it made it, by a
liaction, more popular than it was in the days of Winston
and La Croze, when those two alone, of all the learned men
tit' Europe, could read it.
Translations tell in another way. A\'liatever is Avorth read-
ing in the Danish and SAvedish is forthwith translated into
(ieriiian. E. g. Professor lietzius of Stockholm wrote a good
Manual of Anatomy. He had the satisfaction of seeing it
translated into German. He had the further satisfaction of
hearing that the translation ran through five editions in less
time than the original did through one.
Now, if the (Jermans were to leave off translating the
30
its iiii: siiDv (tr i.ANtii A<ii;
N i
value c»l' tli(! lnn;^nia;4e in wliicli I'rofcsHor Uotziiis wrutu lij
Anatomy would riso.
Upon tli(! whole, the French is, ])(M-ha))s , thr; most iin|)(ii|
taut lan<;ua^(! ot" the nineteenth century; yet it is only wlici,
W(! take into consideration the; whoh; ot its eh incuts of val
luo. To certain special stn'UHs, tin; (Jorman is worth nmrtl
to tho airtist, the Italian; to tin; Annrican, the Spanish. iJ
tell, too, in valn(! wIkmi nations like our (»wn insisted upoil
tli(3 use (d' their native ten^ues in diphnnacy. It fell in valiid
becauso it became h^ss indispciisabh! ; and another cans
now in operation, aflects the same clemimt of indispensaliil
lity. Th(! French are l)c;^innin<;' to h^arn tho lan^ua^-es m
other nations. Their own literature will certainly be noiif
th(! worse for their so doin^\ Ikit it by no nutans follow-
that tiiat literature will be any the nH)ro studied. On tl
eontrary, Frentdnnen will Kjarn English nmrcs and, jtro hinh
KnglishnuiU learn French less.
\i all this liavc illustrated a ditftu'ence, it nniy also li;i\ [
done something more;. It may have given a rough sketch, ii j
the way of dassitication, of the kind of facts that reguhit
the value of special languages as special objects of study, k
any rate (and this is the main pomt), the subject-matter (ii|
the present Address is narrowed. It is narrowed (in the liisi
instance at least) to the consideration of that branch of studvi
Whereof the value is constant; for assuredly it is this wliicli|
will connnand more than a, moiety of our consideration.
This may bc^ said to imply a preference to th(i study
Language tis opposed to that of Languages — a si/i//itlttr \n-{!\
fcrencc, as a grannnarian may, perhaps, be allowed to call it.
It cannot be denied that, to a certain extent, such is tin
case; but it is only so to a certain extent. The one is iiotl
magnitied at the expense of the other. A\'hen all has bof'ii|
said that logic or mental philosophy can say about the lii,<;li
value of comparative philology, general grannnar, and tin'
like, the lowest value of the least important language will
still stand higli, and pre-eminently higb that of what niav
be called the noh/e Languages. ISo variations in the philo-
logical barometer, no fluctuations in tlie Exchange of Lan-
guage, will ever bring down the advantage of studying one,
two, or even more foreign languages to so low a level as
to expel such tongues as the Latin, the Greek, the Frenoli. I
or tho German, one and all, from an English currictdum — \
and lire versa, English from a foreign one.
Now, if this be the case, one of the elements in tho va-
lue of the aliKhj of Lamjuage in (jencral Avill be the extent
to which it facilitates the acquirement of any one languagt'
(»N Tin; sii;i»Y (H* i,an(ii!A(iE.
ni
Jilllc] riool Is our own i'ln^disli
ill iiiii-tic'ulrti', and tl.. cK-nu-nt of vjilun will lio nn iniimr-
taiit - tiiunj;!! not tlio most ii>:|)ortant — one.
Tlio stnuturo of tlio human body i.s worth knowing', (>V('n
if thi! inv('Hti;;at()i* of it be neither a ))rai'litioner in medicine
nor a teaeher of anatomy; and. in liU(i manner, the btrue-
tnre of lh(! human lan<;ua>>e is an imi)ortant study iiresnec-
tive (»f tho partieuhir forms of speech whereof it nuiy taci-
htat(! tlio ac((uirenient.
Tlie words on th(! dia;;ram-ljoard Avill now be ex[)lainod.
Tliey aro meant tn illustrate the cbiss of facts that compa-
rative! philoh)<;y supplies.
The first runs —
Klein : f'lrtin :: Prtil : Pclilus.
It shows tlio extent to wliich certain ideas aro associated.
It sliiiws, too, sometliinf? more; it shows that such an asso-
ciation is capable of Ixiing demonstrated from the phen(»m(!na
of language instead of bein^ a mere u priori speculation on
tlie part of tho nu'ntal philoso])her.
h'Irin is the (jlerman f(»r
ailjective, the English of the l^atin word /niintlits. In (Jer
man the word is rein.
Now, notwithstanding the difference of meaniiig in the
two tongues, dean and /,h'iH aro one and the same word.
Vet, how are the ideas ol clcdnlincaa and lilllnii'ss connected?
Tlic (ireek language has the word /u/pocoris/na , meaning a
knii of oukarment , and tlu^ adjective hypocorinlir. Now,
clfdii-ncss, or mud-ncss, is one of the elements that mak(!
Iiijljocorisfic terms (or terms of endearment) ap])licable. And
so is smtf/lnt'ss. Wc talk of pri'ffi/ lillle ffcurs, a thousand
times, where wo talk o^ prcKij bin denrs once. This, then,
explains the connexion; this tells us that clean in English
is kk'in in German, word for word.
Vou doubt it, perhaps. You shake your head, and say,
tiiat the connexion seems somewhat indefinite; that it is just
one of those points wliich can neither hv. proved nor dis-
proved, lie it so. Tho evidence can 1)e amended. Observe
the words pclil and pclilus. PctU (in French) is exactly what
Ucin is in German, i. c, lillle. J'cliliis (in Latin) is very
nearly what clean is in English, /. c, desircf/ , or f/esirahle.
That pclil comes from pclilus is undeniable.
Hence, where tho German mode of thought connects the
ideas of smullness and cleanness, the Latin connects those of
mallncs and (Icsiralulilt/; so that as pclil is to pclilus, so is
klcin to clean. In the diagram this is given in the formula
of a sum in the Rule of Three,
I I
32
ON' Tin: sTi;i)V or i.anoiaci:.
The words just noticed explain the connexion of ideas in
the case of separate words. The forthcoming help us in u
much more difficult investij^ation. What is the import of
such sounds as that of the letter s in the word father-*'? It
is the sign of the plural number.
Such is the qrestion — such tluj answer ; question and answer
connected in the word /'afhcrs solely for the sake of illiis-
tratidu. Any other word, and any other sign of cast;, num-
ber, person, or tense, vvould have done as well.
liut /i' the answer a real onoV Is it an answer at aH?
llow come such things as plural numbers, and signs ofj
plural numbers, into language? llcjw the particular plural i
before us came into Ijcing, I (^annot say; but 1 can show
how some plurals have. Let us explain tlie fidlowing —
Nyi rz=z J. Nyi-u-de ==; trr.
Ngu z=z i/iou. Nyo-n-da = i/e.
NijH =~ lie. N(/r - n - da ::;= Ihey.
J la z=i mill.
Me -cam := mc.
The da (or dc) in the second colunm, is the sign of the plu-
ral number in a language which shall at present be naiiie-j
less. It is also the preposition willi. Kow tvHh denotes
associaltdn ; association pluralilij. Hence
Ngi-n-dc = I + == 'i'<?.
Ngit - n - da = thou + = y^-
Ngr - n - da = he + =zt. they.
This is just as if the Latins, instead of nos and vos, said
me-cnm and Ic-cum.
Such is the history of one mode of expressing the idea
of plurality ; Ave can scarcely say oi i\, plural number. Tlir
words ijlaral number suggest the idea of a single word, lik'
fathers, where the s is inseparably connected Avith the root;
at least so far inseparably connected as to have no iiulo-
pendent existence of its own, ygi-n-de, however, i^, no
single word at all, but a pair of words in juxta-positioii.
each -with a separate existence of its own. But what if tliif
juxta-position grow into amalgamation ; What if the form in
da change? What if it become / or r, or ///, or a'? Wliat
if, meanwhile, the separate pre})Osition da change in form
also; in form or meaning, or, perhaps, in both? In stitli
a case a true plural form is evolved, the history of its evti-
lution being a mystery.
So nmch for one of the inflecti(,»ns of a noun. The remain
ing words illustrate one of a verb.
ON" I'liK sirnv or r.AMir.voi:.
33
llundrccls of f!:rfiuiniari!ins liave siip'gf stcd tlmt the signs
lit' tlif persons in tho verb niight bo neitbor more nor less
Itlian tbe jxTSonal pronouns (ipjieiideil, in tbe first instance,
■to the verb, but, afterwards amalgamated or ineorporated
JAvith it. If so, tho -m in inqua-m , is the m in w^', i^c. The
jlate J\Ir. (iarnett, a comparative philologist whose reputation
lis far below his merits, saw that this was not exactly the
Ifase. He observed that the appended pronoun was not so
liiiuch the Personal as the Possessive one: that the analysis of
la -tvord like inqva-m was not so much, stiij -\- /, as saying +
ymij; in short, that tho verb was a norm, and the pronoun
{either an adjective (like mens) or an oblique case (like 7nei)^
lagreeing with, or governed by, it.
I It is eerlainly so in tlie words before you. In a language,
Iwliicli, at present, shall be nameless, instead of saying tny
Xapple, thy apple, they say what is equivalent to applc-m,
\iiliple-lh^ &c. ; /. e., tliey append the possessive ])ronoun to the
huhstantive, and by modifying its form, partially incorporate
lor amalgamate it. They do more than this. They do (as the
jdiagram shows us) precisely the same with the verbs in their
\l)ersonal, as they do with the nouns in their possessive, relations,
riionce, olvas-om , &q., is less I read than ?ny-readiug ; less
\read + 1 ■, than reading + my.
! remain-
Olvns — om =
1.
om
I read.
reading - my.
od
thou readesl.
reading - t/iy.
uh
?ve read.
reading - our.
atok
ye read.
2,
reading -you/
m
my apple.
apple -my.
d
l/iy apple.
apple - lliy.
nk
our a}t])le.
apple - our.
tok
:
your apple.
apjde -your.
Almd-
1 submit, that facts of this kind are of some value, great
I or Rinall. But the facts themselves are not all. How were
tluy got atV Tliey were got at by dealing with the pheno-
' niona of language as we found them, by an induction of no
ordinary width and compass; for many forins of speech had
I to he investigated before the facts camo out in their best
and most satisfactory form.
The illustrati<m of tiu- verb {olvasnm , and abndm , &.c.) is
from the Hungarian; that of the plural number [nyinde, &(.'.),
from the Tumali— tlic Tumali being a language no nearer
3
34
ON THK STUDY OV LAKGUAGE.
than tlio nop,ro districts to tlio soiilli of Kordovnn, bctwopn
Scnna.'ir and Dart'ur, and (as sucdi) not exar<-ly in tlic Iiigli-
way of literature and philoloj^y.
Now I ask Avlietli(!r there be, or whether there be not, cer-
tain branches of inquiry which are, at one and the sanio
time, recognised to bo of tlie hi^j^hest importance, and yet
not very remarkable for cither unanimity of opinion, preii-
sion of language, or distinctness of idea on the part of thoir
professors. 1 ask whether what is called, with average
clearness. Mental riiilosophy, and, with somewhat less clear-
ness, j\[etaphysics, be not in this predicament V 1 ask whetiior,
in this branch of investigation, the subject-matter do not euii-
nently desiderate something definite, palpable, and objective,
and whether these same desiderated tangibilities be not foinil
in the Avide field of Language to an extent which no other
field supplies V Let this field be a training-ground. The fact^
it gives arc of value. The method it requires is of value.
As the languages of the Avorld, as the forms of speech mu-
tually nnintelligible, are counted by the hundred, and the dia-
lects by the thousand, the field is a large one — one siip-
j)lying much exercise, work, and labour. J3ut the applica-
tions of the results obtained are wide also; for, as long as any
form of mental philosophy remains susceptible of improvement,
as long as its improved form rcnnains undiffused, so long will
a knowledge of the structure of language in general, a know-
ledge of com})arative philology, a knowledge of general gram-
mar (for we may choose our term), have its use and appli-
cation. And, assuredly, this Avill be for some time.
As to its special value in the particular department of tlie
ethnologist, high as it is, I say nothing, or next to nothin;;.
al)out it; concorniug myself only with its more general a})pli-
cations.
Let it be said, then, that the otudy of language is emi-
nently disciplinal to those faculties that are tasked in tli"
investigation of the phenomena of the human mind; tlie va-
lue of a knowledge of these being a matter foreign to the
present dissertation, but being by no r-ieans low. High or
low, however, it measures that of the studies under notice.
Jiuthovv is this general philology to be tai.'ghtV Are youths
to seek for roots and processes in such languages as the
Hungarian and the Tumali? No.. The teaching must bo
by means of Avell-selected suggestive examples, whereby tho
student may rise from particulars, to generals, and be taujiht
to infer tho uncertain from the certain. I do not say that
the .< in pilltcrs arose exactly after tlio fashion of the T"-
mali plural; but, assuredly, its development was the same in
Imiiie word
ox Tiri:: sTi'DY OF r,A\(ir.\(ii;.
35
iiid; it' ii"t in dftnil. At all events^ iangnago ninst bo dealt
,itli as a f/ronili.
In lli(! iii'st stage of spoccli, tlicr(i are no inflottions at
11, separate Avords serving instead of tlieni: — just ;i.> if,
nslcad of saying /'alliera , Ave said fdilicr ?n(i)iij , ov /'(illwr /)i-
i/cr; reduplieation l)eing one of tlu! niake-sliifts (so to say)
t' this ])eri(>(l. The languages allied to the ( Jliinese belong
iu this (dass.
In the second stage, the separate words eoaIesc(;, but not
perfectly as to disfigure their originally separate eharae-
er. The llungarian persons have illustrated this. Langnagc
o\v hceonics Avhat is eall(>(l (((Jdhilhidk'. TIk! ]iarts etdiere,
ut the eohesion is imperfect. The majority of languages
re agglutinate.
The Latin and Greek tongues iUustrate the third stage,
'he })arts originally separate, then agglutinate, now beconu^
niodilied by contact as to look like secondary parts of a
ingiC word ; these original separate substantive characters
ciiig a matter of inference rather than a patent and trans-
areiit fact. The s in falltcn^ (which is also the .v in paf/r-s
m\ TtdriQi^-g) is in this predicament.
Lastly, inflections are replaced by prepositions and anxi-
iary verbs, as is the case in the Italian and French when
()iiij)are(l witli the l^atin.
I'ridy, tlien, may we say that tin! phenomena of speech
re the phenomena of growth, evolution, or development;
hill as such must they be taught. A cell that glows, — not
crystal that is built up, — such is language.
r>ut these Avell-dcvised selections of suggestive examples,
[s'hcrehy the student may rise from y a-ticulars to generals,
cc, are not to be found in the ordinary grannnars. Indeed,
It is the very reverse of the present system; Avhero there
ire twenty appeals to the memory in the shape of what is
[ailed a ru/c, for one appeal to the understanding in the
[liape of an illustrated process. So muidi the Avorsc for the
["xisting methods.
Mdidds applied to growing trees — cookery-book receipts
For making a natural juice — these are the paralhds to the
tirtiiieial systems of grammar tn llicir worst /onus. The belter
[•an be excused, sometimes reconnnended ; even as the J.,in-
la'au system of botanical teaching can, in certain cases, be
[ised with safety, prorirled at trays that its artificial character
pc cxji/aiHCf/ hcforeliand , and insisted an throaf/liinit.
To stand on tin; level of the Linna'an system, an artificial
irannnar must come under the following condition : — Jt must
Y'uve l/ir student notldiaj to unlearn wlicn he cumes to a natural one.
3G
i>N Tin; >i'ii>v oi" i.AM.r \(;i:,
How can this bo donoV It can be doiiG, if tlio ar
aninia
vlan will Ijc content to teach forms only, leaving proccs;
alone. Let liini say (for Instance) that tiie Latin for —
/ call is roc-o.
Thou callcst , vuc - as.
('J
Call/'fu/ ,
I ralinL
ror-ans.
<■«>(■ -avi iVc
.^(
Jiut do not let him say that active aorists are formed froiil
futures, and passive ones from the third person singular i'
the perfect. His forms, his paradigms, Avill be right: lii
rtiles, in nine cases out of ten, wrong. I am satisfied tlm
languages can be taught withoiit rules and by paradigms onlv
This recognition of what has been called arli/'icial graii.l
mar for the teaching of special languages , as opposed t
th
le general grammar ot tin! comparative jilnloiogist, slitniL
serve to anticipate an objection. 'Would you/ it may U
asked, 'leave tlie details of languages like the Latin, (iredi
French, German, i^c. — languages of eminent ])ractical uti-
lity — untaught until such time as the student shall hiiv:
dipped into Chinese, touched upon Hungarian, and taken i
general idea of the third stage of develoi)inent from the La
tin, and of the fourth from the French V If so, the
penoiJ
of life when ihe memory tor woi'ds is strongest will have pa?
sed away before any language but his own mother-tongue \\\
\
)een ac
Tl
quir(
le recou'n
ition of such a thiny,- as artificial -jr
immar an-
th
wcrs tins 111
tl
le neii'atiV'
If
a special language be wantoi'i
let it be taught by-times: only, if it cannot be taught
the most scientific manner, let it be taught in a manner
little unscientific as possible.
\\\ this lies :in argument against the ordinary teaching-
speak as an Englishmanj of Knglish. What do we le
I
y
if
Li the ordinary teaching of what is called the gra
f the Enoli^ih lanjiuage there are t\\o elements. Th
AI'Ll
iiininil
lero !:
something professed to be taught which is not taught, bus
which, if taught, would l)e worth learning; and there is some
thing which, from being ahn-ady learned better than
ni)
is
III can teach it, requires no lessons. The one (the latter
vetice of the Lnii'lish tongue. This tit
tl
le use aiu
pr
Englishman has already. The other is the principles o
grammar. With existing text-books this is an impossiliility
What then is taught V iSomething (1 am quoting from wli;i
I have Avritten elsev.'here) undoubtedly. The facts, tlm
anguagc is more or
less reyular: that there is such a tl
iiiiJ
jiii assuming t
jvev grammar
Ithe li'rammar
o.v Tiin srri>v of i.sxdiAiiR.
37
manner a-
>Tannnar: that cortiiin expressions should ho avohled, arc
ill niattors worlli knowing-. And thoy aro all taui;lit even
l)V the worst nietliod of ti'achinf;-, liut are tlieso the y)roper
objects oi' si/sfemaffc teaching? Is the importance of tlieir ac-
Liisition ((puvahmt to tl'.o timtt, tlio trouhle, and tlio dis-
lilacoiiiont of more vahial)Ie suhj(H't8, \vhic-h are involved in
[heir explanation V 1 think not. Oross vulgarity of langnao-e
Is a fault to bo prevented; hut the proper prevention is to be
i'ot from habit - not rules. Tho proprieties of the iMiglish
language are lo be learned, like the ])roprieties of P^nglish man-
liers, by conversation arul intercourse: and a proper school for
loth, is the best society in which tlui learner is placed. If
llliis 1)0 good, systematic teaching is superfluous; if bad, in-
snfticient. There arc undoubted points where a young; por-
Isuu may doubt as to the granunatical ])ropriety of a certain
pxprcssinn. Tn this case let him ask some one older and
jinorc instructed. Grammar, as a arf , is, undoubtedly, i/ie
yiil of spcn/i/nf/ mid wnt/iir/ correclh/ — but then, as an art,
jit is only rerpiircd foi' foreign languages. For our onnt we
jliave the necessary ))ractice and familiarity.
The true claim of l^nglish granmiar to form part and par-
Icol of an English education stands or falls with the value
f the philological knowledge to which grammatical studies
may serve as an introduction, and with the value of sci(m-
litic granmiar as a (//scfjif/'iifil study. I have no fear of l)eing-
<iipposed to undervalue its importance in this respect. Indeed,
ill assuunng that it is very groat, T also assume that where-
ver granunar is studied as grammar, the language which
jtho grammar so studied should represent, uuist be the mo-
Ithcr-tonguo of the student; trhalever thai molhcr-l<m(/iie fnaij
\hc — English for Ihiglishmon, Welsh for Welshmen, Frencdi
for Frenchmen, German for Germans. i*tc. The study is the
study of a theory; and for this reason it should be compli-
cated as little as possible by ])oints of practice. For this
jreason a mans mother-tongue is tlie best medium for the
plements of scientific ])hilology, simply because it is the ono
pvhieh he knoAvs best in ])ractico.
Limit, then, the teaching of English, except so far as
[it is preparatory to the study of language in general; with
which view, teach as scientitically as possible.
Go further. Except in special cases, limit the teaching
[of the classical tongues to one out of the two. (hie, for all
ylhcipliiia] purposes, is enough. Tn this, go far. Dead though
ithe tongue be, and object of ridicule as \\w occupation is
hocoining, go to the length of writing versos, thougli only
and go in onn
in a few of the commoner metres. Go far
38
ON TIIF. STLOY OF LANGUAGE.
iiiir.
direction only. Tlioro arc reasons for this sin<i,lencss
path. 1 fear tliat there is ahiiost a neeessity. As loiij;-
men believed that the ordinary Latin and t J reek granii
were good thin<a;s ot" vlieniselves. and that, even if they
not carry the student far intojhe classics, they told him
thing of value respecting language! in general, a lilflc leai
in th(! dead languages Avas a good thing. J>ut what it tli
grammars are not good things V What if they are absolut
SOllIK
itim
badV Jn such a case, the classical to
n-iut
s cease to be lo
(■ly
ai'ii;
except for themscdves. Kow, one of the few things that
more us
eless than a little l^atin is a little (Ireek.
Am I wrong in saying that, with nine out of ten wl
learn both Latin and Oreck, the knowledge of the tw(j toii-i
gues conjointly is not greater than the knowledge of one oi
them singly ought to beV
Am [ wrong in believing that the tendencies of the f[p:
are in favour of decreasing rather than increasing the amount
of time bestowed upon (dassieal srholarshipV
Unless 1 be so, the necessity for a limitation is a})paroiii.l
To curiail English — to (dimiiiate one of the classical toii-l
gues — possibly that of Pericles, at any rate, cither that
P
ericlcs or o
f c:
icero
to substitute for the
orumarv cii-
ments of a so-called elassieal education illustrations from tl
Chinese, the Hungarian, or the Tumali — this is what 1 h
■ }
reconnnen
If:
we
ded.
1 cannot but feel that in so doing I may seem to some t"
have been false to my text, which was to eulogize thir
I'
diilological. They may say, Call i/ou this hacking your /'rifiidi:
do. It is not by glorifying one's own more peculiar stii
dies that such studies gain credit. To show the permanont,
rather than the accidental, elements of their value, is the
best service that can be done for them. It is also good sci-
lire I
gO(
vice to show that they can be taught with a less expendit
of time and labour than is usuallv bestoAved on them. l>ut|
IK';
the best service of all is to indicate their disciplinal val
and to show that, instead of displacing other branches ut
knowledge, they so exercise certain faculties of the miml a>
to prepare the way to them.
iglcncss
M'l"Allllli;irJ
llilll SOllKJ
///f /e(/r/iiiiij\
^vliat it til'
absolutilvi
;o l)c loan!;
ngs that i.j
:)f ten wl
iO two tOll-j
of one oil
of tlie afrti
ho aniountl
1 apparent, I
«sical toii-[
lior that ot'l
linary el
s from tli'l
liat 1 li;n\
O SOllU! I \
ize thiiii;-
/r I'vk'iiih'.
3uliar ^\\\-
ennaneiit.
10, i.s til'
good su
:pendiliii'
leni. ])ii
lal vahii
anclios (ii
3 mind ;h
II.
OX THE AVOIM) DISTltWLT/J/K AS USED
IN L()GI(\
liKAl)
BEFORE THE rilllJ^LOGICAL SOCIETY.
DECEMIJKK THE I8tH 1857.
Til
pa]
)er is an attonii)t to reconcile the lofi'ical
)caking' rouglil
i'cseni
ho word Dislribulcd.
means universal: '^'a term is
.<ai(l to be ilistrihittcd when it is taken universally, so as to
stand for everything it is capable of being applied to." —
U'halclii, i. § 5.
Speaking more closely, it means univcrsid in one premiss;
it being a rule in the ordinary logic that no (conclusion is
lios&ible unless one premiss bo, either negatively or affirma-
tively, universal.
Assuredly there is no etymological connexion between the
two words. Hence l)c IMorgan Avrites: — "JJy disir Untied is
here meant iiniversallij spoken of. I do not use this term in
the present work, because I do not see why, in any deduciblc
meaning of the word distribuled , it can be a])plicd to uni-
versal as distinguished from particular." — Formal Logic,
eliap. vii.
iSeither can it be so applied. It is nevertheless an accu-
rate term.
Let it mean relaled io more Ihan one class , and the power
of the preiix dis-, at least, becomes intelligible.
Eor all the purposes of logic this is not enough; inasmucli
as the particular character of the relation (all-important in
the structure of the syllogism) is not, at present, givcm. It
is enough, however, to give import to the syllable dis-.
40
ox TIIR Wrtltl) hlSVHUUTI'.h. AS USKD IX T.OOIC.
|i )
In aflinnativo piopositions this relation is connoctivo on
hotli sides, /. e. the niiiUlh! term forms part ot" hnlh tli(> others. |
In no<4ative ])ropositinns this rchition is connective on m.
side, disjunctive on the oUwr.
In — All men are mortal,
All heroes are men,
the middle term men forms a part of the chiss called mnvM\
by bein;;' connected with it in the way that certain contents |
are connected with the case that contains them; whilst it als
stands in connexion with the class of lierucs in the way that]
cases are connected with their contents. In —
No man is perfect.
Heroes are men,
the same doul)le relation occurs. The class ;//r/??, howovcr, ]
though part of the class Iwro. is no ])art of the class pcr/'crl
but, on the contrary, expressly exchuled from it. Now this
expression of exclusion constitutes a relation — disjunctivo
indeed, but still a relation; and this is all that is wanted to
give an import to the prntix (//s- in dhUributed.
Wherever there is distribution there is inference, no matter
whether the distributed term be universal or not. If the or-
dinary rules for the structure of the syllogism tell us the
contrarv to this, thev onlv tell the truth, so far as certain
assumptions on which they rest are legitimate. These limit
us to the use of three terms expressive of quantity, — all,
)wne, and so??ie; and it is rpiito true that, with this linntatioii,
universality and distribution coincide.
Say that Some Y is X,
Some Z is Y,
and the question will arise whether the Y that is X is also
the Y that is Z. That some Y belongs to both classes is
clear; whether, however, it bo the same Y is (lo\d)tful. Yet
unless it be so, no conclusion can be drawn. And it may
easily be different. Hence, as long as we use the word sofiii\
we have no assurance that there is any distribution of tho
middle term.
Instead, however, of .sow6' write a//, and it is obvious that
some Y must be both X and Z ; and when such is the case —
Some X must be Z, and
Some Z must be X.
Universality, then, of the middle terni in one ])remiss is, by
no means, the direcl condition that gives us an inference, l)ut
only a secondary one. The direct condition is the distiilMi-
tion. Of this, tlu; universality of the middle term is only
a sir/n , and it is the only sign w(> have, because all and some
are the only words we have to choose from. If others were
ox nil', WOIU) lilSTHlBVTllI) AS ISKl) I\ I,)(iir,
41
lalltt^vod, the appcnranc'O wliicli tlio two words {tUaUihitlcil .and
Xvnn'crxdl) liave of uein^^ synonviiKtus would disappear. And
Ipo they do when we abandon tli(> limitations iinp(»scd upon
T\is by tlio words all and aomc. So they do in the nnmcri-
eally definite syllogisin, exeniplifi(Ml in —
INfore than half V is X,
More than half V is Z,
Sonic Z is X.
ISo. also, they do when it is assumed that the V's wiiicli are
IX and tlie V's which are Z are identical.
Y is X,
The same Y is Z,
Some Z is X.
In each of thes(> formuhc there is distribution without
liniiversality, /. c. there is distribution with a (piality other
jtlian tliat of universality as its criterion. TIh; following' ex-
tract not only explains this, but j>'ives a fresh proof, if fresh
^)ro()f he needed , that dislribuU'd and mi/rcrsal arc used syno-
iivmoiisly. The "comparison of each of the two terms must
he equally with the Avliole, or with the same part of the third
torin; and to secure this, (I) either the middle term must bo
llistributed in one premiss at least, or (2) the two terms must
1)0 compared with the same speciiied part of the middle, or
\{'.\), in the two premises taken toj>'ether, the middle must be
llisti'ihuted, and soinethinf;- more, thou<;h not distributed in
If'itlier sino'ly." — 'fho/npso)!, (hiftinc of llic Lawi^ o/' Thoiujlil, § 3U.
Here dislribulcd means untrersal; JMr. Thompson's being-
the ordinary terminology. In the eyes of the present writer
I'Mistrihuted in one premiss"" is a contradiction in terms.
Of the two terms, dislritniled is tlie more general; yet it
h not the usual one. That it has been avoided bv De Morgan
jlias been shown. It may be added, that from the Port lioyal
hoiiic it is 'v\diolly excluded.
The statement that, in negative jiropositions. the relation
Js conneitive on one side, and disjunctive on the other , re-
|(|uircs further notice. It is by no means a matter of indif-
ference on -which side the connexion or disjunction lies.
(a.) It is the class denoted by the major, of which the
jiiiiddlc term of a negative syllogism is expressly stated to form
wt part, or from which it is disjoined. (/>.) It is ilie class
lenotcd by the minor, of which the same middle term is
it'xpressly stated to form part, or with which it is connected.
Xo man is perfect —
Jiere the proposition is a major, and the middle term ?n(tn is
[oxpressly separated from the class perfeel.
All heroes are men —
42
ON Tin; woHi) nisTRinvTKn, as usrd in i.ooic.
hero it is n minor, and tiio niiddlc term man is oxpros^Kivl
connct'ted witli chiss Iwro.
A eonnfH'tivc relation to tlio major, and n disjunctive rr.
latjon to tlio minor arc impossible in negative syliof-iMiis,
The exceptions to this arc only apparent. The two hkimI
prominent are the fornnilic Cimcslrcs and Camenca, in hotli
of which it is the minor j)remiss Avherein the relation is (li^j
junctive. l)Ut tliis is an accident; an accidcMit arisin*^' out
tlie tact of the major and minor l)einf;- convertible,
Hohardo is in a diil'erent predicament. Bohanln, along witlJ
BaroLo, is the only I'ormida containing- a particular nc^gativi
as a premiss. X(»av the ])articular negati\es are, for so nianvi
of the purposes of logic, particular affirmatives, that tin v|
may be neglected for tlu^ present; the object at present beiii;;
to ascertain the rules for the structure of truly and un(|nes-
tionably negative syllogisms. Of these we may prcdicat'
tbat — their minor })roposition is always either actually altii-
mativc or ca]iable of becoming so by transposition.
To go further into the relations between the middle tonnj
and the minor, Avould be to travel beyond tiie field undtr
present notice; the immediate object of the ])rcscnt ])a])or
being to explain the import of the word (listribidctL That it|
may, both logically and etymologically, mean rclalcil Id lin
('/(/SSI'S is clear — clear as a matter of fact. Whether, howovcr,!
ri'Jak'd In two chtsses bo the meaning that the history of lo^ii
gives us, is a point upon Avhieh I abstain from giving an
oi)inion. I only suggest that, in elementary treatises, tin:
terms vnivcrsal and dislribulcd should be separated more
widely than they are ; one series of remarks upon —
a. Distribution as a condition of inference, being follows! I
by another on —
h. Universality of the middle term in one premiss as a sigiil
of distribution.
So much for the extent to Avhich the present remarks suj:-
gest the purely practical question as to how the teaching
of Aristotelian logic may be improved. There is anotlicrJ
however, b(iyond it; one of a more theoretical, indeed of an
eminently theoretical, nature. It raises doubts as to the pro-
priety of the word tdl itself; doubts as to the propriety oil
the term univcrstd.
The existence of such a word as (dl in the premiss, altliou,i;iil
existing therein n)erely as a contrivance for reconciling tlie|
evidence of the distribution of the middle term with a certii
amount of simplicity in the way of terminology, coulil
scarcely fail, in conjunction with some of its other properti(>.
to give' it what is here considered an undue amount of iml
inay say instc
ON TiiK wouD rnsiniRiTj:/) as vhv.t) in looic.
43
[nortaiice. Tt niado it look liko tlie opposite to none. Yet tliis
is what it is not. Tlu; opj)osito to ntiiic is not-tio/w, or xome ;
[the tipposito to all is o//^'. In one and ^/// we liuvc the lii^licst
laiiil lowest nninlxTS of the individiuils that constitute a ehiss.
Ill iiniio and some wo have the dill'eronce hotween existence
laiul non-existence. Tiiat all is a mere nio{h^ oi' some, has been
insisted i»n by many h)gieians, denied by tew ur none, lie-
twoon all and some, there is, at best, but a ditlVreneo of deji;ree.
lictwecn some and none, the difference is .a difference of kind.
Isn/iic may, by strenf;theninir , be converted iiuo all. No
|stiTni:thening may obliterate the difference between all and
'iinl-ii/l. From this it follows that the loj^ic of none and some,
I till' lou'ic of connexion and disjunction (the lo<;-ic o\' In'o si<;ns),
, if! iimcli more widely different from the lo<;ic of jiarl and
Iniiiilc (the logic oi' lliree signs) than is usually a(bnitted; the
I former being' a logic of pure qualilij, the latter a logic of
{qiuililij and quanliUj as -well.
lliis the a(bnixture done good? I doubt whether it has.
[The logic of pure and sim.])lo Quality would, undoubtedly,
have given but little; nothing l)ut negative conclusions on
nnoside, and possible particulars on the other. Nevertheless
lit would have given a logic of the Possible and Impossibh;.
Again, as at present constituted, the <^)uantitative logic, the
I logic of all and some , embraces either too much or too little.
.///is, as aforesaid, only a particular form of more than none.
1 80 is ?NOsl. IS'ow such syllogisms as —
Most men are fallible,
Most men are rational,
Some men are both frail and fallible;
or,
Some frail things are fallible,
avo inaduiissible in the Aristotelian paradigms. A claim,
lliowciver, is set up for their admission. Grant it, and you
I may say instead (tf f?iosl —
Fifty-one per cent., v^c. ;
but this is only a particular instance. You may combine any
I two numbers in any Avay you like, provided only that the sum
bo greater than unity. Kow this may be arithmetic, and it
may be fact; but it is scarcely formal logic; at any rate it
I is anything but general.
It is the logic of some and its modifications one, all, and
\(iiiijllt//if/ behreen one and all, as opposed to the logic of the
|i*imple absolute some {some the opposite to none), and a little
Uonsideration will show that it is also the logic oi' the prohal/le,
pvitli its modification iho jfroven , (proven h probable ^ as «// is
44
ON Tin: woiii) hisiHiiirTh:!). am uhku in r.odic.
lyonw
iiH o|h>o8(mI to tin; logic of tlio possih/i- and impossihlc
Let, ill Hiu'li a pair of propositions us —
Somo c»f tlu! mon ot tlio iirigafl<» wore bravo,
Soino of tlio inon of tlio brigadn woro killed ,
tlio number oxprossod by somi', as well as the number of tin
men of the briyudc, bo known, and the question as to wlictlKrl
Some brave men were killed,
is a problem in the doctrine of chances. One per cent, nfl
each will make it very unlikely that the single brave man
Mas also the single killed one. Forty-nine per cent, of oaclil
will make it highly probable that more than one good soldid
met his fate. With fifty on one side, and fifty-one on the I
other, W(i have? (me at least. With all (either killed or hrtiv
we have the same; and that without knowing any numbers I
at all.
III.
(ilUlMiMATKA.
OX THE llEClPJiO(JAL PRONOUNS,
AND
ON THE liECmiOCJAL POWER OF TIIE
REFEE(JT1VE VERB.
UK A II
liKFOKE TIIE rillLOLOUlCAL SOCIETY,
JiAUCU '22. 18-ii.
The present paper is upon the reciprocal pronouns, and upon
certain forms of the verb used in a reciprocal sense. It is
considered that these points of language have not been put
forwards with that prominence and care which their value
in the sdlution of certain problems in philology requires. Too
often the terms Reciprocal and Reflective have been made
synonymous. How far this is true may be determined by the
fact that the middle verbs in the Icelandic language have
been called by so groat a philologist as Rask reciprocal in-
stead of reflcclivc. This is equivalent to treating sentences
Hke we strike ourselves, and we strike each other ^ as identical.
Yet the language with which Rask was dealing (the Icelan-
dic) was the one of all others wherein the dift'erence in ques-
tion required to be accurately drawn, and fully pointed out.
(See Anvisning till Isliindskan, pp. 281, 283.)
In all sentences containing the statement of a reciprocal
or mutual action there are in reality two assertions, viz. the
assertion that A strikes (or loves') B , and the assertion that B
strikes [or loves) A; the action forming one, the reaction an-
other. Hence, if the expression exactly coincided with the
fact signified , there would always be two propositions. This,
however, is not the habit of language. Hence arises a more
40
ox Tin; itiocii'iiooAii I'uoxouxs.
I
compendious form of expression, j>iving ori!j,in to an ellipsis
of a peeuliiir kind. Phrases like Klcoclcx <ui(l Polyniccs lulM\
each oilier arc elliptical for Eleocles and I'olyniccs killed — f(id\
the other. Here the scc(md })roj)ositi()n expands and expl;un>
the first, whilst the first sn])plies the verh to the seeoin
Each, however, is elliptic. Tiie first is without the object,!
the second without the verb. Tlnu the verb must be in the
plural (or dual) number, that one of the nouns must be in
the nominative case, and that the other must be objectivi
is self-evident from the structure of the sentence; such bcin^'j
the conditions of the expression of the idea. An aposiopesis
takes place after a plural verb, and then there follows a
clause wherein the verb is supplied from what went before,
When words equivalent to each oilier coalesce, and become
compound; it is evident that the ccnposition is of a very
peculiar kind. Less, however, for these matters than for its
value in elucidating the origin of certain deponent verbs
does the expression of reciprocal action merit the notice otl
the philologist. In the latter part of the paper it will appear
that for one branch of languages, at least, there is satisfac-
tory evidence of a reflective form having become reciprocal, I
and of a reciprocal form having become dej)Onent; this latter |
word being the term for those verbs whereof the meaning
active, and the form passive.
Beginning with those methods of denoting mutual action i
where the expression is the least explicit and unequivocal,
it appears that in certain languages the reciprocal character
of the verb is implied rather tlian expressed. Each man AW,-
cd at his brother — or some equivalent clause, is the general |
phraseology of the Semitic languages.
]\Iore explicit than this is the use of a single pronoun
(personal, possessive, or reflective) and of some adverb equi-
valent to the words nmliially , interchangeably , &q.. This is the
habit of the Latin language , — Eteocles et Potynices invicvm
se trticidaverunt : also of the French, although not invari-
ably, Q. g. s'entr'aimer, s'enlredire, s'enlrebatlre: also of the
Moeso-Gothic — galeikai sind barnam th;iim vopjandam seina
misso = o^oioL eiGi JtaidHoig totg TCQoGcpojvovOLV allijkoLg —
loquentibus ad invicem. — Luc. vii. 32. Deutsche Gramniatik,
iv. 322, and iii. 13. The Welsh expressions are of this kind;
the only difference being that the adverb coalesces with the
verb, as an inseparable particle, and so forms a compound.
These particles are dym, cym, or cy and yni. The former is
compounded o{ dy . ?\gx\\^y\wg iteration , and //w denoting w//-
iii(d action; the latter is the Latin cntn. Hence the reciprocal
power of these particles is secondary: e. g. dymhorthi, to aid
ON THE UECIincOCAL l>HOXOLNS.
47
Lutually; (hjmcldmJhi , to dispute; (hjmgani, to love one an-
iitlicr; (hjmyiiddi , to vex one anotlicr; (Jijmyrcdii , to trust one
[mother, or confide; (lymgiiratv, to strike one another, or iiglit;
hjrwcnni/s, to desire nmtnally; cijffftdnrtbod , to know one
anotlics; cijdaddanuad , to promise mutually; cydwysUitw, to
il(Hl<iC,- ci/dymadraivn, to converse; cydymdaillt, to accompany;
mudroddi, to discourse; ynutddaw , to promise; ytnavael , to
^tiu;;'gle; ymdatTU, to dispute, etc.
The form, -wliicli is at once current, full, and unequivocal,
|» the one that occurs in our own , and in the generality of
languages. Herein there are two nouns (generally pronouns),
[ind the construction is of the kind exhibited above — akkr]-
'iM'i^ each olher, eintinder^ I'un l' autre ^ &c.
Sometimes the two nouns remain separate, each preser-
niig its independent form. This is the case in most of the
languages derived from the Latin, in several of the Slavonic
[indl-ithuanie dialects, and in (amongst others) the (Jld Morse,
[he vSwedish, and the Danish, — lun I'autre, French; uno
(itro, K5j)an.; geden druheho, Bohemian; ieden druglcgo, Po-
lish; wiens wiena, Lith.; Aveens ohtru, Lettish; hvert annan
[iiiaso.), hvert annat (neut.) Old Morse. See .1). G. iii. 84.
Sometimes the two nouns coalesce, and form words to which
It would be a mere retincment to deny the name of coni-
punds: this is the case with the Greek — aklTqkcov ^ aAA?;'-
io(g, alkriXovs.
Sometimes it is doubtful Avliether the phrase consist of a
boiiipound word or a pair of Avords. This occurs Avhere, from
lic want of inflection, the form of the first word is the same
111 composition as it Avould have been out of it. Such is the
psc with our own hmguage: cach-olher , onc-anolJur.
Throughout the mass of languages in general the details
the expression in question coincide; both subject and ob-
ject are almost always expressed by pronouns, and these
jnnnouns are much the same throughout. One, or some word
|quivalent, generally denotes the subject. Other, or sonio
ivord equivalent, generally denotes tlic object, e. {/. they
Vruck one anot/ier. The varieties of ex[)ression mfty be col-
lected from the folloAving sketch : —
I. fi. The subject is expressed by one, or some word equiva-
lent, in most of the languages derived from the Latin, in
peveral of the Slavonic dialects, in l^ithuanic and Lettisli,
|n Armenian, in German, in English, and doubtlessly in
liiany other languages — t'ttn I'autre, Fr. ; una otro, Sp. ; h'den
tlnigiogo, Polish; w/'ens Avienil, Lith.; fveens ohtru, Lett.;
penueants, Armenian; tvV^ander, Germ.; one another, Engl.
h. By each, or some equivalent term, in English, Dutch,
48
ox I'lti; KHCllMMtOAI- l'l{()N*(»l*NS.
<in(l tlic Scandinavian languages — cadi other, English ; elk.\
andcr, Dutch; /awandrc, lceh\ndic, Danish, Swedish.
c. By lliis, or some equivalent term, in Swedii^h and Dal
nish (Amanden) ; in Lithuanic [killa kitta), and in Lettistl
{zitfs zittu).
d. By olher , or some equivalent term, in Greek and Ar|
menian ; akkrikovg, /rserats.
e. By man. used in an indefinite sense and conipoundeiil
with ///■ in Dutch, ;/<^///.ander (mal-lik nianlik).
/". By a terra equivalent to mate or fellow in Laplandic-j
/70/w goimeme. — Kask, 'Lappisk Sproghere,' p. 102. Stock!
fleth, 'Gramniatik,' p. J 09.
2. a. In the expression of the object the current term is olk\
or some equl/alent word. Of this the use is even raorej
constant than that of one expressive of the subject — runl
\' autre, French; uno otro, Spanish; dkkYiXovg, Greek; gedcif
druheho, Bohemian; ieden dnigicgo , Polish; weens ohtru, Let-
tish; irai/'rt^s, Armenian; c'lnander, German; each other, ontf
another, English.
b. In Lithuanic the term in use is one; as, wiens wki
The same is the case for a second form in the Armeniaci
m'wia'an.
c. In La^nandic it is denoted in the same as the subject;!
as goim (jbimeme.
Undoubtedly there are other varieties of this general luel
thod of expression. Upon those already exhibited a few re
marks, however, may be made.
1. In respect to languages like the French, Spanish, kt.
where the two nouns, instead of coalescing, remain separate!
each retaining its inflection, it is clear that they possess al
greater amount of perspicuity; inasmuch as (to say nothiiiJ
of the distinction of gender) the subject can be vised in tliJ
singular number when the mutual action of two persons {i.'A
of one upon another^ is spoken of, and in the plural wIihi
we signify that of more than two ; e. g. Us (?. e. A and B
se hattaient — fun l'aiitre:hn\ i/s (A, B, C and D,) se battakif]
— les ims»les autres. This degree of pert^picuity might be ail
tained in I^nglish and other allied languages by reducing t([
practice the difference between the words each and one] icl
which case we might say A and B struck one another, biitl
J, B and C struck each other. In the Scandinavian languagfij
this distinction is real; where /«/;/anden is equivalent to I'm
rautre, French; uno otro^ Spanish: whilst /ovvandre expresseij
les uns les autres , French; unos otros, Spanish. The siiiiitj
is the case in the Laplandic. — See liask's Lappisk Sproghtit
p. 102.
U'ouat,. au
w \
ox T.IE UECIPUOCAL I'UONOUXS.
49
2. An analysis of such an expression as Ihcy praise one an-
{/iher's i^or each olficr's) cunducl, will show the hix character of
iiftain forms in the Swcdisli. Of the two pronouns it is only
jlio latter that appears in an oblique case, and this nccessa-
lily; hence the Swedish form hvarsannars is illo<^ical. It is
fcrecisely what one's ano/her's would be in English, or akhov
\lllav fur akh]lGiv in (ircek. The same applies to the M.
\\. (jr. einen andereti. D. (». iii. K).
3. The term expressive of the object appears in three forms,
,'iz. preceded by the definite article (I'u^ /"autre), by the in-
[letinite article (one «;?other), and finally, standing alone (each
Dther, einander). Of these three forms the first is best suit-
il for expressing the reciprocal action of two persons (one
aut of two struck the other); whilst the second or third is
ittest for signifying the reciprocal action of more than two
[one out of many struck, and was struck by, some otiier).
The third general method of expressing mutual or recipro-
cal action is by the use of some particular form of the verb.
In two, and probably more, of the African languages (the
Woloif and Jiechuana) this takes place. In the Turkish there
[s also a reciprocal form: as siti-?)ielx, to love; haki-mek , to
look; siii-sh-mek , to love one another; baki-sh-)nek^ to look
U one another; su-il-mck , to be loved; sui-sh-il-mek, to be
|ov('d mutually. — JJaviits Titrkis/t (jrammar.
The fourth form of expression gives the fact alluded to at
he beginning of the ])aper : viz. an instrument of criticism
In investigating the; origin of certain deponent verbs. In all
languages there v., a certain numbef of verbs denoting actions,
reciprocal or mutual to the agents. Such are the words em-
hrace, converse, strive at/uinsl, nreslle , /iyht, rival, meet, and
several more. There are also other words Avhere the exist-
ence of two parties is essential to the idea conveyed, and
kvlicre the niition, if not that of reciprocal action, is akin to
it; viz. reproach, compromise, approach, &c. Now in certain
mguages (the Latin and Gre(di) some of these verbs have
la passive form; /. e. they are deponents, — loquor , colloqaur,
Juclor, relvctor , atnjileclor, siiavior, oscii/or. suspicor, liatin:
KdonuEoixat ^ q^iXoq)Qoveo^i(xt., ^cr/j)^ca, diuXeyonai, «At'oju,ca,
Idtakvo^iai , daeL^o^ai, &c., Greek. Hence arises the hypo-
thesis, that it is to their reciprocal power on the one hand,
land to the connexion between the })assive, reflective and re-
Iciprocal forms on the other, that these verbs owe their dc-
jl)onent character. The fact essential to the probabilitv of
jtliis hypothesis is the connexion l)etween the reflective forms
jaiid (he reciprocal ones.
Now for one branch of languages this can be shown most
4
no
6M THR KRCtl'ROOAL ^RO^•O^IN•S.
s;itisfiictorily. In Icolandic the middle voice is formed fnj
the active by tlie addition of the rcttectivo pronoun, ^'M; iiiJ
s//: , him or self. Hence it is known by the terminations J
and sr, and by certain modifications of these aflixes, viz. j[
s, z, ?nz, ?ns. In the oldest t^iiv^c of the lanauage tlio if
flective power of the middle voice, to the exclusion of a pasj
sive sense, is most constant: e. //. Iianii var tiafmnlr ^= ho Imi
the name given him; hann iu'/)iisl-~--\\i}. gave as his nanio, oj
named hinisolf. It was only when the origin of the niidiii]
form became indistinct that its sense became either passiv]
or deponent; as it generally is in the modern tongues i
Denmark, I^erway and Sweden. Now in the modern Stjii
dinavian languages we have, on the one hand, certain di
ponent forms expressive of reciprocal action; whilst on tlij
(tther we have, even in the v(;ry earliest stages of the Oil
Morse, middle or reflective forms used in a reciprocal sonsr
Of some of these, examples will be given: but the proof i
their sense being reciprocal will not be equally conclusive i
all. Some may perhaps be lookcnl on as deponents {(rlim.
beriast^ skiliasl^ modasl); whilst others may be explained awiu
by the assumption of a passive constnu'tion {finuloz = \h\
were found, not they found each other). Whatever may 1^
the case with tlu; w<u'ds taken from the middle and niodm
stages of the language, this cannot be entertained in rcfiar
to tlu; examples drawn from the oldest Norse compositiml
the Edda of Sjcnmnd. For this reason the extracts froil
thence are marked JUhl. Srr/n., and of these (and these alon(l
the writer has attempted' to make the list exhaustive. Tlil
translations in Latin and Danish are those of the differecj
editors.
1. zl'i^ttust, foHfjhl each oilier.
2. Beriaz, strike each other.
brfidnr numo heriaz.
fratres invieem pugnabunt.
Vohispa, 41. Edd. 8.Tm.
This word is used in almost every page of the Sagas asl
deponent signifying to fxjht: also in the Feroic dialect.
3. BrcgJ)az, intcrehaufje.
orl)om at hrefi\\az.
verba coinmutarc
Holga-Qvijta llundllngsbana, i. 41. li. 26. Edd. SotiJ
4. Drepiz, //// one another.
fninuz l)eir b;ider daudir - en ockl v;ipn hofjju ])eir iifiiiil
■iec Sandinga
0\ rilK RKClPUOOAl. I'UONOIIKS.
51
5J
11
C'lm-
itliuia .if liostinnrn , ok |)at liygia uhmiu at |)t'ir (Alrek aiul Eirok)
;iti ilrcjiiz \y,\v iiumI. Sva scgir hiodolfr. ; ^^Jtrepaz kvadu,
jikriiigln. Ynglluga-Saga, p. 23.
X('s, viz. ji^H Tlic brntlicrs woro found dead — and no Avrapons had tlioy ox-
M(t tlio bits of tlioir liorsos, and men think they (Alrck and
iri'k) had kilh'd each other therewith. So says Thiodolf. : "They
i;ii(l tliat they hilled each olhcry
5. Uin-fa{)iuaz, vmhrucc each oilier. Sec Atla-Qui[ja hin
ira'nsleiizko, 42. — EdfJ. S(rm.
0. Ftlldes, /"f/l in wUh carli other.- — Om inorgonot efFter
fdldeii wy in Kobenhatt'n. — Norwof^ian Letters in \h'.\\ , a. d.
■^ee Sanilingar til det Korskc Folks 8|tro<j^ og Historic, I. 2.
I/O. The morning after we fell in with eaeh other in Copun-
liagcn.
7. Fundnz , found each other, met. See Vaf})rudnis-nial
|I7. — Sigurd (^iiip. i. G. Edd. Sann. — Fareyingar-Saga, p. 44.
('//• pindiiz is rendered de fnndt hrerandre =^ they found each
lillnr. in Ilaldorsen's L(,'xie. Island,
ef i]) (lynier fiuniz.
if you and (iynier meet. IIarhards-1: 24. Kdd. Sa?m.
8. (laHluz, consult each ttther. Sec Voluspa, G. 0. 21. 2.'i.
'jld. Seem.
0. (Jlediaz, rejoice each other
vapninn ok vadom
skulo vinir (jleiliaz ,
j)a't er a sialfoni stemst;
vidr-gefendr ok endi gefendr
enist K-ngst vinir
ef ]iat hi])r at ver|ia vel.
Ri
U'sma
1.41.
anius ac A'es
tih
us
val
amici miitun se deleefent ,
queis in ij)so (datore) forent oonsjiicua:
pretium renumeiantes et reinunerantes
iiUer se diulissime sunt aniiei
si negotiuui feliciter se dat.
riio middle form and reciprocal sense of erost is remar-
tl
iviiDio in tins passage.
10. Hauggvaz, hac/i each other, fujhl.
alhr Einlieviar
< 'jiins tiinom i
haiKjgvdz hvcrian dag.
52
ON TIIF, UECIPKOCAL PUOXOUNS.
all the Einhoriar
in Odin's towns
hack each other every day. Vi<f|)rudnis-Mal. 41. Edd. Sttaj
of J)eir hi'igvaz orjioni a.
si sc nialedictis invieem insectentur. Sig-QviO. ii. l.Edd.Sicni|
11. Hsettaz, cem^e.
hwtlomc hoettingi.
cessemus ulriuquc a niinaciis. Harbardslioo, 51. Edd. Sfciil
Such is tho translation of the editors, although the recipin
cal power is not unequivocal.
12. Hittaz, hit upon each other ^ meet. Ilittoz, Voluspa, i
Hittomk, Iladding-skata, 22. Hittaz, Solar-1: 82. Edd. Sm
Hittust, 01. Trygv. Sag. p. 90. Hittuz oc beriaz, Heinil
kringla, Saga llalfd. Svart. p. 4. Hittuz, Yngl, Sag. p. 4']|
alibi passim [)eir hillu is rendered, in BJorn Haldorsen's Lj
landic Lexicon, de iiaf Itinanden, they hit upon each other.
13. Kiempis; fight each other.
gaar udi gaarden oc kiempis, oc nelegger liver hinanden,
goes out in the house and fight each the other , and each knockl
down the other.
Such is the translation by Resenius, in modern Danish, il
the following extract from Snorro's Edcla., p. 34. — Ganpl
ut i gardinn og beriast, og fellar huor annar. Here the coiil
struction is not, thet/ fell (or knock down) each the other, mi
each fells the other] since fellar and nelegger avq. singular form>[
14. Mailast, talk to each other ^ converse. Talast, ditto.
Mu'Uz \)n. Yaf|jrudnisnial, 9.
melumc i sessi sanian = colloquanun" sedentes. ih. 19. Edd. S»|
mu'last })eir ru/, adr h<'ii' skiliasl, at })eir iimndi |)ar finnast pa. -I
Fostbra-'dra-Saga, p. 7.
they said to each other before they parted from each other tli.tj
they should meet each other tlicrc.
Yngvi ok Bera satu ok HUiiduz vidr. — Ileiiiiskr. Yngl. S. p.'Jij
(Jris.s niajlti; hven'r ero pessir nicnn or sx-.x Itilast r/V/ blioligal
Avaldi svarar; l)a er llnlHVeydr Ottarson ok Kolfinna dothir iniii[
01. Trygyv. Saga, ]). 152. (iriss said, v.ho are these jjcrsons vlil
l(dk together so blithely V Avaldi answers, they are Halfrid "i[
tarson and Koltinna my daughter. Ttdast is similarly used it
Feroio. Kviidusl, bespoke each other, occurs iu the sauie som'
])at var einn dag at liraud ok Fiiibngi fundust ok /trntej
Yatnsdada-Sag. p. l(i.
15. Mettiest, nicet each other, meet.
blidliga.
ON TiiR nEripuocAL rnoxoixs.
53
Rigsmal. 32. Edd. Saern.
Kung':'!! aff Ffi'rancliricho , kiingcn aft'J^ngland, oc kiuigon aft'
jcliottliuid skule moles til Chalis. — Lettor from Borgoii in I.').il,
Iniui .Saiulingor til dot Norsko Folks Sprog og Historic, i. '2.
1 5,V Tiio king of Franco, tlio king of England , and the king
if Scotland should 7neel each other at Calais.
Tlirougliout the Danish, Swedish and Feroic, this verb is
bed as a deponent.
16. Rekaz, vex each other.
gunuiar margir
erase gagn-hollir,
enn at virisi rekaz.
niulti homines
sunt inter se admodnm benevoli,
sed tamen tnuluo se (vel) in convivio exagitant
17. Sakaz, accuse each other, recriminate.
at vit mynira siafrum sacaz,
ut nos ipsi mutuo insectemur.
ef viji einir scolom
saryr^om sacaz.
si nobis duobus nsn veniat
amarulontis dicteriis invicem
nos lacessere.
sculoj) inni her
Siiryrjjom sacaz.
18. Saz, tooked at each other.
Haradis-Mal. 28.
^gis-drecka, 5.
Ibid. 19. Edd. Ssem.
saz 1 augv
fadir ok modir.
tlioy looked at each other in the eyes ,
father and mother.
Rigsmal. 24.
19. Sffittazj settle between each otlicr, reconcile. — Atla-Mal.
15. p]dd. Sami.
Koimi vinir J)veggia [)vi vid, at J)eir srcttuz, ok liigdu konungar
fetefuu mod ser, ok hilluz ok gerdo frit melhnn sin. — Hcimsk.
L'ngliiig-S. 42.
Tlioro oame friends of both in order that tlioy should be recon-
ciled, and the kings sent messages between them, and met and
liiiade peace between them. — ^Also Vatnsd. S. p. 16.
20. Seljas, to give to each other.
seldz eijia. Sig. Qv. iii. 1. Edd. Saira.
juramenta dederunt inter se.
54
ON TIIF. URCIlMiOCAI, PRONOUNS.
21. Sendaz, send, or let pass between each other.
K.ato sanity iiis,
scnduz far-Iingi,
lirnduz lK'i])t-yrl>i
hvjirki ser iiiidi. Atla-^^fal. Mj.
Thoy sat in the same town ((hvoUiiig),
Tlioy sent heltveen each other claii;^^('r-tliou;^lits ,
Thoy fetched Itetwccn each other hato-wurds,
Not either nutij did tlicy love each other.
Here, over and above tlic use of senduz and hendaz^ sir]
equivalent to h/nanden.
22. Skiliaz, part from each other.
Shiliamz Solav-Lioo. M',
Skiliaz. 8igurd-(^vi|). i. '1-i.
Skiliomc. Ibid. o.'^. Edd. Saiin,
Vit sjUjiust, tve tint part —
Occurs in the poem I»rinilda (st. 109) in tlio Feroic dialed
In Danish and Swedish the Avord is deponent.
23. Skiptust, interchanf/c.
i)eh' sh'pUist morguni giuf'tnn vid inn vetriun — Vatns-du;la-S.
thoy made interchanges with each other with many gifts for tliej
winter.
Also in the Fcroie.
24. Strujast, strike one another, ftr/ht. Feroic.
og motast tair, og strujast avlaji lanji. — Faroying- Sag. \i\
Foroic text.
«
ok ma-tast })oir, ok borjast nijok loingi. — Icelandi.sh text.
do jnijdtes og strode nioget lionge iniod hinandon. — Dauisli
text.
they met and fought long against each other.
at e vilde vid gjordast stalbroir, og slrujasl ikkji longur. -I
Foroic text, p. 21.
at viH f/cro/»j*7 folagar, onberjamsl oigi loingr. — Icelandic text.
at vi skuUe blive Htalbrodc og ikke slaaes Ucngor — Danish inl
that Avo should become comrades and not fight longer.
The active form occurs in the same dialect:
tojr struija jiu langji. 18.
25. Truasc, trust each other.
vol mtvttcrn j)a}ir truazc. For Skirnis. Edd. Skid.
ON THK UnriPJlOCAL PRONOUNS.
55
2(). IJnnaz. Sec Vcittaz.
27. Vr;;i/, atlaclc oaoli olhcr.
vilcat ec Mt i]) icijiir *vv/?r. ^Eglsdrocka 18. Edd. Stem.
1 will not that ye two anyry attack each other.
2S. Vcittaz , contract niiitudlly.
\y,\\ ll('l;;i ok Svava rrittti: varav, ok iinnoz forJ)0 iiiikit - -Ilid-
liiis ot Sviiva pactum ,s|»oiisalitiuiii i/itrr se conlraaerunt, et alter
\lliTiiin iiiiritico amaritnl. — lladdiiigia-Sk. between 29 and 30.
21). \^'^J)a/>, throiv hcltvrcn each other.
urpuz a o4)oni. Atl.-M. IV.). Edd. Suein.
verba inter se jaciebant.
Such is a portion of tho cxfimples that prove the recipro-
lal power of tho roHcetive or middle verb in tiie hin^ua^e
If Scandinavia; and thai, during' all its stages and in eaeh
if its derived dialeets. It eannot be donbted that to this
[ircumstaneo certain verbs in Danish and Swedish owe their
i'|jon('iit form: vi/. vis/ass, wo ti^ht (strike one another);
\i brollits, wo wrestle; ri omgass, we have intercourse witli;
Vt miilas, we meet, Swedish; vi duues^ avo fiii,'ht ; li shilles, we
prt; ('/ modes, wo nn-et, Danish. In the late.-«t Swedish
[raminar, by C. L. Daae, this reciprocal (veks(dvirkende)
power is reco<;nized and exhibited. See Udsigt over det
Hvensko Sprop,s (Jranunatik. Christiana, 1837. The same is
llio i\lolbech's Dauske Urdboi^- in vv. skHles, slaaes, modes.
Next to the Norso languages the Frencli affords the best
Instances of tbc reciprocal power of the reflective verb; as
Khdtlrc, s' aimer, s entendre, se quereller , se reconeUier , se dis-
\ukr, and other words of less frequent occurrence.
Cos (Mifans saxmuicnt, s'adoraient, se sont jetes a mes pieds en
Iruifuit. — Les Inseparables, A. I. S. 1.
Lcs licpublics Italiens acliarnes a sc delruirc. — Pardessus
(I. ()5.
This has been recognized by an old grammarian, Restaut,
rIio insists upon tho use of tho adverb enire , in order to
avoid the ambiguity of sucli phrases as '^vous V(nis dites des
injures;" "nous nous ecrivons souvcnt;" ^'Pierro et Antoinc
\e loucnt a tout moment."
By a Avritcr in the Museum (vriticum tho reciprocal power
^f the Greek middle has been indicated. For the classical
(anji'uages the question has not mot with the pro})er investi-
wtion. Passages where the sense is at least as reciprocal
OS in the line
V
I
56
ON rnn RROipROfAi, pkonouns.
XiiQUt^ X (dh'ihov Xu^trtjv kuI 7ii(ST(6aavTO — 11. vi. 23.'^,
must bo numorous.
in the Dutch luiifiuafjo tlio use of z/'rh for elknndcr is ^
peculiarity of tli(; ( Juddcrlaml and Ovcrys.scI dialects; a,
''zij lieht zich cslag(ui," for "zij hebhen elLatiilcr Rosla-^cn.''
Sco Opnierkingen onitrent den (loldersclien Touj^val, jrl
Taalkundif; Ma}:;azijn ii. 11. }>. 103.
Of tlio use of ser for himmden or hverandre, when uiuonil
bined witii the verb, we have, anionfjst other, tiu? folluwiii;:|
example in the Icelandic version of the Paradise Lost: —
Ef frii tilsyndar-
punkti hley])tu srr
planctur fram,
ok nuvtlusl mikluin gny
6 niidjum hinini. B. 6.
Similar to this are tlie phrases vi sr os igjen, wee seen
(each other) a<;aln, in Danish, and ivir sehen uns nucd('r,\\\
German. Examples from the ]\I. H. (jr. are }:^iven in theli
G. iv. The Turkish sign of the reciprocal verb is identiial
with the deir.onstrativo pronoun, /. e. {jH. This may possil
bly indicate a connection bc'tween the two forms.
Other points upim the subject in hand may be collootm!!
from the Deutsche (Jranmiatik, iii. 13. 82; iv. 451. llci"
tlie adverbial character of tiu; JNI. Ii. G. eimmdcr for einandm.
the omission of ('i)i, as in anander for (m cinundcr , and tin.'
omission (real or supj)0scd) of under in ^'tvider cin ==■ tvitkrl
eifiandc>\" are measures of the laxity of language caused bv
the peculiarity of the combination in question. At proseni
it is sufficient to repeat the statement, that for one group
of languages at least there is satisfactory proof of certain
deponents having originally been reciprocal, and of certain
reciprocal expressions having originally been reflective.
I %
ON THE CONNEXION BETWEEN THE
IDEAS OF ASSOCIATION AND rLUIlAEITY
AS AN INFLUENCE IN THE EVOLUTION
OF INFLECTION.
BEAD
BEFORE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY.
MARCH 9, 1849.
It is well-known that by referring to that part of the
Deutsche (Jrainmatik which explains those particii)ial forms
whifh (like y-cleped in Englisli, and like yesprochcn and
the participles in general in (iernian) begin with ge or y,
the tollovving doctrines respecting this same prefix may be
collected: —
1. That it has certainly grown out of the fuller forms ka
or ga.
2. That it has, probably, grown out of a still fuller form
kam or gatn.
3. That this fuller form is the (Jothic equivalent of the
Latin cum ==^ with.
Such are the views respecting the form of the word in ques-
tion. Respecting its meaning , the following points seem to
be made out : —
1. That when prefixed to nouns (as is, not rarely, the
case), it carries with it the idea of associalion or collection:
— M. G. sin^s= a journey , ga-sin\Hi = a cotnpanion; O. M.
G. pcrc^=hill; ki-pirki={ge-hirge) a range of hills.
2. That it has also a frequentative power. Things which
recur frequently recur with a tendency to collection or asso-
ciation: — M. II. G. ge-rasse(=ruslling\ ge-rumpel = crufnpling.
3. That it has also the power of expressing the possession
of a quality: —
5S ox THE CONNKXION BETWEEN TUE II»F,AH OK ASSOCIATION i^O,
ox Tin; (I in:
li
A.-S. Kiig. A.8. Latin,
fcax /tdir , gc-i\'i\\ rumiiliis.
In'ortc Itidi't, _^//'-li('ort nntlnlus.
Tliis is Ix'ijuiso cvciy oltjctt is jissociatcd with lite olgoct
tli.'it poKscs^cs it — a sen iiilh niivcs^^a wunj sea,
Tlui pri'sciit wiidr lia> little duiilit tliut tins Tuniali ;;raiii
mar ot" Dr. 'riitsiicU .supplies a similar (ami at the .'aint:
tiiiMJ u very iiitcllij^iblfj a|iplifHtiun of a particlo ((HiivHli.iit
to tim Latin cum.
Ho Ijclicvcs tliat tlio Tuniali word =^ «'//// is what woiiLl
commonly he called the si;;n of the plui'al mimhei' of tlic
|)Ci'S(tiud pronoiuis ; just as ///t'-c////< and le-ciiin would hecoim;
e(|uival('nts to nos and ms, if the tirst syllables W(!r(! uouii-
native instead of (»bli(jue, and if the preposition denoted in-
definite eonjunctien. In such a case;
iin'cifiji would mean f <'<niJoi)illi/ := n'l' ,
liu'uiii would nxcan lliou conJinHlh/ = >/)'.
Sucli is the illustration of the posnihle power of a possildo
cond)imition. TIk; reasons i"or thinkiu};- it to have a reality
in one lan^uaye at least lie in the following forms: —
1. T\\i' Tuniali word for /rtt/i is (fa.
2. The Tuniali words for /, f/aiu, and he respectively are
nr/f, ?(f/o. tif/u.
3. The Tuniali words for fie, ye, fliey arc nf/in-de, ngon-
da, n{/en-fla respectively.
4. The Tuniali substantives have no such plural. \\'itli
them it is formed on a totally dilferent principle.
5. The Tumali adjectives have no plural at all.
0. The Tumali numerals (even those which express more
tlian unity and are, therefore, naliira//{/ plural) /lare a plunil.
AVlien, however, it occurs, it is formed on the same prin-
ciple as that of the plurals of the substantive.
7. The word da = with is, in Tumali, of a more varied
ajiplication than any other particle; and that both as a jire-
position and a ;;o47-position : — daiira ::r= soofi (da = f)i, aura
;:= ?ie/f/hb(mrhood) ; du/om:^=in (with) front {face); d-ondid =
roundabout {ondul=^ circle); dale = near {le = side), ^c.
8. Prepositions, which there is every reason to believe arc
already compounded Avith da, allow even a second da, to
})rcccde the word which they govern: — daher deling = over
the earth [her =z eaiHh).
9. The ideas with me, with thee, ivith him, are expressed
liy ngi-dan, ngo-dan. and ngu-dan res]>octively; but the ideas
of with us, with you , with them arc not expressed l)y nginde-
dan, ngonda-dan, ngenda-dan; but by peculiar words — tinem
=^with us; toman -^^ with you; tenan = with them.
(iX Tin; ('i).NNKXION IlKTWKrN TIIK IKK.Vfi 01' VMS' iCIA HON ».^r, 59
Oil tli(^ otlicr liJiiid, tli(! I'tilldw iii^f ['act is, as far as it ;40cs,
a,:.';iiiist this view, a tad iijioii wliirli others may lay iiioro
Micss than \ho. pruscfnt writer. '*/J<t admits of a very varied
;i|i|)li(atit)ii. Ue8|MH'tiii;j^ its t'orm th(! fonowiiii; shouhl b(( ob-
Nivt'il: {u.) That a may l)(^ eli(h'd when it hn|i|)ons to stand
MS a prepiisition hcd'oro words whieh lte<;,in with a vowel: lor
iiii^tniice, aiihji-n, 'the vaUey'; (lnrthjcn, 'in th(! vaMey'; nmhtl,
<tli«' I'irtlo'; (hnidul, 'round ah(»ut in the; (•irc'I(!'. (h.) It ehan-
!;(',■; it^■ (( into (\ <', /, (), It, aceordini,^ to the V(»wol of the; syl-
l;il)l(,' ixd'oro which the du is phieed, or even without any
it'gard to it. Instaiu'es of this an; found in (/iriiif/, (/<n>n{/,
i^c. ; further instanees are, (fiini//i/,'i, 'into the; hut' iro/n);
diium <)V (loliim , 'in the ^rave.' (r.) As a postposition it aji-
IK'IK
Is an n: («l(/\litn , 'on the head'; tincicdun, 'on tlu^ dav
Takiiiijj the third of these rules literally, the plural pronouns
i^liiiuld end in don rather than in da and dc.
It is eonsidered that over and above the lij^ht that this
particular formation i^if real) may throw upon the various mc-
lliods by which an infiiH-tion like tlnit of tin; plural number
iiiav b(! evolved, and more especially upon the im[)ortant but
neglected phainmnona of the so-ctdled inrliiaive and exclusive
plurals , many other points of goneyal gramnuir may bo illus-
trated.
ON THE WOED CUJUM.
READ
BKFORE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY,
MARCH 9, 1849.
The writer wishes to make the word ciijiim, .as found in a
well-known quotation from the third eclogue of Virgil, —
Die mihi Damwta cnjvm pec-us?
the basis of some remarks which are meant to be suggestions
rather than doctrines.
In the second edition of a work upon the English language,
be devoted an additional chapter to the consideration of the
grannnatical position of the words mine and thine , respecting
which he then considered (and still considers) himself cor-
rect in assuming that the current doctrine concerning thoni
was, that they were, in origin, genitive or possessive cases,
and that they were adjectivc^s only in a secondary sense.
!Now whatever was then written upon this subject was writ-
ten with the view of recording an opinion in favour of ex-
actly the opposite doctrine, viz. that they were originally
adjectives, but that afterwards they took the appearance of
oblique cases. Hence for words like mine and thine there
are two views : —
1 . That they were originally casea, and adjectives only in a
secondary manner.
2. That they were originally adjectives, and cases only in a
secondary manner.
In which predicament is the word crijum? If in the first,
it supj)lies a remarkable instance of an unequivocally adject-
ival form, as tested by an inflection in the way of gender,
having grown out of a case. If in the second , it shows
how truly the converse may take place, since it cannot lie
doubted that whatever in tliis resjject can be predicated of
cujus can be predicated of ejus and hvjus as well.
Assuming this last position, it follows that if ciijiis be
originally a case, we have a proof how thoroughly it may
take a gender; whereas if it be origii-ally an adjective, ejxi^
* hora for \
ON TIIK WOUD crjUM.
61
and hiijus (for by a previous assumption tliey arc in tiio same
category) are samples of the extent to which words like it
may lose one.
Now the termination -us is the termination of an adjective,
and is nol the termination of a genitive ease; a fact that fixes
the onus prohauili with those Avho insist upon the genitival
character of the words in question. But as it is not likely
that every one lays so much value upon this argument as is
laid by the present writer, it is necessary to refer to two
facts taken from the Greek: —
1. That the class of words itself is not a class which (as
is often the case) naturally leads us to exjiect a variation
tVoni the usual inflections. The forms ov, ot, ^', and ot,', ov,
a), are perfectly usual.
2. That the adjectives og = £Oi,*,* xofog ; - :roioi;, and oiog,
arc not only real forms, but forms of a common kind. Hence,
if we consider the termination -Jus as a case-ending, we have
a phajnomenon in Latin for which we miss a (ireek efjuiva-
lont; whilst on the other hand, if we do not consider it as
adjectival, we have the Greek forms oto^' , xotog =^ nolog
and og = fV)g, without any Latin oncjs. 1 do not say that
this argument is, when taken alone, of any great weiglit. In
doubtful cases, howtver, it is of value. h\ the pres(!nt case
it enables us to get rid of an inexi)licable genitival form,
at the expense of a slight deflection from the usual power
of an adjective. And here it should be remeinbered that
many of the arguments in favour a case becoming an adjc^ct-
ive are (to a certain extent) in favour of an adjective be-
coming a case — to a certain e.rlent and to a certain extent
only, because a change in one direction by no means neces-
sarily implies a change in the r( verse one, although it is
something in favour of its probability.
Probably unius, u/lius, il/ius, and alterius. are e{i ally, as re-
spects their origin, adjectival forms with ejus, citjus, and hujus.
Now it must not be concealed that one of the arguments
which apply to words like mine and Ihihc being adjectives
rather than genitives, does not apply to words Wkii ejus, cu-
jus, and hujus. The reason is as follows; and it is exiiibited
in nearly the same words which have been used in the work
already mentioned. — The idea of partition is one of the ideas
expressed by the genitive case. The necessity for expres-
sing this idea is an element in the necessity for evolvi'"- "
genitive case. With personal pronouns of the singi '
ber the idea of partition is of less frequent occuri
t -J
hova for woru, ■>iotog^=^ciiJiis; oiog = /iwj'«s ; tog :^ ejus (18oU).
62
nx -I'lIK WOUD CVJC.U.
[ r
with most otlier words, since a personal pronoun of the s'm-
iiulur number is tlie name of a unity, and, as sucli, the name
of an object far hiSs likely to bo separated into ])arts tliaii
the nanu! of a collection. Phrases like s.itme of llwm, one nf
you, 711(1)11/ of us, (tnij of litem, few of ns, (Siv., have no jiiia-
Jogues in the singular nunibrr, such as one of me , a few oj
thee, &c. The partitive words that can cond)ine with sin^ii
lar pronouns are comparatively few, viz. /t(f/f, qumier, jxiri.
&c.; and they can all combine equally with j)lurals — lialf
of 7(s, a quiirler of tUem, a portion of vs. The partition of a
singular object with a pronominal name is of rare occurrence
in language. This last statenuiiit proves something more
than appears at first sight. It proves tliat no argument in
favour of the so-called shu/uliir genitives, like mine and thine.
can be drawn from the admission (if nuule) of the existence
of the true plural genitives ou-r, you-r, thc-ir. The two
ideas are not in the same predicament.
Again, the convenience of expressing the difference be-
tween suus and ejus , is, to a certain extent, a reason for the
evolution of a genitive case to words like is; but it is a reason
to a certain extent only, and that extent a small one, since
an equally convenient method of expressing the difference
is to be fouml in the fact of there being two roots for the
pronouns in question, the root from which we get ea, />/, e\m.
ejus, etc., and the root from which we get sui, sihi, suus, &c.
Here the paper should end, for here ends tlie particular
suggestion supplied by the word in question. Two questions
however present themselves too forcibly to be wholly passed
over: —
I. The great extent to which those who look in Latin for
the same inflections that occur in (ireck , must look for them
under new names. That two tenses in Greek (the aorist
like i-tvjt-Ga, and the perfect like tt-TV(p-a) must be lonkeil
for in the so-called douh/e form of .1 sinr/le tense in Litiii
(vie-si, fno-mordi) is one of the (ddest facts of this sort. That
the Greek participle in -^evos [rvTCToufvoc;) must be soughi
for in the passive persons in -mini is a newer notice.
II. The fact that the character of the deflection that takes
place between case and adjective; is not si/if/le but f/tnih/c
It goes both ways. The change; from case to adjective U
one process in philology; the change from adjective to case
.nnother; and both should be recognized. This is mentioned
for the sake of stating, that except in a few details, there
is nothing in the present remarks that is meant to be at va-
riance with the facts and arguments of five papers already
laid before this Society, viz. those of Mr. Garuett on the
ON* TIIU WOUU CULM.
03
Formation of Wc.rds iVuin Intlectod Cases, and on the Ana-
lysis of the Verb.
The ])apors allmlod to really deal with two series of lacts:
— (A.) J)c/linion with itlftititij of form. — In this the inH^'Ction
is still considered an infleetion, hut is dealt with as one dif-
ferent from what it really is, /. c. as a nominative int^t(>ad
of an oblique one. Some years back the structure of the
Finlandie sugg(!sted to the present writer: —
1. A series of chanj;es in meaning whereby such a term
as wvV// travcs might (^qual nuinj.
2. The existence of a class of words of which scslcrliiim
was the ty])e , where an obliqiK* case, iritli a cofivcrlible (c>-
viliKi/fiiii , becomes a nominative.
3. 'VUv. possible evolution of forms like /Iitc/i/ha, /Jtictiihum
z=lhicliiom ., fhicliiosum, from forms like /hicliilnia.
Mr. (larnett has multiplied cases of this kind; his illustra-
tions from the JJasquc being pre-eminently typical, /. c. like
tlio form aeshniiiim. If the modern vehicle called an omnilnia
li.'ul heen invented in ancient Rome, if it had had the same
n.'inic as it has now, and if its plural for)ii had be(!n omnlhi,
it Avould also have; been a typical instance.
Words of the hypothetical form /hichiba ., /hicliihum , have
not been discovered. They would have existed if the word
just quoted had been (if nsed in ancient Kome at all) used
as an adjective, omnibua cunus., onuiibit csseiht , omnibiim plau-
slnim.
(1).) Di'fleclion ivilli nupcrafUiilion. — Here th^ inflection is
(lonlt with as if it wei-e not inH(!ctional !.• t ra ^cal. This is
the case with J'qptot,'. AV^ords \\ko it~, as pro\ed by the ge-
nitive i~l-Sy and the so-called pclrifH'd (verslriiicrle) nomina-
tive cases of the German grammarians, are of this class.
ON THE AORISTS IN KA.
REAU
BEFORE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY,
MAUcii 11, 1853.
A well-known rule in the Eton Cirook Grannnar may sorve
to introduce the subject of the present remarks: — "Quinque
sunt aoristi primi qui t'uturi prinii characteristicam non assu-
munt: ed^r^xa posui, idaxa dedi , r)za misi, ei'Tca (fhvi, -iivsYxu
liili*' The absolute accuracy of this sentence is no part of
our considerations: it has merely been quoted for the sake
of illustration.
What is the import of this abnormal x? or, chan<jing the
expression, what is the explanation of the aorist in -m'.
Is it certain that it is an aoristV or, granting this, is it cer-
tain that its relations to the future are exceptional V
The present writer Avas at one time inclined to the doubts
implied by the first of these alternatives, and gave some
reasons * for making the form a perfecl rather than an aorist,
He linds, however, that this is only shifting the difficulty.
How do perfects come to end in -JtaV The typical and une-
quivocal perfects are formed by a reduplication at the be-
ginning, and a modification of the final radical consonant
at the end of words, rvn{r)ci ^ te-Tvq)-a; and this is tho
origin of the x i^^ Af'Af;i;a, t^c. , which represents the y ot tlic
root. Hence, even if we allow ourselves to put the x in
id^tj/ta in the same categov with the x in o^ioi^oxa, &c., we
are as far as ever from uie true origin of the form.
In this same category, however, the two words — and tlio
classes they represent — ran be placed, notwithstanding some
small difficulties of detail. At any rate, it is easier to rofcr
o^duoxrc and e&tjxa to the same tense than it is to do ?i'
with o^id^ioxcc and rervcpa.
The next step is to be sought in Bopp's Comparative
* English hunguiij^c, p. ISU.
<»N TltK AOUI.STS J\-KA.
65
Graniinnr. Hero we find the followiiii^ extract: — "The old
|i^lavonic dakli 4 gave,' jind .•inah)gous tbnuatioiis remind us,
hrougli tlieir guttural, which tahes the place of a sibilant^ ot'
ItliP (ireck aorists ed-r]XK, e'd'axa^ ^xa. That wliich in the old
plavoiiic has become a rule in the first person of the three
[uimhors, viz. the gulUindlznthn of an original n^ may have
pccasidually taken place in the (ireck, but carried through-
[lut all numbers. Mo conjecture lies closer at hand than that
Dt' icfjarding tbcoxa as a curnipdon of sbtoaa ," c^c
I'Tlio Lithuanian also presents a lorm which is akin to the
(ireek and Sanscrit aorist, in which, as it a])pears to me,
\i assumes the place of an ovajinal s." (vol. ii. p. 791, East-
livick's and Wilson's translation.) The italics indicate the
lords that most demand .ittention.
The old Slavonic infiection alluded to is as follows: —
SINGULAR. DUAL. PLUUAL.
1. Nes-or/t Nos-oc/iowa Nes-of//om.
2. N('s-<? N('s-oi7« N('s-oA7t\
3. Nc's-e ^Qn-osta IScs-usza.
^o\v it is clear that the doctrine to which these extracts
tonimit the author is that of the secondary or derivative
baractor of the form of x and the primary or fundamental
liaracter of the forms in d. The former is deduced from
le latter. And this is the doctrine which the present writer
loukl reverse. He would just reverse it, agreeing with the
ii<tinguished scholar Avhom he quotes in the identification
f the Greek form with the Slavonic. So nuich more com-
lon is the change from A", ff and the allied sounds, to s, z,
c, than that from s, z, Sic. to A", ff, that the a priori pro-
abilities are strongly against Bopp's vicnv. Again, the lan-
uages that preeminently encourage the change are the Sla-
onic; yet it is just in these languages that the form in k
i- assumed to be secondary. For ,s' to become /«, and for h
io become k (or ff), is no improbable change: still, as compa-
ed with the transition from k to *', it is exceedingly lare.
As few writers are l)etter aware of tlu; phicnomena con-
oc'tod with the direction of lett(>r-cliang<s than the philolo-
gist before us, it may be worth while to ask, why lie has
pinrod them in the present instances. lie has probably
lone so because the Sanscrit forms were in s; the habit of
Considering whatever is the more Sanscrit of two forms to
k the older being well-nigh universal. Nevertheless, the
liffeionce between a language which is old because it is re-
[ircsontcd by old samples of its literature, and a language
diich is old because it contains primary forms, is nuvnifest
6G
ON TIIR AORISTS INKA.
upon a very little reflection. The positive nrguniont, how.
ever, in favour of the k being the older form, lies in tlie|
well-known plia;noinenon connectod with the vowels e and j,
as opposed to a, o, and u. All the world over, c and /liavei
a tendency to convert a k or [/, when it precedes them, into|
.S-, z, sh, zh, ksh, f/z/t, /.v//, and (hh, or some similar sibilant,
Hence, as often as a sign of tense consisting of /r, is foil
lowed by a sign of })erson beginning with e or /, an s liasi
chance of being evolved. In this case such a form us t(fi-
h](ia^ ecfJhjOag^ i(pi?.tj6F., may have originally run i(fik}y/M,\
iq)LXr]xai^, fcpClrjxe. The modified form in (? afterwards ex-
tends itself to the other persons and nund)ers. b^uch is tk
illustration of the hypothesis. An ol)j(Htion against it lies
in the fact of the person which ends in a small vowel, hmA
only one out of seven. On the other hand, however the
third person singular is used more than all the others piij
together. With this influence of the small vowel other can
ses may have cooperated. Thus, when the root ended in A
or y, tlie combination x radical , and x inflexional would Iw
awkward. It would give us such words as sXfx-xa, h:.
words like rirvn-xa, iyQUTC-xu^ 1)eing but little better, ml
least in a langufige like the Orcndc.
The suggestions that now follow lead into a wide field I
of inquiry; and they may be considered, either on their me
rits as part of a separate question , or as part of the prout
of the present doctrine. In this latter respect they are not I
altogether essential, /. e. they are more confirmatory if ad-
mitted than derogatory if denied. What if the future k\
derived from the aorist, instead of the aorist from the fii
ture? In this case we should increase what may be callcl
our dynamics, by increj..'^ing the points of contact betwedil
a k and a small vowel; this being the influence that dotei-
mines the evolutiim of an .v. All the persons of the future,
except the first , have « for one (at least) of these vowels -
xv\\)-a-(o^ xvt\>-(S-iig^ tvijj-G-ei^ rvrp-s-TOv^ i^c.
The moods are ecpially el'ficient in the supply of small voxvols,
The doctrine, then, now stands that k is the older foria
but that, through the influence of third persons singular, in
ture forms, and conjun^-tive forms, so many s-e& bec.iniel
developed, as to supersede it except in a few instances. TIk
Latin language favours thi?: view. There, the old future like
cap-s-o, and the preterites like vixi (ric-si) exhibit a small |
vowel in all their persons . c. //. vic-s-i, ric-s-isti, vic-s-i/, i^cc
Still the doctrine respecting this influence of the small vowl
in the way of the developement of sibilants out of guttin'aM
is defective until we find a real instance of the chaniic as
Bunipil.
As if
fiiuiial value o
the Sorbs of
lorin of the pi
tlio Lithuanic
with the Serb
L'liaractoristic
eases it is tha
m:sa
Sing. 1.
non'/.f
2.
llOSZf
3.
noszf'
Dual 1.
no.szfi
2.
noHz^
3.
UOSZ(?
I'lur. ].
noszfi
2.
noszr
3.
nu.sz<(
ON THE AOUISTS LV~KA.
67
I
Buiiiod. As if, for tlic very purpose of illustrating the occa-
ioiial value of obscure diaUfcts, the interesting language of
tlic Serbs of Lusatia and Cotbus supplies one. Here tbo
^'oiin of the preterite is as follows; the Serb of Illyria and
Sho Litliuanie being placed in juxtaposition and contrast
Iwilli the Serb of Lusatia. Where a small vowel follows the
iliaractoristic of Hhe tense the sound is that of sz) in other
cases it is that of ch [kfi)
I.ISATIAX.
Sill},'.
1.
non'Mich . .
2.
uoHxesze . .
3.
nos/,rsze. .
Dual
1.
noHzachn'C
2.
noHzestaj .
3.
noH'AeslaJ .
I'lur.
I.
noszar//;n//
2.
uosizesce .
3.
nus'Mc/tu .
II.T.YUIAX. MTIIIIANIC.
(l(n\o>io , doniie Inesziau. .
(/onoso, (lonijo nosziei . .
Jonese, donije nosziei . .
1 nesziewa.
r/ones».;:uio, doiiijijsino
rfonososte, donijestc .
r/onesosze, donijeszc .
neszietn.
neszie.
noszicmo.
uosziete .
ucszic. . .
LKXTlSn.
nessu.
uessi.
nesse.
nossaiii.
nessat.
nesse.
ON TIIK n<if
IV.
METRICA.
ON THE DOCTRINE OF THE CAESURA I^|
THE GREEK SENARIUS.
FUOM TIIK
TRANSACTIONS OF THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY,!
JUNE i3, I«43.
In respect to the ccesura of the Greek tragic senarius, tlie
rules , as laiil down by Porson in the Supplement to his Pre-
face to the Hecuba, and as recognised, more or loss, by tliei
English school of critics, seem capable of a more general
expression, and, at the same time, liable to certain liiiiita-
tiuns in regard to fact. This becomes apparent when wel
investigate the principle that serves as the foundation to these
rules; in other words, when wo exhibit the rationale , or doc-
trine, of the caesura in question. At this we can arrive by I
taking cognizance of a second element of metre beyond that
of quantity.
It is assumed that the clement in metre which goes, ini
Avorks of diflferent -writers, under the name of ictus mctricus,|
or of arsis, is the s:\mo as accent in the sense of that md
in English. It is this that constitutes the ditference between |
words like tyrant and resume, or survey and survey ; or (to take
more convenient exaniples) between the word Auyust, useii
as the name of a n)onth, and auyust used as an adjective,
Without inquiring how far this coincides Avith the accent and
accentuation of the cla:;sical grammarians, it may be stated
that, in the forthcoming pages, arsis, ictus metricus, and
accent {in the Kmjlish sense o/' the ivord). mean one and llw'
same thing. With this view of the arsis, or ictus, we may
ask how far, in each particular foot of the senarius, it coin- 1
cides with the quantity.
OS TMK nofruiNT: ok riir. r.vKsiiiA i\ nir. cannK skn'mmts. 69
First Foot. — In tho first place of a tragic s(!narins it is a
iiiiattor ()(' inditt'eroncc wlictlier tlic arsis fall on tlio first or
|s,('i'(»nil syllable, that is, it is a niattt-r of iiuliflVrciicc? \vlif'-
Itlier tlic foot 1)0 sounilcd as fi'/ranf or as n'sumc, as Jiif/i/st
lor as (iiif/ust. In tho folloAviiig lines the wcjrds j^xoj, TraAcci^
hiniQ, Ttra?, niay be pronounced either as ijxa, nakai, fCnfQ^
ktVftj, or as ^xfi), nakuC^ fi7i£()\ Tivdg, without any detriment
to the character of the line wherein they occur.
'i/xM v£KQ(ov nev&^tova y.at axorov nvXag.
ndkat KVvtjyeroiivTa v.ca f.UTQOvfA£iov.
ElTtEQ JtXKtOt,' f(Jr' £fJO^ Xa 7TUr()0i>SV.
Tii'ag 710& idgag xaa(h f.ioi i}oc<^ez£.
or,
Hkco vekqcov K£vd'^(ova y.ai axorov nvXag.
Ilakai nvi'i]y£tovi>Ta xra neTQOv(.i£vou.
Faiteq' diKCdog fffO e^iog r« ncaQo&H'.
Ttvag noiy idgag xaade jiiot &uc(^eTe.
Second Foot. — In the second place, it is also matter of
|iii(lifferonce wln^ther the foot be sounded as August or as august.
iLi tlio first of the four lines quoti'd above we may say either
rinQav or vfMQCOV .^ without violatinj:^ rhythm of the verse.
Third Foot. — In this part of the senarius it is no longer a
|inattor of indifi'erence whether the foot be sounded as August
i)r as (ingust\ that is, it is no longer a matter of indifference
miictlior the arsis and the quantity coincide. In the circum-
Istanoe that the last syllal)le of the third foot 7nust be accen-
tod (in the English sense of the word), taken alon<i; with a
jsecond fact, soon about to be exhibitid, lies the doctrine of
ho pcnthimimer and hephthimimer ctcsuras.
The proof of the coincidence bfitween the arsis and the
[quantity in the third foot is derived partly from a posteriori,
martly trom a priori evidence.
1. In the Supplices of yEschylus, thePerscc, and the ]>ac-
Iclite, three dramas where licences in regard to nu^tro are
pro-eniinently conmion, the number of lines wherein the sixth
jsyllable (/. e. the last half of the third loot) is without an
jarsis, is at the highest sixteen, at the lowest five; whilst in
the roniainder of the extant dramas the proportion is uu-
Idouhtf'dly smaller.
1. In all lines where the sixth syllable is destitute of ictus,*
|the iambic character is violated: as —
Qo^yA^v TTEQn^avTEg fioyig noXXa) ttoi'm.
Avoiv yiQC loiv 8e 6rQav)jy£ixni (pvyrj.
70 ON THR UOCTIUNi: OF TIIK CAKSURA IN TIIK ORF.EK .SEN'ARIUH.
ON THE DOC'T
Tlu'so are facts wliidi may bo vorifi(Ml citlicr \>y ici'oiriii.l
to tlio tra<;c(lians, or by coiistructlnjjj sonarii like tlio liin.
b\st (juotod. The only dit'ticulty that occurs arises in detiri
niinin;;-, in a (b\'ul lan<i,ua};o like tlio (irock, tlio abs(;iico i.ti
nicsonco of the arsis. In, this matter tlic writer lias sati.sfii-,
liim.self of tlio truth of the two followiii;,^ pronositious;-!
1. That the accentuation of the ^grammarians denotes soiiil
modification of pronunciation other than that wliich coiistif
tutes the difference between At'ujust and aiif/usi; since, if nl
were not so, the word dyyikov would be soumled like ma-\
rily , and the word ayyt^oav like (Jisdble; Avhich is improbalilr
2. That the arsis lies upon radical rather than inflectioiiii
syllabl(!s, and out of two inflectional syllables upon the tii,;
rather than the second; as (iksji-co, (ileii'-rcG-a, not (iktn-a.
^Xtip-aG-a. The evidenci; upon thoe points is derived friiiij
the structure of lanj;ua^e in general. The onus probundi liiJ
with the author who j)resumes an arsis (accent in the Kiip
Hsh sense) on a ?/o/<-radical syllable.
Doubts, however, as to the pronunciation of certain woid^l
leave the pi'cciso number of lines violatinjj^ the rule givcJ
above undetermined. It is considered sufficient to show that,"
wherever they occur, the iambic character is violated.
The circumstance, however, of the last half of the tliinlj
foot recjuirinp^ an arsis, brings us only halfway towards t!i;
doctrine of the caesura. With this must be combined a .^i'
cond fact arising out of the constitution of the Greek Ian- 1
guage in respect to its accent. In accordance with the views
just exhibited, the author conceives that no Greek word lias
an arsis upon the last syllable, except in the three followiii;;
cases : —
1. INIonosyllables, not enclitic; as (JiptoV, ndi^, %d^av^ (Jjuoi,,
V(oi> ^ vvv ^ iV:c.
2. CircuiiiHex futures; as vs^d, re^ico, &.c.
3. Words abbreviated by apocope ; in which case the pcmiM
timate is convcnted into a final syllable; dco^i ^ cpBi3Ba'&' xi\
tllT
{VMy
&c.
Now the fact of a syllable Avith an arsis being, in Greek |
rarely final, taken along Avith that of tiic sixth svllablc
requiring an arsis, gives, as a matter of necessity, the lii-
cumstancc that, in the Greek drama, the sixth sylhible slinll
occur anywhere rather than at the end of a word; and tliis
is only another Avny of saying, that, in a t)-agie senarius, tlie|
syllable in question shall generally be followed by other syl
lables in the same word. All this the author considers as ni|
truly a matter of necessity, that the objection to his view ot
the Greek cajsura must lie either airainst his idea of tlio I
of a word ; as
ON THE DOCTRINE OF Till: C'AKSIUA IN TIIK GKDEK SF-NAUIUS. 71
iiatnro of the accents, or nowhere; since, tliat beinjj tul-
linittcd, tlie rest I'oMows of course.
As the sixtii sylhihle must not bo iinal, it nuiyt be fol-
[lowtiil in the saiiK; word by (UK! .--ynabh',, or by more than one.
1 . The sixlli sijlldOU' followed hy one stjllitble in the same word.
— This is only another name foi" the seventh syllabh; oceur-
Iring J*t the end of a word, and it gives at once the liephthi-
'uiiuicr ca.'.snra: as —
/fxo) VE'AiHov Kivx^^Kova KOI (SzoTov TivXag.
[y.TtjQioig y.kadoi'aci' ti-eGrifiueivi,
(hu)v re ircduvcov xb y.ui Greiayiic<x(ou.
2. T/ie snr/h syllable followed by Iwo {or more) syllables hi the
siimc nurd. — This is only anotlier name for the eighth (or
some sylhibh; after the eighth) sylhible occurring at the end
of a word ; as —
Aa^TTQov^ dvvaazu^ efiTrgeiioi'zcd^ fai'>£(t.
Kow tliis arrangement of syMables, taken by itself, gives
anything rather than a hephthimimer ; so that if it were at this
ponit that our investigations terminat(!d, little would be done
towards the evolution of the rationale of the caesura. It will
appear, howevcjr, that in those cases where the eircuin-
stancd of the sixth syllable being followed by two others in
the same words, causes the eighth (or some syllable after
the eighth) to be final, either a penthimimer caisura, or an
equivalent, will, with but few (!Xee|)tions, be the result. This
we may prove by taking the eighth syllable and counting
liack from it. What follows this syllable is innnaterial: it is
the number of syllables in the same word that precedes it
that demands attention.
1. T/ie ciyhth syllable preceded in the same word by nothing.
— This is equivalent Ui the seventh syllable at the end of
the preceding word: a stat(! of things which, as noticed above,
ijives the hephthimimer ca'sura.
2. The eighth syllable preceded in the same ivord by one syl-
lable. — This is e<|uivalent to the sixth syllable at the end of
the Avord |)r(H'e(ling; a state of things which, as notie(!d above,
rarely oceurs. Wh(;n, bow'ever, it does occur, one of the
three conditions under which a final svllable can take an arsis
must accompany it. Each of those conditions requires notice.
<t}. With a non-enclitic tnono-i>y\\a\Ao. the result is a pen-
thiniimer ca'sura; sinc(3 the syllable preceding a monosyllable
is necessarily final.
72
(»x Tiin Dor ruiNi: «ir riii; CAKsricv iv nir. (iUF.r.K si-naum's,
ON TIIK D'»(
Uy.cii at^i^uv Gov K\vx((i uviiaioa y.tjcaQq.
No roinark lias boon inndo liy critics upon linos constnutcil
in this niaiuHT, sinco tlio cicsura is a ponthiiniinor, and cnn
8('(|uciitlv tlif'ir rules am nndistnrlicd.
/i). W'itli //o///-syIlal»i(! circuiullox futures constituting; tlic
tliinl foot, there AV(tul(l \n\ a violation of the current v\\V>
respeclin;; the cit'sura. Notwithstanding this, if tlio view
of the ])resent paper ho true, there would bono violation of
the iambic character of tho scnarius. Against such a line i\i
Attj'w TO aov viiito 7ro&ci\i'ov avXiov
there is no ar;junient a priori on tho score of tho iambic
character boinpj violated; whilst, in respect to objections dc
rived from evide c a posfcriuri , there is sufficient reason fur
sueh linos being rare.
y). ^^'ith /;o/y-syUables abbreviated by apocope , "vvo have
the state of things which the nictrists have recognised tnulor
the name of (piasi-ca.'sura; as —
Kei>T£ixs f.i)j (fiidiaiy* lyto ] 't^xdj' IlaQtv.
.T. — T/ie cif/h/h aylldltlc preceded in (he some word hy IW'i
syllfdtlea. — This is <Mpiivalent to the tilth syllable oceurriii!;
at tho end of the word preceding: a state of things wliicli
gives the penthimimer ciusura; as —
0(^(0/ (ioOTSlCOV al'nciTCou I ft£ nQOOyBXci.
ytctfiniiovg (ivvaatag i^i7ig(:7toi'\Tr<g ctiifiQi.
A^v'/ov UAfO 7T()i')GyikcoC)C{ awftarog.
4. T/ie eiff/ilh sy//(d>/e preceded in tlie same word hy three or
more Uiku three syihdjles. — This is equivalent to the fourth (ur
some syllable preceding the fourth) syllable occurring at the
end (»f the word preceding; a state of things which would
include the third and fourth feet in one and tiie same word
This concurrence is denounced in the Supplement to the
Preface to the Hecuba, wheni, however, the rule, as in the
case of the quasi-ca*sura, from being based upon merely em-
pirical eviileneo, ro(piires limitation. In lines like —
Kta xctXXu rroAA iir£iy.c(6cii | div.caov ?;i',
or fan imaginary example),
Toiq aoiGiv ((a':TiSi]CtTooccoiG\t,i' civSgaGt ^
there is no violation of the iambic character, and consequontlv
no reason against similar linens having ])e('n writt(>n; altliouirli
from the av(>rago jirojiortion of (Jreek words like ezsixaGai
and aa.rid)]GTQO(poLaiv , there is every reason for their being
rare.
After tho details
just given the recapitulation is brief.
ON THE DnrxniXE OP Tlir CAESURA IN TIIK QUEER SENARH'S. 73
1. It was oseontial to tlio clinrnctcr of tho senarius that
tlio sixtli PvllaMc, or latter lialf of the tliird foot, should
have an arsis, ictus iiietricus, or ncoeiit in the Eii{j;lish sense.
To this condition of the iambic rhythm the Greek tragedians,
eitlicr consciously or unconsciously , adhered.
2. It was the character of tlie Greek lan;;uajje to admit
an arsis on the last syllabic of a word only under circum-
stances comparatively rare.
;i. These two facts, taken together, caused the sixth syl-
lable of a line to bo anywhere rather than at the end ot a
word.
4. If followed by a single syllable in the same word, the
result was a hophthimimer caesura.
5. If followed by more syllables than one, some syllable
in an earlier part of the line ended the word preceding, and
80 caused cither a penthimimer, a quasi-ca;sura, or the oc-
currence of the third and fourth foot in the same word.
G. As these two last-mentioned circumstances were rare,
the general phenomenon presented in the Greek sonarius was
the occurrence of either the penthimimer or hephthimimer.
7. Respecting these two sorts of cajsura, the rules, instead
of being exhibited in detail, may be replaced by the simple
assertion that there should be an arsis on the sixth syllable.
From this the rest follows.
8. Respecting the non-occurrence of the third and fourth
feet in the same word, the assertion may be withdrawn en-
tirely.
9. Respecting the quasi-csesura, the rules, if not altogether
withdrawn, may be extended to the admission of the last
syllable of circumflex futures for to any other polysyllables
with an equal claim to be considered accented on the last
syllabic) in the latter half of the third foot.
! !
KEiMAlMvS ON THE USE OF THE SIGNS OF
ACCEN'r AND QUANTITY AS (lUIl)ES To
THE riiONUNClATION OE WORDS DEIU
TED EUO^r THE ( lASSK AE EANGUAGES.
AVnn EAllTJCUEAll IIEI EKENCE TO
ZOOEOGICAL AND ]U)TANICAL
TEIIMS.
KItOM TlIK
ANNALS AND MAGAZINE OF NATURAL IILSTORY,
JUNE, l-'^j'.).
The text upon wliicli tlio followirifi: remarks liavo sufjj^^cst-
ed tlieinsclvcis is the Accentu.atod List of the JJritisli Lr-
pid()j)tor.i, witli J lints on the Derivation of the Nanies,
puhliished by tlie Kntoinoh)r>ical Societies of Oxford ami
Canibridj^e; a useful contribution to scientific terniinolo|i:y —
useful, and satisfied with beinc^ so. It admits that natura-
lists may be unit nrned , and provides for those who, with
a love for botany or zoolo^xy, may have been denied the
advantage of a classical education. That there are many
such is well known ; ami it is also well known that tlicy
liave no love; for coniuiittin;;' themscdves to the utterance of
Latin and (Ireck names in the ])resem'e of investigators wlio
are more erudite (though, i)erhaj)s, less scientific) than thciii-
selves. As a rule, their pronunciation is inaccuiate. It is
inaccurate without being uniform — for the ways of goiiif,'
wrong are many. Meanwlnle, any directions toward the
right are welcome.
In the realities of educational life there is no su(di tliin^^
as a book for unlearned men — at least no such thing as
a good one. There are make-shifts and make-believes (id
ON THE USE OF THE SlCiXS OF .VrTENT AND QUANTITY.
75
inftniUim; but tlicrc is no such an entity as an actual book.
Some aro written down to the supposed level of the reader
—all that are so written belnj;- useless and ottensive. Others
are cncundx'red with extraneous matter, and, so encumbered,
err on the side ot" bulk and superfluity. Very rarely is there
anything; like eonsisteney in the supply ot" information.
Tiie work under notice supposes a certain amount of i^mo-
ranie — ignorance of certain accents and certain (juantities.
It meets this; and it meets it well. That the work is both
a safe and reliable guide, is m^ither more nor less than what
we expect from the places and persons whence it has pro-
ceedecl.
It is likely, from its very merits, to be the model on which
a long line of successors may be formed. For this reason
the principh^^ of its notation (t"or thus we may generalize
our expre;-sion of the principle upon wdiich we use the signs
of accent and (juantity as guides to pronunciation) may bo
criticised.
In the mind of the present writer, the distinction between
accent and qnantity has neither been sufficiently attended to
nor suificiently neglected. This is because, in many respects,
they are decidedly contrasted with, and opposed to, each
other; whilst, at tjie same time — paradoxical as it may ap-
pear — they are, for the majority of practical purposes, con-
vortilde. That inadvertence on these points should occur,
is not to be wondered at. l*rof( -sional grammarians — men
who deal with the purely pliilological (pn-stions of metre and
syllahiHcation — Avith few exceptions, confound them.
In English Latin (by whi(di 1 mean Latin as pronounced
by Englishmen) there is, in practi(>e, no such a thing as
(piantity; so that the sign by which it is denoted is, in ninf;
cases out of ten, superfluous. Mark flw arcent , and the nuan-
U(y will lake care of //se//\
I say that there is no snch i\ thing in English Latin as
quantity. I ought ratln^r to havi; said that
J'jif/lish //uant/fh's are not Lalin f/iianfi/ies.
In Latin, the length of the syllable is dt t(!rmined by the
length of the vowels and eonsoiands comldned. A long vowel,
it followed in the same word by another (/. e. if followeil
by no consonant), is short. A short vowid , 'if followed by
two consonants, is long. In English, on the other hand,
long vowels make long, whilst short vowels mako short, syl-
lahles; so that the (piantity of a syllable in English is de-
tonnined by the qnantity of tin
in Lr.tin. in English it is Ion
Knglish, long in Latin.
»•
vowel. The / in jiius is shoit
The e in mend is short in
76
ON rnK usK or riii: signs of .vrifRNT and quantttv.
This, however, is not all. There is, besides, the follow-
ing; metrical paradox. A syllable may be iiuKbi lon^^ hy
the very fait of itis being short. It is the })ractiee ot" thu
English language to signify the shortness of a vowel by doub-
ling the consonant that iollows. Hence we get such words
as jiKU'fl , linolly , massirc, &.c. — words in which no one cun-
siders that the C(»nsonant is actually doubled. For do wo nut
pionotince j)i/(c(f and jiilii'd alike? Consonants that appear
double to the at/c are common enough. Keally double con-
sonants — consonants that sound double to the ear — nre
rarities, occurring in one class of words only — viz. in com-
pounds whereof the tirst ebnuent ends with the same sound
with which the second begins, as soNf-lesa , hook-casi', &c.
The doubling, then, of the consonant is a convcmtional
modi! ot ex[)ressing Ihe shortnt^ss of the vowel that precedes,
and it addresses itscdf to the eye rather than the ear.
But does it addr(,'ss itself to the eye only? If it did, pi-
tied and i>il(etl , bi'ing sounded alike, would also be of the
same ((uantity. We know, however, that to the English
writer of Latin verses they are not so. We know tiiat the
first is short ipliied), the latter long {pitied). For all this,
they are sounded alike: so that the dit1^"erence in quantity
(which, as a metrical fact, really exists) is, to a great de-
gree, conventional. At any rate, we arrive at it by a se-
condary process. We know liow the word is sp(dt; and wo
know that certain modes of spelling give certain rules of
metre. Our senses her(i are regulated by our experienc(!.
Let a classical scholar hear the tirst line of the Eclogues
read —
Patulic tu Tityre, &c.,
and he will be shocked. He will also believe that the shock
fell on his ear. Yet his ear was unhurt. Ko sense was
offended. The thing which was shocked Avas his knowledge
of tlie rules of prosody — nothing more. To English ears
there is no snch a thfng as quantity — not even in hexa-
meters and pentameters. There is no such thing as quan-
tity except so far as it is accentual also. Hence come the
following phenomena — no less true than strange, — viz. (I)
that any classical metre written according to the rules of
quantity gives (within certain narrow limits) a regular re-
currence of accents; and (2) that, setting aside such shocks
as affect our knowledge of the rules of prosody, verses writ-
ten according to their accents only give metrical results,
English hexameters (such as tln^y are) arc thus wri.t(>n.
\w the infer' uces from these remarks there are two assump-
ON THE USi: OK Till: SKiNS OF A<;CI:N'T AN'l) QUANTITY.
/ /
tions: 1st, tliat tlio olJ-lasliioned modo of prouuncitition be
adhered to; 2nd, tliat when wc pronounce Greek and Latin
words as they are pronounced in the recitation of (J reek and
Liitui poetry, -we are as accurate as we need be. It is by
means of tiiese two assumptions that wo pronounce Tilijre
and iHtlulce alike; and I argue that we are free to do so.
As far as the ear is concerned, th(i a is as long as the /,
on tiie strength of the double I which is sup})ose(l to come
after it. It does not indeed so come; but if it did , the sotuul
would be the same, the quantity diiferent (for is not iialuUe
jtrunounced imUule'i). It would be a quantity, however, to
tlic eye only.
This pronunciation, however, may be said to be exploded;
for do not most men under fifty draw the distinction which
is here said to be neglected V Do not the majority make,
or fancy they make, a distinction between the two words
just quoted V They may or they may not. It is only certain
that, subject to the test just indicated, it is immaterial what
they do. Nine-tenths of the best modern Latin verses were
written under the old system — a system l)ased not upon
our ear, but on our knowledge of ceitain rules.
Now it is assumed that the acctn-acy sufficient for Lnglish
Latin is all the accuracy required. Ask for more, and you
get into complex and diflicult qu'.'stions respecting the j)ro-
luuK'iation of a dead language. Do what we will, we can-
not, un one side, pronounce the Latin like the ancient Ko-
nians. Do what we will, so long as wo keep our accents
riiiht . v.u eannot (speaHng Latin aftt-r the fashion of Lng-
lishuKn) err in the way of quantity — at least, not to the
ear. A short vowel still gives a loeg syllable; lor the con-
sonant which follows it is supposed to be doubled.
Let it be admitted, then, that, for practical purposes,
Tilyre and patukc inay^ be proiionnced alike;, and the neces-
sity of a large class of marks is avoided. Why writ(!, as
the first word in the book is v.jitten, l^ipilio'itiilw? Whttlur
the initial syllable be sound' <l i)iij>p- or pnpe- is indiifereni
So it is whether the fourtli be uttered as -utvn-, or -Oiih~.
As far as the ear is amrcnir^l they are both long, because
the consonant is is doubled. In dreek, nc/TmLklLovvidca is
as long as nuniXXiiovidca.
Then comes iMaclinon, where the sign of ([nantity is again
useless, the acce>.t alone being sufficient to prev<'nt us saying
cither Makhaon or Mahaon. The a is th(> a in fate. "We
could not sound it as the a in fa^ 'f ^^'<' would.
VierUhv. — What does the ouantity tell us hereV That
the / is pronounced as the / in the Greek niovog , rather than
78
ox TUP. Vfil) or TIM', St(iS"S 01' Af'CKNT AN'l) QirANTITY.
as tho i in the l^atin pins. But, in Kn{;lish Latin, we pro-
nonnco both alike. Suvrly l*i'tris and Pic'rhlw tell us all
that is needed.
Crula'(jl. — Wiiether lon«j^ or sliort, the i is jji-onouncod iIkj
same.
Sf.U(i'pis, liapw, and Na'pi — The (") hero prevents us IVoiii
siyi;;- Jti'ipjHC and y<}/>ji{. It wouhl certainly bo ineh'^am
and unusual to do so. Tested, liowevc^r, by the ear, tlic
words riippw and niippi take just the same phicc in an Kng-
lish Latin verse as nipc-fc and m'tpe-i. Is any one likoly
to say sf'tH/jt/ifs? Perhaps. There ar<! those who s.ay JJtaiiwi
lor JJitina. It is very wrong to do so — wron,:;-, not to say
vul{j;ar. For the purposes of metre, however, one is as good
as the other; and herein (as aforesaid) lies tho test. Tin;
real false quantities would be Diana and siiinapin] but against
those the accent protects us. ^'or is tin; danger of siiyiii;'
siiu'ipph considerable. Those who sny iJhuina are those wlm
connect it with AniKt and would, ])rol)ably, spell it with
two n'x,
('(tnf(t?nl'ti('S. — All that the first (") docs here is to prevent
us saying cardami'niu's. The real false quantity would b»'
car<la'mmine>i. The accent, however, guards against this.
The second (") is useful. It is certainly better to say car-
dafNtN-rrs than carffftmi/i-ess. because the c is from the ( J reek ?;.
And this gives us a rule. Let the (') be used to distinguisji »/
from e, and a from o, and in no other case. I would not say
that it is necessary to asc it even here. It is better, how-
ever, to say jMarhi'ion than Machmn. By a parity of r(!a-
soning, tho ("), rejected in the work before us, is sometimes
useful. Let it be used in those derivatives where e rejilacos
ri, and o replaces co\ cff. having written Machutln , write, as
its derivative, Machtinnidw — /. <*. if the word be wanted.
This is the utmost for which the signs of quantity am
wanted for English Latin. 1 do not say that they are wantid
oven for this.
One of tho mechanical inconveniences arising from tlio
use of tho signs of quantity is this — when a long syllal)lt!
is accented, two signs fall upon it. To remedy this, tin.'
work before us considers that the stress is to be laid on the
syllab'c ;;/Yr^^/////7 tlic arceii/. Yet, if an accent mean anytliiiii:',
it means that the stress fall on the syllable which it stands airr.
A few remarks upon words like P'wrida', where the accent
was omitted. — Hero two short syllables come between two
long ones. No accent, liowevcr, is placed over either. Kvi-
dently, quantity and accent are so far supposed to coincide',
that -the accentuation of a short vowel is supposed to niako
ON TIIK USK or TIIK SKINS Ol' AfCKST AND QUANTITY.
79
WO pro-
II u.s all
us i
roiii
Thr
njf ill list
it look like a lon«!^ ono. It is a nmttor of fact, that if, on
a word like Cassinpc , we lay an accent on tliu last syllable
but one, we shock the cars of scholars, especially metrical
OIK'S. Does it, however, lenj^^th(!n the vowd? The editors
of the work in question seem to think that it docs, jind,
much more consistent than scholars in fjeneral, hesitate to
throw it back upon the preceding syllable, which is short
also. jMotrists have no such olijection; tlx^ir practice! being
to sav Cassiopc without detriment to the vowel. The ento-
mologists, then, are the more consistent.
Tlicy are, however, more consistenr, than tliey iiecil be.
If ill! accent is wanted, it niiiy i'all on the shortest of all
jKissilile syllables, (iranting, however, that (.'tiss/ojtc (whe-
ther the o l>e sounded as in /lOfe or /lol) is rcpuiinaut to
metre, and ('((sst'ojte to theory, what is their remedy y It is
I'irliiiiily true that (Vtssfopc is pronounceable. I'oj)e writes —
''Like twinkling stars the misrcllanu's o'er."
No man reads this tnisct'llunien; few read it tnlscelluniea. The
mass say fn/s'irf/tnift's. Doing this, they nink<! the word a
ijua(lrisylliibl(!; for less than this would tall short oi" the de-
mands of the metre. Thcv also utter a wonl which makes
r«A'.sw/^t' possible. Is ('('(ssiajx'^ liow(n'(!r, the sound V I'robably
not. And hero authors must speak for thems(lves: —
''Take, e. //., Cassiopc and Corf/rrt/ : in words like the for-
mer of these, in which the last syllable is long, there is no
;,q-catcr difficulty of })ronuiiciatioii in laying the stress upon
the first syllal)l(> than upon the second."
True! but this im[)lies that w(! say I'dssiojiii Is -c , how-
ever, one bit the longer for being accented, or can it bear
one iota i!(ore of accent for being longV No. Tak(> -at
{\'i)\\\ peal , and -/ from pel, and the result is pe — just as
lon,<;- or just as short in one case as the other.
The same power of accenting the first syllable is ''parti-
eulurly the case in those words in which tin? vowel / can as-
sume the power of y. Latin scholars are divided as to the
proper accentuation oi' mn//rn's , Tulliida , and others: though
custom is in favour of maUvri's, tmt/ /crcs appears to b(! more
correct." lie it so. L(ft Diulicrrs be iniih/crcs. ^^'hat be-
couios, however, of the fourth syllable? The word is no (jmi-
flrisyllable at all. What is meant is iliis: — not that certain
fjuadrisyllables with two short vo,»-eIs in the middle are
ilitfienlt to accentuate, but that tlu^y are cc^rtain words of
which it is difficult to say wheth(U' they are trisyllables or
(|uailrisyllal)les.
For all practical purposes, however, words like Cassiopc
80
ON THE U8K OP THK .SKiNS OF Af-'CENT AND glANTlTV.
are quadrisyllables. They are, in the way of metre, chori-
ambics ; and a chorianibic is a quadrisyllable foot. Thov
■were pronounced Cassiope, &c., by Enj^lish writers of Latin
verses — when Latin verses were written well.
Let the pronunciation which was pood enough for Vincent
Bourne and the contributors to the Musai Etonenses be good
enough for the entomologists, and all that they will IIkh
have to do is not to pronounce cratwgum like slrnlagcm, car-
daminc's like Tfieramerws , and vice versd. Against this, accent
will ensure them — accent single-handed and without any
sign of quantity — Cardamines , Thenimenes, craUcgum, stra-
tagem.
V.
CimONOLOGICA.
ON THE MEANING OF THE WORD ^APOS.
HEAD
BEFORE THE I'lIILOLOUlCAL SOCIETY.
APRIL 11, 1845.
Tlic words GKQog and sariis are the Greek and Latin forms
Idfa certain term used in the oldest Jiahylonian ehronology,
the moaning of which is hitherto undetermined. In the opi-
inion of the present writer, the sarus is a period of 4 years
and 340 days.
In the way of direet external evidence as to the value of
I the epoch in question, we have, Avith the exce})tion of an
I unsatisfactory passage in Suidas, at the hands of the ancient
I historians and according U) the eurrcr.t inteipretations, only
the two following statements: —
1. That each snrus consisted of 3600 years (fry).
2. That the first ten kings of Babylon reigned J 20 sari,
[equal to i:^2/)()() years; or on an average 4I{,200 years apiece.
With (lufa of this sort, we must either abandon the chrono-
logy altogether, or el^e cliange the power of the word i/ear.
The first of these alternatives was adopf^ 1 by Cicero and
Pliny, and doubtless other of the anci(Mits - conlcmiiumus
iclifiin fhtbi/fon/t/s el cos qui e Cauatso ac/i .s/fiii:i obserrt/nfcs ?ni-
Jiieris et modihus sicllarum ciirsus perscqunnhir; contlonHcmus
\mqmim lios aul slullilia' aut vunilalis aut iminiilr)ili(r tpii cccclxx
tnillia (tfinanim, ut ipsl dicitnf, /nuHumciK/s romprr/icHsa conti-
nent. — Cic. (Ic Divinal.^ from Coi-ys Ancioit J''n/f///icN/s. Again
\~e diverso Epif/cfics a/n/d Bahi/lo)iius ix'C.W annnnt/it obscrvn-
\tmes sidennn cocd/ibus /afcrcid/s iiiscnfda< dorcl , r/raris auclor
inpiimis: qui minimum licroaus cl Critodcmus cccclxxx anno-
6
82
ftM Tllr; MKANlN'fl OV tltli WOIin dUQO^.
rum. — Pliny, vii. 50. On tlio otlior hand, to alter tlic va!ii,>
of the word hog or annus has been the resource of at leas:
one modern philologist.
Now if we treat the question by what may be called tli
lenlitUve method, the first step in our inquiry will be to Hii!!
some division of time whieh shall, at onee, bo natural \\\\
itself, and also sliort enough to make H) sari possible \m\>
of an average human life. Fortius, even a day will bo tuii
long. Twelve hours, however, or half a vvx^^il'iQov, will give
us possible results.
laking this view therefore, and leaving out of the account
the 2yth of February, the words hoq and annus mean, not
a year, but the 730th part of one; .'JfiOO of which makfi a
sarus. In other words, a iw//.s'=1800 day-times and him
night-times, or 3G00 half vvi^^^eqk, or 4 years + 340 days,
The texts to which the present hypothesis applies are cu
tain passages in Eusebius and 8yncellus. These are found-
ed upon the writings of Alexander I'olyhistor, Apollodorus,
Berosus, and Abydenus. From hence we learn the lcii}:tli
of the ten reigns alluded to above, viz. 120 sari or 591 yoars
and odd. days. liehjns of this period are just })ossible. It is
suggested, however, that the reiyn and life are dealt witli
as synonymous; or at any rate, that some period beyond that
during which each king- sat singly on his throne has been
recorded .
The method in question led the late Professor llask to a
different power for the word sarus. In his /Eldsle Hebrimk
Tidretjnung he writes as follows: "The meaning of the su-
"called sari has been impossible for me to discover. The
"ancients explain it difll'erently. Dr. Ludw. Idelor, in his
^^Handbuch der malhematischen and lechnischen Cfirono/oyie^ i.
"207, considers it to mean some lunar period; without how-
"ever defining it, and without sufficient closeness to enable
"us to reduce the 120 sari, attributed to the ten ancient kings.
"to any probable number of real years. 1 should aliiio>;
"believe that the sarus wi^s a year of 23 months, so thattlie
"120 sari meant 240 natural years." p. 32. Now Kask's iiy-
pothesis has the advantage of leaving the meaning of the
word reif/n as we find it. On the other iiand, it blinks the
question of ett] or anni as the parts of a sarus. Each doc-
trine, however, is equally hypothetical; the value of the
sarus, in the present state of our in((uiry, resting solely upon
the circumstance of its giving a plausible result from plau-
sible assuinptions. The da/a through which the present \\ritor
asserts fVr his explanation the proper amount of probability
are contained in two passages hitherto unapplied.
1-2 hours), in i
naoa Xakdatc
ON Tin: MI'.ANINO OI" Tin: Woiil) o'aoo;.
S3
le account
1. From Kiisrbius — ts ( lieroHiis ) sannn rx anuis 3000
\ciiit/l(ii. Addit cddni iiescio (jium ucruiii ac i?osiiiu: neruiii ait
liiiii initiis consdtrt', sosuiii an tit's (iO. Sic tile de vclvrnm ntore
](iiiiios ciimpukil. — 'rraiislation of the Armenian Kusebius, }>. 5,
{\v\n I'f'i(///it'ida J/is/oricontt/i Crticinutn , p. -WW): I'aris, IS 11.
2. IJcrosus — Gagos df loriv t^axooicc xal Tpt(J;|;fcAta fT»/,
vt'igog dt t^axoOia, (Jw0(Jot,* t^ijXovTcc. — From (,'ory's /Indent
t'nif/tiwnts.
Now tli(! assumed value of tlu; word translated i/ear (vii-.
12 hours), in its application to tlie passages just (piuted, {jfivea
|(ir the powers of the three terms tiiree divisions of time as
iiiitund as could he exj)et:ted under the cireunistane.es.
1. Haooog. — The sosus = 'M\ days and 30 nights, or 12
lidurs X 00, or a month of 30 days, ^t)v TQiaxov&t'iiiii^Qos.
Aristotle writes — i] ,aj}i/ ylccxavLX)] fxvov ^(Qog roi) ii^iav-
Tou, TuVTo de t<JTLV ti^k^ca i%r'ixovxa. — From Sealiger, JJe
Emcudiitionc Tctnixjiutn , p. 23. Other evidence occurs in the
i-aino iiage.
2. NiJQog. — The neiusz:^. 10 sosi or months =- the old Ko-
iiiiui year of that duration.
'.). Hdgog. — The sarus= G fieri or 00 months of 30 days
oacli; that is, Hve proper years within 25 days. This would
bo a cycle or annus nuignus.
All these divisions are probable. Against that of 12 liours
no objection lies except its inconvenient shortness. The month
ot 30 days is pre-eminently natural. The year of 10 months
was common in early times. In favour of the sarus of live
years (or nearly so) there are two facts: —
1. It is the multiple of the sosus by 10, and of the nerus
by ().
2. It represents the period when the natural year of 12
months coincides for the first time with the artificial one of 10;
since 00 months = years of 10 months and 5 of 12.
The historical application of these numbers is considered
to lie beyond the })ale of the present inquiry.
In 8ui(las we meet an application of the principle recognised
by Kask, viz. the assumption of some period of whicii the
m-m is a fraction. Such at least is the probable view of
the following interpretation: Hrl'POI — ^hgov xal agid^^iog
:tttga Xakdaioig^ oi yccQ qx aaQoi Ttoiovaiv iviavrovg /3(?z/i',
0? yiyvovxai itf svLavrol xal ^ijveg 6%. — From Cory's Ancient
Irofjmcnfs *.
* This ploss in soino MSS. is tillod up tlms: —
^ Zttpof. (itTQOV Mat nQi9fi6g ttkooc XaXfica'oLg. oi yag px' arigoi noioiiaiv
tviuvTovs (Jct^', >t«t« rr}v tmv Xaldaicov ip^rpov, einsQ 6 acigog noisi
/if/VKS ctkrjviavKov oh^', o'l yivovxai it] ivtavxol xal tifjvts f^.
81
OS Tin: Mi;AsiN'(i i>v riii; wnnu aago:.
In .loaoplius wo find tho rocojjjnition of un anniix w/w/nw
containing' as many frtj as tlic ncrus did: STtfira xcd di' uQh
tijv xril Tjjv tvxQriazCav , av e Jif voovv aGTQoloyiai^ xal yn)-
^fTQiccg nksov jryi' zov C^sov aiirors* miQccdiiiv niifQ ov/, i^i
afjQjaAwt; aurofg nQoiiTtetv ^it) ^iiOuaiv e^ccxoGiovg fviuviov;
diK TooovTov yaQ 6 fieyccg eviuvrog TthjQovtcd. — Aiftir/. i. :;,
The followinfi; doctrine is a sn^^cstion, viz. that in the
word .sY/,s7/,s' we have the II(d)rew dd •-— s/.r. If tliis l)o tnir,
it is probable that tlie sostts itself wa.s ordy a secondary di
vision, or sonu; other period nndtiplicd by six. Snch woull
be a period of five days, or ten hrj (so-calhul). \Vith tliis
view we get two probabilities, viz. a snbdi vision of the nientli,
and the alternation of the numbers (i and 10 throuf'hout; i.i:
from the hog* (or 12 hours) to the sarus (or fivo ycarsj.
After the readin;:,- of this paper, a long discussion followcl
on the question, how far the Sftrus could be considered ii>
belonging to historical chronology. The Chairman (Professor
Wilson) thought there could be no doubt that the same prin-
ciples which regulatcnl the mythological periods of the Hin-
doos prevailed also in the Babylonian computations, altliou^'Ii
there might be some variety in their application.
1. A mahfnjtKja or great age of the ilindoos, comprisinj
the four successive yiiyna or ages, consists of 1,. '{20,000 yoais.
2. These years being divided by 'MM), the number ot days
in the Indian lunar year, give 12,00(1 periods.
3. By casting off two additional cyphers, these nund)ors
are reduced respectivcdy to 132,000 and 120, the nund)ois
of the years of the )>aroi of the ten Babylonian kings, whilst
in the numbers 12,'}(>0 and 3000 we have the coincideiue
of other elements of the com])utation.
* In tho courHC of the evonin}; it was stated, that e.von by wiitprs
quoted by Syiu-elliis tzoq had heeii triinslafed ilnji; ami a reference \\;\<
made to an article in the Canihridire I' hilolojrloal Mnseuni On the Dup
of f/ir H'cck, for the opinion of Oailly in modern, and of Anniaiiii^
and I'anodorus in aneiiMit tiini's: ravta txr] i^usQag iXoyi'aavTO oroia
auxcJg. -J). '10, vol. i. See also p. I'i,
VT.
BIHIJOGlUrmCA.
mnTJOGiiAniiCAr. tsotice of tuv.
WORKS ON THE I^IIOVLNC'IALISMS OF
II01J.ANI) FROM TArEUS BY YAN DEN
BERG] I AND IlETTEMA IN lllE
TAALKUNDIG MAGAZJJN.
HEAD
BKFORE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCU'^T.
Van den IUtj^Ii , Taat. Mat/, ii. 2. 19;i-2l().
GuoNiNGKN. — Latinuan, J'roeii' vitn kleine taalkundifje bij-
(Init/eii tot bcler kennia van den tonyval in de Provincic Grunin-
iji'ii. — (jroninj^on I h22.
J. Sonius Swuiifiin.'vn, Comment: dc diahrto (lro)iin<jana , etc.:
una cum aerie vocabulorum, Groninyanis propriun/m. — (ironing.
h27.
Zdiimenapraak tnssr/ien Pijler en Jaap dij malkadr op de ivetj
mlmuHen boeten SlIjntHpoorte. — Oroningcr Maandscrift, Mo. \.
Also in Laurnian's I'roeve.
Mcinie Se/tuitpraatjes. — By the sanio antlior, IS3G.
List van Groninysehe ffoorden. — By A. ('uniplrmcntary to
till! wvks ot" Launnan and Swaaj-man. With notes by A.
ilo Jjifior. — Taalkundig JMagazijn, second part, third number,
pp. .Tn^3;{4.
(ironinach Taaleii/en door J. A. (the author of tlie precc-
ilinj,' list). Taalkundig jMagazijn, iv. 4, pp. G57 — 090.
Haize na Do de Cock. — Known to Van den Bergh only
tlirough the newspapers.
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
//
A
«<
1.0
I.I
1.25
■£Ue 12.5
11^ Ilia
"^ lis IIIIIM
1.4
1.6
V]
<^
^i
^>
."^1*'
%>**
V
/A
Photographic
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716) 872-4503
&
M
^
<\
86
i!im,i(»iii;Ai':iicAi, MiTic!; of tiih works ^^c.
Siibdialects iiidicatcMl l)y J. A. ms existing; ((f) on tlio l''ii( ,.
land frontier, {!/) in tlio Fens.
1j. Van ]>olhnis. — (Joll(!Ction of (ironinj^on nnd Oiuiiiclaul
Avords not found in llalnia's Lexieon; '.villi notes l)y ("liumtt.
Steenwinkol, and IMalnoe. j\IS. In tlii? library of the ^laat-
schappij van Nederlandsclie Letterkunde.
OvEiMJt^EL. — J. II. llalbertsnia, /'rocrc tuni cni JJ'nonla,
bockje van lui Ovcrijxt'lscli. — Overijsselsclien Ahnanak vuur
Oinllicid en Lcitteren, 1S.']().
]\I. AVinlioif, Jjindrcchl rar Aiicri^xcl . hvccdc dnd; . met nrL'
(philoloiiieal as well as otiierj adiilcclxciihtffcn (hjor ■/. A. ('Iidliihi
— (,'anii)en, 17h2.
'W \\. Van jNIarle, Sdmciixjtrdki' fiissr/ioi r/i snait/,- zan //.
as (Icr (jdukki(j nrvl in Ic mcnif/lc zini en en lu'crcn-krccht il.r
ffk-n hoc of ha zt', op ilc marki (c JJcvenlcr van vcryiintjc vrij-
(lag. — Ovorijselsclien Almanak, t^c, itl si/jira.
Over (le Tn-enf/isrhe Vora/en en Klanlnvijz'njinijen ^ <hior ,/. //.
Jh'hreni^
Taalkundiii' jMa
gazijn^
iii. ;{. pp. :{:{2— ;{!J(i. h:i;i,
Twenlher Brul'ffeleed. — Overijssolselien Alnianak.
Dunibar the Younger (V). ■ — Three lists of words and phra-
ses used prineijially at Deventor. j\lS. In the libraiv nt
the IMaatscdiappij van Nederlandsclie Letterkunde.
Drawings of twelve Overijssel Towns. Above and beiioatL
each a copy of verses in the respective dialects. ]\I8. of tli-
seventeenth centniy. Library of the ]\Iaat?cliapi)ij van >.:
derlandsche Letterkunde.
(Jeldehlam). — H. I. tSwaving, Opr/ave van eenhje in iU'l-
(terland gehrnikelijke woorden. — Taalkundig Magazijn, i. I,
pp. 305.
Ihid.— Ihid. ii. L ])p. 7()— SO.
Optnerkingen omlrenl den (lelderschen Tongval. — Ibid. ii. 1.
pp. 39S — 42(j. I'he fourth section is devotrtl to some pe-
culiarities from the neighbourhood of Zutphen.
N. C. Kist, Over de ver n'issiingvan zedelijke en zinne/ijl.i'
Hoedanigheden in sommige lletawsehe Idio/iswen. — • Nieuwe W'n-
ken der IMaatsch. van Nederl. Letterkund. iii. 2. 1834.
Slaaltje van Graafschapsela' landlal. — Proeve van Taalhwi-
di/k' Opmerkingen en BedenUngen, door T. (1. C. Kalckholl. —
Vaderland-3che Lctteroefeningen for .June 182(i.
Appendix to the above. — Ihid. October I S20.
Het Zeumerroaisel: a poem. 1834? — -Ivnown to Van dcii
Bergh only through the newspapers. ])('lieved to have bocii
published in 1834.
Ef Se/iaassen-riejen , en praolparlicken fnssen Ifarmenen Dur-
teld. — CJeldersche Volks-AInianak, I83r>. Zutphen Di.ilcrt,
r.ii'.noOKAriiKAr, noi'H'i-; or inr. woijks vltc,
87
[ic fishoikcrmm. — Geldersehe \'olks-Aliiianak, 1S36. Dia-
lect of ( >v('r \'('lu\ve.
Hue Mc/s/cr Maorfcn baor(f/nan baos Joosten en sclial dcirin-
(/(■//. — Gt!ltl<'i'st'lie \'olks-Alniannk, JS-SO. Dialect of I iijni.
iipf/dir ran ccnitjc in (icJdvrhDuI (/('hn(il,cUJ/,e trourdcn ac. —
II. 1. Swavin^'. — Taalk. ISliv^. iv. 4. pp. 'M)1 — \VM).
.Uinlcckcninyen Icr vcrhctcrinfj en uHhrcidinij dcr opmvrkinoen
mlrcnl den Geldcrsclicn Tunyvul. — TaaL ]\Iag. iii. 1. pp.
:jij-so.
A. \'an (Ion J)er^li. — A\\)rds from the provincial dialects
(it the Vclinven; with additions by H. T. l''olnior. — i\18.
Library of the Maats( hap})ij van Kederlandsclie Lettcrkundc.
Handbook, containing;' the explanation and etymoloay of
si'veral obscure and antiquated words, t\:c. occurrinpj in the
(ieUU'rland and other ncighbourinji' Law-books. — l^y J. C.
('. V. ll[asselt]. — iMS. Library of the Maatscliappij van No-
ilerlandsche Letterkunde.
Holland, — Schceps-pnial , ten overJijden ran Prints Mau-
rila van Oranr/c. — lluy<iens Korenbloonieni, B. viii. Also in
Lulofs Nederlandscho Spraakkunst, p. 351; in the Vader-
laiulsche Sprcekwoorden door Sprenger van Kyk, p. 17, and
hvitli three superadded couplets) in the ]\Ineniosyne, part x.
p. 7().
L'rederoos Klurhten. — Chiefly in tlie Low Anisterdan; [plat
Ainsterdamsch) d i a h ■ c t .
Jlooft, IJ'arenar met den pot.
Suffr. Sixtinus. — Gerard ran J'etsen. Ainst. 1(387.
Bilderdijk, Over een and Amalerdamsch J'olksdeuntjen. —
Vaderlandschc Letteroefeningen, ISUS. Reprinted, with an
appendix , at Leyden 1 824.
P)ilderdijk, liawbeklay; in fjemeen Zamen Jmsterdamsclten
/w/i^(Y//. — ISajaarsbladen , part i.
Gebel, Schevininffsch Visscherslied. — Almanak voor Blij-
gf!ostif:en.
1. Boertige Samenspraak , fer heihjrocte bij een hnreJiJk.
2. Sawenspraak orer de liarddrarerij te Valkenbvn/ en aan
heel llaagaehe Schoaiv.
'■u Hoertif/e Samensj)raak tassefien Jfeeip en Jan-buiir. — These
tiireo last-named ])Oems occur in Oedichten van .1. Le Francq
van Ijcrkhcy, in parts i. 221, ii. IbO, ii. 207 respectiv(dy.
Tuist fnsse/wn .fe/iittes en Agamemnon. Seluutpraatje ra)t eenen
liotr; of luimige rertaling ran het l*-' Doek der Iliati. by J. E.
\an Var(den. — ]\In(miosyne, part iv. Dordrecht, 1824.
The same by H. W. and 1). F. Tydeman in the Mnemo-
syne, part iv. Dordrecht, 1S24.
88
mBI.")CiRAPHICAT. NOTICi: OF THi; WOUK
v.s k!^(
Nonrdhollandsch TaaleUjcn, door Nicolas Jiocts. — Taalk. Mn-
gaz.
iii. 4. pp. 510 — .")!(), and iv. 15. ])p. .'{(iT) — 372.
Jjist of Avortls and phrases used by the Katwijk Fisheniicn,
— IMS. Library of the Maatscha})pij van Nederlandscho Lrt-
terkundo.
Dictionary of the North-HoUand Dialect; chiefly collectoil
by Agge Roskan Kool. — j\bS. Ibid.
Zkaland. — Gedicht opt innemen vaii sommiyc schanaen en ik
Merkc stad J/idst. Sf-c. 10-12. Le Jeunc; Volkszangcn, p. I'jii,
Brief van ecnc Zuidhi'vchnuhchc Ikwrin, nan haren /oun.
diencndc bij de Zecun'sche landclijke SchullcriJ. Zeeuwt^clif
Volks-AImanak, 1830.
Over licl Zeeiiwsc/ie Taa/eif/en, door ]\Ir. A. F. Siffir. -
Taalkundig ]Magazijn i. 2. \i\\) — 171.
Notes upon the same, by Van A. D. J[ager]. — Ibid, [i,
17')— 177.
Taalkundif/e Aantcekeninyen , door IMr. J. H. lloefft. — Ibid,
1. 3. 248—256.
Collection of words used in Walchercn. — j\IS. Library
of Maatschappij van Nederlandsche Letterkunde.
Collection of Avords used in States-Flanders. — IVIS. Ibid.
North brabant. — J. H. Hoefft, Proeve van Brcdfrnch
taa/eif/en, (^e. — lireda 1830.
J. L. Verster, Words used in the IMayoralty of IjoscIk-
MS. Library of Maatschaj)j)ij van Nederlandsche LettorkunJe,
Jkwisii. — KIwotjc, If'aar binje? hof Conferensje hoi) de rer-
trekkie van de Colleesje hin de Poor loeyce ache Koff'y' ai/ssic, hu-
ver de gemaaqn^erde bal ondnaskert. — Anistei-d.
Lehrrhede hower devravwen, door Raphael Noenes Karwaljo,
Hopper Rhabbijn tn I^resburg; in Wibmer, de Onpartijdige.
— Amst. 182(K"p. 244.
Negro *. — New Testament. — Copenhagen, 1781, and Barbv.
1802.
The Psalms. — \^i\vhy, 1802.
* From Tnal. Mag. iii. 4. 500. In the 8(jtli number of the Qiiartpii}
Review we find extracts from a New Testament for the use of the N'
fjrocs of (xuiana, in the Talkec-takee dialect. In this there is a largi
infusion of Dutch, althoug-h the basis of the language is English.
VII.
GEOGIIArillCA.
OX THE EXISTENCE OF A NATION
BEARING THE NAME OF SERES Oil A
COUNTIIY ( AEEEI) SERWA Oil
TERRA SERICA.
FROM
THE CLASSICAL MUSEUM OF 1846. VOL. 3.
Tlio following train of thought presented itself to the writer
upon the perusal of Mr. James Yates's learned and inter-
esting work entitled Textrinuni Antiquoruni or an account
of the art of weaving among the ancients. With scarcely a
ingle exception the facts and references are supplied from
that work so that to the author of the present paper nothing
belongs beyond the reasoning that he has applied to them.
This statement is made onc(! for all for the sake of saving
a multiplicity of recurring references.
The negative assertions as well as the positive ones are
also made uj)Ou the full faith in the exhaustive learning of
the writer in question.
Now the conviction that is come to is this, that no tribe,
nation or country ever existed which can be shewn to have
borne, either in the vernacular or in any neighbouring lan-
i;uage, the name Seres, Serica, or T(.'rra Serica or any equi-
valent term, a conclusion that may save some trouble to the
inquirers into ancient geography.
The nation called Seres has never had a specific existence
under that name. Whence then originated the frequent in-
90 (IN Tin; Kxis iKNfr, ok a natmn unAuiNO thi: nami; S.v..
(lifMtions of sinli .1 nation rccuiTinj:;- in tlio writln^is of tlio
anciciitsV 'Hie doctrinf!, i'oiindcd npon tlio facts of .Air. Vatcj
and laid down as a |»roposition , is as follows. —
That the name under which the article s///,^ was intnuln.
(mmI to the (IreeUs and Konians woro the appearance! of n
(Jentihi adje(tiv(! and that the imaginary root of the accro.
dited adjective jiassed for the sulistantivt' name of a natidn.
Thus, in the ori;;inal form ser/r, the -/>■ had the a])i)(','ir-
ance of hein;;- an adjectival tcjrnunation , as in Mcdic-m
J^ersN'-iis i'<cc, ; whilst srr- was tr(>ate(l as the substantiv(> iimihi'
of a nation or poo])le from avIuuico the article in (picstion
(i. e. the scifr artiide) was derived. The Seirs therefnp;
were the; hypothetical j)roduc(!rs of the article that bore tluir
name {scrir). Whether this view involves more improbabilities
than the current one will be seen from the forthcoming' ob-
servations. —
1. in the first [)b'ice the crude ^'orm .svvvc was neither Latin
nor (ireek, so that the -ic could not be adjectival.
2. Neither was it in th(> simpler form acr- that the tenu
was introcbiced into tin; classical lang'ua,ii,es so that the ad-
jectival -ic nu_i>ht be appeiuled afterwards. —
3. Tlie name in question wliat(!vt!r mifi;lit liave been its
remote orifiin was introcbiced into (ireq^u; from the Seiiiitic
tongues (])robably the J/hoenician) and was the word p'"*:
in Isaiah XIX. 9. where the pi (the -ir) is not an adjectivn!
ap})endage but a radical ])art of the word. And here it iiiav
be well to indicate that, except under the improbable suppor-i-
tion that the Hebrew name Avas borrowed from the Greek or
Latin, it is a matter of indifference wlietlierthe word in qins-
tion was indigenous to the ^Semitic Jianguages or intnxhuod
from abroad, and also that is a matter of indifference whotiier
silk was known in the time of the Old Testament or not.
It is sufficient if a term afterwards a])plied to that article Ava?
Llcbrew at the time of Isaiah, (^f any connection betAVCfii
the substance called pi-i':j and a nation called Seres there is
in the Semitic tongues no trace. The foundation of the pre-
sent scepticism originated in the observation that the suppo-
S(k1 national existence of the Seres coincided Avith the intro-
duction of the term seric into languages Avliere ic- Avas an
adjectiA'al affix. —
As early as the Augustan age the substantive -SVvr.s' ap-
pears by the side of the adjective Scricus. In Virgil, Ho-
race and Ovid the Avords may be found and from this tiiiift
doAvuAvards the express notice of a nation so called is found
through a long series of Avriters. —
ISJotAvithstanding this it is as late as the time of Mela be-
).\ I'liK i;xisi'i;.\<'i; oi' a nation r.r.AitiNc Tin; na>u; i^(
01
foro we find nny .lutlior iiHMitidnina- with detail and jirfci-
sidu M f:<'(i;^rajiliical nationality for tho Serot<. ''lie (^Ida)
(liscribos tlicin as a Acry lioiicst ]km)|)1<? wlin l)rou;j,l)t what
thr V had to H(dl, laid it (h)wn and went away and then rctnrn-
(il tor tlif ])rico of it" ( Vatos j). IS!) Now this notice is
•iiivtliiuii' rather than (h'finite. Its aceiiracy moreover may he
>iisj!('(tcd, since it helon^s to the amhiunous tdass of what
iiiav ho called convertible descriptions. The same story is
told of an African nation in Herodotus IV. Kill.
io the statement of ^fela wo may aihl a notic(! from Am-
iiiinims IMarcelliiius of the f|nict and ])eac(\'d)h^ character of
the S(n-es (XXIJI. (5.) and a statement from the novelist Ilelio-
(Idriis that at the nuptials of 'rhea<i,(!nes and Chariclea the
aiiihiissadors of the Sr^rcs canu; hrinjiin*;' the thread and
Avobs (if their spiders (Aethiop. X. ]>. 4i)4. (Jonnnrdini).
Now notices more detinite than th(! above of the national
(■xi!^ten(•e of tlio Seres anterior to the time of Justinian we have
nunc whilst suhserpiontly to the reiij'n of that emjx'ror tluM'o
is an ('((ual silence on the ])art botli of historians and .i;eo-
p-apliors. Xeith(!r have modern ethiuturapliers found un-
rqnivocal traces of tribes hearin*;- that nauiC.
The ])robability of a confusion like the one indicated at
the connnencM'ment of the ])aper is incrt'ased by the facts
stated in p. 222. of the Textrinum. Here we s(;e that besi(U)s
Paiisanias, Hesy(diius, IMiotius and other writcu's give two
sonses to the root .syv-whicli they say is (1.) a worm (2.)
the name of a nation. Probably Cleuiens Ak'xandriinus does
tlio same vij^ia %qx^6ov ^ y.ai (jrJQag ^Ivdixovg ^ xa) tovg TTfQi-
fQyovg jioa^vxag %aiQtLV smnag. A ])assaiL!,e from Uli)ian (Tex-
trimnn p. 102) k\ids to the belief that (jrJQCcg here means
silk-worm. Vestimentorum sunt onniia hanca lincaque, vel
si'rir(( vol bombycina.
Finally the probability of the assumed confusion is veri-
tiod by the statement of l^rocopius ccvTij de ioriv ^ ^iftu^u,
f| I'jg fi(6ifc(6t TTiV sGd-rJTcc Igydtii^Gd-nL ^ rjv naXai \U:v"FAXr\vtg
M}]dL}irjv sxdlovv ^ xavvv 61 (jtjQLXt]V 6voudt,ovaiv. (l)e Bell.
P(Tsio. I. 20.).
Militating; against these views I find little unsusceptible of
ex])lanation. —
1. The expros'^ion arjQLXK diQ^iara of the author of the Pe-
liplns Claris Erythrar-i means skins from the silk country.
2. The intricacy introduced into the question by a passage
of Procopius is greater. In the account of the first intro-
duction of the silk -worm into Europe in the reign of Justi-
nian the nu)nks who introduced it having arrived from In-
ilia stated that they had long resided in the country called
92 C)\ THK KXISTENCF, OF A NATION IlKArUNr, Tlin NAME ^^(\
Sorinda inlinl)i(0(l by Indian nations wlioro tlioy had loarnorl
liow raw silk niijulit he. produc^id in tlio country of tlm
lionians (Toxtrinuni p. 2',i\). This is so much in favor of tin:
root Sor- l)einj;- frcntilo, but at the sanio time so mucli against
tho Seres boinf;- (Jhiiicse. Sanskrit scholars may porha])s al-
just tliis matter. The Serinda is probably the fabulous So-
rendib.
In tlie countries around the orip;inal localities of the silk-
worm the naiDC for silk is as follows —
Tn (Joroan
Sir.
Chlnoso
sc.
IMongolian
sirkck.
Mandehoo
sirghc.
It is the conviction of the present writer tliat a nation
called Seres had no geographical existence.
ON THE
Biyrw
CJ
BEFOT
It is consid(
between the L
nesus Cimbricj
improbability
sucli a connec
concurrent bel
(■nee. This, he
following can
the knowledge
tions conquerei
and indefinite :
"iving- any fui
the (Jinibri wa
of the geograp
that thus their ;
wards until it 1
htnd, where tl
graphical kno\
1,'ettiiig farther
of the languag
ncd in order, :
Of Sallust a
home of the n
intimation of
that country.
nostris, Q. Ca
Consul absens
ON riTE EVIDENCE OF A CONNECTION
BETWEEN THE CIMBIII AND THE
CJI EllSONESUS CIMBRIC A.
UK AD
BEFORE THE nilLOLOGICAL SOCIETY.
FKUKUARV 9, 1844.
It is considered that the evidence of any local connection
between the Cinibri conquered Ly Marius, and the Cherso-
iicsus Cinibrica, is insuthcient to count(!rbaIanco the natural
improbability ot' a long and difficult national inioi-ation. (Jf
:<utli a connection, however, the identity of name and the
euncurrent belief of respectable writers are prima facie ( vid-
ince. This, however, is disposed of if such a theory a;? the
following can be established, viz. that, for certain reasons,
the knowledge of the precise origin and locality of the na-
tions conquered by JMarius was, at an early period, confused
and indetinite; that new countries were made known without
j;iving any further information; that, lience, the locality of
the Cimbri was always pushed forwards beyond the limits
of the geographical areas accurately ascer^ 'ned; and finally,
thiat thus their supposcl locality rc^trogradf ntinually north-
wards until it fixed itself in the districts of -leswick and Jut-
land, where the barrier of the sea and the increase of geo-
graphical knowledge (with one exception) prevented it from
ij;etting farther. Now this view arises out of the examination
of the language of the historians and geographers as exami-
ned in order, from Sallust to Ptolemy.
Of Sallust and Cicero, the language points to Gaul as the
home of the nation in question ; and that without the least
intimation of its oeing any particularly distant portion of
that country. ''Per idem tempus adversus Gallos ab ducibus
nostris, Q. Csepione et M. Manlio, male pugnatum — Marius
Consul absens factus, et ei decreta Provincia Gallia." BelU
01 o\ 'iiii; KVinKVci; or A coWi'C ilov I'.ilTWKI'N iHi; ciMl.itl \(
dS' Tin; i:vii
.hit/urlh. III. 'Mi)so ill(! Maritis — iiitlticuti'.s in lliiliaiu (la|.
loiuiii maxiiiias c(»j)ia.s roprcssit." C/rrro </.' J'ror. Consul, \:\,
And iicri! an objection may b(^ antiripat(Ml. It is iindduiitidlv
tnu! that even it' tin; (Jiiiil)i'i iiad nrj^inalcd in a loi-alitv si,
distant as tlie Clicrsoncsc, It would liav(^ been almost iiiijinv.
sil)I«! tt» liav(! made sudi a tact aceuratfdy understood. Vit
it is also trun, that it' any material difVcrenei; had (■Ni>tiii
between the Cindiri and the (iauls oi'daul, sueh must liav-
been fanuliarly known in l^onu;, since slaves of both im>.
must there have been common.
(.';esnr, whose evidence; ou<^ht to be conclusive (inasimul.
as ho know ot" (Jormany as W(dl as of (Jaul), lixes them in
the south of tho Marno and tSeinc. This wu learn, njt trmu
the direct text, but from inf(;renco: ''(Jallos — a Jielgis M;i-
trona ot Sefjuana dividit." Jicll. Call, i. 'M5el<.;as — s(»l(,s
esse qui, patruui nostrum memoria, omni (iailia, vex;it,i,
Teutones (Jimbrosquc intra fines suos in<;redi prohibueruut."
Hell. Gall. ii. 4. IS'ow if the Teutones and Cinibri had movnl
from north to south, they would have clashed with the bel-
g;o first and with the other (Jauls aft(M'wards. The couvcim.
however, was the fact. It is ri^ht hero to state, that tln'
last observation may be explained away by su])posing, either
that the Teutones and Cinibri here meant may be a remnm
of the confederation on their niurn , or else a portion that
settled down in (Jaul upon their way; or finally, a division
that made a circle towards the pbicc of their destination in
a south-east direction. None of tlu^se however seem the plain
and natural construction; and I would rather, if reduced tn
tlio alternative, read ^'(Jt'iffum/a" instead of ^^Gallin^^ than
acquiesce in the most probable of them.
Diodorus Siculus, Avithout defining their locality, (hal?
throughout with the Cinibri as a Gaulish tribe. Besides this,
he gives us one of the elements of tho assumed indistinctm^s
of ideas in regard to their origin, viz. their hypothetical
connexion witli tho Cinnnerii. In this recognition of what
might have been called tho Cimmeriun theory, he is followeil
by Strabo and Plutarch. — Diod. Sicul. v. 32. Slntho vii.
Plutarch. Vit. jVariL
The next writer who mentions them is Strabo. In con-
firmation of the view taken above, this author places i\v
Cinibri on the northernmost limit of tho area geographically
known to him, viz hci/ond Gaul and in Germany, between
tho Rhine and the Elbe: rav da reQadvav., cog sizov, oi'fif'
nQoOccQXTioi naQtjKovOi tw Slxeava. rv(OQit,ovTKi, d' dm) rav
exjiokav rov 'Prjvov kafiovxsg rrjv dQ^rj^ f^^XQ'' ''^^'^ 'V/A/JfOj.
Tovtav de etol yvaQL^ataroL iJovyaupgoo zs xal Kc^(iQOL
(is iiii: i;vii)KN('i: (ir a cdn.vi'.ciion iir/rwKi-.v Tiir, cniiuii Sn\ '.)5
(lyvcoOTU )jiiiv tdriv. [\\. iv.) I'urllicr jtroi)! that this was
the tVoiiticr ot" thd Uoiiian world wc ^(.'t iVoni th»! statciiicnit
which soon follows, viz. that 'Hhiis umcli was known to the
Kdiiiaiis tVoni tluMT succcsst'ul wai's, and that nior*' wonlcl
luivc hern known had it not bci-a tor the injnnitiun of Au-
musIus forbidding' his j^cntM'als to cross tin; Klhc" (li. iv.)
N'cjh'ius I'atcrculus aj^rccs with his cont('iii[)t)rary Straho.
He idac'cs tht-ni beyond the iJhino and deals with them as
(icnuaiis: — "tnm Cimbri ot Tentoni transceiider<! iJhenuni,
iiiultis niox nostris snisquo cdadibns nobiles " (ii, \).) "Ktl'usa
— iminanis vis (Jornnuiaruin •ic.'ntiuni quibns nomen (Jinibris
ot Tcutonis crat." (Ihid. 12.)
F ■0111 tlio (Jcnniinia of Taeitus a well known ])assa^(! will
1)0 considorod in the sequel. Tacitus' locality coinciiles with
that of Strabo.
hulcmy. — Now the author who most mentions in detail
the tribes beyond the Elbe is also the author who most push-
es back the Cimbri towards the north. Coincident with his
iuqiroved information as to the parts southward , he places
them at the extremity of the area known to him: Kav/jti,
01 uft'^oi'fg ,u£X9^ ■'^"^ ^yJkjiiov TtoTauov' iq)i^iji; dh im aviivu
r^s' Ki^jiQixrjg XBQGovrjaov IJd^irvtg^ avrtjv de trjv X!(jo6vr}-
Gov vnsQ ^£v roifs 2Jri^ovag^ 22iyox)kmn-g ocko dvo^icov fiTa
lalicULyyuiL, sir a KojiavdoL, vjitQ ovg Xdkof xrd en vn.i-Q-
luxovg dvG^mdvsQOL ^6v fpovvdoifOioi^ dvcizokixcori^Qoi de Xa-
goi'dig, jidvtav de aQXTLXoireQOL Kv^(iooi. — I'lolcmici Ger-
monid.
Such is the evidence of those writers, (jreek or Roman,
who deal with the local habitation of the Cimbri rather
than with the general history of that tribe. As a measure
of tlici indefilnitude of their ideas, we have the confusion,
already noticed, betwecm the Cimbri and Cinnnerii, on the
parts of Diodorus, 8trabo, and Plutarch. A better measure
occurs in the following extract from Pliny, who not only
tixos the Cimbri in three places at once, but also (as far as
we can find any meaning in his language) removes them so
far northward as Norway : "Alterum genus Ingievones, quo-
rum pars Cimbri Teutoni ac Chaueorum gentes. Proximi
Rheno Istaivones, quorum pars Cimbri mediterranei." (iv. 14.)
■'Proinontorium Cimbrorum excurrens in niaria longe Peninsu-
1am efticit quai Carthis appellatur." Ih/d. "Sevo INIons (the
mountain-chains of Norway) immanein ad Cimbrorum usque
promontorium efticit sinum , qui Codanus vocatur , refertus
insulis, quarum clarissima Scandinavia, incompertffi magni-
tiidinis." (iv. 13.) Upon confusion like this it is not con-
OR o\ run rvinrsfr, or a roN-NF,f;iio\ ni;T\vi:i;N 'iiin ffMiiui S^i
,)s iiii; F.vw'i
sidcrcd nocossury to cxjxmkI I'urtlicr cvidi-nco. So few st.ito-
iiu'iils coincide, that uiidcr .'ill viinvs tlioro must ho a injs.
conc('j)tioii soiiiowhci'c; and of such nii.cdnccption i^n'cat imist
tin; aniuunt Ix;, to become more improbable than u national
migration from .lutland to Italy.
Over and abo\(!, howovor, this particular (iiiestion of evi-
dc'nce, then; .stands a second one; viz. tlu; detcirnnnatioii nf
th(! Ktlinograj)hical relations of the; nations under con.sidtia.
tion. This is the point as to \vh(.'tlior the (Jinibri concjiicicil
by Marius were Celts or (ioths, akin to the (iauls, or :ikiii
to the (icrmans; a disputed point, and one which, for it>
own sake only, were worth discussin^j,', even at the exjieusc
of raisin;^* a wholly independ(!nt question. Such hovvevfr ii
is not. If the (Jimbri wore Celts, tin; imj)r')])al)ility of llujr
originatin;;' in the Cindjrie Cluu-soncse would be increased,
and Avith it the amount of e\ idonce ro(|uired; since, layiii;'
aside other considerations, the natural unlikelihood of a larj;(;
area being traversed by a mass of emigrants is greatly en-
hanced by the fact of any iritermodiate portion of that ;uv;i
being possessed by tribes as alien to each other as the (iauls
and Germans. Hence therefore the fact of the Cimbri hoin;:
Celts Avill (if proved) be considered as making against tin'
probability of their origin in the Cimbric Chersonese; \vliil>t
if they be shown to bo Goths, tlu; difHculti(!s of the sup-
position will be in some degree dinunisluKl. Whichever way
this latter point is settled, something will be gained for tlio
historian; since the supposed presence of Celts in the Ciui-
brie Chersonese has complicated more than one question in
ethnography.
Previous to proceeding in the inquiry it may be well to lav
down once for alias a postulate, that whatever, in the way
of ethnography, is proved concerning any one tribe of tli'
Cimbro-Teutonic league, nuist be considered as proved con-
cerning the remainder; since all explanations grounded upon
the idea that one part was Gothic and another part Cdtii
have a certain amount of prima facie improbability to sit
aside. The same conditions as to the bunlen of proof apply
also to any hypotheses founded on the notion oi retirinf/ Cim-
bri posterior to the attempted invasion of Italy. On this point
the list of authors quoted will not be brought l^elow^ the tiuio
of Ptolemy. With the testimonies anterior to that writer,
bearing upon the question of the ethnography, the attempt
however will be made to be exhaustive. Furthermore, as
the question in hand is not so much the absolute fact as to
whether the Cimbri were Celts or Gotlis. but one as to tlic
amount of evidence upon which we believe them to be either
)s Tin; F.vioKNM' ni' v cdn'six'TIiiv ni;T\vi:r;\ Tin: ciMimi I'tr. 97
lllic oiic 111' the otluT, .statciMciits will In; iiotlird under tlm
liiiid of <'vi(U'iico, iMtt l)r».'iius(! tlicy Jir<! really proolH, hut
>iiii)»ly bc'i-ausi! tliey have cNcr been lookcfl upon aH sucli.
||l.';;iiiiiinj; then with the (iernianie origin of the Ciinhro-
JTfUtiinie conletlcration; and dealin^i- si'|tarately uith suedi
jiiibcs as aro separately inention(!d, we fir>t timl the
Ainl'i'oiics. — In tlu! Anylo Saxon poem called tlu^ 'l^'avid-
jci's .Snn;^', there! is a notice ot a trihe called )'//i//n\ l'//iht(is,
lor I'nihniii. Sulim, the historian ul' Denmark, has alhjwcd
lliiiiiself to inia;;ino that those represent tin; Amhnmoi , and
jtliiit their iianu! still exists in that (d' the island Amron of
jtiir coast of iSleswick , and perhaps in .inicrluiid , a part of
Idlijciihur;;'. — Thorpu's note on the Traveller's !S(.»n;j,' in the
\Oiih\i' Kxoiiii'nsia.
'Jhidiiii's. — In the way of evidences of there boinf^- Teuto-
nrs amongst the (lernians, over and above tlu; associate men-
Itioii of tlieir names with that (d' the ("imbri, there; is but
little. Thoy are not so mentioned either by Tacitus or Strabo.
I'tolciiiy, however, mentions a) the Ttutonarii, h) i\\o Tcu-
tuiits; TtmovoaQioL xcd (Jvlquiwol — 0aQadnvm> dl xal
|2i'>(/icjv, Tivtovfg xcd "Jiui{)KOL. JJesides this, howexcr,
l;iri;uiiicnts have been taken from a) tlu; nvcaninj^- of tluj root
\kul = people (\)hH/a, M. (J.; \)C(J(l, A. S. ; (//of, (). II. (J.):
\l.i} the Sdlliis Tcu(oOcrf//iis: c) the supposed connection of the
jliresoiit word JJcul-scIt =z (k'rma)i with the classical word Teul-
|w/«. These may briefly be disposed of.
I a.) It is not unlikely for an invading nation to call thom-
bi'lves Ihc nation, flic lutliuns, Ihe jicopic, &.('. Neither, if the
Itribo in (juestion liad done so (presuminj^' them to have been
(iiriiians or Goths), would the word employcMl be very un-
like Tci//on-c's. Although the word \vml-u = tuition ov people,
is fifiiendly strong in its decdension (so making the plural
hj/z/f/wAvj, it is found also in a weak form with its plural
yhidl-m-- Teuton-. See Deutsche Grammaiik , i. OiJO.
/'.) The Sallus Teuloherfjius mentioned by Tacitus [Ann. i. OO)
jean scarcely have taken its name from a tribe, or, on the
jotlier hand, have given it to one. It means either ike hill of
//«' iitvple, or the city of the people; according as the syllable
-hmj- is derived from huirgs^^a hill, or from b(tu?-(/s =^ a
citij. In either case the compound is allowable, e. rj. diot-
vm,\mhlic way, O. H. G.; thiod-.>r^////o , robber of the people,
|'*.S. ; YQ6({-cijnin(/, peod-wmrr, boundary of the nation^ A. S.;
|l)iiHl-/^///r/^ l)i6d-?rV/;-, people >i way, Icelandic; — Theud-t'-w//-?/A-,
^\\f^\\A-e-linda, Theml- i-r/ot ha , proper names (from ])iud-):
Imil-herac, «W/-perac; /Wo?/-p('rac, (.). II. (1.; himin\mh'i>;,
'Wbiorg, Icelandic (from bdirgs z=:i hill) — ^/sc/purc, hasalimrc,
7
98 0\ THE F.VinRNOR (>r A CoNVKCTlON KiyrWHKN TUB CIMBRI &.(•.
OS" Tltft KVII
t %
saltz^nvc, &c., O. H. G. (from haitrgs^citij). The partiru-
lar wort dioi-imruc=^cwiias magna occurs in O. H. G. — ><e,.
JJeulsche Grammatik , iii. p. 478.
c. Akin to this is the reasoning founded upon the coiukc.
tion (real or supposed) between the root Tent- in Tciiiim-,
and the rcot (lent- in JJeid-scli. It runs thus. The syllalil.;
in question is conunon to 'he word Teut-unes^ Tcul-mm.
Tlieud-iscus^ (cud-iscHS, leul-iscus, tid-iske, did-iske^ (/iil-sck
deut-sch; whilst the word Deiil-sch moans German. As tlio
Tent-ones were Germans , so were the Cliubri also. Now this
line of argument is set aside by the circumstance that tlie
syllable Teul- in Teul-ones and TeV-onicus, as the names of
the confederates of the Cimbri, is wholly unconnected with
the Teul- in (heod-iscus ., and JJenl-sch. This is fully sIkavii
by Grimm in his dissertation on tht ^-ords German and JJulrh.
In its oldest form tlio latter AVurd meant popular, naimn'.
vernacular; it was an adjective .'pplied to the vuUjar loiiyur,
or the vernacular G<'vman, in opposition to the Latin. In
the tenth century the secondary form Teut-onicus came in
vogue even Avith German wiiters. Whether this arose out
of imitation of the Latin form '■ jmanice, or out of the idea
of an historical connection with tlie Teutones of the classic?,
is immaterial. It is clear that the present word dcitt-nd
proves nothing respecting the Teutones. Perhaps, howevor,
as early as the time of Martial the word Teuton/'cus was used
in a general sense, deuot. ig the Germans in general. Certain
it is that before his time t meant the particular people con-
quered by Marius, irresp 'tive of origin or locality. — t5ee
Grimm's Deutsche GrafH?nai '-, i. p. 17, '.ird edit. Martial,
xiv. 26, Teutonici capUti. (. audian. in Eutrop. i. 406, lai-
tonicum hostem.
The Cimbri. — Evidence t the Gothic origin of the Ciinbri
(treated separately) begins ;ith tho writers under Augustus
and Tiberius.
Veil. Patercitlus. — The t timony of this Avritcr as to tlic
affinities of the nations in question is involved in his testi-
mony as to their locality, and, consequently, subject totlic
same criticism. His mention of them (as Germans) is inci-
dental.
Strabo. — Over and above the references already made,
Strabo has certain specific statements concerning the Cimbii:
a.) That according to a tradition (which he does not believoi
they left their country on account of an inundation of tlie
sea. This is applicable to Germany rather than to Gaul.
This liability to inundations must not, however, be supposed
to indicate a locality in the Cimbric Chersonese as well as
ON Tin: MVinr.Xf :: or a coxnt.ctiox bktwkf.x tiik oiMiua dec. 09
a (joniian origin, since the coast between the Scheldt and
Kibe is as obnoxious to tlic ocean as the coasts of llolstein,
Sloswick and Jutland, b.) That against the German Cinibri
ami Teutones the Jielgse alone kept tlieir ground — aaxE
uovovq (Bs^yag) uvxixtLV TCQog rrjv rcov rsQudvav i'qpodov,
Kiu^QCOv xal Tevroi^av. (iv. 'A.) This is merely a translation
of (Jjcsar (see above) with tin? interpolation r£Q(idvav.
c.) That they inhabited their original country, and that they
Stilt funbassadors to Augustus — xal yuQ vvv iiuvot rr^v yja-
Quv ijv iiiov TiQorsQov, xal szt^i'av toj IJejiaGToi dcoQov rov
I'^QcJrarov nag avtotg , Af'/Jz/Ta, aiToviievoL qtUav xal a^i-
v)pxiuv rav vzovQyfiavcov tvxoi^t£l; de av rj^iovv cirpfJQav.
iH. i.) Full weight nuist be given to the detinite character
of this statement.
yWrv/z/.v. — Tacitus coincides with Strabo, in giving to the
Ciiubri a spcuilic locality, and in stating special circum-
.^tanc'os of their history. Let full w<Mglit be given to the Avords
of a writer like Tacitus; but let it also be remembered that
he wrote from hearsay evidence, that he is anything rather
than an independent witness, that his statement is scarcely
reconcileable with those of Ptolemy and Cffisar, and that
above all the locality which both he and Strabo give the
Cimbii is also the locality of the Sk'tmihrt, of which latter
tribe no mention is made by Tacitus, although their wars
with the Romans were matters of comparatively recent history.
For my own part, 1 think, that between a confusion of the
Cimbri Avith the Cmtncn on the one hand, and of the Cimbri
with the Sicu>nbri on the other, we have the clue to the mis-
conceptions assumed at the commencement of the paper.
There is no proof that in the eyes of the Avriters under the
Republic, the origin of the Cindn'i was a matter of either
doubt or speculation. Catulus, in the History of his Consul-
ship, connnended by Cicero (Bruhis, xxxv.), and Sylla in his
Commentaries, must have spoken of them in a straightforward
manner as Gauls, otherwise Cicero and Sallust Avould have spo-
ken of them less decidedly. (See Plutarch's Lffe of Marius,
and nolc.) Confusion arose when Greek readers of Homer and
Herodotus began to theorize , and this groAV greater Avhen
formidable enemies under the name of Sicambri Avere found in
(lennany. It is highly probable that in both Strabo and
Tacitus we have a commentary on the lines of Horace —
Te cicde gaudentos Sicambri
Compositis veneraiitur iinnis.
''Kimulem (wdth the Chauci, Catti, and Cherusci) Germanise
sinum proximi Oceano Cimbri tenent. parva nunc civitas,
7*
:; J';
loo OS* Tin: i:vii»i:.N('K ot" a connectiok between* the oiMiiiu &.(:,
OS THE EVID
sed gloria ingcns: vetorisquc fanirc lata vestigia nmncnt,
utraque ripa castra ac spatia, quorum anibitu nunc (|U()(jU('
motiaris nioleni nianusque gcntis, et tarn magni exitus iidcin
— oceasiono discordia; nostras et i-iviliuin armoruni , oxpu;;-
natis legionum hibernis, etiani Gallias att'ijctavere; ac rursib
pulsi. inde proxiinis tcmporibus triumphati niagis quam victi
sunt." (German. 38.)
Justin. — Justin writes — "Simul e Gennanid Cinibros —
inundasse Italiani." iS'ovv this extract would be valuable if
we were sure that the Avord Gennania came from .Justin's ori-
ginal, Trogus Pompeius; who was a Vocontian Gaul, livinff
soon after the Cinibric defeat. To him, however, the toriii
Germania mu;:-t have been wholly unknown; since, besides
general reasons, Tacitus says — ''Germanise vocabulum receiis
et nuper additum : quoniam , qui primuin Kli(;uum transgress!
Gallos expulerint, ac nunc Tungri, tunc Germani vooati
sint: ita nationis nornen, non gentis evaluisse paullatiiii, lU
omnes, primum a victore ob metum, mox a seipsis invento
nomine Germani vocarentur." Justin's interpolation of Ger-
mania corresponds with the similar one on the part of Strabo,
Such is the evidence for the Germanic origin of the Cinihri
and Teutones, against which may now be set the followinf;
testimonies as to their affinity with the Celts, each tribe being
dealt with separately.
The Amhrones. — Strabo mentions them along with the Ti-
gurini , an undoubted Celtic tribe — Raxk xov tcqos "yJ^(iQa-
vag xal Tcovy£vovg tioIe^ov.
Suetonius places them Avith the Transpadani — "per Ain-
bronas et Transpadanos." [Cwsar, § 9.)
Plutarch mentions that their war-cries Avere understood
and answered by the Ligurians. Kow it is possible that the
Ligurians were Celts, Avliilst it is certain that they were not
Goths.
T/ie Teutones. — Appian speaks of the Teutones having in-
vaded Noricum, and this under the head KeXtixa.
Florus calls one of the kings of the Teutones Teutobocclius,
a name Celtic rather than Gothic.
Virgil has the following lines: —
late jam tiun ditionc prcmebat
Sarrastes populos, et qute rigat a^quora Sarnns;
Quique liufas, Uatuluinque teneut, atque arva Celennae;
Et quus maliferaj despectant nmniia Abella?:
I'entotnco ritu o.>!iti torquore caieias.
Tegmiua queis capituiu raptus de subere cortex,
^i^ratteque micant peltse, micat aureus ensis. — ^En. vii.737 — 743.
ON' THE EVIDEXOE OF A COXXKCTION BETWRKN THK CIMinU SiC, 101
Xow tlus word cuicla may l)o a provincialism from tlio neigh-
lionrliood of Sarraste. It may also (amonf^st other things)
1)0 <a true Teutonic word. ?^rom Avhat follows it will appear
that this latter view is at least as likely as any other. The
coiinnentators state that it is vox Ccltica. Tliat this is true
may I'O seen from the following forms — Irish: ga , sjiear,
jdvc/in; f/aol/i, d/f(o, a dart; f/o(h, a spear (O'Reilly),- gaolhadh,
H javelin ; f/adh, spear; r/ai , dillo; era an (jaidh, sjiear-shafl
(l{('<rly) — Cornish: //n/, yeiv , gu, gai ^= laiwe , spear ^ javelin,
shaft (Pryee) — Breton: goaSf goa//' (Ro»\vemvr).
The Cimhri — The Teutones. — Of either the Cimln'i sepa-
rately or of the (Jiudn'i and Teutones collectively, being of
(iallic origin, we have, in tl:" way of direct evidence, the
ti'stinionies exhibited above, viz. of Sallust, Cicero, Ca'sar,
Dioflorus. To this may be added that of Dion Cassius, who
not only had access to the contemporary accounts Avhich
spoke of thorn as Oauls, but also was enabled to use them
tritically, being possessed of inlormation concerning (Jermany
as well as France.
Of Appian the whole evidence goes one way, viz. that
the tribes in question Avere (Jauls, His expressions are: nk^i-
(jTov TL xal (.laxifiaTatav — Jfpi^t'« Kekriov siq ri]v Ixaktav
ml rijv rcikarCav ei6t(ialB. (iv. 2.) In his l)Ook on Illyria
lip states that the Celts and Cimbri, along with the Illyrian
tribe of the Autaria?, had, previous to the battle against IMa-
rius, attacked Delphi and suffered for their impiety. (IXXvq.
d. 4.)
Qnintilian may be considered to give us upon the subject
the notions of two writers — Virgil , and either Ca'sar or
('rassus. In dealing, however, with the words of Quintill.in,
it will be seen that there are two assumpticms. That either
("ffisar or Crassus considered the Cind)ri to be (Jauls we infer
from the following passage: — 'TJarum est autem, ut oculis
suhjicerc contingat (se. vituperationem) , ut fecit C. Julius,
qui cum Helvio Maneia3 sapius obstrepenti sibi diceret, Jam
oslendam, qiialis sis: isque plane instaret intcrrogatione, qua-
lem se tandem ostensurus esset, digito demonstravit imagi-
nein Galli in scuto INIariano ('imbrico pictam , cui ]\fancia
tuin simillimus est visus. Taberna; autem erant circum Fo-
rum, ac scutum illud signi pratia positum." Inst. Orat. vi.
'^. 38. Pliny tells the story of Crassus (:}9. 4.). Although
in this passage the Avord upon which the argument turns has
l)oon written galli, and translat(»d eoen , the current interpre-
tation is the one given above. — Vid. not. ed. Gesner.
In the same author is preserved the epigram of Virpil's
called Catalecta, and commented on by Ausonius of Bor-
fli
102 ox Tin: kvidkntk of a c ixxkction nr/rwKKX thi: cimhui ^{c,
ON- Tlin F.VIDK
l! I
deaux. Here wo learn that T. Annius Cimhcr was a Oaul:
Avhilst it is assuiuod tliat there was no other reason to heUevc
that ho was called Cimber than that of his beinj; descended
from some slave or freednian of that nation: — "Kon appa-
reat aft'ectatio, in quam mirifiee Virgilius ,
Covintluoriini amatnr iste verboruin,
Ille isto rhetor: namqno quatenus totus
Tlmcydidcs HritanuuH, Attica; fehres,
7«?/-(Ja]licuiii , ;/</«-, al- spina? male illi.sit.
Ita ounua ista verba nii.scuit fratri.
Cimher hie fuit a quo fratrem neeatum hoc Ciceronis dictum
notatum est; Germunum Cimhcr occ/cl/L" — J/isl. Oral. viii. 3.
cinn nol.
Die, quid siguificent Catalecta Maronis? in his al-
Celtaruni posuit, scquitur non lucidius tau-,
Et quod gennano niistuni male letifcruni min-. — Auson.
Undoubtedly the })ronunciati(jn here ridiculed is that of tlie
Gauls, and it is just possible that in it is foreshadowed tlio
curtailed form that the Latin tongue in general puts on in
the present French. Again, the slave whose courage failed
liim when ordered to slay Cains Marius is called both a Uaiil
and a Cimbrian by Plutarch, as well as by Lucan. In the
latter writer we have probably but a piece of rhetoric [riutr-
salia . lib. ii.)
Amongst tribes undoubtedly Gallic the Nervii claimed des-
cent from the Teutones and Cimbri. Tlie passage of Taei-
tus that connects the Nervii with the Germans connects them
also with the Treveri. Now a Avell-known passage in St.
Jerome tells us that the Treveri were Gauls: — Negj^toi tjOav
de K')i(iQav xai Tavrovav ccxoyovoL. — Appian, iv. I. ^.
"Treveri et Nervii circa adfectationem Germanica^ origiiiis
ultro ambitiosi sunt, tamquam, per banc gloriam sanguinis.
a similitudine et inertia (iallorum separentur." German. 2S.
Finally, in the Life of j\Iarius by Plutarch we have dialo-
gues between the Cimbri and the llomans. Now a Gallic
interpreter was probable, but not so a German one.
Such are the notices bearing upon the rtlnography of the
Cimbri. Others occur, especially amongst the poets; of
these little or no use can be made, for a reason indicated
above. Justin speaks of embassies between Mithridates and
the Cimbri. Suetonius connects the Cimbri with the (rallic
Senones; he is writing however about Germany, so that liis
evidence, slight as it is, is neutralized. Theories grounded
upon the national name may be raised on both sides ; Cimbri
ON"
THE FA'IDKNCE OF A COXXKCTION IJKTAVKKN TIIK CIMnui SiC. 103
mav coincide witli cither tlie Germanic /{cjnpa = a w/irn'or or
fli(imp/on , or with the Celtic Cijmnj = Cambrians. Equally
equivocal seem the arf>unients drawn from the descriptions
oitlitT of their physical conformation or their manners. The
silence of the Gothic traditions as lo the Cimbri beinj^ Ger-
manic, proves more in the way of negative evidence than
the similar silence of the Celtic ones, since tlie Gothic le-
(.'ends arc the most numerous and tlui most ancient. Jiesides
this, they deal very espocially with genealogies, national
and individual. The name of Jiojorix, a Cimbric king men-
tioned in Epilotne Liviuna (Ixvii.), is Celtic rather than Go-
thic, although in the latter dialects proper names ending in
-rh\ [Alaric, Genaer-ic) frequently occur.
Measuring the evidence, which is in its character essen-
tially cumulative, consisting of a number of details unim-
portant in themselves, but of value when taken in the mass,
the balance seems to be in favour of the Cimbri, Teutones
and Ambrones being Gauls rather than Germans, Celts rather
than Goths.
An argument now forthcoming stands alone, inasmucli as
it seems to prove two things at once, viz. not only the Celtic
origin of the Cimbri, but, at the same time, their locality
in the Chersonese. It is brought forward by Dr. Pritchard
in his 'Physical History of IMankind,' and runs as follows:
— (//.) It is a statement of Pliny that the sea in their neigh-
bourhood was called by the Cimbri Morimantsa , or the dead
mi =^ mare morlmim. (p.) It is a fact that in Celtic Welsh
mor martvth =z tnare mortuum, morimarnsa, dead sea. Hence
the language of the Cyimbric coast is to be considered as
Celtic. Now the following facts invalidate this conclusion:
— (I.) Putting aside the contradictions in Pliny's statement,
the epithet dead is ina])plicable to either the German Ocean
or the Baltic. (2.) Pliny's authority was i writer named
Philemon: out of the numerous Philemons enumerated by
Fahricius, it is lik(dv that the one here adduced was a con-
temporary of Alexander the Great; and it is not probable
that at that time glosses from the Paltic were known in the
Mediterranean. (,'}.) The subject upon which this Philemon
wrote was the Homeric Poems. This, taken along with the
freography of the time, makes it highly probable that the
orifjinal (ireek was not KCh^qol, but Ki^iiEQLOf, indeed we
are not absolutely sure of Pliny having written Cimbri. (4.)
As applied to Cimmerian sea the epithet dead was applicable.
(•').) The term JJorimarusa =^ mare 7nnrlmtm , although good
Celtic, is better Slavonic, since throughout that stock of
languages, as in many other of the Indo-European tongues
i I
104 ox Tin; kviukxoe of a connection ijetwekn the ci.mbui i^r, I on thi: kvidiJ
1
1:
-t
ih ■»(?
(the Celtic and Latin inclndofl), the roots mor and ;;jo/v moan
sen and ^mr/ respectively: — "S(>j)tenitri()iifilis Occanus, Aiiial-
cliinni euui Mccaticus appellat, a Paroj)aiiiiso aninc, (|na Scv-
thiani alluit, quod nonien ejus ^cntis lin^uti si^nifieat eo'n.
j:;(datuni, IMiilenion Mor/'mnrusam a Ciuihris (qu. Cifnmcrm
vocari scrihit: lioe est inarc murluum usque ad proniontoriuin
Rubeas, ultra dcinth; Croritiim.^^ C'^-)
One ])oint, however, still remains: it may be dealt witli
briefly, l)ut it should not be •wholly overlooked, viz. the
question, whether over and above the theories as to tlio lo-
cation of the Cind)ri in the ('imbric (.'liersonese, tlierf; is
reason to believe, on independent grounds, that Celtic tribes
wore the early inhabitants of the })eninsula in question? I|
such were actually tlie case, all that has preceded wonjil,
up to a certain point, be invalidated. Now 1 know no suf-
ficient reasons for believing such to be the case, altliouiili
there arc curr(!nt in ethno^>;rap]iy many insufficient ones.
1. In the way of Philology, it is undoubtedly true tliat
words connnon to the (Celtic tribes occur in the Danish i)\
Jutland, and in the Frisian and Low German of Sh.'Swiok
and Holstein; bvit there, is no reason to consider that thfv
belong to an aboriginal (\dtic tribe. The a priori probabi-
lity of Celts in the peninsula involves hypotheses in ethno-
graphy which are, to say the least, far from being generally
recognized. The evidence as to the language of aborigines
derived from the significance of the names of old geogra-
phical localities is wanting for the Cimbric Chersonese.
2. No traditions, either Scandinavian or German, point
towards an aboriginal Celtic population for the localities in
question.
3. There are no satisfactory proofs of such in either Ar-
chajology or Natural History. A paper noticed by Dr. Prit-
chard of Professor Eschricht's upon certain Tumuli in Jut-
land states, that the earliest specimens of art (anterior to
the discovery of metals), as well as the character of the tu-
muli themselves, have a Celtic character. He adds, however,
that the character of the tumuli is as much Siberian as Celtic.
The early specimens of art are undoubtedly like similar spe-
cimens found in England. It happens, however, that such
things are in all countries more or less alike. In Professor
Si(d)old's museum at Leyden, stone-axes from tumuli in Japan
and Jutland are laid side by side, for the sake of compari-
son, and between them there is no perceptible difFerencc.
The oldest skulls in these tumuli are said to be other than
Gothic. They are, however, Finnic rather than Celtic.
4. The statement in Tacitus [German. 44.), that a nation on
the Baltic cal
1,1 the P.ritiJ
existence of I
„„t (Jerinan,!
exist in thef
Kstlionian.
It is consi|
propositions
Cinihri conqi
tzerlnnd, anj
and Anibroni
no nntion noil
4. That ther[
existed north
plied to the i
tjio iidi;d)itan
f[V.y/ Indian i
cnh'ia we are
in the term
once Cinmiei
theory as to
no data, but
preatest vari(
oriranized Ce
the Ligurians
divisions upo
Provence.
fniiiui Sir, I ON Tin: kvidence of a connection DrnwEEN the ciMniu i^c. 105
the Bfiltic cnllod the yT^'stli spoko a lan<;uap;o somewhat akin
to tlio I'ritisli , cannot bo considorod as conclusive to the
existence of Celts in th(! North of (Tcriiiany. Any lan<^Tia<:e,
not (leriii.'in, would ])robal)Iy so he denoted. Such niipht
exist in the niothcr-tongiu; of cither the Litlmanic or the
Kstlioninn.
It is considered that in the forcfroinj? pajjes the following
propositions are either proved or involved: — 1. That the
Ciinbri conquered by INIarius cune from either Gaul or Swi-
tzerland, and that they were (yclts. 2. That the Teutones
,111(1 Anibrones were equally Celtic with the Ciinbri. 3. That
no nntion north of the Elbe was known to Republican Rome.
4. That there is no evidence of Celtic tril)es ever havinjiij
pxistf'd north of the Elbe. 5. That the epithet Cimhrica ap-
plied to the Chersonesns })roves nothing; more in respect to
tlio inhal)itants of that locality than is proved by words like
Wexl ])u1i(in and }\orlh- American Indian. (). That in the word
cdh'ia we are in ])ossession of a new Celtic p:loss. 7. That
in the term Jl/orimarusa we are in possession of a gdoss at
onco Cinmierian and Slavonic. 8. That for any positive
theory as to the Cimbro-Teutonic learrue we have at present
no (lata, but that the hypothesis that would reconcile the
creatost variety of statements would run thus: viz. that an
ortranized Celtic confederation conterminous Avith the l^elgre,
the Linurians, and the Helvetians descended with its eastern
divisions upon Noricum, and with its western ones upon
Provence.
106 ON TIIK KVIDENCK OF A CONNF/'TION UKTWEKN TUi: CIMIUU ir,
ADDENDA.
A M
JANUAUY 1859.
(1)
In this papor the notico of the Monumontnm Ancyraimm is
omitted, rt is CLM1?JU(^VI<: F/P (IHHIIDES ET SKMXONKS
ET EJVSDEM TKACTVS ALU GERMANORVM I'OI'VIJ
PER LECJATOS AMKUTIAM MEAM ET J»()]'VLI JiOMAM
TETIERVN'J'. This seems to connect itself with Straho's mitic..,
It may also connect itself with that of 'i'acitns. Assuminj,' the
ClIARIIDES to be the Ilarudes, and the llarndes to he the Che-
rusci (a doctrine for -which I have given reasons in my edition of
the Germania) the position of the Cindjri in the t(^\t of Tacitus
is very nearly that of them in the Inscription. In the inscrip-
tion, the order is Cimbri, llarndes, Seninones; in Tacitus, Che-
rusci, Cimbri, Seninones. In both cases the 3 names are assu-
ciated.
f i;
fi ¥
(2)
I wonld now modify the proposition -with which the preceding;
dissertation concludes, continuing, however, to hold the iimiii
doctrine of the text, vi/. the fact of th(^ (/imbri having been un-
known in respect to their name and locality and, so, having hccii
pushed northwards, and more northwards still, as fresh arons
were explored without supplying an undoubted and nnequivocal
origin for them.
I think that the Ambrones, the Tigurini, and the Teutoiios
were Gauls of Helvetia, and South Eastern (iallia, and that tlio
alliance between them and the Cimbri (assuming it to be real'
is primd facie evidence of the latter being Galli also. But it is
no more.
That the Cimbri were the Eastern members of the confedera-
tion seems certain. More than one notice connects them witli
Noricum. Here they may have been native. They may also have
been intrusive.
Holding that the greater part of Noricum was Slavonic, ami
that almost. all the country along its northern and eastern frontier
Avas the same, I see my way to the Cimbri having been Slavonic
also. That they were Germans is out of the question. CIaiil:<
could hardly have been so unknown and mysterious to the Ko-
ADDENPA.
107
nans. OiUil tlicy know well, and (jlonimny sufficiently — yet no
Ivhiic <rKl tlicy find ('ind)ri.
Till' cvidcnco of I'osidonius favours this view. "lie" writos
Istnil'ii "(Iocs not unrcasonalily concoivo tliat these ('iniltri Iteing
"iircdntitry and wandering might carry their expeditions as far as
■'ilic Mivotis, and that the Bosjtorus might, from them, take its
I'liaino of Cimmerian^ i. e. Cimbrian^ the (Jreeks calling the Cimbri
y^'mmrni. lie says that the lioii originally inhahited the Ilercy-
r'ui;ni Forest, that the Cimbri attacked them, that they Avere rc-
■■piilscd, that they then descended on the Danube, and the conn-
"trv ">f the Scordisci who are (JalatiVi; thence upon the 'I'aurisci,
iwlio "are also Galatre, then upon the Helvetians &c. — Slrabo. 7,
p. i''^.
For a fuller explanation of the doctrine which makes the Cimbri
jMissjItlc Slavonians see my Edition of I*richard's origin of the
I Clitic nations — Supplementary Chapter — Ambrones ^ Tigurini,
'fciiloiirti , fioii, Slavonic hypothesis &.c.
heeii nil-
OX THE OrJGTXAL EXTENT OF THE
SLAVONK^ AllEA.
UKAI)
BEFOKE THE rillLOLOGlCAL SOCIETY,
I'KimUAKY 8, IHJO.
The current, opinion, tliat a j^rcat portion of the area now
occnpioil by kSlavoniaiKs, and a still greater portion so dmi-
pied in tlio ninth and tenth centuries, Avero, in the times ot
Ca'sar and Tacitus, eitlier (lernian, or sonu'thing other tliiin
what it is t'ounil to be at tin; beginning:,' of the period nt
authentic and contemporary history, has appeared so unsa-
tisfactory to the j)resent writer, tjiat he has been induccil
to consider tlie evidence on which it rests. What (for in-
stance) arc tlio grounds for believing that, in the /irsl con-
tury, Bohemia Avas not just as Slavonic as it is now? Wli:i;
the arguments in favour of a (lermanic population hctween
the Elbe and Vistula in the xcrond?
The fact that, at the very earliest period when any dc-
finite and detailed knowledge of either of the parts in qiu's-
tion commences , both are as little German as the Ukraim
is at the present moment, is one Avhich no one denies. How
many, however, will agree with the present writer in iIk'
value to be attributed to it, is another question. For lii«
own part, ho takes the existence of a given division of tlio
human race (whether Celtic, Slavonic, Gothic or auglit i'h-
on a given area, as a sufficient reason for considering it to
have been indigenous or aboriginal to that area, until rm-
sons he shown to the contrary. Gratuitous as this postuLitf
may seem in the first instance, it is nothing more than tlio
legitimate deduction from the rule in reasoning wdiich forbii!^
us to multiply causes unnecessarily. Displacements tluro-
fore, conquests, migrations, and the other disturbing cau?f>
are not to be assumed , merely for the sake of acconntiii;;
for assumed changes, but to bo supported by specific evi-
dence; wdiich evidence, in its turn, must have a ratio to
the probability or the improbability of the disturbing causes
ON* TI!R OUlCilNAl, KXTKNT itV Till', SLAVoN'IC AUI'-A.
109
allcircil. 'rii('S(! positions seem so stilt-ovidcnt, tiwit it is only
\j\ i:uiin)!iiin<j;' tilt! iuiioiuit of impruhabilitii'.s ^vlm•|| jiic aiicp-
ti'd with tli(! iiisuttii'iciiry of tlu; tfstiinony on wliic li they
list, tliat we ascertain, tVoiii tlio extent to wliicli tiicy liavo
bull n('f;lect(Ml, the necessity ot" insistin;^- upon tlicni.
The itiinological condition of a ^ivcn j)0)mlation at a cer-
tain time is primd fucic cvl(lenc(j of a similar etlinolo|;ical
inndition at a previous one. Tlio testinu)ny of a writer as
til the tthnolo^'ical condition of a j;iven population at a cer-
tiiiu tiuK! is also prima facie evidence of siuli a condition
l.riiig a real oik;; since even the worst autiiorities are to bo
(iiiisidercd correct until reasons are shown for doul.tinji- tlieni.
It now remains to see how far these, two methods are lon-
(iiichuit or antagonistic for the area in (piestion ; all that is
assumed being', that wluin we tind even a good writer asser-
tinji that at one period (say the tliird century) a certain lo-
cality was German, whereas we know that at a subsi quent
oiiL' (say tlu! tenth) it was other than (ierman, it is no ini-
jnoper scepticism to ask, whetlu r it is more l.kely lh;it the
writer was nustaken, or that changes have occurred in the
|interval; in other words, if error on tin; one side is not to
liglitly assumed, neither are migrations, c\cc. on the other.
Iljuth arc likely, or unlikely, according to the particular case
in point. It is more probable that an liai)itually conqueiing
nation should have displaced an habitually coiKjueicd one, than
that a had writer should be wrong. Jt is more likcdy that a
i;ood Avritcr should be wrong than that an habitually conquered
Illation should have displaced an habitually eoiupiering one.
The application of criticism of this sort materially alters
Itlio relations of the Celtic, Gothic, Roman antl Slavonic po-
imlatioiis, giving to the latter a prominence in the ancient
pvurlil much more proportionate to their present preponderance
as a European population than is usually admitted.
Beginning with the south-western frontier of the present
Slavonians, let us ask what are the reasons against suppo-
sing the population of Bohemia to have been in the time of
t'lcsar other than what it is now, /. e. Slavonic.
hi the tirst place, if it were not so, it must have changed
within the historical period. If so, whenV Ko writer has
ever grappled with the details of the question. It could
scarcely have been subsequent to the development of the
•jermanic power on the Danube, since this would be within
jthe period of annalists and historians, who would have men-
tioned it. As little is it likely to have been during the time
hylien the Goths and Germans, victorious everyAvhere, were
displacing others rather than being displaced themselves.
110
OS* Tiin out(;iNAi, KXTKNT 01' Titn .sr-.\Vt)\ir aiu;a.
I :'.
Tlic evidence of tin; lan«^Uii^(! is in tlu; sjinu; iliieitidii.
Wlicneo coiiM it luive been introduetul V Mut iVoni the iSaxnn
frontier, sinee there the Shivoiiie is I'olisii rather than jiu.
heniian. JStill less from the Hiiesian, and least of all irdui
tlio liavarian. To have develo|)(!d its ditferential cliaracti
ristics, it must have had either Holicinia its(df as an orii,'iii;i|
locality, or (dse the parts south and east of it.
We will now take what is either an undoubted Slavouit In.
cality, or m locality in the noi<4hl)ourhoo(l of Slavonians, /. ,.
the country between the rivers Danube and TIkmss and that
ranj'e of hills which connect the Uakonyer-wald with thi
('arpathians, the country of the Juzyf/ca. Now as .li(:ij(j\-
a kSlavonie word, meaning sprech or la>i(/uaf/i' , we have, ovir
and above the external evidence which makes the Ja/y^'is
Harmatian, internal evidence as well; evidence sul)ject unlv
to one exception, viz. that perhaps the name in (juestiou \v;i>
not native to the population Avhich it designated, but oiilv
a term applied by some Slavonic tribe to some of tlunr neigh-
bours who might or might nv)t be Slavonic. 1 admit that this
is possible, although the name is not of the kind that wouli
be given by one tribe to another ditierent from itself. Ail-
mitting, however, this, it still leaves a Slavonic population
in the contiguous districts; since, whether borne by the [ni
pie to whom it was applied or not, J(tzy(/ is a Slavmiii
gloss from the Valley of the Tibiscus.
Next conies the question as to the dale of this population.
To put this in the form least favourable to the views of the
present writer, is to state that the first author who mentions
a population in these parts, either called by others or cal-
ling itself Jazyges , is a writer so late as Ptolemy, and tluii
he adds to it the qualifying epithet MetanuMoi [Mtxavamia ,
a term suggestive of their removal from some other ami,
and of the recent character of their arrival on the Damibt.
Giving full value to all this, there still remains the fact nl
primary importance in all our investigations on the subjcit
in question, viz. that in the time of Ptolemy (at least) there
were Slavonians on (or near) the river Thciss.
At present it is sufficient to say tliat there are no a prinri
reasons for considering these Jazyges as the most western
of the branch to which they belonged , since the whole ot
the Pannonians may as easily be considered Slavonic as aiighi
else. They were not Germans. They were not Celts; in
which case the common rules of ethnological criticism indiKO
us to consider them as belonging to the same class with the
population conterminous to them ; since unless we do this,
we must assume a new division of the human species alto-
f)N run OUKilN'AI, KXri'A'T OK Ttin SLAVOSMP ARHA.
Ill
^'t'tlior ; a fact, whidi, though possihh', and oven prol)ahU>,
i(i not lightly to bo taken up.
So iMiU'h tor ♦^he a iniuri i)rol)al)ilit('8 : the known fait^* hy
no iiicaiM travoi'sc thoin. The I'annonians, wo loarn from
Dio, wcro of tlio saiiio class with th(! Ulyrians, /. v. tho
iiortluTU trihos ol' t:liat nation. Tli('s(! nuist hav(! hclongiil
to one of tlirf'G divi lis; the Slavonic, the Albanian, or
some division now lost, (//'thfsc, th(! latter is not to he as-
Miiiicd, and tho lii.t is more |>r(»l'a])le than the sccitud. In-
ileod, the more we ui.iko tho Pannoniuii.s and Ulyrians other
tliiin Siavonie, the more do we isolate! tin; Jdzi/i/rs; and the
more we isolate these, the more <lilHculties we create in a
(jiicstion otherwisi! simnle.
That the portion of rannonia to tlui north of the Danube
(/. e. the north-W(!st portion of Hungary, or tli(! valley of
tho Waag- and (jran) was different from tin* country arouml
the lake l^ciso (Pelso), is a position, which can only bo
upheld by considering it to be the country of the (^uadi, and
the (^uadi to have been (iermanic; — a view, against which
there are numerous objections.
Now% here re-appears the term Daci ; so that we nnist re-
pnf,'nise the im})ortant fact , that east of the Jazi/f/cs there are
the Dacians (and Getic) of the Lower, ami west of the Ja-
zijfjea the Daci of the Upper Danube. These nnist be placed
in tlio same category, both being equally either Slavonic or
non-Slavonic.
a. (Jf these alternatives, the first involves the f(dlowing
real or apparent difficulty, i. e. that, if the (ietse are what
the Daci are, tho Thracians are what the (Jo tie are. Hence,
if all three be Slavonic, we nnignify the area innnensely,
and bring the Slavonians of Thrace in contact Avith the (jreeks
of Macedonia. Granted. But are there any reasons against
this? So far from there being any such in the nature of
the thing itself, it is no more than what is actually the case
at the present moment.
b. The latter alternative isolates th(^ Jtizi/f/cs, and adds to
the difficulties created by their ethnological position, under
the supposition that they are the only Slavonians of the parts
in question; since if out-lyers to the area (crccpfional, so to
sayj, they must be either invaders from without, or else re-
lics of an earlier and more extendinl population. H' they
be the former, we can only bring them from the north of
the Carpathian mountains (a fact not in itself improbable,
but not to be assumed, except for the sake of avoiiiing
p"oater difficulties); if the latter, they prove the original
Slavonic character of the area.
112
ON TlIK ORIGI.VAL KXTKNT Of THK .SLAVOXlC AUIU.
Vi
'} -i
'V
Tlie present writer considers the Daci then (western and
east ''u) as Slavonic, and the following passage brings tlum
as tar west as the AJarus or jUorawe, which gives the nauio
to the present Moravians , a jjopulation at once Shxvonic and
Bohennan: — "Campos et plana Jazyges iSarniatai, niontcs
vero et saltus pulsi alj his JJaci ad Pathissuni anniem a Maro
sive Duria .... tenent.'* Piin. iv. 1 2.
The evidence as to the population of Moravia and North-
eastern Hungary being Dacian, is JStrabo's Ftyova .... xij^
jiQoaayufjevovOL ^ zovg de ritac;, Ferag ^tv tiqo^ zov JI6vxov
xfxAt.afVovg , xal TCQog trjv ico, Jdxovg dl zovg fig zdvdvrui,
nQog FiQiiaviav nal zdg zov "Iozqov Tirjyag. — From Ziuss,
in vv. Gel(e, Daci.
In Moravia we iiave as the basis of argument, an iwistiiKj
Slavonic population, speaking a language identical with the
]iohemian, but different from the other Slavonic languages,
and (as such) re(|uiring a considerable period for tlu; evo-
lution of its differential characters. This brings us to Bo-
hemia. At present it is Slavonic. When did it begin to
be otherwise V I^o one informs us on this point. Why slioukl
it not have been so ab iniiio, or at least at the beginning of
the historical period for these parts? The necessity of an
answer to this question is admitted; and it consists cliitHy
(if not wholly") in the following arguments; — a. those con-
nected with tne term Marcomanni ; b. those connected with
the term Boiohemum.
a. Marcomanni. — This word is so truly Germanic, and so
truly capable of being translated into English, that those
who believe in no other etymology whatever may believe
that ]\Iarc-o-manni , or Marchmen , means the fjien of the {hoiiii-
daries) marches; and without overlooking either the remarks
of Mr. Kemble on the limited nature of the word mcarc.
when applied to the smaller divisions of land, or the doctrine
of Grinnn, that its primary signification is 7Vuod or /'orcal,
it would be an over-refinement to adopt any other meaning;
for it in the present question than that which it has in
its undoubted combinations, MarUgrave , Altmark , Mitlelmiirk.
Ukermark, anil the Marches of Wales and Scotland. If so,
it was the name of a line of enclosing frontier rather than
of an area eticlosed; so that to call a country like the fvlwle
of Bohemia, Mat'comannic , would be like calling all Scotland
or all Wales the Marches.
Again, as the name arose on the western, (icrmanii; or
Gallic side of the March, it must have been the name of an
eastern frontier in respect to Gaul and Germany; so that to
ON THIO (MIIGINAL KXTKNT OF TlIK SLAVONIC AUKA.
113
Uiipposo
that there were Germans on the Boliemian line of
[the Murco?nanni , is to suppose that the march was no mark
i(ir boundary) at all, at least in an ethnological sense. This
(iiirtlifit-ation involves a difficulty which the writer has no
I wish to conceal; a march may be other than an ethnological
division. It may be a political one. In other words, it may
1,(1 like the Scottish Jiorder, rather than like the Welsh and
I the Slavono-Gcrmanic marches of Altmark, Mittelmark and
rkcrniark. At any rate, the necessity for a march being
I a line of frontier rather than a large compact kingdom, is
jodnclusive against the whole of Bohemia having been Ger-
innic because it was Marcomannic.
li. The arguments founded on the name Boiohemum are best
I nut by showing that the so-called country {home) of the Doit
was not Bohemia but Bavaria. This will be better done in
the sequel than now. At present, however, it may be as
iwoll to state that so strong are the facts in favour -of Boio-
//('»;«;« and Baiovarii meaning, not the one Bohemia and the
[other Bavaria, but one of the two countries, that Zeuss, one
I of the strongest supporters of the doctrine of an originally
Idormanic population in Bohemia, applies both of them to the
fiistnanied kingdom; a circumstance which prepares us for
expecting, that if the names fit the countries to which they
apply thus loosely, Boiohemum may as easily be Bavaria, as
the country of the Baiovarii be Bohemia^ in other words,
[that we have a convertible form of argument.
ADDENDA (1859).
(1)
Too much stress is, perhaps, laid on the name Jazyges. The
fact of the word .Jaszag in Magyar meaning a bowman conipli-
tiitos it. The probability, too, of the word for Language, being the
name of a nation is less than it is ought to be, considering the
I great extent to which it is admitted.
(2)
The statements respecting Bohemia are over-strong. Some por-
tion of it was, probably, Marcomannic and German. The grea-
ter pr.rt, however, of the original lioio-hem-mn^ or /iowe of the
l^oii, I still continue to give to the country of the Boian occti-
\]mnls — Baio-wrtr-ii = Bavaria', the word itself being a compound
"ftlie same kind as C{i\it-}vcere = inhabitants of Kent. (8ee Zeuss
I ill V, Baiovarii).
8
ON THE OrJGlNAL EXTENT OF THE
SLAAONIC AKEA.
KEAI)
BEFORE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY.
MAU(;ii 8, 1850.
:|
The portion of the Slavonic frontier wliieh will be consi- 1
(lered this evening is the north-western, beginning with tin-
parts about the Cinibric peninsula, and ending at the point
of contact between the present kingdoms of Saxony and Bn-
hernia; the leading physical link between the two extreme
populations being the Elbe.
For this tract, the historical period begins in the niiitii
century. The classification which best shows the really Avest-
erly disposition of the Slavonians of this period, and w\M\
gives us the fullest measure of the extent to which, (il llml
ti?nc at leant, they limited the easterly extension of the Ger-
mans, is to divide them into — a. the Slavonians of tlie
Cimbric peninsula ; h. the Slavonians of the right bank nf
the Elbe; c. the Slavonians of the left bank of the Elbe; the
first and last being the most important, as best showing
the amount of what may be called the Slavonic protrusion Md
the accredited Germanic area.
a. The Slavonians of the Cimbric Peninsula. — Like the Sin-
vonians that constitute the next section, these are on the
right bank of the Elbe ; but as they are north of that river
rather than cast of it , the division is natural.
The Wagrians. — Occupants of the country between the
Trave and the upper portion of the southern branch of tlic
Eyder.
The Polahi. — Conterminous with theAVagrians and the Sax-
ons of Sturmar, from whom they were separated by the river
BiUe.
b. Slavonians of the right bank of the Elbe. — The Obodrili
— This is a generic rather than a specific term ; so that it
man, as Kei
ON TllK OllKilXAL KXTKNT Ol' I'lIK .SLAVONIC AREA.
115
is probable that several of the Slavonic populations about to
[lie noticed may be but subdivisions of the great Obotrit
si\tioii. The same applies to the divisions already noticed —
I the Wagri and Polabi: indeed the classification is so uncer-
tniii, that we have, for these parts and times, no accurate
means of ascertaining' whether avc are dealing Avith suh-
(livisions or tvasi'-divisions of the Slavonians. At any rate
the word Obulriti -was one of the best-known of the whole
ist; so much so, that it is likely, in some cases, to have
equalled in import the more general term JVctid. The varie-
ties ot orthography and })ronunciation may be collected from
Zeiiss {in voce), where Ave find Obotriii, Obotritcc, Ahotrili,
Miulridi, Apodrilic, Abalareni, Apclrcdc , Abdrede , Abtrezi. Fur-
thermore, as evidence of the generic character of the word,
we rind certain EaU-ObolvHs {Osler-Ablrezi), conterminous with
the Bulgarians, as avcU as the Nortli-Ubutrils (Norl-Ablrezi), for
the [jarts in question. These are the northern districts of
Mecklenburg-Schwerin, from the Trave to the AVarnow, chiefly
alnng the coast. Zeuss makes Schwerin their most inland lo-
caliiy. The Descriptio Civitntiim gives them fifty-three towns.
In the more limited sense of the term, the Obotrits are
not conterminous with any German tribe , being separated
by the Wagri and Polabi. Hence when Alfred writes Norman
Eiihl-Sfaxnm is Apdrcde , he probably merges the tAvo sections
kst-narned in the Obotritic.
Although not a frontier population, the Obotrits find place
in the present paper. They shoAV that the Wagri and Po-
hibi were not mere isolated and outlying portions of the great
family to Avhich they belonged, but that they Avere in due
continuity with the main branches of it.
Varnabi. — This is the form Avhich the name takes in Adam
of Bremen. It is also that of the Varni, Varini, and Vi-
runi of th'j classical Avriters; as Avell as of the Werini of the
Introduction to the Lcf/es Atujlhirum et Jf'i'n'norum, hoc est Thit-
ringonnn. Noav Avhatever the Varini of Tacitus may have
been, and however nuich the affinities of the Werini were
with the Angli, the Varnahi of Adam of liremcn are Sla-
vonic.
c. Cis-Albian Slavtmians. — lieyond the boundaries of the
Duchios of Holstein and Lauenburg, the existence of Ger-
mans on the right bank of the Elbe is nil.
With Altmark the evidence of a Slavonic population
changes, and takes strength. The present Altmark is not (Jer-
iiian, as Kent is Saxon, but only as GornAvall is, /. e. the
trae(>s of the previous Slavonic population are Hke the traces
of the Celtic occupants of CornAvall, the rule rather than
8*
116
ON TUB ORiaiNAL EXTENT OP THE SLAVONIC AUEA.
ii >
the exception. ]\rost of tlie geograpliical iiaiues in Altmark
are Slavonic, the remarkable exception being the name of
the Old March itself.
The ►Slavono-Gerinan frontier for the parts south of Alt-
mark becomes so complex as to require to stand over f'nr
future consideration. All that Avill be done at present is to
indicate the train of reasoning applicable here, and appli-
cable along the line of frontier. If such Avas the state (if
things in tlie eighth and ninth centuries, what reason is thfi"
for believing it to have been otherwise in the previous ones?
The answer is the testimony of Tacitus and others in tli"
way of external, and certain etymologies, &c. in the wav
of Internal, evidence. Without at present saying anytliin-
in the way of disparagement to either of these series of
proofs, the present writer, who considers that the inferen-
ces which hav3 generally been drawn from them are illeiri-
timate, is satisfied with exhibiting the amount of a pmri
improbability which they have to neutralize. If, when Ta-
citus wrote, the area b(;twoen the P^lbe and Vistula was not
Slavonic, but Gotliic, the Slavonians of the time of Charle-
magne must have immigrated between the second and ciglitli
centuries; must have done so, not in parts, but for the Avhole
frontier; must have, for the first and last time, displaced
a population which has generally been the conqueror radier
than the conquered ; must have displaced it during one of the
strongest periods of its history; must have displaced it every-
where, and wholly; and (what is stranger still) that not per-
manently — since from the time in question, those same (ier-
mans, who between a. 200 and a.d. 800 are supposed to have
always retreated before the Slavonians, have from a.d. SDH
to a.d. 1800 always reversed the process and encroached
upon their former dispossessors.
. ,11
ADDENDA (1859).
(1)
The details of the Slavonic area to the south of Altmark aio
as folloAvs.
Brandi'tihurg ^ at the beginning of the historical period, was
Slavonic, and one portion of it, the Circle of Cotbus, iw so at
the present moment. It is full of geographical names .signiiicant
in the Slavonic languages. Of Germans to the East of the Elbe
AnnnvDA.
117
tlii'ic an' no signs until after the tinio of Cniarlcniagnc. lint tlio
[ Kllic is not even their eastern boundary. The Saale is tlie river
which divides tlie Slavonians from tlu^ Thnringians — not only
at the time Avhen its drainage tirst conies to he known, hnt long
attciwanls. j\Iore than tills, there were, in the llth and I2th cen-
tiiiics, Slavonians in 'rimringia, Slavonians in Franconia — facts
which can he found in full in Zeuss vv. Frankisclie nml Thi'irm-
il'm'he Slaiven — (Dir Jtrutscheu mid die Nucldxu'Sliimme).
Saxon;/ hrings ns down to the point with which the j)receding
iiMIu'r conclnded viz: the frontier of Hoheniia. 'J'liis was in the
saiiic category with lirandenlmrg. In Leipzig Slavonic was spo-
ken A. D. 1327. hi Lnsatia it is spoken at the jiresent nionient.
When were the hy])otlietical (Jermans of all these jiarts (diinina-
tcd, or (if not eliminated) amalgamated with a poj)nlation of in-
tnulcvs wIki displaced their langnage , not on one sjxtt or on two,
hut every where V
It' the Slavonians of the time of Charlemagne Avere indigenous
til tlio western ])i *ion of their area, they were , a fortiori, indi-
;;'oii(ius to the eastr . At any rate, few who hold that the Ger-
'iiiiii |)o]mlations of rxdiemia, JVIecklenhnrg, Lnnehnrg, Altmark,
liiaiideuhnrg. Saxony, Silesia, and Lnsatia are recent, Avill
ihmbt their heing so in J'omerania.
In his Edition of the (Jermania of Tacitns the only Germans
nut of the Klhe, Saale and the Fichtid (Jeliirge, recognised hy the
|ii('sont writer are certain intrusive ^[arcoinanni ; who (by hypo-
tlicsis) derived I'roni 'riiuringia , reached the Daiinhe by way of
the valley of Xaah, and jiressed eastward to some point un-
known — hnt beyond the southern frontier of Moravia. Here
the)" skirted the Slavonic ])opulations of the north, and formed
tit their several areas the several ]\rarclies from Avliich they took
their name.
As far as Ave have gone hitherto Ave liaA'e gone in the direc-
timi of the doctrine that the Sla\'onians of Franconia, Thuringia,
Saxony, Altmark, Lunehnrg, ^Mecklenburg, Holstein , and Bran-
ilenhui'g »ltc. Avere all old occupants of the districts in Avhich they
were found in the 8th, 9th, lOth, and Iltli centuries; also that the
present (V.ekhs of I^ohemia and ]\[oravia, the present Serbs of
Lnsatia and Hrandenbnrg, the present Kassubs of Pomerania,
and the ]»resent SloA'aks of Hungary represent aboriginal ])oj)u-
lations. We iioav ask hoAV far this Avas the case Avitli the fronta-
^eis of Xorth-eastorn Italy, and th*^ Slavonians of Garinthia and
Ciirniola. The conchision to Avhich Ave arrive in respect to these
will apply to those of IJosnia, Servia, and IJahnatia.
That the Gariiithians and Garniolans Avere the descendants of
the Oarni of the Alpes Garnicai Avonld never have been doubted
'•lit for the foUoAving statements — '"^Tlie Krobati Avho noAV oc-
118
ON THK OUIf;iNM, KXTHNT OF TlIK St.AVOMC AliKA.
t:
I
i|.
**cupy the parts in tlic (lireotlon of Dclmatiii arc derived tVum
"the Unhaptizcil Krohati, the Krovati A.spri so-called; win;
"dwelt on the otherside ofTnrkey, and near France, coiitcrini-
")i<»us with the Unhaptized Slaves — i. <>. the Serhi. TIh' wniil
"Krobati is explained hy the dialect of the Slaves. It iiiciius
"the p(issess(trs of a larj,'e conntry" — Constanlimis PorjihijiUjiji-
neln-— I)c Jihn. Imp. M. I'd. P<ir. p. 91.
A}:;ain — "Hut the Krohati dwelt then in the direction of hii;'i-
vareia" (Ihivaria) "where the lielokrohati are now. ( )n(> trilic
"(7£i'6«) sejjarated. Five brothers led them. Chikas, and IjuIicIh,,
''and Kosentes, and JMuklo, and Krohatos, aiul two sisters, Tupi
"and Buga. These with their people came to Delniatia — Tlif
"other Krohati stayed ahnnt France, and are called liehtkroliati.
"/. e. Asjtri Krohati, having" their own leader. They are sulijict
*'to Otho the j^reat king of France and Saxony. They contiiiiic
"Unha])tized , intermarrying" {Gv^iiicvd'SQiaq y.al aydnag f'pvrc.
"wi.h the Turks" — r. 30. p. 9b. — The statement that the Kni;i-
tians of Dalmatia came from the Asprocroatians is repeated. The
evidence, however, lies in the ])receding passages; njion wliidi
it is scarcely necessary to remark thai bcl = rv/iih' m Slavonic, an'l
aspro=: while in Romaic.
So much for the (h'oatians. The evidence that the Scwijiiis
were in the same category, is also (^)nstantine's. — ""It must ln'
**nndprstoo(l that the Servians are from the Unhaptized Servians,
"called also Aspri, beyond Turkey, near a place called J^iiki.
"near France — just like the (Jreat (h'ohatia, also Unl)ai)tiz('il
*'and White. Thence, originally, came the Servians — c. M. /).99
Jn the following passages the evidence improves — "The same
"Krohati came as suppliants to the Emperor Heraclius, bofoiv
"the Servians did the same, at the time of the inroads of tlic
"Avars — By his order these same Krohati having concpu'ieil
"the Avars, expelled them, occupied the country they occupied.
"and do so now" — c. 31. p. 97.
Their country extended from the River Zentina to the iVnntior
of Istria and, thence, to Tzentina and Ohlebena in SerA'ia. Tlioir
towns were Nona, Belogradon, lielitzein, Scordona , C^hleboiia.
Stol])on, Tenen, Kori, Klaboca — (c. 31. p. 07. 98). Their couutrv
was divided into !l. Supan-7ics (Zovnafiag).
'I'hey extended themselves. From the Krohati ''who canio intu
"Dalmatia a portion detached themselves, and conquered tho Illy-
"rian country and Fannonia" (c. 30/). 95).
The further notices of the Servians are of the same kiiul.
Two brothers succeeded to the kinguom, of which one oH'orcil
his men and services to HeracHi - . \.lio placed them at first in
the Theme Thessalonica, where tiiey grew honiesicic, crossed tlif
Danube about Belgrade, repented, tixrned hack, were placeil
ADDKXDA.
119
iiiScrvia, in the parts .icciij)i('(l by tlic Avars, and, finally, wore
!,„|,tizc(l. {c. 32. //. <)9.)
it is clear that all this applies to the Slavonians ot'(M'oatia,
lidsiiia, Servia, and Slavoiiia — i. c. the tiian.lo at tlu^ jnnctioii of
tiic Save and Danube. It has no ap])lication to Istria, C^arnioia,
('iiriiitliia, and Styria. Have any writers so applied itV Some
hnvo, some have not. More than this, many who have never
;i]i])liod it argue just as if they had. Zeuss, especially stating that
the Slavonic pojmlation of the parts in question Avas earlier than
tliiit (if Croatia, still, makes it recent. Why? This will soon
he .s(M'ii. At i)resent, it is enough to state that it is not hy the
direct a])])lication of the ])assage in ]'or])hyrogeneta that the an-
tifiuity of the Slavonic character of the Carinthians, (Jarnicdans,
;iii(l Istrians is impugned.
'flic real reason lies in the fact of the two ])opulations being
uliko in other res])ects. "What is this worth? Something — per-
haps, imich. Which way , however, does it tell V That depends
(111 lircninstances. If the ('roatians be recent, the Carinthians
should he so too. Jiut Avhat if the evidence make the (!arin-
tliians oldV Then, the recency of the Croatians is impugned.
X(i\v Zouss {vv. Jlpenslawctt , Caranlani, and Creinarii) distinctly
shews that there Avere SlaA'onians in the present districts before
the time of Iferaclius — not much before, but still before. AVhy
lint iimchy "'They came only a little before, inasmuch as I'roco-
jiiiis "gives us nothing but the old names ('arni, and Norici".
lint Avliat if these Avere Slavonic?
The present meaning of the root Cam- is March., just as it is in
V-kraiii. In a notice of the year A. 1). 974 Ave find 'Sjuod Carn-
"iiila vocatur, et quod viilgo vocatur Crcina 7narcha^*., the SlaA'o-
11 ic word being translated into German. Such a fact, under or-
iliiiaiy circumstances Avould make the Cam- in Alpes C«/-«-ica.', a
Slavonic gloss; as it ahnost certainly is. I do not, lioweA'er,
kiiinvthe etymologist Avho has claimed it. Zeuss does not — though
it is from his pages that I get the chief evidence of its being one.
Croatia, Bosnia, and Servia noAV come under the application
iiftlio Constantine text.
Let it ])ass for historical ; notAvithstanding the length of time
lictwcen its author and the events Avhicli it records.
Let it pass for historical, notAvithstanding the high probability
(if Vrnhijzi, a Avord used in Servia before the Christian a-ra, being
th(> same as Krobali.
hot it pass for historical, notAvithstanding the chances that it
is only an inference from the presence of an allied population on
'idtli sides of Pannonia.
Lot it pass for historical, notAvithstanding the leadership of
the live brothers (one the eponynms A'robalos) and the two sisters.
t20
ON TlIK OUKilNAr, F.XTKNT OK TilK SI^AVOMC AUF,A.
11 .i-
I (<i'
Let it do this, and then lot us ask how it Is to bo iiit(M))r(t(il.
Widoly or strictly V We sco what stands ajjjainst it viz: the exist
ing conditions of throe mountainous roj^ions oxhihitlng the s'v^w,
of boin}^ tho occupancies of an aboriginal population as much as
any countries on tho face of the earth.
What thou is the strict interpretation V Even this — that He-
radius introduced oertain ("roatians from tln^ north into tlic m-
ctipancios of the dis])ossossod Avars a])parently as nulitary cdln
nios. Does this mean thai they wore tho first of their lineagcV liv
no means. The late emperor of Russian ])lantod Slavonic coliinitv
of Servians in Slavonic Russia. 3Iotal upon motal is false licial-
dry; but it docs not follow that Slave U])on Slave is bad othn(ilii;.'v,
With such a full roalizatit»u of the insufliciency of the evidoiin'
which makes nohemia, (larinthia, Sorvia (tc. other than Slavonic n'l
initio, we may proceed to the ethnoloj^y of tho parts to tho \\m.
and southwest — tho Tyrol, Northern Italy, Switzerland, liavmia,
and Wurtemborg. In ros])ect to those, we may either distrtlniti'
them among the po])ulations of the frontier, or imagine for tliciii
some fresh division of the ])opulation of Euro]»o, once existent,
but now extinct. AVo shall not, however, choose this latter
alternative unless we forget the wholesome rule Avhich forbids us
to nmltijdy causes unnecessarily.
Jjot us say, then, that tho soiithern frontier of tho division n-
presented by the Slavonians of Carni(da was originally prolongcil
until it touched that of the northernmost Italians. In like iiiiiii
nor, let tho Styrian and Bohemian Slaves extend till tlicy
moot the Kelts of Gaul. With this general expression I take
leave of this part of tho subject — a subject worked out in detail
olsewhoro (^Edition of PrichurcCs Eastern origin of the Celtic Nalioh.
aful The Ger mania of Tacitus tvith Ethnological Notes, — Nairn
Races of the Russian Empire &c.).
The northern and eastern frontiers of tho Slavonians iuvolvo
those of (l) Ugrians, (•>) the Lithuanians.
In respect to the former, I think a case can be made out for
continiiing the earliest occupancy of the populations represoutoil
by tho Jjiefs of ('Ourland, and the Rahwas of Estonia to tho Oder
at least; ])orhaps further. This moans along the coast. Their ex
tent inland is a more complex question. '^IMie so called Fin \\)'\w
thesis in its full form is regarded, by the present writer, asunteualili'.
But between this and a vast extension of the Fin area beyond its
present bounds there is a groat ditt'orenco. It is one thing to con-
nect tho Basks of Spain with the Klionds of India; another tn
bring the Estonians as far west as the Odor, or oven as tho Klbc
It is one thing to make an allied population occup.ant of Sweden,
Spain, and Ireland ; another to refer the oldest poptilation of west-
ern Russia to tho stock to Avhich the eastern undeniably belongs.
AI)|)F.N1>A.
121
«« iiHich av
\ns involve
This latter is a more (nicstion of more or less. 'I'lio otlicr is a dif-
tVioiu'c, not of kind, l»ut nr(l('<;r('0. Witli tliis distinction we n»ay
■.tiut from tlu' most sontiicrn jxirtiou of tiic present I'j^rian area;
whii'li is that of th" Morduins in the (Jovernment of I'enza, Or
wciiiav start from tlie most western Avhii'h is tliat of the Liefs of
Courland. Wliat are tlie traces of Fin oc('U]»ancy between tiieso
;tiiil the A'istnhi and Danube — the Vistula westward, the Danulx^
on the South. How distinct are they? And of what kind? We.
iiuniitt ex^tect them to be either obvious or numerous. Say that
tliov are the vesti<;es of a stat(^ of thinj^s that has jiassed away
;i tlmusand years, and we only come to the time of Nestor. Say
that they are doubly so (dd, and we have only reached the days
i){'lIeriidotus; in whose time there had been a sufficient amount
iifcMicroachmentand displacement to fill the southern ijlovernments
(if Russia with Scythians of Asiatic orij^ln. 'I'he Britons were the
occ'U])ants of Kent at the be<^-inning- of our a-ra. How faint aro
tlio traces of them. We nuist rej^ulate, then, our expectations
iiccordiufj; to the conditions of the (|uestion. We must expect
ti) tiiul thinj:;s just a little more l'};rian than anj^ht else.
From that ])art of Russia which could , even a thousand years
ii|,'o, exhibit an indigenous po])ulation we nnist subt ict all those
districts which were occupied by the Scythiani. \Vo do not
know how much comes under this category. We only know that
the Agathyrsi were in Hungary, and that they were, probably,
iiitnulers. We nuist substract the, (Jovernments of Kherson, Eka-
tininoslav, and Taurida at the very least — nnxch of each if not
all. 'J'hat tliis is not too nnich is evident from the expressed
opinions of competent investigators. Francis Newman carries
the Scythia of Herodotus as far as Volhynia, and, in Volhynia,
tl\(>ro were Cumanian Turks as late as the 1 1th century. Say,
liowpver that the aborigines Avere not Fins. At any rate they
wore not the ancestors of the, present Russians — and it is the
original area of these that we are now considering. In the
Xiirth there were Fins when Novorogod , and in the East Fins
wlion Moscow, was founded. In Koursk , writes Haxthausen,
there is a notable difference in the })liysiognomy of the inhabi-
tants; the features being Fin rather than Slavonic.
I now notice the name of Roxolani. Frichard and, doubtless,
others besides see in this a Fin gloss, the ternrination-/rt;/i being
the termination -/rt?«e/j in i^noxnolttincfi , llamelninen and several
other Fin Avords, i.e. a gentile termination. It does not folloAV
irom this that the people themselves were Fins. It only follows
that they wore in a Fin neigbourhood. Some one who spoke
a language in which the form in -loin- was used to denote the
name of a people was on their frontier, and this frontier must
have been South of that of the Roxolani themselves — else how
122
O.N rili: oitKilNAI, KXIKNT OT Till: SI, AVONir AIM; A.
o-f
III
(lid it conic, to the cars of the (Jrccks and K'oniausV Iftiiis were iint
the I'asc, tiicu was the name native, and the Un.xohmi were
l'j:;riMn. In eitlier case we have a I'Mn j^loss, and a Fin lociditv
wn;;j;cst('(l hy it. Xnw the conntry of the Ho.xolani either readied,
or approached, tiie |)anul)e.
In the acconnt of Ilert»(httns a ])o])nIation named Nruri nccu.
j»ied a nnirshy district at the liack of th(^ Scytluan area; pin
hahly tlie marshes of ]Mnsk. This is, ]»(>rliaps, a Kii, ;.j|(iss.
The town of Nnri/m in tlie Ostiak conntry takes its name t'riMu
tlie marshes ronnd it.
'I'he I/itlmanian hinj:;naj^e avoids the h'tter/". -nsin;^/^ instoiul;
Kometimes m. The (JrcM'k rpikf(0 is myhx in Lithnanic. The nami',
then, that a Fin hicality wr»nhl take in the montli of a Iiitiiii;i-
iilan wojild not he /-""insk hut J/insk, or /'insk, and tliesc arc
the names we find on what 1 tliiiik was, at one time, tlu^ Finiio-
liithnanic frontier.
I should add tliat tlie Knur- in /uH/z'-sk seems to ho the Knur-
in /u»//r-hind, the k'nr- in /u*/'-alli (a Fin ])oi)nlation of tlic
3Iid(lle .\j:,-es), and tlie Car- in the eminently, and almost tv-
jiically. Fin /u/z-elians.
This is not nnudi in the way of evidence. ]Much or little, liow-
PV(>r, it is more than can he j^ot for any other ])o])nlation. Much (ir
little it is got at hy a very cursory investigation. No sjx'cial ic-
soarch has heen instituted. No tunmlus has heen appealed to. Nd
local dialect has heen analysed. Xo ordnance map has licoii
pored over. All this Avill, douhtless, he done in time, and it',
when it has heen dane, uo coniirmation of the prrseiit doctrine
be found, the jjroponuder v ill reconsider it. If the evidence point
elsewhere he Avill ahandon it. At present ho brings the early
Fin frontier to ]Minsk and IMnsk.
There it touched that of the Lithuanians. To make these tlip
most eastern members of the Sarmatian stock is, at the first view.
to fly in the face of the testinnniy of their present position. Tlii'V
are, in one sense, tlu most Avestern. The (Jermans of Prussia
touch them on the sid(^ of Euro])e. Between them and the Fins
of Asia, the vast Kussian area of the ({overnnients of Smolensk",
Novogorod L^c. intervene. Speaking laxly, one may say that all
Kussia lies beyond them. Nevertheless, it Is Avith the Fins of
Estonia that they are also in contact; Avhilst the explanatinn
of the (lerman and Russian contact is transparently clear. Tlio
Germans (as a matter of history) cut their Avay through avIidIc
masses of Shwonians in I'omerania, before they reached tlioni;
so displacing the Slavonians to the Avest of them. The liussiiuis
(again a matter of history) pressed up to them by a circuit fmni
the south and Avest. The Lithuanians have ke])t their position-
but one population has stretched beyond, and another has pros-
Al>I)f,NI)A.
12.T
.(•il ii|i to tluMii. Tlicir limj^imj^d is cin'mctitly akin to tlio Sanskrit.
Their |iliysi()j^nt»niy is tlw most Kin ui' any tlioronj^hly EurDpcan
|ioj)i'.liiti<>n.
Tlu'ro were nn Slavonians, /// silii, to the Kast of tin- Litlinanir
iucii : none tirij;inMlly. My cnrrdaclniicnt and clianj^'c of ]ilart>
tlKM'i'urc, ill later times, many. 'I'liere are, as aforesaid, all
ihc liiissians of the j)resent moment. The ipiestion, however, he-
fun' us is the ori;j;inal area, the primordial sUks.
Tlic westw ard extension of tlie I^ithnanlans is a matter npon
whieli I do not press tlie details. 1 think that the N'istnla may
have heen to them and the Slavonians what the Uhinc; was to the
(iniils and (Jermnns. 'i'iie main (|nesti(tn is how far ean we hrin;^
tliciii south V What justifies ns in making them reaeh the Carpathl
;nisV At ]»r(^sent we find thom in Livonia, Conrland, East Prussia,
\'ilii!i, and (Irodno; hut further south than (Jrodno nowhere; no-
wlicrc, at least, Avith the detinite charaetevisties of name and lan-
;:nMj;<'. Kvery inch that is g'iven them south of (irodno must have
its |)nt]»er evidence to sujtport it.
'I'lic (Jothini of Tacitus are the first ])oj>ulation that we may
make liithuanic. What says Tacitus? They were notCJermans;
their laniiuaj^e ])roved this. 'Hiey were not Sarmatians. Tins
Sarinatians imposed a tribute njton, as on men of anothi>r stock
— Irihiiln ut aUeuiijeuis impouiml. The (j>uadi did the same, ll'
noitlicr (iermans nor Sarmatians what were theyV ^lemhers of .a
stuck now extinct y 'I'he rule aj^-ainst the tin necessary nniltiplica-
tidii of causes forbids ns to resort to this sui»])(»sition. Do ho onc(^
and we may always be doinj^" it. Were they FinsV Say that they
were, and wliat do we j;ain by it? We may as well proloufj; the
hitlmaiiia area frf»m (Jrodno us the Fin from ]'insk. Nay, better.
That (Irodno is Jiithuanian we know. 'I'hat I'insk was Fin w(>
Infer. Wei*o they Scythians V We know of no Scythians beyond
tlio Maros; so that the reasoning Avhich t<dd against the Fin hy-
]iiitliosis tells equally against the 'I'nrk. Meyond the (iermans,
the Slavonians , the Fins, the* Turks, and the Lithuanians ^\•^^
liiivc nothing to choose from; and T submit that the minimum
aiiiiiiiiit of assumption lies Avith the po](nlation last named.
Now comes the name of their Jjangnage. The J^anguage of tho
(Mttliinl Avas Gallicu — Osos I'annonica, (jrothlnos Gallira argnlt
iiiMi esse Komanoy. I have given reasons elsewhere ((Jermanla
I'f Tacitus Avith Ethnological notes) for translating (Jallica (ialli-
ciaii, — not (iallic. Say, hoAvever, that the latter is the better
translation; (Jothini Avonld still be the name of the ]>eo]»le.
There is a country, then, of the (Jothini sufficiently far
* Tlie term Turk is used in its wide Ethnulofrical sense, and includes
'111! Sci/l/itt:
121
(IN I 111: ••ItM.INAI, KNIMNT Ol' Till; SI.AVdMC AKC.A.
«rmtli to Itc ill ntiitiict -with tlu' (^iiadi and Sariiiata' tlio <^)ii;i(|i
in Mnravia and I pjicr llmi;;ary, iIm- Sariiiatu' in tlio pint,
lictwccii flic 'I'ln'ifss and tlic DaniilH', (liillicia meets these cinKli-
tions. It was a niininj;' cnnntry. ({allieia is this. It was mi rli,.
rpjier N'istnhi - |M'i»lialdy at ItH head-waters. ,Vt the mmiili di
the same river the name re-apitears, in that id' tlie (Inl/ntwi's, Umi
<»nes, (!f/t/ti\ucs Siv. nt' the AimImt etnintry. 'I'hese were eitiier tin
nearest nei;ililmiirs of tlie Aestyii, ortiie .Vestyii tiiemstdves uiidir
n iiaiiie other than (lermau —tor Aestyii is an nndouhtecl (leniiiin
ji,'h>ss, Jnst like A'.sV- in A',s7- onia.
.Are we jnstiti<'(l in identit'yinj;' these two ]io|>nhitiniis on the
Htren^th of the nameV No. Wliat wo arr justified in doju;',
however, is this. We are jiistitied in plaeinj:; on the I'ronficr nt
b th a h\n};'na;^n in whitdi tlio root <ln//i- was ]>art of n natimiiil
name.
At tlie l»e';innin};' of tlio historical period these (Jothones were
the liitiiannians of ICast Prussia, and their nei;;:l)ours railed tlicni
CnihU.ii. They were the eon}j^(>ners of those Jiithnaniaus wiiosc
area, even now, extents as far south as (irodno.
It is easy to conneet the (Jothones with (Jrodno; hut Avlint ((in
uocts (Jrodno with (Jothinian (JalliciaV What can eonneet it imw v
All is INdish or Jiussian. What are the prooTs that It v^as imt mi
from the hej^innin;;'? The followinj^ — the ]»opulations hetwccn
(Jrodno and the frontier of (Jallieia, ajjpear, for the first time in
history in the IHth century; Imt not as lV)les, nor yet as Ixussiiius,
hut as Lithminians — "cum Prulhenira et Lithuamca liniiua lui-
hens maj^iia ex jiartf similitudinein et intcdligentiam" — 'Miiij,'n;i,
ritu, reli;;ione, et nuirihus magnam hah(d)at cum Lilhitanis , Pni-
thenis et Sa/'ingHis'* (the present Lithuanians of East Prussia i
**conformltatem".
We cannot hrinjjf these quite down to (Jallicia; and this is nut to
be Avondered at. The first notice we have of them is very nearly
the last as w(dl. 'V]\o narrative which }j;ives us the preceding texts
is the narrative of their subjugation and extinction.
"What was the name of this iteopleV I ])remise that avo get it
through a double medium, the Latin, and tlie Slavonic — the lat-
ter language always being greatly disguised in its adaptation tn
the I'ormer. The commonest form is .laczwingi (Lat.) Jatwyazi
(Slavonic); then (in documents) Gcluin-vAiK ^ a word giving the
root Got/ton-. Finally, Ave liaA'e '*l^)llexinni Gclharum sen I'rus-
sorum gens'*.
Such are the reasons for connecting the (Jothini of the •\[arc'it-
niannlc frontier Avith the CJothlni of the Baltic, and also for makiti;:
both (along Avith the connecting JaczAvingi) Lithuanians, Tlii^
latter point, hoAvever, is unessential to the present investigation;
Avliich simply considers the area of the Slavonians. For the jmrts
ADItKXDA.
I2i
iKntli t»r c\n' ('ariifitliiims, it was liinltctl l»y a ctrntiiiiiiius liiu^
„l' Goli'iiiii, iit'liihr/Miv, ami (litthmivs. Whatever tlid.se wt-ii' tlicy
«crf iu»t Slavonic.
Siu'li is the sketeh of tiie chiet" reasuiis tor Itelieviiii;' that oii;;i-
iiiilly tlie Nistuhi (th<'r(' or tiieieal)oiith) wa.s the Ixmiidary of th«'
SliivoiiiaiiH on tlie North ICast; a lieliet' conlirnietl l»y tlie plieno-
iiii'iia tiC the lan^iiaji'e.s spoken, al tiie present moment, lieyoml
tliiit river. 'I'iiey fall into few diiilects; a fact whieh is /iriiim /'tirir
iviileiK'e of recent introdnction. The Polish hraiich shews itself
ill varieties an.l snl»varieties on its western frontier; the Uiissiau
nil its southern and south-'.-astern. The further tliey are found
Kiist antl North, the newer they are.
1 may add that I Hnd no facts in the s|)ecial etlnudoj^y of tho
liirly I'oles, that coni|)lioate this view. ( )n the contrary, the spe-
(i;d facts, such av they are, are conlirmatory rather than auj;ht
ilsc of th(^ w<stern iniijiii and the eastern tliriilion , of a I'olisli
line (if eucrnachuM'nt , nd^ration, occnjiuicy, displacement, invu-
>ioii, or conciuest. I'nder the early kinj^s of the hlood of i'iast
an Individual wlndlv unhistoric) , the loc.ilitv for their exiihdts
aiiil occupancies is no j)art of the country ahout the present capi-
tal, Warsaw; but the district round I'osen and (inesen; this
liciiij; tin' area to which the earliest le^icnds attach thenistdves.
Where this is not the case, where the Duchy of I'osen or Prus-
hiau I'oland does not give us the ciirliest signs of iNdish occu-
|iaiu'y, the parts al)ont Cracow do. At any rate, the legi-nds lie
in the west and south rather than in the east; on the Saxon or
the Holiendan frontier rather than the I/ithuanic.
The Slavonic area south of the Carjtathians gives us a much
iiKire complex ([uestion — one, indeed, too c(unplex to investi-
gate it in all its hearings.
Tiiat there wore both Slavonians and Lithuanians in Dacia,
Lower Ma'sla , Thrace, and, even, ^[acedon is nearly certain —
ami that early. Say that they were this at tlu^ beginning of tho
liistorical period. It will, by no means, make them aboriginal.
Such being the casi> 1 limit myself to the statement that, at
tlie heginnlng of the historical ]»eriod, the evidence and reasou-
injj,' that connects the Thracians with the (leta;, the Gettu with the
Daci, and the Daci with the Sarmatlan stock in general is suffi-
cient. Whether it makes them indigenous to their several areas
is another (juestion. It is also another ([uestiou wliether the
relationship betw^een thoni was so close as the current statements
make it. These identify the Getai and Daci. I inmgine that they
ivere (there or tliereabonts) as dift'erent as the Bohemians and
the Lithuanians — the Getic Jjithuanians, and the Dacian (Daci=:
2'S«y.0() Czekhs; both, however being Sarmatlan.
I also abstain from the details of a question of still greater
126
ON TlIK (MlKilNAL KXTEXT OK TITK SLAVONIC AUKA.
iii"
■'tj
i
it
^1
importanco and interest viz: tin' extent to wliicli a third Inw'^w.v^c of
tlic class vliic'li contains tlio Slavonian and liitlinanic may onn;iv
nut have been spoken in the ]);u'ts nnder notice. There was nidiii
for it in the iiiirts to the Sonth of the l-'in, and the east of the hi-
thnanic, areas. There avms room for it in the ])resent (Joveruiiiciits
of J^odolia, and Volhynia, to say nothing- of large portions nf
the drj\inaj;e of the Jjower Dannhe. 'JMie lanj^naj^-e of sufli aii
area, if its structnre coincided with its {^eoj^raphical ]»osition Mould
be liker the Jiithnanic and the most eastern l)rMnch of the Sla-
vonic than any other Jjanguages of the so-called Indo-Kuropcaii
Stock. It would also be nu)re Sarmatian than either (ierinan or
(Jlassical. Yet it would Ix^ both (Classical and (Jerman also, on
the strength of the term Indo-Euroi)ean. It would be the most
Asiatic of the tongues so denominated; with some llgrian !it'liiii
ties, and others with the languages in the dii'ection of Aniiciiia,
and I'ersia. It woidd be a language, howevei", which would soon
be obliterated; in as nnu-h a the ]»arts upon which we placo it
were, at an early date, overrun by Scythians from the East,
and Slavonians from the West. AN'hen we, know Volhynia, it
is Turk, and I'olish, — anything but aboriginal. Such a lan-
guage, however, might, in case the po]>ulati<nis who spoke it liail
made early con((uests elsewhere, be, still, preserved to our own
times. ( )r it might have been , at a similarly early ])erio(l, coni-
nutted to writings; the works in which it was embodied liavinj:
come down to lis. If so, its ndations to its congeners would \w
remarkable. 7y/<'y would only be known in a modern ,// only in
an ancient, form. Such being the case the original aftinity uiijilit
be disguised; es]tecially if the transfer (»f the earlier iaiigii;is;c
had been to some very distant and unlikely point.
I will now ajtply this hy[>othetical series of arguments. It litis
long been known that the ancient, sacred, and literary huignngi'
of Northern India has its closest graiumatical afiinities in Euro]i('.
With none of the tongues of the neighbouring countries, with no
form of the Tibetan of the Himalayas or the ]iunnes(^ dialcits
of the north-east, Avith no Tanuil dialect of the southern jiart of
the Peninsula itself has it half such close resend)lances as it lias
with the distant and disconnected Lithuanian.
As to the Tiithuanian , it has, of course, its closest afiinities
Avith the Shivonic tongues of Kussia, Bohemia, Poland, and Sci-
via, as aforesaid. And when we go beyond the Sarnnitian stock,
and bring into the field of comparison the other tongues <tf Eu-
rope, the Latin, the Cilreek, the (Jerman, and the K<dtic, we
find that the Litlmanic is niore or less connected with thein.
Now, the botanist who, tbnnd in Asia, extended over a com-
paratively small area, a single species, belonging to a genus
which covered two-thirds of Europe (except so far as he might
from east to
3 'A
ADDENDA.
127
ur'O tliiit ovcrytliing camo from the cast, and so convert tlio s])(>-
litic ([ucstiou into an liy])otlu'sis as to tlic origin of vegetation in
;'cii('ral) would pronounce the (ic/iiis to l»e European. The zoo-
liMMst, in a case of i«ooh)gy, would do the, sanu'.
Mnlutis intilandis, t\n' logic of the philologue should he that of
tho naturalist. Yet it is not.
1. The area of Asiatic languages in Asia allied to the ancient
Luiiguage of India, is smaller than the area of European langua-
;;(',s allied to the Litlmanic; and — -
2. The class or genus to which tlie two tongues <'qually helong,
is rojtresented in x)Lsia hy the Indian division only ; whereas in
Europe it falls into three divisions, each of, at least, e(jual value
\vith the single Asiatic one.
Nevertheless, the so-called Indo-European languages are de-
duced from Asia.
I do not ask whether, as a matter of fact, this doducti(»n is right
iir wrong. I only state, as a matter of pliilological history, that it
is made, adding tliat tlu^ hy]»othesis which makes it is illegitimate.
it rests on the assumption that it is easier to hring a jxipulation
tidia India to liussia than to take one from liussi;' to India. In the
CMse of the more extreme language of which it takes cognisance
this postulate becomes still nu)re inadmissihle. It assumes, in
tho matter of the K(dtic (for instance), that it is easier to hring the
[icople of (Jalway from the Punjab, than the tribes of tlie i'unjab
from Eastern Euro})e. In short, it seems to be a generally received
rule amongst investigators, that so long as ^v(' bring oiir migration
fnim east to west we may let a very little evidences go a very
hiu^' Avay ; whereas, so soon as we reverse the process, and suji-
posc a line from Avest to east, the converse becomes requisite,
and a great deal of evidence is to go but a little Avay. The effect
(>f tliis has been to create innumerable Asiatic hypotheses and
fi'w or no European ones. Kussia may have been peopletl from
I'cr.sia, or Lithuania from Iliudostan, or Gri'ece from Asia, or
;iiiy place Avest of a given meridian from any place east of it
— but the converse, never. No one asks for proofs in tlie former
case; or if he do, he is satistied with a \'ery scanty modicum:
whereas, in the latter, the best authenticated statements undergo
stringent scrutiny. Inferences fare Avorse. They are hardly al-
hiwcd at all. It is all ''theory and hypothesis" if Ave resort to
them in ciises from Avest to east; but it is n(» "theory" and no
"liypothesis" Avhen we follow the sim and move westwards.
JiOt the tAVo lines be put on a level, and let ethnographi-
I'iil pliilology cease to be so one-sided as it is. Let the jiossibi-
litv (if a Western ori";in of the Sanskrit language take its natu-
lal place as the nuuuber of an alternatiA'e hitiierto ignored. I
do not say Avhat Avill follow in the Avay of historical detail. I only
128
ON TIIK OUICilNAL KXTKNT OV TIIK SLAVONU; AIIKA.
say (in tlio ])ro.s('iit i)ii]»or tit least) tliat the logic of an importiint
class of pliilological questions will be iniprovtid. As it stands ;it
])resent, it is little more than a reuiarkahle ])henoinenon in the
j)atholo<;y of the philological mind, a symptom of tlie niorhid con-
dition of the scientific imagination of learned men.
Turning westwards Ave noAV take up the Slovenians of (.'ariii-
thia and Styria on their western frontier, not forgetting the sou-
thermost of the Czekhs of liohemia. How far did the JSlaVim'u'
area extend in the direction of Switzerland, (Jaul, and Italy V
In the Tyx'ol we have such geographical names as Schani-(7:.
Gsh«?7z-thal, and Fm/,9/<-gau; in the Vorarlherg, Ked-;j«7; ami
Windisch-»Jrt//'C?. p]ven where the names arc less definitely Sla-
vonic, tiie compound sibilant tsh, so predominant in Slavonic,
so excej)tional in (fcrman, is of frequent occurrence. This, |k'i-
ha])s, is little, yet is more than can l)e found in any country
known to have ])een other than Slavonic.
Again — a Slavonic po]»ulation in the Vorarlberg and Soutlicni
Bavaria best accounts for the name r/;n/-elicia.
If the Slavonians are aboriginal, and if the (V.ekhs are the
same , the decisive evidence that, within the historical period,
they have both receded is in favor of their respective aroas
having originally been greater than they are at present. Sucli
being the case, we may bring them both further south and fur-
ther Avest. HoAV far? 'J'his is a question of minute detail, not to
be answered oft'-hand. The nile of parsimony, hoAvever, by Avhicli
Ave are forbidden to nmltiply stocks unnecessarily, carries tlipiu
to the frontier of the (iauls in one direction, and the Italians on
the other.
If so, there may luwe been Slavonians on the frontier of Li-
guria. More than this the llhaiti may haA'e been Slavonic also,
i3ut many make the Etruscans Khaitian. Is it possible hoAvever,
that even tlu- Etruscans Avere Slavonic?
I knoAV of niimerous opinions against their being so. I knoAv of
no facts.
ON THE TERMS OF dOTHl AND GETAi:.
OBSERVATIONS LAID BKFOliE TJIE ETHNOLOGI-
CAL SECTION, AT THE MEETING OF THE BRITISH
ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF
SCIENCE, HELD AT BHiMINGHAM 1849.
So far from the Gotlii and Getse being Identical there is
no reason to believe that any nation of Germany ever bore
the former of these two names until it reached the country
of the population designated by the latter. If so, the Goths
were Gothic, just as certain Spaniards are Mexican and Pe-
ruvian; and just as certain Englishmen are Britons i.e. not
;it all.
The Goths of the Danube, etc. leave Germany as Grutungs
iind Thervings, become Marcomanni along the Bohemian
iind Moravian frontiers, Ostrogoths and Visigoths, on the
Lower Danube (or the land of the Geta;), and Moesogoths
(from the locality in which they become Christian) in Moesia.
What were the Goths of Scandinavia V // k not I ivho
m the first by many scores of investigators to place all
the imineroup populations to which the possible modifications
of the root G — / ^ipply in the same category. I only deny
that that category is (Jerman. Few separate the Jutes of
Jutland, from the Goths of Gothland. Then there is the
word ritce; which is to Gut-, as JFill-iam is to 6'M/-ichi:
a form that was probably Lithuanic.
If J-\-t, as it occurs in the word Jute, be, really, the same
as the G-irt m Got or Goth, we have a reason in favour of
unc of the earlier Danish populations having been Lithuanic.
The four islands of Sealand, Laaland, Moen, and Falster
formed the ancient Vithesleth. This division is of consider-
iihle import; since the true country of Dan, the eponyinus
of tjie J)anc's, was not Jutland, nor yet Skaane, nor yet tyen.
h was the Four Islands of the Vithesleth : — "Dan — vox
\>n\m super Sialandiam, Monam, Falstriam, et Lalandiam,
cujus regnum dicebatur VitlieslvtU. Deinde super alias pro
vincias et insulas et totum
regnum.
— Petri Olai Chron.
130
ON TIIK TFRMS OF COTIII AM) CUT. IE.
.ii
4 %
Rcgum Dania'. Also, "Vidit nutem Dan rof;ioncm snam, mi-
per quain rognavit, Jutia-n, Fioiiiani, JfUhcalclh , ►Scaiiiam
quod c's.s(>t bona." — Anna). Ksroui. p, 224.
That tin Swedes and Kowvegians are the newest Scandinii-
vians and that certain IJgrians were the oldest, is undoubtfil.
]>ut it by no means follows that the succession was siniplf.
JJetween the first and last there may have been any amount o!
intercalations. Was this tlio casoV My own opinion is, tli;ii
the first encroachments ujjon the originally Ugrian arcii of
Scandinavia were not from the south-Avest, but from th'
south-east, not from Hanover but from Prussia and (Jourlaud,
not Gcrniau but Lithuanic, and (as a practical proof of tlie
inconvenience of the present nomenclature) although nut
G erraan , Golhic.
Whether these encroachments Avere wholly Lithuanic, ra-
ther than Slavonic as well, is doubtful. ^Vhen the arclian-
logy of Scandinavia is read aright, /. c. without a Gorman
preposscssio)!, the evidence of a second population will be-
come clear. This however, is a detail.
The Gothic historian Jornandes, deduces the Goths of
the Danube first from the southern coasts of the Baltic, and
ultimately from Scandinavia. 1 thinlv, however, that wlioovor
reads his notices will be satisfied that he has fallen into tin'
same confusion in respect to the Germans of the Lower Da-
nube and the Getie Avliose country they settled in, as an
English w'riter would do Avho should adapt the legends of
Geoffroy of Monmouth respecting the British kings to tlie
genealogies of Ecbert and Alfred or to the origin of" the
warriors under Hengist. The legends of the soil and the
legends of its invaders have been mixed together.
Kor is such confusion unnatural. The real facts before
the historian were remarkable. There were Goths on the
]jOwer Danube, Germanic in blood, and known by the
same name as the older inliabitants of the country. Tliore
were (Jothones, or (Juttones, in the l^altic, the essential part
of Avhoso name Avas (!oth-\ the -n- being, probably, and al-
most certainly, an inflexion.
Thirdly, there Avere Goths in Scandinavia, and Goths in
an intermediate island of the Baltic. \\'itli such a series of
6'o///,-hinds, the single error of mistaking the old (Jclic legends
for those of the more recent Germans (noAV called Uothi
Avould easily engender others ; and the most distant of the
three Gothic areas Avould naturally pass for being the oldejt
also. Hence, the deduction of the Goths of the Danube
from the Scandinavian Gothland.
ON THE JAPODES AND GEPIl)^..
UKAD
HEFOUE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY,
JANUARY IjTH 1857.
Of the nations wliose niovcnionts are connected witli tlie
ilcclino and fall of the Roman empire, though several are
iiKire important than the Gepidta , few are of a greater inter-
est. This is because the question of their ethnological re-
lations is more obscure than that of any other similar po-
pulation of equal liistorical prominence. How far they were
(ioths rather than Vandals, or Vandals rather than Goths,
liow far they were neither one nor the other, has scarcely
bfiou investigated.
Neither has their origin been determined.
Nor have the details of their movements been ascertained.
That the current account, as it stands in the pages of Jor-
nandcs Diaconus, is anything but unexcepiionable, will be
shown in the present paper. It is this account, however,
which has been adopted by the majority of inquirers.
The results to which the present Avriter commits himself are
widely different from those of his predecessors ; he believes
them, however, to be of the most ordinary and common-
)lace character. Why, then, have they not been attained
ong ago? Because certain statements, to a contrary effect,
Icing taken up without a due amount of preliminary criti-
cism, have directed the views of historians and ethnologists
towards a wrong point.
These, however, for the present will be ignored, and no-
tliing, in the first instance, will be attended to but the pri-
mary fj.cts upon which the argument, in its simplest form, de-
pends. These being adduced, the ordinary interpretation of
tliom will be suggested; after Avhich , the extent to which it is
modified by the statements upon which the current doctrines
arc founded will be investigated.
If we turn to Strabo's account of the parts on the north-
eastern side of the Adriatic, the occupancies of the nume-
9*
132
ON Tlir, JAl'OJ)i:,S AND fiKPIDAK.
'I
' *
rous tribes of the Jloinan proviiieo of lllyriciiin, wo shiill fin,!
that no sli<;lit proininent'.u I.s j^ivcn to tlio poitulation callrl
'luTtodeg. Tliey join the Carni. Tlic Culpa (Knknjtig) Hows
tliroufi,li tlu'ii* land. Tluij stretch alonj^' tho coast to tlK- rivir
Todanius; Scniti is their chief town. The Moentini, the Avcu-
(loata;, the Auripini, are their chief tribes. Vendos (Avendu
is one of their occupancies. tSuch are the notices of Strain,
rtoleiny, Appian, and Pliny; Pliny's form of the word bein^'
Japydes.
The lapodes, thon, or Jajiydes, of tlie autliors in quostlnn,
arc neither an obscure nor an inconsiderable nation. Tlnv
extend alonj? the sea-coast of tli'^ Adriatic. They occup'v
the valley of the C'ulpa. They are Illyrian, but contermi-
nous with I'annonia.
As Pliny seems to have taken his name from Straho, tlii;
authors Just quoted may all be called Greek. With the latent
of them we lose the forms 'JccTtodes or Japydes.
As the Koman empire declines and its writers become less
and less classical, their geographical records become less .sy-
stematic and more fragmentary; and it is not till we get to
the times of Probus and JMaximian that we find any naiuo
approaching 'ra;rod£t,\ Probus, howev(;r, plants a colony of
Gepidw within the empire {Vopiacus, Vit. Vuh. c. IS). The
Tervings also fight against the Vandals and Gipedes [Ma-
mcrtimis in Gcnelhl. Max. c. 17). Sidonius makes the iicivo
(lepida {(Jcp/da (riix) a portion of the army of Attila. I'^iiially,
wo have the Gepidae, tho Lombards, and the Avars, as tho
three most prominent populations of the sixth century.
The Gepid locality in the fifth century is the parts about
Sirmium and Singidunum — Alt Schabacz and Belgrade —
within the limits of Pannonia, and bevond those of lllvn-
cum, ?'. e. a little to the north of the occupancy of tliu la-
pedes and Japydes of Strabo and Pliny.
There is, then, a little difference in name between Japyiks
and Gepidic, and a little dift'erencc in locality between the
Gepids and lapodes. I ask, however, whether this is sufficioiit
to raise any doubt as to the identity of the two words .^ Whe-
ther the populations they denoted were the same is anothor
matter, i only submit that, word for word, Japijd and iiephl
arc ene. Yet they have never been considered so. Gn the
contrary, the obscure history of the Japydes is generally
made to end with Ptolemy; the more brilliant one of the
Gepidue to begin with Vopiseus. This may be se(;n in (iib-
l>on, in Zeuss, or in any author whatever who notices either,
or both, of the two populations.
There is a reason for this; it does not, however, lio in
The name t
(i\ IMF. .lAi'oin's ANi> (;t:i'n)Ai:.
133
the (litlcroiu'o of naiiif. ^\'^i(lo)• onos than tliis are ovorlook-
(il bv evon the most cautious of investigators. Indeed, the
!t(knnwlc'dfj:o(l and known varieties of the; word (Jepida' itself,
;ii'c tar more diver<;ent iV(»ni each other than CcpUhc is from
JiijiijOcs. Thus (jiypides, rijTicadsg, rerCTtcadig, ar(! all ud-
luitti'd varieties, — varieti(^s that no one has ohjeeted to.
Nor yet does the reason for thus ifi;norinf^ the connexion
l,(t\vc'eu (icp/dff and Jtt/ii/dcs lie in the difference of their
lY'sjicctive localities. Vor a jx'riod of conquests and inva-
sions, the intrusion of a population IVom the north of lUy-
liiuiii to the south of I'annonia is a mere trifl(! in the eye
lit' the ordinary historian, who f;enerally moves larjjjc nations
triiin (ine extremity of Europe to another as freely as a chess-
iilayer moves a queen or castle on a chess-board. In fact,
MiuK! change, both of name and place, is to be expected.
The nauH^ that Strabo, for instance, would p;ct through an
lllvrian, ^'opiscus or Sidonius would get through a CJothic,
ami Procoi)ius tlu'ough (probably) an Avar, authority — di-
roftly or indirectly.
The true reason for the agreement in (piestion having been
i;;nore(l. lies in the great change which had taken place in
the political relations of the populations, not only of Illyri-
ciini and Pannonia, but of all parts of the Roman enq)ire.
Tho .lajiydes are merely details in the conquest of Ulyricum
and Dalmatia; the (jlcpid history, on the contrary, is con-
iiw'tod with tliat of two po])ulations eminently foreign and
intrusive on the soil of Pannonia, — tho Avars and the Lom-
liards. How easy, then, to make the Oepida; foreign and
intmsivo also, llarely mentioned, excc])t in connexion with
iho exotic Goth, the exotic Vandal, the exotic Avar, and
tho still more exotic Loml)ard, tho Gepid becomes, in tho
(V(\s ot" tho historian, exotic also.
This error is by no means modern. It dates from the
I'rign of .lustinian; and occurs in the writings of such seem-
ii);; authorities as Procopius and Jornandes. With many
iscjiolars this may appear conclusive against our doctrine;
■^iiii'c Procopius aiul Jornandes may reasonably be consider-
ji'il as competent and sufticient Avitnesses, not only of their
[t'oroipi origin, but also of their Gothic affinities. Let us,
lifiwever, examine their statements. Proco])ius writes, that
"till" (lotliic nations are many, the greatest being the (loths,
handals, Visigoths, and Gepaides. They were originally
h'llled the SSauromatie and l\Ielanchl?eni. Some call them
the (lotic nations. They differ in name, but in nothing else.
They arc all whiteskinned and yellows-haired, tall and good-
looking, of the same creed, for they are all Arians. Their
134
ON Tin: JAl'OKKS AND (i niMDAi:.
liingUii<;o is one, culled (jiotliio.*' This, thoiij^li clear, is far
from iinoxccptioiiablo (//. Vttnd. i. 2). '^riKjir ccdiiiiion Ian-
giuige may have been no older than their common Arianism.
Again, the Sciri and Alani are esj»ocially stated tu Im,
(loths, which neither of them were, — the Alans, not ovm
in the eyes of such claimants for (Jcrmany as (Jrinnu ainl
Zcuss.
Jornandes writes: "Quomodo vero (ieta>. CJopid;c(iue slut
parentes si quairis, panels absolvam. IMeminisse dehcs, un'
initio de Scanziai insida*, grcmio Uothos dixissc egresses cum
lierich suo rege, tribns tantum navibiis vectos ad citerinri>
Occani ripam; qiiarum trium una navis, ut assolet, tardiiis
vccta, nomen genti fertur dcdisse; nam lingua eoruni piuia
(k'panla dicitur. lline factum est, ut paullatim et cnnupti
nomen eis ex convitio nascerotur. Gopida' namque sine dii-
bio ex Oothorum })rosapia ducunt originem: sed quia, ut
dixi, (lejutnla nigrum ali(piid tardunupie signat, pro gratuiti
convitio Gepidarum nomen exortuni est, quod nee ipsuui,
credo, falsissimum. Siint enim tardioris ingenii, gravimes
corporum velocitate. Hi ergo Gepidjc tacti invidia, dndum
sprota provineia, cunnnanebant in insula Vischc anmis vadi?
circumacta, quam pro [)atriosermone dicebantCJepidojos. iS'uiic
earn, ut fertur, insulam gens Vividaria ineolit, ipsis ad iir-
liores terras mcantibus. Qui Vividarii ex div(;rsis natioui
bus acsi in unum asylum collecti sunt, ct gentem fecis:;c
noscuntur."
I submit that this account is anything but historical. Be
it so. It may, however, be the expression of a real (Jotliie
aflinity on the part of the Gepids, though wrong in \U do-
tails. Even this is doubtful. That it may indicate a }Mdi-
tical alliance, that it may indicate a partial assuniptiim nl
a Gothic nationality, I, by no means, deny. I only deny
that it vitiates the doctrine that Japydoi and Gcpklw. are, ac-
cording to the common-sense interpretation of them, the same
word.
The present is no place for exhibiting in full the reason^
for considering Jornandes to bo a very worthless Avriter, a
writer whose legends (if we may call them so) concerniu.i:
the Goths, are oidy Gothic in the way that the fables ot
Geoffrey of Monmouth arc English, i. e. tales belonging to
a country which the Goths took possession of, ratiicr tliiui
tales concerning the invaders themselves
It is suggested then, that the statements of Procopius auil
Jornandes being ignored, the common-sense interpretation ut
the geographical and etymological relations of the IitjMk!^
ON Tin: JAl'ODKS AN'I) OKl'inAE.
135
'oniiuoii laii.
>n Ariaiiisiii.
tatod to
far I nntl Ccp/dfC — word for word, and placo for place — l>o ullow-
rd to take its course; tlie IJIepicue heiii;;' looked n[)()u us
lllyriaiis, whatever may Ix; the import of that word; oeen-
iiiiiits, at least, of the country of the laj)od('s, and probably
not oven I til''"' descendants
Vjirnnni ainl
ida'(iue slut
i debes, luc
^'re.sse« cum
ad citerimi
'let, tanliiis
Doruni pii:i;i
ct corrupti'
pic si no (hi-
ed quia, lit
pro gratuitn
nee ipsuiii,
i, graviort'j
dia, duduiii
amnis vaili-
l(htjos. Kuin'
psis ad nil-
rsis natioiii
item fccissc
torical. Be
real (.Jotliif
>; in its (lo-
cate a })(ili-
^unlpti^ll 111
only ck^iiy
>(!((! are, ac-
[n, the same
the reasons
ss writer, a
eonceniiii,:.'
c fables i>t
cloni^'ing tu
rather tliaii
)eopius ami
pretation nf
the liijMh
Thus far the criticism of the ])resent paper j,'ocs towards
sriiuratini;' the (ji('j)i(be from the stock with which they are
generally connected, viz. the (Jerman, — also from any emi-
:;raiits from the ])arts north of the Danube, c. //. Poland,
Prussia, Scandinavia, and the like. So far from doinj^- any-
iliinj,' of this kind, it makes them indi;:,(Mious to the parts to
tho north-east Of the head of the Adriatic. As such, what
ucro tlievV Strabo makes them a mixed nation — Kelt and
I.
lllyriau.
What is lllyrianV Either Albanian or Slavonic; it being
jllvria where tlie populations represented by the Dalmatians
(if Dahuatia come in contact with the populations r(!pr(3sent-
ed by the Skipetar of Albania.
The remainin<;- object of the j)reseiit })aper is to raise two
fi't.'sh (|U('stion3: —
I. The first connects itself with the early history of Italy,
and asks how lar migrations from the eastern side of the
Adriatic may have modifiiMl the ori<;inal population of Ital}
ollK'tl
imc"
perhaps much — m tins way is su_i;j;(
th
■;ted by
Nicbuhr; suiii^ested, if not absidutdy stated. Tlu; (jhaonian
name, as well as other ^eon'rajjliical and ethnolonical r(da-
tiiiiis, is shown to Ix; common lo both sides of the (Julf. (Jan
tlic class of facts indicated lusreby be enlar^'edV Tin; name,
whitdi is, perhaps, the most important, is that of the (ialubri.
TIk'so are, writes Strabo, a ^''people of the Dardaniatfie, in
\vlios(^ laud is an ancient city" (p. *>l()). ^Vord for word
this is Citlabri — Avhate\'er the ^•eo<;raphical and ethnolo_ti,'ical
itioiis may be. Without beint,^ exactly Japodes, these Cla-
are in the lapod mdi^hbourhood
lal
in
Without b(;ing identical, the name of the Italian Iapyp,es
liich was to all intents and purposes another name for
Calahri) is closely akin to la])odes
so
that
in
Italy,
AVO
ave Calabri called also Iapy<:;es, and, in lllyria, Iapod<!S
populat
ion called (Jalabri.
near a
More than this, iS'iebuhr (see Diet, of (ircek and IJoman
(!i(tj;rapliy, v. Jop^jijin) suetrests tliat Apulia may bo Ia])yj^ia,
word for word. Tle^ writer of the article just quoted demurs
t'> his. At th(! same time the change from / to d is, at the
present moment, a South Italian characteristic. The Sicilian
ttir Idlo was hrddo. On the other hand, this is a chanfj,e in
tli(> wrong direction; still it is a change of the kind required.
130
ON Tin: .r.vi'oiM'.s and (ir.piKAK.
' I
1 !
i1
Tho ovifloncn that tlioro was a forfif^n jxtniilatitm in ('a-
labria is satisfactory — tlu; most dctiiiiti! I'act ucmiij^- tin; statp-
incnt that tlie Sallciitincs woro partly Cretans, associatfil
Avith Locriaiis and Ilhjriuita. (Set; Cahdnia.)
Af,'-ain, tliis district, wherein the legends concerninfij Dju
med ])revailed, was also llu; district of the Daiinii, wliom
Fostns (v. Jjfiuiiia) connects with lllyria.
1 sujigc'st that, if the Caiahri W(!ro (Jalabri, the lapy;;!^
were lapoih's. Without enlarfj;inf^ upon the views that tin
deilnite recognition of Illyrian elements in Southern Itiilv
suggests, we proceed to the next division of our suhjcct. '
2. Is there any connexion between the names lapud-cs aiil
lapei-us? The answer to this is to be found in the exposi
tion of the criticism requisite for sueli problems. Speriai
evidence there is none.
The first doctrine that presents itself to either the ethno-
logist or the historian of fiction, in coimexion with the name
lapetus, is that it is the name of some eponymm — a nauic
like Hellen, or yliolus. Ion, or Dorus. But this is opposdl
by the fact that no nation of any great historical proniinoiue
bears such a designation. Doubtless, if the Thracians, the
Indians, the ^Egyptians, &.Q. had been named lapcli, tlic
doctrine in question would have taken firm root, and that at
once. But such is not the case.
May it not, however, have been borne by an obscure pn
pulation? The name Greek was so born, no, at first, was
the name Hellen. So, probably, the names to which we owe
the wide and comprenensive terms Europe, Js/a^ Afrkn,
and others. Admit then that it. may have belonged to an
obscure population; — next, admitting this, what name so likf
as that of the lapodesV Of all known names (unless an
exception be made in favour of the -gypt in /E-gypl) it \\\\\>i
be this or none. No other has any resemblance at all.
AVho were on the confines of the non-Hellenic area? la-
pyges on the west; lapodes on the north-west. The sii;;-
gested area was not beyond the limits of the Greek niytlio?.
It was the area of the tales about Diomed. It was the ana
of the tales about Antenor. It was but a little to the nortli
of the land of the Lapithw , whose name, in its latter t\vii-
thirds, is I-npo(h It ran in the direction of Orphic and Bac-
chic Thrace to the north. It ran in the direction of Cyclo-
l)jcan and Lestrygonian Sicily to the west. It was on tlic
t)orders of that lerra incoynila which so often supplies epo-
nymi to unknown and mysterious generations.
Say that this suggestion prove true, and we have the fii'^t
of the term lapodes in Homer and Hesiod, the last in the
ON TIIR .lAl'OKKS AM) fir,lMr>AI".
i:n
mil, wlioiii
Gormnn p,c'np.alojj;it'8 ol'tlio •roo'.'riiiiliy otMoninndcs and in tlio
Tr.'iV('ll(M''s Soiif; — unloiss, iiidi^iMl, tlif niodnni iianin Sr/id-
lifirzhc word ior word, (IcjtiiL In tlio 'rrav(dl<'r's Son;;- we ^'ft
ihc word in a (Jcnnan t'unn, (ii/\)t' or (ii/liffs. Tin; (Ji/\)as
arc iiiciitioni'd in conjunction with tlu! If'rmfs.
Ill .loniiindcs wu ^et (Ja/ji as tiin lioad of tlic (Jotliic <;onn-
iilo;:i('s: — lloruni or^o (ut ipsi suis fabulis iVrunt) primus
tiiit (iii/i(, qui j^eiiuit llalnial; llalnial v( ro noimit Auj^is, i^c
Now (idjit Uei'o. may stand lor the oj)onymus of tlio (ic/iifftr,
or it may stand I'or Jtt/t/u'f, tlio son of Noah. iMoro than one
of till' old (Icniian jxulifirccs hc^^lns with what is called a
(Jotliic h'f;('nd, and ends with IIk; book of (ieni'sis.
To concdude: tlu; boarin;^ of the criticism ujiou the etlino-
logy of the populations which took part in the destruction
of tli(! lloman empire*, is su;:<;estive. Tliere arc several of
tlioiii in the same catej^ory with tluj riepida\
MiiUtlin mutandis: every iioint in the previous criticism,
which apjilies to the Ocpida; and lapydes, appli<*s to the
Huyi and lihirli. Up to a certain period avo have, in writers
iiioi'C or less classical, notices of a country called Jihcrlia,
and a population called Uluvli. F(»r a shorter period subse-
quoiit to this, wc hear nothing, or next to nothing, of any
Olio.
Tliirdlv, in the writers of tli(! 5tli and Gtli centuries, when
the creed begins to bo Christian and the authorities (Jerman,
wc find the Ihigi of a Iiu(/i-l(ind , — liiu/i-land, or the land
of llic liu{/i , being neither more nor less than the ancient
province of Rltcctiu.
^Jame, then, for name, and place for place, the agreement
is sufficiently close to engender the expectation that the Blurti
will be treated as the liuf/i, under a classical, the liugi
as the RIkl'U, under a German, designation. Yet this is not
the case. And wdiyV Because when the Uugi become pro-
minent in history, it is the recent, foreign, and intrusive
(iotiis and Huns with whom tlu>y are chiefly associated. Add
to this, that there existed in Northern (jrermany a popula-
tion actuallv called Rugii.
For all this, however, Rur/iland is lihaHia , and Rhevlia is
Rufiiland, — name for name and place for place. So, pro-
bably, is the modern Slavonic term Ruczy.
VIII.
ETlINOLOCilCA.
ON THE SlilUECTIVn V OF CEKTAIN
CI.ASSES IN ETHNOLOGY.
KllOM
TIIK nilLOSOlMIICAL MACSAZINE FOlt I\IAY 1S5:
To tlio investigator who believes in the unity of the Iiii-
nian ispecies, '\vhetli(!r lie be a proper ethnologist, or a Zdolo-
gi.<t in the more eurrent signitieation of the term, the pli;i-
nomena exhibited by the numerous families of mankind sup-
ply ninetcnths of the dula for that part of natural hi^torv
which deals with lutriclics as sub(»rdinat(3 to, and as dillcrcut
from, species. The history of domestic animals in compre-
hensiveness and complexity yields to the history of the tlo-
mesticator. Con)|jare upon this point such a work as G. Cuvicu'.s
on the Races of Dogs, with Dr. Prichard's Natural History
of Man. The mere diflferenco in bulk of volume is a rou^li
measure of the difference in the magnitude of the subjct'ts.
Even if the dog were as ubi(|uitous as man, and consecjuently
as much exposed to the influence of latitiiile, and altitude,
there would still be wanting to the evolution of (canine va-
rieties the manifold and nuiltiform influences of civilization.
The name of these is legion] whilst the extent to which they
rival the more material agencies of climate and nutrition is
getting, d;iy by day, more generally admitted by the best
and most competent inquirers. Forms as extreme as any
that can be found within tlw; pale of the same species an;
to be found within that of the s[)ecies Homo. 'J'ransitioHS
as gradual as those between any vari(!ties elsewhere are also
to be found. In sunnning up the value of the dnlit supplied
by man towards the natural histnnj o/' varieties , it may be said
ON rilK SriURflTIVITY op CRIITAIN CLASHRS IN ETHNOT-OOV. K59
that tlicy arc tli().s(! of a species which htvs its ^po^^rjiphicnl
ili>tril»iition (^vorywlicrc! niul n luor.'il as w(^ll aw a ])hyrti('al
scries of chanutcristics. Siii'dy, it' tho (jiuistiou uiidi-r notii-c
be a ([ucstion that must hr. studied iiidruetivcly , Man j^ivcs
iifl till' tit-dd tor onv induction.
Ik'turu I conio to th(! special point ol" the present notieo
and to tho exphmation of its soniewliat enij;inatical heading',
1 must l"urth(!r detiiu! tlie sort of doctrine endxxlied in what
1 liHve called the Ixdief of th(! unity of our species. I (U)
ii(»t call the upholder of the dev(d»>pinental doctrine a believer
of this kind. His views — whetluu* rij^ht or wronj; — are
iit variance with the current idt-as attaclied to the word spe-
cies. Neither do 1 identify with the recoj^nition of sin<;l(!
<|)ecies the hypothesis of a nndtiplieity of })rotoplasts, so loiuj
us then (ire disiritnih'd over scrrnil ijcni/i iiiihicdl rcfifrrs. The
essential (dcnncnt to the idea of a single species is a sinj;le
ireo^'raphical centre. For this, the siinjjlest form of the- pro-
toplast community is a single pair.
All this is mere definition and illustration. The doctrine
itself may he cither rif^ht or wron<i;. 1 pass no opinion upon it.
1 assume it for tlie ])resent; since 1 wish to criticize certain
terms and doctrines which have grown up under the belief
in it, and to show, that, from one point of view, tlu^y are
faulty, from another, legitimate.
It will simplify the (piestion if we la^ out of our ai;count
altogether the islaiuh of tho earth's surface, limiting oursel-
ves to the populations of the continent. Hero the area is
coiitiuiious, and we cannot but suppose the stream of popula-
tion by which its several portions were occupied to have been
cmil/iitioits also. In this case a population sj)roads from a
eentr(^ like circles on a still piece of wat(,'r. Now, if so, all
chaiu/es mifsl have been (jraiiual , and all csheme /'arms tntisf
have passed into each ulher by mea/is of a series of Iransilional
lines.
It is clear that such forms, when submitttid to arrnnge-
ment and classification , will not come out in any doHnito
and Avellmarked groups, like the grou})s that constitute what
is currently called species. On the contrary, they will run
into each other, with equivocal points of contact, and indist-
inct lines of demarcation; so that discrimination will be dif-
tieult, if not impracticable. If praetieablc, however, it will
be effected by having recourse to certain typical forms, around
which such as approximate most closely can most accurately
and conveniently be grouped. \Vlien this is done, the more
distant outliers will be distril)utcd (jver the debateable ground
of an equivocal frontier. To recapitulate: varieties as oppo-
140 ox niR .SIHJKOTIVITY OF CKRTAIN CLASSES IX ETIIXOLOOY,
sod to spocips imply transitional forms, -whilst trnnsi:i(inal
forms prcchulo dotinito linos of domarcation.
^'(!t \vliat is tlio actual elassilication of tl).3 varieties of
mankind, and wliat is tlio current nomen'-iatureV To sav
the least, it is very like that of the species of a ^n-nus. Bhniicn'-
baeh's Moncrolians, Blumenbaeh's Caucasians, lilumenhncli's
^Ktliioj)ians, — where do Ave tind the patent evidenc*? that
thes(^ are the names of varieties rather than specie's? Nd-
Avhere. The practical proof of <a clear consciousness on tin-
part of a writer that ho is classifying vdrietiea rather than
};/wc/es, is the care he takes to i;uard liis reader n}:^ainst mis-
taking the one for the other, and the attention lie bestows
on the transition from one type to another. Who has ever
spent much ethnology on thisV 80 far from learned iiion
having done so, they have introduced a new and lax tonn
— race. This means something which is neither a variety
nor yet a species — a krlh/m quifl. In what way it (litters
from th(3 other denomination has yet to be shown.
Kow if it be believed (and this belief is assumed) that
the varieties of mankind are varieties of a species only, and
if it cannot be denied that the nomenclature and classifica-
tion of ethnologists is the nomenclature and classification of
men investigating the species of a gemis, Avhat is to be done?
Are species to be admitted, or is the nomenclature to he
abandoned? The present remarks are made with the view
of showing that tlu; adoption of either alternative would bo
inconsiderate, and that the existing nomenclature, even wlion
founded upon the assumption of broad and trencliant lines
of demarcation between varieties which (ex vi tcnnini) oueht
to graduate into each other, is far from being indefensible.
ISIan conquers man, and occupant displaces occupant on
the eartli's surface. ]>y this means forms and varieties which
once existed become extinct. The more this extinction takes
place, the greater is the <»blit!ration of those transitional am!
intermediate forms whicli connect extreme types; and the
greater this obliteration, tlie stronger the lines of demarca-
tion between geographically contiguous families. Hence a
variational modification of a group of individuals simulates
a diff<M'ence of species; forms Avhich Avero once wide ajiart
being brought into jtixtaposition by means of the annihilation
of the intervening transitions, Ilcnce what we of the nine-
teenth century, — ethnologists, politicians, naturalists, and
the like — behold in the way of groups, classes, tribes, fa
milies, or what not, is beholden to a great extent under the
guise of species] although it may not bo so in reality, and
although it might not have been so had wo been witnos-
ox THK SUBJECTIVITY OF CERTAIN CLASSES IN ETHNOLOGY. 141
scs to that earlier condition of tilings when on(? variety gra-
duated into another and the integrity of tlie i-hain ot like-
ness was intact. This explains tlie term sul'Jcrlirilij. A grou])
is sliarply delined simply because we know il in its state of
(loiiuitude; a state of delinitude which has been l)i'on;^lit about
by the displaceinent and oblit(>ration of transitional forms.
The geographical distribution of the different etlnndogical
divisions supplies a full and sufficient confirmation of this
view. 1 say ''lull and sufficient," because it cannot b(; said
that all our groups are subjective, alt brought about by dis-
j)lac'eni(!nt and obliteration. Some are due to siniph; isola-
tion; and this is the reason why the question was simplified
bv the omission of all the ifisu'or po])ulations. As a general
rule, however, the f?iijn! dc/in/lc llw class ^ the (jrcatcr the tlis-
phici'mcnt ; displacement which we souKitimes kn;)W to have
taken place on historical evidciic*^, and displacement which
we sometimes have to infer, in thus inferring it, the lan-
guage is the chief test. The greater the area over which it
is spoken with but little or no variation of dialect, the more
recent the extension of the population that speaks it. Such,
at least, is the jnimd facie view.
A brief sketch of the chief details that thus verify the po-
sition of the text is all that can now be given.
1. The pojjulations of South-eastern Asia, Alongol in phy-
siognomy and monosyllabic in speech, have always been con-
sidered to form a large and natural, though not always a
primary, group. Two-thirds of its area, and the whole of
its frontier north of the Himalayas, is formed by the Chi-
nose and Tibetans alone. These differ considerably from each
other, but more from the Turks, Mongols, and Tongusians
iiround. In the mountainous parts of the Assam frr)ntier
imd the Burmese empire, each valley has its separate dia-
lect. Vet these graduate into each other.
2. (central Asia and Siberia are occupied by four great
groups, the po})ulations allied to the Turk, the populaticms
allied to the jNIongol, the populations allied to the Mantshu,
and the populations allied to the Finns. These are pretty
dftinitely distinguisluul from each other, as well as from the
Chinese and Tibetans. They cover a vast area, an area,
^vllich, either from history or inference, we wxw certain is
iar wider at present than it was originally. They have en-
croached on each and all of the populations around, till they
meet Avith families equally encroaching in the direction of
China and Tibet. This it is that )nak(!s IIh; famili(;s which
aro called Turanian and Monomjllahic natural groups. They
arc cut off, more or less, from each other and from other
142
ON THE SL'IUKCTIVITY OF CEUTAIN CLASSES IN ETHNOLOGY.
populations by the displacement of croups originally more
or less transitional. The typical populations of the centre
spread themselves at the expense of the sub-typicals of the
periphery until the extremes meet.
2. The circumpolar populations supply similar illustrations.
Beginning witH Scandinavia, the Lap stands in remarkable
contrast with the Norwegian of Norway, and the Swede of
Sweden. Why is thisV Because the Northman rcpiosents a
population originally German, — ^a population which , how-
ever much it may have graduated into the type of the most
southern congeners of the Lap, is now brought into contact
with a very different member of that stock.
4. This plucnomenon repeats itself in the arctic portions of
America, where the Algonkin and Loucheux Lidians (Indians
of the true American type) come in geographical ccrtact, and
in physiological contrast, with the Eskimo. Consequently
along the Loucheux and Algonkin frontiers the line of de-
marcation between the Eskimo and the Red Indian (cur-
rently so-called) is abrupt and trenchant. Elsewhere, as along
the coast of the Pacific, the two classes of population gra-
duate into each other.
5. The African family is eminently isolated. It is, however,
just along the point of contact between Africa and Asia that
the displacements have been at a maximum. The three vast
families of the Berbers, the Arabs and the Persians, cannot
but have obliterated something (perhaps ?niich) in the way
of transition.
6. The Bushmen and Hottentots are other instances of ex-
treme contrast, /. c. when compared with the Amakosah Caffros.
Yet the contrast is only at its lieight in those parts where
the proof of Caffre encroachment is clearest. In the parts
east of Wallfisch Bay — traversed by Mr. Galton — the lines
of difference are much less striking.
Such are some of the instances that i"ustrate what may be
called the "subjectivity of ethnological groups,*' — a term
which greatly helps to reconcile two apparently conflictinjr
habits, viz. tli.at of thinking with the advocates of the unity
of the human species, and employing the nomenclature of
their opponents.
PxVKTTCU]
GEXEllAT. ITvlXCIPLES OF Pllirx )[.( )(II( !AL
CLASSIllC.VllOX AND THE VAr.UE
OE GROUPS,
wnu
PAirriCULAR REFEHKNOE TO THE I.ANCUJAGES OF
TJIE IX J )0 -EUROPEAN CLASS.
READ BEFORE THE ETHNOLOGICAL SOCIETY,
28TII FEBUtAftY J849.
In vcspcct to the lanf^uages of tho Indo-European class,
it is considered that the most important questions connected
with their systematic arrangement, und viewed with refer-
ence to the extent to which they engage tlie attention of the
present writers of philology, are the three following: —
1. The f/m'sf/on of the Fnnilmnenlal Etnncnts of cerlnin Lan-
guages. — The particular examph; of an investigation >f this
kind is to be found in tho discussion concerning the extent
towliich it is a language akin to the Sanskrit, or a language
akin to the Tamul, which forms the basis of certain dialects
of middle and even northern India. In this is involved the
question as to the relative value of grannnatical and glossa-
vi.'d coincidences.
2. The question of the Independent or Sidiordintfte Ch(traeter
(if certain Groups. — Under this head comes the investigation,
as to whether the Slavonic and Lithuanic tongues form se-
parfite groups, in the way that the Slavonic and (Jothic ton-
gues form separate groups, or whether thoy are each niein-
Ijors of some higher group. The same inquiry applies to
tlic languages (real or supposed) derived from the Zend, and
the languages (real or supposed) derived from the Sanskrit.
3. The question of Extension and Addition. — It is to this
that the forthcomin*; observations arc limited.
144 OKNKUAL PKIXf'IPLK.S OK inill.OLOtilCAI, CLASSIFICATIOX &C.
(IKNKUAIi
I' I
l! I
f
Taking- as tlie centre of a frroup/tliose forms of spcach wliich
luivo boon recognised as Indo-hnropean (or Indo-Gennanicj,
from the first recognition of the group itself, we find the
languages derived from the ancient Sanskrit, the languages
derived from the ancient Persian , th(; languages of Greece
and Rome, the Slavonic and Lithuanic languages, and the
languages of the Gothic stock; Scandinavian, as well as
Germanic. The affinity between any two of these groups
has currently been considered to represent the affinity between
them all at large.
The way in which the class under which these divisions
were contained, as subordinate groups, has received either
addiliim or c.ck'nsion , is a point of phih)logical history, which
can only be briefly noticed; previous to which a difl'eronee
of meaning between the woi'ds ailditmi and extension should
be explained.
To draw an illustration from the connnon ties of relation-
ship, as between man an<l man, it is clear that a family
may be enlarged in two ways.
a. A brother, or a cousin, may be discovered, of which
the existence was previously unknown. Herein the family
is enlarged, or increased, by the real addition of a new
member, in a recognised degree of relationship.
b. A degree of relationship previously unrecognised may
be recognised , /. e., a family wherein it was previously con-
sidered that a second-cousinship was as much as could be
admitted within its pale, may incorporate third, fourth, or
fifth cousins. Here the family is enlarged, or increased, by
a verbal extension of the term.
Now it is believed that the distinction between increase by
the way of real addition, and increase by the way of ver-
bal extension, has not been sufficiently attended to. Yet,
that it should be more closely attended to, is evident; since,
in mistaking a verbal increase for a real one, the whole
end and aim of classification is overlooked.
1. The Celtic. — The publication of Dr. Prichard's Eastern
Origin of the (.eltie Nations, in 18IJI, supplied philologists
witli the most definite addition that has, perhaps, yet been
made to ethnographical philology.
Ever since then, the Celtic has been considered to be Indo-
European. Indeed its position in the same group with the
Iranian, Classical, Slavono-Lithuanic, and Gothic tongues,
supj)lied the reason for substituting the term YnAo-Eiiropem
for the previous one \r\(\o-Germanic.
2. Since the fixation of the Celtic, it has been considered
that the Armenian is Indo-European. Perhaps the wellknown
CEN'KKAL PRINCIl'LES OF I'Fni.or.OdlCAI. fl-ASSirifATION &.C. 145
aflinity between tlio Armenian and Phryj^ian languages di-
lected }diilologists to a conijjarison between the Armenian and
(ircok. ^liiller, in bis Dorians, j)()ints out the iiiHexion of
llic Armenian verb-substantive.
;{. Since the fixation of the (-eltic, it has been eonsiderod
that the ohl Etruscan i.s hubj-Kuropean.
4. Since the fixation of the Celtic, it has been considered
that the Albanian is Indo-Euro})ean.
.'». Since the fixation of the Celtic, Indo-Kuropean elements
have been indicated in the Malay.
0. Since the fixation of the Celtic, Indo-European elements
lirtvo been indicatiid in the Laplandie.
7, Since tlK! fixation of tlu; ('eltic, it has been considered
that the Oss(!tie is Indo-European.
H. Since the consideration of the Ossetic as Indo-Euro-
poan, the .Georgian has been considered as Indo-European
likewise.
Now the criticism of the theory which makes the (Jeorgian
t(i be Indo-Europejin, is closely connected with the criticism
(if the theory which makes the Ossetic and the Malay to
bo Polynesian; and this the writer reserves for a separate
paper. All that he does at present is to express his opinion,
that if any of the seven last-named languages are Indo-Eu-
ropean, they are Indo-European not by real addition, in the
way of recogniscMJ relationship, but by a verbal extension of
the power of the term Indo-European. He also believes that
this is the view which is taken, more or less consciousy or
unconsciously, by the different anthers of the differ'jnt das-
siiications themselves. If he be wrong in this notion, he
is at issue with them as to a matter of fact; since, a(bnit-
ting some affinity on the part of the languages in question,
he denies that it is that affinity which connects the (ireek
anil German , the Latin and Lithuanian.
On the other hand, if he rightly imagint; that they are
considered as Indo-European on the strength of souk; other
at'tinity, wider and more distant than that which connects
the Greek with the Ciorman, or the Latin with the Lithuanic,
he regrets that such an extension of a tenn should have been
made without an exposition of th(! principles that suggested
it, or the facts by whicli it is sup])orted; principles and facts
wiiicli, when examined by himstdf, hav(! convinced him that
most of the later movements in this department of ethno-
.I'l'apliical philology, have been movements in the wrong di-
rection.
There are two principles upon which languages may be
classified.
10
140 OENKKAL I'KI.NrU'l.KS OF I'lIIhULODK AL CI.A.SSU'ICATION t^C.
According to the first, wo take two or inori; langua;ios
as W(! iiud tliom, ascertain certain of tlicir cliai'actei'istics
and tlien inquirt; liow iar those characteristics coincide.
Two or more Languages thus taken agree in having a hu'^rt;
per-centage of words in common, or a hirge percentage of
grammatical inflexions; in which case tliey wouhl agree in
certain punitive characters. On the other hand, two or niniv
such hanguages agi'co in the netjative fact of Jiaving a small
and scanty vocabuhiry, and an inflexional system equally jimi-.
ted; whilst, again, the scantiness of inflexion may aris(! fnnii
one of two causes. It may arise from the fact of inflexions
having never been developed at all, or it may arise from
inflexions having been lost subsequent to a full develoj)nu'nt
of the same. In all such cases as these, the principle ot
classification would be founded upon tlie extent to which lan-
guages agreed or diflered in certain external characteristics;
and it Avould bo the principle upon which the mineralojiist
classifies minerals. It is not worth Avhile to reconnncnd tln'
adoption of the particular term mitwrtdotjictil , although mi-
neralogy is the science that best illustrates the distinction.
It is sufficient to state, that in the principle here indicated,
there is no notion of desccnl.
It is well known that in ethnographical philology (iiidccil
in ethnology at large] the mineralogical principle is not
recognised; and that the principle that is recognised is what
nuvy bo called the liisloriccU principle. Languages are ar-
ranged in the same class, not because they agree in liaviiii;
a copious grammar or scanty grannnar, but because they are
descended (or are supposed to be descended) from oume
connnon stock ; whilst similarity of grammatical structure,
and glossarial identity are recognised as elements of classi-
fication only so far as they are evidence of such conmiunity
of origin. Just as two brothers will always be two brothers,
notwithstanding ditt'erenccs of stature, feature, and dispo-
sition, so will two languages whi(di have parted from the
connnon stock within the same decennium, be more closely
allied to each other, at any time and at all times, than two
languages separated within the same century ; and tAvo lan-
guages separated within the same century, will always he
more cognate than two within the same millennium. This
will be the case irrespective of any amount of subsequent
similarity or dissimilarity.
Indeed, for the purposes of ethncdogy, the phenomenca ol
subsequent similarity or dissimilarity are of subordinate im-
portance. Why they are so, is involved in the question as
to the rate of change in language. Of two tongues separa-
(;1;NI;K.VI. I'UINCIl'LKfS Ol' l'IIII,f)I,0(ilC\I, (T.ASSIl'ICATION &.('. 1 17
tpil nt the stiinc! timo Irom a coimnon stock, oiu; may chjing^e
rapidly, the other slowly : and, hciu'O, u (Jis^iiiiiilar physiog-
nomy at the end of a inivcu period. It' the English ot Au-
>tr;iliii wore to change rapidly in one direction, and the I'^ng-
lisli ot America in another, great as would ho th(> ditt'er(nice
resulting from such changes, their ctlinoh»gical relation would
he the same. They would still have the same affiliation with
tlic same mother-tongue, dating from nearly the sann; epoch.
Ill ethnological philology, as in natural history, desa'ttl is
tliP paramount fact; and without asking how far the vahu;
thus given to it is liahle to be refincid on, wo leave it, in
i>;uli .'science, as we find it, until some future; investigator
•hall have shewn that cither lor a pair of animals niU des-
urmlcd from a connnon stock, or for a pair of languages not
iiii^nnating from the same mother-tongue, a greater numi)cr
lit" jicnoral propositions can be predicated than is tlie case;
witli the two niost dissimilar instances of (iither an animal
or a language derived from a common origin.
LantjiKiges are aUicd just in. proiHution as they were seiiaraled
from Ihe same lanyuaye at the same epoch.
The Slime epoch. — The word epoch is an equivocal word,
and it is used designedly because it is so. Its two meanings
require to bo indicated, and, then, it will be necessary to
ask which of them is to be adopted diere.
The e/ioch, as a period in the duration of a language, may
be simply chronological, or it may he philological , properly so
called.
The space often, twenty, a hundred, or a thousand years,
is a strictly chronological epoch. The first lifty years after
the Norman conquest is an epoch in the liistory of the Eng-
lish language; so is the reign of Henry the Third, or the
Protectorship of Oliver (h'omwell. A definite period of this
sort is an epoch in language, just as the term of twenty or
thirty years is an epoch in the life of a man.
On the other harul, a period that, chronologically speak-
ing-, is indefinite, may be an epoch. The interval between
one change and an other, whether long or short, is an (ipoch.
The duration of English like the English of Chaucer , is an
epoch in the history of the English language; and so is the
ilnration of English like the English of the J^ible translation.
For such epochs there are no fixed periods. With a lan-
>'uage that changes rapidly they arc short ; with a langnage
that changes slowly they are long.
Now, in A\diich of these two meanings should the word bo
used in ethnographical philology? The answer to the (pies-
tion is supplied by the circumstances of the case, rather than
10*
148 (iKXKUAl- I'UINCll'I.KS (»!' I'lllI-OI-fMilCAl, CI.A.SSlriCAIKhN i^C.
Gr.NKKAI. 1
by any abstruct propriety. We cannot '^\\v, it the first niciin.
inf^, evf^n if we wisji to do so. To say in what yt^ar of tliM
duration of a common motlier-tongne tlie (J reek separntcil
fron\ the stock that was common to it and to th(^ Latin i>
an impossil)ility; indeed, if it couKl h(i answered at once, it
would bo a question of simphj history, not an inferoiuv
from etlmoh)gy: since ethnolo«iy, witli its pahcontolofiicil
reasoning" from effect to cause, speaks only where historv.
witli its direct testimony , is silent.
We cannot, then, in ethnolo<^ical reasoning-, get at the ))rc'-
cise year in which any .one or two languages separated frnm
a common stock, so as to say that f/i/s si'parak'd su Ioikj lif-
forc, the other.
The order, however, of separation we can get at; sinn
wo can infer it from the conclition of the mother-tongnc .it
the time of such separation; this condition being denoted Iv
the condition of the derived language.
Hence the philological epoch is an approximation to the
chronological epoch, and as it is the nearest approximation
that can possibly bo attained, it is' practically identical witli
it, so that the enunciation of the i)rinciple at which we wish
to arrive may change its wording, and now stand as follows.
— Lanyuayea are allied, J ml in proporlion as Itiey were separdlcd
from the same lanyuaye in Ihe same slaye.
^Jow, if there be a certain number of well-marked forms
(say Ihree) of dcvelopnnjnt, and if the one of these ;;oiiiciili'
with an early period in the history of language, another with
a later one, and the third with a period later still, we liavr
three epochs wherein we may fix the date of the sepMration
of the different languages from their different parent-stocks:
and these epochs are natural , just in proportion as the forms
that characterise them are natural.
Again, if each epoch fall into minor and subordinate pe-
riods, characterised by the changes and modifications of the
then generally characteristic forms, wo have the basis tor
subordinate groups and a more minute classification.
It is not saying too much to say that all this is no liypn-
thesis, but a reality. There arc real distinctions of charac-
teristic forms corresponding with real stages of development;
and the number of these is thre^e ; besides wdiich, one, at
least, of the three great stages falls into divisions and sub-
divisions.
1. The stage anterior to the evolution of inflexion. — Here
each word has but one form, and relation is expr(\sse(l by
mere juxta})08ition, Avith or without the superaddition of a
change of accent. The tendencies of this stage are to com-
fiEN-KUAI- l'llIXfII'M"« or ririLOLOfilfAT. CTASSTFICATIOX SiO 149
l)inc words in the way of composition , but not to go furtlicr.
Every word rctcains, throughout, its separate substantive
ili.'iriicter, and lias a Uioaning independent of its juxtajtosi-
tioii with the words with which it combines.
2. The stag(! wlierein infiexioiis are df!veioj)ed. — Here,
words originally separate, and afterwards placed in Juxta-
|it).sitioii with others, as elcnumts of a compound term, so far
ili:in^e in form, or .'-(» far los(! their separate; signification,
as to pass lor adjuncts, either prefixed or ])ostfixed to the
iii.'iin word. Wliat was once a word is now tiie part of a
word, and what was once Composition is now Derivation,
certain sorts of Derivation being called Inflexions, and cer-
tain Inflexions being called Declensions or Conjugations, as
the case may be.
3. The stage Avherein inflexions become lost, and are re-
placed by so})arate words. — Here case-endings, like the I in
IKilr-i , are rephaced by prej>ositions (in some cases by post-
positions), like the /o in to fatlicr; and pers(nial endings, like
the in vnc-o. are replaced by pronouns, like the I in / call.
Of the /'irsl of tliese stages, the Chinese is the language
wliith affords the most typical specimen that can be found
in the present lalr date of languages — hile , considering that
wo are looking for a sample of its earliest forms.
Of the last of these stages the English of the year 1841)
affords the most typical specimen that can be found in the
present early date of language — early, considering that wo
are looking for a rsample of its latest forms.
Of the second of these stages we must take two languages
as tiie samples.
1. The (Week. — Here we have the inflexional character in
its most perfect form; /. e.. the existence, as sej)arato words,
of those sounds and syllables that form inflexions is at its
iiiaxiiiium of concealment; i. e., their amalgamation wath the
primary word (the essence of inflexion) is most perfect.
2. T/ie Circassian, Coptic, or Tvrkisli. — In one of these (it
is difficult to say which) the (existence as separate words of
those sounds and syllables which form inflexions, is at its
iniiuinum of concealment; /. e., their amalgamation with the
primary word (the essence of inflexion) being most imperfect.
This classification is, necessarily, liable to an element of
confusion common to all classifications where the evidence
is not exactly of the sort required by the nature of the ques-
tion. The nature of the question here dealt with requires
tlio evidence of the historical kind, /. e., direct testimony
The only evidence, however, we can get at is indirect and
inferential. This engenders the following difficulty. The
ir)() (iKNKKAI, riJINCIIT.KS or I'llM.ni.Ol. IC \l. ( I.ASSIIICAI ION I'ic
n(!W('st liuiguji^c of (.say) tlio InnjiUii^cs ui' tlin ^ccoiidinv
lorinatioii may Ix' nearer in cliriniolooy, to i\\v oldest laii
j^uago of tlu' lliirtl, than to llic lirst f'ornuMl lanj;nat;(' uf its
own class. Indeed, nidess we assume tlio suspension ot' all
(•lianj;c lor lonj;' epoidis, and that tlio.se coincido with tlir
periods at which certain lan<iua<;es are given off from tlicir
j){ir<'nt sto(d\S, such miisl bo the case;.
Now, althou;;li this is a difficulty, it is no p:rcatpr ditti-
culty than the ideologists must put up with. ^Vith them also
there are the phenomena of transition, and such phenoiiuuM
<!n;^ender unavoidable comjtlications. They do so, however.
without overthrowinj;' the principhis of their classifiiatieii.
The position (»f a laiiguaj;c in rcsppct to its stage of de-
velopment is one thing, — the position in respect to its al-
lied tongues another.
Two languages may be in the same stage (and, os siidi,
agree), yet be very distant from each other in respect te
al'filiation or affinity. Stage for stage the French is iiion
closely connected with tht^ Knglish, than the Knglish with
the Majso-filotliic. Jn the way of affiliation, the con\ er.se is
tlie case.
Languages are allied (or, what is the same thing, hear
(ividence of their alliance), according to the number of forms
that they have in connnon ; since (subject to one exceptiorn
these common forms nuist have been taken from tlu; com-
mon mother-tongue.
Two hinguagcs separated from the common mother-teiifnio.
subsequent to the evolution of (sfttj) a form for the dative
case, are more allied than two languages similarly sepanitcd
anterior to sm-li an evolution.
Subject to one iwcffUioii. This means, that it is possible
tliat two languages may appear under certain circumstance.^
more allied than they really are, and v/cc vcrst/.
They may a])pear more allied than they really are, wlicii.
after separating from the connnon mother-tongue during tlie
ant(!-inflexional stage, they develop their inflexions oti tlio
same principle, although ?fi(li'pcNde/i//i/. This case is more pos-
sible than proved.
They may appear less allied than they really are, when,
although separated from the common mother-tongue after
the evolution of a considerable amount of inflexion, eaeli
taking with it those inflexions, the one may retain them,
whilst the other loses them in lolo. This case also is more
possible than proved.
Each of these cases involves a complex question in plii-
(;i;Ni;i!Ar, i'iiiN<'ii'i,i:s or I'liir-oMuiicAi, cLAssiiMf'ArKtN- SiC. 151
lolofi'y: — the ono the pliciioinciiii coniuH'ted with the nt/c nf
ijiiini/r] tlic otiicr tlif i(ii//'fir//t//t/ o/' i/i(/r/ifut/<-nl /irocrsscs.
'rii('S(! (|iU'stioii,s ;ir(i likely to .MtlVct tiitiini rcscjirclics more
tliiiii liicy have alJ'cctcd the researches jiithortu cstahlislKHJ.
Aiiotlicr (jtiestion has allected tlu; researches hitherto (ista-
hlisliod more than it is likcdy to atleet I'liture ones. This is
the (jucstion as to the /'uii(hiiih-nl(il kiiiI;/ , or non-unihj of lan-
i/im(/t'. lJ|»on this the iticsent Avriter has expressed an oiii-
iijon elsi.'whore. At present he su;4^ests tliat the nior(^ tlio
^cnoi'al unity of the human lan^uano is admitted, the clearer
will h(! the way for those who work at the details of tjio
ilift'crent aftiliatiuns. As lon^' as it is an open question, whe
tlier one class of languages be; irlioUij unconn(!cted with othtn's,
(iivj coimcction en<^enders an inclination to arran^'o it under
the ,4roup previously rec()<i,nised. 1 believe that this doter-
iiiiiu'd th(! j)osition of the (Jeltic in the Indo-European group.
1 have ji-reat doubts whether if mmc affinity liad been re-
(■.)<;iiised from tlu; be<;innin<;-, it woidd even have stood wliero
it now do(!s. The question, when Dr. Pridiard und(!rtook
his investigations; was not so much whether the Celtic was
in the exact ratio to any or all of the then r(!C0gnised Ku-
ropoan languages in which they wer(! to each other, but
whether it was in any relation at all. This being proved,
it fell into the class at once.
The present writer believes that the Celtic tongues were
separated from their mother-tongue at a comparatively early
leriod of the s(H'ond stage; /. t'. , when but few inflexion.s
lad been evolved ; whilst the (Jiassic, (Jothic, Lithnano-Sla-
vonic (Sarmatian), and Indo-Pcrsian (Iranian) were separa-
ted at comparatively late |)eriods of the same stage, i. c,
when many inflexions had been evolved.
Hence he believes that, in order to admit the Celtic, the
meaning of the term Indo-ETirnpean was extended.
Hegretting this (at the same time admitting that the Col-
tie tongue is more Indo-European than any thing else), he bc-
lieyes that it is too lat(! to go back to the older and n;ore
i'e!*tricted use of the term ; and suggests (as the next best
change), tlu^ propriety of C(msi<lering the Indo-European
class as divided into two divisions, the older containing the
<'eltic, the newer containing the Iranian, (classical, Sarma-
tian, and Gothic tongues. All further extensions of the term
he believes to be prejudicial to future philology •, believing
also that all supj)Osed additions to the Indo-European class
fiave (Avith the exception, perhaps, of the Armenian) invol-
ved such farther extension.
TRA(li:S or A BIl.lNCiUAL TOWN IN
KNCiLAM).
Itl'IAI) A I
I III
MEF/riNd OF TllK liUlTlSH ASSOCIATION FOR TlIK
ADVANCFMKNT OF SCIENCE 1853.
It is well-known that tlio termination -bij as the nanif
of a villa;4(i or t(»wn is a sigjn of Danish (ii'cnj)ancy. At
tho present tinn; it means town in Scandinavia; and Cliri.sti
ania or Copenhagen is eaHed lUj , or Itijt'n, --- Ihc loim,
caitital, or nw^tropolis. The Enji^lish form is -Om. Whi-ii ;i!i
An<ifh; said New/o/^, a Dane said ^cwOij. The? distrihiition of
the forms in -/>// has already connnanded mueh attentieii; sn
that it is not tho int(^ntion of the present writer to say iiimli
about it,
Alonj;-, however, with this form go others; c. {/.
Tho English Ship hccomes in Danish. Skip as in Skiphm
— Fish — Fisk — Fiskt'rton
— IForm — Onn — Onnshi/
— Church — A'irk — Ormskirk
&e. &c.
In like manner the Roman casira becomes —
In English Chester or cesler, in Danish caster and (v//,s7o;.
Contrast the forms Vmlcaster , hamcas/er Ac. with Chester, or
^\cester and this difference becomes aj)parent.
Now the river Ouse in the parts about VVansford scp.-i-
rates the counties of Huntingdon and Northampton — in tho
former of which no place ending m-hy is to be found, and
all the castra are Chester:, as Godmanr/<f6Vtv. In Nortliamp-
tonshire, on the other hand, the Danish forms in -by an;
common, and the castra are ca/sfor , or caster. All tho Da-
nish is on one side. Nothing is Danish on tho other. The,
river has every appearance of having formed a frontier. On
it lay the Roman station of Durobrivis — with, probably,
castra on each side. At any rate, there are, at the present
moment, two villages wdierein that term appears. On tlio
Huntingdon side is the village of Chesterton (English). On
the Northampton side is that of Caistor (Danish).
ON THE ETIINOLOOU AL VOSITION OK
CERTAIN TIMBES ON THE GAUUOVV
IIll^S.
KKAi) AT I in:
MKF/riNG OF TIIK IJRITlSIl ASSOCIATION FOR
TiiK advan(;kmknt of science held
AT YORK 1844.
The a''finiti(!S of tho Garrow lanji^unfje, a languaj^o wliiflj
Klaproth in his Asia I'olyglotta leaves unplaced, are with
the Tibetan.
The bearings of this will be found in the next notice.
NOTE (1859).
This was written beforo I had seen Hniwn'H Tables - wherein tho
affinity is virtually, tlionph not directly at'lirnicd.
ON THE TRANSITION BETAYEEX I HE
TIBETAN AND INDIAN I AMILIES IN
KESrEC T TO CONFORMATION.
BRITISH ASSOCIATION — BIRJMINUIIAM 1S4'J.
The remarks of Mr. Ilodfrson on the Koocli, Bodo, nnd
l^hiinal, alonfjj with some of Dr. liird's on the monosyllaliic
affinities of the Tamnlian languages have an important In -
arinjij on this (juestion. So have the accounts of the Chf'})aiii;
and Garo tribes. The phenomena are those of transition.
We have a practical instance of this in the doctrine laid down
by ]\rr. Hodgson in his valuable monograph. In this, he makes
the Bodo a Tamulian /. a. a member of the same family with
the hill-tribes of India and the Dekhan; mcanirg thereby the
aborigines of India, contrasted with the popuhitions to wliicli
he ascribes the Sanskrit language and the Hindu physiog-
nomy. In the Tamulian form there is "a somewhat lo/.en^i'
"contour, caused by the hirge cheek-bones" — "a broader Hattir
"face" — "eyes less evenly crossing the face in their line
''of picture*' — "beard deficient" — "with regard to the })e-
"culiar races of the latter" (/. e. the Tamulians) "it can only
"be safely said that the mountaineers exhibit the Mongolian
"type of mankind more distinctly than the lowlanders, and
"that they have, in general, a paler yellower hue than the
"latter, amongst whom there are some (individuals at least i
"wlio are nearly as black as negroes." — The Bodo are scarcc-
"ly darker than the mountaineers above them — whom
"they resemble — only with all the physiognomical eharaiti-
"ristics softened down. — The Kols have a similar cast ot
"face."
This is the evidence of a competent observer to the fait
of the liodo &c. being, more or loss, what is called Mongol;
{ill the more valuable because he had not, then, recognizcil
their language as monosyllabic. Meanwhile he never scpai-
ON Tin: TUANRrnoN' URTWEEN rnr tii!Kt.\x and indiax &.C.. 155
■ites them from tlic Kols &c. but alyays connects the two.
hi other words, he gives us so much evidence to the fact of
the Kols &c. being, more or less, Mongol also. But the
Kols are the aborigines of India; whilst the Bodo arc Ti-
lict.'m.
NOTE (1859).
Heccnt rosearches linve a tendency to make the Kol.s lens 'I'aniul and
more Tibetan than they were hehl to be in 1849.
ox THE AFFINITIES OF THE LANOVACEs
OF ( AUCASl S WITH THE MONOSVi/
LAIJIC EANGUAGES.
HICAl) AT TI!K
MKETIKG OF THE J3RlThSH ASSOCIATION AT
CAMliRIDGE 1815.
T.'ikiiii;' the samples of tlie Georgian, Lcsgian, iMi/lid/Iic.
(1/Jii, and (JircaKsian classes as wo find t'^cni in the; Asia
J*olyglotta and c'onij)aring tlioni -svitli tlio s)Deciincns of tin'
niouosyllahic languages in the same work, in Jirown's Tahlcs,
and in Ley den's j)a)ier on the Indo-Chinese Languages, wo
lind the following coincidences. *
English , sky
I. Circassian, whapch, tvuafc
'2. Aka , aupn
Kliaiiiti , fa
English, sky
1. Ahsne, Icaukh
AUokosok, hnk
2. Aknsh, kakn
IJuriiu'sc , kytlukkhe
English, sky
l.Tsiiotshentsh, tiiluk
2. Koreng, la/n
Kh<»il)U, IhuUung
English , .sun
1. (Jeorgiaii, ntsr
^ringrelian, hshu
Suanic, mizh
2. Kuan-clma , ziti
Sianlo , snu
English^ fire
1. Ahsne, mza
( 'ircassian , ma fa
2. Khaniti , fai
Si am, fai
Aka, ximma
Aher, cme
Burmese, vii
Karyen , me
]\ranii)ur, mni
Songphu, viui
Kapwi, &c., miii
English , day
1. TslietHliontsli, dini
Ingii.sli, den
Kasiku)imk , kini
2. Koreng, nin
tlili, lana
Singplio, sini
* III tlic, Asiatic, 'I'lans.actidiis of Mcnfj.tl and tlic Asiatic {{cscaiclii ■*.
— l'i<rurc 1. denotes the Caucasian, l^ipiire 2. iniin<)s_vllal)ic t'onns nl
speeiii. Tills list was first published in 1850, in niv A'aiicties ot'Mnn- /'/'
123-128.
ON THK AFFINITIES OF TIIK LANOITAOKS OF fAUCASl'S i^C. 157
Eiinlis/i, (lay
Ainli, Iht/iil
(iiiro, Sdio
KwjUsh , moon
(Jcdigiau, l/i'tii = mn/ilh
Suanic, Iwai
Miiitay, la
Kiifilish , star
Kasikninuk, zuka
(laro, (I sake
Jili, saliun
Siiigplio, sagan
Kiiijlish , liill
Kasikninuk , shuIh
Cliiucse, shan
KiKjlish , earth ^
Absiu', tshiillah
Altokcsck , (zula
Kapwi, iaiai
Klioibu , Ihalai
IjiijHs/i , earth
Aiiili, zkhur
Mishhni, Inri
Enylis/i , earth
Di(li) , fs/irdo
Korong, kadi
Enylish, snow
, Lcsginn, asu
("irrassian, nus
Altassian , asse
("lihiese, siwe
Enylis/i, salt
lii'sgijin * (.'i) , z(nn
("lihu'so, !/iin
EiKjHsh , sjilt
Kalmtsli, (s/ira
l)i(lo, zi(i
Kasikuniuk , psii
Akiish , flzr
Tibetan, ls/i>i
Entj/is/i , (lust
1. Tshetshentsh, Iskni
'2. (Jhinese fski/i
Enijlisli , Niind
I. Avar, Isltimiij
'1. 'I'ilx'tan, bfidzoma
KiKjlish, sand
I. (Circassian, /is/iak/itdt
'2. (Jhinese, ska
Kfitjiisk , leaf
I. 'rslietsheutsli , (ja
lni,usli, ija
'2. Chinese, ///•
Kntjlisk , tree.
Mi/Jeji, vhi'
Circassian , dzi'y
Chinese, shn
/'Jfitjlish, stone
Audi , kinzii
Siamese, kin
Etnjlish, soa
I. (Jeorf^ian , agiva
1. (yhinese, sku// ■=: n<aler
Tibet, n = dn
MCni, zki'=:do
Ava, le=do
Ettylisk , river
1. Anzukh , ar kijarc
Avar, hor, kkar
2. Champhnng, ar<(i
Emjlisk , river
i. Abassiau , a/i
2. Tibetan , Iskavn
Eiif/lisk , river
1. jVltekesek, scdii
Absn('( dzrdn
2. Son;:;phu, daidai
Kiojlisk , water
I. Kasikninuk , sin
Akiisli , ski'n
Knl)itsh, l:un , sin
'2. Sini;))ho, ulsin
"' Tliis iiuniis in tlnrc dialicts.
158 ON TIIK AIM'IM riK.S Ol" Till: I.ANdCAdKS OK rAUCASLS SiC
Jili , mchin
Msinipnr, i.v/m/
K fig lis ft , water
1. Al).sn('^, (Izt'h
2. Soiigpliu, (Itii
Kii))\vi, tut
'riinkhul , ///
KmjUsIt , water
1. Mizjcji, chi
2. Garo, riti
English, rain
J. Audi, zii
Iiifjusli, du
Aba.s.siaii , kiia
2. Chiucso, yu
English , snnnner
1. Tuslii, chko
IMizjeji , Hchke
2. Chinoso , rhia
English , winter
1. Anzxikli, tlin
Andi, klimi
Kasiknunik , kinltil
Akusli , chani
Al)sni'', g'ue
2. 'JMliotan , ;• gun
Chinese, tting
English , cow
1. (Circassian, hsa
2. Tibetan , r shu
English, dog
1. Avar, choi
Andi , choi
l)i<lo, gnuii
Kubitsh, koy
Circassian , khhah
2. Chinese, keti
'J'ibetan , kt/i
English , horse
1. Lesgian, Ishu
(Circassian, Ishe ^ shu
2. Tibetan , r dda
1.
2.
I.
English, bird
Avar, hnlu
Tankliul, ala
English , bird
Andi , purlie
Abor, pet lung
Aka, put' ah
English, iish
Avar, tshufi
(Circassian , hhzheh
Khamti , pn
Siamese , pin
Aka, ngui/
Abor, engo
liunnese , nga
Karyen, ngn
Hing])lio , nga
.Songplm, kha
Mishiini, ta
Maranj, khai
LiUiu))j)a, khai
TankhnI, khi
Anani, khi
English, flesh
Kabntsh, kho
Abassian, zheh
Cliinese, shnu
Tibetan, zhsha
English, egg
Tshetslieutsh , khua
Khamti , khai
Siamese, khai
English, egg
Kabntsli, tshetnuza
Mishiini , mtiumnie
English , egg
Aknsh, dukhi
Garo, to ka
English, son
]\Iizj(>ji, ua, tvoe
Tibetan , bu
English , liair
Kasikumuk, tshara
ON TfJF Ari'INITIKS OF TFIK LANOUAGKS OF CAlPASrS SiC. 159
:'. Jili , /ifira
Siiijii)lM>, fiftrn
Kiiijlish, liair
I, Avar, siih
Aiizukli, Sdh
Tsliari , sal)
■}. Ihiriiicsc, s/iahrn
Maiiipiir, S(im
ScHigplio (()), S(im
luiijlish, hair
I. 'rslictslicntsli, />(iz<'rrs/i
•J. Karycii , fchnsii
Taiikliul , hosi'/i
luKjlis/t, I lead
I. (i corgi an , lan'i
i.azir, //
Siiauic, Ir/iinn
•1. CiiincHO , li'u , sen
Auaui, III lin
Ava, kaiKj (;'>)
EiKjJish , IhmkI
I. Audi, »ii(')\ tnao'r
i. Assam, mur
Kii(jJis/i , 1i(>nd
I. Alisiu", /.7/// , alifi
Altclvcsck , zr/io
'.'. Karen , /tho
Maiii|nir, kok
Tanklinl, akan
I'Jii/lis/i, ninntli
I. l-('s<j;ian, kail
'1. I'iiincsc, kfii
Aiianu'sc, kan
Tilii'tan , ka.
IjKjlis/i, month
I. Tiishi, hak
•• I fiiia, pak
KmiUsh , month
I. (i('(ir<;ian, j)iii
MiiipcUaii , jtidehi
i^iiauic, /;//
-■ Ava, puna (4)
Kmilish, month
1. Knhitsli , mitir
1. Khoihn, mar
.Mariny, tuar
Kntjlish , month
1. Andi , kol , Ikal
Jjcsyian (;^) , kaal
2. Manijtnr, cliil
Kiajlish , cyo
I. Andi , paiii
1. ( 'inncsc, i/an
/'Jni/lish , car
1. Avar, t't'n , ain, ni
Anziikli, in
'I'shari, ri'n , rin
^Vndi, ka/ika, anilika
2. Hnrnicsc, na
Karen , nakii
«SiM<;'|dio, na
Songpini, anhukon
Iva])\vi , kana
Koreng, kim
^larani, inkmi
Champhnng', khanu
Lnhnppa, kliann
Tankhnl, akltatui
Ivoihn, khnna
Etajlis/i, tooth
1. ]iOs<j;-ian {:\) , sihi
Avar , :avi
C/ircasKian , ilzch
2. Tihetan , so
Ch. ', Is/ii
K, '
( 'ire.
Ahsn
Tih(>tH
(Jiiinese, .s7//
Kiajlish , foot
Ivasiknnmk, ilzlian
Khamti, lin
hUajlish, foot
Mizjpji (3), kn.j, kocg
I.
)nj«no
, hhse
'jS
nh/it'
i.
iCO ON Tin: ArriMTiKs or tuk i-A.\(;rA(ii;s ov caica.si .s &.c.
Maiiiymr, k/inng
'rankhul, ak/tit
KiKjUsh , foot
Audi , ts/ii'ka
Knhitsli, Idfj
.nii, takkln/ai
(iaro, JHchok
KiKjlish , foot
(i(>orj«ian , ]u'ehi
^Faplu , jtoka ■■=-— leg
KtujUsli , fiii;4or
Mlnj^rolian , kiti
Moitay, khoit=:=:h(iml
l^lay, knZH^=^(1a
English, liaiul
(jr corgi. in, eheli
Ijazic, ieh
j\riiigr('lian , ekr
Suauic, s/ii
Cliiiioso , s/ti'H
English . hand
Audi, katshu
Kabutsh, koda
Klioilm, khut
Manipnr, khut
English, blood
Ab.sne, Ishu, sha
'rslictshcntsh, zi
IiM^us, zi
Siu};;i»ho, sat
Souf^'jdio , zyai
Kapwi , the
]V[arain, aztji
Chainplmng, azi
Lnliuppa , ashi
Taukiml, asu
English , blood
liido , e
Miiiiipur, J
Koibu, hi
Glaring, hi
English , blood
Tisbctshoutsh, yioh
Circassian , tlih
('iiincsi^, chine
English . skin
< 'ircassian , jfeh
(/'bin CSC, pi
English , skiix
Dido , hik
Tibetan , shhugshha
English , bone
'rsbctsbentsli , dyaekt
Ingiisb, tekhh
Aknsb, likka
Tsbari, rekkn
Kbaniti, nitk
Sianu'sc, krailitk
English , great
(Georgian, didi
Mingrelian , didi
C7anton , t(i
Knan-cbua , la, da
Tonkin, dvu
('ocbin-cliiiiese , dai
Tibet, ee
Ava , kgi (j)
]May, dn
Teina, tn
English, bad
Mingrelian, moglach
Suanic, ehntja
(Chinese , go gok
Mon , kah
Ava, fnakaung (■♦)
— dl/c (2)
English, warm
Ingush, tan
Tibetan, dzho
English, blue
]\rizjeji (;^) , siene
(Jhinese, zing
'I'ibetan, swongbha
English , yellow
Circassian , khozh
(iX TIIK AKFIMTIES OF THE LANOlAdJ^S OF rAlTASlS &C. 161
•J. Altassiau , kfia
CliiiioKC , chiiatig
luifllish, ^rccn
I. Avar, iit\s/ieriu
Aiiziikli, nrdjin
Iiif.nisli , send
']. 'niictan , ahjanggu
Hwjlish , l)olow
I, (icorji'iiin , ktvenH-t, kwerno
'1. AviV, huukina
Yo, itiik
I'a.ssuko, hi)ko
Kiiliuni , akiia
Kiifilis/i . (lup
1. licsf^ian , zo
Akiish, zn
Audi, st'tv
Dido , zis
Kasikunmk, zribri
Alizjoji, Izd
Alta.s.sian , srka
'1. Tilictan, (hig
luiijlis/i , tlirpo
I. (icorgiaii , Sfimi
liUzie , Jum
Mingrcliau, sanii
S)iaiiii', semi
t Cantdii ( Miincso , sam
Kuaiichua, ,sv</j
Tonkin , lam
Tibetan , sum
Mon , sum
Ava , lliaum
Siani , sum
Knglish, four
1.
Aliassiau , pshi hu
2.
Tibetan, bs/ii
no
( Jbinese , szu
English, five
1.
(Jeorgian, chuthi
Lazic, cliul
Mingrelian, chuthi
Suanic, tvochu'si
2.
Ava , yadu
English, six
1.
Tslietsbentsli , yutsh
Ingush, yalsh
Tushi , iish
•_),
Tibetan , dzhug
English, nine
1.
r'iroassian, bgu
2.
Tibetan , rgu
Chinese, kieu
English, ten
I.
( Circassian , pshe
Abassian , zhehu
2.
Tibetan , hdzhu
Chinese, shi
ADDENDA (1859).
The limited amount of the data must be borne in mind.
As has been stated, no voeabuhxries beyond tliose of the f(ter
works enumerated were used. Had the comparison been moru
t'xtciuled , tiie evidejice of tlie 'J'ibetan affinities of the hvnguages
iimlcr notice would have been stronger. That this would have
lif'cn the case has since b'^rn proved.
In IH+<), just before the j)ublication (»f my Varu-tles of Man,
I i'oinid from my friend Mr. Norris that, upon grammatical grounds,
11
IG2 ON TlIK AIFIM IIKS 01' Till: I.ANOUAIir.S OK f'Al (.'ASIS tSii .
ho lifid come to the saiiic I'onclnsinn. \ rcfcrciu'c t<t the, tlicn,
recently imMished c'oiitriliution.s (»t* Rosen .sjiti.sfietl me tluit ihi^
\vas the case. The following is an abstract of his exi»ositioii u\
the Htructure of (l) the Iron, and (2) the (Circassian.
(I
IRON.
The Declension of Substantives is as follows:
Singular. Plural.
Nom.
lid (father) fid-t-a
Gen.
fid-i Hd-t'-i
Dal.
fid -en fid-t'-ani
Abl.
fid-^i U{-iS\.
Nom.
moi (husband) inoi-t'-a
Gen.
inoi-i nioi-t'-i
J)at.
inoi-en moi-t'-am
Abl.
inoi-ei nioi-t'-ei.
The Comparative Degree is formed by the addition of
-dar; as chorz=ffood, chorz-dar=be(k'r.
The pronouns of the two first persons are as follows;
1. Az = I. Defective in the oblique cases. Man or iiia.
defective.
2. />/=Thou. Defective in the nominative singular.
Sing.
Plural.
Nom.
much
Gen.
nian-i
mach-i
Dat.
ninii-au
mach-en
Aceits.
man
inach
Abl.
man-ei
mach-ei.
Nom.
di
si-mach
Gen.
daw-i *
si-mach-i
Dat.
daw-on
si-mach-en
Aeeus.
daw
si-mach
Abl.
daw-ei
si-mach-ei.
The signs of the persons of the verbs are -in ^ -/,v, -/; -
tu , -tnc ; e. y.
am
Or duclii.
' Or fa-ko
I's Sii .
• the, tlifii,
K' that this
qntxitinii oi
ox run AFKiNiTiKs OK TiiK i,.\\(irA(ii:s (»!' r.MCAsrs Sir. 103
(Idition of
•Hows;
an or nia,
iruljir.
(jtis-//j = ftU(l-iV)
qus-w = iiu(l-».v
(|iis-/ x=z au(l-/7
qiis-*//« = n\u\-imus
(|Us-»// = ;iu«l-i7/.v
(\ns-iiir r^ t\\n\-iu/il.
TIh' addition ol' iIm; sound of / /ic/j)s to form tlic li'Mti pro-
tiritc. 1 say Iwlps, because; if we c'onii)ar<' tiio fornj s-k^t-i-on
=. ] miidf, with tlio root hitn , or the forn) /'c-f/i/s-t-nn = J
heard, with the root ijus, avc son, at oncu, that th«3 addition
lit' / is only a intrt of an inticttion.
Hoyond this, tlie tenses become complicated; and that
bocaiise they are evidently formed by the ajjfglutination of
separate words; the so-called inij)erfect bein^- undoubtcidly
t'onncd by affixing; the })reterite form of the word lo make.
Till' ))orfect and future seem to be similarly formed, dele
tnun the auxiliary -^^ ^<'; as may be collected from the follo-
wing paradigms.
1.
riural — Prcsenf, st-ani, st-ut, i-st-i = sumus, rsfis, sunt.
Smiuliir — P/rlt'rilr , u-t-aii, u-t-as, u-d-i = fni, fuisli, fuit.
Sin;iul<ir — Future^ u-p-in-au, u-yin-as, n-gi-n-i =/'/•», vris, erit.
Imperative fan = cstii.
Hunt . k an = makf,
I'li'Irrilr, ~- s-k'n-t-im,* s-k'o-t-ai, s-k'o-t-a ^ - frri, frristi, fiwit.
:j.
ffoo/, kus •=- hear.
IMIirATIVK.
Sing.
Plural.
Present,
I.
qus-iVi
qns is
((US-/
qus-«;H.
qus-»//
(|us-j/»r .
Imperfect
1.
qus-//^/-A- rt-t
■nn
qus-f/«-A" o-i-am
•},
Uns-yti-k u-t
-ai
i\VLn-ga-k a-t-at
Perfect,
a.
1.
•2.
([iis-f/rt-A'o-t
lX'-(jus-t-on
iv-(/us-t-ai
-a
{[Ms-ga-k o-t-oi
i\''-(/us-t-um
fv-f/us-t-at
•>
i; -am
Future ,
I.
fi'-qus-t-n
hiu-f/us-y in
■an
iv-(jus-t-oi
\);\i-(/usg'i-stam
•)_
\)',\i-i/us-g'in-
as
hn\-(/us-g'i-stut
:\.
hiii-qus-yen
•i
hiii-q us-g'i-sti
Or fa-ko-t-ou, &c.
11*
164 ON TIIK AKI'IMTIKS *»1' Till: l,AN(tr.\<ii:.S or CAICASU.S &c.
UN Til
roN.ir.NtnvK.
Sh„j.
riural.
Pri'sinl, I. i|us-«(;i
'2. (|UH-rtl
Im/jerfrt'l , I. ^nH-ija-k an'-itn
'2. (Mis-Vrt-Zi nn-ui
3. nus-</«-A' (iii-u
(pis am
<jus-«/'
<jiis-o»
(|Us-f/«-/i (in-am
([US-j/«-A «/<-wi
1. —
2. hiU-qus
S. \y,\\-qus-n
IMPKItATIVK.
\)i\i-qHS-am
Xnn-qus-Ht
hi\\-qus-i)i
InKINITIVK, I|I1S-I«.
Parliciples, {[\is-<itj, (|us-f/o;i</, tjus-m-r/r/.
ciiu;asisjan.
In the Absne dinlt'ct ah = /'((//icr , ikr = /lorsc ] ab (id
= /'at/u'r's /lorsr, (verbally, father hursc). Here position iloia
the work of an inflection.
The use of" prepositions is as limited as that of iiiH«'(-
tions, .sY/rrt s-ab ad isfap T ?mj-/'athci' horse (jive ^ or ylriuij
am; ahna af/nisiv izbit == nuod bear see-clid ~rz I saw a bear in
the wood; aiviui* wi as trkii z= {{w) house two doors; dc6 sis /it =
(on) horse tnouni T-diil.
Ibiiice, declension begins with the formation of the jihual
number. This consicts in the addition of the syllable t!mi-
Jc() = horse ; de^-k wa =■ horses.
Atsla = tree ; aslla-k wn = trees,
.l/vi/d' = house ; a/vind-k wa = houses.
In the pronouns there is as little inflection as in the sub-
stantives and adjectives, i.e. there are no forms correspond-
ding- to ?nihi , nobis, &c.
I. When the pronoun signifies possession, it takes an in-
separable form, is incorporated with the substantive tlint
agrees with it, and is .v- for the first, w- for the second
and ?"-for the third, person singular. Then for the plural it
s //- for till* first person, ./- for tiic second, /•- for tin'
third : ab = father;
S-
ff
T
•2.
Whe
in-ly
inco
llen(
iic.un
ist(»
iho
'orms
In sa-vt
The nord
Tli(! on
III; 1 1 = on
Tlw ord
the word
iiKilogical
Tiie rem
I in some
In the
distinction
inflection ;
poarance
sojinrate a
any of the
tions.
I. Pr(
->. Pr
Noa-rad
ON Tin: Ai KiNiiins or tiik i.AXfirAOKH ok rvrcAsts v'ir. Ifif)
S-ah z= mil fatlwr; h-nb = ttur father.
It'-ah = i/n/ /'(il/trr: s -ah •■ ~ i/oar fat/irr.
T-uh ~ -- his (hrrj falhi'r ; rah --■ their father.
"2. W'licn tli<' jn'onoun is governed by a verb, it is simi-
liirly iiu'orporat'Ml.
'.], Hence, tlie only inseparable lorni of tlie personal pro-
noun ist(t be found when it governs the verb. In this case
tlio forms are :
Sa-rti = I
IFa-ra = tln»u
f'i = he
ffa-ra ^^^ we
.S a-rii = yo.
Il-hart = they.
In sii-nt , fra-ra, ha-ra , sa-ra, the -ra is non radical.
The word ii-hart is a eonipound.
Tli(! ordinal - /ir.s/ is uchnni. This seems formed from
,ll;il =: otic.
The ordinal = .srrwr/ is ar/i. This seems unconnected with
the word n>i- = two:, just as in English, second has no (.'ty-
iii(il();;ical connection with ftro.
Tlie remaining ordinals are formed, by affixing -tifo, (and
liii some case) prefixing -a ; as
Cardinals.
3, Chl-/>a*
4, P's i-6rt
5, CUn-lta
(i, V-ha
7, Wis -ha
H, A(v-ha
«), f<^-ba
10, S'wa-^rt
Ordinals.
.4-clii-/J/o
y/-p s i-nto
J-v\m-tno
V-intif
lin-into
A-w-nio
S h-into
f^w-ento.
In the Absno verbs the distinction of time is the only
distinction denoted by any approach to the character of an
InHection ; and here the change has so thoroughly the aj)-
poarance of having been effected by the addition of some
sojiarate and independent words, that it is doubtful whether
nny of the following forms can be considered as true inflec-
tions.
Root , (/wis 1 =:r^ ride
1. Present., C'wis l-rt/> = I ridei==equitu.
2. Present, C'wis l-oi7 := I am riding.
Nou-raJical. f Or, am in the hatiit of riding.
160 ON Till'. vrKiMTii:!^ or rm; i.ANoiAors or cMiAsrs Sic.
InifH'rfi'rl, ( 'Vis'l-r/«
Pirl'rrl. (fwis'l-//
/'lust/iiiim/irrft'ct , ('Vis \-rfirn
Fttliirr, (j'\visl-«»/
equiltthnm.
i'(/i(Hiiii.
('i/iiHiiri'rani.
equituhn.
T
\ nnnilicr is sliown liv tlio pronoun. AimI
cud a complication. I'lie pronoun apitcais
li(> p('rs(»n ami
liorc nnist bo notici
in two forms: —
1st. In lull, .SY//Y/, warn SiC.
•ind. As an inscparabh* prefix; the radical letter luin:;
prefixed and incorporated with the verb. It cannot, huwovci,
be said that this is a true inilexion.
1.
Sittg. 1. sard .v-c wisl-oiV = / ridr
i. wara »-i; \visl-(>»7 -— lluni ridest
3. ui /-c Avisl-o// = he rules.
2.
Phir. I. hiira fui-v'wM-oil :r^ tre ridr
'1. s nva s -\^ \wa\-uiI =• yr ride
3. »</«</•/ r-c\visl-oj7 := Ihcy ride
In respect to the name t»f the class under notice I suj];-
gested in \hl){) tin; term Dioscurian from the ancient Dies-
curias. There it was that the chief commerce between tlic
(ireeks and Romans, and the natives of the Caucasian ranjj;!;
took place. According to IMiny, it was carried on by thirty
interpreters, so nunun-ous were tiie languages. The j,q'eiit
multiplicity of mutually unintelligible tongues is still one
of the characteristics of the parts in question. To have
used the word Caucasian would have been correct, but in-
convenient. It is already //i/,s-applied in another sense, /.
I'., for the sake of denoting tlu^ so-called Caucasian race, con-
sisting, or said to consist, of Jews, Greeks, Circassians,
Scotchmen, ancient Romans, and other heterogeneous ele-
ments.
In his paper on the jMongolian Affinities of the (Cauca-
sians, published in the Journal of the Asiatic Society of
Bengal (IS.");}) l\Ir. Hodgson has both confirmed and deve-
loped th(^ doctrine here indicated — ins data on the side ot'
(Caucasus being those of the Asia Polyglotta, but those on the
side of Tibet and China being vastly augmented; {ind that,
to a great extent, through his own efforts and researches.
Upon the evidence of Mr. Hodgson I lay more than or-
.V riiK ArriNMTir.s of tmi; i.A\(ir.\or:s or rvrcASfs ivo.
167
siiui ningo
1 by thirty
Tlio iJTeiit
r spnso, /.
(linary vnliio; not inoroly on tho stron^th of liis acinnon
ami a('f|iiir('in('nts in goncral, ])iit from tlic fact of liis e.c-
priiffssii studios as a naturalist leading;- liini to ovcr-valuo
ratlicr than uniler-valuc thoso (litfcrcni'os of pliysical <'onfor-
iiiation that (to take cxtrcino forms) contrast tho (Jcorfjfian
and (.'ircassian nolih) with th(! (Jliincsc, or Tibetan hibourcr.
Novertholcss, his evidence is decided.
ircassians,
ncous elc-
ON THE TUSIII LANGUAGE.
KKAl)
BEFORE THE PlIILOLOGIC AE SOCIETY
KKHIILARY THE loTH. 1858.
So little li^ht lias hcon thrown upon the lanfijiia^os of
Caucasus, that a puhlioation of the year l^5(), entitled f'ri-
siicli iiber die T/tusch-Spnichr , by A. Sehieffner, may be allow-
ed to stand as a text for a short commentary.
The Tushi is a lan^iua^ie belonginj^ to the least known of
the five classes into which Klaproth, in his Asia Po/i/f/lnlin.
distributes the lan<;;ua<::es of Caucasus: viz. (I.) the (Jcor-
f^ian. (2.) the Osset or Iron. (;J) the Eesfj^ian. (4.") the
Mizhdzh''(lzhi. And (5.) the Tsherkess or Circassian. It is
to the foiiith of these that the Tushi belongs; the particul.u'
district in which it is spoken being that of Tzowa, where
it is in contact with the Ceorgian of Ceorgia; from wliiiii,
as well as from the Russian , it has adopted several words.
The dafa consist in communications from a native of the
district, Georg Ziskorow, with whom the author caiiio in
contact at St. Petersburg. They have supplied a grniimia-
tical sketch, a short lexicon, and some specimens in the
way of composition, consisting of translations of portions
of the Gospels, and two short tales of an Arabic or Persian
rather than a truly native character. They are accompanied
by a (Jerman translation.
Taking the grou])s as wo find them in Klaproth, we may
ask what amount of illustration each has received in resjieit
to its f/rnmmar. In respect to the vocabularies, the Am
Pnhiglotta gives us specimens of them all.
The Georgian has long^ been known through the grannnar
of Maggi , published upwards of two centuries ago. The
researches of Rosen on its several dialects are f,iiite rocont.
Of the Iron there is a copious dictionaiy by Sjogren, and
(»\ Till-: ri .SIM !,AN(iIA(iF,.
i()0
a short skotcli ot" its <:raiiini,ir l»y Ivoson. Tim nljdinbot
IS
Russian, w
itli additions. ItoscMi lias also irivcn a y;raiiinia-
tic
al sketch of the (Jircassiaii. Tliis, liovvcvcr
as \v(
11
as
Ills iiotico of tli(! Ossct, is exceedingly brief. ()l'tlie J^es-
;;iaii wo liav(^ no ^'raniniar at all; and of the ^fizhd/hedzhi,
ur 'rsiii'tshent ^roiij), the first ^raniinatieal sketch is tin? one
before us.
The al|ilial)et is the ordinary I'onian niodilied; the work
Ili'UU
addressed to the liussians rather than the iiativ
aiu
I
the Kuropean suraiis in ^('iieral rather than to the Kus-
«i;uis.
Otl
lerwise
the (
jicoriiia
n alj
hd
lalx't iiiii;
ht 1
lave heen
usi'd with advantn<ie; for it is csjtociallv stated that the (Jcor-
::ian and Tushi sound-systems are alike. The nioditieations
til which our own alphahet has been subjected, are those
tliat (!astreu lias made in his Samoyed fi,raminar and lexicon.
So that we may say that it is in (Jastren's Samoyed mode
(if writinj;' that S;hieffiier's Tushi j;rammar and lexicon arc
exhibited.
In respect to the ji;eneral relations of the lan^ua_2:e, the
oviilenco of the work under notice is confirmatory (thou^'h
not absolut(dy) of the views to which the T)res(Mit writer has
com
... y
luitted himscdf, viz. — (1.) that the hiii_<^ua<;os ot (
lb
lasus 111 jicnerai are so nearly ^//w/^<-sviiai)ic as
titiK'i
to 1
au-
)n with
desiu-nated ;>/////v>-syIlai)ic ; (2.) that the distinction
ihawn by Klaproth between the ]\[izhd/diedzhi and Les<;ian
monps is ujitenable; both bclonf;inf? to the same class, a fact
liy which the phihdojjjic ethnojiraphy of Caucasus is, pro
iiinhis siinplified. Uj)on the first of these points Schiefl'ner
\\rit<s, that the avoidance of polysyllabic forms has intro-
(hu'od all manner of abbreviations in the lan;i,ua^e ; upon
tlio second, that the little he has seen of the Lesbian <^rannnar
induces him to connect it with the Tshetslients. It should
1)0 added, howtiver, that in respect to its ni(»nosylIabic (dia-
ractor, he maintains that the slun'tness of nianv of its words
due to ,'i secondary pr
oc
ess: so that the older form of
tlio lan^ua<i:e was more polysyllabic than the present.
nf the chief details, the fo-mation of the cases of the nouns
tdiiKs first. The decdr-nsion (d" the pcn-sonal pronouns is as
follows. With a slight modification it is that of the; ordi-
uarv substantive as well.
SINUri.AIt. T.
yimiinulii'i' . . so .
I'i'iiilirr .... sai
■nior. HK.
ho o.
liai oxu'.
- «nix.
o$uiii.
170
ON riii; nsiii i.\N(;r.\(ii;
SINril I.AIl.
Jhtliir . . .
Jnslriirliri'
I.
M»n
sniia
;is . .
asii .
IlOf
lull .
nil.
aim
.l/p'c(irr. . . . SOX Iiox
ylllotiir . . .
sojro liotro
Klalirr soxi.
Comilittirc. . . sm-i.
hnxi
Trrwiiiiilirr
.lilrssi'r . .
Jhliilirr . .
so^dtnci
hojioiiH'i.
ri.tiiAi..
Nomina tii'f
aciiiliir . .
/hi/iir . . .
WE.
VE.
Jnslriitiirr
Alfcctivi' . .
Jlliiliri' . .
Illfitin'. . .
Kid lire . . .
CoiuUdliir .
.Uli'ssirc . .
Iii('ssi>'i' ((',)
Jhhilirr (c.)
K'alirr (r.j
Cunrcrsioe.
•\vai
^vai
wain
>vai
vaix
\\aij;(>
wailn
Avaixl
M airi
vaiji'tili
w ailnli
wail 10
\\ ai^dili
'txo .
'txai.
'txoii
'tXdX . .
'tXO<^() .
'txiiln. .
'tzoxi . .
'txori . .
Hx.p^n
in;.
nxiiil.
oiixiia.
t'XIIS.
• iXMsi'.
«>u\sc.
<ixu\.
<txiij;n.
oUXJi'n.
(tiixxl.
o.xxi (?).
oxiici.
(mxt'i.
OXC'l (V).
uiix,i:;iiiiici.
CAllDII
Soj^oll lldgojl oUX^iih.
,s();;r('(lali hni;rc(lah . . . <iiixg(»r(*.
()Uxj5ort'(lali.
TIIEV.
sn <>l)i.
Mii oxri.
sun oxani.
. . . siiiia
a'txn . . ais oxar.
. . . asl »»xia.
siix nxarx.
siilo dxarld.
suxi (ixarxi.
Mui o>;irci.
'txo<;'t)li. suj^uh oxarji'iih.
'Ixnlnli. snliih oxarjnli.
ijiTc oxarijort'.
— - oxardali.
'txtilrc . sulrc oliarlorc
'txiiji'dili sii;j,'uili oliar^iiili.
That sonic of tlioso forms arc no truo infioxions, hut .'i|i-
])on(l(Ml jircpositions, is spctMlily stated in tlio text. If so.
it is prohaMc that, in another author or in a ditfcroiit <ii;i-
loot, tlio nuinher of casos will vary. At any rate, the ai:-
}.'lutinate character ot' tho lan;i;uaj;(' is indicated. The iiu-
nicrals arc —
1.
eh
■J
M
;;.
X(>
4.
ah
■>.
I'.x
().
.i'''
1 .
\\(
Till
■1 a
illsn ,
)Vri
which
It
Iwcn/ij
— -
K
The c(»i
the latter
th(! latter
iriaii in oi
tiv(^ is <;i>
111 v(.'rl)
.\(hl to th
tlic cmidit
The ten
(1.) Pre
to the inij
;2.) lni|
(3.) Ao
(I.) '', 1
hut V jiii-l,
•':' vowel
/'"///'/; (\u
iho ^ rfcc
(5.) I'ln
(Ck) Th(
ino(lilicati(
1 j^ive
the.n. Tl
hcon too <
The fir!
ON rm: 'nsiii i.AN(;r.\<ii:.
171
Mill.
IXllil.
.US.
;ii^i'.
ixsc.
illX.
niiJo.
IXJi-n.
ixxi.
Lxi (V).
au'i.
ixci.
a-l (V).
ixj^diiici.
ix^^oh.
ix^nrc.
ixj^ort'fliili.
IKV.
<arii.
ir.
iTX.
irlo.
irxi.
ui'i.
irji'itli.
irlnli.
nil.-il..
uliiri'.
hut .'1)1-
:t. If s(..
■ront iliii-
, the n--
Tli(> mi-
CAUIUNAI.
I.
:\.
4.
(i.
OKDI.NM,.
elm (luilirc.
si si !};•('.
Xn >"ln'^-
alu'w .... (llicAvloj^c.
P>^.i y\\\'^i\
jctx .... jcixloj^c.
\vi»rl .... worlojjc.
CAUUINAI..
OUDlNAL.
H.
l.Mi-l . . .
. llJirlni;0.
<).
ISS . . . .
. issldji'c.
10.
itt . . . .
. ittl(i;i('.
II.
clia-itt .
. oliii-ittli>'>('.
\-2.
si-itt . . .
. si-ittln^c.
1!>.
t(|(M'X(:. .
. i(|(M'Xl'ln<jj('
20.
t.,a. . .
. t(lMl}!'C.
This as a word tlio aiitlior connofts with tlic word /f/'i^-^
iihn, inrr((f/(i/fi (ttw/i . nucilerum), a.s if it wtn-c; 10 doubled,
wliicli it ino.st likely is. In like manner Iqecxc is one from
livcn/ij = wtdcviijinti: —
100 = pxanzt(|!i =- - 5 X 20.
200 = ii.-atat(| = lo X 20.
300 = i»xil!i'at(| := 12 X 20.
4()0 = t(iau/,i(| -- 20 X 20.
500
t(|aii/ij> ]*xauzt(|a = 20 X 20 + 100.
1000 = sai- t4auzi(|a it-aicja = 2 X 400 + 200.
The t'oniinonest sif^ns of tlie plural nunilK-r are -/ and -.sv,
tlio latter = « in Twiietslients. Tiio suffixes -ne and -hi,
tlid hitter of wliieli is found in J^es<;ian, is stated to be (Jeor-
;:iaii in origin. Iso reason, however, ajiainst its b(;ing na-
tive is ^ivon.
Ill ve-riis, the simplest form is (as usual) the imjierative.
.\(ld to this -a, and you have the infinitive. The si<>;n of
the conditional is he or //; that of the eonjunctive le or /.
'I'he tf'uses are —
(1.) Present, formed liy addinji^ -t(
or -V
to tl
le root: /. c
to tli(> imp(>rativ(' Inrni , and (dian<;in<;' the vowel.
y'l.) Imperfect, by addiiij; -/• to the present.
(3.) Aorist, formed by the addition nf -;• to the
(I.) '*•. rff'C't ; the formation oi which is nut expressly {jivcn,
hut \ iucli is said to diflVr from tiie present in not clian<:in<j^
'!'.( vowed. However, we have the forms .»77 --////</, jcU =
'/; (perf.) xeiin ^= found (aorist). From the participle of
iiUH
dio ^ rteet is fiu'med the
(.').) Pluperfect by addinp,- -r.
('».> The t'uture is cither the same as the present, or a
m(»(
lilicat
ion of it.
tl
1 jL;ivi' the names of those moods and tenses as i find
ii'i!i. 'V\\i'. lani;uajie of the Latin grammar has, probably,
bi'cn too (
■h.sel
V mil
tnt.'d
The first and second persons arc formed by appending
172
(»N TIIK ri Slir I.ANl.l :A(iF,.
tlio ])ron(»nns oitlicr in the iioininativo or the instructivo fnim. I TshetslKin]
Tliat an ()l»li(|iio lorni o!' tlio pronoun slionlcl npjicar in tl,
])r'rsonal inHcxion ot verbs is no more than what tlic if
searches of" iho late ^fr. (Sarnett, with wiiich we are all s
taniiliar, have tau<iht us to expect. At tlu; sanu; tiin<' . tli
extent to which tho instructivi^ and nominative I'uni
IS Ml'i'
aii^l,
alik(! nnist he hornf^ in mind. Let either he appended;
wdien so append(Ml, undcn'fi'o (under certain conditions) ccrtaii
modifications, and a double origin i.-. sinnilated. That fliir
is th(; case in the instances (d' th(! work under notice is l)\
no means asserted. The possibilitv of its bei
I'es
ted.
inu' so IS siu
Tho participle of the j)resent tense is formed in -/'/;; as
ihi{i() r iz ctd , (Uitju-'in . cniinff.
Till! participle of the preterite ends in -n(t\ as ^'arc -- licur.
xin'-uo -'-■ lirard.
There are auxiliary verbs, and no small amount of euiilid-
nic chaniics; of which on;
more esix'cia
It
IS connec
ted
wi
th tl
lly, d
eserv(>s nutici
10 licnder ol nouns.
\\
lien certiuii
wonls (adjectives or the so-called verb substantive) folldw
certain substantives, they chan^-e their initial. Thus hafxlcon
Wiv = //w iJiop/u-/ is, hatxhsensi Ik\ z.- Ilic prophels (irc, wa.^i
tv?i ^^^ llw hroihcr is , wasar //a -: ///r lirnllicrs are.
Ai^'ain — naw Jn --■ l/ic ship is, nawr Jii=(ln' s/iips dir:
bstiuno jii=//i(' tri/'t' is, bsteo dii^^t/ic /rircs art'.
This is said to indicate
len
der, but how do we know wliat
fjender isV The words themsidves have neith(>r form iidv
inflexion which indicates it. Say that instead of gender it
means sex, /. c. that the chan^fes in question are refjulntpd
by natural rather than <irannn\itii'al characters. We still fiml
thi'.t the word tiatr is considered feminine — feminine and
inaidmate. This, however, is f;rammatical rather than na-
tural, sex — "das weibliche ( ieschlecht wird bey unbelt'blen
(l(\^enst;indeu auch im IMural dureh./-, bei hclchh'n dnnli
a aus^icdriickt."" Then follow the t'xamples Just j;iven. How,
however, do we know that these av(m'(1s are fendnineV It is
submitted that the explanation (d' this very interesting;' ini-
» (iiir
tial chaniie has y;'t to be jLijiven. It recalls, however, t(
memory tlu^ practice of more Ian;.'ua^es than one, the Kel-
tic, th(i ^VoIofV, the Kafre, and several other African tonjiucs.
vs'herein tho change is initial , though not always on the same
principle.
So, also, the division of objects int(» animate and inaninii.tf
recalls to our mind some African, and nun "reus American.
tongues.
Such is the notice of the first of the Mizhdzhedzhi "i"
iIr' ^ramil
wliicli suj
cjassiticatil
The deefc
:iia|;'cs; wi
utiicr langj
iiii.sccllane
lir wnnw i
('(iMihiiiatid
true inlio
in t'enii till
111' the sam|
sin- a
lit ar to eat
uiT geniti\
hi
that nil
lan;;nages
;ire also (
vi'sti|i'ated.
The r^
ici't; it be
with whici
111 vocabul
I'diiipeti-'nt
ilcnce is , t>
Maiijii u'ivi
I'K'iiisioii tl
rircassian,
In the V
In the 1
to h(! foui
the Circas
l.S-ah=:
W-ah:
]i-ah =
To win I
f^n-xw -
Vi = l
Tin- uiii
iibove the
ON I'HK iisiii i,AN(;rA(ii:.
173
Tslictsliiiiits (wo may say Lf'S<4ian) forms of spnoch of wliich
ilir ;;r!iiiiiiiatii'al structure has liceii iiivcstij^ati'tl ; ;i notiio
wliicli suj^gosts tl»e (juestion coneoniinj; its atliuitics and
ilassilie-ation.
The dtifliMision jtoiiits ti> the r^Tiaii , or l'"in, class of lan-
:iiii-(s; ^vitl^ wliicli not only tin! 'rsluitslicnts, but all the
iitlid' lan^ua^es of Caucasus ]iav<^ Ion-;' been known to liavu
iiii.sct.ilancous affinities. The rcscniblancc, howovur, may
iiidiv! ai»i)ar(m
it tl
lan real
Tl
i(! so-ca
11. m1
cases ma
}■
illations of substantives and prepositions rather th
1 tli<! termiiioloitv may be; more U^^ria
nilllh
tnii' iiitlexions.
lU
an(
in
sill-
li'iir
arc
ill fonii than in reality. Even if tlu! powers of the cases
111! tlie same, it will not prove much. Two laiimm^es exjires-
a }:,iven number of the relations that two nouns niay
to each other will, ^•emirally . express the same. Cases
Li<'iiitive, dative ami tlu; like mII the world over — and
that independent of any philoloj;ieal affinity between the
laii;;na;;(S in which they Oi'ciir. The extent to which they
are also Caritive, Adessivc and the like has yet to be in-
V('stij;ated.
The U^i'ian allinilies, then, of the Tslietslicnts are iiidi-
rci't; it Ikmu^' the lani^uaf^cs of its immediate nei;;hb(!urhood
with which it is more imm(>(liate|y connecti'd. In the way
i.t vocabularies the lists of the As/a I'dli/tjlolht have hm^' lieen
iiiinpeteiit to show tliis. In the wav of <iranmiar the evi-
iliiKc is, still, far from complete. The (ieor^ian, t(» which
Ma;:<ji "ives no mori; than six cases, has a far scantier de-
eini
qoii than tli(^ Tushi , at least as it appears here. The
('iiTussian, accordinu- to liosen , is stil
111 tlie ver
bs th
tosen , IS still poorer.
i(^ y;eneral likeness is art-ater
In the jironouns, iiow(!ver, the most definite similarity is
til b(! found ; as iiiay be se(Mi from the following' iorms i
the C"
n
nvassian : —
I. S-;il»=^M*// father.
\\-;ihz:::^l/ll/ fdtlll'r.
|,-ill»r:=///.V fullllT.
1 (I
whuli
add-
Ah = father.
•I i>. II-Hli = ««r ftther.
i S-ab :://((«/• father.
l| S-ab ----//</'//• father.
S(t-rn --:= I.
lf'a-yi\:=f\(ju.
n = he.
IIn-\'\\ = »•/».
.S' a-Yi\=^ife.
lJ-\)iw\ --they.
Hie rtmount of likeness here is consideti'.blc. Over and
above the use of .v for the first person singular, the «' in the
171
ON I UK It sill i.ANtii A(;i;.
second porson plural sliouM be noticed. So sliould tlic h ami
;• in tlio ('irciissiiin u-^a;V; bolli ot" which arc ])lural clciiiciits
in the Tushi also.
Finally fas a point ot" jjfcncral ])hilolo}>^y), tho double forms
of the lushi plurals trai and Leo su^f;;(!st the likelihood dl
tluiir beinj^ exclusive and Inclusive; one denotinfi^ the speaker
i)Ut not tho person spokcm to, the other both the pcrscui
spoken to and the person "svho speaks; plurals of this kiml
bein^- well known to be conunon in many of the ruder lan-
guages.
1 1
ON THE NAME AND NATION OF THE DA-
(lAN KIN(i DKCEUALrS, WITH NOTICES
OF THE A(iATIIVUSI AND ALAM.
ItKAU
I'.KFOUK TIIK rillLOLOOK.'AL SOCIKTV,
Al'UlL 17T11 1H54.
Tlic text of Herodotus places the Agntliyrsi in Transyl-
vania (there or tJiereahouts). (Sec; F. \\'. Newman On Sey-
tliia and th(! surrounding;,- ( 'ounlri* s, aeeordin;^- to Herodotus,
I'liilolo^ieal Soeiety's Proceedings, vol. i. p. 77.)
Tlie subse<jiient aiithors speak ot" them as a people who
painted (tattooed V) their bodies; t!ie usual (>pithet l>ein<^' picli.
The same epithet is applied to tins (ic/o/ii] also a popula-
tion of the Seythia of Herodotus.
Fur accurate knowled;;e the locality of the Aj;athyrsan8
was too remote — too rcnnotf; until, at least, the date of the
Dacian wars; hut the Dacian wars are, th(Mnselves, eminently
Miijifrfect in their details, and unsatisfactoiy in respect to
ilic authorities for them.
Tlicre is every reason, then, for a nation in th(» locality
tif the A^athyrsi reniainin<^ obscure — in the same j)rcdica-
iiipnt i^say) with the Hyperborei, (»r with the occupants of
Tliuic.
lit there is no reason for supposing- th(> obliteration of
ic j»('opI(! socalhii'; nor yet for supposinj^- a loss of its naine,
till
wlK'tlicr native ot ctii; rwise.
llonce, when we ,i;(t the details of Dacia we nuay rcason-
il'lv look out for Aiiathvrsi.
How tar nnist we expect to Hnd their name unmoditicd?
llii.< depends upon the popiUation throu<^h whom the classi-
'iil writers, whether Latin or (Ireek, deriverl it. is'ow it is
Hibniitted , that if we rind a notico of them in the fifth cen-
tury A. I)., and that in au ac4:ount relating to Dacia and
17G ON nii: nami: and naiion m riii; i»a( ian kin(i ^^c.
l^uuionia, tlie medium lias, ])r(iljal)ly , been ditlVrdiit IVom
tli.'it tIir(Mii;li wliicli I hrddiitiis, jiiiii)n;;st tlic Orcck itilunii >
of til*' UliU'U Sea, obtained his accouiit.s. Tlic (btails ut' tlii«
dillVn-iui' ol' mi'dium arc not very iiii|)nitaiit, and tin; (li>
ril.s.siuii ol" tliciii Nvoiihl be cpisoilitMl to tlu' present |»!ij)or,
if not irrcbivant. It is cnou^b to rttniark , that a ditfcrciuv
y)^ medium is jjrobaldc; and, as u consciiucntM- tliercuf, a ilit-
fcrcni'o in tlu; form of the nann;.
This is pnliniinary ami introductory to the notice of the
foUowin^' passage of Priscns, to whom \vc o\v<! the .'iciduni
of one of the end»assies to Attihi — O .T^.'fJ/Ji'r/jJo^' iiifit roii
T()V Ihii'Tov 2.Ht'iyty.tji>. Another fo. ai i^also in I'lisciis) i>
'^ xaj I'ijoi. 'I'hcy an; specially caMcd .il.aliii Uuniii. .hii'
nantb'S lorm is Aenlziii.
IMaci' lor ])lacc, tiiis {^ivcs us the A;:athyrsi of Herodotus
as near as i-an bo expected; and, name i'or nanu' it dms
the same: tlie inference bein^' that th(; A/:at:iri of I'riM;ii>
arc the (U'sceii(hints oi the Atjdihijisi of IIero(h)tus. Of cmusi ,
c'vi(b'nce ol' any kind to the mii;ration , extinction, or clian;;(
of name on tin; part of the; |)opulation in (piestion would in-
validate this view. Su(di (ividence , however, has not hciii
prochu'cd , nor lias the present writer succeeded in iindiii;:,
though he has soui;ht for it.
Descendants then of the Aijiillnirsi , and ancestors of the
Ak<(l:iri may have formoil part ol' the population of Daiia
when Domitian and 'rrajan louj^ht against l)cc(d)alus; a ]);iit
that may iiave been large or small, we.-ik or powerful, li'i
mogeiuous with the rest of Dacia or ditlV'rent from it. i\^-
sundng it to have Ix'cn different, it may still have sujijiiii'il
.soldiers — even h'a(b'rs. l)ec(d)alus hinis(df may as ea>ilv
have belonged to tlio Agathyrsan part (d' Dacia as to tuiv
other. A very little evidence will turn the balance in so
obscure a point as the pr( sent.
Now, no (Jerman and no Slavonii' dialects givt; us citli<r
the meaning of the name l)ec(d)alus or any name like it. It
stands alone in /-.'urojienn history. Where; does it npjx'ar'
In the history (d" the Tur/,s. TIk; tirst known king ol the
Turks bears the same name as tin; last of the Dacians. Jii-
zahu/us {Ji^ri(ioi)Xog) was that khan of the Turks of Tartnrv
to whom Justinian sent an embassy when the Avars invaddl
the l''astern em])irc.
This (at* is frei ly admitted) is a small fact, if taken aloiio;
but this should not be done. The ciimululive character <it
tlio evidenoe in all matltrs »d' this kind should bo borno in
mind, «nd the value of small facts measured by the extent
tj
ON ri
to which tl
(■i(li'iic<' of
ill proport
tilt! value
1)1 cithei
(hi the <
>t;uitive ev
.tiliilliifisnn
.if/dllii/rsuiif
ili('i,ritimat(
nisc. little
Now tlu
[lie extent
iM tlu; Sc)
fiU'ts is ei
The presei
the Agath}
the preseni
arc Af/ul/ii/i
\iii(l (lie .\(i
If Af/at/ii
word in an
lor word, i
for an uni
time in Th
SIUIU! ])0pU
tain dil'ticu
identical.
It is not,
iiiight b{! 1
Turk so t
other than
were some
them. Me
present nu
pose it to
SlljIpOSC! tl
lhijis-[A/,ai
Even this
jioimlation
Turk stoc
be it so.
apart, the
wide a par
The del
(tN TlIK NAMK AND NATION oi' Till: HAf'IAN KINO &('. 177
to which tlicy stand {done, <»r are strcn^thcniMl liy tlio coin-
(i(U'n((' of others, hi the h»tt(!r cas(; they assume importance
ill j)ro|)ortio). to the mutual 8Uj)|)ort tlicy j;iv(' oacli other;
till! valuu of any two bein^ always more than double that
ol cither taken siiij^ly.
On the other hand, eaeh must rest on some si-jtaratf sub-
>t;uitive eviih'iu'e of its own. To say that Jkrchalioi nuts an
.[ijiiiliijrsitii hcnn/st' lite .U/iillu/mniis nwrc 'J'ifrAs, and that th(!
.ti/ii/lii/rsans were Tur/:s Inrduxc Jhrchdhis way our o/' llwin, is
illegitimate. There must b(! some special evidence in each
case, little or much.
Now the evidence that the Ayalliyrsi ■were Turks lies in
the extent to which {a) they were Scythians {Skolo(i), and
i/y) the Scythians {Skololi) Avere Turks; — neither of which
facts is either universally admitted or universally denied.
The present writer, however, holds the Turk character of
tlio Aj;athyrsi on grounds wholly ind(^pi!ndent of anythinj^ in
tilt present paper; indeed, the sugficstion that the Aratziri
arc AfnillnjrM is, not his, but Zeiiss'. — (See Die JJculscltcn
iitul (lie .\(ichh(inil(imme , v. liultjari, ]). 711,}
If A(/(itlnjni- hi' Akatzir- in some older, Avhat is the latter
word in any newer form? — for such there probably is. \V«)rd
tor word, it is probablv the same as h'lutztir, a denomination
for an uniloubtedly l\irk tribe which occurs for the first
time in Theophanes: — Tovqxoi ano rr]q iojag oiJs Xct^aQovg
ovo^K^ovOiV. This is A. D. 020. Whether, however, the
siime populations were diuioted is uncertain. There are cer-
tain difticulties in the su])[)Osition that they were absolutely
identical.
It is not, however, necessary that they should be so. There
iiii<,dit b(^ more than one division of a {j^reat stock , like the
Turk so called. Nay, they might have been populations
other than Turk so designated, provided only that there
were some Turk po})ulation in their neighbourhood so to call
them. ^lore than this. The word may be current at the
present moment, though, of course, in a modified form. Sup-
pose it to have been the Turk translation of /y/r/z/.v ; or ruther,
suppose.' the word piclus to be the Latin translation of A«/(i-
lliijrs-[Akalzir-): what would the |)rol)able conse(pience l)eV
Kvcu this, that whereever there was a jxiitilcd n»r tdtlaned)
population in tlus neighbourhood »tf any member of the ^reat
Turk stock, the name, or something like it, might arise.
1)1' it so. If the memljers of the same Turk stock lay wide
apart, the corresponding painted or tattooed populations lying
wide apart also might take the same name.
The dctuils suggested by this line of criticism may form
12
178 ON llli: \A\Ii: AMI NAI'ION ul" IHi; KAf'IAN KINO &C.
the PubjcH't of another paper. In the jjresent, tlio nutlinr
hazj;r<ls a tVesli ohservatinn — j\n observation on u
popUl.'ltli
often associated with the A;;athyrsi, vi/. the ficloui. Sccju-
that we havo sueh forms as Uniii (the «Jre(!k iorni is O
vvxnn,
lira
not Ovvvoi) and I'liitiu ( ^^ /finis \ Ai pi ami Curpt] Alhi
and Challimri, is.('.\ and seeing' the; ai'tinity between the sonnils
of // and /. ; he beliescs lliat the word (Iclitiii may take ano-
ther form and bc^in with a vowel {I'lhnii , AIniii). Seoiii;
that their locality is nearly that of the Almii of a latter jit-
riod: seein;;' that the ndddle ^\ liable in i\lani (in one writoi-
It 1
cast ) i>
on::- - «■
Ax>/.' /Tfj," //AriP/'ot ; seein;;' that Ibn
(lUO-
tU^
who nu'ntions th«' (ielmii^ knows n(» i\lani, whereas
the anthors who describe the Alani make (with one excep-
tion abont to be nnticrd) no nuntion ol' the (lelotii, lu! i(l< ii-
tilies the two j)opidatit)ns , (leloni and Alani, or vice rer
lie deduces somethin};' more irom this root / — // (/, — v).
Let th(! nam(! tor the Alans have reached tho (Jrecks oftlii'
iMixino thruu;j,h two ditl'iTcnt dialects of some interjacciit
.S'(/.
anmiaji-e
let tin; form it to(dv in (Irefd^ have b(
een nari.-vl-
labic in one case, whereas it was imparisyllabic in the otlui'.
and we have two plurals, one in ~ot , as iVAoJi'ot, "jXavvat.
\'lkavot^ and another in -f-g, as Ft'lcovfi^, "/Jlavi'fi;,"yl/.(cvi^.
— -possible, and (i>'en probable, modifications of the orijiiual
nam(», what(!ver that was. Now, name for name, Alavii
c()m(!H very near ilkliivt^;\ and in this sinnlarity may lie the
explanation of the statement (d' Herodotus as to tlie existoiut'
of certain ScijIliinH (inrl>s ('Kkltjvtg 2.xv\}(a) — iv. 17. 1<>S,
If so tliese Scylliiini (ircc/.s were A/a/is.
The oxc(!ption, indicat(;d a few lines above, to the fact
of only (»n(i author mentionin;;' both (irloui and Alani, is to
bo found in Ammianus Mareellinus (xxxi. 2. \'.\. I h. flu'
j»assa;;e is too lonj;' to fptoto. It is clear, however, that whilst
his Aliini are sjioken of from his own knowlodj;(!, his f
are brought in from his book-learninijr, /. c. from Ilorodotu
,(' mil
in }
N O T 1^: s.
Ni.Ti; I.
Evidi'itre of nnif kind /O //ir tnif/n/lio». e.x Unction nr ilitiiijir of iK/iiir '"
t/ie pat't <if iht pti/iiilo/iiin-'> in i/Histimi inmld iiirnlidatc this rifir. Siic/i criilriio'
/las not liieii pvoiliiiiil ijC- — IMie fuller consideration ot" tlu; (lUestieii in-
volved in tliis stiitoniont is to l>o found in Dr. W. Smith's Dirlinnary
Of f! reek (lad Honau iieograpliii vv. Ilunni, Hcythin. und Sarmnlin.
KOTHS.
179
Ml IK .'.
Tlir ih-liiils siiiifii'slrd hji this line n/' iriliiisw ffr. — 'riid'c (irr tii tlir I'lFfct
that ill tlif Wdiil .li/(i//ii/isi we fj-ct nil oirly 'I'liik ;:lo.ss, ot' wliicli tli('
lii^ttoiy is soiiiovvhut ('nriiiii,s. It exists, at tiif iircsciit iiiDintiit in Miij;'
lain!, hir. iii;,' coiiu' cm Hiiii<'iuv. It exists in SiUcrin , on the vrrvtioii-
III r •'
f till! Aini'ric'ii.
Kliir.i
liiic \vc liinc it ill its ul)-
If is Mii> i;ii;,''lisii wiii'il llnssm
ii'viati'ii t'lH'iii.
jl is till- Sihcriim word Viii<aliir, \'iiica/.iiir. or \iilvaii/',irir,
Til
'nittiv
v nni
II' itf tilt' Yiikaiiiri of Silicria is .hiilnv Dnmtii. Tlin
Korinks call tlii'iii Ahil. 'riicir (itiicr ncii^liiiniir-i arc liif 'I'liik Yakuts.
jliiicc it is iiiiilialilc tliat it is tn tin' ^■ak;lt laiii^iia^'r tiiat tiir tciiii
Viik.'iliir Milso }'iikiiililiir) is n'i'i'rrililc. If sn. its jirolialilt' iiicaiiiii;;' is
ilic siiiiic as till) Kui'iak .lint, wliicli incaiis sjinllcil. It ajiiilics to tlic
Viikaliiri t'loin their sjiDttcil ilotr.skiii linsscs.
N'ciw, soiitii ot' tliosc saiiic ^'akiits, wlio arc sii|i)iriH('(I to call tlic An-
limi iioiiiiii liy the iiaiuc ^'llk.■ll^n•i lor Vukail/liiri i , live a trilx' ot' Tiiii-
L'lisiaiis. 'riii'sc arc called 'I'slnijiittlihir — liiit not l>y tlieiiiselves. liy
wliuinV \\\ no oiK! so ](rolialily as Uy the ^'akllts. WliyV Iiccaiise they
tattoii tlieiiisel\-es. It' so. it is |iroi(aiile that f'i>l:iiii:/iir ami 'J's/iti/nn/z/iir
\rf (Uic am
I th
same u cinl ; at any rate
likel
V im aiiiiiir in a
likch
luii;Mii;;-e has heen claimed for it.
I,"t it , then, lie coiisidcjcd as a 'I'lirU word, meaniiijf njintlfil, tnltitinut,
l,iiiiilcil. — |iro\isioiially. It may appear in any ]iart of tin; Turk area,
jinivided only, that sonii; nation to which oiio of the tliroc precedinj; ad-
jii'tlM's applies he I'oiiiid ill its iieiH-liliuiirliood. It may apjiear, too, in any
-tatf of ;uiy Turk form of speech. iJiit there are Turk t'orms of speech
;is far distant from the Le' a and Tiiiifinska as Syria or Constantinople;
:uiil tliert! art! Turk ;jlosses as old as Herodotus. One of these the pre-
Miit writer helicjves to he the word .If/nt/ii/rsi . hein^f provided with spc-
that tli(! nation so called wero either themselves
ciid eviihnce to shew
the .V^athvrsi are calleil the pifli
th
f.irks or on a Turk fioiilier. Now
A^ratliyrsi; and it is siibniitted to the reader that the one term is tin
triiiisiatioii of the other — the words .Ifjiit/ii/rs (also .lliiitzir), }'iil\ii<l;liir.
iiml Ts/iii/iDi/i/iir. Iieiii^- one and the same." — From the author's .Satire
limes iif llic /{iissiini Kininn'.
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
/.
^,
%
1.0
I.I
1.25
|50 ■^"
2.5
■^ IIIIIM
i:^ IIIIIM
18
^IM
%
/2
^;;
'»^
1 ^"^ >""*
^
'^
o
/
Hiotographic
Sdences
Corporation
33 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580
(716) 872-4503
^:v"Q
>
fe^
^^^
V^
6^
ON THE LANGUAGE OF LANCASIIIKE,
UNDEll THE llOMANS.
liKAD
BEFORE THE 1II8T(JKICAL SOCIETY OF
LANCASIIIKE AND CHESHIRE.
HTli JAXUAUY, 1857.
In the present paper, advantage is taken of tlie local clia-
racter of the Historic Society of Lancashire and Cliosliire.
to make the name of the county serve as a special text for
a general subj(!ct. What applies to Lancashire applies to
any county in Roman England.
The docti'ine is as follows — that in Lancashire particularly,
and in England in general, the predominant language for
the first five centuries of our era was not Latin but British.
The writer is so far from laying this down as a novelty.
that he is by no means certain , that it may not be almost
a truism. He is by no means certain, that there is a single
one of those to whom he addresses himself, who may now
hold, or even have held, the opposite opinion. He i.s fully
aware that excellent autlioritics have maintained both sides
of the question. He is only doubtful as to the extent to
wdiich the one doctrine may preporiderate over the other.
H' the question were to be settled by an appeal to the
history of the more influential opinions concerning it, avc
should find that , in a reference to the earliest and the latest
of our recent investigators, Dr. Brichard would uiaintaiu
one side of the question, Mr. AVright another. The paper
of the latter, liaving been printed in the Transactions of the
Society, is only alluded to. The opinion of Dr. Brichard is I ooverors (
conveyed in the following extract — ''The use of languages
really cognate mu.st be allowed to furnish a proof, or at least
a strong presumption, of kindred race. Exceptions may in-
ox TIIR LAXGUAdK OV T-ANT \'<iril!i: , INDKU 'IIFI', Hd.MAXS. 181
(IpoiI, under vory peculiar circumstances, occur to tlie inference
toundoil on this ground. For oxaniplo, the French language
is likely to bo the porniancnt idioui of the n(^gro people of
St. Domingo, though the latter are principally of African
(lescont. Slaves imported from various districts in Africa,
Inning no common idiom, have adopted that of their masters.
])Ut conquest, or even captivity, under different circum-
>tiuices, Las scarcely ever exterminated the native idiom of
luiv people, unless after many ages of subjection; and even
tlicn, vestiges have perhaps always remained of its existence.
In Ih'itain, the native idiom was nowhere superseded by the
Koman, though the island was held in subjection u})Avards
lit' three centuries. In Spain and in Gaul, several centuries of
Latin domination, and fifteen under German and other modern
ilvnas^ties, have proved insufficient entirely to obliterate the
ancient dialects, which were spoken by the native people before
the Keman conquest. Even the (rypsios, who have wandered
in small companies over Europe for some ages, still preserve
their original languape in a form that can bo everywhere
recognised."*
Upon the whole, I think that the current opinion is in
favour of the language of Roman liritain having been Latin;
at any rate I am sure that, before I went very closely into
the subject, my own views were, at least, in that direction.
"What the present language of England would hav«^ been,
had the Norman conquest never taken place, the analogy of
Holland, Denmark, and many other countries enables us to
dennine. It would have been as it is at present. What it
would have been had the Sa.von conquest never taken place,
is a question wherein there is far more speculation. Of
France, of Italy, of Wallachia, and of tlie Spanish Penin-
sula, the analogies all point the same way. They indicate
that the original Celtic would have been superseded by the
Latin of the Conquerors, and consequently that our language,
in its later stages, would have been neither British nor
Gaelic, but Roman. Upon these analogies, however, we
may refine. Italy was from the l)eginning, Roman; tlus
Spanish Peninsula was invaded full early: no ocean divided
(jaul from Rome; and the war against the ancestors of the
Wallachians w-as a war of extermination." f
In these preliminary remarks we find a sufficient reason
forgoing specially into the question; not, hoAvever, as dis-
C(»vGrers of any new truth , nor as those who would correct
* Kastoni Oiii^in of the Celtic Languages, p. 8. f English Language,
Tii'st Kditiou, p. (58.
182
ON Tin; ; i\(ir.\(iK ok lancasiiiiu:, inoki; iiii': uomans.
some general error, but rather, in a judicial frame of mind,
and with the intention of asking-, first, how far the actual
evidence is (eitiier way) conclusive; next, which way (su))-
jjosing it to be inconclusive) the presumption lies; and thirdly.
what follows in the way of inference from each of the on-
posing views.
What are the statements of the classical writers, siihc/juciit
/(} Ike rcduclion of Britain , to the effect that the Romans, when
they conquered a Province, established their language? 1
know of none. I know of none, indeed, r//?/t'//o/- to the Bri-
tannic conquest. I insert, however, the limitation, Ijocaiisc
in case such exist, it is necessary to remember that tluv
would not be conclusive. The practice may have changed
in the interval.
Is there anything approaching such a statement? Tliero
is a passage in JSeneca to the effect ''that where the Roman
conquers there he settles."
But he conquered Britain. Therefore he established his
language. Add to this that wliere he established his own
language, there the native tongue became obliterated. There-
fore the British died off.
If so , the Angles — when they effected their conquest —
must have displaced, by their own English, a Latin rather
than a British, form of speech.
But is this the legitimate inference from the passage in
question? No. On tiie contrary, it is a conclusion hy no
means warranted by the premises. Nevertheless, as far a.s
external testimony is concerned, there are no better premi-
ses to be found.
But there is another element in our reasoning. In four
large districts at least, — in the Spanish Peninsula, in France,
in the Orisons, and in the Danubian Principalities —^ the pre-
sent language is a derivative from the Latin, which Avas,
undoubtedly and. undeniably, introduced by the Roman con-
quest. From such clear and known instances, the reasoni'i^'
to the obscure and unknown is a legitimate analogy , and the
inference is that Britain was what Oallia, Rha'tia, Hispania,
and Dacia were.
In this we have a second reason for the fact that there
are mtiny who, witli Arnold, hold, that except in the parti-
cular case of (.Treece, the Roman Avorld, in general, at the
dale of the break-up of the Empire, was Latin in respeet
to its language. At any rate, Britannia is reasonably sup-
posed to be in the same category with Dacia — a country
conquered later.
ON nil'. i,AN(irA(;K or i.ancasiiiui;, inih-.k tiif. ^v<>^r\^•s.
183
loman con-
rcnsoniiit;'
On tlio other hand, however, there are the follo\Ying' eon-
siilcrations.
I. Jn the fir.st place the Allele coM(|Uost was gradual; so
^laihial as to give lis an insight into the character of the
piijiuiation that was conquered. Was this (in language) La-
tin? There is no evidence of its having been so. But is
ilicro evidence of its iiaving been British? A little. How
iiiucli, will be considered in the sequel.
II. In the next place the Angle conquest was (and is) in-
L'Oiniil'te; inasmuch as certain remains of tin; earlier and non-
.\i)i;lo i)(ij)ulation still exist. Are these Latin V Decidedly
not; hut on the contrary Jiritish, — witness the present liri-
tons of Wales, and the all but liritish Cornish-men, who are
now British in blood, and until the last century were, more
or Ici^s , ]>ritish in language as well.
But this is not all. There was a third district which was
slow to become Angle, viz.: part of the mountain district of
Cumberland and ^\\.'stmorelanfl. A\'hat was this before it
was Ant;leV Kot Roman but ]]ritisli.
Again — there was a time when JMonmouthshire, with (no
doubt) some portion of the adjoining counties, was in th<;
same category in respect to its non-Aw^le character with
Wales. What was it in respect to language? IS'ot Koman
but I^ritish.
Again — mutatis mutanrl/'s. Devonshire waste Cornwall as
Monmouth to AVales. Was it Koman? No — but, on the
lontrarv, British.
Now say, for the sake of argnnient, that Cornwall, Wales,
and Cumberland were never Roman at all. and consequently,
that they prove nothing in the question as to the introduc-
tion of the Latin language. But can we say, for even the
sake of ar<iument, that Devon and ]\Ionmouth were never
Koman? Was not, on the contrary, Devon at least, excee-
dingly Koman, as is shcAvn by the importance of Isca Dan-
inoniorum , or Exeter,
Or, say that the present j)opulation of Wales is no repre-
sentative of the ancient occupants of that part of Britain, but,
on the contrary, descended from certain immigrants from
the more eastern and less mountainous ])arts of England.
I do not hold this doctrine. Admitting it, however, for the
sake of argument — whence eamo the present Welsh, if it
fame not from a part of England wlierc British, rather than
Latin, Avas spoken? There must have been l^ritish some-
where; and probably liritish to* the exclusion of Latin.
The story of St. Guthlac of Croyland is well-known. It
runs to the effect that being disturbed, one night, by a lior-
181
ON Till-; liANOL'AOK OV I.ANCASIlllli: , INDKi; llli; ROMANS.
OX Tin:
IM
rid howling, lie was seriously alarinod, thinking that tlio
liowlers migiit bo Briluns. Lpon k)oklng-(»ut, however, lie
discovered that they wore only devils — whereby he was
comforted, the Briton being the worse of the two. Now the
hiter wo make this apocryphal story, the more it tells in
favor of there having been Britons in Lincolnshire, Junp
after the Anglo conquest. Yet Lincolnshire (except so far
as it was Dane,) must have been one of the most Anjilc
portions of P^ngland. In France, Spain, I'ortugal, the Tiri-
sons, Wallachia or I^loldavia, such devils as those of >>t.
Guthlac would have been Komans.
As the argument, then, stands at present, we have traces
of the British as opposed to the Anglo, but no traces of t!ie
Latin in similar opposition.
Let us now look at the analof/ies, viz: Spain, (inchulitifj
Portugal,) France, SAvitzerland and the Danubian Principa-
lities; in all of which we have had an aboriginal population
and a Roman conquest, in all of which, too, we have had
a third conquest subsequent to that by Rome — even as in
Britain we have had the triple series of (A) native Britain?,
(b) Roman conquerors, (c) Angles.
What do we iindV In all but Switzerland, remains of the
original tongue; in all, without exception, remains of the
language of the population that conquered the Romans; in
all, without exception, something Roman.
In Britain Ave find nothing Roman; but, on the contrary,
only the original tongue and the language of the third po-
pulation.
I submit that this is strong ptimd facie evidence in favour
of the Latin having never been the general language of Bri-
tain. If it were so, the area of the Angle conquest must have
exactly coincided with the area of the Latin language. Is
this probable? I admit that it is anything but highly im-
probable. The same practicable character of the English
parts of Britain (as opposed to the Welsh, Cornish, and Cum-
brian) which made the conquest of a certain portion of the
Island easy to the Romans as against the Britons , may have
made it easy for the Angles as against the Romans ; and vice
versa, the impracticable character of Wales, Cornwall, and
Cumberland, that protected the Britons against their first
invaders, may have done the same for them against the se-
cond. P so, the two areas of foreign conquest would coin-
cide. I by no means undervalue this argument.
It is almost unnecessary to say that the exact conditions
under which Britain was reduced were not those of any other
Roman Province.
In rospe
viii^- hegui
liiiving boj.
juftic'iontly
attention o
ilevelopod.
time to ace
tluencos.
(lanl, w
Narbonensi
Koinii' of
^laujihterci
the {zround
lanipaigns
The "con
nn»^niTts ot
Lan.LMiage
iiiilar v.ncY{
who opposi
and call it
That Trj
and thorou
Kow, th
|iri)vincos a
no moans
tliat the an
Spain, Swi
^Yas the exi
and the j\I
It was suf
gory with
no attempt
Africa v
]ire-cminer
that the v
sumptions
native tril
Atlantic is
fact, that
classical I
country in
of Latin :
of trace ,
the whole
In Panr
guage of
ox Tin; i.AxorAfiK or i^ANfAsrriUK, indki; thi: iio^rAx.s,
185
In respect tu Snain, the lionian occupancy was early, ba-
vin};' be^uii loiifif before tliat of Nortbcrn and (Jontral (Jaul,
liiivinu begun (lurinj^ tbo Punic -wars, and bavinf;- become
Mifticiently settb'd by tbe time of Augustus to command tlie
attention of Strabo on tbo strongtli of tbo civiHzation it bad
developed. In Spain, tben, tliere was priority in point of
linio to account for any extraordinary amount of Konian in-
fluences.
(laul, witb tbe exception of tlie earlier acquisitions in tbo
Narl)onensis, was tbe conquest of one of tbe most tborougb-
p)ing of conquerors. Tbe number of enemies tbat (^{csar,
slaughtered bas been put at 1,000/100. Without knowing
the grounds of this calculation, we may safely say that bis
campaigns wore eminently of a destructive character.
The conquerors of tbe Breuni , (Jenauni, and similar oc-
o',',p.".'.'.+s of those parts of .Switzerland where tbe Itumonsch
Language (of Latin origin) is now spoken, were men of si-
milar energy. Neither l)rusus nor Tiberius spared an enemy
who opposed. ])0tb were men who would *^make a solitude
aiul call it peace."
That Trajan's conquest of Dacia was of a similar radical
and thorough-going character is nearly c(U'tain.
Kow, tbe evidence that the conquests of the remaining
provinces were like those of the provinces just noted, is by
no moans strong. At the same time, it must be admitted
that the analogy established by four sucb countries as Gaul,
Spain, Switzerland, and IMoldo-AVallacbia is cogent. What
was the extent to wbicb Africa, I'annonia, Illyricum, Thrace,
and the Mcesias Avere Romanized? Of Asia? 1 say nothing.
It was sufficiently Greek to have been in tbe same cate-
gory with Greece itself, and in Greece itself we know that
no attempts were made upon tbe language.
Africa Avas Latin in its literature; and, at a later period,
pre-eminently Latin in its Christianity. But tbe evidence
that the vernacular language was Latin is nil , and the pre-
sumptions un'avourable. The Berber tongue of the present
native tribes of tbe whole district between Egypt and the
Atlantic is certainly of higb antiquity; it being a well-known
tact, that in it. several of the names in tbe geography of
classical Africa are significant. Now this is spread over tbe
country indifferently. Neither does it show any notable signs
ot Latin intermixture. Neither is there trace, or shadow
of trace, of any form of speecb of Latin origin throughout
the whole of Tunis, Tripoli, Algiers or INForocco.
In Pannonia and Illyricum, tbe same absence of any lan-
guage of Latin origin is manifest. Pannonia and Illyricum
186 ON nii; r-ANfUAfir of i<an(,'asiiiiu;, ixdeii tiii; Ko>rANs.
Ji -
have had irioro tlian an avfiraf|;o amount of subsoqiiont eon-
quorors and octupants — (iotlis, Huns, Avars, iJul^aiiaiis,
Sla
vonians ,
ever
m
, liow-
oi' tlio Servian
, Ilun<iarians, (Jeruians. That tho Slovak
the nortli, and the Dalmatian
in tho soutli , ropiesont the native hvn^ua^es is g'onerally ad-
mitted — now, it' not h)ng a/j,o. These, then, liave survived.
Why not, then, the Latin it' it eviM' took root?
In resjject to Thraee, it is just possible tliat it may liavo
been, in its towns at h^ast, sufficiently (Jreek to have hein
in the same category with Oreiice proper. 1 say that this is
just possible. In reality, however, it was more likely to lie
constrasted with (li'oece than to be ciasscid with it. One tiiiiiu-,
however, is certain, viz.: — that the country district round
Constantinople Avas never a district in which Latin Avas
vernacular. ][ad it been so, the fact could hardly have hdii
unnoticed, or without influence on the unequivocalK- (ircek
Metro])olis of the Eastern Empire.
If tho doctrine that Thrace may have been sufficientlv
Greek to forbid tho indroduction of the Latin Ije douhtlnl,
tho notion that the JNloisias were so is untenable. Yet tho
Latin never seems to have been vernacular in either of tlioni.
Had it been so, it would probably have held its ground,
especially in the impracticable mountains and forests of Up-
per jMccsia or the modern Servia. Yet where is there a trace
of it? Of all the Roman Provinces, Servia or Upper ]\Ia}si:i
seems to be the one Avherein the evidence of a displacoiuoiit
of the native, and a develoj)ment of a Latin form of sppoch,
is at its ?ninhinim, and the instance of Servia is the one upon
which the analogous case of Britain best rests.
The insufficiency of the current reasons in favour of tlio
modern Servian being of recent introduction have been con-
sidered by me elsewhere.
Now comes the notice of a text Avhich always conmiaiKl.'«
the attention of the ethnological philologue , when he is en-
gaged upon tho Anglo ])eriod of our island's history. It re-
fers to the middle of tho eighth century, the era of the Ve-
nerable Jieda, from whose writings it is taken. I give it/)/
cxfenso. It runs "Hrec in prcsenti, juxta nunierum libronuu
quibus lex divina scripta est, quinque gentium Unguis, uiinni
eandemquo sunnna.' veritatis et vera; sublimitatis scientiani
scrutatur et confitetur; Anglorum, videlicet, Brittonum, Soot-
torum , Pictornm et Latinorum qua; meditationo scripturaruni.
ca^teris omnibus est facta communis.*
That the Latin here is the Latin of Ecclesiastical, rather
'* Tlist, Keel. I. \. c. 1.
i; uo.\rA\s.
(IN IHK I,ANfirA(ii; or LANCASirmr , IXDKU TIIR UOAfAXS.
IS7
1111 libroriiiii
than Imperial, Koiuc, the Latin of tlio Scriptures rather than
(•|;K<sical writers, the Latin of a written hook rather than a
Linj;aa Kustiea, is implied by the context.
Should this, however, he (loubted, the followinf,^ passage,
which makes the lan<^ua<;'es of liritain only four , is conclu-
sive — '*()innes nationes et provincias IJrittannia', quai in
(jWiliinr linguas, id est Brittonnm, IMctoruni, Scottoruin ct
Ani;l<"ruin divisfc sunt, in ditione accepit."*
It is the first of these two statements of Jieda's that the
fiillowing extract from ^Vintoun is founded on.
Cn 1)11/ /:/'/, r. xiii, ^U).
Of Lanji'MjiMs in Hrctayne sere
1 fynd that sum tyiii fyf thare were;
Of Brettys i'yrst, and liij^lis syne,
I'eyclit, and Scot, and syne Latyiio.
l^ot, of tlie Pcyc'litis, is ferly,
That ar wndon s;'i halyly,
'i'hat nowthir remanaiule ar Lanj^'uage,
NiXi' succession of Lynage:
Sw;l of tharc auti([wyte
Is lyk hot fabyl for to he.
But the Latin of the scriptures may have been the Latin
of common life as Avell. Scarcely. The change from the
written to the spoken language Avas too great for this. What
the latter would liave been we can infer. It would have
been something like the following ''Pro Deo amur et pro
Xristian poblo et nostro coinmun salvamcnt d'ist di en avant,
in quant Deus savir et poder mo dunat, si salvarai eo cist
meon fradre Karlo, et in ajudha et in cadhuna cosa, si com
0111 per droit son fradre salvar dist, in o quid il me altresi
fazot: et ab Ludher nul plaid nunquam prindrai uni, meon
vol, cist meon fradre Karle in damn' ^it."
This is the oath of the P^mporors K i and Ludwig, sons
of Charlemagne, as it was sworn by the former in A. D.
S42. It is later in date than the time of Beda by about a
century, being in the Lingua Rustlca of France. Neverthe-
less, it is a fair specimen of the difference between the spo-
ken languages of the countries that had once been Roman
Provinces and the written Latin. Indeed, it was not Latin,
but Romance; and, in like manner, any vernacular form of
speech, used in Britain but of Roman origin, Avould have
been Romance also.
* Eccl. Hist, ill, 0.
18S ON I'lli: I,\\(U'A<.1R OF T-ANrASmiir,, INDKU TMK ItO.MANS.
TIio conclusion wliicli tlio present notl(!0 sufjff^osts is --
Tlint the testimony of authors tells neither way,
Tli;it the presumptions in favour of the Latin which aro
raised by the cases of (Jaul, Spain, Khti'tia, and Dacia, are
anvthin<^' but conclusive.
^riiat the inferences from the earliest as well as the latost
data as to the condition o^' /'Jif///'s/i l»ritain, the inferences
from tiie An^le c^oncpiest, and the inferences from the prc;-
sent languap;c; of Wales, are dc^eidedly aji^ainst the Latin.
1 may, perhaps, be allowed to conclude by a reference to
a pajfcr already alluded to, as havinfr been laid before tlio
j)resent Society, by Mr. Wright. This is to the effect, tiiat
the Latin reigned yiaramount not only in England, but in
Wales also, under the Roman dominion; the present AVclsh
being of recent introduction from Armorica.
That the population was heterogeneous is certain, the Ro-
man Legionaries being, to a great extent, other than Hu-
man. It is also certain that there Avas, Avithin the i.slaml,
at an early period, no inconsiderable amount of Teutonic;
blood. It is certain, too, that the name Briton had different
applications at different times.
If so, the difference between Mr. Wrigbt and myself, in
respect to the homogeneousness or heterogeneousness of the
Britannic population, is only a matter of degree.
In respect to the particular fact, as to Avbether the British
or Latin language was the vernacular form of speech, wo
differ more decidedly. That the British was unAvritten and
uncultivated is true ; so that the exclusive use of the Latin
for inscriptions is only what we expect. The negative fact
that no British name has been found inscribed, I by no
means undervalue.
The prepojidercmce , however, of a Non-British population,
and the use of the Latin as the vernacular language, aie
doctrines, Avhich the few undoubted facts of our early history
impugn rather than verify.
The main difficulty Avhich Mr. Wright's hypothesis meets
— and it does meet it — lies in the fact of the similarity
betAveen the Welsh and Armorican being too great for any-
thing but a comparatively recent separation to account for.
Nevertheless, even this portion of Avhat may be called the
Armorican hypothesis, is by no means incompatible with
the doctrine of the present paper. The Celtic of Armorica
may as easily have displaced the older Celtic of Britain (from
Avhich , by hypothesis , it notably differed) as it is supposed
to have displaced the Latin.
I do not imagine this to have been the case; indeed I can
n\ iiii: i,AN(ir.\(ji; ov lancasiiiuk, ixni'.i: 'iiii; ikimans.
189
SCO roasons '"gainst it, arisiri}^' out ot" tlio ii})plic'atiou of Mr.
Wrij,'lit's own linn ot" criticism.
1 rliink it by no means unlikely that tlio arf:,iun('nt wliicli
i^ivcs us tliG annihilation of the liritish of tlu^ liritish Isles,
limy also y;i\e us that of the (Jallic of (Jaul. Why should Ar-
iiiorica have been more Celtic than Wales V V(^t, if it were
not so. whence came the Armorican of WahisV [ thiow out
these objections for the sakf; of stimulating;' criticism, rather
than with the view of settling a by no means easy question.
KEL.1^N()NESIA.
'J'lic •liitcK of tlu' four pnjjors on tliis ]»art (»f tlic world sliow
that the iirst jiriH'ccdcd tlic earliest of the other tliree hy as imicli
ns four years; a fact that iDUst he home in mind Avheii the pliilu-
lof^ieal etlmoj;'ra|ihy of New (Juiiiea and tlie islands to the soutli
and east of it is under notice. Tln^ voeahularies of each of tlir
authors illustrated in ])apers '2 and ,\ more than douhled our ])i('-
vious (
hit!
.Fukes' illustratin};' the lan"'ua";e of islands hetwcci
New (luinea and iVustraiia, Macjiillivray's those of th(> JiOui.siade
Archi])ela_n'o.
That there was a hypotliesis at the hottom of No. I is evident.
Neither is there; much (louht as to the fact of that hypothesis lioiii;;
■wronj
I ludd in IH4,'i that, all over Oceania, there was an (dder ])o|)n-
hition of ruder manners, and darker colour than the Malays, tlu'
proper Polynesians, and the populations allied to them; tiiat, in
jiroportion as these latter overspread the several islands of tlicir
])resent occupancy tlie ahorigines were driven toAvards the interior;
that in Australia, Tasmania, New Guinea &c. the ori;;inal hlaik
race remained unmolested.
This view led to two presumptions; — hotli inaccurate;
1. That the rnder trihes were, as sitch, likely to he Negrito;
2. Tliat the Negrito tongues would he allied to each otlier.
The vicAv, held hy uic uoav, will he given in a future notice.
ON THE NE(iKlT() LAXCillAXilX
ki:ai)
UKFORK TlIK I'll 1 LOLOG U'AL SOCIETY
I'KHIUAUY 10, I84;<.
By tlio term No<;rit(> is iiionnt tliuso tribes of t'lc Asiatic
and Aii5<tralian islands^ who, in one or more of their phy-
siiiil charaetL-rs , (h part from the type of the; nations in their
ucigiibunrhooil and approach that of the Alrican. Tho word
is more eoniprehensive than Arafura, Andaman, or Papuan,
;iml less eonipreliensive than Ne<>ro.
Of the Negrito localities the most western are —
The Andamun Islanda. — A \'ocabulary, collected by ]^ieu-
tonaut R. II. Colebrooke, a[)pears in tin; Asiatic liesearehes,
vol. iv. p. 410. The native name is j\[incoj)ie. An histo-
rical notice of them appeals as early as the ninth century,
in the Travels of tlm Two Arabians, translated l)y Jienaudot.
The Mcobar and Canticohur Is/aiids. — In the largest of
those it is stated that, in the interior, blacks are to be found.
The current assertion concerning- the language of the rest
nf these islands is, that the Carnicobar is Peguan , and the
Nicobar INIalay. — Asiatic l{((H(!archos, iii. dO'.i.
i.lalacca. - - The Samangs of the interior are Negrito. For
the single Vocabulary of their language, see (Jrawfurd's
Indian Archi})elago, or Klaproth's Kou\ eau .Journal Asia-
tique , xii. 239 , where Crawfurd's Vocabularly \f> reprinted
ivithout acknowledgement. The Orang Jienua are not Ne-
grito; neither are the Jokong Negrito. For thirty- words in
tho latter language, see Thomas Raffles in Asiatic Researches,
!^ii. 109. In this list twelve words are shown by Kafi
i)G Malays, and Humboldt states the same of two more.
3tlior sixteen may or may not be of Negrito origin.
ir may no
ranff iJdai.
Humboldt, L'ber die A'atci-
othor sixteen may
Samangs are the Orang
^miche.
Sumalra. — The Battas of Sumatra are INlalay, not Negrito
iMarsden's Sumatra, p. 203, and Rienzi's Oceanic, vol. i.).
192
ON Till-: NKdlUTO r,AN(iUAfiK.S.
The Suinatran of Parkinson's Journal (p. 198) is the Arabic
of Aeliecn. Tlie true Negritos of Sumatra seem to bo,
1 . The Orang Coobur). — These are stated to be pretty nu-
merous between Paknibang and Janibee. — Marsden's Suma-
tra, p. 35.
2. Tlie (hang (Joogoo, — who are described by the Smna-
trans of Laboon as b(nng' 'nore Orang Utang than man. —
IMarsdoi's Sumatra, p. '6o. Speeiuieus of the Orang Goo"Ou
((Jougon) Ilienzi states to have seen. Jle says that I'aov
come from Palembang and Menangeaboo, and he calls them
Pithecomorphi.
For an historical notice as ea'dy as 960 A. d., probably
referring to the Blacks of Sunu^.a, see Klaproih in Noii-
veau Journal Asiatique, xii. 239.
Borneo. — The Bi.ajuk of Born' : is not Negrito but Malay
(Crawfurd's Indian Archipelago) ; neither are the Dyaeks
Negrito. The statement of JVIa^sden and Leyden is, that the
Dyacks are whiter than the rest of the natives of Borneo:
and the remark of more than one voyager is , that the Dy-
acks of Borneo look like ocuth Sea Islanders in the midst of
a darker population. Are the Marut, Idongs, Tidonji,s, or
Tirungs of the north of Borneo .Segrito? In Kienzi's Oceanic
there is a Borneo Vocabulary which is headed Dyack, Marut
and Idaan, the three terms being treated as synonyms. Of
this Vocabulary all the words are J\[alay. That there are
Negritos in Borneo is ir 'st probable, but of their language we
possess but one word, ap n, father* (and that more than doubt-
ful) ; wdiilst of their nan •> we know nothing ; and in respect
to their locality, wo ha\ only the statement of Kollf, tliat
in the north of Borneo L icks are to be found on the Kee-
neebaloo mountain; a sta' ment, however, slightly modifieil
by the fact of his calling hem Idaans or Maruts (sec Earls
translation of the Voyage 3i the Doorga, p. 417). Oonipap'
the name Idaan in Borne with the name Orang Udai, ap-
plied to certain rude tril s in Malacca.
The Sooloo hlands. — In^re are positive statements that
the Sooloos cont.'.in Negritos. They also contain ]\lalays:
as may be jicen in a Sooloo vocabulary in Rienzi's Oeeauic,
vol. i.
The Manillas. — The Isola de Negros testiiies its population
by its name. Hervas calls it the Papua of the Philippines.
In Panay are the blackest of the Philippine Negritos. Kienzi
would term them Melanopygmaji. In liohol, Leyte and ^a-
mar, there are Negritos (Lafond Lurcy, ii. 182.); also in
* Mithr. i. 598.
ox TIIR NEORITO LAXOUAflRS.
193
Cayagan (L.ifoid Lnrcy, ii. 1&2.); also in Capul or Abac
illorvas). For 'he two main islands tliere arc, — 1st. In
Mindanao, two Mild tri'ofs inhabiting the interior, the Ji.'in-
t.-cliilen and the llillunas. Tiio proof of these two tribes
beinp: Negrito is the strongest for the llillunas. They arc;
till! Kegros del Monte of the Spaniards (liervas, (Jatalogo
ilcllo Lingue: Ad(lung, i. 00 1 J. Near JMariveles are the
|i:orots or -^'Etas (Agtas of Ilervas); and of these we have
late and positive evidence, first to the fact of their being
Negrito, and next to the difference of their language from
the Tagal. — (Lafond Lurcy.) Secondly, in Luyon, the Zam-
balen of Adelung are Negrito. These are the Jilacks of
P.anipango. The Blacks inhabiting the other parts of the
island are called Ygelots; and Mount St. Matliew, near Ma-
nilla, is one of their well-known localities, and the Illoco
mountains another. Here they were visited by Lafond Lurcy.
They Avere all alike, and all under fV»ur feet six (French
measure). Italonen, Calingas, and Maitim are the names
under which the Philippine Blacks have been generally des-
tribed. Agfa and Maitim are said to be indigenous appel-
lations. — Hervas.
Formosa. — The Formosan language is I\Ialay. In the in-
terior, however, are, according to the Chinese accounts, —
1, the Thoufan; 2, the Kia-lao; .*i . the Chan tchac) chan;
■1, the Lang Khiao, — aboriginal tribes with Kegrito charac-
ters, each speaking a peculiar dialect. — Klaproth, Recher-
ehes Asiatiques.
The Loochoo Islands. — The current Loochoo language is
Japanese (Klaproth, Rech. Asiat.). But besides this, Ado-
lung mentions from Pere Gaubil and Cosier, that three other
languages are spoken in the interior, neither Japanese nor
Chinese; and we are now, perhaps, justified in considering
that, in these quarters, the fact of a language being abori-
ginal, is prima facie evidence of its being Negrito.
Java. — Here the evidence of an aboriginal population at
all is equivocal, and that of Negrito aborigines wholly ab-
sent. For the Kalangs, see Raffies's History of Java. The
(lark complexions on the island 13ali show the darkness, not
(if the Negrito, but of the Hindoo; such at least is the view
•if KafHes opposed to that of Adelung (Mith. i.). There is
110 notice of Blacks in Fnde (otherwise Floris), in Sumbawa,
or in Sandalwood Island.
Savoo. — If the Savoo of modern geographers be the Pulo
^abatu of Dampier, then there Avere, in Dam])ier's time,
lilacks in Savoo. The Savoo of Parkinson's Journal is Malay.
Timur. — In this island Negritos Avere indicated by Peron.
13
194
ON THK NHfiUITO I,ANfii:AfiF,S.
Frcycinot describes thoni. Lafond Lurey lisd a Timor l)la(k
as a slave. Of tlieir language he gives I'our words: — mn-
nouc, bird; viwi, woman; fima, five; a?npm, ten. All tlicvs(
are iMalay.'
Omhuii. — In Freyeinet's Voyage the natives of Onibay aro
described as having olive-blaek complexions, flattened noses,
thick lips , and long black hair. In Arago * we find a .sIkiH
vocabulary, of which a few words are Malay, whilst tlir
rest are unlike anything either in the neighbouring language
of Timor (at least as known by JIaffles's specimens), or in
any other language known to the author. Upon what gromuls,
unless it be their cannibalism , the ()nd)aians have bectn clas-
sed with the New Zealanders, is unknown. The evidence
is certainly not taken from their language.
Between Timor and iS'ew Guinea we collect, either from
positive statements or by inference, that, pure or mixed.
there arc Negritos in at least the following islands: — I,
Wetta; 2, KissaV; 3, ServvattyV; 4, LetteV; 5, MoaV; (!,
IlomaV; 1, Damma; 8, LakorV; 1), Luan; 10, Serinatta:
(1, Baba; 12, Daai ; 18, Sei-ua; 14, the Eastern Arrous:
IT), Borassi. (Kollfs Voy. ; Earfs Translation.)
The language of the important island of Tinior-Laut is
Malay. From a conversation with the sailor Forbes, wlm
was on the island for sixteen years, the author learned that
there are in Timor-Laut plenty of black slaves, but no black
aborigines.
Celebes. — In the centre of Celebes and in the north there
are Negritos: the inhabitants call them Turajas, and also
Arafuras: they speak a simple dialect and pass for abori},'i-
lies. (Raffles, History of Java.) Of this language wo liavi'
no specimen. Gaimards ]\[enada is the Menadu of Sir Stam-
ford Kafttes, and Iiaffles"s Menadu is IMalay. (Voyage de
I'Astrolabe, Philologie, ii. 191.) The remark made by the col-
lector of this Menadu Vocabulary was, that those who spike
it were ivhiler than the true Bugis, ami that they looked like
South-Sea Islanders, a fact of value in a theory of the Dyacks,
but of no value in the enumeration of the Negritos.
J>o\irou, Gdmnwn, Salawadf/ , Jjo//c/i//f.— Vnv oa<:\i of diese
islands wo have positive statements as to the (existence ot
Negritos.
Gilolo. — In Lesson's Natural History the inhabitans of *'i-
l(do are classed with those of CJammen, J5attenta, t^c. as
Negritos. The same is the case in the jMithridates, whore
the inference is, that in all the ^Moluccas, with the exccp-
* \ "ule Note A.
ON THE XKdIUTO LANdUAfiRS.
105
iriKtr-Laut is
i'or aboriiri-
of kSir Stain-
liiiiii of Aniboyna and Tornati , Ke<^ritos are to be found in
tlio interior. I'or Guebe see the s(!qiiel.
The Teclees. — Tlic Teetce Islands of IMearcs, the .Tauts
lorAeauw of the jVlithridatcs, sixteen in number, are Negrito.
(Mean-'s, Voyage, Adclung.)
^)hij. — According to Adelung this island is Negrito.
The object of Avhat has gone before is less to state wliere
Ni'oi'itos are to be found than where they are to be looked
Ifiir. Ilenee many of the above notices indicate the probable
rather than the actual presence of them; and those state-
iiitnts concerning the j\Iolucca localities that nre taken from
?\jtematic books (and as such at secondhand) are all subject
t'l one exception, viz. the fact that the tribes described as
Ariifura, although in current language Negrito, are not ne-
cessarily so. An instance of this has been seen in the so-
lallod Arafura of j\Ienadu. The same applies to the so-called
Ariifiua of Coram , (Handbook der Land-en Volkenkunde van
NiHlerlandsch Indiii. P. P. Roorda van Eysinga. Amster-
dam 1841 ; indicated by Mr. Garnett,) which is Malay. In
tlie quarters about to be given in detail the evidence is less
ixceptionable.
Sew Guinea. — ITero there is little except Negritos; and
lieie we meet with tlie name Papua. Wliat is said of the
Papuas must be said with caution. Physical conformation
leiiig the evidence, there are in New Guinea two nations, if
not more than two: — I . Those of the North, with curly hair,
which are subdivided into the pure Papuas , and the Papuas
that are looked upon as a cross with the IMalay (Quoy, Gai-
inard and Lesson in the French Voyages). 2. Those of the
South, with lank hair, called by the French naturalists Ara-
turas. The author was unable to determine who were n.cant
liy the Alfakis of Quoy (I)urville's Voyage, iv. 740). To
the language of these Alfakis are possibly referable the ten
words of Lesson. These are the numerals, and, they areas
miulit b(! expected, ]\[alay. For the Soutii of New Guinea we
not so much as a single vocabulary or a single word.
Wiiiyioo. — The Waigioo and New Guinea liave been fre-
'(iicntly confounded; avo have therefore deferred speaking of
tho latter until we could also deal with the former. Without
';m^ into the conflicting evidence, we may state that there
I'll! two Vocabularies wherein arm is kai)iatii, and three
wherein arm is hramine. ( )f the first division we have —
h^t, the Vocabularies of the Uranie and Physici(!nne Cor-
vettes, under Freycinet, in 1817, 1818, 1819, as given in
Arao'o's (the drauglitsinan's) Narrative, p. 275, English trans-
liitifin; and 2ndly, the Undetermined Vocabulary of Den-
l.'i*
190
ON riii; NKdiiiTf) K.\N<ir,\<ii;s.
trecasteaux. Dentrecac-toaux, wliilst at Jioni in Waic-idn
saw soino strangers who si)okc a language very (litl'ciTu
from the inhabitants oi' that island; he considered that tlm
came from Mow (luiuea. >iow this hiiiguage is the Waii;
IIKM
of Arago
whilst the Waigioo of Dentreeasteaux is the IV
piia ot Arago. Among the Vocabularies of the second clibl
wo have (iaimards Kawak Vocabulary, stated ospeciallvf
(Voyage de I'Astrolabe, IMiilologie, vol. ii. p. [.').'{.) to havohiiiil
colhicted at Kawak in Waigioo in IS) 8: here (inn is hramini:]
Now a vocabulary (that will soon be mentioned) of the Xcwl
Guinea Papuan of Port Dorey was collected during the oxf
pcdition of the Astrolabe by the same naturalist, .Al. (iail
mard. With this vocabulary Gaimard's Kawak coinoido,
rather than with Arago's Waigioo and Dentrecasteauxs Uii
determined Vocabulary. This nuikes the third vocal)iilarv|
for these islands. The fourtli is Gaimard's Poi't Dorey Vu
cabulary (Voyage do I'Astrolabe, Philologie, ii. 14().). TIkI
fifth, Dentrecasteauxs (or La Hillardiere) Waigioo Vocakl
lary. This represents the same language as those last-inoii-
tioned, inasnuich as in it (irm is hramine not Lapiani. Tin-
sixth vocabulary is the Utanata, from Dutch authorities (viilc
►Soc). This akin to the Lobo Vocabulary. -I
'Y
rans.
(ireogr.
Ibid. The next is Forest's Vocabulary. See Forest's Voyage
to Now Guinea. Such are the data for New Guinea an.l
Waigioo. Dalrymple's Vocabulary will be noticed in tliej
sequel.
(Jik'Im'. — The Guebe Vocabulary of the Astrolabe (Pliila-
logic, ii. 157) is the Guebe of Freycinet's Voyage in ISh,
when it was collected by Gaimard. The Guebe of Araffol
(under Freycinet) also approaches the Guebe of CJaiinanl.
According to D. Durville the Guebe is Papuan. The autJH'r
however considers it ]\Ialay, though there was some rcscm-l
blance to tlie Papuan, inasnuich as many jSIalay terms were
common to both these dialects.
From New Guinea westward and southward the No<]fritos|
no longer isolated.
are
rhe following are Negrito Islands,
or Negrito Archipelagos: —
1. New Britain; 2. New Hanover; Ii. New Ireland; 4. .So-
lomon's Islands; 5. Queen Charlotte's A ;'chipelago; G. boiii-
siade Archipelago; 7. Isles of Bougainville; 8. Bouka; 'J.
New Georgia; 10. Admirality Isles, — York, Sandwich. Port-
land ; 11. Santa Cruz Archipelago ; 1 2. Arsacidos ; 1 3. Espi-
ritu Santo, or New Hebrides, — Mallieollo, Erromango, TaniKi.
Erronan, Annatom; 14. New Caledonia; 15. Warouka, Blidi-
* >Sec Note B.
<»N TIIK NI'JilM'IO l,AN(iU.\(iK.S.
197
land Banks's Island. — Astrolabe. Tlio Ticopian is not Nc-
jito but Polynesian. — Voyage do I'Astrolabe.
[Fiji hlonih. — In tlie Fiji Islands the physical character
the natives is half Negrito and half Polynesian. Here
Ji> tlie Mcgrito limit to the east; that is, of Negrito tribes
|a> existing at the present moment.
The languages of the list just given are known to us
iirnugli the following Vocabularies.
]'i'if In'lffnd iSic. — (iainiard's Carteret Harbour Vocabulary.
I- Voyage de 1 Astrolabe, I'hilologie, ii. 143.
Durvilles Port Praslin Vocabulary, incorporated with
iGaimard's Carteret Bay Vocabulary. — Ibid.
Dalrymple's so-called New Guinea Vocabulary. The word
hi-cttlk'ti was used because, unless there were natives of
|No\v Ireland on the coast of Ncav Guinea, Dalrymple's Vo-
cabulary is a representative of the Papuan. It coincides
Iwith those of Durville and Gaimard from New Ireland: it
livas collected by Schouten and Le j\Iaire. It is also the
iMw Guinea of I)e Brosses.
Vocabularies of four small islands are given by Dalrymple
laiul De Brosses, via. of jMoses Island, JVIoa, Iloorn Island,
lanil Cores Island. These are the vocabularies of Reland
Diss, xi.), referred to by Adelung.
Miiidcolo. — In Queen Charlotte's Archipelago, or perhaps
laiiiung the Solomon Islands, lies an island in name resem-
ilin;,' one of the New Hebrides. Durville called it Vanikoro,
Ikt Captain Dillon assures me that the true name is Mani-
Icolo. C)f the langiiage spoken hero we have a vocabulary
Itollected by Gaimard in three dialects; the Vanikoro, the
iTanema, and the Taneanou. Voyage do I'Astrolabe, Philo-
)?ii^ ii. 1G4.
Mtillicollo. — Cook's Island is MallicoUo. A glossary occurs
lin Cook's Voyages.
Tdiuiti. — A single vocabulary in Cook's Voyages.
V(7)' Caledonia. — A short vocabulary in Cook. A longer
lone ill Dentrecasteaux and La Billardiere.
IH" the Fiji we have a few words by Cook, a long voca-
Ikilary by (Jaimard (Astrol. Phil. ii. 136), Port regulations,
land MS. Scripture translations, Avhich afford us full and
iHitticient samples of the language. To deal with this as
|N('!:rito the Polynesian element must be eliminated.
I In the way of Fthnography Madagascar is Asiatic; since
|its language , as lias been known since the time of Reland,
is Malay. For this island the evidence of physical charac-
ItcT gives two or more races, but the evidence of language
|"nlv one.
198
ON TlIK NrMMlITO K AN(li;A(!i:S.
AuslruUa. — In this island we have vocabularies for tlJ
foUowinfi^ localities: (1.) Murray Island; (2.) Caledon iJavj
(3. 4.) Endeavour liiver; (5.) the Burrah P>urrali tribe; ((],!
Limestone Creek; (7.) Port JMacquarie; (S.) Port Jackson;
(D.) Meriero Downs; (10.) Jervis Bay; (II.) Hunter's lljvfi
vide Threlkeld's (Jranunar; (12, 13, 14, 15.) Adelaide, J
one of these beinf^- Teichelmann's and Schiinnann's (Iram-
niar; (10.) (Julf St. Vincent; (17, 18, P.), 20.) Kino- (Icor-cs
Sound; (22.) Grey's Vocabulary; and a few others.
Van Jj/cmen's Land. — Here, as in Australia, everytiiinf;' js
Negrito. In the way of Vocabularies, we have for the
North, — (1.) Gaimard's Port Dalrymple Vocabulary, takon
down from the mouth of a Van iJiemen's Land woman at
King George's Sound, with an P^nglishman as an interprcti r
— Voy. Astr. Phil. ii. \). In the South we have (2.) Cooks
Vocabulary, collected in Adventure P>ay, S. K. of Van Dii-
men's Land, — nine words. (3.) Dentrecasteaux's, or La
Billardiere's Vocabulary. (4.) Allan Cunningham's Vocalm-
lary, collected in 18l'J at Entrance Island. (5.) Dr. Lhot^
ky's Vocabulary, derived from Mr. M'Geary, and represent-
ing the language of Hobart's Town. — Journ. Geo. 8oc. ix,
Besides these, there is a Vocabulary procured by ]\Ir. Ro-
bert Brown when in Australia. It nearly represents the saiin;
state of language as Dentrecasteaux's Vocabulary.
Besides those remarks, another class of facts should be
indicated. In the south of Japan, and in the Marianne Islo;,
there are statements that Blacks Itave been: — 'Pere Cantova
(in Dupcrrey and Freycinet), and Adelung (Mithr. i.). From
Rienzi also wo learn a statement of Liitke's, viz. that in
Pounipet, one of the Carolines, there are abundaine nf
Blacks at this moment. These may by indigenous. The hy-
pothetical presence of Negritos may account also for certain
peculiarities of the Polynesian of the Tonga Islands. Then;
arc traces of them in the Navigator's Archipelago. Croz't
(see Pritchard's Phys. Hist.) mentions Negritos in Now Zea-
land, and Cook speaks to a tradition of aboriginal Kegrito>
in Tahiti.
Such are the notices of the Oceanic Negritos in respect
to their distribution and the amount of evidence afforded hv
the specimens of their language. The current opinion is.
that over a certain area Blacks of a certain race or races
were aborigines. This o})inion there is no reason to distuih
or to refine upon; the general question is as to the unity
or the multiplicity of these races ; but the more specific oh-
ject of the present paper is to ascertain how far that qii'^s-
tion is decided by the comparison of their languages, llic
ox I'liK M:(;iai'o i,.\N(ii'A(;i;s.
199
)Uf^. The Iiv-
.;,t', wiiy is to ascend in tlio classification, and to bo^in with
(litiTiniiiin*,^ tlie uniforniity of spoocli over limited areas, and
,vi(liin natnral boundaries. The most convenient locality to
Iruin with is —
Sew (liiinca. — That four out of the seven New Guinea
Wnbuiaries (supposinj;- them to have been collected inde-
i('ii(lontly of each other) represent either dialects of one
iin;iiiiif2;e, or else lanf,niaf2;es closely allied, appears on the
til-fit comparison. These vocabularies are, — a) Oaimard's
l!;i\vak; b) Gaimard's Port Dorey; c) Arago's Papua; and
ii\ Dentrecasteaux's Waift'ioo. To these Forest's Vocabulary
itupposing always that his words have not been incorpora-
ted in the vocabularies that came after him) approaches
more closely than to the other two.
ENfU-isii. FoRKST. Dkntrecahtkaix, &c.
fish ecu iom''., Malfii/?
bird inoorsankoou mazankehcne.
}Han sononinan snone, Mnlaijf
tvoman binu \A6n6 , fllalai/ ?
fire for afor.
ivaler war owar, Malay 'f
sand yean ione.
house rome roinua, Malay?
hook sofydino sarfedinne.
sun rass riass.
i If tlic two remaining Nocabularies the Lobo comes nearer to
Forest tlian the Utanata does. Neither, however, coincide
with Forest, as Forest coincides with the first four: nor
yet do they coincide so closely with each other.
ENor.isn. Forkst. Loro.
arrow ckay larakai.
bird moorsankeen mannc.
hog ben ])0(n , Malay :■'
island meossy nusii.
sun rass orak.
Iree kaibus akajuakar.
tvoman binu inaAvnnia,
tvater Avar malar.
yes io oro.
Kncmsm. Forest. IItan.vta.
bow niyay anmre.
/ iya area.
slave omini manoki.
3Ialay ?
200
ON Tin; NKiiiiii'o L.v.N(ir.V(ii;«.
Knolish. Fokkht.
tree kaibns ....
walcr Avnr
yes io
Utanata.
kai , wood.
warani, Malay 't
aioa.
Again:
1 'tan ATA.
baKin ]tif;-ani
checks awanm
dcalh iiamata
drink (lo) nrnmka
erening jauw aro;1
eyes manui
feathers wicj^ii
(jreat napittcki
hands too inaro
hog 00
handsome nata
here aro
head oopaiiw
iron ])uniti
knife tai
lemons nnmda
mile rniniiti
long marawas
lay (lo) aikai
man marowanc
moulh irio
noon kamoti aroa
plate pigani
rain komak
river Avaiari iiapotoki
rope Avarauw
sago kinaiii
slave maiioki
seek inatigati
speak (lo) iwari
take atvay (to) namatoraui
Loiio.
I)iiip,au.
waiiwiriougo.
naniata , Malay ?
makiiiu, ami also eat.
nrwawa.
inatatongo, Malay f
wo oni , M(day 'f
uahittoki.
iiiiiiango iita, Malay?
booi, Malay?
naiigowic.
inairi.
iiimin.
wui'usosi.
toori,/or chopping.
imiuda.
notie.
niaraAvas.
kookoimanse.
marowaiio.
oriongo.
ool'toto, evening.
])ii'iug.
komak.
walar uabotik, water great,
war as.
kakana.
mooi.
namitik.
iwav.
motara.
Netv Ireland. — As far as wo have vocabularies for evi-
dence, tlie language of New Ireland is one.
ExoT.isH. Port Praslin. Cartkrkt Bay. Dalrymplk.
beard katisscndi kambissek incambosiser, A/.
arms limak pongliman, M.
bananas oiinn tacliouner, M.
O.N riii; NKMiiio i,A\<ii Anr.s.
201
Cautkkkt Hav,
KsdMHH. I'our I'llASLIN. I'AUTKKKT I5AV. I )AI,11 YMI'LK.
//('//// Italaii;^ hala.
jixli sis.s hlssou.
fire \n\\ ccf.
fnrehi-dd pousnou nouroii pnsson arong.
Iiiillor/is kamhali kal)alil<
hur/i ])taroii tarouk
fi/i' matal iiiatak M.
car pula tif^nai jtralciilick
foot ])('k(Muli l)alaiikoki kckcign.
[iiifirr lima oulhnak catcling liinaii.
Iidir cjiioii ioiik ^Z-
//•()/( sincr siiicr
neck kindituroufi kiiiidiu-duak
iKtsr iiiboiissou kamlioussoiik iiisson.
sitinilih'r kamlhuau kaiulima
tnot/i iiiiiissai iusik ysangli,iV.
ji'dlcr luolmim nialouin HI.
mniin calanj;'
kalaii.
For tli(3 affinities of tlio diiilcets of INIon , ]\[osf!S Island,
('(K'os Island, Iloorn Island, to tlioso of New Ireland, .s(!0
Drtlrymple's Island Voya^^es, ad fin. That the difForences in
Manicolo are those of dialect, may be seen from Gaimard's
Vocabulary.
AuMralia. — That the Australian lanouages are one, at
least in the way that the Indo-European lan^ijuages are one,
is likely from henee-forward to be admitted. Captain (Irey's
statement upon the subject is to be found in his work upon
Australia. His special proof of the unity of the Australian
lanjruage is amongst the unprinted papers of the Geographi-
cal Society. The o])inions of Threlkeld and Teichelmann
f,'o the same way. The author's own statements are as fol-
lows: —
(1.) For the whole round of the coast there is, generally
speaking, no vocabulary of sufficient length that, in some
word or other, does not coincide with the vocabulary of the
nearest point, the language of which is known to us. If it
fail to do this it agrees with some of the remoter dialects.
Flinder's Carpentarian, compared with the two vocabularies
of the Endeavour River, has seventeen words in common.
^)t these, three (perhaps) four coincide. Eye, meal, C. ; 7neul,
E. R. : hair, niarra, (J.; monje , E. R. : fingers, minrjcl, C;
mmjal hah, E. R.: breast, (/ummur, C; coyor, E. R.
Endeavour River. — Two vocabularies. — Compared with
202
ON Tin: \p:ukiT(> lanciaukis.
tlio voc'iibiil.'irics g(!n('rally of I'ort Jackson, and tlio parts south
and cast of Port Jackson: — l^^yt', mcul, K. Jl,; tnillK , L. ('.;
noso , cnuirfht , K. 11.; murrn, Ji. C: ears, mnlkuh, V.. \\.\
molio, V. ]\liic(|UMri»!: liuir, minye, K. J{.; ittiimltih, 15. ]',.;
breast, roi/or, vl. Iv. ; l,<m'iil , V. J.: tin^-ers, munijul huh ^ K.
L'. ; fnnninijii, J J. li.: elbow, ijcrrwe , K. II.; yonfjra , Mcncro
Downs: nails, /vV/.v, K. U.; karunfjuni W J.: bcanl, wo/A/r,
E. ]{.; WY/A>, Jervis's liay; wolliik , Tort JMaquario. Tlic
number of words sulrnitted to comparison was twonty-twn.
Menero Downs (IJiotsky), and Adelaide ((}. W. Earl).—
Thirteen words in common, whereof two coincide.
hand niovanj^an, M. D murra, Add.
loufjuc talang, taling.
Adelaide (G. W. Earl) and Gulf St. Vincent (Astrolab
(!l.
heard
ear ....
foot ....
hair....
hand
leg ....
nose....
teeth
nmtta, A molda, G. S. V.
iri, iouro ,
tinna, tonna,
yxika, ioiika,
niurrah, nialla ,
irako, iorko,
nulla, mudla,
tial, ta.
Gulf St. Vincent (Astrolabe) and King George's Sound
(Nind and Astrolabe); fifty words in common.
wood kalla, G. S. V kokol, K. G. S.
mouth ta , taa,
hair iouka, tchao,
ncrk mannouolt, wolt,
finger inalla,
water kawo,
tongue taloiu,
foot tenna,
sto7ic poure,
mal ,
kc'pe,
talen ,
tcl
len,
pore,
laugh
kanghin, kaoner.
(2.) The vocabularies of distant points coincide; out of
sixty words in common we have eight coincident.
English.
forehead .
man
Jkuvis'h I?ay. Gulf St. Vincent.
liolo iouUo.
mika meio.
(IS rili; NK(ilUT<> l-AN(ilA(iK.S.
203
ni , Mt'iicro
Knui.isii. Jkuvis's IIav. (iri.i" St. \'in( k.nt.
mil/c awrtuliMiii aiumonlialn.
tongue talcn taloin.
hand luaraiiialc uialla.
tiipplc
ainy;uaun amiiia.
blnrk inourak jxiuillolil.
tiails boi't'uou pcrc.
(:j.) Thn most isolated of the vocabularies, e. g. tlie Car-
iciitarian, if compared witii the rcMuaininj,^ vocabulurit^s, tu-
("11 as a whole, lias certain Avords to be found in different
and distant parts of the island.
i;'
CaKI'KN lAltlAN.
mail iiiilla,
Kn(ii,i ill.
Cf/r mail iiiilla, L. (\
nose jlmrroo iiiorro, L. (!.
The followinfj;- is a notice of certain words coincidin'g,
thonuh taken from dialects far separatiul:
heard yernka, Add.
lips tand)and)a, Men. D tamando, fr. S. V.
star ji"K') ditto tehiudai, K. (1. S.
fttrehcail ullo, ditto i(»ullo, G. 8. V.
''»^"^'''' 1 K. G. S.
nanga, )
bite paiandi, ditto badjoon,
fire gaadla, ditto kaal,
heart karlto, ditto koort,
sun tindo,
tooth ,
tia,
edge
ditto djaat,
ditto dowal,
ditto,
ditto,
ditto,
ditto.
ditto.
mater kaiiAve, ditto kowAvin,
stone pure, ditto boyo,
ditto,
ditto.
In the way of grammatical inflection we find indications
•if the same unity. We find also differences upon which we
pliould be careful against laying too much stress. The in-
flection of the number is an instance of the difference. In
South Australian — linyara, a boy; linyarurla, two boys; li-
nijar-anna , boys. In Western Australia — yuffo, a woman;
tjago-iinm , women; (joulanr/, a child; (joolatig-gurruh, children
{giiira, many); doorda, a dog; duorda-guodjal, two dogs;
doorda boula, many dogs {boula, many). Here there is a
difference where we generally find agreement, viz. in the
iiitloctional (or qviasi-inflectional) expression of the numbers.
The difference, however, is less real than apparent. The
Australian is one of those languages (so valuable in general
pliilology) where we find inflections in the act of forming,
204
ON rili; NKdUiro l,.VN(iLAiiKS.
and tliiit from tin; ;i;i'^hilination not of affixcH, suffixes and
jirctixcs, Imt of Avoids, In other terms, iiiHeeti(»ii is (,'V(i|-
viu^' itself out of eompowition. Tiio true vifnv tli(;ii of dif-
foreiit forms for tlio samo idea is not tli.'it the intleetious are
unlike, but that the (juasi-inHectional ('ireumh)eutions ditVer
from each other in dilferent <liaiects. Ther(! is no inHectiu-
nal parallel between Itvu men in Kn^lish and uv^qana In
Greek.
I'ati f Hanoi's Lnnd ^ Smith. — l''or the south of \'an Die-
men's Land the laii^Mia<;e seems radieally one. The follow-
in^ is what Cook has in eommon with Dentrecasteaux (or
La liillardierc^) and Allan Cunningham.
llNOMsir. ('(M)K. 180:?. I). (!. A. C.
fvomun (lUiidue ciiani (|uani
ryi' p.vera ind)(>re uubero..: naiinnurnu'k.
Jtose niuidje uni}:;id iiuiij^ui ineoun.
J
car koidgl cu(n»gi-lia
c'ueguina
vaigui
ouagui
gonnroek.
Lliotsky's Voeabulary stands more alone. With the V^oea-
bulary of 1803 and Dentreeasteaux's Voeabulary, it lias hut
three (Or two) eoineidenees : - — tongue, f/i/'nn Lh.; mcHC, \oc.
of 1803: water, luf/una, Lh.; iki, Vov. 1803: drink, liif/aiia,
Lh.; laina , Voc. 1803. With Allan (Cunningham's Voeabu-
lary it has fourteen words in common and three coincident:
— nose, ?nhi(:ran(/, Lh.; mcomi , A. ('. : tongue, mina, Lh.;
mim, A. C. : lire, lopr, Lh.; lupv. A. (J. lirown and Cun-
ningham coincide a little more than Cunningham and Lhotsky.
It is perhaps safe to say, that for the {South of Van Die-
men's Land the language, as represented b^, its vocabula-
ries, is radically one.
Van Dicmcn's Lund, North. — In Lhotsky's Vocabulary seven
"words are marked W, four E, .'md one !S, as being pecu-
liar to the western , eastern and southern parts of the island.
One of the four words marked E is found in the Port D;d-
ryinplc N'^ocabulary, being the only word common to the two,
e. g, wood, tnnmanara, E.; moumra. Port Dalrymple. The
coincidence of the North and South is as follows: —
English. Port Daluymplk. Lhotsky.
car tiboratie pitserata.
eye elpina lepina.
leg langna langana, fool.
harvti gan licnen henen ingenana.
posteriors wabrodc wabrede.
^■0111 J
Prei
f>N TMi; NKdUITO l..\N(ir\<li:H.
20')
Knoi.ihii. ruin I tM.icvMii.i:. I.ihuskv.
man liiNiiiiia loDndtuieimc.
nififtf livnrc Ifvirii.
srii If^'iiiiil \\\<^;\\ii\ , /ri's/i /riilrr.
liiol/i Iniu' yiuia.
KncIMMI I'uKi IlAl.ltVMI'l.i;. ltll')\VN »S: l». (J.
he/If/ riiii;j:u('l(Mii IdUKMij^ui.
hint... iolii nillc.
kdHt/nruo tnraiiH'i tarii.
li/is iiiuiia luoji'iidilla.
nose inc<li)U(>r mu^iil.
slitnc It'iin parent' loiiic.
Imtl/i iaiic raiian.
iinnn rcgoulu rilia.
About tliirtv-iiv(! words two. coimiion to Lliotsky and the
N'ocabuliirios of IJrown and I)(!ntr('i'jisteiinx. From tlio tori'-
i;oiii}^' obsorvutioiiH wo may conclude that tor the wlioh; ot"
Van Diemen's l^and (as far as represented by the; Nocabii-
hu'ies) th(! languag-e is radically out;.
8uch are the groups as s[)read over limitcnl areas and con-
fiiu'd within natural boundaries. The affinity of speech be-
tween difTcrent islands is another (piestion.
Preliminary to this we must eliminate the Malay from the
Nej;rito. The full knowledge that this has been done im-
perfectly invalidates all that we have arrived at; so that,
once for all, it may be stated, that what is assorted re-
specting the amount of words common to two localities is
asserted subject to the condition of their being true Negrito
and not Malay.
Andaman and Samang. — F(!W words in common; one coin-
cident, and that borrowed in all probability^ from a third
language.
AV//' Guinea and Wahjioo. — By Waigioo is meant the \Vai-
{,'ioo of Arago, and the IJndt^termined Vocabulary of Den-
tvecastoaux. They have about forty words in common, and
the following- are coincident: —
ExcMsu. WAKiiDoV Xi:\v (JiinkaV
hand cocani, I) ktnief.
Ixibj sgiiani, A sueouar.
cheek gangn foni, A gaiafoe.
breast niansoii, A soussou.
eyes tagueni, \) tadeni.
eyelids inekaruei, A karucou.
fifot courgnai, A ockourae, //tW.
206
ox TIIR NEOUirO LAXfilAflRS.
Knomsii, WahiiooV Nkw Guinea?
'?'''• clap, A ap, afor.
Iiinr .sfiiioumcbouran, A .sonobralienc.
knee capugi, A ono-poucr.
r<iin mci, D inokov.
fidtid saiuo, D ivnc , Mtthit/.
I sauny, i). } . ,
''"'' I souu,A. ) sou\on,n,ot,lh.
slulf (inado of j , ,. ,, ,
bark of tree)! "^''^^^'' ^^ ""'^•••^'^' -'^^«^«^-
New Guinea and New Ireland. — Forest and DalryiDple:
fish, een, F. ; h/sson , D. ]V[al.; fire, /'or, F. ; ee//', D. j\lal.:
sand, yean, ¥., coon, D.
sun, ras,
F. ; nass, I): star, mak,
F.; ?naemelia , D Dalryniplc and Utanata. — Upward.s of
twenty-five words in common: — P'arth, iaar, D.; //W Mai.,
Ut. : eat, twfn nam, D.; nefnuha , Ut.: tongue, hermangh,\).]
mare, Ut. Dalry?nple and Loho. — About thirty vjords in com-
mon: — arnis, ponff/iman, D.', nmanffo, Ut. , Mai.: belly, ki-
lanr/, D.; kanhoronf/o, Ut. : tongue, hermangh, D.-^kanonffo, Ut.
Pari Praslin and Carteret Bay (taken together), and Ula-
nata and Loho (taken together). — For the sake of compa-
rison, the whole of the Avords that the two (or four) Voca-
bularies have in common are exhibited, and by their side
the equivalents in Latin and in Greek.
ENGLI.9H. Utan. Lou.
P. P. AND C. B.
Latin.
GUKKK.
arm nimango liinak braeliium (okhti.
back ....
belly ....
beard
bud manok
breast
. torgum vcoTo. .
kan-borongo bala '. venter ya6rr](j.
barba Ttraycov.
mani avis oQvig.
pectus azfjifa.:
black ikoko giiiani iiigcr (isXai
coayJt Avouvu lou-koro tussis /3i/'§.
dog Avurc poul canis v.vm'.
dance salio yo^;:vo\ica.
eyes matatongo mata ocnliis uopd-cd^io^.
— brows wura pouli matandi snporciliunio(r4>i'5.
ear auris ovq.
eat cdo sad-ico.
fish piscis tx&v^.
fool kaingo balan kckc pes ttovc.
finger uiinango sori lima digitus dny.rv\o:,
fire ignis nvf).
great magnus ^tiyag.
ON THK NKOKITO LANCU; AdKS.
207
ESOMSH. UtA\. Lf>I).
hnir
hiiiiil
hull l)ooi bouri
head oopanw ]»oukl()iik
kiii'C ....
1'. 1'. AM) C. 15.
Latin. Gkkkk.
. crini.s ^Qti-
, luaiui.s J^fM?-
, jMucus X^^9^?-
cajnit Ke(p(xXrj.
mnllllt
moon .
iicrk .
wisc .
HO
, . . , j tanKoulonkckciuli) ' ,.
kairiffo-woko ^ . . J •jronu vow.
° f pougaigi ;"
f».S (TTO,««.
luna Ofktpnj.
oolluiu xQttxtjkog.
na.sus Qi'^.
lum ov.
ml napotiai'o tara rubor igv^Qog.
run ciirro T()fj;a>.
su(i(ir-caiie
liiiifjur karioiigo kermoa lingua yAcoffcrnf.
Ihiflli f(Mnur fujoog.
leel/i (lens odovg.
( inalar ) , "?
ivali'r { \ inaloniu acuta vowg.
I MJiran ) ^ ^
yes..
, oro
.10 inu).
.vaixi^.
Witli thirty-seven words in common, tlie two Negrito lan-
guages have seventeen coincident; with thirty-seven words
in common, the two classical languages have nine coinci-
dent. The evidence, thorel'ore, of the affinity of the Pa-
pua and New Ireland is stronger than of tiie Latin and
Greek, as determined from identical data.
New Irelaiul and Manicoh. — The Port-Fraslin and Carteret
Bay Vocabularies being dealt with as one for New Ireland,
and the three dialects being treated as one for IManicolo, we
have, out of twenty-eight words in common, the following
coineiding: — yes, io, P. P.; ?o, C. B. ; in, Manic: eye, mala,
P.P.; malak, C. B.; mala, maleo, malaea, ]\[an., Mai.: banana,
mnn, C. Ji.; puunha, oimra, oanro, Man., AJal.: canoe, koiian,
C. 1^.; naoure, f/o/'a, koure, Manic, Mai.: tooth, nitiisnai , P.
P. ; mv/i", 0. B. ; indje, Tancan: testes, piwn. P. P.; bona
hiniinini, bona ini, Man.: beard, karn-bisack. C. P). {incani brsser,
n.ih'.); oungoumie , vingoumie , ^Fan., Mah: breast, boruick.,C
y>-'iher('nhenhajn, JVIan.; ear, patalignai, P. P.; prak-n, C B.;
manhnlenhi. Manic; hair, n/hougc, 1).; anaoko, Man.
Manicalo and jValltrollo. — Ki'j:;\\tQeu words in conunon, the
following coincident: — Bread-fruit. balo(\ Man.; barabe, i\lall.:
cocoa-nut, venourc, Man.; naroo, ]\lall.: eye, inalaco, i\Ian.;
mitd/ig, ]\lall., Mat,: cay, lagnaiiii, Man.: la'Ungan, jMall., Mai.:
^^r(\, fficnouka, Man.; tnocro, Mall., MaL: head, batclta, Man.;
208
ON Tin: XIOdKITO T. ^NOlAfiKS.
haaaine, IMall.: ho^-, hoi hoi, Man. 5 hrrooas, IVlall., MaL: m,
tae ^ Man.; taep ,lS\ii\\.\ water, uiiine^ Man.; ergour ^ JMall.:
drink, kanou , niinou , Man.; nuonc, MaW.
MalticoUo and Tanna. — Sixteen words in common: — co-
coa-nuts, naroo, Mall.; iiahooij, Tann.: drink, noaei', iMalL;
iiooec, Tann., MaL: eye, maitang, JVlall.; imrnee inaivk , Tanii..
M(il.: Qiirs, ta/ingan, IMall.; feenevnguk, Tann., iStaL: bird, w;^-
eroo, Mall.; manoo^ Tann., Mul.: lio<;', hrrooas, ^lall.; booija$^
Tann., Mai.: navel, nctnprlong , jVlall.; nnpccrainguk, Tann.:
teeth, rci'hohn, warrenmk, ^Fall.; raihuk, Tann.; water, cn/oiir.
Mall.; luimawarain , Tann.: woman, rahin, JNIall.; nuibraan,
Tann., Mat.
Tanna and MalticoUo (taken together) and Netv Caledimia.
— Neither with Mallicollo or Tanna alone, nor with j\Jalli-
collo and Tanna taken together, as compared with New Ca-
ledonia, do we find more words coincident than the follow-
ing: — Cocoa-nut, naroo, INT.; nahooy , T. ; neeoo, N. Cal.,
Mai.: drink, noaee , IVf. ; nooee , T. ; oondoo, N. Cal.: head,
noogivanaivm , T. ; garmoin (Cook), vangne, (L. B.), N. Cal.:
yams, oofe^ Tann.; oohc, N. Cal., Mai.: yes, eeo, Tann.;
e/o, N. Cal.: no, taei)., Mall.; 7ida, N. Cal.
Next in order comes the comparison between the Vocabu-
laries of Van Diemen's Land and South Australia.
Port Dalrytnple and King Georges Sound [Nind and Astrol.]:
— Wound, harana, P. D. ; Ifareitk, N. : wood, moumbra, \\
D. ; pourn, N. : hair, kide, P. D.; kaaf, N. : thigh, deyagkL
P. D.; tawal, N. : kangaroo, taramei., P. D.; taamour, N.:
lips, mona , P. D. ; mele, K. G. S.: no, poidie, P. 1).; pMiali,
poorl, K. G. S. : egg, komeka, P. D.; kierkee, K. G. S. : bono.
pnale, P. D. ; nouU , K. G. S. (bone of bird used to suck up
water) N.: skin, kidna, P. D.; kiao? K. G. S.: two kateboiievc.
P. D.; kadjcn, K. G. S. (N.). Fiftj'-six words in common.
Port Datnjmple and Giilf St. Vincent. — INEouth, mona,Y.
D. ; tamonde, G. S. V. (a compound word, since taa is montli,
in K. G. S.): drink, kihle. P. D. ; kaive, G. S. V.: arm, annw,
P. D.; aondo (also shoulder), G. S. V.: hawk, gan hcncn
henen, P. D.; nanno, G. S. V.: hunger, tigate, P. D.; lahion.
G. S. v.: head, eloura: P. D. ; ioullo , G. S. V.: nose, mc-
doner*, P. D., tnodla, G. S. V.: bird, iola, pallo, G. S. V.:
stone, lenn parenne, P. 1). ; poure? G. S. V.: foot, dogtai, !'•
D.; lenna, G. IS. V.: sun, teg our a** , P. D. ; tendo, G. S. \.
Seventy words in common.
Port Dalrijmple and Jervis's Bay. — Wound, harana, P. l^-;
karanra, J. B. : tooth, iane, P. I).; ?m, J. B.: skin, kidmi-
* Mula. ** Also Moon.
o\ Tin; M:(iuiT() lanoiaciks.
209
r. D.; h(i{/ctno, J. Vu: foot, (hnjnii, P. D. ; lona"^-, J. B.: liead,
chmii, 1*. I-).; A0//0, J. ]}. Fitty-f'om- words in ('(»iinnoii. What
follows is a notice ot" some niiscellanoous coincidences be-
twi'on tlio Van Dienien's I^and and tlio Australian,
Isin.isn. Van Dikmkn's Land. Ai'.stkai.ia.
w.s- cuongilia, IHO.'i j^uuduj-cli , Men. I).
Ik'ujh tida,Lli dara, Men. 1).
i^Umc...
Ad.
( l)lU-0 , .\(1.M. I .
/vopslv.(J. S. 1 loimpairnclM).
hmtsl piiuMiana, Lli voyciic, ^Mcn. I).
kidna, 1*. D makundo, Tcicludiuaii.
in(>gva, Lh nanycii, ]\rcn. J).
inella, Lh luoini, ^Icii. D.
f>'H porvp, 1). (] hirrcf.
IMi' bodoucvoucd, ]*. J) bad(h)ccn, (Jrcy.
fkin
run.
lip luona, ]*. D taniciK* (iijiprr li/i) , ditto.
koiuoka, ]*. D. inuka, I'f/r/, a/ii/lhi/if/ nn(/i<l,'Vv\c\iv\.
iiioumra, P. I) -worra {/'orcsl) , 'rcichcl.
'';;'/
tree
miiulh I
liiiiljiir }
hmih (
'•'!/ darra, V. J lerai
^"t'c gorook , ditto
mmil
kaiiiy, Cook. , \ .1 K n
, •' ,, IV > kamc {inoiif/i.,,}. li
[cru.
ronya, I). C
tcgoura, ]*. 1) kakirra, I'eichohuaii.
, 1,1V I laudla, ditto.
incdoiicr, r. 1) , ' ,,
/ moolya, Urcy.
gan lu'Hcu ht'iKMi, ]*. D. garg-yro , ditto.
toyate, P. J) taityo, Tcichohnan.
pigiie, 1-*. D niengk, Grey.
vena, 18;^j ycnuadah, I'. J.
incgTa, 1835 karinarroo, ditto.
niio, 1803 y«'i'o» ditto.
inangludcua, rain nHMnuciiiooh)ng'.
inoyhicka, Murray , P. 1).
hado, ditto,
hicka , Oariicntarian.
'Such is the siniihirity anionf>st the Noiirito hM\i;uati,es, as
'^^kcn in tlieir <i;eo<^raphical se<|ii(Mico, and as divided into
three groups. Between tlie Andaman and Samang- there is
"" visible similarity or coincidence. From New (iuinea to
•New Caledonia there is a series of coincidences; and there
's also similarity between the Australian and Van DienM^n's
iKise .
Iiiiivk .
hniujei
liiufjh .
m>m .
iluij
fur.. .
Tjiiun', titlna, jeeua. f Generally toe-nail.
14
210
0\ Tlin NRfiRTTO LAXOrAi'iF.R.
Mai.
Land. But it is far from following- that, becauso lan^fiiafrrs
will form groups when taken in geographical succossidn,
they will also form groups when the sequence or succossidn
shall be interrupted. Tested by anotlier method there is an
affinity as follows :
Enomsii. Manicolo. Nkw Gitinka.
arms ino, uirnini, niaini iiiinaugo, L., Mai.
belly tchan-hane, tchaono{ . » '
hntv ore aiimrc, Ut.
, . , • ( m.akinn , 1j. )
drink canon { . . >
I qnmcnno, A. )
nje mala, matco inaiiic, II,; Tiiatatonj^o, V,, Mni.
SH?i ouloia jiniw, U.
tongue inia, iiiiinoaeo inarc, Ut.
. . ( mawiua, L. | ,. ,
woman vonnne, vmnivi \ . \ \ Mai.
yes io aroa, IT., oro, L.
. . ( kaiiik, kanauic, A.) ,, ,
ear taij-naiui, rai'TiOii'Tn < , , . ^,- Mai.
^ 7 rs o J tantougni, vv. '
(ish ano, guiono iono, A., Mai.
nose n-holc nony, A.
J ouara. A., Mai.
■( war, F.
lecih ongno oualini, analini, W.
shouhlcrs outaUui-buicn-liano ponpouui, IFaig.
Engmsu. New Caledonia. Nkw Tukland.
ant kinki akan, 1'. P.
tooth inoiian insik, 0. B., Mai.
birth manou mano, C. ]i., Mol.
cheeks poanguo paring, 1).
eyebrows poutchic-haiigliic poiili-matandi, 1'. V.
fire ali, luopp bia.
kokoign , 1).
balankcko , C. P.
knees bangucliglia pougaigi, ]*. J'.
tongue coubniciglui , cuunican kcrmca.
moon ndau kalan , P. P.
tealk ouanciii inau.
rain oda ous, D., Mai.
nose mandcc nibousscni , V. P.
sleep kiugo licim, 1^.
black ...
sun
water ouiro
foot bakationguc
guiaui.
niaugat naas, J).
X..
0\ THE NKCiKlTO I.ANf;i;A(iF,S.
211
r.xoT.isit. Nkw Cai.khonia. Ni;\v Ihklanh.
imn'l padHH-bonri^'iic, painborjin ]»ont.i, 1*. J'., Mai
ii'ii
ir'rp n
KxcLisii. Ni;\v Camouoxia. AfAXicoLo.
U7r donuli.'i (Hculianc dicno.
mr gucMiiug ra_^u('n<,'<).
timiil ka})ai'('ick kapai.
iii'dil bauguo hatclia.
iimii mauoc iiiclc.
III! nda taic.
( quionboiglia bona.
'/ yabingiie boucnini.
iniirr oo ouiro , Mai.
deiio (bin (/rater), J)., Mai.
ngot ignok, C li.
Iralcs
,Ni:i,isii.
fur
/I'.v/i
Nkw Calkdoxia, J). C Waigioo, I). C, &c.
gnoning gnonani.
ii icanno, Mai.
lilt intp n aualinc', Undot('nnindod,l).(J.
Notwitbstanding doubtful words certain, it sceins tliat
tliero is evidence of the most unlike of the languages be-
tween Waigioo and New Caledonia (inclusive) being not
more unlike than the most dissimilar of the Indo-European
tunnies. That this statement may be enlarged seems pro-
bable by the following parallels: —
/>r/
porro , V. D. L.
(^ t' / .,\ \ \ ifotiran, C. B.
\ porolia [nails), do.) ^
I 1 • TT i» I ffan":ai»ouni , Jf atn.
''nrd kongmc, V. \). L l^ ir /
* ' ( yenga , Mai.
niouta, V, 1). L nianouk, 3[al.
kaniucna, V. D. L ganibajjo, M'aifj.
moul, Aiistr niatta, Pap. and Mai.
hinl
liiin
'II''-
Mh.
[iii'chead..
md
iniiiil
Iri'i' ...
canan
ianc
yano
,r TV X igani, mouth, Wtiki., 1).
^' ^' ^' Mnsik, teeth, P. \\, Mai.
ii'iir
Sim..
skr
(III'..,
caberra, Port Jai'kson kabrani, IVauj.
guno, V. ]). L. coon, yean.
gui, V. D. L. kaibus, /V/jo. and Mai.
1^ 1 1 Australia nibouge, New Tr.
( roukai "
..,] ij ........../ ^Ynj^j^j.j^ij,^ niangat, N. C
.. tcluudai ) . ■= '
koygo, V. IJ. L gaainong, N. C.
14*
212
OS riii: Ni:(!iUT(^ r,AN(ii;A<ii:s.
KNfiMsir.
/lilt'
t'S
Van Uiemkn's Land, »r n. . r. /i t ,
.V (111! Nk\\Lai,ki)onia, )>.(., I..I1
moiifh niotigtii wjiiif^'uc aiul )ii()iuuigui;i,i
arm Iiouana , j^'ouuii pinguc.
s/inu/tli'rs 1 1 ' " ^i houlu'ij'lia.
I ba-ny) ^ «
/ire iiiiha aii, hi('j>|», nap, Mnl.
j raiigalia/
' rouya i
(lead inata iiiackic.
wo lUMuli uola.
ears cxicgni-lia <j;ni('iiiiig'.
7iails ])('r('l<»iji;iii jiilihigui.
hair pcliloguciii Ixtiiliu};', |>i»iiii iiigui'.
) |»('ii(puiijj;lia.
' [)aou wan<;'U('.
fiiif/rrs bcguia hadoiilioif^'ha.
?iosr moiigiii inandoe, vaiidiiij^-.
l)an<i'uilij;lia.
leeth pcgui
ilerp
Knulish.
ear
hand
luakunya kingo.
AnKAMAN. MlSCKLLANEorS.
, I cuongi, V. 1). L.
(luaka < ^.' ^, ,,
^ ( giicciinig, A. ( .
gonio n*-'**©) Aust., or V. D. LJ
mouth iiiorua uiona, V. I). Ij.
nose uu'llco { , } \ . I). J..
i7</< aliay jauw , Utau.
thighs poyt- jn'iiguc paaii, N. C.
wood kiantc tauglicc, N. (.'.
The autlior concluded his paper with the following obMij
vations: —
1. For all that is known to the contrary, the Kegrito tmi
gues of Sumatra, Borneo, Timor, the Moluccas, Foniioj;i
and several smaller isl.ands of whose languages we have ii
specimens, may be in any relation whatever to any otlii'ij
language, and to each other.
2. The Andamanee and Samang may be in any reiatioij
to any other Negrito tongue, or to each other, beyond tliaf
of mere dialect,
',). The languages hitherto known of New Guinea, New In]
land, the Solomon's Isles, New Caledonia, T.mna, and 31.il|
licollo, are related to each otlier, at least as the most diH'ii
ent languages of the Inde Fnropean tribe are relat(Ml.
4. Tlic known languag-, ^ of Australian are related tc omii
other, al least in the same degree.
Inowiipre sul
ON TiiK Ni;(iurr(» i.\NiirA(ii;s,
213
DONiA, D.f'.,l,.i;,
jllowiii"' obftr]
'). The Van Dieuien's J^und and Australian arc similarly
|p'l:itud.
I). Classified in divisions equally ^fncral with tlio Indo-
lEuropoan, the Nc<;rito dialects (a^ far as thoy are known
l|iv their voeabularies) tannot fall into more tlian four, and
liiKiv possibly l)e reiduciblo to one; the data beinp; up to a
Id'tain point sufficient to determine radical affinities, ])Ut
liiiiwliore sufficient to det(!rmine radical dilfcrences.
;. The cthno^rai}hical division, according to physical con-
iliiriiiation, coincides with the ethno<2,'raj)hical division accord-
ing' to language, only so far as the former avoids the de-
ls of classificati(m. With the minute subdivisions of the
iFniu'h naturalists the latter coincides least.
s. The distinction between the Negritos and the AFalays
Infills less broad when determined by the test of language,
ibn it does when measured by physical conformation.
II. The notion of the hybridism of the Papuas, arising from
tl," view of their physical conformati(m , is in a degree con-
timied by the nature of their language; although even the
Ipliysical evidence is not absolute, /. e. on a par with that
liitipecting the hybridism of the Griquas and Confusos.
HI. With two* (if not more) Negrito tribes, whereof the
Iviilencc of language is wholly wanting, physiological dif-
ieronces indicate a probability of difference of language,
lf|ual to the difference between any two Negrito languages
t which Avc have specimens.
I. Even in the physiological classifications we are far
jt'mni being sure that the whole number of Negrito tribes
ps been discribed.
' The JJliicks ot' the I'liilippinos Jiml the Blacks of the South of New
iiiiinea.
214
NOTKS.
fa ?'S?'>*f;^^ Si"^ 5" a ■» »-"a "yo-o-a 5 ?-5.;?'
c a a S
2f SL! © rt.
.'^ *• *-
a ? 3
*■ 5 ^ S
o oo 2
o t -; f^ a 5
a- '^
<* o
'c5 =*
=• ;i S a a
'^ *«*. "^ -^ >1
<?! ■ :
~ <* : 5-
1.^ p-
»i : i
i^ ! S t
. rp
=1-
<5 r
•2.^3
- • » rt- o :i; i: p era i- ■>:■ t z*
3:!^a-33= >i-
i
•^
p
2
-no
J 3 3
5'
- c .;■ c •; =
i. 2 S ; 2
p :
2
a"
3 :
9r » TT
S fB
•D
?i
» . »
cr —
. .- p
(It
pa
^.»
;
^ O TT
;s « <
q re =■
o s
o '^^rre ?r3 3 ?r?r
?^= = «~5'»^-S"X
'15 I
r'- ^ - ?; 3 i?' s ~. ~
so ^
?r s o iK
O 3
cr? 3
"? 2 * =
s =^
■O "3
93 V
o p 2 n> »= ra
— "^ x* "• 5^ - era
C-T3
o ?r
■3 &
o £
- ~' " '" J3 5= 2 ~
=. c
= ■" = -
5- p y
3
-r
3
1
5_
3
2 ,
5
3
■<
-*
a"
l;
r
?
3 3
'r.
O
3
3
2
■5
3
3
!->■
o
?r
O
«J
3
5'
r
2
is
3'
-1
\
3
3_
3
1*
3
3 J
3s :
S3
c
3
2-
5
s a "> >
c P3 a -S.
c -^ 93
3 o rt> _
^ = a ^
oq
<B
o o
o 3
aq •
O 3
p O
?r 3 2 5
O 2 3? <iq
o 2. <:
P g &.£
?>7:
15 =
s a a >j
s;. a. -^ "i
O- 3 3
a: «• •
95 -
?T' ?r r-
88 S5 r:
•X
S 3* 3
o
£^ » 2 S
NOTKfS. 211
NOTK J{.
mi k)i|iiHni, A.; capiiuii , D.
hiiliirh- .sciii and scniflokaouri , A.; tiaufjajioiii , 1).
////// sfjiiaiii, A.; iaiii, D.
Lack koiiaiieteiii, A.; cateni, ]).
chill f,''Hnil»ai>i , A.; capa])!, I).
iliys inaiiHou, A.; son {liosaiii) , I).
(•//fv ... jadjieniouri , A.; tagdini , I).
/w/iT.v caiitoiilili, I).
- furc kuiikaiit-ili , A.
— iiddtllc koiianti-poitli), A.
— riiif/ koiiaiiti-ripali , A.
/////'' koiiantilniinki , A.
fiiol koiirgnai. A.; caloaiii , D.
Iiiiir stMioniiirlinuraii , A.; pi.i, 1).
Inmil kuiik at'alcMii , A.; cocani , 1).
Inrl konk abiouli, A.
btee kuiik-Hpoki , A.; capi>n<;ui, 1).
Irij konkaiifai. A.; ani^a t'uiui , 1).
iiii^e suun , A.; saiiiiy, 1>.
iiiiil.1 canibrt'ne, A.; cabione , 1).
/re/// nualini, A.; analiiii , D.
loe, firiuif koiianti-licl. A,]
— , seroiid mid fourth konanti-hipali, A.
— , /////'/ kouanti-|i()iilo , A.
— , /////'• konaiiti-lmiiiki , A.
ihiijh afToIiMii, A.; enfolnni, or anfoloni , I).
S-2 3 5'
S^ 3 s; w
3 2 a: 3
O
a
3 g <T >
£ P I :? a"
P O &- ^ ?^ 7.
•< < -J 15 ; '
o • :^ ^ 5 '
ADDENDA AND CORRIGENDA (1850).
Aiulnmau — TIk^ Jndaman Language is inonosyllfibic, and al-
liod to tlic Burmese, of the oj)pnHlte continent.
Mcoaar &.c. — The statement tliat there are lUaeks in the Nico-
li(ir Isldixls is inaccurate. The tribes furtlier i'rom tlie coast are the
rudest. In tlie Tsicobar vocabulary of tlie Voyage; of tlie (Jab'ithea
\Slccn /lil/e — Galalhca' s Rcisc omkrimj Jordcit) , the hnignage inost
I'spPt'ially represented is that of the ishuid Terressa; tlie words
iVom Xancovry being marked N^ aud those from (-ariecobar (J. N.
Xo ditierence , beyond that of dialect, is recognized as existing
''•'tween them. At the same time it is, by no means, certain, that
tvory form of speech belonging to the Archipcdago is known
tn US.
Sitinu/iy &.r. — The statenrent that these are the Orang IJdai is
inaccurate. For further notice of the Samane; sec Newbold's Indian
21G
O.N Till; NIKiltllo I, ANtirViiKS.
An"hi|H'l)i;j;(»; n wnvk not known t<» uw when iny jiapor was writ-
ten. Tlic ctlinulojry (if the ( )ran.;? Hcinia is fully illustrated in
the .Foiirnal of the Jiuliaii Aiehijielaj^o. They ai all Malay.
Smnalni. - 'This island gives us certain trihes ruder tliiiu
others — not hiacker; at any rate no Xegritos.
The same apidies to liontro; where there is plenty of harlia-
risni hut nothinjj; Xe^-rito.
The same to the Sulu .Vrehipelaj-'o.
The Manillas. — SpecinieUH of four of the sft-called Ne;j;ritii Inn-
{^uaj^'es are to he found in Steen JTille's N'oyage (»f the (Jalatlicn
(V«d. in.); headed, (OUniirjiy, (-J) St. ^lij^iud: (iij St. .Ajatiicu
and (4) !)uniagat. 'I'hey evidently Ixdonj^' to the same ;;rini|i
as the 'I'agal.
Formosa and T.itncho. — The eritieism that a])plies to Huriuii
and th(! Sulu Archipcdago !i]»|dios here.
For Timor, Ombay kc. sec the n(>xt paper.
The lanjj;\ia},''e of the Arm islanders is not mentioned; indeed
in I84H no sjK-eimens of their laui.';uaf:;e had heen i)nl)lished. Siiiii',
however , a j^ood aecount of theei has heen given hy AVindsnr
Earl. Their lauj-uage cnntains u'ueh in connnon with the Ian
guages of the islands to the west of them, whilst in physical ap-
pearance they approach the l'a[»u; o.-i, I'hey present, in sliovt,
transitional characters - -,/o?//'««/ of Indian .Irchiprhigo, and Tin'
Pa/nia Races.
New Britain &c. — For Louisiadc forms of speech sec the tioxt
paper hut one ; for those of Now Caledonia t^c. see the fourth.
The Fijis. — The language of the Fijis is Polynesian.
C'ocos Island. — The vocahulary of the island so-'ianied sconis
to mc to ho. that of T"c >pia; and, as such, anything hut Negritd.
In liraim's Australia wo tind specimens of five Tasnuumn
forms of speech. The additions to the })hilology of Australia
since 184;^ are too numerous to find ])lace in a notice like the jtrc-
sent. The fundamental unity of all the languages of that conti-
nent is, now, generally recognized.
Of the Micronesian Islanders (natives of the Marianne and Cn-
rolinc Archipelagos) some trihes are darker than others. They
chiefly occui)y ^^*^ coral, as opposed to the volcanic, formations.
The same is the case with the supposed Negritos of Polynesia.
ON THE (;em:ral affinities
OK 11 II;
LAN(aA(iES OF rUE (XILVNIO JJLACKS.
ArPKNDlX TO JIIKKSS VOYACnO OF IDI.S FLY.
1847.
For i)liilologi('!il purposes it is convenient to arranfjje tlio
BliK'ks of the Asiatic and Oceanic Islands under five divi-
sions.
I. The lihicks of the Andaman Ishands. — These are, com-
paratively s])eaking, isohited in their geo.i;rapIiieal position;
whilst tiie portion of the continent nearest to thein is inha-
liitod hy races speaking- a monosyMabic language.
II. The IMacks of the Malay area, — With the exception
of Java, all the larger, and many of the smaller i\Ialay Is-
lands, as well as the Peninsula of ^lalacca, are descril)ed
as containing, in difftu'ent proportions, a j)oj)ulation which
departs from the Malay type, which approaches that of the
Nogro, which possesses a lower civilization, which generally
inhabits the more inaccessible parts of the respective coun-
tries, and which wears the appearance of being aboriginal
tij the true Malay population. These tribes may bo called
the lilacks of the INIalay area.
III. The Papuan Blacks of New Guinea. — Under this head
may be arranged the tribes of New Guinea, New Ireland,
the Now Hebrides, Tanna, Erromango, Annatom, New Ca-
ledonia , &c.
IV. The Blacks of Australia.
V. The Tasmanian Blacks or the Blacks of Van Diemen's
Land.
I. The Andaman Blacks will cot be considered in the
present note.
II. With respect to the languages of the Blacks of the
Malay area, it may be stated unetpnvocally, that the dia-
2IS
OS llli: (iKM'.UAl, Ari'lMIIKM
Icits of cacli mikI (!V<'ry tribo lor wliicli ji vu(iil»iil;iry ii
jctMi ('X!Viiiiii('(l , arc
Mill
A. Siu'li is tli(! case witli tlu; Saniaii;;', .Io(»roo and ,lo|.
Vocabularies of tlio Peninsula of Maiaeca.
Knliif
Set! (Jruufiinr
Indian ArcliijKda^o, Asiatic Uescarchcs, xii. 100, Ni'wIioM'
Jliitisli Settlements in Malacca.
15. Siieli is tli(! case with ev(3ry vcniabtiiary that has Ikm i
brought fiv»in Sumatra. 'I'Ik; iiaitictdar tiibe sufliciently dit
forcrit from tin- Malay to speak a ditfcront language has yet
to l»o lo
und.
C. Such is tlic case with the oi^ht vocabularies furnislioil
by Mr. IJrooke i'roni I'orneo ; notwithstanding the fact tliat
both the Dyaidis and the liiajuUs have Ijeen deserihed us
tribes wihh'r and inor(( de^raued than the Malay: in otiur
words, as tribe.s on tin; Negro side of the (huninant \ui\n\-
lation.
1). Sucdi is the case with every vocabulary brou<;ht fnnii
any of the Molucca, Key. Arm, or Timorian Islands wliat-
soever; no matter how dark niay be the complexion, or hdw
abnormal tln^ hair, of the natives who have supplied it.
Fi. Such is the case with the so-called Arafura vocHl)uIa-
ries of Dumont Durville from ('elel)es, and of Hoorda van
Eysin;j,a from Ambt)yiKi and Ceram.
F. Such is the case with the langua<r(!s of the I'hilippiiic
Islands. In no part of the great ^lalay area has the ditfc-
ronce between the higher and lower varieties of the p(»[tul!i-
tion, been rnoro strongly insisted on, and more accurately
exi)lained than hero, ^'et the testinu)ny of th(3 early Spanish
IMissionaries, as to the fumhimental identity of the JUack
with the other languages is unanimous; and, to j)Ut the mat-
ter further beyond doubt, the few words of the Igorot ne-
groes, n(\ar IMariveles, which are supplicid by Lafond Lnray,
who visited tliem, are JNIalay also.
Now, on these grounds, and laying the Andaman Islamls
(Hit of tli<! (juestion, it may be safely predicated, that, until
we reacdi either Is'inv (Juinea, or Australia, we ha\(; no [jroofs
of the existence of any language fundamentally ditferi'iit from
the Malay; whatever may ho the difference in physical ap-
pe
uance o
f th
ios(> wiio sT)ea
ik it.
III. For New (luinea, and the islands Waigioo, andUuohc,
I have found only ten short vocabularies, and these; only
for tin? north-western districts. One of these, the (iuchf,
of the voyage of the Astrolabe, although dealt with by Mr.
Durville as Papuan, is Malay. The rest, without any ex-
ception, have a sufficient ])ortion of jMalay words to preclude
any argument in favour of their belonging to a fresh class
or riir; i,AN(ir\«ii;M or riii: kcmami' iii,\<ks.
210
'■UHI .J(l|i((l|(r
(.'niiit'imr,-,
; N'l'\Vl(()|(|\i
"t lias Ihmji
Hciciitly (lit".
■•I^MJ lias yet
•H f'tiniiijiicil
1(3 fact tliat
<'S('ril)(3(l as
y: in (•flier
naiit piijdi-
■"•ui;lit from
ImikIs wliat-
011, up Ikmv
»|»lic(l it.
ii VdcHlttila-
Ivooi'da van
■ l'iiili]>|)iii('
IS tli(! (imv-
tlio |)(t|mla-
i accurately
irly Spanisli
' the J {lack
ut tlio iiiat-
f^orot im;-
ond Lnray,
mil Islaiiils
tliat, until
o no proofs
fcrt^nt from
liysical ap-
anrl CJucIk',
tli(vs(! oulv
\\v. (JucIm',
ith l.y Mr.
it any cx-
o prcclmlc
fresh class
(if lin;;»ia;;('.s. < )n tlx- other imud, tlie commercial iiitercoursn
iiclween the I'apuaiifs ami Miilayss prechuh'H any positives
stati'inents u.s to the existence of ii true piiilolo^ical affinity.
From Nf.'W (inineji, Avestward and sonthwjird, we iiave
tor tJK! localities inhaliiled l»y the black tribes witii curly
liair, tli»! lollowin;;' vncabninrie.s,
1. Ft»r New Ireland.
A. (laimard'rt Carteret llarbtmr Vocabulary — Voya^^e do
rAstrolab(!, lMiilolo;;ie, ii. W.S.
B. Durville's i'ort Praslin Vocabulary. Ibid.
U. l)alryuij)le'8, hh called, New (Jiuinea N'ocabulary, col-
!(;t't('<l by Schouten and Le !Mair(>, ;^iven also by 1 )e Jlrosscs.
2. For VaniUoro — -(iainiards \'ocabulary in three dialects,
ilu' Vanik<»ro, the Tanema, and the 'I'aneanou — \'oyaj;(! do
lAstrcdalx' l'hilol();;ie, ii. Mil.
3. MallicoUo — Cook's \^)CJ.bMlary.
4. Tanna — Ditto. Also a few words nnirked (i. Benn((t,
ill Marsdon's IMiscellaneous \\'(»rk.s.
.'). Krronnin^o — a toAV words by JJenn(>t, in Marsden.
(i. Annatom — Ditto.
7. New ('aledonia — A short Vocabulary in Cook. A lon-
ger one in Dentrecasteaux and La Jlillardiere.
All these lan^uaj^es, althou;;h nnitually nnintelli-^ible, <'x-
liibit words connnon to one another, connnon t(j themselves
and the Now (Juinoa, and connnon to themselves and the
Malay. See Transactions of the Philolo<.^ical Society, vol. i.
no."* '4.
IV. The Blacks of Australia are ^-enerally se[)arated by
stron;;' lines of dinnarcation from the I'lacks of New (Juinea,
and from the IMalays. Kven on tln^ philolo;j,ical side of the
question, ]\Iarsden has written as follows — *'\V(j have rarely
mvX with any negrito lanj^ua^e in which many corrupt Po-
lynesian words might not be detected. In thos*; ot New
Holland or Australia, such a mixture is not found. Annmu;'
tliein no foreign terms that c-onnect them with the languages
even of other [tainia or negrito countries can bt; discovered;
with regard to the physical (pialities of the natives it is
nearly supin'tiuous to state, that they are negritos of the
more decided class.'' — p. 71.
In respect to this statement, 1 am not aware that any
recent philologist has gone over the (hila as wo innv have,
them , with sufficient care to enable him either to verify or
to refute it. Nevertheless, the isolation of the Australian
languages is a current doctrine.
i
" Tliis is till- prceoiliiig piiper. (IKV.)).
220
ON THE (JKN-KK.U, Ari'IMTfRS
I believe tliis doctrine to be incorrect; and I am sure that,
in many cases, it is founded on incorrect ])rinci[}les.
Orannnaticai diftVrences are valued too liigb; glopsarial
affinities too low. The relative value of the i;rannnati('nl
and j-lossarial tests is not constant. It is different for dif-
ferent languac;es.
In 1844. 1 stated, at York, tliat from three true Mahiy
localities, and in three true IMalay vocabularies, I had found
Australian and Tasmanian {ind l^ipuan words, viz: —
1. In the Timboran dialect of the Sumbawan.
2. In the ]\rangerei dialect of Flores.
3. In the Ombayan of Ombay.
1. Arm = ilxtnina , Ombay; purcm', Fine Gorine dialect of
Australia,
2, W\\vn\ = ouinc , Ombay; hingue , New Caledonia.
.*). ^0!>o = imQU)ii, Ou'bay; nianimja, mandey , nutiulvinnc,
NcAv Caledonia; w^v;//, \'an Diemen's Land, western dialect;
7nhii, jNlangcrei: mcoun , niHidtjc, tmiyui, Macquarie Harbour.
4, Head=7wor//r/, (hiibay; woav, (=:liair) Darnley Island;
nioochi, (= hair) Massied; immnos, (= beard) Dandey Is-
lands; t'fta mooc/ii, (:r=: beard) JMassied.
5, Knee -~ Icm-boiikit , Ombay; lunvkd, bouf/a/ij {~~ i'ovQ^n-
ger) Darnloy Islands.
(). Leg .:= i?>v//.Y/, Ombay; huraff-tu/fa , .Ihongworong dialect
of the Australian.
7. Bosom c=r/;w/, Ombay; nnem, Darnley Island,
8. Thigh = //t'//«, Ombay; (inna-mook (:= foot) Witouro
dialect of Australian. The root, tin, is very general through-
out Australia in the sense of fool.
9. ^c\\y = li'-kap-atm, Ombay; coopoi , (= navel) Darnley
Island.
10. )^ti\r» := fpi-berrc , Mangarei; bcrifir/, hirroug, Sydney.
1L Vii\x\(\.= (anaraga , Mangarei; iahUu, Timbora; Uimira,
Sy ney.
12. Head =7V//<('', Mangarei; chow, King George's Sound.
13. ^tius = ktngkong , Tiniboro; chitiffg , King George's
Sound, Australia.
14. Moon = mangring, Timbora; ?nc'uc, King George's
Sound.
15. ^nxi = fngkong , Timbora; coing, Sydney.
16. Blood = /ivv«, Timbora; gnoorong, Cowagavy dialect of
Australia.
17. Headr=/.vy/,o;Y', Timbora; gogorrah , Cowagary.
18. FU\\ = appi, jNIangarei; w7//>/, Darnley Island.
Now as the tiiree dialects have all undoubted Malay atti-
iiities, th
liticationi
V, Co
venture
«. Thd
island;
tuidly u
^. It
y. It
A fou
exhibits
Should
will at
the Tasi
often be
guage b
stronger
This in(
mens ra
The
publishc
syllnbic
colUitiot
1. Bh
dialect (
2. No
nese; />(
3. Fs
York,
lands;
4. H
Ohines(
•). C
G, B
7, H
Jooro ;
b, F
iiiatra.
U. I
fai, S'
10.
houlou
II.
kihou
rung ,
or THE LANdUACKS OF Till': OCKAMC lil.W'KS.
221
iiitics, tlie stateinciit of ^Marsilcn must be rccoivetl with qu.i-
liticntions.
\. Concerning;' the language of Van Diemon's l^and, 1
venture upung the t'oHowing' statements, the proofs wiiieh 1
hope, (!re long, to exhiltit /// twlcn^o.
tt. The Language is fundamentally tiif; same for the whole
island; although spoken in not less than four dialects mu-
tually unintelligible.
|3, It has aftinities with the Australian.
y. It has afiiniti(>s with the Mew Caledonian.
A fourth proposition concerning the Tasmanian language
exhibits an impression, rather than a (hdibcratc; opinion.
Should it, however, be contirmed by future rc'searches it
will at once explain the points of physical contrast between
the Tasmanian tribes and those of Australia that have so
often been insisted on. It is this • — that the affinities of lan-
^aiago between the Tasmanian and the New Caledonian are
stronger than those between the Australian and Tasmanian.
This indicates that the stream of population for \'an Die-
mens ran round Australia rather than across it.
The following affinities occur between the vocabularies
published in the present volume and the; J\Ialay and Mono-
syllabic dialects 5 and they are the result of a very partial
collation.
1. Blood =^ ;«^/wj , Darnley Island; f?iuhum, South Jooroo
dialect of ]\[alacca; man, Anamitic of (!^ochin (,'hina.
2. Nose=yv<'t7, J)arnley Island; pccclii, Massied; />//<, Chi-
nese; />/, Kong Chinese,
3. FsLCG=^ a/rap aap; ]\Iurray Islands; «'/>?< = (head) Cape
York, Massi(Hl; oopoo ^^^^ (hend) Tahiti; ejwo, Sandwich Is-
lands; aopo, Easter Island.
4. Hair = ;«oos, Darnley Island; mooche, Massied; maow,
Chinese.
T). Country -—//r/tY/, Darnley Island; Laha, Ternati.
G. Black =/7or>//, Darnley Island; houli, Tongataboo.
7. Hand=:^^///, Darnley Islane; tatu/h, Madagascar; lo)aj,
Jooro; lay, Anamitic. A current Malay root.
5. Vh\\f=irapi, Darnley Island; iha, Poggy Isles otf Su-
matra. Also in other ]\Ialay dialects.
I). Flame, lire = /yrtt', Darnley Island; api, Flores, or Knde;
I'ai, Siamese; fj'oo. Kong Chinese.
10. \\ii\v^^yal, JNIassied ; ceal, Capo York; yal, PortLihou;
liouluu, Tongataboo.
11. Teeth n=:: ^/^///^, i\[assied; dtt/iya, Cape York; (/any. Port
Lihou; ilangela, Gunong-talu of (.'elebes; ivaluiny , Menadu;
rmy , Anamitic.
222 ON Tin: OKXKiiAL Ai'iMM rrr.s of tiik i-.wrirAnKS &.v.
The evidence upon which I rest my belief of the funda-
mental unity of the three philological groups of the Malay,
l*apua, and Australian languages, is, of the sort called
ctnnulutivc ; and it is the only evidence that our present data
will afford us.
]>elieving, however, in such a fundamental unity, the pro-
blem to be solved by further researches on the vocabularies
from either Torres Strait or the South of New (juinea, is
the problem as to the particular quarter from which Is'cw
Holland Avas peopled — whether from New Guinea, or from
Timor. Such a problem is not beyond the reach of fiilttrc
philologists.
In the fifth volume of Dr. Frichards valuable work, I
find that Mr. Norris has indicated points of likeness between
the Australian dialects, and the Tumul languages of South-
ern India.
Such may be the case. If, however, the statements of
those philologists who connect on one side the Tamul, and
on the other the Malay, with the Monosyllabic languages,
be correct, the two affinities are compatible.
ADDP^NDA AND CORRIGENDA (1859).
The error of presuming the ruder tribes to be Negrit(» is njjpa-
rent in tlie notice of the Sumatra, and Borneo tribes. Tliey
should have no place in a list of Negritos at all.
The gist of the ])aper lies in the snggestions to break down
(l) the lines of demarcation between the Australians, Tasmaniaiis,
and l'a)tuans on one side, and the ]\Ialays i^c. on the other, aiul
(*i) those between the ]\Ialay and I\b»nosyllabic tongues.
1IEMA11K8 ON THE Y()CAr>UEAlMES
OK THK
VOYAGE OF THE llATTLESXAKE.
APPENDIX TO lAIACGlLLIVRAYS VOVACIK OF THE
HMS RATTLESNAKE. 1852.
In the Avay of comparative pliilology the most important
part of the (Jrammar of the Australian languajivs is, gone-
rally, the Pronoun. That of tho Kowraroga language Avill,
therefore, be the first point investigated.
In the tongues of the Indo-European class the personal
pronouns are pre-eminently constant, /. i'., they agree in
languages Avhich, in many other points, dillV'r. How tho-
roughly the sound of m runs through the (Jlothic, Slavonic,
and Iranian tongues as the sign of the pronoun of the first
person singular, in the oblique cases; how regularly a mo-
dification of /, .s', or tli , appears in such words as ///, 6v,
thou, &c.! Now this rons/(/nri/ of the Pronoun exists in most
langunges; but not in an e([ually palpable and manifest form.
It is iiisguised in several ways. Sometimes, as in the Indo-
FAU'opoan tongues, there is one root for the nominative and
one for the oblique cases; sometimes the same form, as in
the P'inlandic, runs through the whole declension; sometimes,
as when we say ijou for /hnif in Knglish, one number is sub-
stituted for another; and sometimes, as when tlif; (Jerinan
says ,svt' for thou, a chang(; of the person is made as well.
When languages are knoAvn in detail, these complications
can be guarded against ; but where the tongue is but imper-
fectly exhibited a special analysis becomes reijuisite.
Generally, the first person is morc^ constant than the se-
cond, and the second than the third; indeed, the third is
frequently no true personal pronoun at all, but a demon-
strative employed to express the person or thing spoken of
as the agent or object to a verb. Now, as there are fre-
quently more demonstratives than one which can be used
224
UK.MAKKS ON Till'. VOCAIULAUIKS
in a personal sense, two Innguag'cs may be, in reality, very
closely allii'd, though their personal pronouns of" the tliiril
person differ. Thus the Latin cyo ^r=i Eyco '^ but the Latin hk
and Hie by no means correspond in form with og, avxo'i, ami
ix£ivog. This must prepare us for not expecting a greut r
amount of resemblance between the Australian personal pro-
nouns than really exists.
licginning with the most, inconstant of the three pronouns,
viz., that of the third person, we find in the Kowrar(^j,^i
the following forms
Singular, masculine
— feminine
Dual, common
Plural, —
3.
71 u- (1 11=: he, him.
na-(lu--shr , her.
pale ::r7zihei/ l/vo , them two.
tuHa^=:^t! ey , them.
In the two first of these forms the du is no part of the root.
but an affix, since the Gudang gives us the simpler forms
tiue and na. Pale, the dual form, occurs in the Western
Australian, the New South Wales, the South Austi'aliaii,
and the Parnkalla as follows: boula^ Oulo-ara, puri-a, piiil-
lanbi = ihey two.
Singular
Dual
Plural
mji-ihi •=■ thou , thee.
ji(ji-pel= ye two, ymi ln>o.
iiyi-tana=ye , you.
Here the root is limited to the syllable ?i{/i, as shewn not
less by the forms nyi-pel, and ngl-tana ^ than by the simple
Gudang nyi^^^ihoti.
Ny/, expressive of the second person , is common in Au-
stralia: iiyt-nnee, nyi-nloa, ni-ruui, nyi-nte=^thou, thee, in the
W. Australian, N. S. Wales, Parnkalla, and Encounter Bay
dialects.
Nyi-pel is probably thoii + pair. A priori this is a likely
way of forming a dual. As to the reasons a posteriori tliey
are not to be drawn wholly from the Kowrarega tongue it-
self. Hero the word for two is i\ot pel but qvassur. But lot
us look further. The root ;;-/, or a modification of it,=
ttvo in the following dialects; as well as in the Parnkalla
and others — pur-la itije, poolettc, par-kooloo, btill-a, in the
Adelaide, Boraipar, Yak-kumban, and JMurrumbidge. That
it may stand too for the dual personal pronoun is shown in
the first of these tongues; since in the Adelaide language
OF IIIK V(AA(iE OF Tin: ItATTI.KSXAKK.
225
jiurla==y(' two. Finally, its Jip])oarancc amongst tlio pro-
nouns, anil its absence anionj^st the numerals, occurs in the
Western Australian. The numenil ijvn is lairdina ; but the
ilual pronoun is boala. The same plienomcnon would occur
in the present Kn^^lish if two circumstances had taken place,
viz., it" the Anglo-Saxon dual wi-l -— wv Urit liad been retain
cil up to thu present time amongst the pronouns, and tlie
word i>(t'u\ brace, or couji/c, had superseded fivo auiongst the
niiDicrals.
Lastly, the Western Australian and tlio Kowrarega so
ilosoly agree in the use of the numeral (wo for the dual pro-
noun, that each applies it in the same manner. In the t/i/rd
pcrs^on it stands alone, so that in W. Australian boa/a, and
in Kowrarega jia/a =z they two, just as if in English we said
iniir or both, instead of they both {he jniir):, whilst in the se-
cond person, the pronoun precedes it, and a compound is
t'ornied-, just as if in English we translated the (Jreek
6(fm Ijy thou piiir or tliou both.
Singular
Dual
riural
1.
nga-tti^=I, me.
all/ei=zu'e two, us two.
arn=-wc, lis.
Here the plural and dual are represented, not by a modifi-
tation of the singular, but by a new word ; as ditferent from
nga us nos is from eyo. The tu, of course, is non-radical,
the (jiudang- form being nyai.
.\ya, expressive of the iirst person, is as common as ;?///,
equivalent to the second. Thus, nga-»y^/, nga-/w/, nga-/,
iiga-yyt'-^ /, me, in the W. Australian, ^<. S. VV^ales, Parn-
kiilla, and Encounter Bay dialects.
Now, the difference between the first and second persons
being expressed by different modifications (tiyii, fiyi ,) of the
same root {}iy) ,, rather than by separate words, suggests
the inquiry as to the original power of that rout. Jt has
already been said that, in many languages, the pronoun of
the thh'd person is, in origin, a demonstrative. In the Kow-
rarega it seems as if even the basis of the first and second
^vas the root of the demonstrative also; since, by looking
lower down in the list, we find that /-na^=this, ehe-na =^
thai, and iiga-cla {nga in (hidang) -- - ;i;//o. Ina and cJiemt
also means here and tiiere , respectively.
The dual form albei reappears in the Yak-kumban dialect
of the River Darling where allewa=^we two. Arri~-us, is
also the first syllabic in the Western Australian form ar-
J5
22G
UKMAKKS ON TIIH YOCAIU'LAUIIOS
limjul ~-)Vc; or, ratlior it is ar-Ji)i{jiil in a simpler and less
compounded I'orm. In a sliort specimen of i\Ir. J"]yre".s fnna
the licad of the Great Australian JJi^ht, the form in a ap-
pears in the sin[;ular number, f/JJa :- I nnd me. Tho rout
iauft—^llwy, is not illustrated without j^oing as far as t!i
Western Australian of Mr. Kyre. Here, however, W(» iind it
in the compound -Nvord par-tamui :=nuinij. Its original powir
is prohably ulhrrs] and it is most likely a widely ditl'u.scil
Australian root.
The j)ronouns in question are compound rather than simple:
f. ('. instcjad of nga. -^^ tnc , and ngi -- tJiee, we have nua-m
and mji-du. What is the import and explanation of X\mi
It may safely be said, that th^ termination in the Australiiiu
is not a termination like the Latin inci in (•(jo-mel , inasnnuli
as this last is constant throughout the three persons {efiu-
mt'1.1 lulc-incl , sc'-mi'/), whereas, the former vari(\s with tlic
pronoun to Avhich it is appended ()if/a-lif ^ and >i(//-(lii). 1
hazard the conjecture that the two forms correspond with
the adverbs here and (here] so that Hf/a-(u = I here, ami
nf//-du--= /hnii there, and nu-dn =\\g tlu^re. In respect to
the juxta-position of the simple forms {fif/'//\ tif/i, and )iw'\
of the CJudang with the compound ones (fif//i-(ii, )itji-<lu. ami
nu-du) of the Kowrarega, it can be shewn that the same oc-
curs in the Parnkalla of Port Lincoln ; where JMr. Kyre
gives the double form nf/ai and Hf/a-ppo each = I or mc.
Kow, this analysis of the Kowrarega personals has exhi-
bited the evolution of one sort of pronoun out of another.
Avith the addition of certain Avords expressive of number, the
result being no true inflexion but an agglutination or com-
bination of separate Avords. it has also shewn Iioav the (se-
parate elements of such combinations may appear in differ-
ent forms and AA'ith different powers in different dialects of
the same language, and different languages of the same cliiss,
even Avhere, in the primary and normal signification, they
may be wanting in others. The first of these facts is a con-
tribution to the laAVS of language in general ; the second
shcAvs that a great amount of apparent difference may be
exhibited on the surface of a language which disappears as
the analysis proceeds.
In rude languages the Numerals vary Avith the dialect more
than most other words. We can understand this by imagin-
ing Avhat the case Avould be in English if one of our dia-
lects counted things by the brace, another by the pair, anil
a third by the couple. Nevertheless, if we bear in mind the
Greek forms d^a^aOGu and '&alaTta, Ave may fairly suppose
that the KoAvrarega Avord for two, or quassur, is the same
*
oi' Tin-: voYAci: or niio katti.ksxakk.
227
diHloct more
is tlie same
word with tlio lload of Australian IJif^lit koolcra , tho Parii-
kall.'i IniHuru, ami the AV. Australian hurdiira . Iiavinj:' the
sniiic nicaninji;.
'riio (lifi'orenc'C , then, between tiie tnimenil.-i of the Austra-
lian lan^uaj^es — and it is undoubtedly ^reat — is no proof
lit' any fundamental diffrrcnee of strueturc; or oi i<;in. It is
just what occurs in the langua;;<>s of Africa, and, in a still
;;Ti'{itcr def;'ree, in those of America.
The I'xlenl (n which the unmcralion is curried is a matter of
iiiDi'o importance. Possibly a numeration limited to the first
tliroc!, four, or live numbers is the c/fcc/ o/' intidlectual in-
t'rriority. It is certainly a cause that continues it. As a
nioa.sure of cthnolof;ical affinity it is unim})ortant. In Ame-
rica we have, within a limited ranoe of bm^uaj^es, vi<;esi-
iiial systfMns like the Mexican, and systems linnted to the
tliroo first units like the (Jaribb. The difference betwcsen a
vi;;csiiiial and decimal s; stem arises j>imply froni the })rac-
ticc of counting bv the finders and to(>s collectivelv , or the
tinj;ers alone, bein<^ prevalent; whereas the decimal system
as opposed to the quinary is rcferrible to the numeration
being extended to both hands, instead of limited to one.
Numerations not extending- as far as /ire are generally in-
dependent of tin; fingers in loto. Then as to the names of
particular numbers. Two nations may each take the nani(!
lit" the number two from some natural dualism; but they may
not take it from the same. For instance^ one American
Indian may take it from a pair of skates, another from a
pair of shoes. If so , the word for Iwo will differ in the two
iaii<^uagcs, even when the names for skate and shoe agree.
All this is supported by real facts, and is no hypothetical
illustration; so that the inference from it is, that, in lan-
fruages where a numeral syste7n is in the process of forma-
tinn, diftcrencc in the names of the numbers is compara-
tively unimportant.
The extent to which the numerals ^ary, the extent to
which they agree, and the extent to which this variation
iwd agreement are anything but coincident with geographi-
cal proximity or distance, may be seen in the following-
table: —
Knglisli
Morcton Bay
— Island
I'ijcnchniilio
l'inil)jikai-ajia
Tori'utong-
:i
one
two
tlu-eo
kainarah
bulla
mudyan
karuAVo
])0()nlali
uiadaii
warat
ng-argark
2 + 1
erat
ng-argark
d.).
roka
oryalk
do.
15*
12.^ UKMAUKS (»\ I'llH
VOfMUT-AUIKS
Limhapyu
iinu.uta
la\vid]»orra
'2 + '
KoAvraicgii
waru|»uiie
(luassur
do.
Giuljinj;-
epianuiiia
elahalii
do.
Dnnilcy l.slfinJ
netut
lies
d...
KatHcs Jiiiy
loca
(irira
oroiigario
JiJikc MiU',([uarie
wakdl
ludoara
ugoro
W\v\ Itivcr
pe<'i'
])tdar
]>urla
W('llinj;t()U
uginigliai
bula
bula-iigniijj,'
,Ili(mg\v()rniig
J'iiK't^oriiu'
koiiDoil
ka])
yuua
(Jmircllcaii
lua
Kiii}^ ( I ('urge's Sound
keyeu
cuetrel
murbcn
Jvariiuli).
inal
bular
cub'ba
]jaclilan, l^cgcut Lake
iiyoonbi
bulla
bubtiiguiibi
AV'ollondilly ]?iver
ineduiig
])una
Cidluerr
>lll
IMio Verb now requires notice. In languaoes in the saino
Rtap;e of development with the Australian the usual analysis.
as siiewn by the late I\lr. (Jarnett in his masterly papers ini
the structure of the verb, is as follows: I. The root. 2. Tln'
pause naive ])ronoun. 3. A particle of time — often originally
one of place.
A rough illustration of this is the statement that such a
word as ilormivi = sleep — my — then (or there). To apply
this doctrine to the Kowrarega with our present dtiltt, \-
unsafe. Still, I am inclined (notwithstanding some diftieuUios
to identify the pa of the Present tense with the hu in kai-
bn^=^no)iK and the n of the preterite with the ?i of chc-nii
- - there.
The double forms of the Past tense (one in », and anotlicr
in tn) are at present inexplicable. So are the double forms
of the Imperative, viz. the one in r, and the one in e. It
may, however, be remarked, that wherever the Imperative
ends in e, the Preterite has the form in m; thus, p(d-e=^
dig, pid-ema = dug . The only exception is the anomalous
form peneingodgi = dived. This prepares the future gramma-
rian for a division of the Kowrarega Verbs into Conjuga-
tions.
The last class of words that supply the materials of com-
ment are the Substantives. Herein , the lormation of tiie
plural by th(! addition of le , probably occurs in several ot
the Australian tongues. I infer this from many of those
words which we find in the vocabularies of languages where-
of tiie grannnar is unknown , and which are expressive ol
naturally plural objects ending in //, la, or /.
or Tin; vmvaoi; (»r riii: kaiti.ksnakio.
229
1. Star (st.ars) — piir-fc, pi-llc, pm-llc, in Pariikalla, Ai-
,i\v(in^'. and Yak-kuinl)an.
2. Firo (riauies) — lat-llu, ijnil-ht ^ in \V. Australian and
I'anikalla.
;{. Head (hair) — Uur-Je , Kncountor Bay. Horc wo learn
iimn tlio I'orins kar-{/a , iVom the Head of tlio (ilroat Anstra-
li;m l)ij;lit, and 7na-kiir-Ui, t'roni Adolaido, tliat the / is t'or-
litrn to the root.
4. Hands — marroiv-la in tlio IMolon^'lo dialect; and con-
trasted with murra in the Adehiide.
This, however, is merely a conjecture; a conjecture, how-
ovor, Avliich has a practical bearing;'. It sugjj^ests caution in
the coni))arison of vocabularies; since, by mistakin^^ an in-
tli>xi(tn or an attix for a part of the root, we may overlook
really existing; similarities.
Father Anjello's very brief p;rannnatical sketch of the Lim-
bakarajia language of Port Essington * exhibits, as far as
It };ncs, precisely the same prinr/jt/cs as Mr. ]\lacffillivray's
Kowrarcga; indeed, some of the details coincide.
Thus, the Limbakarajia personal pronouns arc —
/= nga-pi. We = nrpiri.
Thou =)i()ir. IVc l/vu -- arguri.
He, she, it = rjianat. Ye = uoie.
They -- vgahno.
Here the jii in ncja-pi is the pu in the Aiawong nt/n-ppo;
\h\ (jinn m gi(in-(il being, probably, the in in the Kowrarega
lna^=^lh(tt, this. Nyaimo, also, is expressly statcid to mean
miimj as Avell n^.Uicij, a fact wliich confirms the view taken
of kind.
As for tiie tenses of the verbs, they are evidently no true
tensps at all, but merely combinations of the verbal root,
and an adverb of time. In Limbakarajia, however, the ad-
verbial element precedes the verbal one. In Kowrar(>ga,
however, the equivalent to this adverbial element (probai)ly
a simple adverb modified in form so as to amalgamatii Avith
its verb, and take the appearance of an inflexion) follows
it — a difference of order, sequence, or position, upon whicdi
some philologists will, ])erhaps, lay considerable stress. ( )n
the contrary, however, languages exceedingly similar in
either respects, may ditt'er in the order of the parts of a
term; e. g. the German dialects, throughout, place the ar-
ticle before the noun, and keep it separate: whereas the
<iiven to Mr. Macf:^illivray by Mr. Jjimes Maraitlmr, and pretixod to tlio
Ms. Port Essington Vocabulary, alhuled to at [>. 157 of Vol. I.
230
KKMAKKS ON Til!; V(»rAlll[,AUIK.S
Scjvndiimviiin tongues not only inaki.' it follow, but incorjKi-
rate it with tlin substantivo witli wliicli it a^rcos. Ilcni-c, a tcnii
wliicli, if nioil(;ll<tl on tlic ( icrnian fasliion, should be hiii sti/. \)v.
t'onu's, in Scandinavian, so/en t^~ (/if sun. Anil this is but oni'
instance out of many. Finally, 1 may add that the prefix
a/K(, in tlu! j)rescnt tt;nse of the verb --c;//, is, jivrhaps, the
sann; affix viim in th(,' present tens(! of the Kowrare^a vcihs
Another point eonnectctd Avilh the coniparativo j)hil(il(i;;v
of Australia is the pecidiarity of its ))honetio system. Th''
sounds of /■ and .v are frecjuently wantinjj;. Hence, the pic-
sence of either of them in one dialect has been considcml
as evidence of a wide ethnolof^ical difference. Upon this
point — in the case of s — the remarks on the sound systems
of the Kowraroga and (lutbinp; are import.'int. The statcniciit
is, the .v of the one dialect becomes /// or As// (and rA) in tlic
otlier. Thus the Kn;i,lisli word hrcttst =^ si/sk , Kowrarci;.'!:
fyii-fi/if, Oudano', and the English oii/r/(/f//'r /Joa ( = aar'nm.
Kcnvrarega; vliarima ^ Oudang, — which of these two forms
is the older? Probably the (iudang, or the form in ///. If
so, the series of changes is remarkable, and by attemliii^'
to it we may sec how sounds previously non-existent may
become evolved.
Thus — let the original form for hrcast be //////. The first
change -which takes ])lace is the insertion of the sound ot'
//, making liju-lyu; uj)on the same principle which makes
certain Englishmen ^i\y (jyarch'n , /.ijf/uf, i\\\d s/ii/c// , \'oi' gar-
den, kind, and sky. The next change is for ly to bocomo
tsk. This we find also in English, where pkliire or /jhiijoor
is pronounced picls/iur, Sic. This being the change exhibitod
in the Gudang form lyi/fyii (pr. c/tooc/too, or nearly so), we
have a remarkable phonetic phenomenon, viz. the existence
of a compound sound (As7/) wherein s is an element , in a lan-
guage where s, otherwi^^e than as the clement of a coniponnd,
is wanting. In other words, we have a scmnd farmed nut tif
s, but not .s" itself; or (changing the expression still furtiieri
we have .s' in certain combinations, but not unconddncd.
Let, however, the change proceed, and the initial sound of
t be lost. In this case /sh becomes sh. A further change
reduces sh to s.
When all this has taken place — and there are many lan-
guages wherein the whole process is exhibited — the sound
of a hitherto unknown articulation becomes cvulvfd or deve-
loped by a natural process of growth, and that in a language
where it was previously wanting. The phenomenon, then,
of the evolution of ncAV simple sounds should caution us
against over-valuing phonetic differences. So should such
or Tiir, v<»Y.\<;i: <»r iiir; itArrr.i'.sNAKK.
231
facts as that of the closcsly allied dialocts of tlic (iiidan^
,111 1 Ku\vrarf'j,fa dilVcrin;^ from cadi otlicr by tlic ab.senco or
[iirscnc-o of .so iin[»ortant a soiiiul as that of s.
'[Iw. (■onn)araiivo abseiu-o, how(n'cr, of the sound oi' s, in
Australian, may bo further refined on in anotluir way; and
it may be ur^f^l that it is absent, not l)eeause, it has never
litcii developed, or ealled into existence, but because it has
ceased to exist. In tlm Latin t)f th(^ Auj^ustan ag'e as com-
[lared with that of the early Kejiublie, yw find the ,s' of words
like (irOos changed into /• (/irhor). The old Ilio-b (icrnian,
;ils(», and the Icelandic, as conij>ar(Ml with the j\[eso-(iothic,
(lues the same. Still the chanj^e only affects certain intic^e-
tional syllables, so that the original s being only partially
(lisplnced, retains its place in the language, although it oc-
curs in fewer words. In Austv.alian, where it is wanting at
all, it is wanting in Into: and this is a reason for believing
that its absence is referriblo to non-development rather than
t(i displacement. For reasons too lengthy too exhibit, 1 bcdieve
that this hatter view is nol applicable to Australian; the s,
when wanting, being undeveloped. In either case, liowever,
the plionctic differences between particular dialects are the
measures of but slight differences.
Now — with tliese ])r(diminary cautions against the overva-
luation of a})parent differences — we may compare the new (htia
tor the structure of the Kowrarega and Limbakarajia with
the received opinions respecting the Australian grannnars in
I
jrenerai
These refer them to the class of (({/(jliilinntc tongues, /. c.
toni,aios Avhercin the inflections can be shewn to consist of
separate words more or less incorporated or amalgamated with
the roots which they modify. It may be said that this view
is confirmed rather than impugned.
Now, what applies to the Australian grammars applies
also to Polynesian and the more highly-developed Malay
languages, — such as the Tagala of the Philippines, for in-
stance; and, if such being the case, no difference oi prin-
ciple in respect to their structure separates the Australian from
the languages of those two great classes. But the details,
it may be said, differ undoubtedly; and this is what w^e ex-
pect. Plural numbers, signs of tense, and other grannnati-
cal elements, are evolved by means of the juxtaposition of
miHar but not iflenlical elements, e. g. one plural may be
formed by the affix signifying tnanij ; another, by the affix
.^^ifrnifying tvitli or conjoinllij; one preterite may bo the root
yVi« a word meaning then; another the root pins a word mean-
ing there. Futures, too, may be equally evolved by the
2:\2
iii'.MAKKs O.N riii; v(»('.\iiri.AKii;«
incorporation or jiixf.'iposition of tlio word nicniiinj? afh-r, uy
tl.o word nioaniii;;' Iv-murroH'. All lliis makes tlic exact L-oin-
cidcnee of the details of intic.'etion tlio exception rather tluiii
the rul(!.
This doctrin(! j;oos farther than th(! mere broakinji-down
(d' the lines of (h'lnareation whitdi separate classes of laiiirui-
•fcs like the Australian from classes of lan^^iiajj^es like tip
]\fahayo-l'olynesian. It shctws how hoth may be (n'olved fron
monosyllabic tongues like the (^hineso or Siamese. The prcidf
that su(di is really the case lies ii. the sinularity of indivi-
dtial words, and consists in comparative tables. It is \m
len{;thy for the present pa[)er, the chief object of which is
to brin<; down tlio inferences from the undoubtedly {front
superficial ditt'er(>nces between the lan{;uages of the parts in
question to their proper h^vel.
In respect to th(> lujcubtilarica, the extent to -Nvldcdi the niin-
jysls which applies to the i;'rammar aj)plies to the vocables
also may be seen in the followiuj;' instance. The word hum!
]iijen(dumbo and Limbapyu is bin/ally. There is also in caih
lanju'uaji'e a second form — anhirt/ulk — \vh(>rein the iiu is
nnn-radical. So, also, is the tilk; since we find that armiiH:^
iriff(imh-alk, >i1intilfh'r = niun(h/-alh\ and /}nf/eri!--monf/ alk. Tliis
brings the root :; -hand to biry. Now this we can iind else-
where by looking; for. In the Liverpool dialect, b/r-/l.=:
/mud, and at Kinj^ George's Sound, peer = na/'/s. The com-
monest root, r ^ ftaiid in the Australian dialects, is w-a, <: ;/.
^lorotou Hay murrah Corio fnr-nnf/f/nclok
Karanla marra .riiougworong /'(ir-okg/idln
(Ui-tnura Mununnhidje miir-ni/jan
iiuira ]Moh)nglo mar-rowbt
murra Head of Bight merrcr
tn-murn I'arnkana marra
Sydney
i\Iudjc
AVcdliugton
Jiivcrpool
All this (lifters from the Port Kssington terms. FJb<in\ how-
ever, in the dialects there sjioken, =.«Y/r//'6'; luid forair/ii - ^
atn-ma-ivoor; wier , ioo , = palm in Kowrarega.
To complete the evidence for this latter word being the
same as the in-r of the other dialects and languages, it would
be necessary to shew, by examples, how the sounds of///
and tv interchange; and also to shew (by examples, also) how
the ideas of elbow, forearm, and hand do so. But as the pre-
sent remarks are made for the sake of illustrating a method,
rather than establishing any particular point, this is not ne-
cessary here ; a few instances taken from the names of the
parts of the human body being sufficient to shew the gene-
ral distribution of sonn; of the commoner Australian roots,
OF iiii; V'lVAui; <•!' nil; KAiri,KtHN.\Ki;.
233
and the iiinrn special fact of tlioir rxistonco in the nortliorn
ilialcfts :
Kn^iish
Tcnutnii^'
/mild
niKtinn'i'i/c
Peel Kivcr inn
Kanics hivy mitnciya
Kn^iisli
finil
Afitroton l^-iy
r/iidna
Miiii'tnii Island
IcntiiKi
Karaula
linnn
I'c.d Kivcr
linn
Lake .Mac-
linn
Miidjc
(illKI
quario
W( Hin^i'tcm
iliiiiiiinf/
.Ilinnjj;\\ iirifu^
gnen-oiig gnnl a
I.ivcrpiud
ilnnit
Corio
gi'ii-iniggnet nk
liMtliiirst
dill a
Colack
ken-nng-gnel-ok
lloraipar
Irliin-imiKj-if
l?i«;lit Iload
jiuiui
I.Mkc llind-
Jiii-nrrr
Parnkalla
idnu
iiiiirsh
Aiawonf;
dtiin
Muiiuinl)ldjo
Ijiii-iiulc
K. (Jcorj^'c's
(inn
.M(d(inglo
IJif -!/-{/!/
Hound
riii('fj;nrlii('.
(/run
C<»old Island
piny tin and
(iimrollcau
IJCtl-UIKJ-hC-
pinkan
(JtU'tl-U
Kii;;lisli
hair, heard
CJcxdd Island
kinram
.Mdi'ctou Tslaiul
ycrirng
W(dlinf>;t()n
urnn
Bijoiudunibo
yirkn
Karar'a
yerry
l{('},a'nt\s Lake
unran
Sydney
yaren
Lake Mac-
tviiruiig
I'ecd Uivc/
ierai
quario
Mndj;c
•
yarai
Kii;ilisli
eye
Jliong'worong
mrr-ing-gna-la
-Mdrcton Island
mel
l'ine<;'orine,
ma
Miii'cton Jiay
mill
(Jnurellean
mer-egnen-a
(iiidaug
etneri--=i
/A'-
lioraipar
mrr-ring y
brow
Jiake IHnd-
mi'r
Bijonolunibo
iiierdc —
eyelid
niarsli
H('jj;t'nt\s Lake
mil
Lake Shindy
merr-rnng
Karaula
mil
3Iurrunihidjo
mil
Mudje
mir
Hij,'lit Head
mail
Corio
mer-gnrl-
ok
K. ()Ieor<^e\s
mial
C.laek
mer-fjiien
-ok
Sound
L)autgart
mer-gna-nCH
■
234
IlKMAKKS ON TIIK VOCABULAKIES
En},'liHli
Instill
Sydney
yera
IMorcton Island
lii/u
AVcllington
irang
^forctftn Bay
(hwr
3IununiI)idj(!
yecran
Lake ^fac-
Una
CJoold Island
ecru
qiiario
English
tongue
Lake ]\[ac-
Iftlan
IMorcton Bay
dulan
((uario
Ecgcnt's T^ako
tallrng
Sydney
dulan
Karaula
tulley
Peed I^ivcr
talc
Goold Island
lain
K. (Jcorgo's
lalicn
Sound
II'')?
English
ear
^rt)roton Bay
hhina
Kowrarega
kotvra
Karaula
hinna
Sydney
kurc
IVcI Ifiver
hine
Liverj)ool
kurc
Batliurst
benang-arei
Lake 31ac-
ngurcong
(Joold Island
jiinna
quano
The Miriam Vocabulary belonf^s to a different class, viz.
the Papuan. It is a dialect of language first made known
to us through the Voyage of the Fly, as spoken in the is-
lands Erroob, Maer, and Massied. Admitting this, we col-
late it with the North Australian tongues, and that, for the
sake of cotiirasi rather than cojnparison. Irlere, the philolo-
gist, from the extent to which the Australian tongues differ
from each other, notwithstanding their real affinity, is pre-
pared to find greater differences between an Australian and
a Papuan language than, at the first glance, exists. Lotus
verify this by reference to some words which relate to the
human body, and its parts.
Enoi.isii.
Nose
Lips
C/irrk
Chin ,
Navel
Eye
Skin
Vein
Bone
Sore
Eunoon.
pit
MaSSIED. KoWUAKEOA. (il'DANO.
piehi
anka
jaw
haag
ihu
kopor
ihu
kupor kupor
dana
egur
kerer
lid
bada
kircr
piti
baga
ibu
kupar
dana
kerur
rid a
bada
angka
baga
ebu
kopurrn
dana
equora
kerur
OF THK VOYAGE Ol' TIIK UATTLESNAKE.
235
Kl
HI
"I'J-
arci
la
class, viz.
ade
known
1 in
the is-
lis, we col-
lat, for the
the pliilolo-
igues diffor
ity, is pre-
(ralian and
sts. Let us
ilate to the
Few Australian vocabularies are thus similar — a fact
which may bo said to prove too much; since it may lead to
jnlVrence that tiio so-called Papuan tongue of Torres Strait
is really Australian. Nevertheless, although I do not abso-
hitely deny that such is the case, the evidence of the whole
body of ethnological facts — c. f/. those connected with the
moral, intellectual, and physical conformation of the two
populations — is against it.
And so is the philology itself, if we go further. The
Erroob pronouns arc.
Mc = ha
Mine = fi(( ra
you = ma
your = ma ra
his = cla
all of which are un-Australian.
Are we then to say that all the Avords of the table just
jjivon are borrowed from the Australian by the Papuans, or
I'kc versa? No. Some belong to the common source of the
two tongues , pit r= nose being, probably, such a word; whilst
(ithers are the result of subse(pient intercourse.
Still, it cannot absolutely be said that the Erroob or Mi-
riam tongue is not Australian also, or vice versil. Still less,
is it absolutely certain that the former is not transitional be-
tween the New Guinea language and the Australian. I be-
lieve, however, that it is not so.
The doubts as to the philological position of the Miriam
are by no means diminished by reference to the nearest un-
equivocally Papuan vocabulary, viz. that of Redscar 15ay.
Here the difference exceeds rather than falls short of our
ex[iectations. The most important of the few words which
coincide are
EUIIOOB.
hcrem
mil =■ lips
eba = penis
pagas -^ upper arm
English. Redscar 15av.
Jfeail quara
Moufh mao
Testielcs abu
S/iouhkr jxiga
On the other hand, the Redscar Bay Avord for throat, hato,
coincides with the Australian harla of the Gudang of Ga))o
York. Again, a complication is introduced by the word
biiiii-mata = eychrow. Hero mnta-eyo, and, consequently,
huiii=hi'o\v. This root re-appears in the Erroob; but there
it means the ei/chall , as shewn by the following words from
Jukes' Vocabulary.
Eye
Eyebrow
irkeep
irherp moos — - eye-hair
236
KF.MAKKS ()\ Tin: VOCAIULAUIKS
Ejie ball
Eyelid
pom
poni-pow = cyehnll-hair
Probably the truer meaning of the Ilcdscar ]iay word is
eyeball .
No inference is safer than that which brings the popula-
tion of the Louisiade Archipelago, so far, at least, as it i.s
represented by the Vocabularies of I^rierly Island and Du-
chateau Island, frojn the eastern coast of New Guinea.
What points beyond were j)copled from Louisiade is another
question.
For the islands between New Indand and New Caledonia
our data arc lamentably scanty; the list consisting of —
1. A short vocabulary from the Solomon Isles.
2. Short ones from ]\Iallicollo.
3. The same from Tanna.
4. Shorter ones still from Erromanga and
5. Annatom.
6. Cook's New Caledonian Vocabulary.
7. La Jiillardiere's ditto.
The collation of these with the Louisiade has led me to
a fact which I little expected. As far as the very scanty
data go, they supply the closest resemblance to the Loui-
siade dialects, from the two New Caledonian vocabularies.
Now New Caledonia was noticed in the Appendix to the
Voyage of the Fly (vol. ii. p. ;U8) as apparently having clo-
ser philological affinities with Van Diemen's Land, than that
country had with Australia; an apparent fact which induced
me to write as follows : "A proposition concerning the Tas-
manian language exhibits an impression , rather than a de-
liberate opinion. Should it, however, be confirmed by fu-
ture researches, it will at once explain the points of phy-
sical contrast between the Tasmanian tribes and those of
Australia that have so often been insisted on. It is this —
that the affinities of language bet /een the Tasmanian and
the New Caledonian are .stronger than those between the
Australian and Tasmanian. Tliis indicates that the stream
of population for \^an Diemen's Land ran round Australia,
rather than across it." Be this as it may, the I'emark, with
our present scant*' materials, is, at best, but a suggestion
— a suggestion, however, whii'h would account for the phy-
sical appearance of the Tasmanian being more New Cale-
donian than Australian.
The chief point of resemblance between the Louisiade
and the New Caledonian is taken from the numerals. In
each system there is a prefix , and in each that prefix begins
OF THE VOYAGE OP THE KATTLESNAKE.
237
Avitli a labral letter — indeed the wa of New Caledonia and
the pahi of Louisiade seein to be the same roots.
1.
paiho-tia
CiKik's Now (/alodonla wa-gceaing
oua-nait
3.
Hriorly Island
C.ok's Now V,
Lii liillardiore's do.
Bi'iprly Island paihc-tiian
Cook's Now Calodouia wa-tocn
La JJillardioro's do. oua-tgiiion
liricrly Island ]).'ii]io-liina
Cnok's Now (Jalodonia wa-iinini
La Jiiliardioro's do. oua-nnahn
7.
Uricrly Island palio-pik
Clink's Ni'w (Jalodonia wa unini-noo
La Billardioro's do. oua-naim-dou
9.
UriiTly Island pailio-siwo
Clinks Now (Jalodonia wa-nnini-haook
La liillardiore's dp. oua-naini-bait
2.
palii-wo
wa-roo
oua-dou
pailio-pak
Ava-nd»aook
oua-tl)ait
6.
pailio-won
wa- iinini-goook
ou-naini-guik
8.
pailio-wan
wa-unini-gain
ou-naini-guein
10.
paiho-awata
wa-imoon-aiuk
ona-donn-hic
Tlie Redsear Bay numerals are equally instructive. They
take two forms: one with, one without, the prefi: in un\ as
recorded by Mr. Macgillivray.
Tiiis system of prefix is not peculiar. The Tanna and
Mallioollo numerals of Cook are —
lO.NCiT.ISH.
Tanna.
Mam.icom.o
Ono
r-oodoo
tsookace
'i^vo
ka-roo
e-ry
Throe
k a -liar
o-roi
Four
kai-jdiar
o-hats
Five
k-rooruni
o-roouni
Six
nia-r-oodoo
tsookaooe
SoV(Ml
n»a-k-roo
gooy
Eight
nia-ka-har
hoo-roy
Nine
nia-kai-phar
good-hats
Ton
nia-k-rcerum
seuearu
PI
I
238
KEMAUKS ON TIIK VOCAUULAUIES
Ilore, althouf^li tlio formations are not exactly regular, tlio
prefixion of an initial syllable is evident. So is the qninarv
character of the numeration. The preiix itself, however, in
the Tanna and Mallicollo is no labial, as in the Louisiado
and New Caledonian, but either A or a vowel.
The next fact connected with the Louisiade vocabularies
is one of greater interest. Most of the names of the dit-
ferent parts of the body end in da. In the list in qufstion
they were marked in italics ; so that the proportion they hoar
to the words not so ending was easily seen. Now it is only
the words belonging to this class that thus terminate. Else-
where the ending da is no commoner than any other.
What does this mean? If we look to such words as inatu-
da=:= f^yes, sopa-da --- lips, ma/ca-da = teeth, and some other
naturally plural names, we should infer that it was a sii,n,
of timnber. That this, however, is not the case is shewn by
the equivalents to tonrjue, none, and other sintjle mcnihers
where the affix is equally common. What then is its import?
The A?7icrican tongues help us here.
English
Head
Eye
Ear
Nose
Tongue
Hair
Hand
Foot
Enomsii
Head
Eye
Ear
Nose
T(tngue
Hand
Foot
MnAVA
na-guilo
ni-gccoge
iia-pagat(>
ni-onigo
no-giu'ligi
na-uiodi
ni-baagadi
no-gonagi
MOXA (1)*
nu-ciuti
nu-chi
nu-cioca
nn-siri
nu-ncno
nu-borc
ni-bope
AllIl'ONI
ne-iiialat
na-toele
MoKoisr
ni-cote
ne-otiguic
ua-pakoni
na-ccuta
na-poguona
MoxA (2)
nu-chuti
MoxA (3)
un-chiuti
nu-ki
nu-.sn*i
nu-iione
nu-bonpo
nu-nene
nu-borc
ni-bope
Now in these, and in numerous other American tongues,
the prefix is the possessive pronoun; in other Avords, there is
a great number of American languages where the caprccity
for abstracting the thing possessed from the possessor is so
slight as to make it almost impossible to disconnect the noun
from its pronoun. I believe, then, the affixes in question
* These are three cliftereut dialecta.
English.
Fnol
Li'g
Thujh
Ml/
yrri-
Eiirs
yitse
Enm
Hnir
Pure
Mnlllh
Tccl/t
Tmiuc
Ann
Fist
Head
Hero the
light, nf
nor yet
EXflMHII.
Hair
Hand
FlKll
Head
Eije
yiisp
Ttiiujiip
Teeth
Ear
Here
nation k
OF THE V(>YA(iK OV TIIK KATTI.K.SXAKK.
239
have a possessive power ; and am not aware that possessive
ailjuncts thus incorporfited have been recognised in any of
the languages for tnesu parts; indeed, they are generally
considered as American characteristics.
How far does their presence extend? In the New Cale-
donian vocabulary of La Billardiere we find it. The names
of the parts of the body all take an affix, which no other
class of words does. This is ffhn^ ffi'ffi, or (/hai , or other
similar combination of ff with a vow( . In \'an Diemen's
Land, an important locality, we find the following series of
words, which are submitted to the judgment of tlu^ reader.
Fnol
Leg
Thiilh
Mhj
yrck
Ears
yiise
Ki/rs
Hiiir
Fare
Mniilh
IWlh
Ttmyiic
Arm
FisI
Head
Wkstehn Tasmaniax.
Inla
pooa = piya =^ posteriors, lirnmer I.
tula :=: turi =rr kuoc , Jiruincr I.
cawara-ny
(Ionia
lowli-na
nio-na
pullatonla = matara-piilnpnlura == eyelashes , liriorly I.
l)aroata
])alani-na
manrahlo
ca-iiia
yannalople = yinge-da, lirierly I.
tnlla-na
alree
reaunema-na
pulboa-ny
Hero the termination 7hi appears elsewhere, as in ?f)ematia =
light, naba(/ee-}ia = sun -^ but by no means so fre(pumtly,
nor yet with such an approach to regularity.
ExdMSII,
CincuLAR Head
lluir
parba
Hand
rabal-ga
Flint
rabiic-ka
Head
o\vuc-ka
Ei/r
niamoric-ca
yose
rowari-ga
Tinigtie
inamana — mi men
Teeth
cawna
Ear
cowanrig-ga
Here however, it must not be concealed that the termi-
nation ka, or ga, occurs in other words, such as tenal-ga
240
KE.MAUKS ON THK VOCAHULAUIKS
= laugli, tar-ga ^= cry, teiri-ga = walk, lamunika = see.
Tlieso, however, arc verbs; and it is possible (indeed pro-
bable) that the k or g is the same as in the precedinj^' .sub-
stantives, just as the m in su-m and ii-iiL is the m in nwm.
ftw, and i^ii. Still, this will not apply throughout; c. y. tli'-
words like lalli-ga = kangaroo, para-ka = flower, and others.
EnHLISH. EaSTKKN TA.SMANIAN.
Eye Icpe-na
Ear pelvcrata
Elbow rowoUa
Foot langa-na
Fist trcAv
Head pathe-na-naddi
Hair cetha-na
Hand anama-na = ncnia-da, liriuner I.
Knee nannabona-na
Ley lathana-nia
Teeth yan-na = yinge-da, Brierly I.
Tongue me-ua = inimo-na, liruiner 1.
Chin canip-na
Neck Icpcra
Breast wagley
Here, the number of other words ending in na is very
considerable; so considerable that, if it were not for the
cumulative evidence derived from other quarters, it would
be doubtful whether the na could legitimately be considered
as a possessive affix at all. It may, however, be so even
in the present instance.
To these Ave may add two lists from the Lobo and Utanata
dialects of the south-western coast of New Guinea.
Enolisii
Utanata
Loiio
Arms
too
nima-ngo
Back
nrimi
ru.suko-ngo
Heard
iiiiuoovo
Ticlly
iuiamv
kainboro-iigo
Breast- female
Ttreast-male
auw 1
paioty)
giugo-ugo
Chech-
awamu
wafiwirio-ngo
Ears
ianic
Eyebrows
Eyes
uiatata-ngo-waru
mame
matatoto-ngo
Fingers
Foot
uinia-nga-sori
niouw
kai-iigo
Hands
too-maro
iiiuia-ngo-uta
OF THE VOVAGE 01' Till". KAT TI.ESNAKE.
2U
Hair
Head
A'nrc
Month
Nose
Neck
Tongue
Thigh
Teeth
Toes
Finally, we have the long, and evidently compound forms
of the Corio, Colack, and other Australian dialects; long and
cvidontly compound forms which no hypothesis so readily
txpiains as that of the possessive adjunct; a phenomenon
which future investigation may shew to be equally Oceanic
and American.
oeirio
inoiKi-ufi^-fnni
oopiunv
inono-ngo or
iripu
kiii-iigo-woko
irie
orio-ugo
birimboc
sikaio-ngo
eiiui
gara-iig
mare
karlo-ngo
ai
willaiiiiiia
titi
riwoto-ngo
nisora
MOTES AND ADDENDA.
The vocabularies of the Rattlesnake arc (l) Australian, (2)
Papuan.
The former were for the parts about Capo York, t. e. the North-
crraost part of Aiistralia , and also the part nearest the Papuan
area. The Kowrarega was the form of speech best illustrated.
The Papuan vocabularies were for the Louisiade Archipelago ;
wholly new as data for a very important and interesting area.
The following paper, connected with the remarks on the in-
cnrporation of the possessive pronoun with certain substantives,
though on an Asiatic language may find place here.
16
i -v.
! *
ON A ZAZA AOCABIHAIIY.
UKAD
BKFOUE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY'.
MAY Tin: -I'MiU.
The followinj.? vocubulary is one taken by Dr. H. Saml-
with from Ji Kurd of the Zaza tribe, one of the rudest of
the whole Kurd family, and one for which we liavc no ))lii-
lologieal spceiincns.
l!]X(iI,ISU. Za/.a.
hCHtl svYV-min.
ri/rs tcliiui-(v«m.
fi/ehro/i'S \mv\n'-min.
nose zinj('-?Hm.
moustache siniiU'-H»//<.
heard ardi,sh('-/H//j.
liUK/iie zoan('-HJ?«.
Icelh dildoiu''-?/)//*.
ears '^wsXxv-min.
ftnijers in<ilslit('-»u'«.
arm \)\v/.ih-min.
legs \ih\y;l'-mifi.
father ])'n'-min.
mother \ni\i-mi/i.
sister wtx'imiii.
brother hrai fniii.
the l/ae/i paslitiai-;«//K
hair pore-w//*.
cold sordo.
hot auroghornid.
sun rDJslnvcslio.
moon liaslnne.
star sterrai.
mountain khoo.
KxdM.sii.
Za/a.
sea ali«t.
vatlei/ dorei.
eygs l-oiki.
a fowl k('r<;lii.
welcome tcboxairoiiii'.
come beiri.
stay rdslie.
bread uoan.
water awe.
cliild kati'hinio.
virgin koiiiiina.
orphan lajekiuiM.
morning sliaurtiAv.
tree dori.
iron asin.
h<ire aurisli.
grei/hound taji.
pig kliooz.
earth ert.
fire adir.
stone see.
silver seni.
strength koto.
sword shinislilr.
ON A ZAXA VOCAIUI-AKV
213
Kmii.isii. Za/.a.
,i /().!• krc'vcsli.
fliKj kiv('.
Iiiiiiiiiltjc zaraj.
milk slint.
Iiitrsi' istor.
iiiiirr inaliiiu'".
iirnjii's I'slikijshi.
I'.NCi.isii. Zaza.
n hiiiisr k('.
(/rren kcsk.
cri/nsdit soor.
hhic/i siali.
)rhilr siipi'M).
sleep rausuino.
f/o slioori
The nioaniiift- of the teriiiination -mhi lias been explained
bv Pott and Jiudigcr in their Kurdiaclw Siiuh'cn. It is the
possessive }>ronoun of the first person = t/uj = ?neus -- f'fiob',
i^c; so that sere-;/i/>/ = caput-wtv/w (or ffwi), and pie-;/<m:=-
pater- Wi'tv/.s' (or ??i(i).
So little was the Zaza who supplied Dr. Sandwith with
tlic list under notice able to conceive a /icind or fulhet\ ex-
cept so far as they were related to himself, or soniethin<»-
ilse, and so essentially concrete rather than abstract were
liis notions, that he combined the pronoun with the substan-
tive whenever he had a pari o/ llie /niman body or a di'fjnr
iif consanguinitij to name. It is difficult to say liow far this
nmalf;aniation is natural to the uncultivated understanding,
/. c. it is difficult to say so on ii priori grounds. That the
condition of a person applied to for the purpose of making
.1 glossary out of his communications is different from that
under which we maintain our ordinary conversation, is evi-
(lont. Ordinary conversation gives us a certain number of
words, and a context as well. A glossary gives us words
only, and disappoints the speaker who is familiar with
contexts.
If this be true, imperfect contexts, like the combinations
pk'-miit , &c. should be no uncommon occurrences. Nor are
tlioy so. They are pre-eminently common in the Anu^.rican
languages. Thus in Mr. Wallace's vocabularies from River
tapes the list run thus: —
Kxdi.isn. irAixAMiiF.r. Jriu. iiAunf:.
head (my) (Vj-bida /r7<r»-koreu //o-(hisia
mmlh (my) c/'j-uuina lcli(t-\\\ ?jf)-uunia.
«&c. &c. &c. &c.
similar illustrations being found in almost every American
glossary.
In his Appendix to Macgillivray"s Voyage of the Rattle-
snake, the present writer has pointed out instances of this
amalgamation in the languages of the Louisiade. He now
16*
244
OS A ZAZA V()(;ai»i;lakv.
adds, tliat lio liiis also found it in some of the s.'iin[»l()8 ol'tliJ
ordinary ()ij)8y lan^uago of England, as ho has taken it fniinl
thn n\outli of Knglisii Gipsies.
Ho considers it to be a personal rather than a phiiolo;:
cal characteristic, certain individuals having a min'mwu]
amount of abstracting power, and such individuals belli: |
inordinately conunon amongst the American Indians.
ON THE PEHSONAL PRONOUNS AND
M MEllALS OF THE MAELICOLLO ANl)
ERllOMANGO LANGUAGES.
BY THE REVEKE^ID C. ABRAHAM.
COMMIXICA TKI) WITH IIKMAHKS
TO THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY
BY Du. 11. G. LATHAM.
APRIL
22. 1853.
Mai.i.icoi.o ou Sesok?
Mallicolo.
Enolish.
Mam.icolo,
Enqlisu.
!ii(iu,
I
urare,
child.
Umi-im ,
you.
(iramommt ,
father.
Ud-it,
he.
7icbok ,
a man.
mimiihl,!
(Irivan 1
exclus.
wc two. . ,
luclus.
bauenunk,
rawbaiuk.
a male,
a female.
kha-miihl,
you two.
the siin , also
uu-l(iroi,
you three.
mar ill,
their name for
im-tm'atz ,
you four.
God.
ilra-(in ,
we three.
iepc ,
worship.
(Ini-lovatz.
Ave four.
nakambu ,
eivoi ,
fire,
yes.
si-knl ,
one.
emwe.
not.
Mta ,
r-roi,
two.
three.
nelumbai ,
tatamni ,
know.
e-valz ,
four.
(Iratiban ,
go.
I'-rimn ,
live.
uloi ,
language.
mkai,
six.
amprcusi ,
see.
ii'hi-ti ,
seven.
Hpen agene ,
shoot arrows.
ivhi-vnlz,
eight,
nine.
to pcrilo nai
bar a , 1
throw stones.
f^i'igeap,
ton.
no kani wan-
gas isank,
!
I eat good food.
240
<iN' iiir, im;us(»nai, ani» mmki; ai.s ok thk mamjcoi.i.u
]•
KllKDMANOO.
«:11 as
KllUOMANdO.
V.m;\.\r*\i,
KUKOMANOO.
Kn<1M!,I1.
..lit list
/ Itll ,
1.
/(OSI'IIIJII ,
we.
Mallifol
A//. ,
you.
kimiiiiiu ,
y*'-
cU'll el'
ijli,
he.
inint ,
tliey.
4 iin ii
run -ill 11.
my.
nijiuundliUH ,
ten.
The t
rnnini-fti/t,
thy.
inlands
ciiii-ii ,
bis.
tinhu ,
Gotl.
Krskino
nnniH-hos ,
onr.
II III limits,
spirit.
linll of
vtmuii-kimi ,
your.
finiicn
fatiier.
1 licyiic.
Clin vditi ,
th(!lr.
inn uitv,:>.
son.
siii-iiiioii ,
tills.
linniiti ,
mother.
I'm;. Tan
siii-iii'in/ii' ,
that.
I'Irmrlitlliiri ,
man.
',■ !h-ii
araiiitii ,
j;o»i(l.
(ill in cs 11 ,
thinjj.
f ./. . k iril
llri'f. k> ll'
lafjrnuhuki ,
bad.
<•»,
yes.
lire . kari
(inii ,
no.
.,-•. , liii (?
SI til 11 van ,
ono.
nitrdnij,
eat.
'CI. ka-Hi
. Jil. kali:
(In rii,
two.
/iiiinii/iii/ii,
(h'ink.
,,■,,• . k- 1:1
/ ;. . k.i-rii
Irsfil ,
throo.
iildisr ,
Hoe.
inniilu-nil ,
four.
fiiniinl .
eyes.
Mr. A
sii/iii-riiiij,
live.
Irhrliinlo/i ,
iinj^er.
ill.' y,ai
sikiii ,
six.
IVdl'lllil'llllKJ ,
nose.
wjiicb it
sii/iii-riiiinaro,
seven.
ti'lanijiiiil ,
ear.
Ulh ]■
sii/iii-riinlrsal ,
oi<;ht.
himjiunl ,
hair.
liiolo SI
snkii-rimcndari(t
, nine.
/ii/i()ini' ,
name.
-liiii/ in
know ,
II 1
Since these vocabularies were laid before tlie Society, a
".Journal of a ('ruise among tlie Islands of the Western Pii-
cifie," by Capt. .1. E. Erskine, R. N., has been published.
This shows tlie sources of the preceding lists; since the bishop I
of New Zealand accompanied the expedition, and succeeded
in taking back with him, on his return, some youths fori
the purposes of education.
The class to which these vocabularies belong has never
been, sufficiently for the purposes of publication, reduced
to writing, nor is any member of it known to scholars in
general, in respect to its grammatical structure. This, how-
ever, will probably not be the case much longer, since Capt.
Erskine has placcil the materials for the study of the Anei- 1
turn (Annatom) language in the hands of Mr. Norriss, wl
is prepared for its investigation. Neither has the class been I
wholly neglected. A granunar of the Tanna (an allied lan-
guage) was drawn up by Mr. Heath, but it has not been
published, and is probably lost. Dr. Pritchard, who had
seen extracts from it, writes , that it contained a (riinil il^
and ,^)
Ll,l,M'()l,I,(t
we.
tli.«y.
toil.
God.
sj)irit.
father.
son.
mother.
iiinn.
thing.
ycH.
no.
oat.
drink.
HOC.
oves.
finger.
nose.
ear.
hair.
name.
! tlie Society, a
lie AVcstorn Pa-
been published,
since the bisiiop
, and succoedt'd
onie voutlis for
donp; lias never
cation , reduced
ti to scholars in
ire. This , ho^v•
g-er, since Capt.
dy of the Auei-
r. Norriss, who
s the class been
I (an allied Ian-
it has not been
[ihard, Avho had
lined a /rimil »>
.\Mt KiiiuiMAxrto I a\<;ia<ii:m.
217
«,II jis a s/iif/Kfi(r, a tfin// , and a plural nuniber. The pre-
. lit lis* elucidates this. The iriniil imiiiber (so-caliedj of the
)|;illicoIo is nieri'ly th(f personal proiitiim jihis the numeral II;
, nh eli'nient beinj; s<> nioditied as to ^ive the appearance
ut an iuHeetion.
The following tables exhibit ihe numerals of certain other
I«!iui(ls in the nei;;hb(»urIi(»o(l. They aic t.'iken from (Japtain
Krskiiic's work, in which reference is made tt) a "Descrip-
tion of the Islands in the Western Pacific Ocean, by A.
Clieyne." This has not been examined by the pr(\seiit writer.
Tana.
I'm . . .
k I ML . .
ki liai. .
ko 1.. . .
ki li iiiii
III! (•') . .
k.i-iti lO
kaliin VI
k" 1.. CO
ka-rli iiin'
Foxr
l.l'SI .
lO'll .
lu. . .
lima .
OHM. .
litil . .
v:li II .
iva . .
laiiLja
XA'
Isr.i; ot-
. I'l.NKS. 1^:a
. 1 1. . .
.VII , .
. Vf I I .
. I .
, t;i-lilic
. Ilol.'l ,
. IIO-llll
. IMI-llt'li. Illlll
, iio-lu'ii , In ,
I'l-.A.
I ilii . |>rirli:i , ,
I
kilii . . .
Hill k . ,
llllllllllllll
lii-;iilii .
Ill I.
Inlll
lit ,
liiiiii
Irilii
iiii.
Vi:\fn;\.
Iii'In . . . ,
III' Ink. .
lil-kllllM .
lO'llnrk.
n.'-yrii
|>ii liils
Mill |i:i Illlll
liiiii wi'l . . |iai ai .
niiii-w "Ink |i:ii''iiMi
riiiii-\vr\ I'll |p:il •m'li
niiii |ii>liil |i;ir lull
>iu. ilr k.in. lima . li'- lu'iiiirli' |Miii iluk |ia-iiii
Hat. u». TiiiT.
|ini' II . . rlias.
|i:ir inn , lil-i'li>,
ii.'li' nin lillll'i-lf.
ji.ll liii . rk-cli'.
. lilii.
. rlili Ifiiicn.
. liiiMi '.; riiicii.
. kiiiicntji'mrn
. -ko liiii'iiuii.
. Iiio ijPl'.
Mr. Abraham's IMallicolo re})resents the same lau^'uage with
i1h' y.allicolo vocabulary of ('aptain CouU's Voyages, with
wliiel' it })rotty closidy agrees.
llLs Mrromang'o is men; i)(!culi;ir. S7////==: six r:= the jMal-
liiolo siiLdi, which is, itscdf, nearly the .v/7,y//= one. The
-rinij in suku-r/////, too, is the .Mallicolo rimn. This wo
know, from the analogies of almost ail the languages of
I'lilynesia and the Indian Archipelago, to bo the word lima
^IhiikI. Ibmce e-rtma (Malliculo), Itand, and suku-;vV/<7
iKiToniango) ^= (y/;<' /aaid. The raf in menda-zv// is the IMal-
licolo -hals in v-ImiIs, the ^lalay i\\u-pa( =/'our. Dn-m is the
Mallicolo c.-ffj , there l)eing in each case a prefixed syllable.
The analysis of Icsal and sat/araii is less dear. Neither is
it certain how nyaraodleii . =. (en. The other numerals are
compounds. This, perhaps, is sufficient to show that the
dirt'erence between the numerals of tlie Mallicolo and Krro-
manji'o is a difference of a very superficial kind. So it is with
the Tana, Fotuna, and the first Uea specimens. We must
always remember that the first syllable is generally a non-
radical prefix.
In the Tana of the preceding table, the words for (), 7,
S 0, and 10, seem to be merely the words for 1 , 2, ){, 4,
and 5 repeated, and something of the same kind appears in
the first Ilea. Perhaps the representation may be imperfect.
At any rate the Tanna of (Jook's Voyage runs —
Or Errouau. The Nuia or rnimor iimner.ils ure the .saino.
248
ON THK PERSONAL I'KOXOUXH AND NLMK.KALS &C.
Eno.
Tanna.
Eno.
Tanna.
one .
r-eedee.
three
ka-har.
two .
ka-roo.
four.
kai-phar.
five .
k-reerum.
eight.
ma-ka-har.
six .
mrt-r-ecdeo.
nine .
mrt-kal-pliar.
seven
»irt-ka-roo.
ten. .
//m-k-reerum
Tlie same appears in the Balad of New Caledonia. Now
Cooks New Caledonian runs —
New Caledonian. Eno. New Caledonian.
wfl-geeaing. six. . wa-nnim-geeek.
Ex a.
o7ie .
two . jva-roo.
three tva-teen.
four. w«-mbaeek
five . wa-nnim.
seven wa-nnira-noo.
eight, rvn nnini-gain.
nine . wrt-nniin-baeek.
ten . . wa-iinim-aiuk.
The Yengen and Lifu vocabularies are not so different
but that the lu and kun of the one = the luk and yen of tlu-
other, as well as the lo and kiuu of the second Uea, and
the roo and gen of the Balad.
The importance of these non-radical syllables in tho nu-
merals has been indicated by the present writer in tho ap-
pendix to Mr. RI'Gillivray's 'Voyage of the Rattlesnake'
There we find several well-selected specimens of the langua-
ges of the Louisiade archipelago. The fact of certain affi-
nities between these and the New Caledonian is there indi-
cated. Each has its prefix. In each the prefix is a labial.
English. Two.
Louisiade patVie-tuan.
New Caledonia wa-teeu &c.
Now the Tana and Mallicolo tongues have a prefix also,
but this is not a labical. It is rather a vowel or k (guttural
or palatal). Here lies a diflF(!rence — a difference of detail.
Yet tho same change can now be shown to be within the
pale of the New Caledonian itself, as may be seen by com-
paring par-roo and par-gcn {pah-gen?) with A6'-luk and
/j6?-yen.
Ihe change from r to / creates no difficulty. In one of
the Tana vocabularies one -= li-ti , in another ^-eedee.
These points have been gone into for the sake of guard-
ing against such exaggeration of the differences between the
languages of the j)arts in question as the apparent differen-
ces in the numerals have a tendency to engender.
A M E R I C A.
(NORTH).
ON THE LANGUAGES OF THE OREGON
TElllUTORY.
IIKAD
BEFORE THE ETHNOLOGICAL SOCIETY
ON THE IlTII DECEMBEU 1844.
The languages dealt with arc those that lie between Rus-
sian America and New California. It is only, however, such
as are spoken on the sea-coast and on the American frontier
that are fairly known to us. Concerning some of the latter,
such as the Blackfoot, the notices are deferred. Liltle, in
the present state of our knowledge, can be attempted beyond
the mere verification of vocabularies. In his list, however,
of these, the writer has attempted to be exhaustive.
It is convenient o enumerate these vocabularies separately
and to proceed from North to South.
Qiieen Charlotte s Island. — Tiie two chief vocabularies are
Mr Tohnie's and Messrs Sturgin and Bryant's, in the Jour-
nal of the Geographical Society and the Archa?oh)gia Ame-
ricana respectively. They represent different dialects.
Enolish.
Sturgin & Hkyaxt.
Haidahok, Tolmik
Man
kcosct
kleilhat.sta
Woman
kna, ana
tsata
Canoe
cloo
kloo
Tobacco
qall
quil
IVitcr
hi .tie
hinitle
Sun
tzue
shaudlain
HI
;>
250
ON TItF. LANCilACiKS OF THK ORROON TFUIUTORY.
KnOLISH. jSTrHGIN & JJkVANT. HaLDAHOF , TOLMIE.
Moon
kulm
kliough
Bain
tull
tull
Snow
tull hatter
(111 an w
Dog
liali
hootch
Bear
tunn
tann
T.
caj^en
teca
Thou
tinkyah
tungha
With these, the few words in the Mithridates coincide
MlTlIRIDATES. TOI.MIE.
One sounchou squansiing
stung
klughunnil
71
wo
Three
stonk
sloonis
Chhnmi'injau. — IMr Tolmie's vocabulary — Journal of Oeo-
grnphieal Society. ^>poken between 53** 30' and 55" 30'
JN . \j,
Billcchnola. — Mr Tolmies vocabulary; ihid. Spoken on the
Salmon River.
Friendly Village. — In Mackenzie's Travels , we find a few
words from a tribe on the Salmon River. Their locality is
called by Mackenzie the Friendly Village. By the aid of
Mr Tolmie's vocabularies, we can now place this hitherto
unfixed dialect. It belongs to the Billechoola tongue.
Knomsh.
Fkiendly Village.
Billechoola.
Salmon
ziniilk
shimilk
Bog
watts
watz
House
zlaachle
shmooV
Butk-tnat
zemnez
Cedar -hark -lilunkc I
tzumnii
Beaver
conloun
coulouu
Slone
dichts
quilstolomick
Water
ulkan
kullah
Mat
gistcom
stuchom
Bonnet
ilcaette
kayeeto
Filz-Hngh Sound. — For these parts we possess only the
numerals, They coincide most with the Haeltzuk, a lan-
guage that will next be noticed. The termination in slum
is common to the Fitz-Hugh Sound and the Blackfoot nu-
merals.
English,
(wo.
F. Sound,
malscum
Haeltzuk ,
malook.
ON Tin: LAN(iu.\ni:.s of thk oukoon tkuiutouy.
251
English ,
F. Sound,
Haeltzuk,
three.
utascum.
yootook.
English ,
/'. Sound,
Haeltzuk,
Billechooln ,
four.
nioozcum.
moak.
nioash.
English ,
/'. Sound,
Haeltzuk ,
Billechoola ,
five.
thokaesciim
skeowk.
tzeiuch.
English,
F. Sound,
Haeltzuk,
six.
kitliscum.
katlowk.
English ,
F. Sound,
Haeltzuk ,
seven.
atloopooskum
raalthlowsk.
English ,
F. Sound,
Haeltzuk,
ten.
highioo.
.aikas.
llaellznk. — Mr TolmiGs vocabulary. Spoken from 50" 30'
to 53" 30' N. L. — Journal of Geograph. Soc.
Quadra and Vancouver's Island — Noolka Sound. — For those
parts we have several vocabularies.
1. The Numerals. — From Dixon — Miihridates, iii., 2, 115.
2. King Geo e's Sound. — The Numerals, Mith., iii., 2,
llf).
3. Mozimi's MS. J'ocabulanj. — See 3/ith., iii,, 2.
4. Captain Cook's Vocahidary. — This is comparatively co-
pious. It represents the same language with the three pre-
ceding.
5. The Tloaquatch vocabulary of Mr Tolmie. Jonrn. of
(kog. Soc. —This certainly represents, as is truly stated by
Dr. Scouler, the same language as the Nootka-Sound voca-
bulary of Cook.
English. Cook's Nootka. Tolmik's Tlaoquatcu.
Ski/ naas
Mountain noohchai
House niahtai
Paddle oowhalibie
Canoe shapats
Water chaiik
Go cho
naase
uotcheh
maas
oowhapic
tshapjtits
tcliaak
tclia-alche
252
ON THK LANGUAUES OF THE OUECiON TEUUITOUY,
I
Knomsh.
Cook's Nootka.
Tolmie's Tlaoquatcu.
Run
kuinmiitchchut
kumitkok
Bow
moostatte
moastatit
Arrow
tscehatte
tzeliatite
Knife
kotyok
tzokquaeek
Man
tanass
tanais
6. Straits of Fnca. — A short vocabulary taken duririf^
tlio voya;j:(3 of tlio Siilil y Mcxicana — Arcliccol. Amer., ii.^
300. Is not this INIozino'sV
7. The Wakash vocabuhiry of Jewitt. — Archceol. Amer.,
ii. ;?06.
English.
Water
Ski/
Stars
Moon
Sun
Ear
FrcA.
ihaac tchaak
tacuihamach naase
uliusac taastass
ilajudshashitle hopnlh
dagiua tlopil
Pipi
Tlaoquatch. Wakash,
chahak
sieyah
tartoosc
oophelth
ooplietlh
parpee
h'awHcheu. — Spoken at the entrance of Trading? River
opposite Vancouver's Island. Mr Tolmie's vocabulary. —
See Journal of Geograph. Societ.
Noosdalum. — Spoken in Hood's Channel. — Ibid.
The Atna of Mackenzie. — This we may now place. It re-
sembles the Noosdalum, Avith dialectal differences.
Noosdalum.
sohwioken •
slieoakatso
skyauw
skncha
kah
spilchun
lilkaa
halaitan
schomotim
ytsh tziniaan
In Baer's Statisdsche mid Ethnographische Nachrichien i'lher
die Bussischen Besitznngcn an dcr Nordwestkiisie von Amcriku,
we iind a second vocabulary named Atna. This is spoken
on the Copper River in Russian America, and represents a
different languaoe from the Atna of Mackenzie. Both, how-
ever, belong to the same* group. The plausible mode of
English.
Atnah.
Man
scuynlouch
Woman
smosledgonsk
Beaver
schugli
Dog
scacah
Water
shaweliquoih
Plains
spilela
Here
tldaelych
Iron
souconniang
Bow
isquoinah
Arrow
squaili
This is inaccurate — See following papers.
ON THK LANfiUAtJES OF THE OKEUOX TEKIUTOKY.
253
JkcoI. Amer.,
accounting for this coincidence, is to suppose that two tribes
named themselves fncri, which throughout the Athnbascar
lanffuages is expressed by the root t-n, as dinii/f, /enni,
tiHiin, &.C.
Squallycnnish. — Spoken at Puget's Sound. J\[r Tohnie in
T. a. S.
C/wnoo/i. — For tiie important hmguages of tlic Chenook
or Fhitliead Indians on the river Columbia, we have the
fullovving (la fa:
1. Franchere's vocabulary; Arc/ueol. Americana, u., 379.
2. Parker's vocabulary; communicated in M. S., by A.
Gallatin to I)r Prichard.
3. Cathlascou of Tolmie, J. G. S.
4. Chenook of Tolmie, ibkf.
Of these vocabularies the Chenook of Parker and Fran-
chcre coincide closely. Parker's Chenook, compared with
the two vocabularies of Tolmie , agrees most with the Cath-
lascou.
Kalapooiah. — This tribe is placed by Parker on the Mul-
toinah river. According to Tolmie, their language is spo-
ken on the Wallamat Plains.
1. Tolmie's vocabulary. J. C S.
2. Parker's vocabulary. M. S. from Gallatin to Dr Prichard.
The two vocabularies represent one and the same language.
Okanagan. — Spoken on Fraser's liiver. Mr Tolmie's vo-
cabulary. The Okanagan vocabulary enables us to fix the
following one :
The Salish. — This is an anonymous vocabulary from Du-
ponceau's collection. Arclioiolog. Americ, ii, 306. It is evi-
dently closely akin to the Okanagan.
English.
Salisii.
Okanagan.
Man
ckeltJlniaiu^
IVoiHClH
^ukulthliineiloocb
Canoe
'tleagh
althleim
Stars.
ko'kasinh
jhooos
Rain
steepais
tepais
Snow
araaikut
raakoot
Water
saioolkh
sauwulh
Mountain
aitzumkumniok
atzhnuiok
Leer
atsooleea
Roebuck
klatzecnim
Bear
c'.summaitshui
skummachist
Wolf
n'tsseetsan
nutzetzim
One
neo
uuchs
Two
essel
uskul
254
I
i
•'i
h
^
f)N THE
LAN(JU.\(IE8 OF
THE OKEdON TEUIUTOKY
Knolish.
Sai-ish.
Okanagan.
Three
tsailliis
kaalthlcis
Four
inos
inoas
Five
tseel
koheil
Seven
scespil
sheespil
Ten
opan
opnniot
h'likctat. Spoken between Fort Nez Perce's, Mount liai-
nier, and the Columbia Falls.
1. Mr Tolmie's vocabulary,
2. Mr Parker's vocabulary JNI. S. from Gallatin to Dr
Prichard.
These represent allied dialects of the same language.
Shahapfa?!, Nez Perce s. — It is truly stated by (iallatin
that the Shahaptan and Kliketat languages are allied.
1. Mr Tolmie's vocabulary.
2. Mr Parker's vocabulary M. 8. from Gallatin to Or
Prichard.
JamkaUic. Spoken near the sources of the Wallamat, Mr
Tolmie's vocabulary.
Umpqua. — On the river so called. Mr Tolmie's voca-
bulary.
This is the most southern point for vhich we possess Ore-
gon vocabularies.
Four more vocabularies complete the enumeration of our
data for the parts in question.
1 . Shoshonie or Snake Indians. — The first is a southern itr
central one, the Shoshonie or Snake vocabulary, collected
by Say, and representing a language south of that of the
^ez Perces. Archa^ol. Americ. , ii. 306.
2. Sussee. — The Sussee of Umfreville, is either spoken
within the Oregon Territory, or within the districts imme-
diately to the north of it.
3. The Nagail — Sec Mackenzie's Travels.
4. The Tacidli — See Archoiol. Americ, ii. 305.
Such are the vocabularies for the Oregon Territory of
North America. In number they amount to forty-one. Deal-
ing with speech as the instrument of intercourse, it is highly
probable that these vocabularies may represent as many as
nineteen different languages, that is, modes of speech, mu-
tually unintelligible. Dealt with, however, ethnologically,
their number is evidently capable of being reduced.
In the present state of our knowledge, it is convenient
to leave the Shoshonie language* unplaced. All that we
* Sinco tliis 8tateiiicnt waH road, the author has heen enal)l«Ml, tliroiiijli
the nieaus of a C'uinaiichu vocabulary, with which he was favoured by Mr
ON THE hANCilAtiKS OF Till: OUKUON TKUKITOKV,
255
llatin to Dr
L southern or
y, collected
that of liic
inologicaliy,
tblt'd, tliioiiiili
vvourcd by Mr
possess of it is the vocabulary noticed above. It consists
of only twenty-four words. Their affinities (such as thoy
are) are miscellaneous
English ,
beaver.
Shoshonie ,
hanish.
C/icnook ,
eena.
If nidi ih ,
tzing
CalliUisrou ,
kanook.
English,
salmon.
S/tdshndk' ,
augi.
lluidak ,
swaggan.
English,
horse.
Shoshonie,
bunko.
liliickfout ,
pinncchoniotnr.
pennakoinet.
teoman,
English,
Shoshonie ,
wcpee.
Souriquois ,
meboujnu.
Penohseol ,
m'phenim.
Micmnc,
epit.
Echemin ,
apet.
Pima,
uha.
Calapooiiih ,
ai)omcik.
English ,
friend.
Shoshonie ,
hauls.
Vhclimarhti ,
keta.
Onondago ,
ottie.
English ,
?rater.
Shoshonie ,
pa.
New Sweden,
l.ij.
Abjonkin ,
ne-pi, passhn.
English,
good.
Shoshonie ,
saut.
Sh a ha plan ,
tautz.
Pima ,
tiuot.
Chocia ,
chito — great.
Crow ,
esah — great.
bassats — mani/.
Bolljit'it., to (lt;tenniiit', that tlu'so two Idnfyimp^t's aio ullii-il. (Tliis was
written in 1815. Since, tlum, tiic I'vidonce that tiio Shoslioni and Cu-
■iianeh belong to the same family has become conclnsive.j
256
ON THK I-ANOl'A(JK.S OF TIIK OUKOON TKIUIITOKY.
f
! .'
%
English,
go.
Slioshonie ,
nunieraro
Kunntchen ,
nnmilthla
English ,
come.
Shoshunie ,
kcomak.
Nez Pcrces,
come.
Englisii ,
awl.
Slioshonie ,
weeu.
Ahnenin ,
bay.
English ,
no.
S/ios/ionie,
kayhee.
Ahnenin ,
chien.
Pulowulami ,
cho.
Ojihhenuiy ,
kaw.
Ollaiva,
kaween.
Old Algonkin,
kah.
Chelimacha ,
kahie.
m '\
It is also advisable to deal cautiously with the Susseo lan-
guage. Uinfreville's vocabulary is short, and consistinj;
almost exclusively of the names of articles of commerce.
Lists of this sort are of little value in ethnography. Still.
upon the whole, it confirms the current opinion as to the
place of the Sussee language, viz. that it is* Athabascan. At
any rate, it has certain miscellaneous affinities.
liOi
English,
Sussee,
eye.
senonwoh.
Kenay,
Taculli,
snaga.
onow.
Chipewyan ,
nackhay.
English,
Sussee,
five.
coo.
Chipewyan ,
coun.
English ,
Sussee ,
kettle.
usaw.
Taculli,
osa.
English , .
Sussee ,
axe.
chilthe.
Taculli,
chachil.
* The evidence of this being the case has siuce become conclusive.
1859.
ON TIIK LAN(ilIAOr,S OK TIIK OUKdON TICKKITOUV.
2:
J/
e conclusive. —
Enj^li.sli, laiife.
Sussrr, inai'Hli.
Illinois, iTiaricsa.
Minitari, inatsc.
Knglisli, s/inrs.
Sitssrr , siscau.
Tacitlli, ki.scot.
Knglisli, (Hif.
Siissi't', uttogar.
Kskiiiw , attowsoak.
adaitsuk.
adoajak.
atainek.
English , Ihri'C.
Snssee , taiiky.
Komi, tolu'like.
Taculli, toy.
Chiprtri/an, taghy.
English, full/:
Sussce , tachoy.
A'cnai , t(!nki.
Tacnlti, tingkay.
Chipeivyan , dengky.
English, seven.
Sussee, checheta.
Mohaivk, chahtahk.
Onomlayn , tschoatak.
Seneca, jawdock.
Oneida, tziadak.
Nolloivay , ohatay.
English , ten.
Sussee, cuncescnunneo.
Chipewyan , canothna.
Laying tlieso two languages aside, and reserving the Black-
font for future inquiries, the other vocabularies arc refcr-
liblc to two recognized groups. 'V\w Nagail and Taculli are
what (iallatin calls Athabasrun, All tlio* rest are Avhat Pri-
cliard calls Nootka-CoJumhicm. Respecting the former class,
tlie ovidence is unequivocal, and the fact generally admitted,
llospocting the latter, the statement requires consideration.
At first glance, Mr Tolmie's vocabularies differ materially
* The Uniqua has since been shewn to be the Athabaskan — 1859.
17
258
ON Tiir. i,.\N(iiA(iKs (»r Tin; (tui:<iON TKuunoiiv.
from each otlior; and only a few soon) loss iinliko racli otlifi-
tlian tho rost. Such aro tlio Kliketat and Sliiiliii[)tan, tlufCa-
lajxtoiali and V'anikallio, the Kawitclicii and Tla(tf|natili, tlic
(JJMMiook and ('iithlascon. JJcsidcs this, tlu^ j^enural diUcr-
onco l)otAvcon even the allied vocalmlarics is far inor(! visihlc
than the fifonoral rcsenibhinco. Finally, thn nunu-rals and
tho fundani(aital t(!rins vary in a doj^'ree beyond what we mv
l»re|)ared for, by the study of the Indo-Knropean tonj^iics.
lireolleetinj;^, liowevor, the compound character of the inii>t
fundamental words, characteristic of all the American laii-
_ifua<>^e; reco<;'nisin<^, also, as ;i rule of criticism, that in tlio
same class of ton<;ues tho evidence of the numerals is unim-
portant in the determination of di/f'crcHrcn , and coiiiparin;:
the sixteen Oregon vocabularies of INlr Tolmio with each other,
wo may satisfy ourselves as to tho radical unity of the <:r(iuii.
To these lists, and to tho accompanying paper of Dr. 8roii-
lor, reference is accordingly made. The value of these groiijis
(the Athaba-^can and the Kootka-Columbian) is a ditfcront
and a more difficult question. The DKUvimum differeiKc 1m'-
tween any two known languages of the Athabascan gi(Mi|i
is that between English and German. The ma.i/miim ditlVi-
(mce between the most unlike languages of the >Joutka-('o-
lumbian group is that between the modern Greek and Por-
tuguese, /. c. the most distant tongues of the classical stotk
of tho Indo-Kuropean tribe, llonce, the terms in ((ue.-tioii
aro equivalent to the more familiar terms , Gothic, Ccllic, S/n-
rotiic , &c. All this, however, is illustration, rather tli.in
absolute arrangement; yet it serves to give definitude to the
current opinions u})on the subject.
To tho current views, however, the writer takes exception.
lie considers that tho groups in question have too high a val.U':
and that they are only equivalent to the primary subdivisions
o{ slucks like the Gothic, Celtic, and Classical, rather than
to the stocks themselves. Still less can they have a )iif;;lior
and more exaggerated value, and be dealt Avith as equiva-
lent 1o groups like the Imhi-Eutopean.
Hence, tho differences between the Athabascan langua}rri<
of the Oregon and the Nootka-Columbian languages of the
Oregon, are tho differences between the J-,atln and Greek,
the Welsh and Gaelic, the German and Icelandic, rather
than those between the Gorman and Russian , the Latin ami
Persian, the Greek and Lithuanic, &c.
In determining tho higher and more comprehensive class.
we must take in a third group of languages. These are those
of Russian America. 'J'hey have generally been referred tn
two groups of uncertain value, viz. the Kolooch and the
ON TiiK i-.\N<;rA(ii:H ok 'iiii; ouiMioN 'iKuurrouY.
2r)9
jfinitudc to tli
F.skimo; tlic fonncr, for llio part iil)ont Sitca, (tr Korfolk
.Niiiiid, tlui Iiitt<a' ior tlio jtMrts about the Island of Cadiack,
and the Peninsula of Aliaska.
Now, tlio Athabascan Ian;j;un;^('s are undoubtedly I'-skinio;
I t'iict stated bv the -writer, at the; niectin;:,' of the l>ritisii
As.'ocintion at York, and founded uiu)n the comparison ol"
tli(! Athabascan voi-abularies of MacKen/ie and I)obl)s, on
till' one side, with the NV^estern Kskinio ones, on the other.
And the K(»Ionch lan^ua<i;es are (npially Kskinu) with \\\o
Atliahascan. 'I'his may be seen by rrd'enMU'e to Lisiansky's
vdcahularies, and a comparison between the Sitca and
Cadiiick
Knolish.
Cm
hniik
ll'iil
Km' I'
Ltilcc
U/>s
Man
Spark
Wind
Sitca.
kaah
itanna
katclst
kakeck
aaka
kaliaka
chakU^yh
hcoklya
keolliclia
Cauiack.
kryya
taidia
koudat
clnskoohka
nanoak
Idukha
sliook
cliatalalii
kyaock
Now, by taking in the Eskimo of the Aleutian Islands,
this list might be doubled; and by dealing with the Kenay
as Eskimo , it might be trebled.
Again, by attempting to fix the points whereat the Eskimo
languagn ceases, and the Koloocli tongue begins, w(! nniy
;;('t further evidence that the difference between them is ex-
aggerated; since the languages passed by gradual transitions
into each other.
What follows, moreover, is cumulative evidence towards
tlio same conclusion.
Over and above the vocabularies collected by IMr Tolmie
tliat have already been dealt with , there is a seventcMmth,
viz. the Tinufhans. This is stated in l)r Scouler"s accompa-
nying paper to be the most northern dialect with which th(!
Hudson's J]ay traders come in contact. It is also stated to
bo Sitcan ; and that truly.
Knoi.isii.
TrNOIIAAS.
Sitca.
Sca-nllrr
yonelitz
yontch
Tiivcr-nllcr
coostali
kooshta
Bear
liooctch
lioots
Whale
Woman
yioagh
shewat
yaaga
shavvot
17*
,^l,
' j
200
ON Tin: i,AN(iirA(n;.s or tiik ouk«h»\ ti:uimt(m<v,
Knoi.ihii.
Siimmrr
Jfr
(i 011(1
Ti;n(iiiaah.
kootnnn
nlikoh
HiTCA.
kootnnn
youtn
toouko
On tlio otlu!!' Imiid, the Tonffliaus lias at'dniticjs with tlic
lliildali of (^iiccn ('luirlott(!'s Islanil , and throu^li it with
tlin iso-fallcd Nootka-Colund)ian Ian^ua<;('8 in j^'cncral.
(,'uinulativo, in tlu! way of (!vid(!nce to this, is iIk; state-
nunit, with the verification of whicli wo shall conclude, viz.,
that, besides the Athabascan, the other hin<;uaj;es ot tin'
Oregon Territory liav(; affinities with the Kskinio. Willi
the Oonalashkan and (^adiack on the one side, and witli .Mr
Tolinie's vocabularies (with Cook's occasionally) en futissc an
the oth(!r, we have at least the following words conniion to
the two groups.
U ^i
English,
sky.
Cook's Noolka,
ppnaocl nas.
Tldot/uidch ,
nnaso.
0(iti(tlits/ika ,
anneliak — day.
Koglisli,
sky.
Jfdiddh ,
siting.
lUUcvhoold ,
skoonook — day.
Ilithlnh ,
yen — clouds.
lluerllzuk,
unnowie.
Ooualashka ,
youyan — sky.
innyak -- sky.
moon.
English ,
fiillccUoolu ,
tlooki.
Cadhick ,
yaalock.
English ,
snow.
Haedlz ,
naie.
CUilapoodli ,
anoopeik.
Yatnkallh' ,
kanopeik.
Cmliark,
annu(\
Oomdashka ,
kannue.
English,
Jmil.
llaidah ,
dlianw ■.^-:-. snow.
Ooudlas/ika,
tahcnem dahskeoto
English ,
7valer.
Cook's Noolka^
chauk.
Tlaoqualclt ,
tchaak.
Cadiack,
kooyk — river.
f>N TIIK l,\N«ll'\tll„S ui- IIIK nUrfioN TKUIMTortY,
201
Kiif^lisli,
river.
Thnii/u«itr/i, '
Honk.
( 'iiilitirh' ,
nliiook -— st'a.
Kni^lisli,
mill.
I'uhipDitiuh ,
tochtochn.
('adi)irK .
kciliih.
Itnnahishkds
i-hi'tak.
F.nj^lisli,
siiiid.
IlllHltlll ,
il k.'iik.
(hmnhislihn ,
I'huohnk.
EngliHli,
moiniloin.
h'lihrlat,
[laniifitcct
Cudiuclv ,
poonhokanlic.
Eiif^lish,
lioHsr.
Klilii'tiit,
nccdh.
S/inhapliiu ,
ciiccdh.
dttiUitcli ,
nail.
Eu-lish.
son;/.
Cook's Nnolkii,
ooiiook.
no/Hil'is/i/ca ,
oiiiioohailar — sintj
English,
fJO.
('oitk's Nooika,
chn.
(tonalds/tkd ,
icha.
Enj;lisli,
i'huir(\ rill.
( 'ook's Noolkft,
Isook.
Cadiack ,
chaggidzn.
Oonalashka ,
tooliitda.
English,
crow.
Cook's Noofka,
kaonnc.
Cadiuck ,
ktilnhak.
English,
firr.
Cook's yonlka,
cencck.
Cadinck ,
knok.
Oonalas/iku ,
keynak.
English ,
.skidl.
Cook's Ntiiilkd,
koornctz.
Oo)i(d(ts/tkd ,
kauihek.
English ,
leclh.
Cook.s Nooika,
cheecliootsh.
Cadkick ,
hoodeit.
262
ON Tin: I.ANUUAfil'.S OK TMK OREOON TKKKITOKY.
\r^
Enjijlisli ,
middle finger
CiKik's Ntmllca,
taeeai.
Ciidiuvk ,
teokha.
Knglish ,
htnv much.
IfairHztu'/t ,
kinshook.
Kdnnlclicn ,
qnien.
NiKistlitlunt ,
(juicn.
Onnalds/tku,
kfinnahen.
Cadiack ,
kouhchocn.
English ,
mat.
Chennuk ,
swussak.
Sh(ihii/}fnn,
tooko.
Oumdashka ,
sootok.
Englisli ,
bow.
OkuiKujiin ,
tsnk([nonnk.
OoiKdas/iku ,
saoheck.
English,
house.
Sqind/f/uiiiish,
aalall.
Oomddshkn ,
oolon.
English ,
iron.
Sqiudbjamisli ,
kuninuttin.
Cadiack ,
konilyahook.
English,
sea-oiler.
Billccltiuda,
([unncc.
Oonalashka ,
cheenatok.
Englisli,
hear.
Haidali ,
tan.
Oonalashka ,
tanhak.
To this list a previous sttitoniont applies more especially. I'y
treatiuj^^ the Siteu and Kenay vocaoularles as Eskimo, the
nunilxjr of coincidences niij;ht have been doubled.
JJesides this, it must be renunnbered that, in Tolmic's vo-
cabularies , no terms expressive of the different ])arts nt
human body are f^iven; and that several names of the cdiii
nioncst objects are wanting-, c. //. fire, «N:c.
iseither have the vocabularies of Wrangell for the varit'il
dialects of Russian America been niad(i use of.
As the lists, however, stand, tlu^ author considers that in'
has shewn reason for believing- that the Atiiabascan, tlic
Kolooch, the Nootka-Columbian, and the Cadiack proups ai-i'
subordinate members of one large and important class— the
Eskimo; a fact which, coinciding with all his other inquiries
NOTHS.
263
in AiDcrican P^tlinolojry , lircaks down, fuitlicr than 1ms
liitliorto boon dono, the broad and trfnchant lin(! of domar-
(iition between the circunipohir and tlie other Indians of the
Western Continent.
NO T K 8.
X(nK I.
Ill ,1 vnliiablo jiapf'i' On tlio Trilns inli.iliiUiiLr llio N. \V. Cojist of
AiiM'r'ua ritatl a low wooks aftcrwanls hy I >r. .1. ScKiilcr tln> t'ollovviji;;'
talilfs slii'wed —
1. Tlic fact that the Nulka forms of s|n'('cli were to Ix; foiui<l on
till' Coiitiiiciit;
'.'. Tliat tin; \Valla\valln was Sahaptin.
a.
K.Mii.isn.
Tr.AUy. & NiiDTKA.
Cum MIIIA.
/'h'nfif
A.va
Ilava
.\„
WiU, ....
Waki^
Ilalrr
Tcliaak
Clmck
(IikhI
Ilooluisli,
Closli
IS,nl
I'cisliakt'is, . .
I'.'sliak
Mitn
'l'(;lini'koo|), .
'rillicliam
Hum fill
'riootsitmin, . . .
Clootcliamcn
(W,/
'I'anassis, . . .
Tanass
.\'i)ii> ,.,...
Tlalniwicli, . .
Clalmuiah
('»iin!
'i"cliooi|iia ,
Sacko
SImr
Misclicnias, . .
Misi-luMnas
ll'liiil lire ijitu ihtiiuff
i\koots-ka-niainoU ,
I'lkta-manniiok
11' lull live i/iiii stii/iiiij'.'
An kaak-wawa,
I'.kta-wawa V
Lrl mr sec ....
Nannanitcli . .
Nannanitcli
Sun
Oin'tli, . . .
Ootlach
Shf
Sicya, ....
Say a
t'riiif
( 'llamas. . . .
Camas
To sell
MakoU, . . .
MakoU
liHtlrrslmiil ....
Commatax, . .
. Commatax
b.
I.MIl.lSII.
\hin
/>'".'/
Il'iiman
lilrl
llifr
(mi
Fiilhvr
Miitlwi-
tricml
SnAllAI'I'AN.
>iama
Maswar
Aiat
ritcn
Swapna
Miahs
I'isli.l
I'iUa
Likstiwa
Wai <..\\\
AI.I.A.
Kl.lKI. 1 A
Wilisli
AVins
'I'aliiiiifsl
lint
Aswan
'I'ilalii
Aiat
'I'uliaiiat
J'itiniks
Asliam
Asliam
Islit
Miaiiasli
I'sllit
I'sllit
J'tslia
I'tsha
llliai
Ill.ai
264
Knomhii.
Fire
n 'titrr
ll'nnil
Sliiiic
(iroiinil
Sun
Moon
Si/irs
Ctomis
Hfiin
Suom
Ivr
Horse
Doij
Jiiill'ulu
Male Hlk
h'niKilr Hlk
(ivi'ii llcnv
liliick Hear
House
(inn
liodij
Head
Arm
Ei/es
Sose
I'lfllS
Moiilk
Teeth
Hands
Feet
Leys
Morasscns
fiood
Bad
Hot
told
Far
Near
Hijili
l,ow
While
lUavk
Red
Here
There
U 'here Y
U hen 'f
Ifhaff
H 'hi/ 'f
irhof
IVhirh-f
H(hw noieh ?
So vvirli
Ilo/v I'ar't
So far*
N(»TKS.
8llAIIAI'TAN.
Wai.i.awai.i.a.
Kl.IKKTAT.
AlH
Sliiksli
Sinks
Tkiish
'I'shirsh
'rshaush
llutsiii
Sliika«
Slnknas
risliwji
I'sliwa
I'sliwa
Wat.sjisli
Titsliam
'Pitshani
WisliiiMitiiksl
All
An
Ailhai
Ailhai.
Witsciii
llaslii
Hash)
Spalikt
I'aslist
Wiikit
Ssliliauit
Tohtoha
Makii
J'..i
Maka
Tahfisk
Taliaiik
Toll
Shi k am
Kiisi
Kiisi
Miikaiiikaii
Kiisi Kiisi
Kiisi Kiisi
KnkiiHi
MuHnnissin
Musinnssin
NVawakia
Wawakia
Wiiiat
Tasliip
Tasliipka
Winat
I'ahas
Wapaiitle
Saka
.)aka
Analmi
Suit
Suit
Suit
'riiniini
'I'aiiipas
Tuili>as
Silaks
W'aiiiHtksliasli
lluslnis
Tilpi
I'alka
Atiiii
Kainkas
Sliilliu
Atsliasli
Atsliash
Natliim
Natiinii
Nosiiu
Matsaia
Mat.siu
Ilim
Em
Am
Tit
Tit
SpHlms
Spai)
Alia
Aliwa
Waha
Waha
Waiiisli
Taiua
IlcapUat
Shkam
Shkam
Tahr
Skeh
Sho<'ali
Kapwhish
Mil la
Tshailwit
Sakas
Sahwaili
Salnvi'ali
Ken is
Kasat
T(!\vislia K;isiit
Waiat
Wiat
Wiat
Keiiitam
THiwas
Tsa
Tasliti
llwaiam
Hvvcanii
Ahat
Hill i to
Niti
Nailiaili
Koik
Olash
SuiiulisinmU
Tshiiniik
Tsiinuk
Sopilp
Siitslia
Siitsa
Kiiia
Tshna
Stshiuak
Kuna
Kuna
Skoiu!
^liniiV
MiiiaV
Mam
:\IaiiaV
Mun?
Mun?
.MishV
Misli .•»
Mishy
iSlaiiainaV
Maui y
Jshi?
Skin?
Skin?
MaV
MamV
MasV
Milh?
Milh?
Kala
Kulk
Skulk
Miwail?
Maal?
Kcwail
Kwal
Ks«
MSH.I
Ihiv
lonijl
Tn l"iiij 1
nix
Tim
1
}'i)ii
Ik
she, i
ire
ye
Then 1
Tn
<J'>
h>
SI'f
>r;
sin/
■/'-»
talk
In
walk
Tu
read
Tn
nil
Tn
drink
Tn
slcf/t
Tn
)V(d<c
Tn
liire
Tn
hike
Tn
know
Tn
fm-ije
Tn
give
Tn
.seize
Tn
he eo
Tn
he sii
Tn
Intnt
Tn
lie
Tn
.steal
NM-rr.s.
21)5
r.Nfii.i.sir.
Il,in< ItDiyY
I'll I' I II (J
Tliis
Thiit
I
Yiiii
lie s/ir, U
We
Ve
The,/
Tn ijt)
'I'll si-r
>() sin/
'I'll talk
'I'll iriilli
'To rend
Tn ml
'I'll ilviiik
'I'll sli'i-j)
Tn iviikc
'Tu lui'e
Tn lake
Tn know
'I'll I'lirijet
'I'll i]ivc
To seize
Tu lie cold
'I'll III- sick
Tn limit
'Tn lie
Tn steal
SlIAHAr'TAN.
MahfveV
KollHO
Ki
Joh
Sii
Siii
Ipi
Nim
Iina
Kiiiii
Kiislia
lliikcsli.'i
llcisli.i
Tsi'ksii
^\'|■ll;lsa
\\';is;islij|
^\'i|>islla
MaUusliji
I'iiiimiU.sliM
Waksii
W.itiini.sliii
I'iUllsJl
J^iikiiasa
'ritoliishii
Iiiishn
Iiipislia
Iswaiisa
Koinaisa
Tiikiiliksa
ilisliaini.slia
I'akwuslia
WAt.r.AWAI.LA.
Maalli
Kwalk
'I'slii
Kwa
Sii
Siii
Ipiii
Naiiia
Kiia
l')iiia
Wiiiasha
ilokslia
Nil
Siiiiwasa
Wiiiashash
W.Kaslia
Kwatasliak
^latsliMsliask
riiiiislia
'I'alisliisask
'J'kcsliask
A)ialasliask
Aslialviiasliash
Slakshasli
Nisliaiiiasli
Sliiit.sliash
Swcasliasli
I'ainsliasli
Salaithas
I'sliislikshash
I'akwashash
Kl.IKKTAT.
Tslii
Skwa
Silk
.Siiik
I'iiik
N'cinak
Iiiiak
I'aiiiak
Wiuasha
Nil
Siiiawasa
Wasaslia
Talisliaslia
Tkc'hsha
ShiikiiaHlia
Wauapslia
Iswaiska
I'aiiislia
Nistowasa
Tshiska
rakwanha
iNoTK '2.
of IviiMsian America,
ic
Tliis, aloiif^- with tlip paper on tlie J",tlniolM<xy y., i». ..>.,..... ^....^... ,.
was tlu' (li!volopiiu!ut of a coiiimunu'atiim iaiil hcl'orc the. Mfctiiif> of tin
liriti.-sa Assuciatioii for tlu- AihaucciiH'iit of Sciciici! at ^'ork in tlm
liifvimi.s S('|)tomI)('r, tn tlic ofVcct that tlu^ "liiii' of dcinaic'ation drawn
"lu'twoen the llskinio and tlio Indian races of America was far too
"liroad and trencliant"; wlierein it was stated. —
I. 'i'hat tlie true aflinities of the I'iiipewvan weri; witii tlie Katliak,
I'liiilashka, Kenay and Sitka forms of speech.
■-'. Tliat tlie Fji'aU'nts ( r;,n-ilyachiniitsi of IfesanolV;, althoiip;h s<'pa-
ratcd from tlie ueiirijoiirinji; I'iskim.'t on^'ues so as to caiisi; the appearance
iif n iliscontinnity in the Kskieio area could, when we, dealt with tlu!
K.iiliak, I'nalaslika, Kenay, and Sitka vocahiilaries as the represen-
tatives of a sliijj;'le lan;i'iia<)'e he shown to he Ivskimo. —
•i. Tliat affinities of a more u'cneral kind were to In? found even
I'ui'tlier southward".
1. ."). That the Atna of Mackenzie was the Xoo-^daliiiii, and the Friendly
Villajrc vocabulary the liillecdioola , of .Mr Tolmie.
I'J'rinisiirtidiis (if the Sect inns p. 78. — On I lie Sintlltera Ijitnils (if the
Kskiinn lacc in Anicvicd.
•tmm
ON TlIK ETIIN()(iUAIMIV OK UDSSIAN
AMERICA.
i:i:.\i>
r.KFOJIK TIIU K'rilNOlJKJKJAL SOCIETY
l!)Tii ri:i!i;r.\i{V IH40.
Tho p!\j)rr siil)mitto(l to the Society is upon the Ktlino-
f'Tiiphy of liUssiiin AuiericJi. l^'or ii variety of reaisonis, the
tribes in these })Mi'ts are of paraiiioiiut importance. Inhabit-
ing' the inf»st north-western extremity of America on the coast
of 15ehrinp,"s Straits, they are divided from Asia onlv by
tliat cliannel, ? » that of all the nations of the Kew \\\n-\A
they are most in contact with those of tho Old, This cii-
cunistance alone puts them ])romin<jntly forward in ctluKi-
lo^y; since tiie pr/md /'arir theory, as to the population of
America, must certainly be in favnur of tiic passa;^e having'
taken place through lieiirings Straits.
Tlui limits of the Kussian })ossessions in America, t)r (if
th
il IS
one
le geograpincal area wincli we are considering, are not voiy
definitely detcn'minod: at h\ast, the lin(! of demarcatio
in a great degree, a jiolitical rather than a natural
From Mount St Fdias to the southernmosi (>xtremity of J'riiu'c
of Wales Island, the territory in question consists of a stri])
of sea-coast, and islands, with the I>ritish possessions of
New Norfolk and New Hanover at tin; ba(dv ; whilst from
INIount St Flias ncn-thward, as far as the Arctic Sea, tin'
line of division is ima^iinary, coincidin<r with the Ml" W
1
J >
onir
It can sc;'''cely be expected, that a frontier so detiT-
niiiied can coincid(^ with any iniportant divisions, either in
])hysical or ethnographical g(!ography. Still the area in (pics-
tion is a convenient one.
Considering tlu^ remote situation of these extensive an 1
inhospitable tracts, the knowledu*. we p(»ssess of th(!iii is
creditable to the government of Russia. From tho time ot
Behring downward, tho coasts have been accurately dcs-
ON TIIK KTIIXOGHAIMIY i)V KUSiSIAN AMKUIf'V.
2G7
cribed; whilst the coninmnications of tlic officials of the Russian
American Company exhibit far more than an average amount
of intolligenco. 1' or such ])ortions of the present paper as
arc not purely philological, the author has drawn upon liaer's
SKilis/fschc mid EUniOf/raphische Niichrichli'n , tM:c. ( )f a Kus-
i\i\\\ settlement in Mew ('alifornia, although American, no
notice is taken. On the other lumd , a nation inhabiting the
extreme promontory of Asia (the T^huktshi) are, for reasons
that will make themselves apparent, dealt with as American.
On the southern extremity of liussian America, the native
tribes are known to their neighbours of Mew (Jaledonla, the
Oregon country, and to the Iludson's Bay ( 'ompany, under
the names of Colooches, Tunghaases, Atnas, ( ■oltshanies,
llfjalcntses, Konagis, (^adiacks, Tchugatches, and Kenays.
For the north, and the shores of the Arctic Sea, they are
dealt with (and that truly) as members of th(! great Ksrpiimaux
family. Further investigation multijilies the names of these
tribos, so that we hear of Inkalitt's, Inkulukhlaites, Kiyataij;-
iiiutis, Agolegmutes, Pashtolegmutis, Magmutis , &.c. &.Q. To
tlics(! divisions may be added th(! different varieties of the
natives of the Aleutian islands, in the classification of these
munerous tribes, it is considered that nuich remains to bo
(lone.
For the tribes on the shore of the Northern < )cean , and
for the parts innnediately south of I'l'liring's Straits, the g(i-
ncral character, both ])liysical and moral, seems to be JOs-
(|uiiuaux. The enormous line of coast over which this na-
tion is extended has long been known, Tho language and
iiiainiers of (Jreenland have been known to us since the
times of the earliest Punish missionaries; so that details, both
jihysical and moral, of no savages are better und'^-rstood than
tli(»se of the (JrcKinlanders. With this knowlcMlge, it is easy
to trace tlu^ extension of tlu^ race. The shores of Hudson's
iiay are inhabit(Ml by the same stock. So also is the coast
of Labrador. The tlire(! forms (jf speech art; l)Ut diahtcts
iif one !;\ni;uag(!: a fact that has long been known. Hence
llio l''.s(|uiiiiaux and (ireenlanders have long l)een recognised
as identical. From Hudson's i^ay, northward and westward,
tlio whole lin(^ of seaeoast, as far as jNIackenzie's liiver, is
Ks(|nimaux ; and that with but little variety of type; either
in l)liy'.ical conlormation , manners, or language. The in-
torpret(!r to Ca])tain Franklin was an Ksijiiimaux from Hud-
son's Iiay, yet he had no difliculty in uiulerstanding the dia-
loots west of I\laekenzi(('s River, l.'{7" \\ . Long. (See Ar-
th(C(il(i{jira Amcrit'iinii, ii. 11.) Three deorees westward, how-
over, a change in the Fscpiimaux characteristics takes place;
208
UN riii; i.riiNofiK.M'MY or urssivx amkimca.
¥l
ar
altlioMf^li tlic iiiliabit.'ints of the miartors in (jiicstioii \)\ n,,
iiu.'iiiis toasi! to Ijt! Ksquiuiaux. Tlie tribes alrcfady noticed
may Ix; called tlu; Eastern, tlios(! about to be mentioned tlui
Western K.S(juimaux. 'riie dividing; lino i.s tix(id by ('a|)tniu
Franivlin at NO" W. Ion;;-. Tlio tribes on each side of this
lin(! have ril /'irsl a (jremt (li/'/Unllii in iintlvrsi.iin<liinj nicli o/hrr.
Now tlio line between tli(! subdivisions of the Jvs(jniiiiiiiix
lan<i;ua}^e coincides very nearly with th(! boumiary lintt of
llussian America. Henc(^ the ethnography of that territory
begins witii the \Vost(;rn Ks(|uiniaux.
It is no r.'tinement to state, that, with the Western Es-
quimaux, we lind a chani;(! in the social and moral tyi»(',
exhibiting- itself in a greater appreciation of the articles of
civilized life, both as means of homi! use, and as instru-
ments of commercial barter. They resort annually to the
eastern boundary, and exchangi; articles of Jvussian niaiiii-
factun; of seals-skins, oil, and furs. This intercourse is of
lato date. — ArclKi'itloi/ia Amcriatnu, ii., II.
To Kotzebue's Sound and IJehrings Straits the sanu! r.u'c,
with similar characters , is continued. Of J^chring's Straits
it occupies both sides, tlxi Asiatic as well as the American.
From Jiehring's Straits to the Peninsula of Aliaska, ami
from thence to Cook's Tnlet (or Kenay Bay), every thing is
unequivocally Esquimaux, ami has long been recognized
as such.
That a statement lately made was no rcfineniont, may ho
proved from the third chapter of IJaer's work , where he de-
termines the character of the Esquinniux trade, and gives
it as a. measure of tin; intcavourse between Asia and Ame-
rica. It secMus referable to two centres, viz., the parts about
]>ehring's Straits, and the parts about Cook's Inlet. For
the first, th(> mark(!t extends from ley Cape to the Promon-
tory of Aiiaska, and has for its stations the islands of Pxdir-
ing s Straits. The second district comprises the Aleutian
islands, (yadiai-k, and the line of the sea-coast as far south
as (^ueen (-harlotte's Island. Now, whatever may be the
anu)unt of liussian civilization, in determining some of tiie
characteristics of the Western Esquimaux, it is certain that
the tribes of that race now inhabiting Asia, wc^rc occupants
of their present localities, anterior to the liussian Conqiie.-t
of Kamshatka.
A second deviation from the Escpiiniaux ty])C, wo timl in
ih(.' island ('adiacdc, and the coast of the continent opposite.
The early liussian discoverers speak of a continual wartan;
between 0])posing tribcis of the same stocdi; whilst another
tribe, the Inkalite, is said to uphidd itself bravely against
ON TIIK KTIIMXIKAI'MV OK urSSIAN AMKIJCA.
200
tho more numerous nation of tlie Kuskokwinis. As a general
rule, warfare, except as a defence aj^aitist tribes of a dif-
t'erciit race, is as fonii^n to the typical Ks(|uiniaux of Green-
liiiiil as to tlie Laplander of Europe.
Measured by another test, and that of the psyc]iolof;ical
sort (viz., the capacity for reli«;ious instruction), the Western
Ks(juiniaux coincides with the Ksijuiniaux of < Irccnland. \\ ith
the exception, perhaps, of the ^«e;4ro, the race, in <r('ncrnl,
is the most docile in respect to the inilncnces of Christianity.
The relif^ious history of extreme points of tho Ahuitian Is-
liuids and Greenland verities this statement.
The extent to which a mix(Ml breed has been ])ropa^fated
under the government of J{ussia, may be; colleit(!d from the
following tables. In New Archangel the pojtulation is as
follows: —
Euroj»eans, 406
Creoles or half-hrecds, H()7
Aleutians, IM
In tho remaining part of the territory it is as follows: —
Eur(»i)eans, 246
Half-breeds, 6H4
Natives, iim2
Of places of trust in New Archangel, a v(!ry large pro-
portion is held by Half-breeds. We lind them as overseers,
police-ofiicers, clerks, watchmakers, medical students.
Such seem tlie most remarkable points connected with the
Russian Esquimaux in general. They are few in number,
because it is the plan of the writer not so much to exhibit
the whole details of the race to which they Ixdong, as to
put forward prominently such characteristics as ar(! diii'(3ren-
tial to them and the Esquimaux of tireenlanil and J^abrador.
It is now proper to give a brief notice of the more im-
portant tribes, these being mentioned separately.
1. T/k; Tshu/./sht. — This is the najne of tin; Ks(juimaux of
Asia. It is generally accompanied by the epithet st-f/cn/art/,
so that wo «|)(!ak of these peoph^ as the scf/nifdii/ or sclllvtl
Tshuktslii. This distiiiiiuishes them from the so-called Rein-
liar TshuArJft, a tribe of the Koriak family. For either one
•n- the other of these tribes the nann; of Tslmktslii should be
abolished. It is my impression that the ditferenees between
the Ksquinu) of Asia and America do not represent nu)re
than a few centuries of separation.
2. T/ic /\'its/:(i/:/r///f. — This tril)e, whiih occupies the banks
<|| tlie river trom which it takes its name, may stand as
the representative for the tribes between Cape Rodney and
270
ON Tin; KTIIXfXlUAlMIV or IM .SHIAN AMKIIICA.
tlio Poninsnifi
"""■""'" of Aliaska. Its nuiultors aro ostiinatcd nt
upwards of HUH). Transitional in t'liaractor to tli(! tribes oi
'. r-finst -•Mill liitfrimv ifss mnniipvs ('(liiwidn witli its ..,
tilt! coast and interior, its manners coineido Avitli its <i;<'o-
;raj)liic'al position. In the use of certain so-called ornanients,
it aj^rces nitli the oth(>r Kscjuiniaux tribes* as it agrees with
th<! Ksfjiiiniaux and Finn trilies in the use of the sweatiuj;-
bath. Th(( l\usko(|niniors count distanc(! by the nundicr nl'
nhjlits re([uisite I'or the journey. Of the consKdIation tlicv
iiavc a detailed kno\vled<;o, founded upon observations, Tlic
most prominent of their institutions is the Kaliim; a buildin;:
found in every village, erected like an amphitheatre, capable
of containing all the males of the j)lace, and which, ovir
and above many peculiar domestic purposes connected with
its erection , serves as a council-hall for the males of the
population.
A. Tlw Ts/iuf/t(/s/i. — Natives of Prince William's Souiid.
and closely alliiid to the islanders of Cadiack, -with vvIkhii
they agree in language. Their historical traditions are, that
they came from the cctast, and from the north; their mytho-
logical ones, that they are desc^ended from the Dog.
These thre(> divisions aro not only indubitably Ksfpiiiiiaiix,
but have also been recognised as such.
Those that follow Mr(! generally referred to another etliiio-
logical group. In the parts about Cooks Inlet (Bay of Ke-
nay) and Mount St Klias, a second race is said to make
its appearance, and this is generally separated from the Es-
(piimaux by a broad line of demarcation. It is called th*'
Kolooch race or family, and i.s generally placed in contrast
with the Esquimaux. Isolated tribes akin to the Kidooclics.
and worthy of special notice, are the following: —
1. The Uyalijaclnmisli or IJgalentses, consisting of about
^)8 fannlies. — They change their localities with the season,
and are Kolooch in manners and conformation. Liviiii:
around IMount St. Elias they are frontier tribes to the T.shu-
gatshes.
2. The A'cnai/s, inhabiting the coast of Cook's Inlet, MM
families strong. — Historically, they assort that their origin
is from the hills of the interior, from whence they descen-
ded coastward. Their mythological and ultimate origin i>
from the ffii'cn, connected Avitb which they have a complex
cosmogony. I^escent from the raven, or descent from the
flof/ , is considered, for these tribes wo are speaking of, as
an instnunpnt in ethnological criticism. Like the Ugalentsos.
they arc in contact Avith Tshugatsh I^s(juimaux.
3. The Ainiilis. dwelling on the Cop])er Kiver, 00 faniilios
strong, hunters of rein-deer, and workers in iron as well
ON 'llli; r.rilNn<;UAl'IIV oi' IMSSIAN A.MKUKA.
271
{')() fainilit'S
as c()i)})or. — Tlioy toiiu'idc \viili tlic tvpicnl Kolootlios in
liiuiiiii^" tlicir (U'iul, in ascriljin;^ tli(f ori^^iu of tlicir race; to
the niirn , and in most otlior particulars.
'I'licso tliroo tril)08 arc unccjuiNocally connci'tcd closflv
with f'fic'li other, and with the other nieniherK of tii<! Kohio«li
i^riiu)). Tlie ])osition of tlie foilowin;^ is h-ss definite: —
1. 77//' Knlslnnii. — 'I'hese re})r<'.s('nt th(! natives of the in-
tcrier. 'riiey fall into two divisions, whereof the nearer can
make itself int(illi;;ilj|<! to the Atnas and Kenays. I'he nioro
distant one is savaj^e, inhospitahh?, unintelli^ihle. (.'anni-
halisiii is one of th(!ir real or aeertidited eharacteristies,
2. The InchnluhhldHfx, dwoilin^- <»n the (Jhnlitna Iviver. —
They arc stated to bti akin to the Ma<^inints, who are allied
with .
W. The lukdliU's. — In (»nc villa;;e ahtue they are 70(1 strong'.
Tlicir lan^'ua<;e is said to be a mixture of the J\enay, L'na-
lashkan, and Atna.
It is hojx'd that the true eharaeter of the etlinolo<^i('al dif-
ticiilty involv'id in the elassiHeations of i\u\ tiihes (;nuniera-
tid, along with several others in tluf sanu; tcirritory , has
sujif^estcd itself to the mind of the re.'idcr: viz. tle^ ]>osition
(if the undetermined tribes, and the relations of the l"!s(|ui-
iiiaux and the Kolooeh j^roups to each other, 'i'hese i)ro-
bleiiis seem capable of being- scdved by means of the evi-
dence of languages. Previ(»us, however, to the enumeration
of our data upon this point, it nnist be (djserNcd, that mem-
liors of a /////•// etiniographical division, in all probability,
toriM part of the native population of Kussian America. From
the Lake Athabasca, as a centre, to the Atlantic on one;
hand, and to the Pacific on the other, languages of this
fjrnup are spoken; so that the Athabascan area in its ex-
tension from east to west, is second only to iIk; Kscjuimaux.
Now both the Kolooeh and Ksquimaux Languages have; fun-
damental affinities with the Athabascan, and vice versa ; whilst
It is generally the case in Ethnology, that two languages
ladically C(tnnccted with a third, are also i-ndically connected
with each other. With this premise, we may enumerate! in
iletail, our data in the way of philology. This method will
introduce new names and new localities, since we have oi'ten
vocabularies where we have nothing else besides.
1. Beechey'a Kstjuimavx. — The most northern sp(>cimen of
tho western Ksquimaux. Spoken in Kotzebu(!\s Sound.
2. Tho Aglimut vocid)ulary of the Altas Mtlinographi((ue.
•'•. The J^s((uimaux of tho Island of St Lawrence. — //////.
4. The Asiatic Esquiniaux of the Tshuktshi of Tshuktshi-
Noss. Klaproth's Asia Polyglotta.
272
ON iiiK i'.TiiNO(;u.\rnv or kissian AMKiiirA.
r>. Tlio Asiatic K«qiiiinaux ol" tlm Tsliuktslii of tlie iiioiitli
of tlio riv(M* Anadyr. — Ihitl.
{'). 'V\\(i FiS(|uiiiio of Morton Sound. — Cook's Voyagos.
7. TIk! Kuskokwiiiior vot'al)ulary of IJaer's Ji( itrilj^i;.
8. A vocabulary (»f tho Island of Nuniwock in tlio Atlas
Ktlino^raj)liiquo, is une(|uivoc'ally Ksqjiiuio, So also uro tin-
dialects of tlic Peninsula of Aliaska. Ilavini;; seen, liowivcr,
no vocabulary, I am unablo to states whether they most rc-
sembl(! those of the Ah'Utian Islands, (a prolonj^ation of its
v;ebtern (extremity), or of those ()f the Island Cadiack on its
south-eastern side. At any rate, the languages akin to tin'
(Jadiack, and t!ie lan;;ua^es of the Aleutian grouj), foim
separate divisions of sub-dialects. He^inninj;' with the Aleu-
tian class, we have the foUowinj; nuit(!rials: —
1). Unalashkan vocabularies by Usiansky, Wran;,'ell, iJc-
sanofV, and otli(;rs.
10. The Andreanowsky Isles. — Ivubeck's voeubulary. —
See Mithridatcs.
There is external evidence that the language for the whole
Aleutian group is radically one, the ditbirences, how(!Vcr,
being, as diab^ctal difteren(;e8, remarkable. The natives ot'
Atchu and IJnalashka have difticulty in understanding eacli
other. — ]\Iithridates.
11. Cadiack vocabularies by Kesanoff, Lisiansky, and
Wrangell.
12. Tshugatshi vocabularies by Kesanoff and Wrangell.
i;{. The Lord's J'rayer in Jakutat, by Jiaranoff. — Mithri-
datcs.
Notwithstanding the statement that only 19 words out of
1100 are connnon to the Unalashkan and Cadjak, the affi-
nity of these languages to each other, and their undouhteil
place in the Escpiiinaux class, has long been recognised.
il. The Tnhuluklaitics. — This tribe is akin to the Magiiiuit
and the Inkalaite. We possess a few words of the language.
which are sufficient to prove that although its definit(! jiIjui'
is undetermined, it has miscellaneous affinities to the Atiia,
Kenay, and Esquimaux.
IT). The Ugalyachmutsi of the Mithridatcs.
H). The Ugalents of Wrangell. — See Jiaer's lieitrligc
These two vocabularies represent the same language. Tin'
Ugalyachmutsi, although left by Kesanoff as an isolatiid lan-
guage, is unequivocally stated by Kaer to be Kolooch. li;*
contrast with the Esquimaux of the Tshugatshes, has al\vay>
been insisted on.
17. Kenay vocabularies by Davidoff, Kesanoff, Lisian.sky.
and Wrangell; also an anonymous one from a native. C«iil-
ON TMK DTII.NOIIUAI'IIV (»!' Ill MMIAN AMKIircA.
273
of tlu; lUdlltli
for tlu' wliolc
latin, in tlu' Aiciiii-ulo^ia Aiuericanu, goes so fur as lo sc-
[laiato the Ivonay oven from tlio K(»Iooili hin^imj^'o.
IS. Tiic Atiia of \\'raii<;('|i. — Sec Jiacr's Jicitriif:;e. Now,
aMotlior Auiorii'an lan;;ua{^('. .sjioki'ii soiuf.' ImiulnMl iiiilnH
south of tlio Copper liivtr, of which wo find a vocabulary
in Sir Alexander j\lai'keiizie'.s Travels, is called .Itiiti. It
lias no diroi't afHiiity with the present toiij;ue. A hypothe-
tiral solution of this coincidence lii-s in the fact, that in the
Athabascan lan^ua;;es tlu; root )l-/i, or /-u = man. That the
Ivcn.'iy call thenisolvcs T/ia/, or Tiitd/ut = men , is sp(!cially
>tati'(l by J'aer, p. lOo.
I'J. The Koltshan) vocabulary of Wran;;oll. — See I3a(!r's
JSoitriige. The tablcis of th(,' work in {^ucstioi^shew the lan-
;,'iia^(! to be undoubted Kolooch.
"ill. The Sitca vocabularies - numerous. Cook's Norl'olk
Sound; the Sitca of Lisi.uisky; the Sitca of Davidotf (sec;
Arclncolo^ia Americana); tli>! Sitca of Wran{;,-ell. According;
tii Captain Hryant, it is spoken from M. hit. oU" to 5" S.
by twenty tribtis. The number of individuals who speak it
es, however, I icckouecl by Mr (Jreen, an American missionary, at G.jOO
— see Archa;oIoj;ia Americana. The standard Kolooch is
that of Sitca or Norfolk Sound.
21. The Tunghaase of Uv Tolmie. Of this, the nmst
>()Uthern dialect of liussian America, wa find a short voca-
bulary in the Transactions of the Royal (5eoj^raphical Society.
It is truly stated to be closely allied to the Sitca.
That there an; no more than two i^roups required for the
classification of the above-mentioned h'ui<^uaf;(!S, and that
these are the Escpiimaux and the Kolooch, seems evident.
That these groups ar(i of no high value may be shewn. ]t
is undoubtedly true, that if we only compare isolated voca-
bularies with each other wo shall find little but points of
contrast. And we find less than might be expected even
when we compare groups of vocabularies.
1. The tables of Baer, exhil)iting three languages for the
Esquimaux and live for the Kolooeh group, give scarcely
halt" a dozen words common to the two.
2. The table of Lisiunsky, with the Unalashkan and Cadi-
uck on the one side, and the Kenay and Sitca on the other,
presents but little more.
3. The earliest language with which the Ugalyatmutsi was
compared were Esquinniux, and the contrast was insisted
upon from the first.
It is only when we apply what may be called the iitilirccl
method that the true value of the Esquimaux group becomes
recognised.
18
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
1.0
I.I
1.25
1^
■so
*■ I.
•UUU
1.8
u iiiin.6
6"
V]
A^S
:»./ ^^^
>^
^;y
Hiotographic
Sciences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, NY. MS80
(716) 872-4503
274
ox Tin: KTIINOCKAI'IIV OV ursSIAN AMKUIOA.
1. Each lias ai'finities witli the Atluibascau tongues, and
perhaps equal affinities.
2. Each has affinities with the Oregon languages, and each
perhaps equally.
3. Each has definite affinities with the languages of New
California, and each perhaps equal ones.
4. Each has miscellaneous affinities with all the other
tono'ues both of North and South America.
These facts that connect the Esquimaux languages witli
those spoken to the south of them involve, as may be easily
seen , a theory of much higlujr importance than the jxjsition
of groups like the Kolooch. They arc taken along Avith thr
geographical •position of the Esquimaux race in respect to
Asia, and point to the parts in (piestion as the stai'ting-points
for the population of the New World. Upon this latter 1
can only say at present, that I find Esquimaux Avords in
the folloAving languages : —
1. The Ivoriack.
2. The Kamskadalo.
3. The Aino of the Curulian Isles. In respect to this last
group, it is remarkable that whilst 1 only find two Avords
(the names for /lousc and ci/c) common to the Western Es-
quimaux vocabularies of Lisiansky and the Aino ones of
Langgsdorf, 1 find betAveen the latter and the Eastern Es-
quimaux of Parry a considerable number.
4. The Corean.
5. The Jajianesc.
This is in the Avay of direct evidence. The Oregon and Ko-
looch languages have shnilar and equal affinities; Aviiilst tlir
Asiatic languages enumerated have themselves affinities in
the Old AVorld knoAvn and recognised.
From Avhat has been laid before the Society, it may he
seen of how g-rcat importance it is to determine, whether the
languages of Russian America pass into each other gradually,
or arc divided by trenchant lines of demarcation.
ii'
MlSCELLANEOl S (ONTIMIU TIONS TO
THE ETllN()(illAPJlV OF NORTH
AUVAUVX.
ISKAl)
liEFOllE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY,
jANrAuv '24, 1845.
The present state of American Etlmograpliy is the excuse
for the miscellaneous character of the following notices. What
leiiiiiins just now to be done consists chiefly in the addition
of details to an outline already made out. Such communi-
cations, however, are mainly intended to serve as isolated
points of evidence towards the two following statements : —
1. That no American language has an isolated position
iviien compared with the other tongues en masse, rather than
witli the languages of any particular class.
2. That the affinity between the languages of the Ncav
World, as determined by their vocabularies , is not less real
tlian that inferred from the analogies of their grammatical
ilnicliire.
Jlodifications of the current doctrines , as to the value of
(ortain philological groups and classifications, are involved
in tlie positions given above.
Tlic Sitca and Kenay Languages. — That these languages
are Esquimaux may be seen by reference to the compara-
tive vocabularies in Lisiansky's Voyages and Baer's Stati-
stische und Ethnographische iNachrichten, &c.
The Ugalyachmutsi. — In the work last quoted this language
is shown to be akin to the Kenay. It is termed Ugalenz,
and is spoken in Russian America, near Mount St. Elias.
It has hitherto been too much disconnected from the Esqui-
maux group.
The Chipewyan and Nagail. — That these were Esquimaux
was stated by the author in the Ethnological subectiijn of
18*
270 MIS', .l,l,ANi:ot S (•((NTUllU riONS TO Tin; KTI1N()(;1!AI'IIV
tho British Association at York. TJio TaculII is also Es-I
quimanx. The Sussee, in the present state of our knowlcdfol
is best left without any absohite place. It has several mis-
cellaneous affinities.
Tiie hearinj^ of tiiese notices is to nxn-ge the groujis call-
ed AUiabuscan and Koloodi in the JOsquiniaux.
It has been connnunicated to the Ethnological Societv. tliatl
a majority of the languages of Oregon and New Carcdonial
are akin to each other and to the Esquimaux ; a stateinoiitl
applying to about forty-live vocabularies, amongst wliich}
are the three following, hitherto considered as isolated: —
1. The Fricndij VilUifie vocabulanj of M((ckcnzk'. 8ee Tra-i
vels. — This is a dialect of the Uillechoola.
2. The Alna of Mackenzie. — This is a dialect of the Noos-
daluni.
3. Tlie Salish of Uuiwnccau. See Arclucologia Americana.
— This is the Okamigan of Mr Tolmie. Sec Journal ofi
Geographical Society.
The Ahnenin. — In this language, as well as in two otiioisj
hereafter to be noticed (the JMackfoot and Crow), 1 have]
had, through the courtesy of Dr. Prichard, an opportunity
of using valuable vocabularies of Gallatin's, collected byj
Mr Mackenzie, an agent for the American fur -company
on the Yellow-stone river; by whom also Avcre drawn up
the shorter vocabularies, in Mv. Catlin's work on the Ame-j
rican Indians, of the Mandan, Kiccareo and other languages
The table also of the Natchez language is chiefly dnnviij
from the comparative catalogues of Mr. Gallatin. That tlici
MS. vocabulary of the Ahnenin represents the language ofi
the Fall ludians of Umfreville, and one different from tliat]
of the true Minetares (with which it has been confounded)
may be seen from the following comparison.
English. FallLnuian of Umfuevili.e. Ahnenin. JMinetaue.
eye nunnecsoou araytliya ishtali.
knife M'artli wahata luatzcc.
pipe pechouon cinpssah cekeepcc.
tobacco cheesouon kitclitawan owpai.
dog liudther ahttah inatshuga.
fire usittor beerais.
bow bart beerahhali.
arro/r utcee cotan.
one karci lemoisso.
li/!o neeee uethiyan noopah.
three narce iiainee.
four nean yahuayau topab.
:thn()(ii:ai'iiv
or XOUTII AMCItlf'A.
277
-Milli is .also E:<-i
f onr knoAvledrrf.j
lias several iiiis-j
the groiij)s call-
X.
ical Society, tliatj
I New Caredoniaj
lux ; a statenuMitl
amongst wliiciij
as isolated : —
;enzk'. See Tra-j
ect of the Nuoj,-
oi;'ia Americana.!
See Journal ofi
as in two others
[ Crow), 1 havej
, an opportunity
's, collected by I
an fur -company
were drawn upj
)rk on the Amc-i
other languages,
is chietly drawn j
llatin. That the
the language (if
ferent from that]
5en confounded),!
I.
|[sr,r.isi[. Fall-Txiuan of r.Mi'UEVii-i.K. Aiinkxin. Mi.\i:tauk.
y( yautune cheehoh.
)/ uoteartuco acamai.
./iffl no.sartiice chappo.
;')<;/(/ nar.s\vartnco iiopujjpoo.
01/' anharbotwartuce nowa.ssappai.
(.)( mettartucG nctassa ))ocraga.
The Ahncnin language, without being at present referable
in any recognized group, has numerous miscellaneous affi-
liities.
English
.iltm'iiin
<lii;iluitap(t<),sh
hmitmaqmukhj
Eii;;lisli
Mam
Ijtihlo
liwitlli
Mc
English
.Ihneiihi
Eaijuimaiuv
knhlenaux
iijibhe/i'mj
}licmac
)kssachiiscHs
Siirragathsels
khuvarc
Miami
^kinwc
'imoluov
[iiKippa
English
.Hincnin
"W AUjDukm
Mussac/tusclls
English
Meuin
'ismjc
God.
OS is SH/K
shayshoursh.
sai.sos.
hair.
betamnita.
baat.
pits a — head.
pseotan — head.
ear.
etah.
hcutinga.
tsheentik.
shudik.
otowcgn.
ottowng.
hadowugan.
wehtoughh.
wuttowwog.
wittauk.
tawakch.
towakah.
neotah.
naughta.
nottali.
7wse.
husi.
yash.
watch.
mouth.
ockya.
ehaugh.
hcche.
English
Ahnejiin
Onnnddf/os
English
Ahnenin
Caddo
English
Ahncnin
Pawnee
Muskoge
Calatrlia
Mohairk
English.
Ah/ieniti
Sack and Fox
Caddo
English
Ahncnin
Tuscarora
Nolloway
Seneca
Wyandot
Muhatrk
Dacola
English
Ahnenin
Dacola
Yanclon
lingers.
naha.
eniagp.
blood.
barts.
baaho.
hand.
ikickan.
iksheeree.
innkke.
eeksapeeah.
oochsoochta.
leg.
ininaha.
nenanah.
danuna — foot.
man.
neehato — ivhite
man.
watamahat —
hlack .* man.
aineeliau.
cniha.
ungouli.
aingahcui.
oonguich.
weetschahskta.
girl.
wahtah.
weetsheoahnah.
weetchinchano.
278
Mi!S('Ki,i.ANi:ni;s coxriunr'noNS to tiik i:i'ii\()(;i! ai-iiv
if
Yanclon
Avcetachnong —
Miami
musuoji — ,h'(,
daughter.
Illinois
raousoali — di\r
Osage
wfitungah —
English
l>ad.
sister.
Ahnenin
walinatta.
English
wife.
Mohawk
walipatckii.
JltiKiiin
otha.
Onondagos
walietlio.
Kenny
ssi(')().
Oneida
wahetka.
English
ivater.
English
good.
Ahnenin
nitsa.
Ahnenin
etah.
QiKippu
nih.
Caddo
lialiut — h(unl-
Uc/io
tsach.
some.
English
snn.
English
wr, //)///('.
Ahnenin
esis.
Ahnenin,
nistow.
Altjonkin
kesis.
Blackfoot
nisto — /.
( 'hocUnv
liashe.
English
Ahnenin
he nay
Ohihkasuw
husha.
yo.i.
jMus/iUtjc
hahsie.
ah nan.
nan.
English
f^ock.
English
to-daif.
Ahnenin
hannike.
Ahnenin
Mohawk
Onondagos
1 •
IVinchafjo
Dacota
Yanclon
eenee.
eeang.
eeyong.
Avananaki.
kuhhwantoh.
neucke.
Mohaivk
oonoyah.
English
to-morrow.
Onundago
onaja.
Ahnenin
nacali.
Tchuklchi
nnako.
English
wood.
unniok.
Ahnenin
bess.
Choctujv
onaha.
Passamaquoddy
a pass — tree.
English
Abenaki
abassi — tree.
many.
Ahnenin
ukaka.
English
I)ear.
Mohawk
awfjuayakix).
Ahnenin
wussa.
Seneca
kawkuagu.
(jiiappa
Osage
Oniahaw
wassail.
English
drink.
"vvasaiiba.
wassabai.
. ihnenin
Osage
nahbin.
nebuatoh.
English
dog.
English
sleep.
Ahnenin
ahttah.
Ahnenin
I
nuckcnots.
liudther.
Abenaki
nekasi.
Sheshatapoosh
attung.
Mohawk
yihkootos.
agotawi.
Abenaki
attie.
Onondagos
Tiiscarora
tcheer
Seneca
wanuhgoteli.
Nalloway
cheer.
English
two.
English
elk.
Ahnenin
neccc.
Ahnenin
wussea.
Vassamaquoddy
ncs.
lIN'OdlfAI'llV
or NDirni a.mkkica.
279
wanuhgoteli.
.t'li'iKi/ii
\l(IIIS(tc/lUSl'US
Siirriif/auscis
}litliir<i)i
Jddize
Kiiglisli
.llincnin
.Ihcmiki
ynrruijunscts
Kiiglisli
Mweiiin
tljil.hrirai/
niss.
noose.
ncossc.
IlOOSiill.
neos,
neeze.
nass.
three.
iiavco.
iiasli.
nlsli.
four.
nean.
yahnayan.
new in.
Oltatva
Knislenaux
(Hd Jlgnn/dii
S/ics/ittlapoosh
Mdssachusells
Narragrtnsels
l-iU^lisli
J hue II ill
Knislenaux
Ojibbeivmj
OUaiVa
Ahenahi
Monlaug
nnvin.
nayo.
ncyoo.
naoii.
yaw.
yoli.
six.
nokitukujaii.
nogotoahsik.
gotoasso.
nigouta was-
woi8.
nlngotowaswi
negudans.
nacuttah.
The Jtlackfoot. — Of this language wc liavc tlirec vocabu-
laries ; a short one by UnifreviHe, a short one in ]\Ir. Cat-
lin's work, and the h)ngor and more important .one in ]\Ir.
l!;illatin's manuscripts. The throe vocaouhirios represent
ilie same language. Its affinities are miscellaneous; more
liowever with the Algonkin tongues than with those of the
other recognized groups.
llnglish
Hldclc/hol
iiM Alijonldn
Ollaira
Ikiaivare
yuiitieokc
Illimis
Sliaivme
Suiiki
I'krokec
U'uccoun
English
Blnc/ifdol
I'ltsaroka
English.
Blnckfool
Caluivba
English
Blackfoot
I'psaruka
iroman.
ahkeya.
ickweh.
iKiue.
nkhr^ueh.
kliqeu.
ac([uahique.
ickoe.
equiwa.
kwoyikih.
ageyung.
yecanau.
boy.
sacoomahpa.
skakkatte.
girl.
ahkaquoin.
yahwachaliu.
uhikl.
pokah.
hakkattc.
English
Black fool
Seneca
English
Black foot
Esquimaux
English
Blackfoot
Knislenaux
Ojibbcway
Oltawa
Massachusells
Narragansels
Illinois
Sack and Fox
Uche
English
father.
onwa.
hanee.
husband.
ohm ill.
oomah.
daughter.
netan.
netannis.
nindanis.
nedannis.
tanis.
nutaunis.
nittannis.
tall an a.
tanes.
tpyunung.
brother.
nausah.
Blackfoot
Passamaquoddy nesiwas.
Abenaki nitsie.
2S0 .Mis('i:i,i,ANi;(»i s coxiKriti ■pions to rrii; KTiiNoiiUAi'iiv
I>l(ir/,fii(tt
Old .ll(/(in/iin
OjihheiiHiy
Knixtcimux
Enj^lish
liluclcfwt
iVcnomeni
English
Jilackfoot
Miami
Suck and Fux
English
liluckfoot
Esquimaux
English
Blackfool
Ojihbeivai/
Knislemiux
Shcs/uitapoush
Massachusetls
Mcnomcni
English
Blackfool
Wyandot
Muhairk
Onondago
Seneca
Ihieyda
Nolloivai/
English
Blackfool
Knistenaux
Ojibbcway
Ollatva
Miami
Massnchusclts
Narragansets
Skaivnoc
Sack and Fox
Menomeni
head.
(ito([unin.
()(>sti([U.'ui.
stonkoan.
oostcgwon.
istogwcn.
ustctiuoin.
nose .
okissis.
oochecush.
neck.
uhkokin.
kwaikiincli.
nekwaikanoh.
Jiand.
okittakis.
iyutocka.
tikkiek— /i/<^f/i'.
leg.
ohcat.
okat.
miskate.
necscatc-h.
inuhkout.
oakauut.
feel.
oaksakah.
ochshcetau.
oochsheeta.
ochsita.
oochslipcta.
ochshcecht.
seoke — toes.
bone.
ohkinnah.
oskann.
okun.
okunnuin.
kanih.
uskon.
wuskan.
ochcunne.
okanoh.
okunmn.
English
Blackfool
h'nislc/iaii.r
Ojibbea'ai/
English
lilackfool
MoUairk
Seneca
Nolloway
English
/iUtckftiot
3lo/iicun
Shaienoe
English
Blackfotd
Osage
English
Blackfool
Knistenaux
Ojibbcway
(^tlatra
Sheshalapoiish
Micmuc
Abenaki
Massachusetts
Narragansets
Mohican
Delaware
Miami
Shawnoe
Sack and Fox
Menomcni
English
Blackfool
Knistenaux
Ojibbcway
Sheshatapoosh
English
Blackfool
Mohican
kettle.
csko.
askick.
akkcek.
shoes.
atsakin.
(»htM([uah.
auhtoyuawo-
hya.
otawgwa";.
bread.
ksaquoiiats.
tauij^iuuili.
ta({iianah.
spring.
motoc.
paton.
summer.
napoos.
ncipin.
noo.bin.
nipin.
nij)in.
noopun.
nipk.
nipi'no.
nopun.
neepun.
nopoon.
nipcn.
nipccnuch.
nopeneh.
ueeponweh.
noeaypeenay-
waywah.
hail.
sahco.
sasagun.
sasaigau.
shashaygan.
fire.
esteu.
stauw.
IS
IN<»(ii! Vl'IIV
hfjlile.
otiko.
askick.
nkkcok.
.shoes.
fitsakin.
(tlita([uali.
aulitnyuawo-
liya.
otawgwag.
bread.
ksaqtiouats.
taiU|Uiuih.
taf|uunali.
spring.
inotoc.
})aton.
summer.
napoos.
ncpin.
noobin.
nipin.
ni})in.
ncopun.
nipk.
nipeiK'.
nopun.
iieepun.
nopoon.
nipcu.
nipocnuoli.
nepeneli.
ueeponweh.
neeaypeenay-
w ay wall.
hail.
sahco.
sasagun.
sasaigan.
shashaygan.
fire.
esteu.
stauw.
Ol' NOKllI A.MKUK'A.
Kii;;lisli
llldchfool
I'hikliiisaw
.IWicapu
Hiij^lish
l)l(tc/i'f(l0l
I'.itijuimaux
Tclmklchi
English
Ill(ir/c/o(it
k'liislenaux
iijibhi'way
iillH/ra
iihl Alqonkin
Hiiglish
illitc/ifont
Kimtenaux
iljihbcway
Shii/vfwe
English
Blitckfoul
Upsaroka
Kimtenaux
Ojibbeway
Old Algonkin
Piissamaquoddy
Abenaki
Mohiean
Delaware
Miami
Menomcni
English
Blackfool
Xolloway
English
Blackfoot
'ijibbeway
n'uler.
ohhkcah.
iiekah.
ak.
ice.
sacoocoittah.
sikk(H).
tsliikuta.
earlh.
ksahcoom.
askce.
ahkec.
aki.
ackoy.
ackwin.
lake.
oniah sckamc.
sakiogun.
sahgiegun.
inskaque.
island.
mane.
luinnc — tmter.
ininneteekah —
lake.
ininnopeshu —
island.
ministick.
ininnis.
minis,
muniqu.
men ah an.
mnauhan.
menokhtey.
menatey.
menahanweh.
meonayish.
roek , stone.
ohcootoke.
ohlioutahk.
tree.
masetis.
metik.
Old Algonkin
S/ieshnla/joush
Massaehasetts
English
Ji lack fool
Miami
Qudppa
English
[ildckfoot
iVassaehusells
Narragansels
Mohican
Miami
Sack and Fox
Mcnomeni
English
niackfoot
Esquimaux
English.
Blackfool
Esquimaux
Knislenaux
OjilihcuHiy
Old Algonkin
Massachusetts
Narragansels
Miami
English
Bh '-foot
A ,i.^huselts
Naruyansets
English
Blackfoot
Taculli
Kenay
Cherokee
Salish
English
Blackfool
Mcnomeni
281
motiih.
mistookooali.
uiehtug.
grass.
mahtoovaas(!.
mctahkotuck.
niontih.
leaf.
soyapoko.
wunnopog.
wunncpog.
v'unnopok.
metshipakwa.
tatapacoan.
ahneepeeoaku-
nah.
beaver.
kakestako.
keeyoeak.
volf.
niahcooya.
amaok.
myegnn.
mieengnn.
an.
mayg
maliingan.
muckquoshin.
muckquashin.
muhkwaiauch.
bird.
pakesa.
psukses.
peasis.
oh was.
ogaze.
kqiiasa.
oowatse.
ooseli.
goose.
emahkiya.
mckawk.
4^-- ■
2S2
.Mis(i;i,i,A.\i:(U s cox'iiMrit TioNs lo iiii; irniMHii! vpiiv
/ '
I I
Kn;^li.sli
partridge.
h'nistenaiix
nitli.i.
Klarhfonl
kfitokin.
ncya.
Ndiilini/ie
kittoawndip-
OJihbe/ray
noen , nin.
(pia.
Old Algoukin
nir.
Kiigli.sh
red.
Sheshalapuiis/t
node.
lilarlcfool
uinhisonuni.
.Micmac
nil.
MassacliuscUs
inisquCii.
Illinois
niia.
Ahnenin
nistow.
English
yellow.
niackfool
• ilitaliko.
English
I III tit.
Esquimaux
tooiigook.
h'lackfoot
cluisto.
tslutngak.
/vnisleuuux
kitha.
Knislcnaux
asawwow.
Ojibbenuty
kcon , kill.
OJihbe/my
ozawa.
Old Algoukin
kir.
.
Micmac
kil.
(ijawa.
oozao.
Old Alfjoukin
Illinois
kira.
Sack and Fox
ossawah.
English
this, that.
Mcnomcni
oasliahwecyah.
Blackfoot
kanaklia.
iMiglisli
great.
Upsaroka
kiiina.
h'lackfool
olimohcoo.
Nanticokc
youkanna.
Micmac
iiu'chkilk.
English
to day.
Mdhhum
makauk.
Blackfoot
anookchusi-
English
small.
quoix.
Black foot
enahcootse.
Knistcnaux
anoutcli.
Upsaroka
ecat.
Onondago
neuchke.
English
strong.
miskappe.
niascawa.
English
yesterday.
Blackfoot
Knistcuaux
Blackfool
Dacota
mahtonc.
tanneohali.
Ojibbeway
machecawa.
English
drink.
Old Algoukin
masshkawa.
Blackfool
soinate.
Natilicokc
miskiu.
Upsaroka
smiinmik.
English
HHirm.
English
speak.
lUackfoot
kazetotzu.
BUukfool
apooyatz.
Knislcnaux
klcliatai.
Upsaroka
bidow.
kisopayo.
English
sing.
OJibbewat/
kezhoyah.
Blackfool
anihkit.
Ottawa
kesliautta.
Knistcnaux
nocuninioou
Old Algonkin
akisliattey.
Ojibbeway
nugainoo.
Passumaquoddy
kesipctai.
Sheshatapoosh
nekahmoo.
Massachusetts
knssntan.
Illinois
nacamoliok.
Narragansels
kssetauwou.
Menomeni
neokanmco-
English
1.
noon.
Blackfoot
nisto.
English
sleep.
Chipcwyan
nc.
Blackfool
okat.
■■: 'i.
llMMil! M'liv
OF Xoltrit AMKUM'A.
2S3
n(>en , nui.
iiocummoun.
.)lii/iftirfc
iliioiiildfjo
Si'HCca
yilikoiitos.
agotawi.
wanuligotoh.
l'iii}j;lisli
lUiivkfonl
Ahcmiki
kill.
(Miikkc.
noniiko.
The niackfoot nuiiiorals, as ^ivon by I\Ifickonzi(! iuid llm-
tVcvillu, slightly dilFiir. The tcM'iiiIiiation in -lun runs tlirougli
the numerals (»t" Fit/.-lIu;^h Sound, an < )rog()r. langun;^o.
K.vdi.isii.
lU.ACKFOOT or
rMi'iti;\ ii.i.i;.
lU.AcKivior oi."
Ma( KKN/.li:.
FlT/-lIl(lll
SiHXD.
um
tokcscum
sa
niiiiscMun.
two
nartokoscuin
Hiilitoka
inalscutii
three
nohokoscinii
nalihuka
uta.scuiii.
jhur
nes\v(Mmi
nasowe
inoozcuin.
five
ncsittwi
nositto
tliikaosciun.
six
nay
nnwwc
kitli.sc.nin.
seven
kitsic
akitseciuii
atldopooscum.
eight
narnoswouni
nalmis.sowo
nialkiiaskuni.
nine
picksee
pakoso
iiauooskim.
ten
kcepoy
kppo
liighio.
2. nokty, Tuscarorri ; tikneo, Seneca; tcghia, Onehhi ; do-
kaneo, NoUoway; tcd^ini, Olio.
W. noft'lioli, Mohican; naldia, Pclatvare.
.'). nthsysta, Mohawk; satton, tjnappa; satta, Osage ^ Oitia-
hitiv; sata, (llOt; salitslia, Minrlare.
7. tzauks, k'((nulchen, Xoosdalum
10. kippio, Chimmesyan.
The Cro/v and Mandan LangiiaycA. — Of the important lan-
guage of the Upsarokas or Crows the Arclucologia Ameri-
cana contains only thirty words. Of the JNlandan Ave have,
in the same work, nothing beyond the names often chiefs.
Ill (jallatin's classification these tribes are dealt with as sub-
divisions of th(! Minetare nation. Now the MinGiare are of
till! Sioux or Dacota family.
Between the Mandan vocabulary of Mr. Catlin and the Crow
vocabulary of Gallatin's j\[SS. there are the following words
in common. The affinity seems less close than it is gener-
ally stated to be: still the two languages appear to be Sioux.
This latter point may be seen in the second table.
ICN<ir.i8ii.
MANDAN.
Cituw.
God
nialihoponeta
sakalibooatta
sun
nienaklia
a'hliliiza.
moon
esto monaklia
niinnatatclie.
stars
h'kaka
ok leu.
rain
irkahoost
liaunah.
2S1
Misciii.t.AM'oi s ('DNTimurroNs TO riti", irriixooiiAi'iiv
lit V,
K.Ndl.IMII.
.Mamian.
Cnitw.
snow
co|>en!40
iiinkkoiipah —
//////
riirr
passalmli
alicsii.
(liijl
llillMIDlll
inaiipali.
nii/ht
cstof^r
oclie.
tltir/c
Imnipiilicriskali
i'.Iiil>piisli('ka.
li(fh(
tMluyliusli
thicsho.
iromuH
iiiolia
luoyakatto.
irifc
innofHO
mnah.
child
sooklioiiialia
hakkntto.
1
girl
Hookmclia
moyakattc.
boif
sodknumolik
.sliakkatto.
head
pan
inarsliaa.
legs
doka
luichoope.
ei/cs
ostumn
iiicislita.
motilfi
ea
ea.
nose
palino
bujipa.
fitcc
estah
esH.
cars
nakolia
uppa.
hand
oiika
buKcliic.
fingers
cinkalia
buschic!.
fool
slico
buscbe.
hair
hahlioc
inasbeab.
canoe
monaiiko
mabesbe.
fish
poll
booab.
bear
inahto
dulipitsa.
wolf
haratta
cbata.
dog
raones waroota
biska.
buffalo
ptemday
bisba.
elk
oraepah
citcbcricazzsc.
deer
malimanacoo
oblia.
beaver
warrappa
biruppe.
shoe
hoompali
booinpe.
bow
warraenoopali
bistubecab.
arroii)
inahlia
aluiailz.
pipe
ehudka
ompsa.
tobacco
niannaslia
bopa.
good
shusliu
itsicka.
bad
k'liecush
kiibbeek.
hot
dsasosli
abre.
cold
shineehush
bootsbere.
1
nie
be.
thou
ne
de.
he
e
na.
me
noo
bero.
they
eonali
inibab.
^H
OF NOKTII AMIMIK.'A.
2h:,
Knumhm. Mam'AN.
Cunw.
1
iiinlihiuinaii
ainutcat.
2
noinp.'ih
U'lomcat.
3
iifuiifiry
nanKMiacat.
4
tolilui
HJiopocat.
5
kiikhoo
chihhocat.
6
kciiiiih
ahcamacaf.
7
koopah
sappoah.
8
tiitucka
nii(Miipa[i('.
9
tiiahpa
ahiniitfap[)o.
ID
pcrug
pcrakiik.
English
Cod.
(Jiiappa
schohjinka.
}l(m(ltifi
iiialili()pp(!nota.
(Hill
chocchingai.
If'iiirhiif/fi
maliahhah.
fhnn/iafv
shingasliiiiga
Vinrldir
majihopa.
English
hi'dd.
Aliinnlcm
inaniton.
Mdiidiin
'
])an.
English
A7/«.
Ddcola
2)ah.
Mdiuldii
mcnahka.
Vanctun •
pah.
fhiuihaiv
inoencajai.
(Juappa
pahhih.
Ciolilo
inauoh — litjlit.
OmahaM
pah.
English
star.
English
arms.
.Viiiidun
h'kaka.
MdluldH
arda.
{Umppa
mihcacheh.
Mincldtc
arrough.
Olio
peckahhai.
Pawnee
heeoeru.
Omaliuw
Miiwlare
meecaai.
eekah.
English
Mduddii
kg.
doka.
English
day.
Quappa
jaccah.
MumlMi
haiupaheriskali.
(Isagc
sagaugli.
ff'iiicbago
hannip.
English
haiiKipcehah.
anipa.
aungpa.
hompaye.
eyes.
Dacota
Mandan
estnme.
Yunclon
Thicota
ishta.
iisage
y'linclon
Qudppa
ishtali.
• 1 ,
Dllo
liangwai.
inschta.
Omuhaiv
oinbah.
Olio 4-0.
ishta.
MincUire
mahpnih.
English
moul/i.
English
ivumun.
Mandan
ea.
Mundan
nieha.
iSioux passim
oa.
Yanclon
weeah.
English
}uise.
Omu/taw
waoo.
Mandan
paliOD.
yinclare
meeyai.
Sioux passim
pall.
h)W(iy
mega.
English
face.
English
child.
Mandan
ostah.
Manclan
sookhoniaha.
Dacola
cetai.
I \l
»L
2»0 MISCliL
LANE()i;.S COXTllIU
UTION.S TO THK
KTiiNoou.vruv
Yimclon
. oetai.
English
bou,'.
Mhielurc
etah.
Mandan
warraenoopiili
English
ears.
Minelare
boeiahliali.
Mandan
nakoha.
Titsearora
awraw.
Wincbarjo
nahchalnvah-
English
arrotr.
hah.
Mandan
in<alilia.
Ynnclon
nougkopa.
Siovx
mong , ma.
Osage
naughta.
English.
shoe.
English
hands.
Mandan
liooinj)ali.
Mandan
onka.
iJacola
haiiipa.
Nolloiray
nunke.
'^nappa
honpcli.
Tnscarora
ohehnoh.
Minelare
opali.
Menomcni
oanah.
English
bad.
Miami
enalikco.
Mandan
k'liocu.sji.
English
fingers.
Dacota
slieoclia.
Mandan
on kali all.
English
cold.
(hiondaijn
eniage.
Mandan
shinoekush.
Wyandol
eyingia.
Ifinebago
seencclice.
Tchuklchi
ainhanka.
Sioux
Slice.
English
fool.
English
JW.
Mandan
shee.
Mandan
mcgosli.
Sioux
sih.
Tuscarora
gwusli.
Pawnee
a.sho
English
1.
Titsearora
uhsol
Mandan
mc.
English
hair.
Dacola
meeali.
Mandan
nalilioc
Minciare
ineeee.
Sioux
1
palico.
Quappa
vieli.
L
Osage
veca.
English
Mandan
fish.
poll,
boa.
English
Ihou.
Minctarc
Mandan
ne.
Sioux
ho, ho •h.
Winebago
ney.
Daeola
neoah.
English
heaver.
Minela?'e
nclio.
Mandan
Minciare
warappah.
meerapa.
English
he.
Olio
Mandan
e.
rawaiy.
Dacola
eeali.
English
deer.
Mandan
mahmanaco.
p]nglish
we.
Yancion
tarnindoca.
Mandan
noo.
Winebago.
neehwahki.'i-
English
house.
weono.
Mandan
etc.
Onondago
ni.
loway
tshe.
Knislenatux
neou.
;oaKAi'UY
Mnndan
iisiigc
iliim/iaw
English
}Utndan
Shiiix
I'clie
English
]landini
Minclfirc
Englisli
}I(in(l(t>i
Siuiix
English
}landan
or NOUTII AMKKlt'A.
one.
Minclare
mahhannah.
Muskoge
minche.
moeachchcc.
English
31 an da Ji
two.
Minelare
nompah.
nompa, noopa.
nowah.
English
Mandan
Minelare
three.
namary.
namee.
English
Mandan
Seneca
four.
Mohawk
tohha.
topah , tuah.
English
Mandan
five.
Mine tare
kakhoo.
287
uhechoh.
chahgkie.
six.
keniali.
acamai.
seven.
koopali.
chappo.
eight.
tatucka.
tikkeugh.
sohtayhhko.
ten.
perng.
poragas.
The Riccaree Latu/iiage. — In Balbi and in the Mithridates,
the Riccaree is stated to Le a dialect of the Pawnee; but
no words are given of it: hence the evidence is inconclusive.
Again, the term Paw^nee is equivocal. There are tribes call-
ed Pawnees on the river Platte, and tribes called Pawnees
on the Red river of Texas. Of the last nation we have no
vocabulary; they appear however to be different from the
first, and are Pawnees falschj so called.
Of the Riccaree we have but one vocabulary (Catlin's North
American Indians, vol. ii.); it has the following words com-
mon with the irue Pawnee list of Say in the Arclneologia
Americana, vol. ii.
English.
Paw NEK.
RiCAUKE.
God
thonwahat
tewaroohteli.
devil
tsaheekshkakooiaiwah
kakewaroohteh
sim
shakoroo
shakoona.
fire
tateetoo
tekieeht.
moon
pa
wetah.
stars
opeeroet
sac a.
rain
tatsooroo
tassou.
snow
toosha
tahliau.
day
shakoorooeeshairct
shacona.
night
eeraishnaitec
eenahgt.
light
shusheegat
shakoouali.
dark
eeraishuaite
tekatist.it.
hot
toueetstoo
towarist.
cold
taipeechee
teepse.
288
.MISCELLAXKOUS CJONTIUIUTTIONS TO TIIi: KTlINOCiKAPIIV
English,
Pawxke.
KU'AREK.
Kiiglisl
yes
nawa
neecoola.
Hicciire
tio
kakce
kaka.
Citddo
bear
koorooksh
keahya.
1, t\ /nfi 1 ■ LI ■
dog
botv
ashakish
teeragish
hohtcli.
nache.
niiglisi
RicairCi
arrow
loekslioo
ncccho.
bi/innK
hul
akkaroo
acare.
)l(issac/
woman
tsapat
sapat.
boy
pecshkee
wcenatcl).
Eiiglisl
girl
tchoraksh
soonahtch.
llircarci
child
peevon
peia.
JlliicajH
head
pakshu
pahgh.
Uclirz
cars
atkaroo
tickokito.
}l(ihairL
eyes
keereekoo
checreecoo.
iiiieida
hair
oshu
palii.
English
hand
ikslieeroe
tolionara.
likcarri
fingers
haspeet
parick.
Maize
foot
ashoo
ahgh.
ynlchcz
canoe
lakohoroo
lahkeehoon.
I'dte
river
kattoosh
sahonnee.
English
I
ta
nanto.
1
askoo
asco.
Riccaret
2
peetkoo
pitco.
Unondag
3
touweet
tow wit.
hiway
4
shkeetish
tcheetisli.
I'ljalenz
1 ■
5
sheeooksh
tchcetislioo.
licixiy
6
sheekshabish
tcheetislipis.
English
7
peetkoosheeshabish totchapis. |
Ricraree
H
touweetshabish
tochapiswon.
.iltacapa
9
looksheereewa
totchapisnahhenowon.
10
looksheercc
■ nahen.
English
20
petouoo
wetah.
Riccaree
30
luksheerpcwctouoo sahwee. |
ilnndan
100
sheekookshtaroo
shontan.
Sioux
The specia
1 affinities of the
Riccaree are not very docidoil,
English
It is {inythinp; rather than an
I isolated language , and will.
Riccaree
probably, bo
definitely placed
-when we obtain vocabularies
yotlo/ray
of the Indian
languages of Texas. |
Esqiiiinai
English
evil spirit.
Caddo sako.
Winebag
fiHCida
Riccuree
kakewaroohteh.
Salish skokoleel.
Catntvba
yahwerejeh.
Delatvare gishukh.
English
Mohican kcsogh.
Riccaree
English
sun.
Esquimaux sukkonuk.
Siuux
Riccaree
shakoona.
Tchuktchi shekenak.
^lussach.
tNOdUAPilY
OF N(tK'l'H A.MI'.lllCA.
289
)t very docidoil.
iafj;e , and will.
lin vocabularies
Kiiglisli
Hiiriirc'C
I'ttihlo
Kugliwh
Ku'carce
Eniiiiiiiiaiix
iliisnac/iiisells
Eiiglisli
Kiraurc
.llliirapa
Uchrz
]h>hawk
fliickla
English
likcan'C
Miizc
Natchez
Icltc
English
iiiwndagos
hway
l'(julc?iz
lieiiay
English
Ricraree
AUacapa
English
Riccarce
}kndan
Smuv
English
Riccarce
yoltonuiy
Ksqidinaiix
Wmhar/o
"ncida
English
Riccarce
>iiuux
^liissachusells
stars.
saca.
tsokas.
niyhl.
euaght.
ooiiooak.
nnjuk.
nukon.
dark
tckatistat.
togg — iiigltt.
toowa — iiighl.
tcwhgarlars.
tetincalas.
snow.
tahhaii.
towat.
kowa.
stahae.
fire.
tekieeht.
yotecka.
tako.
takgak.
taze.
cold.
teepye.
tsainps.
bad
kah.
k'hccush.
sheecha.
hoy.
wecnatch.
aqueianha.
einyook.
eeneek — son,
yungh.
head. hair.
pahgh, pahi.
pall, pan.
puhkuk.
Choctaw
Chiccdsav^
English
Riccarce
Tiiscaroru
Esqiiimau.r
English
Riccarce
Choclaiv
Chiccasaw
English
Riccarce
Maiidan
Tiiscarora
English
Riccarec
Seneca
Tchuklchi
English
Riccarce
Sioux
English
Riccarce
Choctaw
Chiccasaw
English
Riccarce
Mohawk
Onondago
Oneida
Tiiscitrura
English
Riccarce
TaculU
Salish
English
Riccarce
Adaize
English
Riccarce
Chelimacha
eobuk.
skoboch.
eye.
cheerecco.
ookawroli.
(M'lTuka.
foot.
aligh.
iya.
oaya.
arms.
arrai.
aril a.
orungjai.
Iicar.
koahya.
yucwy.
kainga.
shoes.
hoochc
hongha.
arrow .
neecho.
oski noki.
nucka.
hut.
acar" 3.
canuchsha.
ganschsajc.
kaunonghsau.
yaukuhniigh.
canoe.
lahkeehoon.
allachee.
'tlea'yh.
yes.
neccoola.
cola.
JW.
kaka.
kahie.
19
{'I
2*.M) MISt'KIiLAM;<ll\S (;0\TUIIJUTIONS l-t Till; IMIINOCUAPIIV
AUjimkin
kah.
Ononduyo
skata.
Ken ay
kukol.
Seneca
skaut.
English
/.
English
two.
liictaree
nanto.
Riccaree
pitco.
Alijonkin
neon.
Caddo
behit.
Englisli
yoH.
English
four.
Riccaree
kaglion.
Riccaree
tchcctisli.
Al(jonkin
keen.
Atlacapa
tspts.
English
otic.
English
thirty.
liieearee
asco.
Riccaree
saliweo.
Wyandot
scat.
Cherokee
tsawaska\\
Mohawk
huskat.
Tlic Creek and Choctaw Laiif/iaiyes. — That tlio question as
to the affinity between the Creek and the Choetaw langua-
ges is a question of classification rather than of fact, may
be seen from the Archeeologia Aniericai^a, vol. ii. p. 405:
where it is shown that out of six hundred words , ninety-
seven are coininon to the two languages.
The Caddo. — That this language has affinities with thf
JMohawk, Seneca, and the Iroquois tongues in general, and
that it has words common to the ]\luskoge, the Catawba, the
Pawnee, and the Cherokee languages may be seen from tlio
tables of the Archoiologia Americana. The illustrations how-
ever of these languages are to be drawn from a kno\vle(lf;o
of the dialects of Texas and the ( )rcgon districts, tracts of
country whereon our information is preeminently insufficient.
The Natchez, — This language has the following miscella-
neous affinities, insufficient to give it a place in any deti-
nite group, but sufficient to show that it is anything rather
than an isolated language.
English
man.
English
girl.
Natchez
toinkuhpona.
Natchez
liohlenoo.
Cochitni
tamma.
Noosda/um
islauio.
St. Xavicr
tamma.
Squallynmish
islanie.
Loretlo
taniina.
Kuwitclien
islanie.
St. Borgia
Olhnmi
Shahaptan
tania.
dame.
haina.
English
Natchez
Dacota
head.
tomme apoo
pall.
English
woman.
Yancton
pall.
Natchez
taniahl.
Qiiappa
])ahili.
Huasteca
tomol.
thnahaw
pah.
NOCUAPIIY
inities with the
in general, and
10 Catawba, the
c seen from the
ustratioiis liow-
im a knowledge
tricts, tracts of
itly insufiicient.
owing niisc'clla-
OF NOKTII A.MKUICA.
291
Kuglisli
liiiir
Eaglish
tree.
Sulc/iiK
etono.
Nalehez
tshoo.
]l\xlcca
(Iziui.
C hoe 1 1 HI}
itto.
Kiij,'lisli
eye.
Chiltlidsair
itta.
Sdlc/wz
oktool.
Muskoije
ittah.
]l(\rir<i>i
ikhtoloh.tll.
Euglish
Ilesh.
Kiiglisli
nose.
Nalcliez
wiiitso.
ynlr/irz
shaniats.
Ahjonkin
wioss.
lliuislrrn
zani.
Euglish
ilccr.
English
moitlh
Nalehez
tza.
yulchi'z
hoche.
JJ'inelnifin
tcha.
I'ncimc/ii
chi.
Quajipa
tah.
)l(ii/a
chi.
Mnskofje
itzo.
«/
Caddo
dah.
English
ioolh
yulclirz
int.
Engli.sh
ha//'alo.
I'ii'iipdoidh
tinti.
Nidehev
wastaaeni.
}kxic.an
tontli — Up.
tenita.
Urhe
wctcacnvuone-
I'ura
kah.
English
moon.
English
fish.
O
Sdlrhez
kwasii).
Natchez
hcnn.
Si. Anlfinio
tatsoopai.
(.'hiiiniiest/an
hono kustauio-
Knir lichen
quassia — slurs.
quassia — stars.
aue —salmon.
yitnsdaluni
A'likelal
Shahaplan
t kin a at.
tkinnat.
English
star.
Mohair k
keynnk.
kenyuck.
kunjnon.
yiilrhez
tookul.
Seneca
St. Jnhiniit
tatchhuaailh.
Oneida
I'lllllldSClilt
tiikycha na-
Noltoirai/
kaintu.
i'nihlo
l)ucha.
Yanclon
hohung.
tbokas.
D
English
yuldit'z
I'ima
'MlhlKSCou
Euglish
irhile.
river.
wol.
vo — ■ lake.
caialh.
Nalchc .
Shahaplan
Allacapa
Old Angonkin
hahap,
hipi.
cohl).
wabi.
English
hill.
Delaware
wajio.
opeo.
y'ltc/irz
kwoyakoopscl.
Shawnoc
Si Juan Capis-
kahui.
Iratio
English
black.
h' like tat
keh.
Natchez
tsokoko]!.
hficota
khyaykah.
haiaca.
Narragansels
suckcsu.
yi::u'ton
Long Island
shiokayo.
English
maize.
English
had.
yalclicz
hokko.
Natchez
wattak.s.
■Maize
ocasuck.
Mohawk
wahhatekuh.
19*
202 Mis(ji:i,i,A.\i:i»is coNi'uiisri'ioNs to 'I'lii; kthnociuai'iiv
Onondaga
wahotlio.
Chimmesyan
waigh — puddle
Oneida
walictka.
daddo
haugh.
English
cold.
English
sky.
Natchez
tzitakopana.
Natchez
nasookta.
Kliliclat
tsoisah.
Chimmesijan
sucliah.
Shahaplan
tsoisah.
Tlaoijualch
naaso.
English
Natchez
hot.
Avaliiloohio.
Muskoge
Choctaw
snotah.
shntik.
Muskoge
hahiye.
English
sun.
Allacupa
alliu.
Natchez
wall.
English
Natchez
tukehah.
Noosddlum
S'lUtdlijainish
kokweli.
thlokwalil.
• 1
Adaize
hicatuck.
PdConchi
(|Uih.
Chelimacha
uticheca.
Yancton
oouee.
English
Natchez
thou.
English
night.
ukkehah.
Natchez
toowa.
K like la I
yiike.
Chetimacha
timan.
Attacapa
tcgg.
English
arm.
Natchez
ish.
English
summer.
1 • t
Dacota
ishto.
Natchez
ameluka.
awmilk.
Yancton
isto.
Billechoola
English
winter.
English
blood.
Natchez
kwishitslicta-
Natchez
itsh.
kop.
Choctaiv
issish.
Mohawk
J
koosilkliuliling-
Chikkasaiv
issish.
glieli.
English
totvn.
Oneida
koashlakkc.
Natchez
wait.
Tuscarora.
koosehlica.
Pairnce
kwat.
Nottoivay
goshera.
English
house,
English
thunder.
Natchez
hahit.
Natchez
pooloopooloo-
liinluh.
Dacota
tea.
Yancton
teepee.
Chimmesyan
killapilleip.
Quappa
tih.
English
snoiv.
Osage
tiah.
Natchez
kowa.
Omahaw
tee.
Billechoola
kai.
Minetat-e
attee.
English
sea.
Natchez
kootsliel.
English
friend.
St. Diego
Choctaiv
khasilk..
Natchez
ketanesuh— Miy.
okhuttali. '
Chetimacha
keta.
English
bear.
English
boat.
Natchez
tsokolip.
Natchez
kwagtolt.
Uche
ptsaka.
INDCiUAl'IIV
M-aigli — piidiJlr,
liaugli.
sill/.
uasooklu.
sudiali.
naaso.
sootali.
shntik.
sun.
wall.
kokweli.
tUlokwahl.
([uili.
oouoc.
night.
toowa.
tinum.
summer.
ameliika.
a win ilk.
ivinler.
kwisliitslicta-
kop.
koosilkhulilnig-
glieli.
koaslilakkc.
koosehlica.
gosliera.
thunder.
pooloopooloo-
lunluli.
killapilleip.
snow.
kowa.
kai.
sea.
kootsliol.
khasilk.,
okliuttah. '
hear.
tsokolip.
ptsaka.
or Noirni a.miikha.
2o:{
Engli.sli
yatchrz
Effjiiimaux
Knglisli
yalrliez
IVhre
Tiiscarora
English
.\alrlte:
}lus/{oije
The Uchc,
ii. p. 30^.
snaliC.
woUali.
inalligooak.
bird.
sliankolt.
p.senna.
tsluMin.
eal.
kiin])()sko.
hmnhiiiiclia.
English
Natchez
Sliahaptun
Knglish
Nalrhez
Chnrtaw
English
Natchez
Adaizc.
run.
kwalnoskook.
willnikit.
hill.
appawo.
ulilx".
iralk.
naktik.
cnacnnt.
Adaizc. &v. — So(> Arciueologi.'i Americana, vol.
For tliL'so lan;j,na;^('s, tables similar to those of
the Matc'liez Jiave been drawn np, which indicate similar af-
tinities. The same can bo done for the (Jhctimacha and
Attacapa.
yew Cali/'ornhin Latif/uagcs. — Tlu! dialects of this district
t'tirin no cxcej)tion to the statements as to the unity of the
Anicrican languages. In the Journal of the (Jeographical
Siiiiety (part 2. vol. ii.) w^e find seven vocabularies for these
parts, lietw'cen the language of the diocesi^ of San .Juan
Ciipistrano and that of San Gabriel, the affinity is palpable,
and traces of a regular letter change are exhibited, viz.
from / to r;
IvNOMSII.
S
v\
.Il'AN CaI'ISTUANO.
San (<ai!1ui:i.
miiini
niioil
iiuiarr.
nutter
pal
l»aara.
salt
engel
ungurr.
Between the remaining vocabularies, the resemblance by
no means lies on the surface; still it is unquestionable. To
those data for Mew California may be added the Si^vernow
and Bodega vocabularies in Bacr's Beilrdgc &c. These two
last, to carry our comparison no further, have, amongst
others, the following terms in connnon with the I'^.squimaux
tongues:
English
^ncrnow
Esquimaux
English
Biidrga
Esquimaux
white.
kallo.
kowdlook, kow
look.
English
liadeija
Esquimaux
English
hand. Severnow
tain. Cadeack
tadleek, dallok English
— arm. Severnow
Kenay
beard.
ynnny.
ooniich.
sky.
kahi.
kilik.
moon.
kalazlia.
golsliagi.
291 MISCr.M-ANKors COXl'ltHnTlONS TO 'nil', KI'MXOIJIIAIMIY
Kiiglisli
water.
Scvcrnow
aka.
lio(lc(ja
(luka.
L'ljiili/dchmiilsc
kai.
En}:;li.sli
k'l'.
Si'vi'rnoiv
tiilasli.
Uijiihjaclimulsc
tlilcsli.
lUKltujn
kulla.
Fax hiatal.
klakli.
Englisli
daij.
Scrrrno/v
iiiadzliil
Cadcuck
matsiak
— ami.
Eiij!;lish
ni(jlU.
Binh'fja
kayl.
Uijahjachmulsc
kliatl.
En-Hsli
slar.
St'irrntifv
kaniau.
drci'iihinil
kamiu'li —iiiwjii
Enj:?lisli
head.
Si. Barbara
lUlCl'llU.
Greenland
nlackoa.
Enj^lish
ivinler.
Serernow
koiiiua.
Tehulclchi
ukiuini.
i •
i
The concluding notices are upon languages which have
already been plac^ed, but concerning which fresh evidence is
neither superfluous nor misplaced.
Siicka and Fu.ves. — Cunuilative to evidence already ciineiit
as to the tribes of the Sacks and Foxes belonging to tln'
Algonkin stock, it may be stated that a few words collecttd
by the author from the Sack chief lately in London won;
Algonkin.
The Ojihhctvays. — A fuller vocabulary, taken from the nioutli
of the interpreters of the Ojibbeway Indians lately exhibit-
ed, identifies their language Avith that represented by the
vocabulari(!S of Long, Carver, and Mackenzie.
The Iowa y. — Of the loway Indians, IVlr. Oallatin, in 1 83(1,
writes as follows: ^ — ^ "They arc said, thoiiyli the /'mi is nal
^"^fulhj ascertained , to speak the same dialect," /. e. with tlic
Ottoes. Again, he writes, "We have not that [the voca-
"bulary] of the loways, but nineteen words supplied liy (io-
"vernor Cass seem to leave no doubt of its identity with the
"(Ottoes." — Archaioloi). Amer. ii. 127, 128. Cass's vocabulary
is printed in p. IH77.
In 1843, however, a book was published in the loway
language, bearing the following title page, "An Elementary
"Book of the loway Language, w^ith an English Translation,
"by Wm. Hamilton and S. M. Irvine, under the direction
"of the B. F. Miss; of the Presbyterian Church: J. B Koy,
"Interpreter; loway and Sac Mission Press, Indian Territory,
1843." In this book the orthographical principles are by
no means unexceptionable ; they have the merit however of
expressing simple single sounds by simple single letters; thus
v = the a in fall; .r = the n in tub; c = the cli in chest; /"=
til; (J = n(j ; j = sit. (J however is preserved as a double
sound = (/?/. From this alphabet it is inferred that the lo-
NO(ii;.\niv
<>]■• NolMIl AMI'.UICA.
2\):>
way wvn^uar^n posso
ssos tho nu'o s(»un(l of the Kiiirlisli ///.
With tho work in question 1 was favoured liy Mr. (Jatlin.
Now it is only noeijssary to pick out from tliis litthj work
the words selected by Balbi in his Atlas Ethno<i,raphique,
and to v!ompare thoni with the corresponding terms as ;;iven
by the same author for tho Sioux, tho Winebaf2;o, tho Otto,
the Konza, the Omahaw, the Mim^taro, and the ()saf;e lan-
j;uagos, to bo convinced the loway language belongs to the
siinc class, coinciding more especially with tho Otto.
es which liuve
csh evidence is
Kn^'lisli
Ininiii
If'iiirhiitjd
mill
}lini'l(irc
Kiiiiliwli
liiirai/
Sioux
]Viii('h(if/u
lHli>
liiillZtt
iliiKihn/i)
Wmelarc
Sioux
nmaltaiv
Hii;:lisli
liiiriii/
Siou.v
U'iii('b(i(j(t
mil)
k'unzti
Miui'la
re
UllUt/llt/V
lis
mjr
low
i-lish
">J
Siintx
Willi
mil,
llmahdiv
bwji
Us.
nje
English
i)ir<
Siinix
fl'iucbatju
head.
uuutlm,
nalisso.
nnso.
nntu.
IllhSC.
pa.
piiso.
pall.
))('S(>.
pall,
pall,
anali.
pall —
]iali —
miiulli.
head,
head.
ei.
iiiiitslianpaii
itsl
pp
itiali.
eliaugh.
hand.
nawiv.
naji
le.
ualipon.
naue.
uonihc.
iu»
ml
fert.
the.
silia.
si.
ta.
(Utu
h'linza
(hnahniv
Minclore
OsfKje
Eii;;lis!i
luivaij
(Hli,
Sioux
himzd
Mi /I el a
re
isn
Engl
huvdij
Sioux
Winebaijo
nilo
Iviiuza
Oinahaiv
Mine tare
English
lo/raij
Sinux
iriiiebatjo
Olio
Oinuhaw
Osage
Eiiglihh
lo/rai/
Sioux
Wincbufjo
Olio
Omakaw
Mitielarc
Osage
SI.
sill,
si.
itsi.
see,
longue
th
nvtiiic
rczc
tsl
til
u'dzlii.
•('(■zali.
('Vsi.
leelh.
lie
lull.
el.
ii.
lire.
pjcclia;.
jx'ta.
jiytslii,
(cdc.
1
i)0(ie
1"U^
111.
nuiler
lie.
num.
ninali, uili.
ni.
ni.
mini.
neali.
200
Misci:i,r,.VNi:<>rs conikiiutionh to tiik irniNotii! ai-iiv
Fjiij^lish
one.
Konza
sahtah.
lo/miij
oyungka'.
Omahaw
satta.
Olio '
yonkc.
Osage
sattali.
Sioux
Avonc'lnnv.
ouonui'lia(»u.
English
six.
fo/rai/
shaija*.
Kii-lisli
Itvo.
Siitu.c
shakpc.
lotvdij
nowju.
Wincbago
koliui.
Siottx
nopa.
Olio
shacinc.
nonpa.
A'onaz
sha|>p(!h.
Winchayo
nopi.
(hnahaiv
sliappc.
Olio
noiio.
Osage
shappah.
fionzn
n()nM)a1i.
Mitirtttre
i
no(ii)ali.
English
seven.
OSIKJC
1
nonibaugh.
loivay
shahina.
nilo
shaluMuo.
Eiiglisli
l/irrr.
MiiK'larc
tshappn.
lowoj/
WincbiKjo
Olio
tauyc.
taluii.
tana.
English
lowaij
righl.
kra-rapanc
Olio
kra-ralxMic
English
four.
(hna/ta/r
jM'rahini.
lowaij
towiv.
English
nine.
Sioux
tojiah.
lo/rag
ksangkic.
Winehago
tsliopi.
Olio
shankc.
Olio
tona.
Konza
sliankkoli.
Konza
tolipali.
Oma/iaw
shonka.
Omuhaw
tt>])a.
(tsaqc
shankali.
Minelarc
topah.
\j
Osage
toliali.
English
ten.
lowaij
kiffpana.
English
five.
Wincbago
kherapiui.
loUHUJ
thata.
Olio
krohonoh.
Sioux
zapta.
Konza
kor(>l)rali.
IVincbago
satscli.
Omahaw
krchora.
Olio
sata.
Osage
krabrah.
AVitli the book in question Ccass's vocabulary coincides.
Hamilton and
luvixE.
Cass.
fire
pajcluT,
pedge.
nuiler
ne
ni.
one
oyungkfe.
iengki
Oro
noAva;
noe.
lliree
tanye
tahni.
four
towae
toe.
INn«il! ApilV
l>V MMITII AMIIKICA.
297
II
AMI 1. TON AM)
IllVlNK.
Cass.
five
tliatii
Hatiiliiif:;.
aix
hllMf^il?
slijiiij^wc.
si^i'On
sliillililil
Nlinliiiion}^
cujlit
kr:i'ra'i)jiii(!
kr('li('l)iii.
nine
ksjui^^'kii-
.shanj^^c.
ten
knvpaiui!
krebuali.
ON A siioirr vocAiuiLAKv oi- riii:
LOICIIKI \ LAN(U'A(ii:.
15V .]. A. ISIilS'l'KIJ.
liKAIi
nKFOUK TIIK IMIILOLOdlCAI. SOCIKTV,
JAM A1!V -.'.'.Til |M:,(>.
Tills notice, b(.'in<i t'oinnmnic.'ited by niysolf, jind inal.ing
part of the .subject illustrated by both th(! papers tiiat pic-
C'((d(! and th(! pa[)('rs that follow, is here inserted.
The Di^otho, or Louehenx, is th(! lan<;ua<^c of the Nortli
American Indians of the lower part of tlm river ^laekeiizic,
II locality round which lanj^uaj;es b(don^in^' to three diU'cr-
cnt classes are spoken — the Eskimo, the Athabaskan, ami
the Koluch (Kolosh) of Russian America.
To whiidi of these classes the Loiicheux belonp,s , has jii-
therto bciui unascertained, it is learned with e(puil ease hy
both the Kskimo and Athabas(\an inter}»reters; at the saun;
time ikw interpreter is ncu-essary.
The followin<;' short vocabulary, however, shows that its
more probable affinities are in another direction, /. c. with
the lan^ua<;cs of Ivussian America, especially with the Kc-
nay of Cooks Inlet; with which, whilst the pronouns a^rcc,
the remaining' words ditfer no more than is usual with lists
equally imperfect, ev(ni in languages where the connexion
is uniloubted.
J'',X(ir.isii. TiurciiKix. Ki;xay.
tv/iitc man niaiiali-j;'()i)l-ait.
Indian ten<;-liie* teeua = «/(^«.
Eskimo nak-liigh.
tinnd etsee.
head ivind uewatsee.
fair niml jeatsee.
nuitcr telionf thnn-aj;'algus.
••' Till) y i« suuiuk'd h(inl. y A.-* the French )i in hun.
(»\ A siioKi' vocAiii i.AKv or riii: i,i»r<'iii:i x i, \N(ii \(;i;.
■"I' I
lit the same
I'liuf^rp,
tstlico.
tlay ..
JHz.
oil.
KN(tMHII. I. Hi ( IIKIX.
SUN Nlictllic
mimn Hli<'t.sill
s/'irs kiiiiisliact ....
inrnt Im'Ii
(leer ot-lian.
AtW nniltz
arm tcliic;;('ii ....
If'ff tsftlmu.
nial .
h/iin/a't
Lnifi'
I'urt
yes
HI) illiu'k-wlia.
far iicc-Jali.
//'■'//• lu'ak-wlia.
strong noliaintali.
colli katcitlcc
loiuj kawa.
t'nnuijh ckctlio, ckataiainyti.
I'ltl Ix'lia.
ilrin/i cliidct-lcli.
como rhatrlioo.
ijit anuiij (M'liio.
/ .S(!(!
lltou 11 ill
Imij) fatlirr (sc) tsay
(x^U) *w« («<') j'ly
Kksav.
cliiniiioo.
tlakaiiiiito.
.ssiii
kllt^kl)llllH.
ai.ssaj;;;!'
xkoiia.
ki.ssnki.
ktoki-liiiz.
su.
uau.
.stiikta.
ssi-'yA.
NOT K S.
Tin; iiotict's iii)ou tin- AiiuM'icau lau^iiafi'cs at the r'rifisli Associatiuii
lii'twi'cii till! (lati; of tlic last pajuT but onu anil tin; lll^\.t were :
That tlio IJotlmk of Ncwfuuiullaiid wa.s Ainericau ratlicr tliaii llskiiiio
~ lie port for 1847. '/'niiis/ic/io/is nf llw Si-r/ion p. 11.").
'I'liat the Shyounu nimnials were Alu'oukiii — IJcport fur 1H17. Tniius-
itclioiis ()/' Scrli/iiis J). \'2',\.
That neither
Till! ]Moskito, nor
Till', Hotocndo laniruatri' were Lsolated. — //>;>/.
ON THE LAXCa AGES OF NEW
CAIJFORNIA.
I! I-; A 1)
BEFORE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY,
MAY i;Vrn \!^b:^.
The languages of t]i(> south-western districts of the Ore-
gon territory arc conveniently studied in the admirable vo-
lume upon the Philology of the United States Exjiloriug
Expec'ition J by ]\Ir Hale. Herein we find that the frontier
between that territory and California is most probably formed
by the Saintskla, Umkwa, and Lutuami languages, the Saint-
skla being spoken on the si^'i-coast, the ILnkwa lyin;;- to
the east of it, and the Lutuami east of the Umkwa. All tliree,
in the present state of our knowledge, belong to ditferent
philological divisions. It is unnecessary to add, that each
tongue covers but a small geographical area.
The Paduca area extends in a south-eastern direction in
such a manner as to lap round the greater part of Calihirnia
and New Mexico, to enclose both of those arr>as, and to
prolong itself into Texas ; and that so far southwards as
almost to reach the Oulf of Mexico. Hence , except at the
south and the north-west, the Californian languages (ami
indeed the Kew IMoxican as Avell) are cut off and isolated
from the other tongues of America by means of this remar-
kable extension of the Paducas. The Paduca tongues dip
into each of these countries as well as lap round them. It
is convenient to begin with a, Paduca language.
The ll'ihitxiiit is, perhaps, an Oregon rather than a Cali-
fornian language; though at the same time it is probably coiii-
nion to the two countries. It can be shown to be Paduca
by its vocabulary in Mr. Hale's work, tlie Shoshoni being
the language to which it comes nearest; indeed ^Ir. Galla-
tin calls the Wihinast the Western Shoshoni. Due east of
th(! Wihinast come the Bonak Indians, currently belie^e(l
to be Paduca, but still requiring the evidence of a vocabu-
lary to prove them so.
^ r \
ON Tin; LAXCilAOKS OF NKW t'AI.n'(HtXlA.
301
The true Shoslioni succeed; and tlicse are, prol)a])ly, Ore-
ann rather than Californian. At any rate, their haiiguao-c
fidls within tlie study of the former country. But the Uta
Lake is truly a part of the great Californian basin, and the
Uta language is known to us from a vocabulary, and known
to be Paduca:
Enclisii.
sun
miio?i
CoMANcnf
taliarp.
uiahtots mush.
L TA
tap ..
sl(ir nuiihlantz t/iarcli.
mail
toooiipayah tooavislichoe.
7viimitn iiaijali
wyajico.
hull ahpats t
[III-
/it'ad .
ooanu'kpcc
/ uialniiats wvai)eochoe
tut.-
fitreliead muttock
paa[i
III.
ace
eye
fiose
LooeJi)
k
SllOO
ove
uacluel
putty
mahvctah moopee.
mouth tiinp.
leelh .
teppa.
tf»u": tahueo.
tongue alioh alia!
liO.
chill
ear
lanuoc
k(|U('Il
nnik.
11
aliavk.
lair suooli
neclc...
arm ....
hand....
breast
foot ....
kf»lph
nooir
iiia.ssecr
V'^y
parpee.
toyock.
mowa.
mowa,
toko.
nai
up
n
iiliai
kalivah telicy
h
horse
serpent tocweroc uohecr
ir.
dog
ahrcots shardce
cat luoosah
fire coon
food ..
water
00
r
f
ah
koona.
r
laiiar.
The Uta being thus shown to be Paduca , tlie ovidcnco in
favour of other tribes in their nei"hbourhood beinu' Paduca
al
so IS imp
roved. Thus —
■■ K'liixirt.s of tlu' Sucrotaiy of War, witli !vecoiiii;iis.><;uu'o.s of route
iioiii !>)in Antonio to El I'nso. Wa.slilni;-ton-, ISaO. (Appendix 15.)
t From {I Xtmni \'oi'.iibtiliiry, by li. S. Neighbour; .Selioolcraft'.s lli.'j-
tory, &c., Pt. ii.
302
ox Tin: LANdUAdlOS Ol- M:\V CAMI'iUIMA.
Tho D
jggers arc gonenilly placed in the same catojjorv
with the Jjoiuiks, and soniotimes con.sidered as Bonaks uiidur
another name.
The Sann)iches, lying south of the Uta, are similarly con-
sidered Uta. Special vocabularies, however, are wanting;.
The Uta carry us from the circumference of the groat basin
to an angle formed by the Avestern watershed of the Riu
(Jrande and the rivers Colorado and Gila; and the langua;;(!
that comes next is that of the Navahos. Ot" these, tlu; ,Jo-
corillas of Kew Mexico are a branch. We hav(; vocabu-
laries of each of these dialects tabulated with that of tlic
Uta and collected by the same inquirer.
Mr. Hale, in the "Philology" of the United States Ex-
])loring Expedition, showed that the Tlatskanai and Uiukwa
were outlying languages of the great Athabaskan family.
It has since been shown by Professor Turner that certain
Apatch languages are in the same interesting and important
class, of which Apatch languages the Kavaho and Jecorilla
are two.
Now follows a population which has stinmlated the atten-
tion and excited the wonder of ethnologiists — the 3Ioqni.
The Moqui are they who, occupants of some of the more
favoured })arts of the country between the Gila and Colorado,
have so oi'Um been contrasted with the ruder tribes around
them ^ — the Navaho and Uta in particular. TheiMoqui, ton,
are they whose ethnological relations have been looked for
in the direction of Mexico and the semi-civilized Indians of
Central America. Large towns, regular streets, stone build-
ings, white skins, and European beards have all been at-
tributed to these mysterious Moqui. They seem , however,
to be simply Indians whose civilization is that of the l^^cbIo
Indians of New Mexico. The same table that gives us the
Uta and Navaho vocabularies, gives us a Moqui one also.
In this, about eight Avords in tAventy-one are Uta.
Languages allied to the Uta, the Navaho, and the Moqui.
may or may not till up nine-tenths of what an Indian Avould
call the Doab, or a Portuguese the Entre Rios, /, c. the
parts between the tAvo rivers Gila and Colorado. Groat as
has been the activity of the American surveyors, the ex-
ploration is still incomplete. This makes it convenient to
pass at once to the head of the Gulf of Calil'ornia. A fresh
language noAV presents itself, spoken at the head of the pe-
ninsula (or Acte) of '>/d California. The vocabulary that
has longest represented this tongue is that of the Mission
of Saint Diego on the Pacific; but the language itself, ex-
(»N Tin: i-an(;i;a(w;.s oi- m;\v (auiuuma.
;}(i;j
same catpf;orv
i Bonaks under
ti'iiiUid across tlio licad of the ^kic, reaches tlio mouth of
the Colorado, and is prolonged, to some distance at least,
beyond the junction of the Gila.
Of the Dicguno language — for such seems to bo the
Spanish name for it — Dr. Coulter has given one vocabulary,
and Lieut. \\nii])])le (U. S. A.) another. The tirst is to be
fiiund in the Journal of the Geographical Society, the second
is the second part of Hchoolcraft's "History, <Siu. of Indian
Tribes." A short but unique vocabulary of Lieutenant
Emory, of the languag(! of the Coeoinaricopas Indians, was
known to Gallatin. This is closely allied to the Dieguno.
A Paternoster in Mofras belongs to the j\Iission of San
Diogo. It has not been collated with the vocabularies, which
are, j)robably, too scanty to give delinite results; there is no
reason, however, to doubt its accuracy: —
Nagua anall amai tacaguach naguanetuuxp nianiannilpo
cayuca amaibo, mamatain meyayam canaao aniat amaibo
(juexuic cchasau naguagui nanacachon naguin nipil meheque
paehis echeyuchap onagua (juexuic iiaguaich haca(|uailipo
muiK>chamec anipuchuch - guelichcuiapo. ISacuiuch- pambo-
cuohlich-cuiatpo-hainat. Kapuija.
A /h/rd Ijranch, however, of this division, constituted by
!\ language called the Cuchan, of which a specijnen is given
by Lieut. Whipple {r/'de siip/wt), is still nearer to the latter
of those two forms of speech.
There can be but little doubt that a combination of sounds
expressed by the letters /"/// in the Dieguno tongue, re[)re-
sents the sound of the ^Mexican //; a sound of Aviiich the
(listiibution has long drawn the attention of investigators.
Cnnmion in the languages of iMexican, connnon in th(^ lan-
i:'iiages of the northern parts of Oregon, sought for amongst
the languages of Siberia, it here appears — whatever may
bo its value as a characteristic — as Californian. The
names of the Indians whose language is represented by the
specimens just given are not ascertained with absolut(^ ex-
actitude. Mofras mentions the Yumas and Amaqua(|uas.
The ]\lission of San Luis Jic;/ tie Francia (to be distin-
guished from that of San Luis Ol>/spo) comes next as we
proceed noi'thwards.
Between 3.'>'/V' '^^^'^ ol", a new language makes its ap-
lif^arance. This is represented by four vocabularies, two of
which take the designation from the name of the tribe, and
two from the Mission in which it is spoken. Thus , the
Netela language of the United States Exploring Expedition
is the same as the San Juan Capistrano of Dr. Coulter,
304
ON Tin: riANCIlAOlOS OV XKW CALiroUNlA.
and tho San Gabriel of Dr. Coulter the same as tin; Kii
of tlie United States Exploring Expedition.
Tiie exact relation of these two languao-es to each other
is somewhat uncertain. They arc certainly langua<;os of
tho same group, if not dialects of the same language. In
the case of r and /, a regular letter-change exists between
them. Thus Dr. Coulters tables give us
Knolihii. .San (iAisuiKL.
moon muavr
nntler paara
San JiAN Cai'istuano.
.... inioil.
pal.
curlh .
salt
hot..
salt uugurr
ungkhur ekliel.
engel.
ore khalck.
whilst in the United States Exploring Expedition we liml —
English. Ki,r. Netkla.
7)10011 inoar inoil.
slur suot suol.
water bar pal.
bcai' huiuar huuot.
Of these forms of speech the San Gabriel or Kij is the moiv
northern; the San Juan Capistrano or ISetela being tho near-
est to the Dieguno localities. The difference between the
two groups is pretty palpable. The San Gabriel and San
Juan numerals of Mofras represent the Xetela-Kij language.
It is remarked in Gallatin's paper that there were certain
coincidences between the Netela and the Shoshoni. There
is no doubt as to the existence of a certain amount of like-
ness between the two languages.
Jujubit, Caqullas, and Sibapot arc the names of San Ga-
briel tribes mentioned by Mofras. The Paternoster of the
three last-named missions are as follows : —
Languc de la Mission dc San (iabriti. — Y Yonac y yogin
tucu pugnaisa sujucoy motuanian masarmi magin tucupra
malmano muisme milleosar y ya tucupar jiman bxi y yonr
masaxmi mitema coy aboxmi y yo niamainatar momqjaich milli
y yakma abonac y yo no y yo ocaihuc coy jaxmea main itan
momosaich coy jama juexme huememes aich. Amen. Jesus.
Langue dc la Mission dc San Juan Capistrano. — Ghana ech
tupana ave onench, otune a cuachin, chame om reino, libi
yb chosonec esna tupana cham nechetepe, micate toni chii
chaom, pepsum y^ cai caychamc y i julngcalme cai cell.
Depupnn opco chame ciium oyote. Amen. Jesus.
Langue de la Mission de San Luiz Rcy de Francia. — Cham
ON TlIK J..\X(lL'A<ii:S OF .NKW CAI-iroKMA.
305
mo as tli(; Kij ■ iia cliam im-g tu panga auc onan mo (juiz cliani to qai ha
tiia clio nag- omreina li vi liiclie ca noc yl>;l h<'g ga y vi an
qui ga topauga. Cliam na cliolanc mini clia pan ])itu mag
ma jan pohi cala cai qui clia me liolloto gai torn cliaiua o
l^iii cliag' cay ne clic cal me tus so Hi olo cainu! alia linnc
ilianio chain cho sivo. Amen. Jesus.
The following is the Paternoster of the ]\tission of San
Fernando. It is taken (Vom JMofras: —
Y yorac yona taray tucuj)uma sagduci'i motoanian majarmi
inoin main mom't mui^^mi miojor y iaetucu})ar. Pan yyogin
:;iiiiiarnerin majarmi mi fema coy('> dgorna yio mannirimy
iiiii, yiarnia ogonug y yon.-i, y yo ocaynen coijarmea main
ytomo mojay coiyama huermi. Parima.
The jMission of San Fernando lies between that of San
fiabriel and Santa IJarbara. Santa P>arl)ara's channel (be-
twcHii 34" and 34'/2" ^^- 1^0 runs between the mainland and
some small islands. From these parts we have two voca-
Itularies, Pevely's and Dr. Coulter's. Tlie former is known
to ni( mly through the IMithridates, and has only thrc(!
words t. .at can be compared with the other: —
tion we lind
IS the nioiT
ExGMsii. l>KVi:i,v's. Cni:i/ri;i!'M.
one paca jtaka.
two cxco shkd/a*.
t/ircc luapja ///c/sckh.
The Mission of Santa Ines lies between that of Santa ]\i\v-
bara and that of San Luis Obispo, in 35V;( N. L.; which
inst su})plies a vocabulary, one of Dr. Coulter's: —
KNOi.iriii. Sa\ FjI is ()iiisi'C). Santa Uauhaua.
fiuilcr to oh.
stone tkcup kluMip.
i/trcc niislia masckli.
bo/v takha akha.
sail topu tipi.
This is the amount of likericss between the two forms of
spooch — greater than that between the Ketcla and Dieguno,
but less than that between the Netela and Kij.
Dr. Couh(!r gives us a vocabulary for the jMis&ion of San
Antonio, and the United States Fxploring Expedition one
from San Miguel, the latter being very short:
1'm;i.isii. San Mi<irioi..
iiKtn luai,loai, logua.
ifuman tleuo.
fiil/wr tata.
IImo.isii. San Mkm i:r..
ini)l/ier ajjai.
SON paser, pasel.
daiKjUler paser, pascl.
•20
300
ON Till". 1,A\(U ACKS OK M'.W f'Al.Il'< MIMA.
English. Sax Mm;! i;r,. Knomsii. San MififEi..
hcdd t()-1)uk(). nose to-n-onto.
luiir t('-asj\kli(i. cyea t-r-ug'cuto.
ears te-ii-tkliito. moitlli t-r-cliko (lak-iim, St. Hajilt,)
VVitli tlie San Antonio it lias six words in common, of
wliicli two coincide: e. {/. in San Antonio man :z:= lnah, mitthcr
= epjo. Jiesidcs which, the combination /;', and the pre-
ponderance of initials in /, are common to the two vocahu-
laries. San Antonio is spoken about ^O'/^" N. L. The nu-
merals, too, are- very similiar, since the Ai- and /.v/- in
the San Antonio iiumeration for one, two, seems non-radical: —
KNfii.isu. San Mkuki,. San Antdnio.
otie tolii ki-tol.
tn'(> kuj!,-su ka-kislio.
three thihnhi kla])'li;\i.
/'our kcsa kisha.
fiw (ddrato ultraoh.
six palate ]»!Uii(d.
serc?i t('])a tc'h.
eifjhl sratcl .sliaanel.
fii/ie tedi-tnii) tota-tsoi.
ieti tiupa tsoeli.
It is safe to say that these two vocabularies represent one
and the same language.
About tifty miles to the north-west of St. Miguel lies La
Soledad, for which we have a short vocabulary of Mr.
Hale's : —
IOmii.isii. La Sijt.i.dad.
head tsop.
hair Wdrtikh.
ears utsho.
tiose us (oos, Custano).
ei/es hiiu (^liiu, Tahtliiij.
mouth hai.
The word nthu, which alone denotes dawjhler, makes the
power of the syllable ku doubtful. Kcvertheless, it is pro-
bably non-radical. In ni-k/-n«sh, as opposed to ni-k^Mi(/,
we have an apparent aceonnuodation {iimluul) 5 a phenomenon
not Avholly strange to the American form of speech.
Is this the only language of these ])arts ? rroba))ly not.
The numerals of langua;
IMofras, and the diflercic
Hale is as follows: —
KXOLISII.
La Soi.KUAi).
mail
nnio.
woman
sliurisluue.
father
ui-ka-pa.
mo'her
ni-ka-na.
son
lu-ki-uish.
(laughter
iii-ka
from this Mission are given hy
between them and those of J\lr.
ON Tin; I-AN(UA(ii;s of XKW (Ar.lKftUMA.
307
k-inn, Si. liti/i/i.j
1!xi:msii. Mofras Soi,. IIai.k's Sol,
oDf ciiknlii liiinitna.
l/i'it oultos titslic.
l/irrr ka)>j»(\s knii-klia.
fniir oulti'ziiii iitj'^-
/iiw lialiizoii piUMiasli.
liali-skakciii iiiiiiiukslia.
kapka-iuai udukslia.
oulton-iiiai taitciiii.
])akk(' watsd.
taia-cliakt inatsoso.
si.v
sci'rn
cifjlil .
nine ..,
ten ..
3 represent one
Miguel lif's La
There is sonic affinity, but it is not so close as one in an-
(itlior quarter; /. c. one with the Achastli and Ruslon.
Between !}()" and 37" N. L. lies the town ot" JMontcrey.
For this neighbourhood we have the Ruslon east , and tlu^
Ksleii Avest, the latter being called also Eccleniaehs. ]iour-
fi;oing and Do La ]\lanon are the authorities for the scanty
vitcabularies of these two forms of speech, to which is ad-
ded one of the Achastli. The Achastli, the Ruslen, and
the Soledad of Mofras seem to represent one and the same
hmguage. The converse, however, does not hold good, i. c.
the Soledad of Hale is )iot the Eslenes of ]»ourgoing and
tlie Ecelemachs of De La Manon. This gives us four lan-
guages for these parts : —
\. The one represented by the San Miguel and San An-
tonio vocabulary.
2. The one ropresented by the Soledad of Hale.
3. The one represented by the Soledad of ^Mofras, th.e
Achastli of De La Manon , and the Ruslen of Jjourgoing.
4. The one represented by the Eslen of Bourgoing and the
Kcclcmaehs of De La jManon, and also by a vocabulary yet
to be noticed, viz. that of the INIission of Carmel of Mofras.
F.xiii.isn. Caumki,. Kst.kn. Sulkoad (nf Miifvas). IJt si,i:.\.
line pek pck Ilciikala eujala.
\n'n ouUiaJ ulliaj Iloultcs ultis.
////•('(; koulep juU'p Ikajipcs kajipcs.
liiur kamakouw jauiajus
//re peuiakala peniajala
>/.(■ jiegualanai ]ii'gnatanoi
>'■/('« kulukul.iuai julajualanci
"'///(/ kouuaik'pla jidcp jnalanei
nine kakouslauai janiajas jualanci
'('/( tomoila tomoila
>ultiziiii ultizim.
haliizdu hali-izu.
lialisliakoiu linlishakcni.
ka]»kaniai kajikainai-sliakciii.
Dulloniiiai ultuinai shakciii.
pakko pac'ke.
tanic'liakt tamcliait.
20 ^-
308
ON iiii; i,A\(;r.\(;i;s ok nkw "AMFoknia.
Wc now approacli the parts of California which are l)ost
known — the Bay of San Kraneisco in 38" N. L. For those
parts the jNlission of Doh>ros givos us the names of th(j fol-
lowing populations: — 1. Ahwastos. 2. Olhones ((Jostanos
or Ooastmen). 3. Altahinos. 4. Komonans. 5. Tuloinos.
For the same parts we iiave vocabularies of four lanjiiia-
gos which are almost certainly mutually unintclligililo.
Two are from Baer's BeHrdfje; they were collected duriiif;'
the time of the Russian settlement at lloss. One represents
the language of certain Indians called Olumcntkc, tlie other
that of certain Indians called k'hwakhlamaiju. The other two
are from the second part of Schoolcraft. ()ne is headed Cos-
tano -- the language of the Indians of the coast; the otiicr
Cushna. The language represented by the Cushna vocabu-
lary can be traced as far inland as the Lower Sacramiciitd.
Here we find the Bush?///^/// (or Pujuni), the HoQiimiii, the
YsiBunini, the Yulcautnni, the Kemshaw, the Kiski, the link,
and the Yukae tribes, whose languages, or dialects, are
represented by three short vocabularies, collected by ]\Ir.
Dana, viz. the Pujuni, tiio Sekumnc, and the Tsamak.
The following extract shows the extent to which these
three forms of speech agree and differ; —
j I
ENdiaSH. i'lMLNI, SkKI MNK. TsAMAK.
man ('uue niailik inailik.
kele
iiiniduniouai
cti
woman kele kele kule.
child —
dauf/hter — —
head t(,'ut(;,ul tsnl t(,mlt(;Axl.
hair oi one oi.
car ono bono ovro.
eye wat^a il liil.
nusc honka suina
moulh molo sim
neck tokotok kui kiilut.
arm ma wall kalut.
hand tc^apai nia tamsult or taintt;ut.
fingers tt^ikiknp biti tcikikup;
letj pai podo
foot kat/q» pai
toe ta^> biti
house he ho
bow olumni
arrow huia
shoes sobnu
beads hawut.
bimpi.
pai.
ON THK I,AN(!r.\firS or m;\v cat.ifokma.
309
unintelligible.
loUectetl (lurina:
One represents
ntkc, the other
The otlier two
is headed Co.s-
!oast; the other
Cuvshna voeabu-
sr Sacraniientd.
le Hociimiii, the
K.NdMSH.
d-'l
fiiii
ihii/
iii(jlil
lin'
Pt
liihi
okn
UNI.
SkKI MNK.
TsAMAK.
oko
oko cki
1'"
(;a sa
en .
//'((//'/• moiiii,ino]i mop inoiiii.
riirr l('»k(>l('»k iimiiidi umnti.
fllllil' o (»
In'c
'P'h
ili'cr .
Iiinl
fish .
H'S
tea
wi
tsa .
Hint!
knt .
tsit .
knt.
I a la
sitlmcm niai mai
immi'
ipml...
M ..
uld ..
lll'W ..
siiwrl
link
siiur ....
Iiiislrii
lano
Aveiine huk.
t(;o(,' maldik
liawil
.S11(
liik
niii
tshel
oho . .
icAva
n'cwa
iru
ilk.
lye wiye
SIVVH
liilk ..
siiKj ..
(knee
line ..
Iiro ..
ihrce
finir..
I'l ■— -
\vi\viua eiinn
tsol ...
)aio.
ti AVikte
teene p
en
si
inpni.
pell el
.sa])ni
tsi ...
five ninstic niank
SIX tini, o
n tapni
(sir)
sen
tnii , a
1
lensi
no
'I /it
mnc .
len .
])etsliei tajiai
matsluiin mntsnin
{sir)
str.
sic.
(V)
CO
> J
tsliap
aiiaka
k;-
a(
Ink
On the Kassima River, a tributary of the Sacramiento^
about eighty miles from its mouth lives a tribe whose lan-
guage is ealled the Talatui , and is represented by a voea-
bulary of Mr. Dana's. It belongs, as Gallatin has suggested,
to the same class with the language of San Raphael, as gi-
ven in a vocabulary of Mr. Hale's : —
;n()
UN Till-; i,A\(ii'.\(;i:s i»i' M'.w cm, ii'<m(M\.
Kniimsii. Tai.ah I, San IfAi'iiAKi,.
miin .sawc livniMiitiya.
inniKiii csiiu kulaish.
fntlu'r tatii ny\.
il(ni;//ilrr tele ill.
hnitl tlkit iiHiln.
ear alu/i iiIdIiIi.
t'l/e wilai slmta.
jiDSi' ulc Iiukc.
mtiulli liuht' lakmii.
lutnd ihu ukuc.
fiiitl sulx'i k()'n>.
sun /// ///.
(Idfl hi uiim III.
uiijlil \v,\-n'il u'iih\y\\\i\.
lire wihr wv/M'.
HHtlcr hik kiik.
sialic snwM IniMtii.
bird Iniic, ti kakalis.
house koilji. ki)il(ii/it.
one ke/iiiie keiiai.
l/ro of/It \\.n oZH.
three leli-ko Inhi-kn.
four oi(;ii-ko Aviag.
five kassa-ko kcnckus.
,s'/.r tcnu'bo patirak.
seven kauikuk (V) sic sciolawi.
eiijht kauiiula avhsuvm.
nine ooi uinarask.
ten ckuyo kitKliisli.
North of San Francisco, at least alon<jj tlio coast, avo liaw
no vocabularies of any language undoubtedly and exclusive-
ly Californ'm. Thus, the Lutuanii, the Sliasti and I'alaik
are, in all })robability. eonnnon to California and Oreiimi.
Of each of these languages Mr. Hale lias given us a V(h;i-
bulary. The Lutuanii live on the headwaters of the river
and lake Tlaniatl, or Claniet, conterminous on the south-
east with the Paiaiks, and on the south-west with the Shasli.
The affinity betA\een the Pahiik and Lutuanii seems to l)o
somewhat greater than that between the Lutuami and Shasti,
And now we have gone round California; for, contermi-
nous, on the east, with the Lutuami and Shasti are the Wi-
hinast and Paduca with whom we began, and it is only by
the comparatively narrow strip of country occupied by tlie
three tril)os just enumerated tliat the ereat Paduca area is
ON iim: i,an(;i- \(;i:,>i (II' \r;\v c w,ri"<ii{\i.\.
ail
M'j)anit('il J'roin tlii- Pju-iric How i'ar tlic Slmsti ami raliiik
iiicas oxtcMid in tin; direction ol tiir; licad-watcr.s of llic Sacra-
mjcnln is uncertain. A separatf! Ian;;ua;^e, jiowevi-r, .seems
tt) !)(' rei)resrMit<'(l hy a voeabulary, eoljected by "Sir. Dana
I'niiii the Indians who li(^ about I'li) inih^a from its nM)Uth. Frouj
the l.ufuanii, the Shasti, the Pah'iik, antl .lakon, northwards,
Miiil lV(»ni th(! I'ujuni, Talatui and (»tlier dialeets lower down
tli(( river, it seems distiiiet. It is just more like the , lakon
than any other forni of spooeh e(jually distant. Neither is
it Shoshoni: -
\'.s(i\.. r. Sacii
sun sas.
I'm' ])o.
i:.N<;i,. r. S\(i;.
tmsc tsoiio. tiisiiiii Jti/iii/i,
siiiiiii .SV7,-.
ii'iilrr iiieini.iiiomi /'///. '/',s7^///. inimlh ... kal. kh;ii Jtihoii. Ii;ii
nio]) Soli.
Itnir to-moi.
I'l/r tu-nuit.
itrm keolc,
liiKjrr tseniiit. taiut(;ut --—
hand Tsum.
Ic(j tole. kolo Tdliil.
fdol ktanntso.
liiiri' Iniink.
(/('('/• n()|>.
saliiioN laonok.
r/iiti kcutikut.
fiiielii'dil tei.
loiifc kelekeh'.
iron keh'keh'.
i/ni/x' iiyulii.
rus/i tso.
rill ha, has.
sri' wihi.
go !iMr;i.
(Slight as is this- ])rcponderaneo of affinity with the .Jakoii,
it is not to be ignored altogether. Tlut dis])h»eeincnt8 be-
tween the two areas liavo boon eonsiderabh^ and though the
names of as many as five intermediate tribes are known,
wo liavo no specimens of their lanf^uages. These tribes are —
1. The Kaus, between the rivers Undcwa and (Jlamet, and
conse(|uently not far from the !i<>ad-waters of tiic Sacra-
miento.
2. ;}. The Tsalel and Killiwashat, (m tiie IJnd^wa.
I. The yaintskh^ between these and the .lakon , the .lakon
hcing between the TIatskanai and Undiwa.
Now as tliese last are Athabaskan, there nnist have; been
displacement. But there are further i)roofs. North of the
isolated and apparQutly intrusive Tlatskjuiai^ lie the Nsie-
tsliawas — is(dated and apparently intrusive also; since they
belong to the great Atna stock of Frazer's Kiver.
The Jakon, then, and th(! Indians of the Upper Sacra-
iniento may belong to the same stock — a sto( k wdiich
will be continuous in its area in case intermediate tribes
312
ON Tin; i,\Nt;i \fiKs or w.w <'\i.inM!MA.
provo rciVrablo to it, imd inti rniptod in it.s nron it r\ d,,
not. At any rate, tlin dirrclhrn ot" tlu! .lakons i.s important.
Tho following; PatcrnostirH iVoni MofVas, rcf'cralilc to tin'
part.H about San l"'i'anciHi'o, r('(|uiro fixini;-. 'I'li"y can [iru-
l)al)ly 1)0 (listril)Ut('(l anionj;' tlic lani;ua;;('.s ascrilx'il fd tli;it
district — not, liowovcr, i»y the picscnt writer: —
l.iitHjve (U' la Mistiioii dc Simla Clara, — Appa niacn'nc
nio saura saraaliti^a clccpulinicni inira^at, sacan niacn'iio
nicn.-araali assucvy nouinan ourun niacari jjircca nuiiia hun
earaalii^u poliiiiia uia<u'(''nc souliaii naltis anat macronc iici'iiii.
ia annaiuit niacroiio niccjia, ia aimanct inacrc'-no inacroc (''(iiictr
nmc'cari nouuibasi nuu-rc annan, non niarote Jcssfnibcr iiia-
crcMo in eekouo tanuniniri innani tattalino, ieatrarea onict
niacrono (^(puits naccaritkoun oili j'l .lesus.
Laiifiuc lie Ut A/iss/an (/c Saiila fncs. — Dies cacpiicoco ni>alo-
qnon alapa, (piiaonicho opto; pa(piinini^ng (piicpK; fccnot
upalacs ImataliiU' itiniisshup fancclie alapa. IJIaniuliu ilalni-
lalisalmc. Picsiyu,:;- ('(picpi^ i^iiisucutaniyu;;' U(piiya;fiiinniii,
cancchoquique quisaj;in .sueutana<iiin utiya^niayiyu<i' pciix
lioyujj;' quic utio lex uleeliop santc^quiyung ilautechop. Aincii.
Jesus.
JjDif/Ni! flc la Vallrc dc I.oa Tu/arcs. — Appa niacquon crig-
nimo, tasunimac eniracat, Jinnin eccey niaequen unisininac
inacquen quitti en*'; sotcynia crini<;ino: suniiniac inaiMpicn
hainjamu jinnan guara ayei; sunnun niaqu(m (piit ti encsu-
nuniac ayaenia; aquoctsem unisinitac nininti e(j[uetniini: jnn-
nsi nuiequcn cquetniini om men.
Ijuajui' G'luluca dc la Mission dc San Francisco. — Alla-i<;anK'
nmtryocuse mi zaliua oni mi yaliuatail clia usqui etra slioii
niur tzocali Ziani ])ac onjinta mul zhaiige Nasoyato elieloj;ua
mul znatzoitzc tzecali zicmatan zchutiilaa clialelma nics(iui
piliuatzitu ytcima omahua. Eniqui. Jesus.
Lantjue Chocowjcm dii Rio del Sacramento. — Aj)i niaeo su
lileco ma nonas mi aues omai nulcono mi taucuehs oyt'iita
mi tauco cliaquenit opu noyatto chequenit opu lilotto. '\\\
maco muye jn^ennm ji naya maeono sucuji sulia uuicono in;i-
cocte, chauG mat opu ma siili mayaeo. Maeoi yangia luiic
omutto, iilemi nuicono omu incapo. Ncttc csa Jesus.
Langnc .Joiikiotismc dc la Dfission dc San lUiphacl. — Api
maco sa lilcto manenas mi dues onia maeono michauka oio])n
mitauka eliakcnit opu negata chakenit opu lileto, tuniako
muye quenunje naya maeono sneuji snlia mac('»no masojtc
chako mat opu ma suli mayaeo maco yangia umc omut ulcnii
maeono omu in capo. Netenti Jesus.
ON I'liK i<.\N(ii\<;i;s ui' m;w (AI.iiihjm a.
nutnorals <ri\-o\\ by ISlofras nro as follows: —
3i:i
San .}\ \s
CaI'ISIII AM).
San J,i ih
KnuF.. idlllsi-u). (Vm'ISTIIAM). SaS <iAllllIKI
nut' tclioiniinit s(iii|M)iili{' ])onkiiii.
Itrit cscliioii Imimli };»»»)•«',
Ihrrr nru'lm p.-inl |i)i;:i,
fimr pfiksi liouMsiili j|nMti'lia.
/irf ti/.roiii iiialiM niiikai.
.v/.r ksoukntii;! |iniiik!ili|ii |i!il»ai.
si'rrn ksdnninlclic clioinlioMi (|H!H'liM('iil»iM.
I'it/fil si oiiiu t>ii,isM-k;ilii;i (|iic(|naoliM.
nine scoitnii) tclii oiiasM-iiiMlia iiiaJMl-oiviii.
Irn tduyiiiili' (luikiiiiiiMlia (jucjiMnaJai.
ADDENDUM. — (Oct. 14, 1853.)
a inacono ma-
Siiico tlio previous paper was read, ''Observations on some
"f tlic Indian dialects of Mortliern (California, by (J. (Jibbs,"
liave appeared in the Jird Part of Selioolcraft (published
nilaries, wliieh iwo <;'ivon in a tabulati.'d form,
lv'.:!j {vMc pp. 4-i<)-4ir)).
The vocal)
lire for the following* t\vclv(! languajj;es: —
I. Tcliokoyom. 2. (>opch. 3. Kulanapo. 4. Yukai. !>.
t'lioweshak. (3. Batenidakaiec. 7. Weeyot. S. Wisliok.
!i. Weitspek. 10. lioopah. ll.Taldowah. 12, Khnek.
J5osid(;s wliieli tliree others have boon collected, but do
not appear in print, viz.: —
1. The Watsa-he-wa,* spoken by one of the bands of the
Shfisti family.
2. The Howtoteoh.
H. The Nabittse.
Of these the Tehokoyem = the Chomuf/em of the .'^acra-
!iiii'iito. and the Joii/doi/smc or San Raphael of Mofras; also
'•allatins San Raphael, and (more or less) the Tala'tui.
The Copeh is somethino- (thouf^h less) like the short Up-
pf'i' Sacramiento specimen of th(^ precedin;^^ paper.
The Yukai is, perhaps, less like the Pujuni, Sekume, and
IVaniak vocabularies than the Copeh is to the Upper Sa-
naniiento. Still, it probably belonfrs to the same class,
^iiu'c it will be seen that the Huk and Yukai languages are
incnil)ers of the group that ]\[r. Dana's lists represent. The
314
ON iHi: L.vN(ii;A(ii;s or .\i;\v ('ami'ounia.
KiilaiiJipo lias a (tloar prcpondoraneo of afHuitit^s ^vitll the
Vuka(\
Tlio ( ■liovvesliak and Batcmdakaico arc allied. So aro —
Tlic \V(M>yot and tlio Wisliok; in each ot" wliicli the sound
oxpressed by //' occnrs. Those alon^' with the Woitspck
take m as the possessive prefix to the parts ot" the huinaii
body , and have other points of similarity.
K.N(;i.isii.
httir
fool
Wkkvot. Wishosk.
pali'tl ])M]itM.
wcllih'tl wehlihl.
The Iloopali is more interesting;" than any. The riaiuos
of the parts of the human body, when compared with the
Navaho and Jecorilla, are as follows: —
I'.NtiMsn. Tdoi'aii. Xavaiio. .Ii;i(iI!ii.i.a.
head okhch Imt-se it-so.
fon'hcdil hot.sintah liut-tah ])in-nay.
fitcc liauiiith liuii-no
eye Iiuanali liunuali jtiiidah.
nosi', liiintclm Imtcliin Avitrlicss.
teclh liowwa Iiowgo cglio.
ttmfjue sastlia liotso czalito.
car luttdieweli Initfliah wickyali.
hair tscwok liotso itsc.
fiec/c hoscwatl Imckipioss wickcost.
arm hoithlani Imtcon Avitsc.
hand liollah hnllali Avislali.
Hero the initial combination of h and some other letter is
(after the manner of so many American tongues) the pos-
sessive pronoun — alike in both the Navaho and Iloopah:
many of the roots being also alike. Now the Navaho ami
.Jecorilla aro Athabaskan, and the Iloopah is probably Atlia-
bask an also.
The Tahlewah and Ehnek are but little like each othc,
and little like any other language.
Although not connected with the languages of Califoniia.
there is a specimen in the volume before us of a form nt
speech which has been already noticed in these Transaction?,
and which is by no means clearly defined. In the 'iMli
Number, a vocabulary of the Ahnenin language is shown to
be the same as that of the Fall- Iiiilians of IJmfreville. in
Gallatin this Jhiicn/n vocabulary is quoted as Ariipulio, I'l'
Atsaia. Now it is specially stated that these Arapahn o\
NIA.
ON TlIK I.ANdl'ACK.S <)!' m;\V C.M.llOKNlA.
315
nitics wh\\ tlio
icd. So iiro —
.•liicli the sound
I tlio Weitsjick
S of tllC llUllKUl
ly. The rinincs
ipared vvitli the
,yi;((il!ll.l.A.
. it-so.
. i»in-ii;ty.
]»lU(lilll.
AviU'hcss.
cg'ho.
ozahto.
Avu'kyiili.
itsc.
wic'kcost.
Avitso.
wi.shih,
no other letter is
onguos) the pus-
10 and Iloopali:
the Navaho nml
s probably Atlm-
like eaeh <»tlii'/.
ves of Califoniiii.
us of a form "t
cse Transactions.
d. In tiie 2sth
naj>'e is shown \'>
f IJnifreville. li'l
as Anijnili'i. "I'l
these Ar(/p(ili'> >"'
.tIs/iKi Indians are tliose who are also (though inconveniently
,ir ('rron(M)usly) ealhid the (Jros I'di/rcs, the J>'/f/ /U'//fcs and
the Minilaves of the Prairie — all names for the Indians
about the Falls of the Saskaehewan, and consequently of
Indians i'ar north.
Ihxt this was only one of the poj)nlations namiid Arapaho.
Other Arapahos are found on the head-Avaters of the Platte
and Arkansas. Who were thes(>V (Jallatin connected them
at once with those of the Saskaehewan — but it is doubt-
ful whether he went on better grounds than the name. A
vocabulary was wanted.
The volume in question suppli(.'S one — collected by Viv.
,1, S. Smith. It shows that the two Arapahos are really
iiuMubers of one and the same class — in language as well
as in name.
Uj)on the name itself more light recjuires to be thrown.
In an alphabetical list of Indian p<»])uhitions in th(^ same
volume with the vocabulary, from Avhich we learn that the
MOW specimen is one of the soufhiTii (and not the norllarn)
Arapaho, it is stated that the Avord means '^//ricAcd" or
''IdHnot'ff." In what language V Perhaps in that of the Ara-
jialio themselves; ix'rhap? in that of the Sioux — since it
i;> a population of the Sionx class which is in contact with
I'lilh the Ara])ahos.
Again — if the name be native, which of the two divisions
uses it? the northern or the southern V or bothV If both
use it, how comes the synonym AhneninV How, too, conies
the form Ats/iia'^ Is it a typographical error? The present
writer used the same j\IS. with Gallatin and found the name
to be Alniiniin.
To throw the two Arapahos into one and the same class
is only one step in our classiiication. C'an they be rtderred
to any Avider aitd more general division? A Shyenni; voca-
liularv is to be found in the same table; and Schoolcraft
ivmarks that the two languages are allied. So they are.
Xiiw r(\asons have been given for placing the Shyenne in
tlio great xMgonkin class (Pliiloln;/. Trans., iiiul Trtnis'jcf/aiis
'if llic American FJlnmloijical Suca-///, vol. ii, j). cxi.).
There are similar affinities with the J>/ac/,/'oo/. Now, in
tlio 'pa])er of these; Transaeti(jns already referred to, it is
stilted that the affinities of the P)hickfoot "are mise(dlaneous;
more, however, Avith the Algonkin tongues than Avitli tl-os(i
"t any recognized group*." (iallatin takes the same vicAv
Traitsacliniis af American EthnuL Soc. vol. ii. p. cxiii.).
' Nu. -.'s. vol. ii. J.. :n. .Ian. >[, IMo.
316
ON THK li.WGUAGR.S OF XF.W rALTFORNTA.
This gives as recent additions to tlie class in question, tlio
]31ackfoot — the Shyenne — the Arapaho.
The southern Arapaho are immigrants, rather than indi-
yeiKV , in their present localities. So are the Shyennes, \\\\\\
whom they are conterminous.
The original locality of the southern Arapahos was on the
Saskachewan; that of the Shyennes on the Red Kivcr,
Plence, the affinity between their tongues represents an af-
finity arising out of their relations anterior to their migra-
tion southward.
-^ ]
ox CEHTATN ADDITIONS TO THE ETIl-
XOGRAnilCAL PHILOLOGY OF CENTIIAL
VMEIIICA, WITH 11E.AIAIIKS UPON IIIE
SO-CALLED ASTEK ( ONUUEST
OF MEXICO.
KKAD
BEFORE THE PHILOLOGICAL SOCIETY.
May 12, I8o4.
In Central America we have two points for wliieh our
philological data iiave lately received additions, viz. the parts
about the Lake Nicaragua and the Isthmus of Darien.
For the parts about the Lake of Nicaragua, the chief
aiUhority is Mr. Squier; a writer with whom we differ in
certain points, but, nevertheless, a writer Avho has given us
both materials and results of great value. The languages
;\)i'csented, for the first time, by his vocabularies are four
in number, of which three are wholly new, whilst one gives
I us a phenomenon scarcely less important than an absolutely
frosh form of speech; viz. the proof of the occurrence of a
known language in a new, though not unsuspected, locality.
To these i'our a fifth may be added; but, as that is one
already illustrated by the researches of Henderson, Cotheal
[and others, it does not come under the category of new matc-
I'ial. This language is that of the
Indians o/' the Mosquito coasl. — Respecting these Mr. Squier
Uommits himself to the doctrine that they are more or less
ICarib. They maybe this in physiognomy. They may also
lie so in respect to their civilization, or want of civilization ;
[and perhaps this is all that is meant, the words of our author
being, that "upon the low alluvions, and amongst the dense
(lank forests of the Atlantic coast, there exist a few scanty,
hvandcring tribes, maintaining a precarious existence by
;ji8
ON CKIIIAIN AI>l>rri(lN,S TO Till; i;'l'II.\n(i;:Al'IlI(AI,
1,-
liunting- and fishinii,', willi little or no ar^rlculturo, destitute
of civil organization, witli a debased religion, and generallv
corresponding with the (Jaribs ot" the islands, to whom tlicV
sustain close al'tinities. A portion of thciir descendants, still
further debased by tlu; introduction of negro blood, may still
1)0 found in the wretched ]\Ioscos or ]Mos(]uitos. The few
.ind scattered JMeJchoras, on the river St. ,Iuan, are certainlv
of Carib stock, and it is more than probalde tiiat the sann,'
is true of the Wcolwas, liamas, Toacas, and Poyas, and also
of the other tribes on the Atlantic coast, furtlu-r to the sontli-
ward, towards (Jhiriqui Lagoon, and collectively denoiiiiuatid
Bravos." — Central America and Mearatjua , ii. pp. liOS-:!!)',).
Nevertheless, as has becMi already stated, the language is
other than Carib. It is other than (^arib, whether Ave hmk
to the Moskito or the AVo<dwa voealnilaries. it is other than
Carib, and admitted by INIr. Squier to be bO. The ])revi(jnv
extract has given us his ojtinion ; what follows supports it
by his reasons. "1 have said that the Indians of tlj(^ Atlan-
tic coast of Nicaragua, the .Moscus and othei'S, were probably
of Carib stock. 'I'his opinion is founded not only upon tlic
express statements of Ilerrara, who says that 'the Caiili
tongue was much spcdceu in Nicaragua,' liUt also upon tlicir
general appearance, habits and modes of life. Their languai^v
does not appear to have any direct relationship with that o[
the Southern Caribs, but is, probably, the same, or a dialect
of the same with that spoken around what is now calli'il
Chiriqui Ijagoon, near the Istlnnus of Panama, and wliich
was originally called Chiribiri or (Jhraibici, from which conies
Gomera's (Jaribici, or (>aiil)." In a note we learn that "tliir-
teen leagues from the Culf of Nicoya, ()>'iedo speaks [of a
village called Carabizi, whei'c the same language was spoken
as at Chiriqui," iVic.
Of the Melchora we have no specimens. For each ami
every tribe, extant or extinct, of the Indians about the Chiri-
qui Lagoon we want them also. The known vocabularies,
Jiowever, for the parts nearest that locality arc other than
Carib.
Let us, howevfu", loid-L further, and we shall timl good
reasons for believing that certain populations of the parts in
question are called, by the Spaniards of their neighho.ii-
liood, (Jaribs, much in the same way that they, along witli
nin(>-tenths of the other aborigines of America, are called
Inr/ians by us. ''The region of (Jhantales, " Avrites ]\Ir. S(|uiei'.
"was visited by my friend Mv. .lulius Froisbel, in the suniind'
of this year (IS5I). He penetrated to the head-Avaters et
the Rio Mico, Escondido, or Blue-fields, where he found the I
jmg'ua
|area.
<i. in
VIMIICAL
piiilol(m;v or ckniiial amiikica, witji ukmauks &.v. DW)
Itnro, destitute
and gcnei-iilly
to wlioui tlicy
■ricondauts, still
blood, umy still
litos. The few
,n, arc certainly
! that the same
I'oyas, and also
ler to the south-
:^ly denoininatiMl
ii. pp. :{()s-;!»ni.
the laii<:,uajie is
^diether we look
It is other than
1. The jirevious
lows sii\)p<»rts it
ns oi" tl](^ Atlaii-
s, were prohahly
ot only upon the
that 'the Carili
t also ujion tlifir
. Their lani;ua,ui'
i^ilip with that ot
uune, or a dialti'l
it is now eallc'l
ania, and wliicli
oni which eomo?
learn that "tliir-
lo speaks '.of a
;ua<^(; was spoken
e(
Fur each anil
about the Chiri-
wn vocabularies.
are other than
shall find i;0(Hl
IS of the parts in
their neighho.ii-
they, along witli
erica, arc called
vrit(>s IMr. S([uiev,
, in the sunnini]
le head- waters ol
lerc he found tlioj
Indians to be agrioulturah'sts, partially civilized, and gener-
ally speaking tiie Spanish language. Tlioy are called Caribs
1)V their Spanish neighbours/' &f. But their language, of
which Mr. Froebel collected a vocabulary, published by IMr.
Squier, is, like the rest, o//ter (him Curib.
It may, then, safely bo said, that the Carib character of
the IMoskito Indians, Otc. wants confirmation.
Tiicurctyua. A real addition to our knowledge is su})})lied
by M. Squier concerning the Nicaraguans. The statement
oi' Ovicdo as to the tribes between the Lake of Nicaragua
and the Pacific, along with the occupants of the islands in
the lake itself, beinj' Mexican rather than indigmious, he
confirms, lie may be said to prove it; since he brings
specimens of the language (^Mijuiran, as he calls it), which
is as truly Mexican as the language of Sydney or New York
is I^ngiish.
The Mexican <diaracter of the Nicaraguan language is a
definite addition to ethnographical philology\ It may now
Ijc considered as settled, that one of the languages of tin;
jarts under notice is intrusive , and foreign to its present
ocality.
The remaining vocabularies represent four indigc^nous forms
'f speech; these (three of them of Mr. Squier's own earliest
publication, and one known before) being —
1. The Chorotegan or Dirian of Squier — This was collect-
ed by the author from the Indians of i\[asaya, on the north-
iin frontier of the Kiquiran, Nicaraguan, j\[exican or Astek
1 aroa.
3. The Nagrandan of Stpiicr — This was collected by the
author from the Indians of Subtiaba, in the plain of Leon,
to the north of the Niquiran or Mexican area.
3. The Cliontales, or Woolwa, of Froebel; Chontal being
tlie name of the dislrlct, Woolwa, of the tribe.
1. The ]\Ios(piito (or ^^'aikna) of the coast.
To these four indigenous tongucis (the Mexican of Nica-
ragua being dealt with as a foreign tongue) , what have we
til say in the way of classification V
It is safe to say that tlu; Nagrandan, Dirian, and Woolwa,
lU'c more like each other than they are to the 3Iosca, Mos-
']uito, or Waikna. And this is inq)ortant, since, Avhen
loohel collected the Wdolwa vocalndary, he found a tradi-
Ition of their having come originally from the shores of Lake
IManagua; this being a portion of the iJirian and Nagrandan
|arca. If so, the classification would be, —
". Dirian, Nagrandan, and Chontal, or Woolwa (Wiilwa)
h. Mosquito, or Waikna.
320
ON CKKTAIN ADDITIONS TO Tlli: KTllNOGHAPJllCAL
The value of these two divisions is, of course, uncertain:
and, in the present state of our knowledge, it would be ))i'e-
mature to define it. E(|unlly uncertain is the value of the
subdivisions of the first class. All that can be said is, tliat
out of four mutually unintelligible tongues, three seem rather
more allied to each other than the fourth.
Besides the vocabulary of the Nagrandan of ]\[r. Squier,
there is a grammatical sketch by Col. Francesco Diaz Zapata.
]'cr(i(/ua — We pass now from the researclies of Mr. JS([ni(i'
in Nicaragua to tiiose of Mr. J3. Seemann, Naturalist to the
Jierald, for the Isthmus of Pananui. The statcnumt of Colonel
Galindo, in the Journal of the Creographical Society, that
the native Indian languages of Honduras, Nicaragua, Han
Salvador, and Costarica, had been replaced by the Spaiiisli,
has too implicitly been adopt(^d; by no one, however, iimrc
so than the present writer. The same appli(!S to Veragna.
Plere, Dr. Seemann has supjdied : —
1. The vSavaneric, from the northcirnmost part of W-ragua.
2. The JJayano, from the river Chepo.
T
lis
3. The Cholo, widely spread in New Grenada
the same as Dr. Cullen's \ule.
Specimens of the San Bias, or IManzanillo Indians, are still
desiderated, it being specially stated that the number of
tribes is not less than four, and the four languages belonj;'-j
ing to them as different.
All that can at present be said of the specimens bet'uicj
us is, that they have miscellaneous, but no exact and definite j
affinities.
MexicuHS of Nicaragua. From the notice of these additioiisj
to our data for Central America in the way of raw material,
Ave proceed to certain speculations suggested by the prescncil
of the Mexicans of Nicaragua in a locality so far south otj
the city of Mexii;o as the banks and islands of the lake otj
that name.
First as to their designation. It is not Aslek (or J.s7twi,|
as was that of the allied tribes of ]\[exieo. Was it nativcj
or was it only the name which their neighbours gave tlioiu J
Was it a word like Dcalsvlt (applied to the population olj
Westphalia, Oldenburg, the Rhine districts, &c.), or a Avonl
like (Jcrman and AUemand? Upon this point no opinion ijj
hazarded.
Respecting, however, the word Astek {Aslecu) itself, tlid
present writer commits himself to the doctrine that it was^
no native name at all, and that it was a word belonging' tJ
the Maya, and foreign to the Mexican, class of languagcsj
It was as foreign to the latter as Welsh is to the langua;:
Th
tlie pec
ranee
intermc
"f the
.'ibsence
an, til
the glofc
AFJIK'AI'
PHILOLOGY OP fKNTUAT. AMKIMCA, WITH IIKMAIJKS &.C. 321
of tlic British Principalih", as d'cr/fitt/i or Allcnidi/nf to the
High and Low J)utcl» I'oniis of speitch; as barlxfnts to the
liin^ua^i'S in contact with tlic Latin and (ircok, but not tlicMn-
selves either one or tlio other.
On tlie otiier hand, it was a ]\Iaya word, in the way that
Welsh and (icrman are English, and in the way tliat .l/lc-
minil is a French one.
It was a word belonging to the country into which the
Mexicans intruded, and to the po])uIations upon which they
encroached. These called their invaders Astcca, just as the
Scotch (jlacl calls an Englishman, a Saxon.
(I. The form is' Maya, the termination -rr^< being connnon
whorcever any form of the ]\Iaya speech is to be found.
b. It is too like the word lluaatcca to be accidental. Mow,
Umtslcca is the name of a language spoken in the parts about
Tanipico; a language separated in respect to its geograj)hi-
ml position from the other branches of the ]\laya family, (for
which Guatemala and Yucatan are the chief localities) but
iKit se})arated (as is indicated in the Milhri(hiU's) from these
same Maya tongues pliilologically. Hence Ihinsteca is a i\Iaya
word; and \vhat J/iiask'ca is, Aateca is likely to be.
T!ic isolation of the Jluas/cat branch of the i\[aya family
indicates invasion, encroachment, conquest, displacement;
tlie invaders, &c. being i\u) i\Iexicans, called by themselves
Ijy some name hitherto undetermined, but by the older oc-
aipants of the country, As/c/i.
It is believed, too, though this is more or less of an ohik'r
Mum. that nine-tenths of the so-called Mexican civilization,
as indicated by its architecture, &c., was ]\Laya, /. e. was re-
ferable to the old occupants rather than to the new invaders;
standing in the same relation to that of the INIcxicans, strictly
speaking, as that of Italy did to that of the Goths and Lom-
bards.
Whence came these invaders? The evidence of the pltonetic
I part of the language points to the purts about Quadra and
Vancouver's Island, and to the populations of the Upper
Oregon — populations like the ChinuK, the Salish, the Atna,
\h. Here, for the first time, we meet with languages where
tlie peculiar phonesis of the j\[exican language, the preponde-
rance of the sound expressed by tl, reapj)ears. For all the
I intermediate parts, with one or two exceptions, the charactiu"
"fthc ])honesis is ]\laya, i. e. soft, vocalic, and marked by the
labsence of those harsh elements that characterize the ^lexi-
lan, the Chinuk, and the Atna equally. The extent to which
Itlie glossarial evidence agrees with the phonetic has yet to
21
322 ON CKItTAIN AUDITIONS TO TlIK KTIINO(mAlMlICAL SiV,
1)0 investigated, the doctrine here indicated being a sugf^os-
tion ratlier than anglit else.
So is the doctrine that both the Nicaraguan and Mexican
invasions were fnan'/imc. Strange as this may sound in the
case of an ordinary American population, it should not do
so in the case of a population deduced from the (/hinuk
and Salish areas and from the archipelago to the north dt
(Quadra's and Vancouver's Island. llowever, it is not tlio
fact itself that is of so much value. The principle involved
in its investigation is weightier. This is, that the distribution
of an allied population, a/oiif/ a coast, ami at inlcrvah^ \s jiri/iiit
facte evidence of the ocean having been the path along wliieji
they moved.
NOTE (1859).
For except ions to tlic (loctriiic, liere .siifrposted see Notes on tlic last
paper.
jath alons ^vllic•ll
NotoH on llu' last
NOTE IPON A 1\VPEK OF THE
IlONOlUAnLE CAITAIN KITZIiOVS ON
lllE ISTILMUS OE J\\NAiMA,
I'l :iii.isiii:n
IN THK Tl{ANSA(a\I()NS OF THE ROVAL
GEOdKAlMllCAL SOCMF/fY.
NOVKMISKll '2o. IHJO.
(iH Ihc LamjuiKjc nf Ccnlral America.
In Yucatan the .structure and details of the language are
siiflkiently known, and so are the ethnological aifinities of the
uibo.s wlio s[»('ak it. This languag(i is the Maya tongue, and
its iuunodiate relations are with the dialects of Guatemala. It
is also allied to the lluasteca spoken so far N. as the Texian
nouticr, and separated from the other Maya tongues by dialects
"t tlie Totonaca and jMcxican. This remarkable relationship was
kiinwu to the writers of the Mithridates.
lu South America the language begins to be knctwn when we
roiicli the equator; c. g. at (^uito th(> Inca language of the Peruvian
lj('i;ins, and extends as far south as the frontier of Chili.
So much for the extreme points ; between which the whole
intermediate space is very nearly a icrra incoy/iila.
In Honduras, according to Colonel Galindo, the Indians are ex-
tinct; and as no specimen of their language has been preserved
from the time of their existence as a people, that state is a blank
in [)hiloIogy.
iSo also are San Salvador, Nicaragua, and Costa Rica; in all
"f which there are native Indians, but native Indians who speak
I Spanish. Whether this implies the absolute extinction of the
native tongue is uncertain: it is only certain that no specimens
I "fit are known.
The Indian of the Moskito coast /s known; and that through
Wh vocabularies and grannnars. It is a remarkably unaffiliated
liiuguage — more so than any one that I have ever compared.
I Still, it has a few miscellaneous affinities; just enough to save it
fmm absolute isolation. "When we remember that the dialects with
pvliich it was conterminous are lost, this is not remarkable. Pro-
21*
321
NOTi: ri'ON A I'AIMMt (»!•' TIIK IIONOIUAI'.M', CAI'TVIN
bably it represents a liirgo class, f. r. that whieh comprised the
languages of Central America not allied to the Maya, and the
langnages of New Grenada.
Hetween the IMoskito conntry and Quito there are only twd
vocabularies in the JMithridates, neither of which extends far be-
yond the numerals. One is that of the dialects of Veragua called
Darien, and collected by Wafer; the other the numerals of the
famous Muysca language of the plateau of Santa Vv. do Uogota.
With these exceptions, the whcdo philology of New Grenada is
unknown, although the old missionaries counted the mutually un-
intelligible tongues by the dozen or score. More than one modern
author — the present writer amongst others — has gone so far as
to state that all the Indian langua'ges of New Grenada are extinct.
Such is not the case. The following vocabulary, which in any
other part of the world would bo a scanty one, is for the jjaits in
question of more than average value. It is one with which 1 have
been kindly favoured by Dr. Cullen , and which represents the
language of the Cholo Indians inhabiting part of the Isthmus of I
Darien, east of the river Chuquanaqua, which is watered by tlio
river Paya and its branches in and about lat. S^ 15' N., and long.
77" 20' W. : —
II
English.
ClIOLO.
Exfii.i.sir.
Cnoi.o.
Water
paylo
Leon, i.e. large
Fire
itiboor
tiger
mama pooroo
Sun
pcsca
Kiver
i/iO
]\Ioon
hcdecho
Kiver Tuyra
Ingtinioma
Tree
pavhru
Large man
mock) mi dcuslni
Leaves
chlluha
Ijittle man
tnndihid zaclic
House
(the
An iguana
ipoga
Man
mochlna
Lizard
hurhe
Woman
fviiena
Snake
lama
Child
wOrdocM
Turkey, wild
zdmo
Thunder
pa
Parrot
cane
Canoe, or\
Guacharaca bird
bullecbuUcp
Chingo j
Jiaboilrootiia
Guaca bird
pavnra
Tiger, ?>.jaguai
hnCima
Lazimba
loosce
The
tide is rising
lobiroooor
The
tide is falling
erUnido
Where
are you goii
ig aviomja
Whence do you come zamubima zebuloo
Let
us
go
ivouda
Let
us
go bathe
wondo citide
The extent to which they diflfer from the languages of Veue-I
zuela and Colombia may be seen from the following t.iblos of tliel
< It
m
!■: CAl'TMX
cli comprisod the
e Maya, and the
lorc arc only two
;li extends fur ho-
of Veraj^ua calleil
le numerals of the
ita Vv. do Bogdta.
New Grenada is
1 the mutually uu-
D than one modern
las gone so far as
lenada are extinct,
lary, Avliicli in any
is for the parts in
with which I have
icli represents the
of the Isthnuis of j
is watered hy the
i" 15' N., and long.
I'lTXKov .-s (>.\ Tin; rni.Mi s oi" i'.v.nama.
325
CnoLO.
ge
vmima pooruo
iho
togtirooma
muchhifi ilC'as'Liii |
mochhm zaclic
ipoga
hurhe
tamCi
zdnio
carre
ircl bullccbuUce
pavoru
loosec
words common to Dr. Cnllcn's list, and the equally short ones of
the languages of the Orinoco: —
English
vHilcr
English
moon
Cliolo
piijflo
Cholo
hnfnlto
(^uichua
unit
(^Juichua
(ptilla
Oinagua
uni
( )inagua
yase
Salivi
t'liguu
Arawak
callchcc
Maypuro
xicru
Yarura
goppc
Ottomaca
in
Betoi
loom
Bet(.i
(x'uiUi
I\Iaypurc
I'ht'jdpi
Yanira
iiri
Salivi
vcxio
Darien
(liilah
Darion
nie
Caril)
Umna
Zanmea
kclukhi
English
fire
English
III (in
Cholo
tuhonr
(Jholo
mohiua
(^)uichua
71 hi a
(Quichua
ccari
Omagua
lain
runa
Salivi
cgusta
Salivi
cocco
Maypuro
calli
JMaypuro
cajunachini
Ottomaca
niin
mo
Botoi
fnlui
Ottomaca
finder a
Yarura
corule
Yatura
pume
Carib
onalo
Muysca
muysca
chit
English
sun
Carib
oquiri
Cholo
pcsca
Quichua
inli
English
v'oman
Oinagua
hunrassi
Cholo
wuena
Salivi
numcscchccoco
Quichua
Jtuarmi
Maypure
chie
Maypuro
linioki
Betoi
ico-iimasoi
Yarura
ibi
Yarura
do
din
Muysca
sua
Betoi
ro
Carib
vciou
Ottomaca
ondua
cbidoo
NOTE.
Kxfoptions to tlic st;it(Miu;iit fuiiccniinp: tlio New (I'rciiacL'i, the Sau
„ ^ 'ulvjutor, and the Moskito lang-iiao-os will be found in tlie Notes upon
anguagos ot \ euc-« ,|,g j,,,^^ paper.
uwinj; tables of theH
ON TIIK LAN(a A(ii:s i)V NOKTIIKUN,
WKSTKKN, AM) CIATKAL
AMEKICA.
KKAI) MAY [)V\\. |H:)G.
Tlic jtrcfii'iit piijx'i" Is a supjilcnu'iit to two wcll-kiKtwu cmi-
Irihutioiis to America pliilolit^y hy tin; late A. ( lallatiii. The
first was |)ul)lisli(Ml in tli(! second volmiio of the Ai'clia'()l(»j:i;i
Americana, and ^ives a systematic vi(!W of tlie lMii;;iia,L;"s
spoken within the; //ten boundaries of the; llniti'd States; thr.sc
beinj^' till! Ivivcr Sabine and the Itocky Mountains, Texas
boin^- tlien Mexican, and, a /'(iilinri , New jM(!xieo and Cali-
fornia; Oregon, also, being' connnon property between tlic
Americans and ourselves. The second is a commentary, in
the second vohime of the Transactions of tlie American Ktli-
noh^gical Society, uiton th<! multifarious mass of ]>hih>h)gi(al
(htlti collected by j\lr. Hale, during the United States V.\-
l)loring Kxpedition, to which ho acted as oflicial and pro-
fessional ])liilologue; (»uly, however, so iar as they applinl
to the American parts of Oregon. Tlio groups of this latter
pa})er — the paper of the Transactions as o])posed to tliiit
of the Archa'ologia — so far as they are separate from tlio:>c
of the former, are —
1. 'I'he Kituiiaha.
2. Th.' TsihailiSelish.
3. The Sahaptiu.
4. The ^Vaiilatpn.
5. Tlie Tsiuuk or CMunook.
6. The Kalapuya.
7. The Jakon.
H. The Lutuaiiii.
*). Tlie Shasti.
10. The J'alaik.
11. The Slioshdiii or Snake hi
diaiis.
To which add the Arraj)aho, a language of Kansas, con-
cerning which infornuition had been obtained since |S2^,
the date of the first paper. Of course, some of these I'a-
niilies extended beyond the frontiers of the United States,
so that any notice of tliem as American carried with it f
S(i
ON TIIK LANOt A(IK ol' NOHTltKUN, Wn.STKSN, SiC.
:i27
)iniii:nN,
KAL
W('ll-Ull(»WU cnll-
A. (lalhitin. TIh;
tlu! Arc'li;rol(ii;i;i
of tlio laii;4tui;;"s
ted States; tlusc
IdUiitains, Tcxii;*
il(>xi('() and ('nil
orty between tln'
coninientarv , in
Anieriean Ktli-
<s of ])liilolu,i;'it'iil
nited States Fa-
oftieial and pro-
as they a|)[ili(il
ups of this hitler
o])l)()sed to tliiit
)aratc from thoi^c
nil.
luiii or Snake h
iiiiit'li infornnition respecting them to the invest i;,'ntors of
the uhlhdogy of the Ctmadas, tlie Hudson's Ihiy Territory,
or Mexico.
Apain — three hnn^iia^es, the Kskimo, and Kenai, and
Taknlli, though not sjxdu'ii witiiin the limits of the llniti^d
States, were ilhistrat(!d. llcnee, upon more tiian one of the
;;ioii[is of the papers in ((uestion there still remains some-
thin^' to he said; however mueh the sjieeial and proper suh-
ji'ct of the present dissertation may in', the lan^ua^^cs that
Liy beyond the pale of (Jallatin's researches.
The first .i;'roups of tongues thus noticed for the second
time are --
I. TiiK Ikoquois, and
II. Till''- Skjux. -1 have little to say rcspectinf? those fa-
milies exc(!pt that they ajtpcar to belonj:i; to some hij^her class,
— a class which, -wltluuit bein*;' raised to any in(U'dinatc
value, may eventually includ<> not only thes** two now dis-
tinct families, but also the CataAvba, ^^'^occoon , Cherok(!e,
I'JKK'tah , and (j)erhaps) Caddo groups, — perhaps also the
I'awni and its ally the Jiiccaree.
ill. The Aloonkin (iuoui'. — The present form of this
iiiTOUj) differs from that which ajijx'ars in the Archa-ologia
Ainoricana, by exhibiting larger dimensions. Nothing that
was then placed Avithin has since been subtracted from it;
indeed, sul)tractions from any class of (Jallatin's making
arc well-nigh impossible. In respect to additions, tin; case
stands differently.
Addition of no slight imp(»rtarcc have been made to the
Alfi'onkin group. The earliest was that of —
T/ic Bcihuck. — The ]>ethuck is the native language of
Newfoundland. In 184(;, tlie collation of a liethuck voca-
hiilury enabled nic to state that the language of the extinct,
tir doubtfully extant, aborigines of that island was akin to
those of the ordinary American Indians rather than to the
Kskimo ; further investigation showing that , of the ordinary
Aniei'ican languages, it Avas Algonkin rather than aught else.
A sample of the evidence of this is to be found in the
tullowing table; a table formed, not upon the collation of
the whole ]\IS. , but only upon the more important words
contained in it.
of Kansas, c('ii-
ned since; I S2^.
onie of thes(! ia-
le United States,
arricd with it so
Hmjlish , sen.
lii'tliuek , inntjcraguis.
• 'rec, rf/uasis.
l'jil)l»('way , niiKjivisis
— - ncgtvis
=niy son.
Ottawa, kwis.
Mieinac, utKjuccc.
l'assaina(pio(ldy , ti'/itis.
Narvagansetts , 7iummuchkse
myson.
MV
328
ON TIIR LANGUAGES OF NORTIIKRX, WESTKRN,
Delaware, f/uissau = his son.
Miami, akfi'issima.
, iingivissak.
Sliawnoo, koissn.
Hack & Fox nrc/c/vrssa.
Mcnomoni , nr/a'i'sh.
Etif/Ush, girl.
Botlnick, woasccsli.
ih'QO, Sf/itaisis.
()j ibl ) cway , eliwaizais.
Ottawa , fifjiirsois.
01(1 Al;^'(>nklii, irkwrssrn.
Slicsliatapoo.sli , st/iKts/iis/i.
J^assamaquoddy, /x'lsi/iiasis.
Narraj^-ansotts , Sfjiiaiiesc.
Moutauf^, squasses.
Sack & Fox, skfvcssah.
Cro, rtw«mc— cliild.
Hliosliatapoosli , aivash = child.
English , mouth.
Bctluick , mamwlthun.
Nanticoke , meltoon,
Massachusetts , mulloon.
Narragan setts , wulloon.
I'onobscot, madoon.
Acadcan, melon.
JVlicmac, toon.
Abenaki, ootoon.
English, nose,
liethuck, ghccn.
Miami, kcoxuine.
English , teeth,
Bethuck, horhofha.
]\Iicmac, nccbcel.
Abenaki , ncebcet.
English, hand.
]ietlnu'k , niaemed.
Micmac, paelcrn.
Abenaki , mpaleen.
English, ear.
Bethuck, moolchiman.
iMicinac , maoloowccn.
Abenaki , noolawce.
English , smoke,
liethuck, hassdik.
Abenaki , ellooduke.
English , oil.
Bethuck, cmrt.
j^ricmac, memage.
Abenaki, pcmmce.
English, sun.
Bethuck, knisc.
(^ree, ttc. , kisis.
Abenaki, kcsus.
Mohican , kesogh.
Delaware, gishukh.
Illinois , kisijnil.
Shawnoe , kvsalhwn.
Sack & Fox , kejcssoah.
jMenouieni, kngsho.
Passamaquoddy , kisos = moon.
Abenaki, kistts =: moon.
Illinois, /t/67>=:rnoon.
Cree, kcsccow = day.
Ojibbcway, kijik=dfiy and light.
Ottawa, kijik = ditto.
Abenaki , kiscoukon = ditto.
Delaware, gicshku = ditto.
Illinois , kisik -~ ditto.
Shawnoe, krrshqiia = ditto.
Sack & Fox , kccshckch - - ditto.
English , fire.
Bethuck , hooheeshtuvl.
Cre(^, csquilti , scmilag.
Ojibl)eway, ishkodtu, sknolar.
OttaAva , ashkotc.
Old Algonkin, sknotag.
Sheshatajtoosh , schooluy.
Passamacjuoddy , skcel.
Abenaki, skoulai.
Massachusetts , squitfn.
Narragansetts, squllu.
wm
AND CI:NTII.M, A.MKIUCA.
329
English, spoak.
Bctlmck, icroothack.
Taculli , yulluck.
Oroo , alhemcta/ccoHSC.
Wyandot, alahca.
Kiiijlish , wliito.
Bethuck, tvobee.
Croc, iVdbisca.
— , wapishkawo.
( )jil)bo,way" , wawhishkflw.
- — , nuuvbizzc.
Old Algonkin, wahi.
Sho8hatap(»o.sli , wahpou.
Micinac, ouabcg, wabcck.
Mountaineer, ivnpsiou.
Passamaquoddy , ivapiijo.
Abenaki, wanbighcnoiir.
, waubegun.
Massac'lnisetts , wompi.
Xarragansetts , ?vompcsu.
Mohican, jvaupaacek.
Montaug , 7vampayo.
Delaware, tvape, wapsu^ tvnpsit. English, hatchet.
English, yes.
]?ethnck , yeitlhun.
Cree, aUhah.
Passaniaqnoddy , nctek.
English , no.
liethtu'k, nrwin.
f'ree, namaw.
Ojil)l)eway , kuwine.
OttaAva, kuuwccn.
Xanticoke, wauppnuiju.
Miami , tvapckinggek.
Shawnoe, opce.
Sack & Fox, wapesknynh.
Mcnomeni, waubish kccwah.
English , hlack.
Bothuck, mundzcy.
( ljil)l)eAvay , mukkmhiiwa.
Ottawa, mackalch.
Xarragansetts , mowcsu.
Massachusetts, mooi.
English, house.
Botlinck, mceootik.
Xarragansetts , ivctu.
English , shoe,
Bethuck, tnosen.
Abenaki , mkcssen.
English , snow,
Bethuck , kaasiissabnnky
Cree, sasagun = hail.
Ojihheway , saisaigan.
'Sheshatapoosh , shashuygnn.
The Shyenne. — A second addition of tlie Algonkin class
was that of the Shvcnno language — a language suspected
to be Algonkin at tlie publication of the Archteologia Ame-
liethnck , (Uhootianycn,
'racnlli, thynlc.
English, knife.
Bethuck , ccwnecn.
Micniac, uagan.
English, had.
Bethuck, muddy.
Cree, mynlnn.
Ojil)heway , monadud.
, mudji.
Ottawa, mntchc.
M i cinac , tnntonalkr.
INrassachusetts , nudchc.
Narragansetts , vudchil.
jVFohican , niafrhit.
Montatig , mnllateuyah.
Montaug, muttadecaco.
Delaware , vuikhHlsii.
Nantieoke, mallik.
Sack & Fox, moichic.
, nintchnlhic.
i. (
330
ON Tin: LANGUAGES OF NOllTIlKUN, WKSTKUN,
rieann. In a treaty made between the United States and
the Shyenne Indians in 1825, the names of the cliiefs avIio
signed were Sioux, or significant in tlie Sioux language. It
was not unreasonable to consider this a primd-facie evidence
of" the Sliycnne tongue itself being Sioux. Nevertheless,
there were some decided statements in the Avay of external
evidence in another direction. There was the special evi-
dence of a gentleman well-acquainted with the fact, that the
names of the treaty, so significant in the Sioux language,
were only translations from the proper Shyenne, there lia-
ving been no Shyenne interpreter at the drawing-up of the
document. What then was tlu* true Shyenne? A vocabu-
lary of Lieut. Abert's settled this. The numerals of this
were published earlier than the other words, and on those
the present writer remarked that they were Algonkin (Ue-
port of the IJritish Association for the Advancement of Sei-
ence, 1817, — Transactions of the Sections, p. 123). l^.Iean-
while, the full vocabulary, which was in the hands of Gal-
latin, and collated by him, gave the contemplated result:
— "Out of forty-seven Shyenne words for which we have
equivalents in other languages, there are thirteen which are
indubitably Algonkin, and twenty-five which have affinities
more or less remote with some of the languages of tliat
family." (Transactions of the American Ethnological Society,
vol. ii. p. cxi. 1848.)
Tlic Black fool. — In the same volume (p. cxiii), and by
the same author, we find a table showing the Blackfoot to
be Algonkin; a fact that nuist now be generally recognized,
having been confirmed by later dula. The probability of
this affinity was surmised in a })aper in the 2Sth Number of
the Proceedings of the present Society.
The Arrapaho. — This is the name of a tribe in Kansas;
occupant of a district in immediate contact with the Shyenne
country.
liut the Shyennes are no Ind'Kjenw to Kansas. Neither
are the Arrapahos. The so-called Fall Indians, of whoso
language we have long had a very short trader's vocabulary
in Umfrcviile, are named from their occupancy which is on
the Falls of the Saskatshewan. The Nehethew? , or Cr^es,
of their neighbourhood call them so; so that it is a Crec
term of Avhicli the English is a translation. Another name
(English also) is Blrj-belUj , in French Gros-vcntre. This has
g-iven rise to some confusion. Gros-ventre is a name also
given to tho Minetari of the Yellow-stone River; whence
the name Minetari itself has, most improperly, been appHed
m %
AND CKNTKAL AMKUICA.
331
ribc in Kansas;
'itli the Shvcnnc
(tliouj^li not, perhaps, very often or by good autliorities) to
the Fall Indians.
The Minetari Gros-ventres belong to the Sioux family.
Not so the Gros-vcnlrcs of the Falls. Adolung remarked
that some of their Avords had an afiinity with the Algonkin,
or as he called it, (>hippe\vay-l)ehnvare, family, e. g. the
naincs for lobacco, arrow, four , and ten.
TImfreville's vocabulary was too sliort for anything but
the most general puri)oscs and the most cautious of sugges-
tions. It was, however, for a long time the only one known.
The next to it, in the order of time, was one in MS., be-
longing to Gallatin, but which was seen by Dr. Prichard
luid collated by the present writer, his remarks upon it being
jndjlished in the lo-lth Numbm* of the Proceedings of this
Society. They were simply to the effect that the language
had certain miscellaneous affinities. An Arrapaho vocabu-
lary in Schoolcraft tells us something more than this; viz.
not only that it is, decidedly, the same language as the
Fall Indian of Umfreville, but that it has definite and })re-
ponderating affinities with the Shvcmne, and, through it, with
the ijreat Alconkin class in general.
Kn
(il.I.SlI.
Al!l!Al'AM(t.
Siivdn'm:.
scdln
nil
tlinsl
» nijitakc.
lowjuc uatliuu vctuuno.
Utolh vcathtah vcisikc.
(ward
/if 111(1..
hi 00(1..
vascsanun mcatsa.
nia
hclict
un
hart.'^
ma
malic
halio
anita anlikali
heart hattali cstali.
smew
mouth
(jirl ....
hnnbaiul
son
ncttcc niartlic
i.ssalia xsjv.
iiasli nail.
naah iiali.
(laiiijhter uaiitiilinnli iialitcli.
oni' .
t/ro .
three.
ciias.sa iiiik(\
ucis iH'gulh.
lias nalic.
four ycanc
nave
five
yorthuii noauo
si.v nitalilcr nalisato.
seren nisortor ..
nalisortor
'////.
c//,
tunc
nis(»t().
lui()t(
na
siautali soto.
ten mahtalitah nialitot*
t
332
ON Tiiic i,.\x(iUAor:s of xoutiikkx, wkstrun,
KNoniKir.
man
father, my ...
mother, my...
husttund, my
son., my
daughter, my
brother^ my
sister^ my
Indian
eV('
movlh
tongue
tooth
beard
back
hand
foot
bone
heart
l)lood
sinew
flesh
shin
tofvn
door
sun
star
day
autumn
wind
fire
water
ICC
mountain
hot
he
that (in)
who
no
eat
drin/c ....
kill
AnHAPAIIO. OtHKU At.dONKIN LANO['A(ii;H.
onauotah onalnnoow, Mcnom. &.c.
nasonnali uosaw, Miami.
nanali nokeah , Menom.
na.sh nail, Shyenne.
naali nali , Shyenne.
nWiMilhah, Shawnee.
nalitsihnali nctawnah, Miami.
nasisthsah ncsa'w.sali , Miami.
naccalitaiali noko.sliayinauk, Menom.
ouonitali ah waiiilinkai , Delaware.
iiii.slii.shi maisliknyshaik, Menom.
notti may tone , Bknom.
natliun wilaiio, Delaware.
vcathtali \\\ pit, Dehmarc.
va.scsanon -witoualii, Delaware.
norkorbali pawkaAvmoma, Miami.
macliotun olatslii, Shawnee.
nautliaxiitali ozit, Delaware.
haluiiinah oliknniio, Menom.
battali iiiaytali, Mennm.
balic mainliki, Menom.
auita olitali, Mcnom.
wonnunyali wpcnsama, Miami.
tahyatch xai.s, Delaware.
haitan otainahc, Delaware.
tichunwa kAvawntamo, Miami.
nislii-ish knyshoh , Mcnom.
ahthah allangwli, Delaware.
ishi kishko, Delaware.
tahuni talikoxko, Delaware.
assissi kaisltxiug, Delaware.
islisliitta islikotawi , Menom.
niitch \\i\.\)0 , Miami.
■walilm mainqnom , 7l/r;i:o;«.
alilii ■svahclilwi , Shawnee.
liastah ksita , Shawnee.
enun cnaw, Miami.
waynanh, Menom.
liinnah aynaili, Menom.
unnahah v\\\\n\\wi\y , Mcnom.
chinnani Vnww, Menom.
mcnnisi mitisliin , Menom.
bannjui niayiiaau, Mcnom.
nauaiut os/i-nainliiiay , Menom.
AND CKNTUAL AMKUICA.
333
Filzhuyh Sound forma in -skum. — 'I'lierc is still a possible
addition to the Algjonkin j^roup; though it is probable that
it cannot bo added to it without raising- the value of the
class. The exact value and interpretation of the following
fact has yet to be made out. 1 lay it, however, before the
reader. The language for the parts about Fitzhugh Sound
seems to belong to a class which will appear in the !;<equel
under the name Ilailtsa or Ilaeet uk. The numerals, how-
ever, have this peculiarity, viz. they eiul in the syllable
-kum. And this is what, in one specimen, at least, two of
the Blackfoot terms do.
English, two.
Fitzhugh Sound, mal-skiim.
llailtsuk, mulu/i.
Blackfoot , narloke-slium.
English , three.
Fit/diugh Sound, iitn-shitm.
Jlailtsuk, ynluk.
Blackfoot , nahokc-skum.
"What, however, if this syllable -skum be other than true
Blackfoot; i. e. what if the numerals were taken from the
mouth of a Ilailtsa Indian? The possibility of this must be
borne in mind. With this remark upon the similarity of end-
ing between one specimen of Blackfoot numerals and the
Hailtsa dialect of -Fitzhugh Sound , we may take leave of the
Algonkin class of tongues and pass on to —
IV. The Atiiabaskan Group. — The vast size of the area
over which the Athabaskan tongues have spread themselves,
has connnanded less attention than it deserves. It should
command attention if it were only for the fact of its touching
both the Oceans — the Atlantic on the one side, the Pacific
on the other. But this is not all. With the exception of the
Eskimo, the Athabaskan forms of speech are the most north-
ern of the New World; nay, as the Eskimos are, by no
means, universally recognized as American, the Athabas-
kan area is, in the eyes of many, absolutely and actually
the most northern portion of America — the most northern
portion of America considered ethnologically or philok»gically,
the Eskimo country being considered Asiatic. To say that
the Athabaskan area extends from ocean to ocean , is to say
that, as a matter of course, it extends to both sides of the
Rocky Mountains. It is also to say that the Athabaskan
family is common to both British and Russian America.
For the northern Athabaskans, the main body of the family,
the philological details were, until lately, eminently scanty
and insufficient. There was, indeed, an imperfect substitute
for them in the statements of several highly trustworthy
authors as to certain tribes who spoke a language allied to
334
ox I'm: I.ANdrAdK? Ol- NOlilllHltX, WKSTKltX,
I
the Chupcwyan , and as to others wlio did not ; — statements
wliich, on tlie -whole, have been shown to be correct; state-
ments, however, which required the confirmation of voca-
buharics. Tlie.se have now be(;n ])roeured; it" not to the full
extent of all the details of the family, to an extent (|uitc
sufficient for the purposes of the philologue. Th<'y show
that the most western branch of the stock, the tJhepewyan
proper, or the language of what Dobbs called the Northern
Indians, is closely akin to that of the Dog-ribs, the Hare
(or (Slave) and the Beaver Indians, and that the Dahodimii,
called from their warlike habits the J\lauvais Monde, are but
slightly separated from them. Farther west a change takes
place, but not one of much importance, interpreters are
understood with greater difficulty, but still understood.
The Sikani and Sussi tongues are known by specimens
of considerable length and value, and those languages, lying
as far south as the drainage of the Haskatshewan , and as
far west as tiic Rocky ]\Iountains, are, and have been for
some years, known as Athabaskan.
Then came the Takulli of New Caledonia, of whose hm-
guage there was an old sample procured by Harmon. This
was the Nagail, or Chin Indian of Mackenzie, or nearly so.
Now, Nagail I hold to be the same word as TakuU-i , whilst
Vhln is Tnhin = Dinne :== Tnai=^ Alna = Knai= Man. Tlic
Takulli division falls into no less than eleven (V) minor sec-
tions; all of which but one end in this root, viz. -tin.
1. The Tau-/m, or Talko-///?.
(V) 2. The Tsilko-//// or Chilko-//«, perhaps the same word
in a different dialect.
3. The Nasko-?///. 8. The Natliau-////.
4. The Thctlio-/m. 9. The Nikozliau-///*.
5- The Tsatsno-;m. 10. The Tatshiau-^/y/, and
C. The Nulaau-//;<. 11. The Babin Indians.
7. The Ntaauo-^m.
Hir John Richardson, from vocabularies procured by him
during his last expedition, the value of which is greatly en-
hanced by his ethnological chapter on the characteristics ot
the populations which supplied them, has shown, what was
before but suspected, that the Loucheux Indians of IMacken-
zie River are Athabaskan; a most important addition to our
knowledge. Now, the Loucheux are a tribe known under
many names; under that of the Quarrellers, under that ot
the Scjuinters, under that ,f the Thycothe and Digothi. Sir
John Richardson calls them Kutshin, a name which we shall
find in several compounds, just as we found the root -//"
in the several sections of tlie Takulli, and as we shall find
riiux
AM) CKNl'ltAI, AMI'.KKA.
.^35
; — statements
correct; s<tato-
lation of voea-
not to the full
m extent (|uite
. Tlu'y show
he Cliepewyan
1 tlio Northern
fibs, the Hart'
the Dahudinni,
ilonde, are but
a change takes
iterpreter.s are
nderstood.
1 by specimens
nguages, lying
hewan, and as
have been for
of whose lan-
llarmon. This
3, or nearly so.
TakuU-i, whilst
\i=M(tn. The
; (V) minor scc-
viz. -tin.
the same word
I'm.
iw-lin.
-tin, and
ndians.
ociircd by him
is greatly en-
aracteristics of
own, what was
fins of ^lackcn-
addition to our
known under
under that of
id Digothi. Sir
which we shall
d tlio root -//"
s we shall tincl
its modified form (Un)ii among the eastern Athalniscans. The
particular tribes of the Kutshin division, occupants of either
the eastern frontier of Itussian America, or the north-wes-
tern parts of the Hudson's I3ay Territory, are (according 1o
the same authority) as follows :
1. The Artez-////.s7// = Hard people.
2. The Tshu-/.v//.s7//= Water pnople,
3. The Tatisei-Aw/67</= liampart people; falling into iour
bands.
4. The Teystse-/i<//6/// = People of the shelter.
5. The Vanta-/ <//*•///= People of the lakes.
0. The Keyctsc-/i7//A7^/ = - People of the open country.
7. The Tlagga-silla -- Little dogs.
Lhis brings us to the Kcninj. Word for word Kcniii/ is
k'itai= Tnui, a modified form of the now familiar root l-n=
inuii, a root which has yet to appc^ar and reappear under
various new, and sometimes unfamiliar and unexpected, forms.
A Kenay vocabulary has long been icnown. It appears in
Lisiansky tabulated with the Kadiak, Sitkan, and Unalaskan
of the Aleutian Islands. Jt was supplied by the occupants
of Cook's Inlet. Were these AthabaskanV The present
writer owes to Mr. Isbister the suggestion that they were
Loucheux, and to the same authority he was indebted for
the use of a very short Loucheux vocabulary. Having com-
pared this w^itli Lisiansky s, he placed both languages in
the same category — rightly in respect to the main point,
wrongly in respect to a subordinate. He determined the
)lace of the Loucheux {A'l/tshin as he would now call them)
jy that of the Kenay, and made both Kolush. He would
now reverse the process and make both Athabaskan, as ISir
John Richardson has also suggested.
To proceed — three vocabularies in Baer's Heitrdfjc are in
the same category with the Kenay, viz. —
1. The Alna. — This is our old friend /-// n^jjain, the form
Tnai and others occurring. It deserves notice, because, un-
less noticed, it may create confusion. As more populations
than one may call themselves iUdn, a AV(»rd lik(; Alna may
appear and re-appear as often as there is a dialect which
so renders the Latin word Immo. Hence, there may not only
be more Atnas than one, but there actually arc more than
'inc. This is a point to which we shall again revert. At
present it is enough that the Atnas under notice are occu-
pants of the mouth of the Co})per lliver, Indians of Kussian
America and Athabaskan.
2. The Kotlsliani. — As i-n= nntn , so does /,-//sh = stran-
(icr, f/Ht'st, enemy, friend^ and miitnlis mulnntlis, the criticism
: !■ I
33G
ON Tin; i.AN'(iiA(ii;.s or noktiikun, wksteux,
ii
tluit applied to Atiia applies to words like KoUslian, (iohan,
and A'oiiish. There may be more than one population so
called.
3. The Uyaleula or UyuUjackh-muld. — This is tlu; name of
few i'amilii's near JMount St. Elias. Now —
The Alna at th(! mouth of the Copper Kiver, the huHsltuni
jiij-her up the stream, and the Uyuleuls, are all held by tin;
present writer to be Athabaskan — not, indeed, so decidedly
as the Beaver Indians, the Do^-ribs, or the Proper Cliepo-
wyans, but still Atliabaskan. They arc not Eskimo, tliouyli
they have Eskimo affinities. They arc not Kolush, tliou^li
they have Kolush affinities. They are by no means isolated,
and as little are they to be made into a class by themselves.
At the same time, it should be added that by including these
JVC t'liise the value of ike class.
For all the languages hitherto mentioned we have speii-
mens. For some, however, of the populations whose names
appear in the maps, within the Atliabaskan area, we have
yet to satisfy ourselves with the testimony of Avriters, or to
rely on inference. In some cases, too, we have the same
population under different names. This is the ease wh(!ii
we have a native designation as well as a French or Eng-
lish one — e. g. Loucheux, ISquinters, Kutshin. This, too,
is the case when we have, besides the native name (or in-
stead of it), the name by which a tribe is called by its neigh-
bours. Without giving any minute criticism, I will briefly
state that all the Indians of the Atliabaskan area whose na-
mes end in -dinni are Athabaskan; viz. —
1. The See-issaw-r///<w/=:^ Kising-sun-/«tv^
2. The Tau-tsawot-^//y/y// = Birch-rind-wt'/^
3. The Thlingeha-^////;?/-— Dog-rib-wt'w.
4. The Etsh-tawut-r/m«/ -— Thickwood-///t7<.
5. The Ainbah tawiit-<//;//</ = Mountain-sheep-wt'//.
6. The Tsillaw^-awdiit-^/////// =3 Bushwood-/»67«.
Lastly — Carries , Slave-Indians , Yellow-knives , Copper-
Indians, and Strong-bows are synonyms for some of the
tribes already mentioned. The //^/r-Indians are called
Kancho. The Nehanni and some other populations of loss
importance are also, to almost a certainly, Atliabaskan with
the tongues in its neighbourhood, we shall find that it is
broadly and definitely separated from them in proportion as
we move from west to east. In Russian America, the Es-
kimo, Sitkan, and Atliabaskan tongues graduate into each
other. In the same parts the Atliabaskan forms of spee( h
differ most from each other. On the other hand , to the cast
of the Rocky Mountains, the Dog-ribs, the Hares, and the
AND CKNTUAI- A.MKUICA.
33-
is tlio name of
, the ho/lshaiti
I'liepcwy ans arc cjit uff by lines oqiially trenchant from the
Eskimos to the north, and from the Algonkins to tlie soutli.
1 infer from this that the ditVusion of the h'ln^uaj^e over those
jarts is comparatively recent; in other ■words, that the Atha-
jiiskan family has moved from west to east rather than from
tiist to west.
Of the projjcr AthaLaskan, /. c. of the Athabaskan in the
original sense of the word, the southern boundary, begin-
ning at Fort Churchill, on Hudson's Bay, follows (there or
thereabouts) ^the course of the ]Missini})pi; to the north of
which lie the Chepewyans who are Athabaskan, to the south
ut' which lie the Crees, or Knistenaux, who are Al^oidcin.
Westward come the Blackfc'ct (Algonkin^ and the Sussees
(Athabaskan), the former to the north, the latter to the south,
until the Rocky Mountains are reached. The TakuUi suc-
ceed — occupants of New Caledonia; to the south of whom
lie Kutani and Atnas. The Takulli area nowhere touches
the ocean, from whicii its western frontier is separated to
the south of 55" north latitude by some unplaced langimges ;
tu the north of 55", by the Sitkeen — but only as far as the
Ivocky Mountains; unless, indeed, some faint Algonkin cha-
racteristics lead future inquirers to extend the Algonkin
area westwards, Avhich is not improbable. The value of the
ihiss, however, if this be done, Avill have to be raised.
The most southern of the Athabaskans are the Sussees, in
north latitude 51" — there or thereabouts. But the Sussees,
far south as they lie, are only the most southern Athabas-
kans en mttssc. There arc outliers of the stock as far south
as the southern parts of Oregon. More than this, there are
Athabaskans in California, New Mexico, and Sonora.
Few discoveries respecting the distribution of languages
are more interesting than one made by ]\Ir. Hale, to the
ttl'ect that the Umkwa, Kwaliokwa, and Tlatskanai dialects
')f a district so far south as the River Columbia, and the
upper portion of the Umkwa river (further south still) were
uiitlying members of the Athabaskan stock, a stock pre-
eminently northern — not to say Arctic — in its main area.
Yet the dialects just named were shown by a subsequent
iliseovery of Professor Turner's, to be only penultimate ra-
mifications of their stock; inasmuch as further south and
further south still, in California, New IMexico, Sonora, and
oven Chihuhua, as far south as 30" north latitude, Athabas-
kan forms of speech were to bo found; the Navaho of Uta
Mul New IMexico, the Jecorilla of New Mexico, and the
Apatch of New Mexico, California, and Sonora, being Atha-
Wskan. The Hoopah of California is also Athabaskan.
22
■'■■< I
338
ON rm: i,.VNCiUA(Ji:.s op NoirniKitx, wi:sti;u.v,
u
Tlio first of tlie populations to tlio soulli of tlio Atliabns-
kiin area, wlio, lyin^' on, or to the west of, tlie Rocky Moun-
tains, are otlior than Aljionkin, are —
V. The Ritunaiia. — The Kitunalia, Cutani, Coolanio dv
Flatbow area is h)ii;^- rather tlian broad, anil it follows the
line of the Kocky INlountains between 52" and lb" north lati-
tude. How definitely it is devided by the nn\in ridj^e fnnii
that of the IJlackfoots I am unable to say, but as a fieiicral
rule, the Kutani lie west, the lilaekfoots east; the former
bein^;" Indians of New Caledonia and ()reji,on, the latter of
the Hudson's IJay Territory and the United States. On tlio
west the Kutani country is bounded by that of the Shushap
and Selish Atnas, on the north by the Siissee, Sikanni, and
Nagail Athabaskans, on the south (I think) by some of the
Upsaroka or Crow tribes. All those relations are remark-
able, and so is the geoj^raphical position of the area. It i.s
in a mountain-range ; and, as such, in a district likely to be
an ancient occupancy. The languages with which the Kutani
lies in contact arc referable to four dilferent families —
the Athabaskan, the Atna, the Algonkin, and the Sioux:
the last two of which, the Jilackfoot (Algonkin) and the Crow
(Sioux), are both extreme forms, /. r. forms sufficiently un-
like the other members of these respective groups to have
had their true position long overlooked; forms, too, sufficiently
peculiar to justify the philologue in raising them to the rank
of separate divisions. It suffices, however, for the ])rescnt
to say, that the Kutani language is bounded by four tongues
differing in respect to the class to which they belong and
from each other, and ditferent from the Kutani itself.
The Kutani, then, differs notably from the tongues with
wliich it is in geographical contact; though, like all the lan-
guages of America, it has numerous miscellaneous affinitieis.
In respect to its phonesis it agrees with the North Oregon
languages. The similarity in name to the Loucheux, whom
Richardson calls Kitlshht, deserves notice. Upon the whole,
few languages deserve attention more than the one under
notice.
VI. The Atna Group. — West of the Kutanis and south
of the Takulli Athabaskans lie the northernmost members
of a great family which extends as far south as the Sahap-
tin frontier, the Sahaptin being a family of Southern, or
American, Oregon. Such being the case, the great group
now under notice came under the cognizance of the two
American philologues, whose important labours have already
been noticed, by whom it has been denominated Tsihaili-
Selish. It contains the Shushwap, Selish, Skitsnish (or Coeur
:sTi;uN',
AND CnN'rilM, AMKIMCA.
:v.v.)
i)f tlio Atlifvlias-
\\{i HocUy iMouu-
ni , Cootaulo or
111 it follows tilt'
(I IS" north lati-
nain ridj^o froin
but .'IS a goiicrnl
■ast; the toniicr
n, the latter of
States. On tlio
; of tlie Sliusliiip
CG, Sikanni, and
by some of the
oils are reniark-
thc area. It is
trict likely to he
vliieh the Kiitaiii
ircnt families —
and the Sioux:
in) and the Crow
3 sufficiently un-
groups to have
1, too, sufficiently
jiein to the rank
L for the present
i by four tongues
icy belong and
tani itself.
le tongues with
like all the lau-
iineous affinities,
le ISortli Oregon
ouehcux, whom
Upon the whole,
the one under
I
itanis and south
nmost members
as the Sahap-
of Southern, or
the great group
vnce of the two
irs have alr(>ady
ninated Tsihaili-
itsnish (or Caur
ilAlcno) Piskwaiis, NusdMlnni, Kawitclicn, Skwali. ("liechiii,
Kowelits, and Ksietshawus I'orms of .sjx'ccji.
In ivgard to the Atna I have a statement of my own to
correct, or at any rate to modify. In a paper, read before
ilio Kthnologieal Society, on the Iianguag(\s of the ( h'cgon
Territory (Dec. II, I Nil), 1 |>ronoiuiced that an Atna voca-
liulary found in Maeken/ii(!'s Travels, though diffe'rent from
the Atna of the (.\»p})er liiver, helonged to the same group.
The {/ri'iip, howiiver, to which the Atna of tin; Copper Uiver
liidongs is the Athabaskan.
The Tsihaili-Sclish languages reach the sea in the parts
to the south ot tlic mouth of Frazcr's l{iv(;r, ?'. c. the parts
(i|ij)()sito Vancouver's Island; perhaj)S they touch it further
til the north also; perhaps, too, some of tlie Takulli forms
ut' the speech further north still reach the sea. The current
>tatement8, however, arc to the eii'cct, that to the south of
tlio parts opposite Sitka, and to the north of the parts oppo-
site Vancouver's Island, the two families in (jucstion ar(!
separated from the Pacific by a narrow strip of separate
language — separate and jjut imperfectly known. These are,
beginning from the north —
Vn. The Haidah (iuoup of Lanoiacji-.s. — Spoken by
the Skittegats, ^lassetts, Kumshalias, and Kyganic; of (^ueen
Charlotte's Islands and the Prince of Wales Archipelago. Its
iireu lies immediately to that of the south of the so-called
Kolush languages.
VIII. The Chemmesyan.— Spoken along the sea-coast and
islands of north latitude 55*^.
IX. The Billechula. — Spoken at the mouth of Salmon
River; a language to which I have shown, elsewhere, that
;i vocabulary from IMackenzie's Travels of the dialect spoken
at Friendly Village was referable.
X. The IIailtSA. — The Hailtsa contains the dialects of
the sea-coast between llawkesbury Island and Broughton's
Archipelago, also those of the northern ])art of Vancouver's
Island.
In Gallatin, the Chemmesyan, Billechula, and Hailtsa are
nil thrown in a group called j\<(as. The Billechula numerals
are, certainly , the same as the Hailtsa; the remainder of
the vocabulary being unlike, though not altogether destitute
of coincidences. The (Jhemmesyan is more outlying still.
I do not, however, in thus separating these three languages,
absolutely deny the validity of the iVaas family. I only
imagine that if it really contain languages so different as
the (Chemmesyan and Hailtsa, it may also certein the Hai-
ilah and other groups , c. g. the one that conies next , or —
22*
310
ON rilli I<AN<.iL'A(iK.S OK NOKTIIKUN, WKSTIIU.V,
XI. Till-: Wakasii of (^juulni and Vancouver's Island.
South ot the Wakasli area couui, ovor and above tin; .soutli-
(!rn nu!udjoi'8 of tho Atna family and tlio Oriij^on uutlicrs
of tlu3 Atliaba«kan, tlio following groups, of value hillicrtu
unascertained.
A. The Tshinuk, or Cliinuk;
15. The Kalapuya ;
C The Jakon-, — all agreeing in the harshness of tlioir
phoncsis, and (so doing) contrasted Avith —
D. The Sahaptin, and
K. The Shoshoni.
The Sahaptin is separated by Gallatin from the Waiilalpii
containing the (-ayus or Molelc form of spcicch. The })rc.stiit
writer throws them both into tho same group. The iiuincr-
als, the words wherein it must bo admitted that the two
languages agree tlie most closely, are in —
Knulish. Saiiai'tin. Cayus.
unc uaks nsl.
two laj)it l(,'pl-in.
three iiiitnt niat-uin.
six oi-lak noi-na.
si'i'cn <ti-napt uoi-lip.
eight oi-niatat noi-uuit.
Tho meaning of the oi and no/ in these words requires in-
vestigation. It is not /ii'c; the Sahaptin and Cayus for/Z/v]
being pahhal (S.) and Imvil (C). Nor yet is it huuil (ii.sj
the word for five often is), the word for hand being cjiih and
apah. It ought, however, theoretically to be something ofj
the kind, inasmuch as
0/-lak and noi-mx =:= V -j- I .
(V/-napt and noi-\'\^ = V + 2.
(V/-matat and //o/-mat = V + 3.
Of the Shoshoni more will be said in the sequel. At pre-
sent it is enough to state that the Shoshoni and Saliaptinj
languages arc as remarkable for the apparent ease and sim-
plicity of their phonesis as the Jakon , Jvalapuya, and Tslii-I
nuk are for the opposite qualities. It may also be addcilj
that the Shoshoni tongues will often be called by the moioj
general name of Paduca.
South of the Cayus, Waiilatpu, and Wihinast, or Westornj
Shoshonis , come the languages which are common to ( )rcgon|
and
California.
For three of these we have vocabularies (]\rr. Hale's):
AND CKMUAr, AMI'.UICA.
311
slincss of tlic'ir
I. (ft.) The Luti'mani; (b.) thk Palaik; (r.) the Siiasti.
- 'rii(;ro may \)o, otlior I'nnns of snccc-h coiniiion to the two
niuntrics, Imt tlit'St; tlirco nvo tlio only (dies known to
us by spooiincns. Tiio Lutuanii, Sliasti, and I'alaik aro
tlirown by CJallatin into tlirco sonarato classes. Tlioy aro,
witliuut doubt, imitually unintoliipjiblo. Novcrtheloss they
cannot bo very widoly separated.
l/^/;i = in Lutuami Iiishii-alsiis^ in Palaik =:= »/«/«?. (^u. «/.vj/s =
i/atni,
ir(//>(«« = Lutnami lar-itri, Vi\\\\\k=^umte>r-Usru. Qii. ilsi--=ilKi'tt.
Jn I'alaik, Son ~ -- i/ini-i/sti , /hintj/ilrr =^ liiiiiiiii-ilsn.
Ill (III -z \'i\hi\k loh. Ill liUtuoini /<//i = /a<//'. i^n. iiiit/i =^ /tiud in
Sliasti, ma/ih = hair , Sliasti.
Ear = rintnaiiii miiinnitls/i , I'al.'iik /lU-iuiitnufils.
}ltiiiUi = an Sliasti, (ijt rnlaik,
fi„,l/t z=: Usfin Sliasti, iisi J'alaik.
Sun = Isuarc Sliasti, Isnl I'alaik = sun and moon. In Liituaini Isol
t= slar.
f//7' = Sliasti t//»r< ;rr: I'alaik malts. The terniinatioii -/- (•eiiniuni
in I'alaik, — ipili:=:tonf/U(\ la'hil<i-s=islioes , usi'/tiiu = s/:i/, »\:c.
ir((/<v ==: .Sliasti atsa, I'alaik as.
^min> z=^ Lutuanii /iVy/.v, Sliasti /mr.
id/- /A =^ Lutuanii /tiirln , I'alaik hrla , Sliasti Uinth. This is tin;
second time we have had a Shasti /• i'ov a I'alaik / — Isuuro
r=: (sul.
Pear - - lokunks Lutnanii , loldioa , Palaik.
W/v; = Lutuanii lohi/i, Sliasti lararakli.
/^r: Lutuanii no. (^u. is this the n in ti-(is=.hc(ul and n-ap =
for which latter word tlu^ Shasti is ap-ka '{
ncmkkals.
Enomsii. Shasti. Pat.aik.
one tshiamu uinis.
iwn lioka kaki.
Neither arc there wanting affinities to the Saliaptin and
Uayus languages, allied to each other. Thus —
Inr = mumuish Lutuanii = ku mumuats Palaik = mnlsnui Saliap-
tin. tsdck Shasti := luksli (Jayiis.
hulk ~~= s hum Lutuanii = shum-kaksh Vnyn^ = him Saliajitin.
Tongue = pa?vus lAitunmi = pan'ish Saliaptin --^>Mi7< Cay lis.
Toolh= tut Lutuanii = HI Salnqitin.
Flint = akwcs Shasti = akhua Saliaptin.
Blood = (chad I'alaik -- kikel Saliaptin.
Fire = loloks Lutuanii = ihiksha Sahajitin.
'he -= nalshik Lutuanii = naks Saliaptin = na (^ayus.
Tivo = lapit Lutuanii = lapit Saliaptin = Ivplin Cay lis.
I)'
1
I,
' ' '
\
■ b
Ii42 ON TlIK K-AN(ii;A<ii;S (»!•' NOUI'IIKUN, \Vi;S TKItN ,
Tlie l^utuaini sccni.s somewliat the inotst Sahaptin of tlic
three, ami this is what we expect tVoiii its j^eograplijcal
j)().^iti«)n, it bein^ contcniiinous with tlie Molelc (or (Jayi'is)
and the allied A\'aiihitpii. It is also cont(!rminous with the
Wihinast Shoshoni, or Paduea, as is the Palaik. Both Pa-
laik and Lutuanii (along with the Shasti) have Sho.shoni ai-
finities.
ENCiMSIt. SlKlSlHlNI.
tiosr moui = iaiii! , Pahtik.
moiilh tiin])a = shtiiii , Liifmimi.
car iiiaka = isak , iS7/r^s7».
sun tava ;sapas, Lnluami.
nuilrr \);i ■ ■ nmYi), Luliiaini.
I Ill ^-^11(1, Lnfii(tini.
lliini 1 = 15 LuhKtini.
he 00 = hot, Lnluami.
our s\\i\\\n{ii\ ^= tshiamuu , Sliasti ; //w/.v, Palaik.
The chief lan^uajije in contact with th(! Shasti is the in-
trusive Athabaskan of the ITnikwa and Tlatskanai tribes.
Hence the nearest languages with which it should be com-
pared arc the Jakon and Kalapuya, from which it is jrco-
graphically separated. For this reason wc do not cxpoit
any great amount of coincidence. We find however the
following —
llxfiMsii. .Jakon.
hrad tkldokia = lah , Palaik,
slar tkhlalt := tsliol, Lulwinti.
uujld kaclic := apklia , Shasti.
blood pouts = poits, Luluumi.
our klium -— tshiamu , Palaik.
Of three languages spoken in the north of California and
mentioned in Schoolcraft, by name, though not given in
specimens, — (1) the Watsahewa , (2) the Ilowtetc^-li, and
(|{) the Nabiltse, — the first is said to be that of the Sliasti
bands ;
Of the Ilowtf'tetdi I can say nothing;
The Kabiltsc! is, probably, the language of the Tototuno;
at least Pogue's Kiver is its locality, and the Pascal Indians
is an English name for the 'i\)totune.
South of the Shasti and Lutuanii areas wo find —
II. Till-: EiiNiK.
III. Tiiio Tahlkwah.
The latter vocabulary is short, and taken from a Scrayoin
AND CI;NT!JAI- AMinUfA.
343
from a Scnif/oin
liidiun, /. e. from an Indian to whom it was not the native
toii<j;un. Wo aro warned of this — the inference bein^ that
tliu Tahlcwah vocabulary is less trustworthy than tlic others.
KnOLISH. KllNKK. TAIir.KWAII.
man ahwuiish poldnsaii'li.
hoi/ aiiakMiucha korrlin.
(jirl yolinipahoitch kcniihl.
Indian ahr.ih astowali.
hrail akhontshlioutsh astintah.
hoard iiiprnihw .scmcvrlipcrrh.
nt'ck sihn schoniti.
face ahvo wotawahih.
tonijHC ui)n so'h.
Irclh wu'h sliti.
fool fissi stah.
one issali titskcdi,
two achhok kitchnik.
titrce kourakli kltclmah.
four pechs tsliahaiiik.
five tirahho schwallah.
ten trah swelliih.
The junction of the Rivers Khvmatl and Trinity gives us
the h)cality for —
IV. TiiK Languages akin to tiik Wkitspkk. — The
Weitspek itself is spoken at the junction, but its dialects of
the Wcyot and Wishosk extend far into Ilumboklt County,
where they are, probably, the prevailing forms of speech,
being used on the Mad River, and the parts about Cape
Mendocino.
The Weyot and Wishosk are more dialects of the same
language. From the Weitspek they dilfcr nmch more than
they do from ach other. It is in the names of the parts
of the body where the chief resemblances lie.
V. The Mendocino (V) (Jkoup. — This is the neme sug-
f::o.sted for the Chonraluik , Jlulcniflaikai, Kxilarnqm^ YuUai , and
Klnvaklamaiju forms of speech collectively.
1 , 2. The (^howeshalv and JJatomdaikai are spoken on
Eel River, and in the direction of the southern branches of
the AVeitspek group, with which they have affinities.
3, 4, 5. The Kulanaixt is spoken about Clear Lake, the
Viikiti on Russian llivcr. These forms of speech, closcdy
allied to each other, are also allied to the so-called Northern
Indians of Raer's ]')oitriig(^. Northern meaning to the north
of the ^etth'ment >)f I\oss. The particular tribe of which
we have a vocabulary called th niselves Khniikhlamaiju.
344
OS riiio ii.\N(irA<ji:s ok noktkiik.n, wksikkx,
Knomsic.
/irad ...
fiair
njr
I'ur
nose
tnniilh ...
toolh
liUKjite ...
Itinul
fiml
.S7///
KirwAKIII-AMAYlJ. Ktr.ANAI'O.
kliommo kaiyah.
.shiika imisnli.
iin ul.
sliuina sliiinali.
j)la lal)ahl)o.
aa katsidoli.
on yanli.
alia hal.
psl)a hiyali.
fsakki kaliinali.
ada lali.
Kniii.isii. \Vi;nsi'i:K. Kt r.ANAi'o.
m*ii>n kalazlia luclali.
ahtr kamoi uiyalilioli.
fire oklio k lioli.
water aka k'liali.
one ku klialilili.
Itvo kon kots.
three .sul)o honioka.
four iiiiira dol.
fiM tyslia Iclimali.
A'/.i' lara tsadi.
Tlio following shows tho difference between the Weitspok
and Kiilfinapo; one belonging to the northern, the other tu
the southern division of their respectiv^c groups.
Knoi,I81I. Wkitsi-kk. Krr.AXAi'o.
man jtagchk kaali.
woman wintsuk dali.
ttoy hohksh kaliwih.
qirl
■\vai inuksli daldiats.
head tcjruoh
h<(ir
ear
eije
nose
kaiyali.
.... l(']»taitl nuisnh.
.... spc'hguh .sln'niah.
.... iiiylih ni.
.... iiK'tpf lahaldx).
mouth iiiihlntl katsedoh.
toNf/ue iii('li[>rh hal.
teeth iiu'rpctl yaoli.
beard mchpcrcli kat.sutsu.
arm. iiiclislioli' tsiiali.
hand t.soAvush Iilyyali.
foot uict.skti kaliinali.
Idood liapp'l hahlaik.
AXn CKNTUAI, AMinilCA.
:m5
KnUMSH. WkITSI'KK. Kri.ANAPO.
sun WHiioushloh lali,
moon kc'tuownhr luMah.
star J^ugcts uiyalinli.
day Winop diiliiiuil.
dark kctiitski ])otil>.
/ire mots k'lioli.
water pjiha k'liah.
/ nok hall.
thoH kelil ina.
one spiuckoli k'liahlili.
hvo miohr kots.
Ihrce iiaksa liomcka.
four tMhhnnuo, dol.
five inalirotnin lolimali.
six hohtclio tsadi..
seven tcliowiirr kulahots.
eig/it k'holiwuli k<»ko(l()lil.
nine kcrr liadarolslmm.
ten wcrt'hlolnverli liadonitlck.
In tliG Kulannpo language yacal ma napo = all. (he r/'lk's.
Here fiapo = Aapa , the name of one of the counties to the
north of the Bay of San Francisco and to the south of Clear
Lake.
We may now turn to the drainage of the Sacramento and
the parts south of the Shasti area. Hero we shall tind three
vocabularies, >f which the chief is called —
VI. Tp.\z C "EH. — How far this will eventually turn out
to be a convenient name for the group (or how far th ) group
itself will be real) , is uncertain. A vocabulary in Gallatin
from the Upper Sacramento, and one from Mag Readings
(in the soutli of Shasti county) in Schoolcraft, belciig to tlie
group.
Mag Readings is on the upper third of the Sacramento —
there or thereabouts.
KxoLisn. CopEii. M. H. Indian. U. Rack.
man pohtlnk winnokc
mmnn niuhltoh dokko^
hend huhk pok
hair tiili tomi tomoi.
ojc sah dmti tumnt.
W)sc kiunik tsouo.
nmilh kohl kal.
'('(•//* siih .shi
kurd chehsaki klictclicki
:{46
ON Tin; i,.\\(;uA<ii;.s ov noutiikkn, wkstkkx,
P^NOI.ISU. Coi'KH.
arm salilah
hand
fool
blood
sun....
wind
SCIIlll
inai'li
salik cliodik «
M. Ii. Indian. I'. Sack.
kcolo,
shim tsciimt (Jhiijcrs).
mat „ ktamoiso.
siinh tuku sa.s.
toudi klcylii - — -
rain yoliro lulioUo
snow yolil yola
fire poll pan po,
water mc'lim mem mem.
earth kirrli ko.sh
In the paper of Ko. 134 the import of a slight ainonnt
of likones between |the Upper Sacramento vocabulary and
the Jakon is overvalued. Tlie real preponderance of the
affinities of tlic group taken in mass is that wliich its geo-
graphical position induces us to expect ii priori. With the
»Shasti, &c. the Copeh has the following words in connnon: —
English. Copkh. Shasti , ktc.
head buhk uiak , 8.
hair teili tiyi, P.
teeth siih it-sa , P.
ear maht »t»<-mutsli, L.
eye sah asu, P.
foot mat pats, L.
sun sunli tsul, P.
thou mill mai, S.
and, probably, others.
The Copeh is spoken at the head of Putos Creek.
Observe that the Copeh for water is fnetn, as it is in the
languages of the next group, which we may provisionally
call —
VII. The Pujuxi. — Concerning this we have a notice
in Haie, based upon information given by Captain Suter to
Mr. Dana. It was to the effect that, about eighty or a
hundred miles from its mouth, the river Sacramento formed
a division between two languages, one using mumi, the other
kik = wafer.
The Pujuni, Sec. say mumi; as did the speakers of the C<»peli.
For the group we have the («) Pujuni, {b) Sccunine, ami
(c) Tsamak specimens of Hale, as also the Cushna vocabu-
lary, from the county Yuba, of Schoolcraft; the Cushiui
numerals, as well as other words, being nearly the same as
the Secumno, e. g.
AMJ CKNTlf.M. AMKUICA.
;m7
Knolihii. Skcimnk. Cijsiina.
one Aviktc wiktc-w*.
livo ]»('n paui-///.
three sapui sapui-m.
fuiir tsi t.sui-/«.
five mauk marku-wt (lualikuin?).
So are several other words besides , as —
head tsol cliolp.
hair ono ono.
ear bono' bono.
etfe il hin.
sun oko ok\n.
VIII. The Moquelumne Guoup. — Halo's vocabulary of
the Talatiii belongs to the group for which the name A/o-
quelumne is proposed, a IMoqueluinne Hill (in Calaveras
county) and a Moquoluinne Iliver being found within the
area over which the languages belonging to it are spoken.
Again, the names of the tribes that speak them end largely
in -mnc, — Cliiipimine , &c. As far south as Tuol-?///</i6' county
tlie language belongs to this division, as may be seen from
the following table; the Talatui being from Hale, the Tuo-
himne from Schoolcraft; the Tuolumne Indians being on the
Tuolumne Kiver, and Cornelius being their great chief, with
six subordinates under him, each at the head of a different
ranchora containing from fifty to two hundred individuals.
Of these six members of what we may call the Cornelian
captaincy, five speak the language represented by the vo-
caoulary : viz.
1. The Mumaltachi.
2. The aiullateco.
3. The A pan gas i.
1. The Lapappu.
'». The Siyante or Typo>
The sixth band \f that o,
Hawhaw, residing further i
Aplaches (? Apaches), under
•le mountains.
EN'fil.lHII.
hcttii
hiiir
ear
Tlfil.lM.Nh.
hownali ....
o.sok
(olko
TAr,ATII.
tikot.
nninii.
alok.
eye Inintch wilai
nose ni'to uk (V).
month ahwi'ik huho (?).
sky Mutslia -witc^uk.
318 ON Tin; LAxouAOf:s of noutiieux, wk«tkun,
ENdi-isii. TtTdT.irMXK. Tai,ati:i.
sun lioainhali lil.
(lai/ liomaah liiuiim.
7mjhl koAVwillfvh kawil.
darkness posiattah Iinnaba.
fire wukali wiko.
tvalcr klkali kik.
slotic loAVwak sawa.
As far west as the sea-coast languages of the Moqiielumuc
group arc spoken. Thus —
A short vocabulary of the San llafacl is IMoquelumno.
So are the Sonoma dialects, as represented by the Tsho-
koycm vocabulary and the Chocouyeni and Yonkiousnic Pa-
ternosters.
So is the Olamcntke of Kostromitonov in Baer's Beitrli^o.
So much for the forms of speech to the north of the Gulf
of San Francisco. On the south the philology is somewliiit
more obscure. The Paternosters for the Mission de Sanln
Clara and the Vallec de Ins Tularcs of Mofras seem to belorii,^
to the same language. Then there is, in the same author,
one of the Lanffue Giiiloco de la Mission de San Francisco.
These I make Moquelumne provisio tally. 1 also make a pro-
visional division for a vocabulary called —
IX. The Costano. — The tribes under the supervision of
the Mission of Dolores were live in number; the Ahwastcs,
the Olhones, or Costanos of the coast, the Romonans, the
Tulomos, and the Altatmos. The vocabulary of which tli«
following is an extract was taken from Pedro Alcantara,
who was a boy when the Mission was founded , A. D. 1 77G.
He was of the Romonan tribe.
Enomsii. Costano. Tshokoyem.
man inihou tai-t'i'Sf.
ivoman vatichma kulch-r.v.vr'.
hoy • shfnfsmuk yokoli {smalt)
girl katra koyah.
head \i\v inoloh.
ear tnorus alilohk.
ei/e roliin shut.
nase lis huk.
mouth wovpor lM])<Tup,
tongue tassok lolintip.
tooth silt knht.
neck lani hch'kko.
fool kolo koyok.
AND C'KNTU.VI. AMERICA.
349
Enomsii.
CoSTAXO.
TsilOKUVEM.
hlood
• pjiy.-ui
kichawh.
sky
sun
. r(!uciuc
lihlih.
. ishmen
.. kolma
. agweh
hih.
moon
slur
pukihik.
liittish.
d(iy
night]
fire
. puhc {light)
.. moor (dark)
. rorctaoii
hialinal).
kawul.
wikih.
water ...
. sii
kihk.
river
.. oni.sh
.. crek
pohih.
lepch.
stone
/
.. kalniali
kahui.
thou
.. IllCllC
mill.
he
.. -wahchc
ikkoh.
they
.. nckuinsah
mukkain.
all
.. kcto
nuikkam.
trho
.. mato
mahnti.
cat
.. ahmiish
yohh)musih
drink
.. owahto
iLshu.
run
.. akamtoha
.. atciiipimah
hihchiah.
see
ellih.
This shows that it differs notably from tlie Tshokoyem;
the personal pronouns, however, beings alike. Again, the
word for man = l-aman-tiya in the San Itafacl. On the other
hand, it has certain Cushna affinities.
Upon the an hole, however, the affinities seem to run in
the direction of the languages of the next group, especially
in that of the Iluslen: —
1= kah-nah , Cost. = ka=i mine, Ruslcn.
Thou = inc-ne , Cost. =:= me = thine , Kuslcii.
Sun = ishmen , Cost. = ishmen = light , Kuslcn.
Water = sii, Cost. = ziy, Kuslon.
(>) Boy ■= shinishmuk , Cost. ~— enshinsh , Kuslcn.
(?) Girl = katra , Cost. = kaana , Kuslcn.
Lest these last three coincidences seem far-fetched, it
should be remembered that the phonesis in these languages
is very difficult, and that the Kuslen orthograjjhy is Spanish,
the Costano being English. Add to this, there is every ap-
pearance, in the San Miguel and other vocabularies, of the
r being something more than the r in brand, &c. every ap-
pearance of its being some guttural or palatal, which may,
uy a variation of orthography, be spelt by /.
Finally, I remark that the -ma in the Costano ralich-tna
^:J
350
(IN iiii; i,.\N(ir.\(ir:s m- noktiikkn , wkstkux,
= woman ^ is, jiiobably, the -t/ir In tlio Solodad muc (=;//,//,,
and shurish-mc {= woffian), and tlio am/, {aiik) oHIk! I'uslcn
nnif/uij-amk (z-t/tati) and latrayam-ank (= woman)] (V)
/a(r<nja = raficfi. Ncjvertlioless, ior tlic jirr'sfmt I plat'(! tlic
Costano by itself, as a transitional form of sjxsccli to the
lanf;uag('s spokon north, east, and south of the Jiay of Smu
Francisco.
X. Tj[K ]Mauii»osa Lan(}UA()KS. — In tho north of Mari-
posa county, and not far south of the Tuolumne area, tlic!
language seems changed, and the Coconoons is spoken l>v
some bands on the ^[ercede Uiver, under a chief nanuil
Nuella. They are said to be the remnants of three distinct
bands each, with its own distinct language.
KNCil.ISH. ('OCONOO.NS. TlLAUK.
head oto utno.
hair tolus cells.
car took took.
nase thedick tuiieck.
mnulh siiiniiiiick sheiiiinak.
lotigue taleotch talkat.
Inolh talec talee.
sun suyou <»op.
moon ottaum taahmoinna.
slar tchictas saliel.
(lay hial talioh *.
fire sttttol ossel.
fvaler illeck illiok.
XI. TiiK Salinas Group. — This is a name which I nro-
poso for a group of considerable compass; and oiu) wliicli
contains more than one mutually unintelligible form of spcecli.
It is taken from the river Salinas, the drainage of which
lies in the counties of Monterey and San Luis Obispo. Tho
southern boundary of Santa Cruz lies but a little to tlie north
of its mouth.
The Gioloco may possibly belong to this group, notwith-
standing its reference tc the IMission of San Francisco. The
alia, and mu(- (in ;««//-ryocuse), may = the ahatj and i-tnil-u
(a'Av/) of the Eslen.
The Kuslen has already been mentioned, and that in res-
pect to its relations to the Costano. It belongs to this group.
So does the Soledad of Mo/'ras; which, though it ditlters
from that of Hale in the last half of the numerals, seenis
to represent the same language.
* 8amc word as ltu'ch=lig/tl in Cocoiioons; in I'ima lai.
.\NI» <I;N1'I!AI. AMKUK'A.
351
So do tlio Kslcn and CaniKd forms of spocrli; fillicd toono an-
iitlicr somewhat more closely tlian to the Knsh'ii and ►^idedad.
So do tlie San Antonio and San Miguel forms of speech.
The liuslen, Eslen, San Antonio and San Miguel are, ])ro-
liably, four inutually unintelligible languages.
The Salinas languages are succeeded to the south by the
forms of speech of —
XII. TiiK Santa JiAiiiiAUA (iKOup — containing the Santa
Barbara, Santa Inez, and San Luis Obispo languages.
XIII. TiiK CAi'i.sTiiAxn (jiiori*. — (Japistrano is a name
suggested by that of the Mission of San Juan (Japistrano.
The group, I think, falls into two divisions: —
1. The Projwr Cap/sfntno, or .Xr/c/ft , of San Luis Jicf/ and
San Juan (Japistrano.
2. The San Gabriel, or A'ij, of San Gabriel and San Fer-
nando.
XIV. The Yuma LAN'(;nAGi:s. — At the junction of the
liila and Colorado stands Fort Yuma, in the district of the
Viuna Indians. They occupy each side of the Colorado,
both above and below its junction with the (jlila. How far
they extend northwards is unknown, probably niore than
lOO miles. They are also called Cuchans , and are a fierce
)redatory nation, encroaching equally on tribes of their own
anguagc and on aliens.
From these Vitma Indians 1 take the name for the group
now under notice. It contains, besides the Yuma Proper,
the Dieguno of San Diego and the Coco-maricopa.
The Coco-maricopa Indians are joint-occupants of certain
villages on the Gila; the population with which they are
associated being I'ima. Alike in other respects, the Pima
and Coco-maricopa Indians differ in language, as may be
seen from the following table, confirmatory of the testimony
of numerous trustworthy authorities to the same effect.
KsGi.isn.
I'lMA.
CrCHAN.
man
hiitli
... ciiatsh
ivoman
lialui ..
... sinyak
hulian lamp ii»('t('j)ai('
i ocoutsucluTowo
heml laouk < Jind
( unnvclthoooouo
hnir ptnnik ootclie
Kir ptnahauk .smythl
nose talink
muulh chinits
CoCOMAUICOl'A. I)|i:<!l Ml.
•match ♦ ay^-"f^'l't-
ft lldlCIl . I
^ I <'])ati'li.
seniact sun.
f'stiir.
hilt'tar.
Im.
ah.
\ M
352
ON Tin: I.ANOUAUKS OF NOllTIIEUN, WKSTEKN,
n
KnoMKII. I'iMA. ('('('IIAN.
Unujuc ncucii ('])ulcli(^ ....
luutli jituliau aiMuloc'liii
yalilioIiH'li
COCOMAIIICOI'A. DiKdl No.
heard cliiiiyo
hand nialiiihtk
foot ttitaght
akij ptfhuwik
nun tali.s
muon nialisa liutlilya
.s7«/" uoii klupwalau
snum c'liiah lialup
oesalclu' isNalis sc^lli.
c'iu(;tchslipa.slai>ya amctchc lianmlyay.
ainina
nyatcli
I'lrc talii aawoli house
ivuler buntik aha haaclic kha.
/ aliaii nyat nyah.
he ycutah hahritzk
one yuinako win saiulck hiiia.
two kuak havick haveka hawiic.
Ilin'c Vi'ik hamuk liaiuoka haimik.
fnur kiik chapop chaiiipapa cha|Mi|).
five puitay scrap sarap snap.
San Diego lies in H2V2" north latitude, a point at wliieli
the philology diverges — in one direction into Old Califor-
nia, in another into Sonora. I first follow it in the diroc
lion of
Old California.
San Diego, as has just been stated, lies in 327-2" '^^''t''
latitude. Now it is stated in the Mithridates that the most
northern of the Proper Old Californian tongues, the Covliimi,
is spoken as far north as 33". If so, the Dieguno may be
Did Californian as well as New; which I think it is; belie-
ving, at the same time, that CoclUml and I'uchan arc the
same words. Again, in the following Paternoster the word
for sky = ammui in the Cuchan vocabulary.
CociiiMi OF San Xavier.
father sky
Pennayn inakcnamba yaa ambayujui niiya mo ;
name men confess and Uwc alt
Buhu mombojua tamma gkoiucnda hi nogodono domuojiiog gkajini ;
and sky earl/i
Pennayula bogodouo gkajini, gui hi ambayujup maba yaa keauietc
favour
di'ciiinyi mo puogin;
\NI» CDMUAl. AMKUK A.
;{j3
sky ciirlh
had in hliliula inujim uiubayup mo ilcduliijiia, uiiu't C- nii j;u'ilii{;iii
hi jjagknjiin;
this dttji ilan
Tainiula yaa iUo tcjiu'g (juilugiiuiiii ])oiiiijir.li r tiinii ilm yniuio
I'lH'gin ,
ml man evil
liiiilii tainiii.i yaa <;aiuliuo;j:jiila ko|iiijiii ainbiii) ijiia itcmiayala
(Icdamlugujua, ginlugni i»a{^kajiiii ;
mtl allhuuiili ami
Giiilil yaa tagainiM>;^-la hiii amltiiiyijiia hi doniiio }iuliii('<giia, liu
(looino pDguiiunyiin;
)tml ntrtfi hlrsn
Tiigainucgjiia guilii iisiiualicl kcaiuuu't r (Iccuinyiino , giiilii yaa
t'vil
liiii ambinyi yaa ganildiogpca iiagkaudumuu.
Lastly, in 'Mi" uortli lutitudo, tlio laii;^ua<;(3 of'"' Sau Luis
llJici/, wl)ich is Vuiiia, is succeeUocl by that ol' San Luis
I'liisjtOj wiiich is Capistrano.
I eoiicludo, tbini, that tlio Yuina lan;^ua<4e bolon;;s to tbo
Loiitliern parts of At'fr and tho nortliorn })art of (//</ ('alifornia.
Of recent notices of any of the lan^uajics of Ohl ('ali-
loiuia, CO nomine, I know none, hi tht; Mithridates the in-
toniiation is pre-eminently scanty.
Accordinfj to the only work whieli I have examined at
lii'st-hand, tlie Nachriclilcn von tier Anirricnnisvlicn ///i//>/nsii
\(iiliforni('n (Mannheim, 1772; in the jMithridatis, I77:h, tho
aiionynious author of whi(di was u Jesuit missionary in the
liiiiddlo ])arts of tho Peninsula, the lauj;ua<^(.':i of (.)ld Cali-
1 lornia were —
1. The Waikiir , spoken in several dialeits.
2. The IJshili.
3. The Laijinnon
4. The Cochinii, north, and
5. The Pcricu, at tlie southern extr(;mity of the ])eninsula.
H. A probably new form of speech used by some tribes
visited by Linck.
This is what wi; learn from what we call the Ma'm-
lioini account; tlie way in which the author expresses him-
self beinp^ not exactly in tli(> form Just exhiltited , but to tlie
f'tfect that, besides the Walkur with its dialei'ts, there were
live others.
The Waikur Proper, the langua<i:e which the author inider
* l"ur an i-xccptiou to this stntcnient si-i' tlic luiiiiirks at the iinl ut'
llif Voliiuie. (,185».I
23
:}r)i
o\ mi; l.VMil \tii;s or NnuiIIKUN, UKSIKKN,
I
nutlc'(? was nio^t cspcc^iiilly ('n;;n;;('(l on, and whirli ho savs
that h(! knew sut'ticitaitly tor his |)uri)os<'s as a uiissiuiiarv,
is th(r hm^iia^^c of the middh! part ot' tho pcninsuhi. Mow
I'ar the lltshiti, and Layaninii wcrt* diah^cts ot it, how t'arthcv
W(!i'(i scparat*! sMl)stantiv(! hui<;na;;(!s , is not very chjarly cx-
pri.'sscd. The writer had I'tshis, and lltsldpnjcs, and At-
»cliinu\s in his mission, "thorou^-hly distinrt trihos — hiiiirr
ixrsr/iirt/nic I'n/c/./rin.''* N(JV(!rth(!h!s,s h(( always speaks as it'
tho Waikur ton;;n(! was sufticicnt for hi.-> purposes. On tin'
other iiand, the lltshiti is es[)(!(ially nuMitioncMl as a separati-
lan^uaj^e. Adcdunji^ makes it a form of tiio Waikur; as he
docs tin! Layamon, and also the ('(»ra and Aripo. Tlion
there eonujs a population called //v/. probably the I'icos or
Ficos of Ha^ert, another authority for these parts. Ar'
these, tho sixth popidation of the MannlnMrn account, tln'
unknown tribes visited by Linck V 1 think uot. Tiny art'
mentioned in another j)art of the book as liinnn.
To tho names already mentioned
1. Ika, W. Utshipuje,
'1. L'tshi, 1. Atselume,
add
'). Paurus, S). Mitsheriku-tamais,
(). Teakwas, 10. Mitshcriku-t(!arus
7. T(!enoujibebos , 11. jNIitsheriku-ruanajercs,
8. Angukwares,
and you have a list of the tribes with which a missionary
for those parts of California where the Waikur languages
prevaihid, came in contact. Altogether they gave no more
than some r)00 individuals, so miserably scanty was the po-
pulation.
The occupancies of these lay chiefly within tho Cochiini
area, which I'oached as far south as the parts about Loretto
in 2(i" north latitude; tho Loretto langiuige being tho La-
yamon. This at least is the inference from the very short
table of tho Mithridatcs, which, however little it may toll
us in other respects, at least informs us that the San Xavicr,
San Borgia, and Loretto forms of speech were nearer akin
to each other than to the Waikur.
Enolish. St. XAvii;ii. S. liouciA. Louktto.
sky juiibiiynjult aiulicink
('(irlh aiiict ainate-giiaiig
fire usi ussi
man taimiia taiaa tannna ti.
fal/ii'r kiikka iliani kcuiubi
son uisaliam tsliaiiu.
AVaikik.
tercreka-datciiili.n.
(lateiiiha.
.\M» CKMUM, AMi:i:ir.v.
:j.")5
Tlio HJiort comiiositums of llcrvas (;;ivcMi in tlio ^(itliri-
ilatcs) hIiow tlic sMiiic.
TilK W'aikih. - Tliis is the l!in;;ua;,f(' of wluit I liavo
,all<>(l tlio Miiiiiiliciiii ac'coniit, namely tli(> aiionynioiis work
if a .losuit niissionaiy of tli<j W'aikur coinitrv piiltlislicd at
iMaiMiliciiii.
It j^ivcH UM tlio fojiowiiij^ spetiiiieus — W'uikiir aiul (It-r-
liimn:
ii a missionary
ikur languages
gave no more
iity was the po-
in tlio Cocliiiiii
s about Lorettd
being tlio La-
the very sliurt
ttlo it may toll
he ISan Xavier,
;ro nearer akin
kt'|te-(l.ire, tekprek.i'lateinbi dai:
^tllSI
r I'tilcr (jrltixfi'iir A'/v/ </« hist;
ei-i I
Wli
lu
It ililS
akatiiike-|»u-nie;
('r/»rnurti iillr tn'nli'H,
ik;irrak(>-itu-iMe ti tscliii
liihc/i
dill' ircnti'u I J' III mill:
iiiu gracia-ri aciiiiK' cure
tekorekadatenibi t^ili
iif'iii
ijniliii o fliiss hiilii'ii ti'i nini irir i/rhni/nir KnI
11 til I;
cin
Jcltarrakeiiii
ti
V
jaiip
(bit
einiia
//;• (» iliiss (/I'/inrsiimrn wrrili'ti I\li'iisrlirti allr lii'i'r
inr
i(^ ei jebarrnker<' aeiia kt'-a;
////■ tji'/inrsiiini'ii drnln'n si'i/tiil ,
^ipccun
imsi'r
tit.
1
Sjti'is
kepe
II lis
Ken
ji'lti'
le
jatii]
airsrr
KriL
uiitairi
litij :
ite kuitseliarake lei tseliio kepeeiiii ataeaniara
mis
vi'rzi'lic
ilii und
iinsi'r
/{<
nSi'S ,
lae knitscliarrakero cute tscliio eavapo atukiara keperiijake
il'W
ri'rzi
hni
uur
iiii'h die
lit
tUt'S
litis f/llltl,
;ite tikakaiiiba tei tseliie
m
hi'lfc
cuvuniora
dii mid:
eate
)/'((,
lli'ti iiwrdeti Nii'lil n'ir
lie
rltras
ilnkiara;
hoses ,
i'po knkunja pe atacara tseliio. Amen.
'()(.V
hi'schulzi' von linseii
iitid.
Atiu'ti.
Waiki-k.
'reka-(biteinlia.
\M
eiiil)a.
Ei
'I'utau
( ;ate
Pete
inu.
Tuc.-iva
The compound Ivhvtcha-dalvmhi = brtil hiiid —-= shy ■■ - licm'cii.
To this very poriphrastie Paternctstrr wo may add tho
lowing fragments of the W'aikur conjugation: —
anmk
virore
ego liido,
III liidis.
ille liidil.
lilts liidiimis.
I'lts ludilis.
iUi liidiitil.
2a*
350
(tN Tin: I.ANCl'Aor.S or wk.stkkx, xoutiikkn,
1?
juiuikiririkori = <
Be
Ei
Tntau
( "iitc;
J'ct('
1 iicava
Amukiriino =
Ainukiri tci := lude.
Aimikiri tu = ludile.
Bo-ii
Ei-ri
Tutiluri
Ciit('-ri
Tucavii-ri
ego lust.
In Itisisti.
tile lusif.
nos litsimiis.
vos Ittsislis.
illi luseruiil.
litderc.
•ainxikiririkiirikarii =
/ wish I hud not plaifrd.
Thou dr.
Ife dr.
ff'e ixr.
Ye dy,'.
They dt'.
Of the Pcrk'ii spoken at tlie south extremity of the pcnln-
suhi, 1 know no specimens.
We now turn to that part of the Yuma area which lies
ah)iig the course of the Gila, and more especially the parts
alonj.;' the Cocoinaricopa villages, of wliicli one porti(»n ot'
th(; occupants speak a language belonging to the Yuma, the
other one belonging to the Pima class.
This latter leads us to the languages of the northern pro-
vinces of Mexico —
!S0N(3RA AND SiNALOA.
For these two provinces, the languages for which we have
specimens fall into live divisions : —
j. The Tima.
2. The Hia(/ui.
3. The TunAii.
4. The Tauahumaka.
5. The Coka.
That the Pima group contains the Pima Proper, the Opata.
and the Eudeve, may be seen from the j\[ithridates. Tliat
the language of the Papagos, or Papago-cotam , is also I'iiiia,
rests upon good external evidence. Whether the speech of
the Ciris, and poi)ulation of the island of Tiburon and tlic
parts op[)osite, be also Pima, is at present uncertain; thoujili
not likely to be so long, inasmuch as I believe that Mr.
J»artlett, the IJoundary ('onnnissioner, is about to puhlisli
samples, not only of this, but of the other languages of
SoHora.
West of the Pima lies the Tarahiimara . and south of it
the lliacpii, succeeded by the Tubav and Cora of ISinaloa.
ANH fKNTWAT. AMF.ltlf'A.
3:
lad not plai/rd.
;ty of the pcnin- \
\e northern pro-
whieh we liavo
)per, the Opnta.
Tlie following Patornosters of these four languages may
Ibc compared with the Opata dialect of the Pima. The words
that, by appearing in more than one of them, command
inir attention and suggest the likelihood of a closer relation-
ship than is indicated in the ^Nlithridates, or* elsewhere, are
I in italics.
Opata.
Titmo mas /f*/7?«'acacliigiia raramc:
.tmii tcguiv santo a;
Imo reino tamr iiiacto;
Ilinadeia iguati tcri'pa atiia togniacaeliivrri;
IChiama tamo guacD v(mi tu/nn luiir;
Guataino noavcre lamo cai naiihnii aca api tamo ucavcre /owoopagiia;
(ilia cai lanii' taotitiKhiro ;
I'ai naidoni cliignadu — • Apita cacliia.
lIlACiUI.
iVom-achai /fjv'-capo calccamc;
Che-clievasu yoyorvva ;
Itou piopsana cm yaoiahua;
y.m hdrrpo in buyaj)o t/n/iun amaiitc (Irvrrapn'fj vocnpo (inniia hciui;
Machuvoi/ow-bnareu yciu ilnm -,\mivti-ilo)n :
Esoc alulutiria ca-aljitou-anccau itcpo soc alulutiria cliciii ihnn
vol I prim;
Cai/om butia Imonacuclii cativiri botaua ;
Aimn iVom-yerotua.
TuuAR.
//r-canar /rgrmuicarichna catcmat:
Imif ^'j^muarac inilituraba toocliiqualac ;
Imit hucgmica carinlto bacacliinassil'aguin ;
Iniil avamunarir cchu nauagualac iiiio cuigan aiiio uacliic /ryuuio-
carichori ;
Jlc cokuatarit, essemor taniguarit , iabbo ;/»/Vaai;
//(' tataeoli ikiri atzoiiuia ikirirain ilr liacachin cfilc ktiof^iiia iiaTo-
gua cantem;
Caisa He nosnm bacatatacoli ;
Hacachin ackiro muetzc rac iti\
m
Tauaiit.ma.ia.
Tdiiii lumo, niamu regn'i guaini j^atiki;
Taini noiiu'rnjo mu regiia;
Telimoa rckijona;
'■' 'I'his convoys jui iii.'ifhM(ii,Mti' iiDliuii. ItiiscliiiiiuiM Itas (liinwii tlir ('iir.i
■iml 'J'lirfiliiiniarii icdniicctrcl liy Adclimi;) iiitu tlu^ saiin; riass with llii;
ri'peguana and Viui'ic, ii'in-fseiitod liy tin; Culiia. — .SVf .V'>^' i I'Srv.li.
3oS
ON Tin; i,AN(ii .\<ii:.s or noktiikkn, wksikun,
Ir !•
Tfimi negnanijo iiiu jclaliki lionn;i , gnctsliiki , mapij liatscliiho ro-
j^U('<;a jfuami ;
Taini mitiitii};n hipel)a;
Tami guocanjti Inmi jjnikcliki, inatanu' liatsdiibc reguoga tainl
gueeaiijo ))Utso tami guikcjaincko ;
Ko (a faint .-atiijo;
Tt'logatigoirioko iiiedika liiila. .Imrn.
(JolJA.
T<i yiw\)\)Q. hifisihoix p('tli('l)o;
Clicrihuaca oiia teaguarira;
(Miomcaliualtciii tnhi'tni (to us) oiia cliianaca ;
(nioatinastcni ciia jcvira iyo (a.s) cliianacataitoan tup up /rt/jalma ;
Kii ta liamiilt (hrvad) cii to liulina taliotz(! roj rujcv(! iliii- llit-iliiij)
ta taa;
Huatamiiraoa ta xanacan ti'ttip itealiino tataliuatauui titaxnna-
cantt! ;
Ta vaolirc, tc-nteai liavolioreni xaiiacat lictzc huabachreaca tocai
tal
icini intaliuau:a t.i:i eu cue.
Clio-ouliuataliua.
Witli tlioso (iiid our data'^- , l)ut not our lists of dialoct.^
{lie names ]\ruya, Oaa/ave. llcriu, Sicurnha, Xixlino, Top
111.
T(
'V
iiiuaiKi , aui
I A
caxGL*
all I)
,tl
Ih
joinj^, citluT m Jlcrvas, r)r clsc-
wlu'iv!, as applied to the ditlerent forms of speet'li of Sonimi
and ISin;Jou; to Avliich may bo added tlio Taliu, the Taeascji.
and the Aca-sea, whicdi is j)robal)ly the same word as Acaxoc.
as llninii is tli(! sanu; as \'uma, and /a([ue as Iliaqui, < >|
tlin (Juazfivo a partieular dialect is n-'vuKul as the Ahouio.
Add also the Zoe and Huitcolo, probably tho same as the lluitc.
"^riiat some of these «inrepresent(!d fin-ms of speech beloii!;
to the same class with the Pima, Iliacpii, ^c. , is nearly
certain. IIow many, however, do so is another question; it
may be that all are in the same i)r(.'dicament: it n:av ln'
only a tew.
Tho languag'os of
IMkciioacan.
These are -
I. TllK I'lUINDA.
2. TiiK Tauasca.
W. Tiik ( )r()Mi.
Tli(! last will be considerecl at oni"(>, and dismiss(;d. IMorc
has been written on tlu; Otomi than any otln r lan;^ua<;(' ctf
these parts; tlu; propter IMexican not excepted. It was oli-
'•. I''(>r ;i iinticf i)t' Miilliivinfin soc Ididwi};. wlio nicntiuiis an Aiic aii'l
I'ictiiiiiMry. 1 liiivc seen iio s|i('fiiiH'ii-i of it. ( IH,")',)].
iSIKUN
A\r> rilMK.M. VMKKir.V.
359
i!ipu liatsclilhc IP- ■ fcrved by Naxera that it was vionoAijIluhic rather tlian ])(>Uj-
ijnlht'lic , as so many of th(! Aiucrii-aii hiii<i;u.'i}^cs arc, with
onicwhat doubtiul propriety, (IciKdiiinated. A jMexit-an
libc rcguoga tnini H liinj:,uafi;c , witli a (Jhiuesc cliarac-tcristic, couhl scarcely fail
to suggest comparisons. Hence, tlio first operation on the
Otoini was to disconnect it from the lan;^na;;es of th(! New,
;ind to connect it with those of the Old World. With his
accustomed caution, (Jallatin satisfies himself with statin^^
what others liavi; sj.ii(l, his own opinion evidently hein^- thnt
the relation to the ('liines(! was one ol' analogy rather than
iit'Hnity.
Doubtless this is the sounder vi(!W
iiv three series of comj)arisons made by the presmit writer,
The first shows that the Otonii, as compart^il with the i
d
md one connrnuM
fii
d
n tup U]i /rt/>ali(ia;
ujeve ihic lln-dm/j
uatiiuui titaxiuia-
labaclireaca tvxin
lists of diahicts;
no-
Xix
ximo, I opia,
Ilervas, or elsn-
;peeeh of Soimra
HI , the '^Pacasca.
word as Acaxoc,
as lliaqui. (•!
as the AlioiiK'.
une as the lluitc.
if speech beluiii,'
iSic. , is nearly
♦ her question; it
iient: it n:av lie
lismiss(!d. IMorc
h( r lan^^ua^c i»t"
ed. It was olt-
itiuiis ail .liic aii'l
llOs
ic lan;iua'!'es ot
kSia , c/i /nassc
las several words
yllab
ill common. I'ut the second (jualili(is our intV'renccs, by
>liowinj;' that tlx; ]\[aya , a lan^;ua<;(! more distant from (Jhina
than the Otonu , and, by means inordinately monosyllabic in
its structure, has, there or thereal)(»uts, as many. The third
t'orbids any separation vi' tlu! Otomi from the other lani;ua-
^os of America, by showing- that it has the ordinary amount
(if miscellaneous affinities.
In respect to the Cliinese, Sn-., the real (piestion is not
whether it has .vo //nin// a/'/i/it//rs trilh Ihc Ofmiti , but whether
it has more iiffiiiilica nilh lite (Honti Ihan trilh llic Maya or inn/
iilJtcr Aiucricttn himjuaiir ; a mattitr which we nmst not in-
v('sti;;,atc without remendierini;- that .sov/r (litrerem-e in fa-
vour of the Otomi is to be expected, inasmuch as two lan-
guages with short or mono syllabic^ words will, from tin; very
lact of the shortness ami simplicity of their constituent ehs-
monis, hav(! more words alike than two jiolysyllabie forms
of speech.
The fact, however, which most afTects the place of the
Otomi language is the monosyllabic diaracter of other Anu;-
ricau languages, c. y. the Athabaskan and tlu; Attacapa.
As these are lik(dy to be the subject of some future in-
vi'stigation, I lay the Otomi, for the ])r«'sent, out of consi-
deration; lindting myscH to the expression of an oj)inion, to
the effect that its philological affiniti(>s are not very different
from what its geograi)hical position suggests.
Of tlu!* IMrinda and Tarasca w(! have; grannnars, or rather
jrrammatical sketches; abstracts of which, by (iallatin, may
he found in his Notes on the Semi-civilized Naticms of
Mexico, \'ucatan, a!id Central America, in the first volume
' Milv of tlic I'aiasca iM.V.ti,
300
o.\ Tiir, hANtii'.\(i!;s (»r NditiiiKKN, \vKSTi;i;\,
of tlio Transactions of tlio American Kthnological Society. j
Tlio Ibllowin",^ are from tluj ^lithridates.
PiRINDA PaTKUNOSTER.
Cabutumtaki ke cxjoclinri pininto;
Nil)otoachatii tucatlii nitnliutcallu ;
rantoki liacacovi nituljutea pinintc ;
rarojnki nirilioiita manicatii ninnjami proiiininto ;
lioturiinogai (laimimcc tuitacovi cliii ;
Exf^oinundicovi botiiiicliocliii, kicatii pracaVovi kuecntunnmdijo
lioturicliocliijo;
NiantPxocliicliovi rumkuecntuvi inmvocliocliii ;
]\lorij)achltovi ciiincnziinn togni.
Tucatii.
Tauasca Patkkn'osteu.
Tata ucliavori tukirc liacaliini avamlarn;
Santo arikevo tnclievoti hacangurikua;
Wctzin anilarcnoni tuchcvcti ireclicckiia;
Ukuarcvo tuclicvcti wckua iskin; avandaro , na luunengnca istu
uiiuMifj^avc ixu exclicrcndn.
Ifuchacvcri curiiida linn|^anaii |)akua iiitzciitzini yam;
Santzin wcpovachoras liuchaovcri liatzingaknarcta, izki luudiaiiac
wopocacuvaiiita lir.ca Imcliavcri liat/ini^akiiaocliani ;
Ca liastzin t(>rulitazoina teruniguta pcrakua liiiubo. Iscvongtia.
It now becomes convenient to turn to the parts to tlie oast
of California, viz.
Utah and New Mexico.
In IJtali tlio philology is simple, all its forms of speech being
1. Athabaskan;
2. Parluca; or
:{. Pueblo.
1. '['he Navalio, aloniz,- M'itli the J'^'corilh-i of New Mexico,
the Hoopali of California, and Apatch of California, Nuw
Mexico and Sonora, is Atha(piskaM.
Knglish, Xavaiio. Apakii.
initn tennai ailcc.
woman estsonnoe ectzan.
ht'fnf (nil/) //»t/,o('tsiu srrzrr.
hair {inij) IiiiX/a'v .sws^a.
face (my) hinuwo .stvceuoc.
ear (my) A»tjah AWtza.
eye (my) //Miniah slccda.
nose (my) A/'tchili .vcftzce
AND rKNIItM, AMKUirV.
'M\
o. [scvongiia.
arts to the oast
of speech being
Knolisic.
N'AVAiin.
ArMcif,
mouth Out/) hiiZAiu *7/('/'(la.
tiintiiii' f/iit/) //»/tso s/trrdi\rr
tmtthlmi/) hnr'^o s/iri'<^u.
sky
sun ..
7)1(1(01
slar .
CCViwl
Ml
onoi sk«M'iii)U.
7
c'liitk
klaihoniii cImiku.
s(mh Sims.
I'hcen-f/fj (M'ska.
ttif/hl khii-yo da.
liff/it Imasc'cii-r/ff skci'
rtiifi itahcltinh naiinsteo.
sfidir
/mil
irr
yas zalis.
iicclo Iicj'loah.
k(tnh
wOll.
nail.
n'dli'r tniili t
sliifii' tsai /cy/.ay
one
l/ro
tlalice talisc
iia
(h
rcr
hk
tanli.
('('
iia
tail.
Ilk.
The Utah with its allied dialects is I'adnca, /. r. a mem-
ber of the class to which the Shoshoni, Wihinast, and Cu-
manch laiif^uages belon^^
.'{. The Moqui is one of the languages of
TiiK PuKHLd Indians of Nkw Mkxico.
The comparative! civilization of the PuebKt Indians has
always attracted the attention of the ethnoIogisL Until late-
ly, however, he had but a minimum amount of trustworthy
information concerning either their habits or thr-ir language
He has now a fair ann)unt of <l(i(a for both. For j)!iilol(tgical
purposes he has vocabularies for six (probably for all) of them.
Of the Pueblo langimges two belong to the drainage of
tli(^ Kio (Vdorado and four to that of tli(! Ifio (irande. Of
these two divisions tli(! former lies the fartli(>st west, and,
of the two Colorado Pueblos, the most western is that (d'
The Moqui. — The Momii vocabulary Avas ])rocured by
Lieut. Simpson from a >.lo(|ui Indian who happened to be;
at (Jhelly.
Tlir Zuni country lies in ^^f)" m)rth latitude, to the south
and east of the Moqui, and is probably divided by tlu; Sierra
lie '■^uni from
The .Iromu, or Lufjunit , tlu; most southern of the Pueblos
of the IJiit (irand(!. Mortli of the Aeonni area lies that of
The Jvmcz, on the San Josef.
362
ON riii; i.AN»!rA(iKS or noutiikkx, \vi;sti:i;n,
i
Tlic two that still stand over lie on the main strcjiui of
the Hio (jiando itself. Thoy are —
The Tcsuquc; and
The Taos or Picuri. — The northern boundaries of the To-
siujue seem to be the southern ones of Tftos. Connect those
Pueblos with the town of Taos, and the Tesuque with Santa
Fe, and the ordinary maps j^ive us the geo{,^raphy.
The philo^)gical affinities of the I'ueblo hmpua^es scarcely
coincide with the f^cographical relations. The Moqui lies
far west. Laying this tlien out of the question , the thrcM-
that, in their «-utward signs, most strike the eye in tabl(\s,
as agreeing with each other, are the Laguna, th(! .Jemoz,
and the Tesuque. The other two that thus outwardly agree
are the Taos and the /uni, — two that are not in the mot-t
immediate geographical juxtaposition.
What is meant by the "outward signs that most strike
the eye on tables"? This is shown in the following tables: —
KNCil.ISll. Zl M. TlCSI (^IK.
head oshoqui/z/icr j)tit.
hair Xxynhwec jio.
ear lali jo//// /</'<• ovcz.
eye toiiJi//«r6' tzic
iiuse \\iA\'A\\hu)iee Iicu.
mouth i\\\\\\\\ilinnee so.
Iiitiffue hoiii/iuee hiie.
tnitth oi\hnnh>vee. niuai.
The following are some of the most patent miscellaneouti
affinities: —
Knylish, sun.
Tcsu(jue, /loh.
.lenioz, pnh.
EiujUsh, niottn.
T('su(|ue , poni/e.
.Fenu'/ , pdhtth.
'J'aos, pun/Hih.
^lixpii, muj/tih.
Kiujlish , uiai\.
Tt'suqiic, S(ii/eu.
.Icnicz , liihhitiieiKth.
Ku;i/ish , wi'iuan.
T('su(|uc . her.
Ziuii, nearr.
K/ujlish , wife.
T('.sii(|ue , tHirrso.
.Iciiii'Z, neohnj/.
K/ujlish, hoy.
T('su(|U(' , ti/iiie.
.Iciiicz , (tiiniih.
/'Juf/h'sh , fore head.
'i"('sn((ue , sieeartih.
JiMgiMia , en/ihuj/.
/'Jiitj/ish , f'ai'c.
'l'('siu(U(', e/iiiiif/.
I.apmin , ho/rah.
/•Jii/lish , eye.
T('sn([U(' , I half.
.1 cuii'z , Sdi'ch.
AN'r» ri:xriiAT, amkuha.
303
lain strcr.in of
•ios of the T(!-
Connect tlic^o
ue with Santa
apliy.
iia^os scarcely
jc Moqni lies
ion , the throe
oyo in tabh\s,
a, tli(! .Joniez,
twardiy agree
)t in the most
\i most strike
ling tables: —
miscclh\neou«
Untjlis/i , leotli.
Tt'siKjiic , wuiih.
Taos , iniii'n-n(ihrn/iiii/.
M<>((ui , iniHift -— iinMith.
Enalish, cliiii.
Tt'su(|no, slinUhitk.
TiiDs , c/iii/lniii/iai.
Hm/lis/i, hiuid.
KtKjIish , <leer.
Tcsu
(Mie
}><iliU'
JeiiH'/-, iiitltali.
Knijlislt , riUtlcsiiake
TeKiKiue, /iiii/i/o/i.
Tfiits , /ti/imirn.
•I
estunK
mall.
.Iciiiez , mnhUsh.
.M<)((nl , III Ilk I II ij.
.AI(i((ni , iiiii/iliil: -= linger,
Knijlislt , Itrea.st.
Knijlisli , eat.
'IVsn
(lue, mils
mil.
Jiaguim , iiiiis.
Tans , iiiiisrriiiili.
.feme/,, iiiniiiisiili.
Z
mil. iiiiisiil
(•su([U(
/ii'iili.
h'lif/lisli ,
'resu(|U(
lire.
, lull.
Jeiuez, livunli.
liaguiia, i/Hiiisl pin/.
Tans , /iiiliiiltliii/iHii/iiriiini/.
-Ifiiie/. , itinj-ln.
L'tali , pitij.
'V\\ii ^loqui, wliicli is not to bo se})arateil from the other
I'uebh) hmguagcs, lias, out of twenty-one words compared,
oiglit coinciding with th(! Utah.
Neither are there wanting words common to the Pueblo
languages and those of the Athabaskan Navalios, Jecorilhis
and A patches.
l-!iii/lisli , (leer.
Navalio , /iiii/cr.
Jccorllia , /iiii/ii
.leilK'Z , jKlluill.
l'Jii//isli , cat.
NavaJK
ei-oni
III use.
, iinissiit
T('su((ii(' , musiili.
ia!>'iiiia
\(
IIUIS.
Km 1 1 is I I . . ..til.
Xavalio . III'.
.Iceorilla , iiuji.
'ri'sut|U»' , null.
Hiiijlisli , man.
Navaim , li'nnnij.
.Tecnrilla, iiiilinj.
'I'esiKpi • , siii/i'n.
.1 enit'z , (i/liliiini'iiitli.
luii/lisli . iimnlli.
Navaliti , lin-zzni/.
.IceniillM , li>t-::i/.
'l\'S[[\^\\i' , slin.
Of these the first two mav be borrowed. In
Ka
NZ \.S
the languages are Jni/ittlm, and Slii/cnnr, .'dready noticeil
and CnmancU , which is Paduca
Tlic I'tiih
IS mus
ah.
3(11
ON llli: I.ANdlAdKH OK Noll'IIIKUN, WKSTKKX ,
For tlio Kihuinj wo want spociiiuMia. In
Nkhhaska
tlicy arc S/ini.r, already noticed, and I'a/rni, allied tu the
hiccarcc. Kanzas leads us to
Tkxas.
It is convenient in a notiee of the lan^nafjes of the Stat(!
of T(!xas to Itear in mind its early, as well as its present
relations U> tli(; United States. In a eountry where the spread
of the |K)j)ulation from the other portions of the Union has
hecn so rapid , and where the oeeupaney is so complete*, we
are j)repared to expect but a small proportion of ahori«;ine.s.
And such, upon tlie whole, is the case. The displacement
of the Indian tribes of Texas has been <;reat. Even, how-
ever, when ]\Iexican, Texas was not in the category of tlic
older and more orij;inal portions of INIexico. It was not
brought under the rnjlmv of the missionaries, as wc may
see l>y turninj; to that portion of the Mithri(hites which
treats (»f the parts west of the ]\rississii»pi. The references
jiero arc to Dupratz, to I^ewis and ('larue, to (Charlevoix,
to French and Kne:lish writers rather than to the great au-
thority for the other parts of S[)anish America — llervas.
And the information is less i)recisc and com])letc. All tliis
is because Texas in the earlier part of its history was, in
respect to its exploration and description, a part of Louisiana,
(and, as such, French) rather than a part of Mexico, and
(as such) Spanish.
The notices of Texas, in the IVIithridates, taken alouj,'
with our subscfjuent ihda, are to tho ett'ect that («) the
Cafhlo, (h) the Adaizc or Afhtlii, (c) the Alhihiiiui ^ and (rf)
the ChoMdk ar(> the prevailing laneuages; to whicdi may he
added a few others of minor importaiu'e.
The details as to the distribution of the subordinate forms
of speech over these four leading languages are as follows: —
a. The Nandakoes, Na1)ada{dies, Alich (or Eyish), and
Ini or Tacdii are expressly stated to be VmUht; and, as it
is from the name of the last of these that the word Texas
is derived, w(! have satisfactory J'vidence that ^nme mend)ers,
at least, of the Caddo family arc Ivuhj (tnti orif/imilhj Texiaii.
b. The ^'atassi, Katcdiitoches, Jthiizc (or Aihii/c) , Nacog-
doches, and K(^yes, belong to the Caddo confederacy, but
without speaking the Caddo language.
('. The ( -araneouas, the Alhicdinis, the Apelusas, the Mayes
speak dialects of the same language.
ri;uN',
ANlt t 1",\ lit AI, WIMlli A.
;{(;.')
(I. Tlio Tunicas speak the sumo lan{»ua<:;c as the Cluictahs.
■| Conccniiii"^ tlic i>liilolo;;y ot" tlio Waslias, tlio JUmUcs, tin;
alliod tu tli(; I Aco8SC»aw.s, aiul tli<: (/auccs, no statuinuiits are mudo.
It is obvious that the iut'to'ination supplied hy the Mithri-
tliites is measured by the extent ot' our knowledge ot tho
lour languages to Avhii-ii it rei'er.s.
Ot" these, tiu! (JhoUtah, whieh Adelung ealls tho ^fobilian,
is the only on(! i'or whieh the Mithridates itself suppliers, or
could supply, ^p(,'eiln(;ns ; the other three bein<;- unrepresen-
ted by any sample whatcfver. Hence, to say that the Tachi
was Oadilo, that the Vatassi was Adalii, or that tho Caran-
coua was Attacapa, was to give an instance, in the way of
I'Xplanation, of the ohsciirum per o/jsciirtus. Since; the publi-
cation of the ^Mithridates , how(;v(!i-, we have g(»t samples of
fdl three — (Jaddo, Adahi, and ^Vltacapa — so that our stan-
dards of coinj)arison are imj)rov(!d. lluy are to be found
in a tabulated form, and in a form convenient for collation
;uul comparis«»n in both of <iallatin's papers. They were;
all ccdleeted before the anne'xation of 'lexas, and they aj)-
pear in the papers just referred to as L«tuiHian.a, ratlna- than
truly Texian, languages; being connnon to the two areas.
Of the works and papers written upon Texas since it b(!-
camc a iield of observation for Knglish and American, as
opposed to French and Spanish observers, the two on whiih
the present writer, when he treated of the subject in his
work on the V'^arieties of Mankind, most especially , -and per-
haps exclusively relied, wore tho well-known work of Iveii-
nedy on Texas, and a MS. with which he was favoured by
Mr. Jiollaert, specially limited to the ethnology of the State.
Of this MS. a short abstract is to be found in the lieport
of the British Association for the Advancement of Science
for the year 1840, made by j\Ir. liollaert himself.
The later the notice of Texas the grt-ater the j)rominenee
filven to a tribe of which nothing is said in the ^lithridat"s;
viz. the Cunutnch. As late as 1814 we had nothing bevond
the numerals and a most scanty MS. list of words to IcU
us what the Cumanch language really was. These, however,
were suflicient to show that its ai'iiiiiti(!s were of a somewhat
remarkable kind, vi/. with the Shoshoni, or Snake, tongues
of the southern parts (d' Oregon*. In Mr. liollaerts notice
i of tlie State
as its present
ere the spread
the Union has
) complete, we
of aborigines.
2 displacement
Even, how-
ategory of tho
>. It was not
s, as we may
iridates which
riie references
to (Charlevoix,
tho great an-
•ica — llervas.
leto. All this
i story Avas, in
t of Ijouisiana,
f j\rcxico, and
taken along
; that («) the
',v//u/, and {<1)
vhich may ho
ordinate forms
as follows: —
• Eyish), anil
'o; and, as it
e word Texas
iiiiiiw UKnnbers,
/itidlhj Texian.
ddf/c) , Nacog-
ifederacy, but
as , the Mayes
* "On tlic Lanjruajjfcs of tlio Urro'Dii 'I'rrritorv." \\y \{. (J. I,!itii;im.
.M. 1». Kciid bfforc the Htliiiulo^'ical Socictv, l")i-c. l«ll. — .Vo/f.
:uu>
»i>
ON I III: i.\N<;i Afif.s ur NoiMiii'.KN, ui;sii;ux,
tlio (!nniancli<'8 nrn divided into tlircc! hcctionH: (1) tlic Cu
niUMfli or .)(!t}in, (2) tlu; Liiiiipiinuk, and ('{) tlic 'rniiili,!,
and a list of no leas than thirty-Hvc (ttlici* trilios i'oil(»\vs tliis
ilivision, .soiik! ot" tlicHo Ix'in^- said to Im? wliolly extinct,
sonic ])artially s(»; sonn; to bo more or less ( 'unnimdi , s'lmc
to bo otli(!r than ( 'unianch.
Tho tendency of the Mitiirid.ites is to «'iv(! jironiineiice tn
tlio (.'addo, Attacapa, ami Adahi ton;;uos, and to incline; the
investi^'ator, wh(Mi de;ilin<;- with the; other tornis oi' speech,
to aak how far they art; eonnectod with ono of tliest! three.
Tiie tendency of the writcjvs hist-nann^l is to «;iv(! i»roniineiice
to the C'Unianch, an»l to su^-^est tho ((uestion: How far is
this for that) form ot speeeli Cuinaneh or othor than Cii-
nianeliV
Working with tho Mitliridatos, tin; MS. of Mr. Ilolhiert,
and Mv. Kennedy's volunu! on Texas before nie, I tind that
tho list of Texian Indians whiidi these authorities justitied
ip.o in })nblishin<; in IMS, contained (I) (Joshattas, (2) To-
wiaehs, Towakenos, Toweeas, and. Wacos, (I{) J.ipans or
Sipans, (I) Alieho or Kyish, (5) Ac(»s8esaws; ((]) Navaosos,
(1) Mayes, (S) Cancos, (*)) 'r»nicahiias, (M>) Tuhuktukis, (II)
Unata(|ua8 or Anadarcos, (12) Mascovic^, (KJ) Tawanis or
lonis, (14) Wic'o, V Waco, (15) Avoyelles, (16) Washilns,
(17) Ketchi, (IS) Xaraniones, (H)) (yaicaehos, (2i\) liidias,
(21) Caddo, (22) Attacapa, (23) Adahi; besides the (.'ar.in-
kahuas (of which tho (Ndvos arc made a branch) classcMl with
tho Attacapa, and not including certain Oherokces, (Uu)ctalis,
(Miikkasahs, and Sioux.
A ll'tisfiilii v(»cabulary, which will bo referred to in the
.secpiol, concludes the list of Texian langu{i;i;es known by
specimens.
At present, then, tho chief (luestion respecting tho j)hilo-
logy of Texas is one of distribution. (Jiven as centres to
certain groups
1. Tho Choctah,
2. The Caddo,
;j. The Adahi,
4. The Attakapa,
5. Tho Cumanch, and
0. The Washita languages,
liow do we arrange the tribcis just enumerated? Two works
help us hero: — 1. A letter from the Kx-jjresident linrnelt
to Schoolcraft on tho Indians of Texas. Date 1847. 2. A
Statistical Notice of the same by Jesse Stem. Datt; IS.')!.
Stems statistics run thus: —
A\l< (KNIKAI, .\Mi:iMi A.
;i(;7
Tkiiiks. Ni MIIKII-*,
'riiwiicarros \■^\
W.icus ll4(-J!Ki
Kfti'irics ;is\
ra.M.is Kih
Amlairns 'JO-J 47(1
luiii 1 1.0
'I'tnikawnyn II,')2
Wicliltas |(K)
l/ipaiis 500
Coiiiam-licH -JOjlMM)
u:iviu^ us sovcrni <>t' tlu; uhuioh that have already appcarcil;
;:ivin^ .also j^roat j)rouiinoiu'C to tlio (Juniiiiifhcs nimicrally
at least.
Ill Mr. Hiinutt's Lottfu* the torni Cut/dn is proniiiu'iit ; hut
\vlietli(!r it deiiot(! tlinl'adilo /iitit/iint/r, or iiuM'oly tli(! Caddo
iiiiifetU'nilion , is uncertain. Neither can I tind from tht; con-
text whether the statements respecting;' the Indians of the Caddo
connexion (for this is what wo must call it at present) are
made on the personal authority of the writer, or whether they
an! taken, eitlu :• directly or indirectly, fr(»m tim Mithridates.
The tm'in that liurnett uses is sfac/,' , his statenn-nt hein";;
that the Waco, the Tawacani, the Towiash, the Aynic, the
San Pedro Indians, the Nabaducho, and the Nacodocheets
ari! all both Texian in origin and Caddo in st(»c/,\
His oth(!r tribes are — •
1. The k'elchi: a small tribe on Trinity liivcr, hated by
tiio Cunnmchcs as sorcerers, and, perhaps, the same as —
2. The llilchi, once a distinct tribe, now assimilated with
their neighbours.
\\. The Tonkatvays , a separate tribe, of wliicli, however,
the distinctive characters are not stated.
Whatever may bo the exact details of the languages, dia-
lects, and subdialccts of Texas, the general outline is simple.
The Choctali forms of speech are anything but native.
They arc of foreign origin and recent introduction. So
arc certain Sioux and other dialects spoken within the Tex-
ian area.
The Cumanch is in the same predicament; though not,
perhaps, so decidedly. It belongs to the Paduca class, and
its affinities are with the Shoshoni and Wihinast of (Jregon.
The Caddo Proper is said to be intrusive, having been
introduced so late as 1819 from the parts between the great
Kaft and the Natchitoches or Rod liiver. 1 hold, however,
that some Caddo forms of speech must be indigenous.
IMAGE EVALUATION
TEST TARGET (MT-3)
1.0
I.I
Ui |2.8
| 50 "^
|56 |3^
2.5
2.2
1.8
1:25 1.4
1.6
-^ 6" —
►
V]
<^
c'l
V]
/W
.'^..'V
y
»^'
/
oj.
/A
Hiotographic
Sdences
Corporation
23 WEST MAIN STREET
WEBSTER, N.Y. M580
(716) 872-4503
C/jt
3G8
ON TJIK I.AN(iL'A<li;,S OF XOUTIIKirN , WKS IKliN ,
The Wilchila is proL.ably one of these: —
Kngm«h. Caddo. Witcihta.
head cundo ctsskaso.
hair bciunio doodsko.
eye iKH'kkochuu ki(hihkuck.
nose sol dutstititoo,
moutit uowoeso hjiAvkoo.
tungue (ickkotuiuia hutskec.
tooth ockkodotii awk.
o>ie whistc chorcho.
two hit rnitcli.
^hrce dowoli daub.
fotir peawoh dawqiiats.
five dissickka csquats.
six dunkkoe kolia.ss.
seven bissickka Iccopits.
eight dowsiekka kootope.
nine powcsiekka shcrchekeeite.
ten biuuali skedorash.
. To AdaJii lias already been noticed as being a conij)aia-
tively isolated language, but, nevertheless, a language with
numerous miscellaneous affinities.
The Allacapa is one of the pauro-syllabio languages of
America, by which I mean languages that, if not monosyl-
labic after the fashion of the langviages of south-eastern Asia,
liave the appearance of being so. They form a remarkable
class, but it is doubtful whether they form a natural one, /. e.
whether they are more closely connected with each other in the
other elements of philological affinity than the>y are with the
tongues not so characterized. They deserve, however, what
cannot be given in the present paper, a special consideration.
For the north-eastern districts of Mexico, New ]jeon, Ta-
maulipas, &c., i. e. for the ports between the Rio Grando
and Tampico, no language is known to us by specimens.
It is only known that the Cumanch dips deeply into Mexico.
So does the Apatsh.
A tribe, lately mentioned, that oftheLipans, is, perhaps^
Apatsh. ]iurnett states that they agree with the JMescaierD
and ISeratics of the parts about the Paso del Norte. For
these, however, we still want vocabularies iis nominibits.
Be the Lipan affinities what they may, it is clear that
both the Cumanch and Apatsh languages belong to a class
foreign to a groat part of the areas over which they are
spread — foreign, and (as such) intrusive — -intrusive, and
(as such) developed at the expense of some native language.
AM) CKNTKAI, A.MKKICA.
;i()0
ing a com para
That tlwi ori<iinal aroa of the hitter is that of the Navalios,
|jr(orilhis, lloopahs, Umkwas, Th'itskanai, and that tlieso
iifcupy the parts bctwoon tlie Algoiil^in and Eskimo fron-
tiers — parts as far north as tlie Arctic circle — lias ah'cady
been stated. ]S'o repetition, liowever, is su])erlluous tliat
;;ives defiuitude and familiarity to the very remarkahlc pha;
iiomena connected with the geogra})hical distriljntion of the
Athabaskans.
Neither are the details of the I'aduca area — the area of
the Wihinast, Shoshoni, Utah, and (Jumanch forms of spcch
— without interest. To the north of (.-alifornia, the Wilii-
n;ist; or \Vestern Shoshonis, are si parated from the J'acilic
Ijy a thin strip of .lacon and Kalapuya country, being suc-
ceeded in the direction of Utah by the Shoshonis ProjXM'.
Then follow the Bonaks and Hanij)iches ; the Shoshoni ai'ii-
nities of which need not be doubted, though the evidenc((
lit' them is still capable of improvement. The Utah of the
larts about Lake Utah is known to us by a vocabulary; and
uiown to be Cunjanch or Shoshoni — call it which you will.
1 call them all Padiica, from a population so namedby Pike.
Now, out of twenty-one words common to the Utah and
Moqui, eight are alike.
Again, the Shoshoni and Sahaptin have several words in
eommon , and those out of short vocabularies.
Thirdly, the Shoshoni and Wihinast, though spoken within
(comparatively) narrow limits, differ from each other more
than the several forms of the Cumanch, though spread over
;i vast tract of land.
The inference from this is, that the Paduca forms of
South Oregon and Utah arc in ailu; those of New Mexico,
Texas, and New Leon, &c. being intrusive. In respect to
these, I imagine that a lino drawn from the south-eastern
corner of the Utah Lake to the source of the lied or Salt
Fork branch of the River Arkansas, would pass through a
country nearly, if not wholly, Paduca; a country which
would lie partly in Utah, part I v in New Mexico, and ])arrly
in Kansas. It would cross ilie Rocky Mountains, or the
wfitcrshed between the drainages of the Colorado and the
Missouri. It would lie along a high and barren country.
It would have on its west the Navaho, IMoqui, and Ai)atsh
areas; on its east certain Sioux tribes, and (further south)
the Arapahos and Shyennes. It would begin in California
and end in the parts about Tampico*.
* For ii I'lill notice (if Texas soe liiiscliin.'nin's .Siiiiiplenieiitaiy Volunio;
hirst piiblished within the proseut year (_lH.')'.ly.
24
;j7o
ON TllK I,A\(il'A(:KS OT NOlli KKX, WKSTKIIX,
JMEXICO. — GUATIMALA.
The Cunianclios, on the very verge, or within the tropii s^
vex by tiicir prc(hitory inroads the Mexican states of Zaiai
teeas and Durango. Along with the Lipans they are tlu
sparse occupants of tlie liolson do j\[apimi. Along with tlir
Apaches they phindor tlie traders and travellers of ChihnlniaJ
For the parts about Tanipico the language belongs to the
Iluastcca branch of
The ]\Iaya. — The ]\Iaya succeeds the language just emi-j
merated on the cdsl. On the west, the Otonii , Pirinda, ami
Tarasca are succeeded by
The ]\[exican Proper. — But the IMaya and JMcxican Pin-j
per are languages of such importance, that the present pa})oil
Avill merely notify their presence in Mexico and C!entral
America.
The languages that, from their comparative obscurity, claiiiil
the attention of the investigator, are those which are ()llici\
than ]\[aya and other than ]\texican Proper.
Of these, the first succeeds the Huasteca of Huastecapniii
or the parts about Tampico; which it separates, or liolp.sl
to sej)aratc, from the northern branches of the INIaya Pro-I
per, being
The Totonaca of Vera Cruz, of which the following is|
the Paternoster; the German being that of the Mithridates.
Totonaca.
IJnscr Valer o im Himmel slcht
Qniuthitcauc uac tiayan Iniil;
(/emaehl hoch n>crdc dciu Nuhmc
Tacollalihuacahiianli o ini niaocxot;
komme dcin (rrich 'f)
Ni([niiniuauin o inintacacchi
gvthnn wcrdc dcin Willc
Tacliolahuaula o niin pahnat
w'lC wie hn Himmel
Cliolci ix cacnitict clialchix nac tiayau ;
nnsc7' Brut ,
O qn'in chouhcau lacalliya
unti (lib hcuie
ni(pxilaixriuiuh yauolmo ;
wts vergib nnsre Si'inde
(Jaquilaniatzaucaniuh qnintacallltcan
Cros
eome
The
the bo
chief
liin the tropicsj
states of Ziical
s they are tlu
Alon<;- with tlir
I's of Chilinhuaj
belongs to tlifij
^uage ju.st cmi]
, Pirinda, antj
d IMexican Pioj
ic present pajjoil
eo and (Central
obscurity, claiii^
wliich are ofhcif
>f Pluastecapaiii
-rates, or iiolp#|
the ]\[ava Pro-
the foHowing is!
ho Mithridates.
iirl
AM) OKXTiiAi- a.mkkica: 371
n'ic 7vir ^'cri/rhrn
Chouloi o (|nitnan laiiiiit/ancaniyauh
unsrin Schuhlvjt'ni
o ([iiintalac allaiiiyan ;
Vnd nir/il uns lasse
(*a ala (piilamactaxtoyanh
ihimil jvir slchen in Virsiif/iiitif/
Nali yojauli naca liydgiii
(jelhan wcrde
Chontacliolaoalmanla.
The same from Jfcrraa.
Kintaccan u natiayau hiiill;
'racotUall hnacaliuanla o min paxca maocxot
('ainill oiiiintagchi ,
'I'acliolaca liuanla ixcagnitiot ot
skiniau chon cliolacaii ocuatiayan ;
Alyauohuo nikila ixkni ki lacali cliaocaii ;
Kllainatjcancaiiian kintacagllitcan
Kintalacatlaninn ochoiikinau iclaniatzan —
Caiiiau kintalacatlanian ;
Nikilainapotaxtoii ala nicliyohiu
lacotlanacatalit uikilaiuapotexto
laniatzou lacacoltaua.
Cliontacholacahuaida.
Cross the watershed from Vera Paz to Oaxaca, and you
tome to tlie area of
Thk Mixteca. — In the ordinary maps, Tepezcolula, on
the boundaries of Oaxaca and Puebhi, is the locality for its
chief dialect, of wliich there are several.
Mixteca Paternoster.
Dzutundoo, zo dzicani audilmi;
Naca cuupihuando sasaniuo :
Xakisi santoniisini;
Nacalmi nuunailmi salia yoculuii inini dzalmatnalia yocuhui an-
dihiii ;
Dzitandoo yiitnaa tasiiu.slnd^ liiutni;
Dzandooui cuachisindo dzaguatnalia yodzaiidoondoondi liindo
suhani sindoo;
Iluasi kiliui iTaliani nucuctandndzondo kuaclii;
Talmi fialiani ndihiudo saliariavvhuaka dzahua;
Nacuhui.
24*
372
ON I'in; i-ANGUAUi'S HI' xouriiKits , westicux,
Tii(! ]\Iixtoe{i succeods tlio Mcxiciin I'ropnr, itself liciun-
other thiin Mexican, just as the Totonuc-a sueeedcd the llnn-
steea, wluch Avas IMaya, the Totonaca being other than
]\raya.
^Fho ]Mixteca is tlie Lani;-uap,e of Northern ,
Tlie Zapotkca tliat of youtliern, Oaxaca.
Hervas writes, tliat the Zapoteea, Mazateca, ChinMntcci,
and Mixe were allied. The IMixe locality is the distrid
around Tehuantepec.
South of the areas of the three languages just enumerated
comes the main division of the Maya — the Maya of Gua-
temala and Yucatan, as opposed to the Iluasteca of the parts
about Tampico. This, however, we i^sxss oyer s/ cat pcdc, lur
Honduras and San Salvador.
Limiting ourselves to the distric+s that undenia>,ly belon-
to those two States, v^c have samples of four dialects of
The Lenca language; these being from the four Pueblos
of Guajiquiro, Opatoro, Intibuca, and Sirmlaton, those o!'
the last being shorter and less complete than the others.
They are quite recent, and are to be found only in tlio
Spanish edition of ]\Ir. Squier's Notes on Central America.
The English is without them.
l^NfiLISlI.
man
?ro»i<(tt....
1)0)/
head ....
ear
Cf/C
GUAJIQI'IRO. Ol'ATORO. InTIBUCA.
taho amaslic.
move napii.
toco tohoro
guagua hua.
yang
yau
sainj^ sarinda
caga.si.
yaiigaga.
saring.
nose nnpse napsoh noptoii.
tnouth ingh aniheingh ingori.
tontjuc nafol navel na])el.
teeth uagha noas nigh.
neck ainpsli aiupsliala cange.
arm keuiu koiiiu kcning.
/i/ujers lascl gualalasel
foot gaiigi (piagi guaskarinj
blood uahug wnh quch.
su/i gasi ga.shi gashi.
star siri siri
fire uga 'ua y'^g'i'
?raler guass nasli guash.
stone ca cah tupan.
tree ill Hi ill.
TKIIX,
r, itself bcint,
ceded the Hua-
ng other tliaii
•a, (^liinantcci
is tlio distriil
list enumerated
Maya of Gu;i-
;ea of tlic parts
r si ceo pcde, for
AMI CKNTKAI, AMIWUCA.
IvSdI.ISll. rilAJIQIlUO. Ol'AlOKO. I.NTIIit (A.
line ita ita itaska.
Inut iiaa
three lagna ^
finir aria
jire sailic sailie
.v/.r Imic hue
iterea linis-ca
eight tcef-ca — -—
nine kaiapa .....
ten isis i.ssi.s
373
As Mr. Sfjuier is the sole autliority for the Leiiea of Sau
Salvador and Honduras, so he is for
leniak-ly belom
r dialeets of s
ic four Pueblo.s
laton, those of
lan the others.
id only in the
cntral America.
^A.
>-a.
3'
mug*.
NlCARAGTA.
Limiting ourselves to the undoubtedly Nicaraguan area,
and taking no note of the IMexican I'roper of nun-e than
one interesting IMexican settlement, the three forms of spceeh
for which Ave have specimens are —
1. The Ciioukte(!a;
2. The I^aguaxda; and
;}. The Wulava, of the Chontal district.
And now we pass to the Debateable Ground. The lan-
Igiuige of
The ]\[oskito Country
dvos us a fourth form of speech; at least (1 think) as dif-
ferent from the Choretega, Nagranda, Wuhva and Lenca,
as they are from each other. This is —
The WahvNA of the Indians of the coast, and, jirobably,
1 of several allied tribes inland.
Of the Waikna, Wulwa, Nagranda, and Choretcga, sam-
ples may be found either in Squier's Nicaragua, or vol. iii.
of the Transactions of the American Ethnological Society.
E.NOLISl'l.
Nag KAN DA.
CrOKETEGA.
man
rail pa
?raho.
7voma?i
rapa-ku
n-ahseyomo
hoij
sai-ka
?j-asonio.
git'l
sai-kee
?/-aheyinn.
child
chichi
n-aneyanie.
father
mother....
ana
£joo-ha.
autu
goo -mo.
husband
a'mbin
'mholmc.
if
!•
374
ON Tin; i.AN(ii:A(ii;s or \(iin"iini!N, wkstkkn,
*'11U p-ntc.
EN(iI,ISll. NaCMIANKA. C'lli>lli;TK(iA.
x'ifc ii'gnyu //iiino.
AW MiH'ul //-.•isoiucyaino,
<l(iiiy/ilrr (smIcuI-ji n asayinc.
/u'a,l I '•';■.'' },n...c-liciii.>.
/ cdi
/<"'> tn'mi lucTiilir.
face
fnrclicad giiltu
t'«/' i»>ui iip.liino.
n/f «<'tu iialit:>.
""•''■i' ta'co imiii<^o().
mouth (lalinu nniisii.
lo/Hjue (luliu g-roulic.
tooth Kciim ualio.
fcol imku jTvalu).
•''■/'7/ clclmialu nckniic.
*■»'* J»lit.'a iminlm.
s((ir ucu iiuotc.
/'>'• Hliku ualiu.
w"/'"/' t'oia iiiinhu.
stone
I
thou
he
)ve lioc'lio.l-u
ye liocliel-a
they icaiux ...
this ca-la
t'Sf'O. Hugo.
('S(>UU
ic-u salin.
ic-a suinu.shcta.
ic-a
semolimu.
For the Waikna tliere are other materials. The Wuhva
specimens are few. Hence it may be doubtful whether the
real difference between it and the AVaikna be so great as
the following table suggests.
English. Wulwa. Waikxa.
nifin all Avaikiut.
woman y-all mairou.
sfin pan-ni-ma lupia-waikua.
daughter pan- co-ma lupia-mairen.
head tnnni lot.
eye miuik-taka iiakro.
fiose inagni-tak kainka.
mouth dinibas bila.
hlood anassca tain.
<'ll duwawa semohuiu.
AM) (KNTItAI, A.Mi;i;l( A.
yTf)
Kn(ii,isii. Wri.wA. Waikna.
driitlc luiiliuia bo-pviiiia.
run (l!i;;'aliiu Ixt-tiipu.
l('(ti) iiiiisi;;-a bo-ora.
( aivu iia-va.
f/O \ •
^ ( I'.-u —
aiiiij nM;j,aiau ]ia-cO(»n(lanm.
sU'L'i) ami pa-yacu]^)t'.
Costa Rica.
Tlio following- is from a vocabulary of Dr. Kail Sclicrzors
(if the languages of the Blanco, J'ulicnle, and Tulnmcnca In-
dians of Costa lliea, occupants of the parts between the
Uivcr Zent and the Doea del Toro. We may call* it a spe-
cimen of
The TalajMENCA. — It seems to be, there or tlicrealjouts,
as different from the preceding languages as they are from
each other.
ExdLlHlI. Tai-amkn'ca.
Uiv .v/z-kukc.
[ijc .VM-wnakctt'i.
;/(/,s7' A'/<-t.slnik(»t<).
wuMlh A'«-'kuwu.
\m(juc <'.v-kuptu.
Umh iv<-ka.
heard srt-karku luezili.
neck -joint? tzin.
(um A'rt-fra.
hand sa-frd-lzin-avk.
fmijer /'ra-\v\v\i;\.
nail sa-krasku.
mn kanlme.
maim tulu.
KN'(iM«lI. 'I'ai.ajikxca.
shir hcwnc.
jirc tshuko.
walrr ditzita.
one c-tanui.
iHH) ho-lrn>n.
l/in'c iiiag'iia-/('«'(/.
four skv.-lCH'n.
five ni-lmra.
aix ai-wo-sliC-Xv.
seven .s7-«v/-wora.
ei(jlil A/-//'o-niagnan
nine si-wo-skc-lciva
ten srt-H'at-ka.
The same volume of the Transaeiions of the Amori^ !.>
Ethnological Society that supplies us with IMr. Squiers vi,
cabularies for Nicaragua supplies us with Dr. Secman's for
Veuagua.
Those being for
The Bayano;
The Savaneuic; and
The Cholo.
The Cholo is the same as Dr. CuUen's Yule, and also the
same as Cunacuna and Darien of Balbi and the Mithridatcs.
.'{70
ON I'lii; i..\N(iir \(ii;s (»r nhiitiiiokn, wkhtkiix
KN(iI,
('r.\A( I NA.
mil' (lucnsu-cuii
I ».\i;ii.N.
I'nlljuilf^n.
///
<ll
vo-i'iiJi ])o(|uaii.
Ihrre ])iiii-cii!i ]>inuiti;ili,
I'Dtir |ifi(|ii('-cn;i jtMkc-cni.'ili.
five iitalc ctcirali.
si.v ucr-ciiii iinlricali.
,S7'/VV/ CUJ^lc COnj^ctlilh.
ciijlil V!m-ii_i;uii ])!nik(ipiili.
itinc j)a(|U('-liMguc' ]iak('kopali.
ti'H auilx'gui aiiivcgo.
It is also tlio same ns sonic short specimens ot" the ^li-
thridites; where
milcr = (lulali.
mi 10 f I ~- nil.
fiitlwr ■= tautah.
mollicr c^ iiauiiah.
brother =: nipali,
sislcr =: iiinah.
tn'fr (/roma/ij =: poonah.
The Cliolo leads us into South America, where for the;
present, we leave it.
ADDENDA.
I Avill now add two notes , wliich may [lossihly save some fu-
ture investigator an unremunorative search.
First, concoriiing a language called Mocorosi. — In .fiilg, this is
made a language of Mexico. It is really the Moxa of Houth Ame-
rica under an altered name.
English.
1
thou
he
this
that
that yon
she
m?/
Ihi/
his
o?ie
two
three
iMOKOKOSI.
nuti
piti
ema
maca
maena
maro
esu
nuyee
l>iy(>«
mayee
eto.
api.
mopo
jMoxa.
nuti.
piti.
ema.
maca.
maena.
maro.
esu.
nuyee.
piyee.
mayee.
eto.
api.
mopo.
KHTKllX
AN1» CKNI'liAl, AMKIMCA.
377
III.
h.
all.
mens of the ]\Ii-
- vupnli.
linnh.
\an) =p()on<'ili.
I, wliorc for the
\i\y save some fu-
— In Jiilg, this is
xa of Soixth Aiiie-
This is from nn iiir ij rdrtihii/nrin dc Ui Iji'iiijidi Mam/nsi , mm-
pitcstit jior iin padrr de In compKm.i dr Jrsxs missiotirrn dc la Pnt-
rinc'uis dr los 31i>.viis dcdirudo a hi Sercnissinui Rri/na d>' Ids .tnt/i'lrs
sirmprc Finjrn Maria y Valrona dc cstas Misnianrs; en Madrid, aim
(Ir 169<).
A J/im.'i edition A.n. 1701 diffors from this in (imittinj;- the name
Mii/ciirosi, iind heinpj dedicated to a dilVereiit patron. In other
resjiects the two works a;,ree vrrhalim il lUmilim.
Secondly, in respect to a languaj^e called Tiinuucuana — J''or
this we have a Calrc/iisma y f.rniurn para las que cnmxilgan t\v kiapia
CaslcUana y Timur/uana , jxir d Padrf /->. Francisra Parrja ; and
;/ Padre dc la Provincia de Santa Elena dc la Florida, »tc. Maico,
1627.
Also, the following numerals in Balhi, perhaps, taken from
the ahovc : —
TiMUACLANA.
napikichama.
EXOLISH.
TlMUACl'ANA.
Enoli
one
minccotamano.
six
ifvo
nauchamima.
seven
three
naliapumina.
eight
four
nacheketamiina.
nine
fire
namaruama.
napikinalinma.
napekechetama.
natumama.
1 !
ADDKXDA AND ( OUIJKiKNDA
(1859).
P. 'i.Vi. '-As' fiol litis Miizinit'sr' — No. I'^nr a I'lirtlicr imtlrc
sec //. ;WH.
P. :J,")H. " /uiii'if/ii'ii mill 'I'luiniiiiilrliy Tlic Kawiclicii is
ucju'cr li> tlic Niisdjiliiiii , S([iiMllyaiiiisli , and ( 'atlilasciMi than it
is to the 'riaoquatfli. This may he s- cm in Uusciniwinii ji. iW).
At tiic same time it is iiiorc^ 'IUao((iiatcli than l?nscliuiann ni.ikcs it.
P. 'J.V.). — " 77/^' .ll/iii/itisi'iin litiii/iiiiiji's lire iiiiilinih/rilli/ J:'s/<iiiin."
— I>('tw(MMi the uotir.e t'ontaincd in j). 2!)!) an<l the [ia|»('r wiiicli
precedes it there is an Interval of no less tlian live years. There
is also one of three years between it and thi' paper Avliieh follows.
Now up to IH5() I <;'ave the term Eslami) a power which i after-
wards found reason to ahandon. I j^'ave it tln^ power of a i^cneric
name fur a class containing not only the Eskimo Proper, hut tiie
Athahascan, and rhe Kolooch., The genus, tliongli-in a modiiied
form, I still believe to exist; I have ceased, liowev(>r, to think
that Ksliimu is the best name for it. J fence, expressions like "tlie
Atiiabrtscan languages are, undoubtedly, Eskinu) — and the Koloocii
languages are equally Eskimo with tlu^ Athabascan" nnist bo read
in the sense of th(^ author as ex])ressed in jt.iiVo — "that the line
of (UMnarcaticni betw(M'n the Eskimo and the Indian races of
America was for too broad and trenchant."
Whether cei'tain forms of sjieech were not connected with the
Eskimo I'roper — the Eskinu) in the limited and specific meaning
of the term- — -is another ([uestion. The Ugalents was so treated.
The, Kcnay — until the publication of Sir T. Jtichard.son's Lon-
clieux specimens — Avas made both too Eskimo and too Kolooch.
On the other hand, hoAvever, both the, Eskinn) and the Koluch
were divisions of the same order. The actual value of the term
A'olooch is even noAV uncertain.
P. 276. — " The AJuienin efcy - A reference to the Avord Auka-
I'AuoES in JiUdwig's l?i])liotheca Olottica (both in the body of the
Avork and the Addenda) suggests a doubt as to the accuracy of the
form Ahiienin. Should it not bo Atsina'f
Turner remarks that "there is no evidence that Dr. Latham
I ;i
.\hiii'.Ni)\ \\i» it)i!i;i(.i;Mi.\.
:{7<)
(iilliilcil " MiU'k('ii/,ic's vtn'alm'.Mry wliirli , ■•i.^ I'.ir .is tin- tf\t
IN I )A
I'lirtlicr iidlifc
' Ka\vic|icii is
ilascoii than it
'liiiianii |). (i^ij,
iiami makes it.
hlcill;/ Kslniiio.''
\\i\\n'Y wliich
ycjirs. 'riicic
Avliicli I'ollows.
wliic'li I altcr-
cr (;f a ^•cncric
'roper, Itut tlic
'in a iiKnlilicd
ever, to tliiiik
<ion,s like "tlic
udtlic KolnoL'li
" must III' i-f'ad
"tliat the line
uliau races ol'
r>cto(l -witli tlic
ccilk meaiiiiij;'
ViXH so treated,
(ird.son's Lon-
i ton Kolooi'Ii.
(I the Kohu'li
10 of the term
n word AisiiA-
e l)ody of the
t;cnracy of the
t Dr. Latham
f liUdwi;;- ^locs, is true eiioui
II
nnuimeii
h. I had, I
inwever, vu'ii nn'i'
\au\
wi;
I'Mitor tliat I liad done su. As 'riinier
knew nnthinj;' of lliis is remark \vas a |iro|icr one
'I'l
i(> nmiu
i|UeHtion, liowever, touches the form of the word. Is .tliin.in or
.llsiuii ii;;iit':' 1 can not make out the later history of the MS. In
my own |iart, I eoijied, collated, .•mil returned it; and I ima;;'ine
th.at it still lie amon;;st either I'riihaid's or ( liilliitin's |ia|»ers.
I liiive the transcript hefore me .at this moment; which runs thus.
"'I'he vocjdiularies of the llhudvfeet, of the Crows or Ipsarokas,"
"and of the (Irosventre, IJapid, or F;dl Indians who call tliemscd "
"ves iMiiienin ; liy I). M. J\Ii\eii/,ie of the St Louis Americ.in I'urr'
■('
Hut'
om|i. 1 Iiey appear to iiejonj;' to three distinct lamilies.
"the ( 'row sspe.ak .a dialect (dearly l)elon!j,in^' to the s.anu' lan_i:,u;i};-e.'
"as that of the sedentary .AlinitJires and .M;indiiiis, which is Sioux,'
i;.\(ii,isii.
II.V
aid
Anifiitan
.Issiiiclntin
hitir
Iilunkcl
hraiidif
hulls '
Imtlous
hcrrics
hlotxl ,
hull hii/l'iilo
vow hiijfulo
hear
bail
lUttckfiiot Indian
JUdoiI Indian
vomh
vord
cup
roal
calf.
clii'at
(.'riiir Indiini
roiiiini/ , I am
iloji
deer
drink
ear-rinys
ears
eyes
elk
eai
fixj/
friend, my
tf«»
AllNKMN.
liaiKir^c.
I),iy.
lia.sScWHV.
iittiiioiio.
w.'ilitaiiiyo.
iii;li!itiyo,
kiiiutlyo.
kiitcliciimtclio.
hulikcatta.
Iiiii.
barts.
nicaii.
utaium.
wussa.
w.ahnattliji.
wahtanetas.
cnwweiiiiie.
clifittiya.
alitliauatz.
nil ah.
beethiiitini.
wo.
clialiliawclo.
owweiiin.
Icitowats.
alittali.
iiosik.
iialibin.
iyand.
ctali.
araithya.
wu.ssea.
alibeetse.
iiahatta.
betiecbe.
kutclieuin.
IC.Mil.lSM.
ynud
(iros Venires Indian
i/irl {i/unny)
(/(td. (snu )
tjniny (/ am)
— {n'/iereare y"u)
<l<)inii awiiy
yive me
— /////;
/lorse
/lair
hand
fiiinyry
irun
key
knife
kei/le
^•(7/
ley
leyiiinys
ludye
— imles
love
lice
meal, fresh
— , '/'•//
— , fat
moulh
me ^
}nxnc /
man . mhile
— , hiaek
many
nose
nnw
no
AiiNi:.Ni\.
etali.
aimeiiiii.
walitli.'i.
(■sis.
iiolu(;!iaucb.
tal<a]iali.
luilialitliK.
tsikit.
)iiiiuiiiili.
w.'i.saliliim.
bftaiiiiiita.
ikickaii.
Hsimiii.
bacliit.
taiiafifa.
waliata.
busetaniili.
paaliiiii.
nanalia.
iiattah
iii'ubnuii.
alicarsuiii.
abatliatt.'i.
bcttabiii.
aliliaii.
ahlitlian.
iictuii.
ocliya.
nistow. '
neliato.
n.vvtaiiialiat.
akaka.
liiise.
wahiie.
chieu.
380
.V|»I»1:M»A and CoIiUlfiKXDA.
Ji"!
KN(iLtSir. AlINI'.X N.
rock liiiiiiiikc.
rihs iiotzHiiii.
Tuhe tovjin.
inn nunalilio,
roast ost.-ui.
river iiiitcliii.
wolf kiadiili.
water ni.sji.
whisky n.-ihattomiclic
wife etlia.
/iiifjers nalia.
— 7iails iiHssa.
yon aliiiiiii.
7/es alia.
/ t/ofiU leant it ... natali.
sit down kaunutz.
f/et up kayhiitz.
where is it talito.
there it is nayyo.
two nethiy ■.!.
four yalinayau.
six iickitiikiyaii.
ten rotassa.
KN'dMSH. AlIXKMN.
71(1111', I hiivf iiMisclio.
fiun-powdei lieatali.
pafi liasiaiia-
]ti]tL' ('iiipssali.
])()')r alitabiiiou.
quit iiaiiiiaii.
scurletclolh liciiatiyo.
,spoo7> ahiyou.
salt ekiiiwa.
siif/ar naliattobin.
sleep iiiickc'oote.
strike tow wo nail.
sun csis.
still he owwahtatz.
tobacco kic-iitaliwan.
teeth c'tcliit.
ihiyh netcto.
to-day waiiaki.
to-7)wrrow nacali.
take it ctanali.
verinillio/i iiohatto iiovcn.
7tnderstand,doyou.'... alinetaii.
■ — , I do 7iot liacliinetoii.
7vood bess.
As the MS. was written with unusual clearness and distinctness
I have no doubt as to Ahncnin liavinf.^' been the word. That
]*richard read it so is evident; for the foregoing explanatioa lias
made it clear that he and I are independent witnessess. If crria-,
then, exists it his in the ]\I8.
TheBlackfoot and CroAv (which having also tran nibod, I have
by me) are as folloAvs : —
English. Klackfkkt. Cuow.
suTi nawtuas
little old fool sakalibooatta.
spirit cishtom
had spirit appanahhe.
7iiau {vir) nayslietai)pc ... bettse.
Indian do absarroka*.
7i<oinan ahkeya meyakatte.
I)0y saciionmbpa ... .<f^V//ikatte.
yirl abkaquoiii meyakatte.
child ;jokali ifl/tkatte.
father oiiwa mcnoomplie.
mother ochrist ekien.
husl)a7id obmuli batchcnc.
7vife obtoohka;««/'... 7iioofih.
son... 7iolicou.\i ine/(///7i1)atte.
dauyhter netan nie?(«?A,ineH.
brother iiausab /voocouppa, see child.
sister iiiskan />ooronpmca.
head otoquoin marshun,
* Or i'psaroka, name of nation.
r-
Addexua and Co;irj(ir,Ni)A.
38 1
AlINKN x.
liHiiiiiko.
iiotzsnii.
tOVfUl.
nnnalilio,
cstaii.
iiatcliu.
kiadali.
ni.sa.
naliattonuclic,
etlia.
iialia.
iiiissa.
aim an.
alia.
itatali.
kanmitz.
kayliatz,
tahto.
riayyo.
nethiy -1.
yaliiiayaii.
iiekitukiyaii.
rotassa.
lid distill ctncs.s
'■ word. That
xplaiiatiou lias
ssess. If error,
n-ibcd, I have
ee c/illd.
Enolish.
/ttiir
— o/' animal
face
I'urehead
ear
I'll*' '
vuse ,
muutit
lo)i(jii.e ,
teelli
hearii
neck
ufin
Iiand
IKlil
hodjj
heliy
lefi
ILLC •••■•••••*al
lues ,
hune
heart
hlaoil
town
chief
warrior ,
war-party ...
friend ,
house
kettle i
arrow ,
how
hatchet
knife
canoe
shoes
bread
pipe
tobacco
skij
sun
moon
star
<l<'!/
niijht
ti(jht ,
darkness
morning .....
evenin(j ,
spriny
summer
autumn
winter
irind
thunder
Br,AcKi'i;i:T.
otoqiiulii
uliqubiz
ostuUai.s
oliiiez
ohtolii'is
ohwappisije
olikiissis
\iv,\\iihhe
niat/.Niiiue
ohpayliin
emoooye
olikukiii
olitijis
olikittakes
owatanokitz
ostuiue
olikoiu
ohcat
oaksalvah
oakkittuaks
olikiniialt
ohhskit'/iiohiie....
ahhalipatiiia
alikawlvimiic
iienah
Ci{()\v,
mishiah.
sa
hliea.
upi)a.
meishta.
bnppa.
e\i — teeth,
(layrizske.
ea — mouth,
oshaesiia.
sliuali.
barre.
buschio.
muhlipe.
boiilihuoah.
ba're.
buchoope.
bii.sehe.
itsliearahabi.
lioorc.
iiasse.
t;da.
ashchen.
bottsetsa — see next
ii«,s'A'«batt,sats.
soo/u/h
netakUa
nappeinveeze
eskc
apse
espiclcauawml....
aiiahcokaksakkin
estovviiie
ahkeosakis
ahtsakin
ksah(]uuiiats
ahcooiweinan ...
pistahkaw
espoht
nnwtoa.i
iiauto«,v
cakato^/.v
chriatocooe
coocoue
christecoonatz ...
eskeiuitz
eskaiiattame
ahtakkote
motsu
napdos
moto.sc
stooya
snpooa
christecooin
.skeah,
a.ssua.
baruliliea.
ahnaitz.
blstnlieah.
matchepa — knife.
iiiit.sa — hatchet.
maheslie.
hoompc.
hohhazzsu.
impsa.
hopa.
ahinahho.
alihhizii.
mimiatatehe.
ekieie.
manpa.
oche.
thie«he.
chippusheka.
ehinnakshea.
appall.
ineamnkshe.
do.
bisse.
manuees.
hootsee.
800.
10^,
.T=t2
AnnioNDA AND (*oKui(ii:\nA.
liNfiMSir.
Hjjlilcriiiifi
£•
lain
N)II>W
Iinil
/tic
iiuilcr
ir(
ciirlli
rivrr
lake
island
vdllci/
Iiill.'.
viounlnin
alone
copper
ij-oii
scti
tree
/uirk
yrass
mnizc
oak
pine
wo'id
firc-H'ooil
leaf
meat
heaver
elk
(leer
hullhii/falo
cowhtifj'idu
Ini/falo
herd of buffaloes
Ijeai-
tlHjlf
dofj
squirrel
rabliit |
hare (
fox
snake
bird
W/
l/oose
piyeon
partridge
tiirkei/
dnck
fish
n'tiite
black
lU.ACKKKKT. Crow.
cliristccoom thalieslic.
snatnli liannuh.
olipootali bi.ih.
salieo makkoopali.
estcn bidali.
olihkeali minne.
saeoocootali boroohke.
ksnlieoom anima.
neekkittiz ahesii.
omahsekaine 7/«'/weetoekali.
nianc /«i'/»wej)eslin.
kiiieldme abracliukt!.
natooin niahpo.
mastake aliinaliabbc.
ohcootokc mi.
* olitaqiiinnalveskin ommattisbc.
nakesbiii omatte.
motohkin minneotskisliali.
masetis bahcoo.
ohtokeskissase eslte.
nialitoyaso beka.
eskatah liohhartzhee.
cabpokesa daclipitseesmone^y.
palitoke bartclie.
inasetis money.
i^ama.se
soyapoko moneyabpe.
akesequoiu arookka.
kakestakc beruppe.
poonabkab eitchericazzso.
ahnakkas obba.
estumeek
skain
bislia.
onalio
keiyo diilipitsa.
mabcooya cbata.
cmittab biska.
omabcookabte islitadaze — rabbit.
abtetah islita.
olitabtooya cbeesuptodalilta.
patrakesoma eanhassa.
pakcsa dickkappc.
oiiwas eikkicn.
cmahkiya mena.
pisitistsa maXnpiluse.
katokin cbitcbkekab.
dickkekskocko.
siakcs mebbaka.
mamca l)ooah.
ksiksenum chose.
sikksenum sbnpitkat.
■'" bee yellow.
ADDKNDA AND OnitUIfiRXHA.
•ICO
ii
!§
1
EnOMSTI, JjLAfKKKKT. CnOW.
red molicsenuin hi.slickal..
blue comoiiii sbiuikat.
ypllini' olitiiliko shirekat.
jjvedl oliiTiohcoo esjili.
mnall enjiheootse ccdl.
sh'oiifj miskappc bassats.
oil/ nahpe carraliarra.
f/ooi/ aliHc itsicka.
IhiiI. pahcaps kubhoek.
hmidsomc nialitsoapse osissa.
?////// palicapse eisbknbbeek.
nlive sakatappo itcliasa.
dead aadrie carraslie.
cold stooyah hootsbcrc.
warm kasetotzn alire.
/ Tii.sto be'.
llinii cliristo <le.
he ootowe na
we ni.stDnan hero.
ynii cliri.sto dero.
thcij ostowawab inibah.
thin kanabka kiinia.
thai
all..
do abc'ookii.
atesinekali liooalicas.se.
7iia)i// akkiom
alibook.
who sakayitz sippe.
7i'hat sappab.
todai/ abnookcbiiseiiuoix bintieinaupa.
Hcslcrday mabtone booriz.
in-inurvow ahpenaco.se .sliinnaksbarc
yes
no
to cat ,
— drink
— rwi
all iiotab.
sab barrotkab.
oycatz babboo.sbiueka.
seniate sinimuu/c.
ohmabkoit akbaroo.sb.
dance pa.scab dishsbe.
- yo eestappote dab.
- sing anihkit munnobe.
-.sleep okat imi<xgbumme.
- speak apooyalz hidow.
- see ahsappatz abmukkab.
- love tabcoomatzeinan abmntcbesbe.
- Icill cnikke babpakc.
- iralk aliwabocat nene.
I sa , abmutcat.
2 nabtoka nooiTu-at.
3 nabhoka namenacat.
4 nasowe sbopccat.
5 nesitto cliihbocat.
6 , nowwe abcainacat.
7 akitsekum sappoab.
8 nabnissowc nooinpapc.
pake.so abmnttappe.
10 kepo pcrakiik.
11 inakesikepoto ebpeomt.
384
ADDKN'OA AND C'l »|lKr(irA'DA.
E.NCiMSII. Bl.AC'KrKKT. CllOW.
12 nalisikcpoto e}ipciiooin|i.
20 nnlisikpn ni)om{)ii[icn'uk{i.
•iO nchapepo ii.'iincnai)crruka.
100 kapi|)pnuK ptorcekHuh.
lOnO kapippippooc peuieoksalipeiuka.
Tho Italics are tlie present author's. Tliey draw attention to eith(M' a
coincidence between the two languagcis, or tho compound character ol' liic
word.
n. — The Sioux group. — For a roinavk on tho affinities bc-
twcon tlio ]*a\vni and C^adilo, sco ^a 400.
The following coincidences are the result of a V(!ry liniitud
collation.
0).
ClIEllOKHlO AND CaDDO.
Eiiijlisli
man.
EiujIisli
tliief.
Ciierokeo
askiij/a.
Ciierokeo
kunaivskiski
Caddo
sliueh.
Caddo
kail a.
Eiiijlisli
woman.
Eiiijlisli
day.
('iierokec
rniiijei/uvi).
Ciierokeo
kalii.
Seneca
wcimeau.
Caddo
kauileh.
Eiii//ish
skin.
Eiiijlish
f]freat.
Cherokee
kniieyu.
Clierokee
cijiia.
Mohawk
kernayltoo.
Caddo
iiiki.
Eiitj/ish
ox.
English
eagle.
Ciierokeo
wakakanali.
Ciierokeo
(iwiiwliiili.
Caddo
nuikusycusa.
Caddo
I'l'ii'ch.
Eiujlisli
cow.
English
thick.
Cherokee
ivuktiafjisi.
Cherokee
uhnkc/ii/ii.
Caddo
wakhn.
Caddo
/liakdsc.
(2).
(yllEIlOKEK AND TuOQl'OIS.
English
enemy.
English
far.
Clierokee
agiskoji.
Clierokee
tilling.
Seneka
nngkishivaiiish.
Mohawk
eenoic.
English
mouth.
English
conjurer.
Cherokee
sinunglaw.
Cherokee
iilaivniski.
Seneka
swanelaiU.
Alohawk
tihtoonitz.
English
something.
English
aunt.
Chendvee
kaivhusti.
Cherokee
etsi.
Seneka
gwustah.
Seneka
ahhi.
Eni/lish
nothing.
English
my right hand.
Cherokee
Uakawhitsli.
Clnsrokeo
lsikitlesix(/iii)i/cni.
Seneka
(iiliii/whisla.
Mohawk
guwweeiiUlaltiqiiij/i
ADDKNDA AM) ( ( tlUMUDNDA.
1^85
kV.
H English
a corn.
Entjiis/i
horn.
np.
H Cherokee
kuli.
Cherokee
iii/atniuiuj.
errukn.
errnka.
Hseiieka
uhkuali.
Sencka
k()ii)iu)iij(ja/i
nil.
H tJif/lis/i
walnnt.
ilij)erakii.
HCIierokee
■ Mohawk
saii'lil.
uusoquuh.
tion to ei
tli(!r
a
■
character
or 11
e
■ TV. T/ip
ilhfihnsthiij> firniii
) T fiiul tll.Mf t
hp iipfiiiitv l>o
I affinities Ix'-
, very limlttid
hief.
uncnrskiski.
(Ilia,
[ay.
atii.
•.aitdcli.
jreat.
I I HI I.
iki.
iigle.
wiiii'/iiili.
ire/i.
lick.
Jtiike/ii/ii.
iakiisc.
ar.
nuiiff.
ciiorc.
oiijiircr.
liiwiiiski,
■hluonilz.
unt.
Isi.
hid.
ly ri}i;ht hand.
^iktitcsixi/iioi/cni.
iiii'iveeiiUliiliK/iioli-
otWPOll
[the Louclionx and tlio Koniiy lanj-'naj^'cs is given liy l^ricliard,
\']w, at tlio Kani(> time, separates both from the Athaliaskan, "Mr.
[UaUatin says that the similarity of lanj4uaj;('s amongst all these"
[i.e. the Athaha.skan) "tribes is -wcdl-e.stahlished. Tiie Loiicheux"
"are excepted. This language does not apjiear to liav(! any"
"distinctly marked affinities except with that of the Kenay." —
\Vol. V. />. 377.
I believe that Dr. Pricliard's informant on tliis point was the
Isame as my own i. c. Mr. Isbister.
Hcoiiler also suggests the same rebitionship.
Tliit IJnschmann has arrived at the results of his .illiahasliisrhe
iSjiriic/i.'ifinniii through n series of independent researches 1 readily
!li(dieve. Whether, after taking so little trouble to know what had
tiicen done by bis predecessors, he is right is saying so nnich
linut bis ilisciirt'rir.s is anotlun' ((uestion.
That the J'inaleno is in the same category with tlie Navalio is
jslicAvn by Turner, who gives a vocabulary of the dialect.
English.
Navah(
I'lNAr.KNi
iiiiDi husttkin payyahuah.
iVDiiuin cstsainii ctsumii.
head
bctsi
Ituir tclilit setzczil.
car tshar sitzchai-.
I'lie ninuar tshindar,
iiose nitclu
chinch
hand
feet .
sun,..,
shilattaete chicon.
t'ki sitzkay,
(lacos yalieyo.
mitnn
'tsadi
.v/«/' olchcec.
/ire.
'tcl
ion
iviilcr 'tl
in
lilt
klish
Htonc tseek
ilRdiifsaycd.
ailsonsatyon
to.
tlia.
tshaier.
V. Till' Kilinidha Iiuhjikkjc. — The Kitunaha, Kiitani , or
I'ootanie vocabulary of J\Ir. Hall was obtained from a Cree
Jiulian, and is not to be dejiended on. This being th(> case it is
(inrtunate that it not the only specimen of the language. There
^ an earlier one of Mr. Uowse's , jtuldished in the Transactions
I' the ]*hilological Society. It is as follows.
25
;jb(;
ai)I>i:ni».v ani» cokijicknda.
I t
it
J'Ls'fir.isii. KriAM.
our hook caiii.
/ii'i) ass.
//ircc callc sail.
fiiiir liiid sail.
//()(' yua CO.
fii.v ill lie mc sail.
seven wliist taw lali.
eii//i/ waw ali sali
iiiiii' ky .yiii kit to.
fen !ive to vow.
(in Intliun all (inols mail kin
iiic.
II man te te calt.
a iriimiiii balle key.
(I shiic catii lend.
a ijun tall vow.
/,,.. (!ali mill.
Ihfiu liii coo,
III'. iiin CO is.
nu' (Ihiiii ami I] ... call mill nah lali.
t/iis fia/iai! ill iiai all quels
mail kin iiic.
t/iiil liul'uni CO .'ill quels niali
kill nic.
thi'sc fni/ians wai nai all quels
ii'iali kin nic nin
tic.
ii</iir/i man? cath lali te te calt?
w/iic/i IniUuns'f ... call lali ah ((uels
mall kin nic nin
tieV
ivliich f/un? call lah tali vow?
ir/io cath lah.
nil/ .son call mah hat lay.
his sun hot lay is.
/a- is (joiitl sook say.
it is fjood sook kill nai.
Ill' is itvrii'cd swan hah.
/ love. Iibn hon(\s sclah kilt.
he, loves me sclah kilt nai.
/ sec him hones ze caufj;lit.
/ sec his son hones zo (•.■lujrht
ah calttis.
he sees me zo cauglit tone.
he steals i in ney.
/ love him hones sclah liilt
ney.
/ (III not luve him... call sclali kilt nai.
Ill// huslianil can no claw kin
nah.
lie is asleep conic ney ney.
/ am. a mnii To to calt no no.
/ am a ivomnu lialle key no no.
ivliere'f cass kin?
Kxdi.isir. KiTAxr.
where is III// ijiin?.. cass kin call tali
V(i\V V
ivhere is his ijun'f cass kin tali vow
i.sV
a /'//>'(' ah CO CO nool;.
how much'. cacksah?
il is cold weiither kis caw tit late,
a lent ah caw slaii cci
liokc,
'«.'/ tent i;;ih all kit lali.
thif lent all kit lah nis.
/'/•>• tent ah kit lah is.
our (thy and mil) cah ah kit lah
't'"' nam.
l/cs ah ah.
no waw.
men te to calt nin tic.
iVDinrn hallo key niii tic.
ijirl {in her teens) nah oh tit.
jjirls (/// their teen.s) nah oh tit nin tic.
1)01/ stalt.
Iioi/s stalt nin tie.
little hiijj stalt nah naii.
child ciili mo.
children call mo nin tie.
I'(ilher(^hi/ the sons) eah ilc doo.
father {liy the
daiiyhters) call sous.
mother call mah.
lirotlicr, eldest call tat.
brother, younyst
{^hy brothers) ... cats zah.
brother , yonnyesl
{by .sisters) call zc ah.
sister, eldest cats sous.
sister., younfjest ... cah nah nah.
uncle cath ah.
aunt call tilt tilt.
yrand/'aihei cah papa.
yrandmothei call do do.
thy husband in claw kiii iiali |
mi/ wife call tilt iiali lU".
tin/ wife tilt nah iiio i:is.
son can nah hot lay |
* or ah calt.
dauijhter cass win.
come here clan nah.
(jo awiiy cloon no.
take care ill kilt wo in.
get out of the way you vaw.
come in tie cath ah inin.
yo Old sclah nah ah miii-
stop niae kack.
ADIU'.MiA AM) ('(ll!l!l(ii;NI>A.
:{S7
you vaw.
tic c'lUli nil iiiin.
sulah n.ali all niiii.
mac kaek.
KNfJi.isii. KriAM.
run sill naek kin.
sliiirlji ah Ills call ziii.
miscili) o i>cr tin.
herjijiir/i/ coku cu iiiat^ kali
kail.
I i/iiw lioiie silt all muli
tic sis iiey.
llioii t/ives( kill iiali mail tic
zcy.
Iir (jivcs Hclali mali tii^ zcy.
lit' i/ave call mall tie cates.
I hea/ lioiic call slali ten.
t/ioii /iviilcsl kin call slali Icat.
lie Iwa/s .. ki.s kilt cone slali
Icat.
j/ire vie all mali tic kit
sous.
Ill' (javc me iiali niali tie kit
sa|) po ney.
I liwe i/Dii lionc sdali kilt
iicy.
//(.' loves sclali kilt.
ih i/oii liiDe me'.'' ... kin sclali slap ?
/ /i/de //oil hone call sclali
kilt nev.
llion halesl kin call sclali kilt.
he hales call sclali kilt.
I speak lioiKis all noy.
tlioii sjieakesl kins uli.
he speaks kat(is ah.
we speak hones ah iiali slab.
i/uii speak talk o tea loat.
ihei/ speak seals ah.
I steal hone i he no.
I sleep hone come ney
11 cy.
ivc sleep hone come ney
nail lah ney.
Idle hones alt hi]) pe
ney.
Ihon flicsl kins alt hip.
we flic hone ah o co iioak
nail sl;ili ney.
(live me lo eat he shoe.
cat he ken.
nil/ ()nn call tah vow.
//'// ijH'i tall vow nis.
his f/nii tall vow is.
K.NOi.isn.
lari/e river ...
small river
er(
■k
lanje laki
small lak(
rapiil ,
sliiials...
ell a II II el
ivitiiil or trees
veil pine
eedar
poplar
iispiii
/'•'■'■
iee
vlidrriiiil
ashes
kellle
mat teat
Iieail .
ei/es .
nose ,
iiioiilh .
chin .
cheeks
hair ..
Iioily .,
arms ,.
letjs ,,
belli/ .,
haek ..
side ...
ears ...
ail i ma Is
horse ...
iiiouiilaiu
roeki/ vioinitaiii
.vn«H'// mountain
road or track ..
ac CO vo ele it.
ac {!(> vo ele it
nook key.
ac cc vo clc it ac
clo.
ac que inah nam.
stallion
mare ...
hull ...
com
calf.
tif/er ,
hears of all kinds
lilack or Inomn
hears ,
KllTANI.
catli le man me
took,
hall cai Iv.
nis c.'i'i tooK.
will caw ac co co
nook,
ac CO CO nook iiah
nah.
ah call hop ele it.
wheat taw hoj) ele
il.
ah coke you coo
nook .
hall cath .slaw o
weak,
ail kits siali in.
he mos.
heats /.e iiatt .
ac clo mack,
ac CO CO zle m.'ick.
ah kin lie co co.
ah CO wheat
ah kits call kilt,
ah CO (jiic nic CO.
yoats sivimc.
tah lalt ah kit lah
nam.
ac d.'ini.
ac cack Icat.
ac conn
a(' cait ii^ mall,
ac. call iiK^ /.in no
(•!uk.
ac que ma malt,
ac coke que slam.
ac CO no cack.
ac solat.
ac sack,
ac CO womh.
ac cove call sla.ck.
ac kin no cack .
ac co]<(! CO what,
yah mo.
kilt calt law ah
shin.
cass CO.
sto/^galt.
noel seek,
sloiikc copo.
ah kill CO malt,
s'vic.
caj) po tie.
nip po 00.
25*
;}ss
AI»l)i;\l).V AM) CnitKHiKNDA.
EN(ir.l.SU. Kl TANf.
yrhile hear kit mIjuv o slaw.
77'/// ///•(■;• Meats siijip pioco.
rrti (Ifir kilt caw sloy.
moose (leer Miiap pe co.
nmolveieen ats pd.
wolf cHck ki I.
heaver ■... sin iiali.
oiler all cow uli alt
mhilc in mw yah.
iiifirtin iiae siu-k.
)iiusi/iNis/i an CO.
small (jreji plain
wolf skin koots.
Iiirds to coots cnli min
nail.
blue jiiii CO quis kay.
KxriMsir, KriA.Nt.
crow coke kin.
raven null nali k(^y.
sua lies (^rattle-
snake) wilt Ic malt.
f/arter siialie all co new slam.
roots (cai/iass) ... liaj) pe.y.
/////(■/• rool nail cam me slioii.
loliaiTo root mass mass.
sweet potatoes all wliis sea.
vioose herrij ac co mo.
slrawherrji ac (;o co.
/;///(' C0U8C.
pipe stem ac coot lali.
Uite all coot talt.
tdhaecu yac kct.
jlesli all coot lack,
VI. Thi' Altui group. — The. mimorous vocalmlaiics tliat rcjirc-
sent tlio (liiilccts iuul ,sul)-(lial»H'ts of this larg'O class arc the
f'dlldwiu;;' — ^Vtna Proper or Sliuslnvaj) , Knllclsjiclin (I'cinl
(rorcillcs) , Spokau, Kcttlof'all dialects of the Selisli; Okaiiagaii;
Skitsiiisli ((Jonir »r alene) ; IMskwaus; Nnsdaluiii; Squallyainisii ;
Kawiclieii; Catlilascou; Clieeliooli; 'rslliaili; Kwaiutl; Kweiiai-
Avitl ; Kowelitz; NsietsliaAvus or Killiinmk. To this, the present
writer adds the J}ille(diula.
XI, The (|uery as the likidihood of the Htraits of I'lica voca-
liulary having- been IMozino's finds place here. The two arc
dilVerent : though both may have; been collected by ^lozino.
Each is to lie found in IJuschinann , Avho, exaggerating the
isolation of Wakash, Nntka, and Tlaoijnatch forms of siteecli,
se]»arates them too decidedly. Out of nineteen words compared
nine are not only alike but admitted by him to Ixi so.
The nuirr/iiiltt. — This lies intermediate to the Hailtsa and Atiia
gronjis; being (apparently) more akin to the latter than the
i'ormer. ( )f the, Atna dialects, it .seems most to ajiproach the
]*iskwaus,
T/ir Chiiiah.'- The Chinuk of which the Watlala of Hale is
vari(!ty is more like tlie Msietashawus or Killamuk than aught
else.
The k'ulopinfft. — The harshness of the Kala]iuya is an inference
from its ortiiogra])hy. It is said, however, to be .soft and flowing
?. /'. more like the Sahaptin anil iShoshoni in sound than the Chinuk,
and Atna.
The Jahitn, — This has affinities with the Ohinuk on one side,
and the Lutuami on the other; i.e. it is more like these two
languages than any other. The likeness, however, is of tlic
slightest.
I.
AI>l)l;.MiA AM) ('(»l;UI(ii:M>A.
;{s<)
Ki'tani.
•oki' kill,
mil iiiili key.
vllt le malt,
ill CO new slum,
lap pc.y.
lali cam me sliou,
nass mass.
ill wliis s(.'a.
u: CO mo.
IC (!0 CO.
:;oii8C.
ic coot lali.
xh coot talt.
yna kct.
nil coot lack.
lios that rojirc
class ai'd tlic
>lsp('hn (l*(Mi(l
sli; Okaiiagaii;
SqiiJillyiunisli ;
aiutl ; Kwciiai-
is, the present
of l''nca voea-
Tlie two arc
'd liy ^lozino.
aj^-geratiu};' the
rms of six'eeli,
onls compared
so.
liltsa and Atiia
atter tlian tlie
approach the
!ila of Hale is
udc than aui;'ht
is an inference
oft and flowing
lan tho-Chiniik,
k on one side,
like those two
ivcr, is of the
f
t
lVriS(i;i,i,\M;ois Ai'i'iM rii's.
I'.iifiHsli man,
.lakoii I,iilt..
Siilisli n/tnll-tiinc/i/ii),
Skitsuisli s/iiii/t ciiiiilJi.
I'iscous ,\/iii///iwi/</io.
IC'if/lis/i woman.
,lakon tli/iilxs,
Wallawalla tilnki.
Wallala tklktikihilc.
Cliiiiook ikitikcl.
Cayiiose pbhtklilttiu.
Molcln loii(/i-/k/(ii.
Killanink sid-lklit/s.
Sliiisliwap sniKii-tklilrk-
Cootanic jtc Ikiki,
F.iif/lisfi boy.
.lakoii tklum-kato.
I\i/li kwiti.
Cowelitz kwiiiilkl.
EiiIIUnIi pirl.
Jakoii tkliinksdivft.
Kizli tiiklidi.
Satsikaa kukwa.
Watiala /k/ri/n/.
Cliinook ir/ilfi/.
Ciiickaili k'/am/.
Skwalc siklliilkl ttdni.
Jliiskoi^lie iikiilosohd.
Kii(/lis/i ciiilil.
.Iaki>ii miiltiilli'.
Slialiaiitiii iniiKils.
Kiii/lis/i inotlK.T.
.lakon fk/ilit.
Chinook ik/i/iiiiiiid.
F.i)i/lis/i husband.
•Jakon Nonsi/.
Cliikaili riiicis.
('owclitz sk/i(»i,
Killaiiiiick vlsnun.
limpqua skltnti.
~ do i-hanga.
Eiii\lish wii'c.
.Fiikidi sinlkhliilis.
( 'ayiiso iiitkhlkdid.
^I(dele toii/jitk/ildi.
The Siilidjtliti. — The Saluiptin, Shoshoni and laitiianii gronjis
lire more closely connected than the text makes them.
Tin' Sliiishimi (Padura) (jruup. — The liest general name for this
I'hiss is, in the mind of the prc^sent Avriter, I'adnca; a name Avhicli
W was jiroposed hy him soon after his notitication of the aftinity
lietween the Shoshoni and the Conianch, in a.d. 1845. Until then,
I the two languages stood alone; /. c. there, was no class at all. The
I AA'ihinast was shewn to Ix; akin to the Shoshoni liy Mr. Hale; tlu;
AVihinast vocahulary having heen collected hy that indefatigalile
jiliilolognc during the United States Exploring Uxj)edition. In
(Jallatin's Keport this aftinity is put forward with due jiro-
ininonce; the AVihinast being sjioken of as the Western Slio-
slioni.
lii '50 the Report of the Secretary at War on the route from
San Antonio to El Paso sup])lied an Utah vocaludary; which
the paper of May '53 shews to he I'aduca.
\\\ the Report upon the Indian '^I'rihes i^c. of '55, we find the
C'hemehuevi, or the language of one (A' t\w, Pdh-utti/i hands " i'or
the lirst time made public. It agrees" (Avrites Professor Turner)
"with Simjison's Utah and Hale's East Shoshoni."
(^arvalho (I quote from liuschmann) gives the numerals of the
I'iede (Pa-uta) of the jMuddy River. They are nearly those of
the Chemehuevi.
:]!Mi
Ai»iii:\i»A AM» «(»Ki!n;r.M».v.
I'.Mii.isii. ru;i>i;.
(itlf NuiiS
/irii wu'i'iioiu'.
//lice |ii<>()iiu.
/'iiiir Wdl.sooins;.
/irr .slidoiiiin.
.v/,t' iiuvi.
,s'(7'(^/ iiiivikavali
fii//i/ iijimici'tsoo'iii.
iiiiic sIniokootspeiikLTiiii.
/(■/I tulll!)llUu'ilI.
l'\n- the Calmillo sec IicIoav.
Is llic KioAN.iy I'adm-ay Tlic only kiiitwu Ki<i\\ay vucaliiil.uy
is one |iiililisli('(l liy PniCcssdr 'I'lii'iicr in the KN'jiort just allinlcil
to. It is Inlluwt'd liy tli(^ rciiiark that ''a c'oiii|»aris(iii of lliis
\i)ral)iilaiy witli tliosc tiCtlic Shuslnnii stock does, it is true, sliow
a jiTcatcr (Ic^i'rcc of rcscinlilaiicc tliaii is to Itc I'oiiiul in any dtlicr
(lirci'tioii. T/ii' rrsi'inhliuicr . Iiiiimwr, is mil suf/irtnil la csIhIiHs/i h
niilinil iifliiiiln, htil riif/tcr uppi'Krs In he Ilic <-(iiisi'i/iir>iCi' of Iniuj
iiilt'rciiiii/iiiuiic<ili(in."
For iny own part I look iipou tlic Kioway as I'aduca - l/w
riiliw of till' class hri/ij /•itiscil.
Mnci.isk. JviuWAV.
iitmi Isiaiii.
ii'iinKiii innyi.
head l^iakii,
luiir uoto.
I'tici' caniia..
fnicliviiil taiipa.
eitr taati.
fv/c taati.
nose maiiciiii.
iiutnlh surol.
lonijiie deii.
luDlh zuii.
hand niortay.
I'llOt OIIHUt.
hlOUlt UMI.
hone toiisiji.
ski/ Iviaculi.
sun j:a:
inuun }i;i.
I'l.Ndl.lSII. Kkiwav.
star tiih.
/ire i)ia.
Witter til,
/ no.
lliim HID.
he kin.
me Iviiiu'.
lie tusa.
then cuta.
one ]talu;o.
two ^ia.
three pao.
I'inir 'm\]\\.
/we onto.
six mosso.
Seidell pantsa.
eiijlil iatsa.
nine ciilitsn.
/('// ciiklii.
XII r. Tlir Ciipislrdiio ijroiip. — r)usdiinann in his pajK'V on tlic
N('t(da and Ki/li states, ai'tcr ^lot'ras, that the .Inynhit, the
('a;;'uilla, and the, Sihapot trilics lichuij;' to the IMissiou of St,
(Jal)ri(d. 'i'nrncr i^'ivcs a Cahuillo, or ( -awio , vocalinlaiy. Tla'
district from which it was taken l)eli)nj:,'ed to the St. (Jahricl
(listiict. The Indian, however, who sniiplied it had lived witli
tlie priests of San Lnis Key, until the hreak-np of the Mission.
At»l)i:M»A AMI CKiiiiiilKNK \.
W'lictlicr tlic rtiriii of ,s|MM'cli Iii> has L;i\t'ii iis lif tli.it nlllM' .Mis-
siiiii ill wliicli lie liscil or tliat nl' tin- true Calniillu disfiicl is im-
tM'i't!iiii. 'riiinci' treats it as ('aliiiilln; at tlic same tiiiif liii rc-
iimrks, anil slicws, that '.t is iiiorc akin tn the San l^iiis |{cy iliah. t
than t(t any nthrr.
IWit it is also akin to the ( "hi'iiiciirvi, which witli it is lalmlatcd ;
11 l;u't wliicli I'avonrs tin- views of llah' res|M'('tin,L;' its San ('aiii-
strano al'linities rather than those of liiisehniaiin llah- niakinj^'
tiieni radm-a.
A vocalnihiry, liowever, of the unrei'iaiineil CahiiiMo tiilies
— the trihes of tiie. mountains as o|ipose(l to the, missions is still
wanted.
l'.N(il,ISII.
IIMMI iiii;vi.
(\\min.i.o.
nmn .,
ivDiiinn
heiul
liuir
tuwat/, .
m:irii(|ii;i
Ililil.'llH'S.
iiiUil.
iiiut.'ici)\v!i iiivuliika.
t()i'|ii|)
li/iiii
".'/''
Co
iiaiicaijii
ik
1'
iici
itsli
IillolU
iiaiiDcKa,
napiisli.
iiiiivi iK'inn.
iniiiitli tir.ipuiiu )iet.
una.
lunijiio Hijo
lixith towwa
lUMIIIII.
iielaaia.
Iiiiml inasiwaiiiin neinnlicniosli.
iiaiTi|iJUi.
nei
iiifinpj'aii neta.
l-iiil.'
font
hniin
Iilood
ski/ tnii|) tiKinasIiaiiica.
sun
moon
stitr
/''•''
ii'iilcr
one
tal)Mput/. taunt.
iiK'Jitr'ifopit/'. Miciiyil.
))llt.Slll
(Mill ...
pall....
sliuisli
In'ii waii .
nam.
rce
ll<
four
])an
•licl
•ut.
Nlipll.
niewi.
lejiai.
att'lni iiiewitc'lm.
l\vL' iiiaiiu iiHirKMiuadiiiiii.
>iix iiabai (|naihiiiiisii|ili
SCVl'H
!f//ll
inoqnist
iia
1
U-li
IWIp
I'
qiiaiiiiHiiiwi.
quaiiiiiiiiipa.
(inaiiiiiiiiiwii'Im.
ten
masiin iioiiiaeliuiiu
P. 353. Now comes tlie correction of a statement in ji. 3>i3
— " ///6' IdinjtKifjc of S(i)i Luis El lie;/ ivliicli is Yuind. is snr-
iccrtfrd hi/ UkiI nf Suit Luis Ohis/io, irltidt is IJapistrdnn." — Tliis is an
inaccuracy; .M|)|iarently from inaihcrsion. A reference to the
Paternosters of j)/>. MH 305 shews that the. San Luis licy , and
the Sau Juan Capi.strauo form.s of speech are chisi ly allied.
:{<)•>
AI»I»I;Mi\ ami t (tl!l!Mii;NI) a.
l\I('aii\\ liilc, llif Sjiii I'diiamlit ii|»|Mi>iulir,s tlii; fSiiii (iiiliricl, /. r.
the Ki/.li.
Sec iilso 'riinitT, /<. 77 where tlie iiaiiie hi'c/ii seeiiis, wonl
for wdi'd, to be /u:/t. 'I'lie 71/://, liowever is a .SV</< liahricl fonii ul'
8|iei.'cli.
Xl\'. '/'/h' Yiimti (/niii/i. — Turner j;ive.s a .Mojave, or .Mn|i,i\i
voealmlary ; the first ever |tiil>hshe<l. It is stated and shewn in
Ite Viiiiia. Tiie Valiipai, in the same [taper, is inferred, to he
Viiina ; euutaiiiin;;,', ;is it does, the word
Ititnud = f/ootl = hiiinin . /tirf/itiio,
ii'ifiit: ^-— / = n//Hl. tilt.
IKKilc r - heads ■z^- jniiilc , ('iic/inii.
Tlie Moliave vocnbulary ^-ives the toUowiu}^ extracts.
KNin.isii. iMoiiAVi'!. ('rciiAN. l)n;<ii no. Cocumamoi'a.
/////// iptili ipntali Hykut.slu-t ... ipiitnlu;,
winiii/ii ... siiiyjiv ... sinyak .'... sin siiicliiiyaixliiitsli.
/icti(/ c.iw fiw'.'i... umwlieltlic ostnr
/iiiir iiiii )C'oii(
/'fin; ihHiinii ... edotslio wii
/hrc/icnil .. yuniHpiil . iyiieol()(|iio
ftir .. esnuiilk ... siiiyilil Ii.'imutl
r//e iilot/ eilotsliii nwiic aycdot.sh.
iiDsa ilm ehotwlii Im yiiyyayooelio.
i/Kiiifh in iyiiqii.'iofe hIi i/.Htsh.
innf/Hc ipailya ... o|iu1cliu
Inot/i iilo ar(>(1oclie
/iiniil ifalcliu sitlil
(inn isiiil
/hot iinilapilap imotslislijiatslapyali liamilyali K^
liluot/ iiiawlnit... a\vliiit
ski/ atiiaiiga... atnnini
swi nyatz nyntsh nyatz
moon hiillya Inithlya luilhiHli
slur Iiannisc ... khipwataie liuininashish
Imtshar
/ire awa aawo ahiiuh.
ii'fiiei- alia alia aha
/ iiyati; nyat nyat inyatz.
l/ioii inaiitz iiiantz niantz.
/le pepa habiiisk pu
one sottn sin Jiiiii
two Iiavika liavik liawuk
(h'ce lianioko... liamuk haimik
four pinepapa. cliapop cliapop
five serapa ... serap scrap
sice siiita huinlnik
seven vika jiatlikaie
eifjfit mnka cliipliuk
7iiiie pai hniniiiamiik
ten arapa saiihuk
AI»l»i;\l»A AMI CMUltKiMNriA.
:(*.ia
W.' I
t'ilVC
Calit
Di'iiia with till' iriiiiii'k that in
I.U.I
\\\ii s
Lit
cia-
'//' soi'iiis, wiinl
(Jahriit fiinii nl'
\(', (»r .Mi)|i;ivi
I anil slii'wii III
iiil"('ri'('il. tn 1m'
(JordMAM'nl'A.
ipntalii;.
HiiicIiHyHixliutMli
tiicc of the Aiiii'iicaii Ali(iri;^iiial l,aii;;iia;;t'.s Mr. |5artlrtt'.s vuca-
liularics lor ( 'alilninia lir.ir tlic rnlJuwiiiL;' tillrs.
1. |)ii'j;iiuii ur Ctiiiii'^ I'i,
•J. Kcclii,
'.S. San Luis ( Hiispo,
4. iriiaiia
.'). Tcliaiiia
(). (Jttlu/ ) IVuiii tlic iliaiiiam! of tiic Hfi'iainciit,
7. Noana
H. I )ij;'j;('r.s
il. 1 )i;;-j;i'fH of Napa X'allcy.
10. .Makaw of l'|»[»('r Califnrnia.
S('^^ ('alifnrtn'uiis.
Tlicrc is also a I'Iros vocaliulary for tlii^ parts almiit Ml I'aso:
also a notic't! (uudcr tju^ woidj that the Mi rtd.NivS liiiliaus
Kpcak !i (HiiU'ft of the Solcdail.
Old Cdlifin'iiiii. — Ah a jjoucral rule, translations of tlio I'ati-r
Kostcr show ditVcrciu'c rather than liki'iics.s: in other words, as a
j;eneral rule, rude lanj;ua;;es ai'o more alike than then Pater
Nosters make them, 'j'lie reasons for this lie in the altstract nature
of many of the ideas which it is necessary to (>.\press; hut for the
expression wheri'of tli(^ mor(! harliarons fornus of speech are in-
sufficient.
This creates the necessity for circundocntions and other ex-
|tedients. In no part of tlu^ world is this more manif"st than in
Old California; a district for Avhich our tlxln are' of the scan-
tiest. I think, liow(>ver, that they are suflicient to shew that the.
Northern forms of speech, at least, are Yuma.
KNCfMsu. O. Calii-iihnian.
Vr>fA.
{Iiuino) tam:i e|)ats
viiin (iiumo
III nil [V
iintiitnn
UHllll
wiKttu .seeiiyjick.
vvfikiie siinax
Iiuat^in 8oen.
child wlianii ]iai!pit.
wakim
fullter ihaiTi lotlmiociil.
kakka niqiiioclio.
ketieda nilc.
kanainbH
viotlivr iiada tile.
aon uisailiain ... .,... liomaio.
sister kenassa amyiick.
head agopj)! estar.
e//e aribikfi ayon.
toiujue inahela ipiiili/(i — Mohave.
hand ....,
nagaiia sitli'l
301
ADUKNDA AM) COKKKlKNDA.
l'',N(!I.I.Sll. N. ('Al.lKi)lf.NIAN. Vl.MA.
fiiiit .•i^nii)';'.|i/i littiMH^lyay.
.s7i'// (imlii ^ (iiiimai/ti — Mithavc,
ctiiilt iinicl omul — Cwlinii.
(iminfirdir — Mo/iiivl'.
it'dtcr Icdiiiil alid — Oirf/iiiio,
tt/i/ia — Mdliiivc.
I'lif .'.si Iioiise — CuiuiiiuricojHi.
SHU ibv) ayaXr,
tlujl ibo ii()ii);isii|).
moon ji'oiiinia liiillya.
^aiieliinujeic
The Pima (jruu/t. — ( )ii(' of ^[r. IJiirtlctt's >'oe;i1)ul.iru'.s is ut' tlic
Ojiiit.i tunu of spccfli. (Lud/riij.)
Tcqidnui, according to the. sainci authority Is another naiiic
for the .same hnigiiayc: in which there; \r a vocahnhiry l>y Xatal
JiOUihar(h»; Mc^xico. 1702, as well as an Arte tie la Lcikjuh Trqiiiinu,
vidijiirmciilc llammla Opaln.
A Vocahnlario dc las Lcinjuas Pima, Einlrrc , // Sen's is said,
Ijy 1)(^ tSoHza, to liave heen written hy Fr. Adanio Ciilo a Jesuit
missionary in (-alifornia. — Ditto — v. J'i.ma.
Ivvceptioiis, which the ])resent Avriter overlooked, are taken in
the ]\Iithri(hites to the .statement that tlu' Ojjata and Kudevc
Pater-iiosters represent the ]'ima Proper. They aj.'jree with a
third lan_:;'uaj:,e from the Pinm country --hut this is not, neces-
sarily, the I'ima. Hence, what applies to the Pimerian may or
may not apj)ly to the Pima Proper.
N(!vertheless, the Pima l)eloufi,s to the same class — heinsi',
apparently, more esjtecially akin to the Tarahumara. 1 have only
l)efore me the following Tarahumara words (/. e. the specimens in
the Jlithridates) through which the comparison can be maih'.
They give, however, thus much in way of likeness and dif-
ferenco.
Enomhu.
jiKin
woman
wife
ci/e ....
tillf/Ui-
hair .
find
'I'AliAHlMAUA. I'lMA.
rolioju orter.
tohoju clieiMirt.
...! hutli.
imiki <)(! Olive.
Iiahri.
upi oo-if.
mouk.
oiipcwc.
head inonlu
imsiUi
teuila lu^iii'ii.
(juitsliila moll.
ptiiiitk.
tala tot.'iylit
//»■(' iiaiUi talii.
nun lii'u'n liiha,
tdsili.
AI)I»I:NI).\ AM) CUiaiKiHNDA.
395
l^NdLISIl. 'rAKAIir.MAIJA. I'uiA.
iiiuuii inallsdcii mitltsii.
iiKissar.
1 11«|10 illlflU.
liuo (judca voUii.
(H'li kmik.
iirii'S Is of tlic
iuiotlicr uMiiic
ilary Ity X;it:il
mjua Trqniina,
Sen's is said,
> Ciilo a Jesuit
[, arc. taken in
. and Kudev(!
aj,';ree witii a,
is not, necoH-
mcrian may or
class — beinir,
a. I have only
e specimens in
can be made,
uess and dif-
linscliiiiann connects the Pima with the 'l\'|»ei>uana.
Another complication. — In 'I'nrner's Extract from a AIS. acconnt
of the Indians of tlu; Xo.tlu'rn J'rovinces of New Sjiaiu J lind
that < )pa (OpataV) is another name for the (!ocomarico|>as irluisc
liititjtuKjc, is llittl (if llic Yuma. 'JMiis is trnc enouj^'h — hnt is the
Opata more Vnma than the text (which connects it with the llia-
(|iii A:c.) makes itV
The /'iin(( , Iluiqui, Tuhtir, Tuniliuuinni , (t/iil Cora as a class.—
An exception to the text is indicated l)y the footnote of l>aj;'e
3bl. 'I'he ,Mitliridates connects th(> ('ora anil 'l^irahnmara with tlu^
Astek and with each otlier. The Astek elements of tlu; lliaipii, as
indicated l>y iJihas are especially alluded to. So are the Tara-
hiunara aflinities of the ()])ata. All this is doin|^' as nnich in the
ay of classification as is done hy the present author — as much
M
or more
As much, or more, too is done by liuschmann; who out of the
Cora, 'J'aralnunara, 'repeguana and Cahita (the latter a re])re-
sentation of the section to which the Yaqui helonj^'s) makes his
Soiaira Class — Sotwrisclicr S])rachslamin. As a somewhat abnormal
nuMuber of this he admits the I'ima.
Of the (iuazave there is a M8. Aiie by 1*. Fernando Villa-
r
m
)ane
That the dala foi the Tepeguana are better than the text
fikes them has already been suggested, liuschmanu has used
materials unknown to tlu^ present writer.
8ee Ludwig in voc. TcpcguaiK
Piriiula and Tarasca.
The stateiiu'ut that there is a I'irinda
graunnar is inaccurate. There is one of the Tarasca; to which
the ri^ader is referred.
\\\\[ this is not all. Under the title IMkin'da in Ludwig we lind
that l)e Souza says of Fr. Juan Ih-vvo, the- .-uithor of a grammar
of the Lengua Tarasca " fnc tnacslro perilissiniu ilc la lengua Piiinda
Itaniada Tarasca." '.rids makes the two languages nuich nu)re
alike than the present paper makes them. The present paju-r,
however, rests on the I'ater-nosters. How inconclusive they are
has already been indicated.
[P The foUoAving table , the result of a very linuted collation
gives some ndscellaneous al'linities for the ( )tomi.
396
ADDKNDA AM> COKRIOKNDA.
Kiiy'isli mail.
Otomi niiniifhe.
I\Iay;v iS:c nmic.
Padiica wennh,
Hnulish woman.
Otomi daii.vii.
Maya aluu=^wife.
Knfjlisfi woman.
(Jtoini W.SM.
TalatuJ essce,
Eiujlish liand.
Otomi i/c.
Talatui iku.
Englinh foot.
Otomi qua.
Maya&c oc.
English blood.
Otomi '/fii.
Maya iSic kik.
KiijiUsh liair.
Otomi si.
S. Miguel te asa-klio
Enf/lisfi ear.
Otomi fjii.
S, Miguel tenl-klii-lo.
English tooth.
Otomi tsi.
Attacapa ods.
English head.
Otomi na.
Sekumne o>io:=^httir.
Englisli fire.
Otomi t'Jhi.
Pnjune ciu
English moon.
Otomi tzonn.
Kenay ssin:=^star,
English stone.
Otomi do.
Curaanch tuovicpee.
English winter.
Otomi tzaa.
Cumanch visa inte.
S. Gabriel ... otso.
English H.sli.
Otomi hua.
Mayi< &c Cfiy.
English bird.
Otomi ttzinlzg.
Maya &c Ichitch.
English egg.
Otomi 7nado.
Poconchi molo.
English lake.
Otomi mohc.
Pima vo.
English •''ua.
Otomi miinthe.
U. Sac.&c. ... muni = water.
English son.
Otomi tsi.
ti.
halsi.
iso.
Natchez tsitsce=: child.
English meat.
Otomi nhihuni.
ngoe= flesh.
Mexican 7iaca(l = (lcs/i.
English eat.
Otomi tsfi.
Talatui tsaniak.
Engli.'.h good.
Otomi nianho.
Sekumne wenne.
English rabbit.
Otomi qlnta.
lluasteca cog.
English snake.
Otomi qqcna.
Maya can.
English yes.
Otomi ha.
Cumanch jtaa.
English three.
Otomi hiu.
Mexican yeg .
lluasteca okh.
ADDENDA AND COItllHlKNDA.
:u)7
The other two arc as follows.
The Olomi with the lawjiuxjes
Etujlish nican.
Otoini nnnijche.
Kuanchua ... nan.
Canton nam.
Tonkin nam.
EiiylLsli woman.
Otomi nitsu.
nsic.
Kuanchua ... niu.
Canton niu.
Tonkin nu.
English son.
Otonii htitni.
iso.
Kuanchua ... dsu.
Cantnn ilzi.
Mian sa.
Maplu pos.ia.
Play ripo.'io.
naptillur.
Passuko posufio.
FmjUsIi hand.
Otonii ye.
Siuanlo Ue.
(Jochiii Cliina «« : -arm.
Knglish foot.
Otomi ijua.
Pey 'ha=^lc<i.
Pape Iia, ho--(lo.
Kuanchua ... kio.
Canton kuh.
iloitay kclio.
Eiiy/is/i bird.
Otomi tttintei,:.
Maya clicchetcli.
Tonkin tvheni.
Coc'liin China idling.
Kiijjli.'ih sun.
Otomi Iiiadi.
Canton nal.
Knylis/i moon.
Otomi I'zana.
.Siuanlo than.
Teina son.
English star.
Otomi tze.
)
akin to the Chinese en masse.
Tonkin sao.
Cochin China sao.
Maplu nhia.
Play shd.
.sha.
Passuko zu.
Colaun assa.
English water.
Otomi dehc.
Tibet tchi.
Mian zhe.
Maplu ii-
Colaun tui.
English stone.
Otomi do.
Cochin Cliina ta.
Tibet rtu.
English rain.
Otomi l/a-
Chuanchua... yn.
Canton ,'/«.
Colaun .'/«•
English fish.
Otomi hua.
Chuanchua... ,'/«.
Canton //«•
Tonkin ka.
Cochin China ka.
Play '/«•
Moan ka.
English good.
Otomi manho.
Teilung wanu.
English bad.
Otomi hiiig.
hio.
Chuanchua ... o.
Tonkin hii.
Play //,'/"'•
English great.
Otomi nah.
7idc.
nokoc.
Chinese ta , da.
Anam dai.
Play do, nildo,
Pev nio.
308
.\ni)r,\i)A AM) coRiiKir.MiA.
hltujlisli sniiill.
Otdini //////'■•
I'iissiiko Ichckii.
Kllj/lifi/l GHt.
Otomi izc till.
(Iiinese s/ii.
Til)ct .s/iic.
Mian tshu.
Myauiniii sn.
I'll! 11 1! sh .sleep.
Otoini iiliii.
(JluiaiieluiJi... //'w, no.
I .'
The Mdjin, H'ilh the hi/igiuKjes ah in In I he Chinese en vmsse
I'liifjli.sli son.
MayJi Idkpal.
jiidal=^chil(lrcii.
•Mvammu liujala.
Tuiliiiig lukwun.
English head.
Maya pol, /tool.
Kalauii inullu.
Eiujlisl; month.
Maya eld.
Chuniichua ... ken.
Canton hou.
Tonkin kmi.
Cocliin (Jliina kdii.
Tihet kn.
Englinh hand.
Maya cab.
llua.slocrt cubac.
Maphi ti'lio()bnh=:=iiriii.
IMay tchnobalr^—do.
I'a.ssuko tcho()baii<h-<l<>,
hliKjUsh foot.
Maya tine, nc,
Cliuancliiia... kio.
('anton koii.
Moitay r/io.
Emjiis/i sun.
Maya /./".
('olann koni.
Moan knufi.
Teiya knwcm.
TeiliMig k/ni(jwi.
]'ey kanjjuan.
Etiijlisli
Maya
(JhuaiH liii.i...
Kiujlish
Maya
Mean
Miairma
EtujUsh ...
Maya
Miamma
English
Maya
Maplu
Pa.ssuko ....
Kuglisli
Maya
Tonkin
Englisli .
Maya .
Tonkin.
Plav ....
English .
Maya....
Tonkin.
Ei)(/lis/i ...
Maya
Tonkin...
English
Maya ,
Pev ...,
moon.
.'/'"'•
star.
rk.
kic.
kgi.
water.
ha.
ga.
rain.
vhaac.
Ichdlvhnny.
Iftlcliu.
small.
vwhcn.
moil .
oat.
Iiauiil.
an.
aiig.
bird,
chcchilrli.
(cfiini.
li.sh
Ctl.
kn.
{jreat,
no/t.
via.
The Aeoina. — Two vocabnlario.s fvoin a tvibo from tlio I'uclilo
of »Saii l)oiniiif;;o, calling tlH'in.scIvo.s Kiwonii, and a third of the
Cocliitciui dial(>ct, collected iiy Wlii|»pi(', are compared, hy
Turner, with the Acoma , of which they are dialects. TnriKM'
proj>ose.s the names Keves for the group. IJusclimann, writiii;;"
ADDIONDA .\NI> COUltHI KXDA.
aun
110.
r rti niassf.
II.
er.
•c.
ic/taiiy.
at.
m.
■Itilch.
iit
Prom tlio, riioblo
fl a tliivd of tlio
coinimrod , Ity
nlccts. 'runuM
luniiim, writing
iiftor liim , says, "I namo this form of spoocli Ourra' — '• icli
iwniic (lies Idiom Qucrd."
Tlio notice of the "outward sii^iis" is not so clear as it
should be. It means that two of tlie lanj^iinges, the Tatts and
Zuui, nui into polysyllabic forms — probably (indeed almost
certainly) from composition or iuHexion; whereas the 'resu([ue
(which is placed in rnnlrnst with the Zuui) has almost a mono-
syllabic appearance. This ph(Miomenon a])i)ears elsewhere; r. y.
in the Attacajia, as comjiared with the tony'ues of its neighltour-
]u)od. Upon the whole, the Zuni seems to be nn)st aberrant of
the grouj) — saving the l\lo(|ui, which has decided I'adnca affnii-
ties. They are all, however, nmtnally unintelligible; though the
ditt'erences between them may easily be over-valued.
Enomsh. A(;nM.V.
7ii/in lialitratsc
woHiaii culm
/mil' lialitratiii ..
he(/>l luislikaiiie
/'are liowawinni
ei/c lioonainc...
nose ouisuine ...
moulh onicaiii
Cociuni.Mi:. KiwiiMi.
liaclitlio liatslitlio.
c'nyoni
ciiyauwi.
hatro.
naslilie.
skeoowa.
sliaaiia.
wiesliiii.
chiaca.
loiiyue watchlmntni uatsliin.
one ..
two ..
three
four
five ..
six ..
seven
eii.
iHiiua.
isk
i/lit
nine
ten ..
kiioiiii 'tiiomi.
i tsliabi.
cliaiii
kiatiH kiana.
tama.. ., taonia.
cliistli.
iisa ,
niaiuuiia maicliana.
c'ocoiiiisiiia.
COCIllMslli
niaeco niaioco.
'tkatz calitz.
Texas. —p. 101.
'Ini and Tachi are expressly stated to be
(!addo, &c. as it is from the name of the; last that the word Tents
IS (lerive(
U^(
— The name T'(/u<is is a nam(> (other than native)
of the po])ulation which calls itself Kiwomi. Word for Avord, this
may (or may not) be 'Vnos. It is only necessary to remendter the
com])lication here indicated. The exact tribes which gav(^ the
name to Texas has yet to be determin(Hl.
The mishitn.
Allied to one another the Kechis and Wacos
(lluecos) are, also, allied to tlie Witslnta. — Src Turnc>\ p. 68.
Kx(iLlSl[.
Mftn
woman ...
KlCIIAI.
lIl'K*
cainqiiaiioquts tixlukitz.
I'lu'ijnoike falilicii
(juitatso.
it.seii.so .
i.tskicstacat.
i.slilio.steatz.
itscot id'coli
400
ADDKNDA AM) OOUItlUKN'DA.
Knolisu.
KlCIlAI,
HlECO
eftr
atikoruso
(jnideeco
ort /
ei/e
kidik.
nose.
clmscuriU)
tisk.
inoulh ...
liukiniiik
alicok.
tunyue ...
liiil.tok
liotz.
tooth
jithueslio
alitk.
luind
iclifshene
ishk'ti.
fool
usinic
OS.
fire
yeconieto
kiokoli
hat/
water
kitsali.
o)ie
firishco
chcos
two
{ihoslio
wit/
lliree
taliwitlico
tow.
I'our
kitlinucote
tah(iuit/,.
/'we
xs'toweo
ishquitz.
]via*<h
six
nahitow
seven
tsowetiite
kiowhitz.
eifjlit
riaikiiiukatc ...
kiatoii.
rune
t .niorokat
clioskiltc.
ten
x'skani
skittfwas.
Turnor makes thcso three luiiguagos ]*awiii. In tlie pvescnt
text the Witsliita is made Caddo. It is made ko on the strength
of the numerals — perliaps overliastily.
That a language may be ]'a-\vni without cea.sing to he Caddo,
and Caddo Avithout losing its ])lace in tlie I'awni group is sug-
gested in the heginning of the paper. 'I'urner's table (p. 70),
short as it is , encoui-ages this view.
The truth is that th<^ importance of the Cnddos and l^awnis,
from an etlincdoglcal })oint of view, is inor<linately greater tliau
their importance in any other resp<>ct. Tliey are, however, but
iiji])erfectly known.
In Gallatin's first paper — the paper of the Archaiologla Ameri-
cana — there is a Caddo vocabulary and a Pawni vocabulary ;
and all that be said of tliem is that they are a little more like
each other, than they arc to the renmining specimens.
When the paper under notice was published the liiccaree was
wholly unknown. But the Uiccaree, wlien known, was sliewn to
be more PaAvni than aught else. This made the l^awni a kind of
nucleus for a class.
IP Somewhat Liter the Caddo confederacy in Texas took pro-
minence, and the Caddo became a nucleus also.
The true explanation of this lies in tlie highly probably fact
tnat both the Caddo and I'aAvni are nunnbers of one and the same
class. At the same tinu', I am ([uite prej)ared to find that tlie
Witsliita (thongli compared with the Caddo by myself) is more
]iarticularly I'aAvni.
IMiat the nearest congeners of the Caddf) and ]'; \v;ji class
were the members of the Irocpiois, Woccoon, Chorokce, and
AUDKXDA AX1» COlUlHiKNUA.
401
II tlio present
n the stvengtli
to be Cndtlo,
group is suj;-
tnble (p. 70),
and l^auiiis,
•greater tluiu
however, but
ob)gla Auieri-
i vocabulary ;
tUe more like
us.
lliccaroo was
Avas sliewu to
wni a kind of
xas took pro-
probably fact
and tlie sauu>
Hud tliat tlie
's(df) is more
1 r. vvui class
urokce, aud
Chocta grou]) I believed at an early period of luy investigations;
at a time (so to say) IxI'ore the Jiiccarees, aud the Califor-
niau pf»pulatious were invented. If this doctrine wore trtie,
the Caddo (Pawui) affinities Avould run eastwards. 'IMiey may do
this, and run westwards also. That they run eastwards I still
b(dieve. But 1 have also secMi (Jaddo and I'awui affinities in
California, 'j'lie (?addo nunu'ral one = vliistc ; in Secumne aud
Cushna ivihic , wiktcm. Again the (Jaddo and Kichie for fviilrr ■ ~
ko/io, kioksli. ^leanwhile kik is a true Mo<|U(duniue form. This
I get from a most cursory inspection; or rather from memory.
Upon the principle that truth comes out of error more easily
than confusion I give the folloAving notice of the distribution or
Avant of distribution of th(^ numerous Texian tribes.
1. *Coshattas — Unknown.
2. Towiach — Tawni (V).
3. Lipan — Athabaskan (V).
4. *Alish, or Eyish — Caddo (V).
5. *Acossesaw — UnknoAvn.
6. Navaosos - NaA'ahosC?).
7. *Mayes — Attacapa (V).
8. *Cances — UnknoAvu.
9. Toncahuas — Are these the TonkaAvays , amounting, accord-
ing to Stem, to 1152 souls V If so , a specimen of their language
shotild be obtained. Again — arc they the 'i^mcardsV Are they
the Tunicas? If so, they may speak Choctah.
10. Tuhuktukis — xVre these the Topofkis, amounting to 200
soixlsV If so a specimen of their language, lUt uominr , is attain-
able.
11. Unatac[uasi or Andarcos — They ann)iint, according to
Stem, to 202 souls. No vocabulary, co nomine, knoAvn. Capable
of being obtained.
12. Mascovie — UnknoAvn.
13. LiAvani or loni — Caddo? Amount to 113 souls. Speci-
men of language, eo nomine, capable of being ol)tained.
14. AVaco — - AVico? — PaAvni.
15. *Avoyelle — UnknoAvn.
16. 17. AVashit'i — Kicho — Pawni.
]H. *Xaramene — UnknoAvn.
19. *Caicache — UnknoAVU.
20. *Iiidias — UnknoAvn.
21. Caddo — Caddo.
22. Attacapa — Attacapa.
23. Adahi — Adahi.
24. Cok(; — Carackahua.
Carankahua — Attacapa (?).
2G
402
AIj1>I:M^V A\I» COKltKiF.NDA.
26. Towacano — Niiiiil»rrin{i; 141 nouIs. Is tliis Towiach?
•27. Hitclii - Kiel. i (y).
•iH. *N'i\ii(hik(). <
'19. *NMba(lacli('s. i
("add.. (V)
M). •''Vata.ssi.
ai. *>iaf('liitoclios,
H2. *Naco<;(l(icli('s.^ Adalii (?)
\
\VA. Kcycs.
'I'liesc last may bolong' as luucli to Louisiana as to 'I'cxas —
as, iiulccd , may some of tlic others. 'JMiose marked * arc
apj)areutly extinct. At any rate, they are not found in any et'
the recent notices.
Finally, jMr lUirnett mentions the San J*edro Indians.
The previous list sheAvs that the olditeration of tlu^ ori};inal
trihes of Texas has been very j;reat. It shews us this at the first
view. lUit a little reflection tells us something more.
Like Kaii/.as and Nebraska, Texas seems to have scarcely any
languages that is peculiar to itself; in this respect standing in
strong contrast to Calil'ornia. The Caddo b(dongs to the frontier.
The Pawni forms of speech occur elsewhere. The Adahi is ])ro-
baly as much the property of Louisiana as of Texas. The Cu-
manch, ( -liocta &c. are decidedly i'.itrusive. The nearest ajipn
acli to a true I exian torm ot sjieccli is the Attaca}>a.
der it is isolated.
The Adahi, is has, at least the foUowing affinities.
No won-
Kiifjlisli iii.'iii.
Adnlii Iitnisiiu).
Otto w(i/is/i(u'(/ne.
Oiioiulafi^o ... ciscliinulv.
Abenaki s('eininhc=^vir.
,, iii('Ji(in1)e:=ilioino.
EiKjIis/i wmnati.
A<hilii f/iaicc/iiikf.
Mn.ski.;;'f Itolctlc.
(.'lioctali Iiiillokoluji).
OsHj^e wako.
Sack and l'\>x /mu/oki/i.
Ilinois irkoc.
i\'atiticok(! ... arf/uti/tii/i/c.
] )ela\varc okliqiicli.
Algoiikin &c st/naii'.
'i'acMilli vluicii.
E))(jlislt j;ii'l.
Atlalii (pinativinlurk.
Cliilvkasaw .. lake.
Clioutali villii Ink.
Caddo Imtluilcsseh.
< )neida cniildZdi.
Jlicniai.' epidek.
Eiu/Hsli child.
Adalii fnl/a/ieni/iq.
,, liiUnluivhi'=-lio]/.
Om.'iliJiw sliiiigii .v/nn/j//.
Otto clifechinjid.
Qtiappa slirljfinkii.
K)HjUsh father.
Adalii kriranick.
Clietimaclia. . kinct/liic.
Cliikkasaw ... unki/.
Olioetali nuiikke.
Eiiij!is/i mother.
Adalii (inutnir.
Caddo chncli.
iSiou.x enah, cchong.
ADDKNDA AND f'OKUKiKN'MA.
403
i) TowiacliV
I as to 'I'cxas —
>o iiiarkcd * arc
found ill any of
1 of tlio ori^iiiMl
IS tliis at the iirst
avo scarcely any
ipcct staudiiij;- in
;'s to the frontier,
ho, Adalii is |»ro-
IVxas. Tlio Cii-
ncarost ajipro-
ica]»;i. No woii-
Tuflcnror.'i out.
WyHndot anclteh.
Kenny tiuiui.
lOskinio (iiiiaiiKt.
Eiijjlisli Inisband.
Adalii hascliinu.*
Cli(.'timac'l.;i hic/ic/i/isr.
Wincl»ii<;<> I'fkuiKili.
Tfunilli fici.
Tcliiiktclii idka.
Kngllsit wife.
Adfilii i/uo(/ieki>i(ik.
,, </nrirrhuke~ wiiiiKin.
Tuscarura rkciiiiif/-~t/o.
('lieroUiie fi(j('//uiiy^= woiiiuii,
Cliotiniaelia hic/irkif/iia.
,, hiclieltu.se =^vi(iii.
E)t(jlis/i son.
Adaiii tnlleltennie.
Cuddo hiniiittluitrseh.
Onialiaw cei>i(/i/ai.
Minetaro eijiut/fjai.
Winobafj^o ceneek.
Uiuiida .'/""/7.
Kiifjii.sh brother.
Adahi f/nsiug.
.Salish asinltali
Ottawa sdi/in ---elder.
Ojibbeway usi/ (dciiia.
Knyliah liead.
Adahi locliitke.
Caddo da(hunke(t^=: face.
,, dokimdsa.
E>i(/lis/i hair.
Adalii calaluck.
(Jhippewyan .... lliicijali.
Kenay sziajo.
Miami kcclitii/efi=^f(icc.
Knijlish face.
Adahi tniiiatk,
Chctimach;i kanekcln.
Attaeapa iune.
Eskimo keniuk.
English ear,
Adahi cahil.
(.'horokee (jide.
Passamaquoddy chiilksee.
Englixli nose.
Adahi irccoocuf.
Moiitaug cochiji/.
IMicmac uchichun.
Eiifflish beard.
Adalii lasoral.
Attaeapa taesh = hnir.
NacIiL'/. ptsitmniji'—^ hair.
(Mictiinachi cliutlie.
Enijlish arm.
Adalii ivalnd.
Taciilli old.
Chippcwyaii ... Imr.
Enfjlisn nails.
Addlii sic/csa/tiiscfi.
Catawba C( ks///jcctih= hinid.
Natchez isjtehse- ■hanil.
KiKjIinh belly.
Adahi noei/ovk.
Wincbago.... in chahlndi
I'lskimo ueii/iik.
Enijlish lef,'.
Adahi /ihosiick — - lei/.
Chetimach;! siinknudie- ^ fed.
,, saiikiilii'- tues.
t, sun =- leg.
Osajro siiijuugli.
Vaiuton hitu.
Otto ]ii,i).
Pawnee iishoiiz =find.
Sionx sec, sech(di=^ do.
Nottoway . . sftseeke^ ■ do.
Dacota seeliuknsa^~tucs.
Nottoway seckc =^ do.
English mouth.
Adahi waeatchoUik.
Chetimaeha iha.
Attaeapa kail.
Caddo ibinchwatehu.
Natchez heclie.
]\[oliawk wuclisacarlunt.
Seneca wuchsagidud.
Sack and Fox .. wektonch.
Mohican otouii.
English tongue.
Adahi Icnttunl.
Chetimaeha httcne.
Uche coolinc(di.
(■hoctah issoonlush.
Kni.stetianx olni/enee.
Ojibbeway utinnani.
Ottawa tcnunian.
2G*
401
ADDliNUA AM) <'(>i;KIi ii:\f»A.
i, ■
\ ■
I'liijilish li.'iiid.
Adalii srciil.
, _ sickstipusra-r.utii/s,
f'lioi'tali .s/iii/ifi(i~-/iis itriu.
CliilikasHw nhiililidli-tlit.
.Miisk();,''e y(ik})ir. lilt.
KiMiHv skoiia.
At.tacdiui iiish(i(jji-=lii)(icvs.
( Mnaliaw s/it/(/iii.
Osa^c nIukjiiIi.
Mdliawk sliiikc.
Yaiicton sltiil;<ii:=:^n<iils.
()tt( slt(ljl<li~rz(lu.
I'liijlUsh blood.
Ailalii pvlimk.
Caddo IhiiiIki.
I'assaitN'uiiiuddy p"cii(/uii.
Alicuaki //ii!//i/clcafiii.
Moliican jKirnijhknn.
Naiiticokc piic/tCiic/ct/iKt.
Miami nilipcvkunui'li.
Kii<jlish reil.
Adalii pvchtisdi.
NutLdiiiZ pa/iLop.
E>irjlis/i foet.
Adalii iKirtiL
Micmac uliknat.
Miami kata/t.
TuLMilli ura.
(Jliippowvaii ... cit/i.
Iliiiois /lickn/ild^^h'i/,
Delaware ivikliudt^^do.
Massacliiisetis inulikoul-^^du.
Ojibbeway ok(ti=<fo.
Eiifjiixh bone,
Adiilii li'ii/iiicnl.
Otto ivalioo.
Yfincton Iimt.
Dacotii Itodlnid.
Ojibbeway okun.
Miami kdnnih.
Eslvimo /icownik .
,, ouccyuk,
KiitjUsli bouse.
Adnlii codcliul.
Nacliez Imliil.
Muskofre clidokiidw.
Clioetab c/iiikkd.
Catawba sook.
Taeiilii i/itrk.
Kiii/Hsfi bread.
Adalii dk/iiipin.
( lietimaelia Inicltrpal vhcpn.
I'liijilisli sky.
Adalii i/ii/iick.
iSeiKHia kiiiiii/d(jc.
EiijiUsh .. siinimcr.
Adalii wfi'/surk.
IJclll' IL'llilCf.
F.iHflisli iiro.
Adabi iidtiij.
Caddo luikn.
Jv-ikiitio itjiiiick.
,, fkidik.
,, aiiiiak.
Eidjlish uioiiiitaiii.
Adalii tdldhi.
'I'aculli dicll.
I'lufjlish stono, rod.
A<labi vkseho.
Caddo svccekd-
Naeliez o/ik.
EiKjIisIt maize.
Adalii ocdsmk.
Nacliez Itokko.
En(jHsh day.
Adalii iH'sldcli.
Miiskoofe ni/luli.
Cli'kkasaw iiiltuvk.
Clioetab idltok.
/C)iijli,s/i autumn.
Adalii huatalncclsuck.
(Jhoctali liuslUnlape.
(.'liikka.saw hustilloiiionn.
,, hu.slola= winter,
EiujUah bird*.
Adabi wdslumy.
l.'boctali Itiislie.
Sack and l''ox... ivislikainon.
Sliawnoe iviskilulliL
KngJish fjoose.
Adabi nivkkuicka.
Clietimaclia napiclie.
Ilinois nivak.
Ojiblieway nickak.
Delawari! kauk.
Sliawnoe iicrake.
AtH)i;Ni>\ A\i' ('<>i!im<;i:nii v.
I Of)
hreiid.
1 1 /< /ill pin.
lnivlieiKil rlii'iiii.
sky.
f/anici,'.
/dniii/iqji:.
siinimer.
wri't.smk .
wdiUw.
iiro.
iitniij.
niiko.
iijiiitrk.
fkiink.
unntik.
uioiinltiiii.
tuldlil.
c/tclt.
stoiio, rod.
cksckfi .
ficcceko.
o/ik.
mtiize.
ocnsiick.
Iiokko.
(lay.
vesUirli.
nillult.
nilluvk.
iiillok.
iiutumn.
huslnlncclsHck.
Iius/Unlape.
ImHtilloinnna.
husinla:^:^ winter.
bird'.
iras/uiiiy.
Iiiislie.
nnslikamon.
wiskilullii.
'i'oose.
nickkuicktt.
iNipic/ic.
nicuk.
nickak.
knt/k.
iici'uke.
Kiii/!i\/i (liiclc.
Adfilii nlnnk.
lixkiiiio ciri/rk.
E»fjlis/i lisli.
Adniii tiesiif.
Cherokee atsidili.
Ettijlisli tree.
Adnlii... liuKiik.
Drtcota Isc/k/iij.
lliuois tiiiiiKtiw.
Miiiini l(iHiinvh:^^ii<oi)il.
I'lDjiliah fijnix.s.
Adalii Iitistick.
Cliikk.i.siivv Itusdok.
Clioi'tali /iiis/n'/iii<k,
I'«'ll(' l/fl/lSll/l-- l('tl/\
t'liikkiisaw /ii.s/ic~--(l().
I'lujjlisli doer.
Adalii iiuikhiiic.
Ifflie , wujiwiij.
English .si(iiJrr(d.
Adalii enuck.
.•^ack and T'ox... uni'fkn'nh.
Naiitifolii! niiwckkii).
Aliciiaki anikt'ssi's.
Kiiiyteiiaux tinnirkuc/i'is.
hlniilisli old.
Adalii Iii(n\niiii-
Caddo Imni(islcl(li.
Noftow.iv onulmlif.
ICniiUsli
lod.
Ailalii inrislr.
I>acota hiijin'dshUi.
Y'auctoii ii'iishlui.
KiiiiHsli 1.
Adalii nnssicnn.
Cherokee nnski.
Kni/lis/i kill.
Adiilii i/i)cick.
Caddo i/iikni/.
Catawlia ccknuii/.
/un/lis/i two.
Adalii nds.s.
Aly^oiikiii, vS:c. ... nis, ncss , nccs.
Mcxico-C.itiitcnuthi, — 'V\u' details of tlio lMn<j;iin<i:o,s of ^l(>xin)
iiind (fuatcmabi tliat aro iicitluM- ^Icxieaii Proper (Astek) or ^faya
are difliiult. Availliifj; myself of the inforiiiatioii afVordcMJ liy my
friend }\v. Squier, and the hililioyrapliieal leaniiii}^ of Ludwi}^-,
U .".Hi inclined to believe
1. That all the following forms of speech are ^laya ; viz.
IChiajia, 'JV.endal (Oeldal) , (Miorti, Mam, I'ocoman (I'oconchi),
I'opulnca, (Quiche, Kachiqnel , /ntnj^il (Vutukil), Iluastera.
2. 'J'hat the Zoqne, Utlateca, and Lacondona may or may not
|lio iMaya,
3. That the Totanaca; and
4. The Mixteca arc other than Maya.
5. That, if the statement of llervas he correct, the Zajioteca,
Itlic Mazateca, the (/hinansteca, and the .Mixe are in the same,
Itatej^ory.
The Tlapancka according to llmnholdt is a peculiar hmguage.
I — Liulwig in voc.
I have done, lunvevci', little or nothing, in the way of first hand
I Work with the languages to the South of Sinaloa and the West
<|f Texas. I therefore leave them — leave them with a reference
to LudAvig's valuable 13ibliotheca Glottica, for a correction of my
statement respecting the non-existence of any Indian forms of
speech in New Grencada. The notices under v. v. An'DAQUIes,
I I
400
.\IM»I;M>.\ AM> ( i»|;UHii;M»A.
(JocuNitKts, ('•.Ki:i:(ii'A.ii;8, (Ji A(.>ri;s, In(;a\<»s, will slicw lliat tlii>
is I'mt tVoiu lit'iiiy,' tlic cMSf.
'I'll
P
• rt'sciit piipcr liiis "uiir over so
l"M>
Imt-m
;i |)oi'tii)ii III'
Noitli Aiiicrii'ii tliiit it is a jiity imt ti» ;;•(» ovci' tlu' rcniMiiidi'r.
Tlic ('tliiiol(ij;;y (if the ('iinjulii, iiiiil the I'.ritisli |i(»ss('ssioiis akin
to ( 'aiiada iMintaiiis little wliicli is iici'lu'r I'iskiniK (ir .\li:nii|<iii,
lrn(|iiois or Atlialiaskaii. ( H' new for lis oC siiccrli like those uf
liicli ()n'"'oii and Calit'oniia liavc
»('ii so iiiaiiv nistanocM it
('\liil»its noiH'. Kvcrytliing l»('loiij;s to oiu' of tin' four almvi
naiiK'd cdasscs. Tlic nctliiick of Newfoundland was Al"oiikii
as
and so W'l're the lUackfoot, tiie Shyenne and Ariajialio, Indeed,
lias licen already stated, the Kskinio and Atliahaskaii stretch Jicmss
the ('oiitinent. The I'dackfoot toudies the |{ocky ^loiiiitaiiis.
( >f the Sioux idass the Uritish possessions shew a saiii]de. Thr
lied l\iver district is Assiiudioiii ; the Assinehojn.s heiiij^' Sioux.
So are a f'-w other liritish trilies.
I' poll the Avliole, however, live well -known families ;;i\-c
lis
that Indoii!;' to Uritish ^Vinerica to tli(( lOast of the I
luckv
Moiintains. As th(^ jiresent jiaper is less upon the ^\l;;oiikiii,
Sioux and like classes than upon the ilistriluition of iaiiyiiai^cs
over the ditVereiit areas of North America this is as iiiucli as iici'd
he said upon the suliject.
For the Northern two-thirds of the I'nited States, KksI itf Ihr
Mississ//tj)i,' {\\(' same rule applies. The Si<nix area he;j;iiis in
the \V(\st. The Al^'onkin class, of which the most Nortle'ri
branch helonii's to Lahrudor, where it is conterminous with ihi
Ksk
imo,
and winch on
the Avest contains the lUackfoot readi
es
as far south as South (^-irolina -— the Nottoways hein^' Al^onkiii.
'I'he enormous extent of this area has heen snfliciently enlar;;t'([
on. ^[eanwhile , like islands in an ( )cean , two lro((iiois district
shew themselves. 'i\» the north tlie lro([Uois, Ilurons and otiicisl
touch the Lakes and the (^'lnadians frontier, entircdy separated
fi'om the Tnscarorus who j;'ive a separate and is(dated ar(!a in
(*alifornia. Whether tlie lro((uois area, once continuous, lias
heen hri>ken-up hy Algonkin encroachments, or whether tlic
Iroquois &c. have been pi'ojected into the Alj-'onkin area fvoiii
the, South, or, whethen t'ire vrrsa, the Tuscaroras are to bo consi-|
deved as offsets from the i<orth is a matter for investiiration. Tlic
tl
icrc
present writer believes that south of N. Jj. 4j. (ther(! or
about) the Algonkins are intrusive.
N. L. 35. cuts the (,!lier(dvee, theAVoccoon, the f^itawba, aii(l|
the (Uiocta area — to tlie west of which lies of the JNIississijipi.
lietween the frontier of Texas, the aforesaid parallel, and tin'
Ocean we have Florida, ^Vlabama, Mississi])pi, and Louisiana.
Now here the dis])lacement has been considerable. The pint
played by the Algonkins, Iroquois, and (it may be added) the Siniixl
.\l»l»l:.NI»A AMI COUUKiKN'hA.
I hlicw tliiit tills H !*< line |tlayc(| 1^ tlic ( 'IhTikccs , tlic ( 'liticf;\Iis , ninl tlii' ('recks.
Wli.ilfvcr is uilicr tliMii Crfck, ( 'Imcljili, ami ( 'li.'rnk''f is in ji
riM;;'ni('uliiry rnrni. Tlic (lct;ul.s of wIimI wc know tliioiiyli vtn-ii-
' ;i portion of
tlui rniiniiiilcv.
lOHSi'ssloiis ;ikiii
o or Al,L:'oiikiii,
•li liivC tllOSC of
ny instances it
liic I'our aliovc-
was Al;;'oiik!ii,
alio, liuli'i'd, MS
111 strctcli across
ic'ky ^loiiiitaiiis.
ii sMiinil*'. 'riif
IS Id'iiig Sioux. I
famirics ^Ivc us
t ol' llio lloclsV
11 the Al^oukiii,
ui of iauii'iia'-'cs
lull
niics art' as
loll
ows ;
I. Till' ll'nrrnii - cxtiiK't, iintl allied to
•J. Till' ('iiliiwhd -also extiiu't. 'I'liese lieloii';('(| to llie ('aro-
linas. Tlie W'ocroii and ( 'atawlin voealnilaries are nieutioiied in
the Mitliridates.
\*t. Till' Ti/ii/iia — see Ludwiu;.
4. 'Till' Tiiiiiinnttiiiii -see ji. ,^77.
.'). Till' Trill' of this wc find a siieeinien in tlie Arclia'(do;;,ia
Americana. 'I'Ik^ trilte l((don,u,s to the ( 're(d< fonfederacy and
imist lie in a very fraj;ineiitary state.
(i. Till' Siilrlii'z u\\ the JMississijipi, faeini; the ( 'a(
Allah
Till' Cliiliiniii'liii. — In l.onisiana. N'oealnilary in .ii rlnrithiijiu
Jitii'ririinii.
In the way (d' internal evidence (/. f. the evidence of speciniens
if lan^iia;;(') this is all we have Avliat may l»c called Ih • Irmi-
I'liliiri/ laiiiiiia^'es of the Sonth Kastern jiortion of the I'nited
States. Of tii(< Choctah, Creek, <'hikkasali,
d r\
KM'okee we
as much as uiimI | liav(^ an alMuidance, just as we have of the Alji'onkin and I'skinu).
It is, however, the fragmentary trilies , the prohald" representa
ates, Knsl of llir
area l)ej:;ins in
most Nortli'Tii
ninous with the
lackfoot readies I
beinj;' Al;;onkiii.
cleutly eular^vil I
lro([iiois district
urons and otln'isl
itircdy separated
isolated area in
continuous, lias
ov wlietlier the
inkiu area i'rmiil
< are to he cmisi-
s-estigatiou. Tiic
il
tives ot the al)ori;j|inal ]iiipniatiou, winch \\v, more es^ieci;
sec
k.
iiy
As may Ite expected the fraij'mentary lan{^'uajj;es are (comjiara-
tlvely Hpeakinji,) isolated. The NVoccou and ('atawha, indeed,
are thrown into the same class in the ^Milhridates : Init the Xatclie/
and Tche are, hy no means, closely akin. Why slnnild they he?
Such transitional forms as may once have existed have iieen oh-
literated. Nevertheless, hotli have misc(dlaneons aflinities.
So unich for th(^ languages represented hy s|>ecimens. In the
way of external evidence 1 go no further than the Mithridates,
and the Arclneologla.
With the exception of the AVoccons th(> Catawha and a few
words from the Tinniacana, the Mithridates, gives no s]»ecinH'ns —
save and except those of the ('hoctah, ('h(>rokees, and ('hikkasah.
These two last it looks upon as the representative languages and
calls them ;1/o/y///rt// from Mohile. Hence, the (juestion which was
(ther(; or tlicvcB put in 'I'exas is, iniitnlis iniiliini/is, put in Florida. What languages
le C^atawha, audj
e IMississijipi.
paralhd, and tlic|
md Louisiana,
rahle. The pint I
added) the Sioux
are jNIohilianV What other than Alohiliau V
The Woccons are: either only or chieHy known througli a work
(if Jjawson's. 'I'hey were conterminous with the Algonkin I'amti-
coughs (intrusive?), and the ( "herokees.
'i'he (^'itaAvha lay to tlu^ south of the Woccon. Their congeners
are said to he
1. The Watarce :
40S
ADDENDA AND ('((KRIOKNDA.
2. The Eono — C'oinjjavP this name with the Texian Iiii;
3. 'J'hc fMiowiih, or Chowan;
4. ^riio ('on^-aree;
a. "^rhe Nachee — Compare witli Natchez; word for word ;
G. The Vamassee ;
7. The (!o(>sah — Compare (word for Avord) Coosada, and
Co.shatta.
In the Sonth lay the Tinuiacana — of which a few words heyond
the numerals arc given.
In West Fhirida and Alabama, the evidence (I still follow tlio
Mithridates) of Dr. Pratz scarcely coincides witli that of the ac-
count of Alvaz Nunez de Vaca. 'I'his runs thus.
In the island of Malhado were spoken languages of
1. The Caoques;
2. The' Han.
On the coast —
3. The Choruico — Cherokee?
4. The Doguenes.
Q. The IMendica.
6. The Quevenes.
7. The JMariames.
H. The Gualciones.
9. The Yguaces.
10. The Atayos — AdahiV This seems to liave been a native
name — ^^ die sick Alaijos ?ietincH."
11. The Acubadaos.
12. The (jjuitoles.
13. The Avavares — Avoyelles?
14. I'he Muliacone.
15. The Cutalchiche.
16. The Susola.
17. The Como.
18. The (!amole.
Of migrants from the East to the West side of the Mississippi,
the Mithridates gives —
1. The Pacana, conterminous with the Attacapas.
2. The Pascagula.
3. The Biluxi.
4. The Appalache.
The Tacnsa are stated to be a branch of the Natchez.
The Caouitas are, perhaps, word for word the Conchattas;
also the Coosa, Coosada, Coshatta.
The Stincards are, Avord for word, the Tancards = Tiincas^=
Tunic. 'S.
Dr. Hibley gives us Chclimarha as a name; along with speci-
ADUKNDA ANI> (DKUKiKXDA.
400
iiKMis of tlic Chctiinaelia, Uclie, Natclicz, Atlalii, and Attacnpa as
laiij^nagTs.
Coosada, and
e been a native
rds = Tuficas=^
ong with speci-
Word for word, Che It mar ha seems to Chrcimcca ; Apitdusu,
Jpalach; Bilu.vi (pcu-liaps the same); Pascagoula ^ MuscoguUje.
How, however, did Chiehimcca get so far westwards':*
We are scarcely, in the condition to specnhate nmch con-
cerning details of the kind. It is snfticient to repeat the notice
that the native hmgnages of the parts in question are in a frag
mentary condition; the llchc being the chief representative of
them. Whether it were Savaficnc*, or not, is uncertain. It is,
certainly, uof SliaAvanno, or Shawno, /. e. Algonkin, On the con-
trary it is, as is to be expected, from the encroachments and dis-
placements of its neighbourhood a very isolatetl language — not,
however without miscellaneous affinities — inter alia the followinff.
English sky.
Uclie haipoiing.
Cliiccasaw ... uhhah.
Catawba wahpeeh.
Eiifjliith d iiy .
I'clie iickkah.
Attiicajia ((7^/.
Cherokee ikah.
Mnskoje hi!iia(jU)/=:^- light.
Clierokee eguh^^do.
Catawba heakuh=^(lu.
Delaware ... n>akheii = il().
Narrag^ wequid-:::^du.
Mapach do = rlo.
English summer.
llche wailce.
Adaize weelsuck.
English winter.
I'che wishluh.
Natchez kwishitseUtkop.
Cliiecasaw ... huslolah.
ISeneca ovshut.
I'jiglish wind.
Uche ahwiinuh.
Caddo houeto.
Muskoje holulleye.
English raiu.
Uche chanh.
Clietimaclia.. kni/a.
Attacapa caucau.
C.'id'lo rnwiohe.
English river.
Uclie Uiuh.
Salish saiiitk.
Catawba eesauh.
English tree.
Uche ijiih.
Caddo iiako.
Attacape k'/gg-
Catawba jiup.
Quappa gon.
KsquimaTix... keiyu = wni)d.
Yaiicton chfi = ivood.
Catawba gag = oak.
English leaf.
Uche gahsuh.
Muskoghe ... iltohise = hair of tree
= itta tree.
Cliiecasaw ... hoshsha.
Cheetah itte hishe.
English deer.
Uche wagnng.
Adalii wukhine.
Cherokee ahiehih.
English bear.
Uche ptsaka.
Natchez Isukuhp.
English bird.
Uche psenna.
Caddo hinviit.
Tiiscar tcheenuh.
Ilinois pineusen.
* More languages than one arc thus named. See p. 375 for a Savaneric
in Veragua.
410
ai>i»i;m»a and roijiuciKNiiA.
Ottjiwa heniuiiscwiiy.
Ojihliwji piunisi.
Enfj'isli ti-li.
I'elie pol^fiixi.
C'iuUlr) hiilla.
ilirietari hou.
Sucli oiir skctfli of tlio. details. Tlicy f^ivc lis www affinities
than the, current statements concerninj;' the (jlossarial dirt'erences
between tlie languages ttf tlio New World suj^'j^est. It is also he
added that tlioy scarcely conlirni the equally common doctrine
rcspectinj^" their (jruwmnlical likeness. iJoing this, they encourage
criticism, and invite research.
'J'here is a considerable amount of nftinity: but it is often of
that miscellaneous character which battles rather than promotes
dassihcation.
'l'her(^ is a considerable amount of aflinity ; but it does not,
always, shew its(df on the surface. I will give an instance.
One of the iirst series of words to Avhicli philologu«\s wdio ha\e
only vocabularies to deal -with have recourse, contains the numerals ;
which are, in many cases, the first of words that the philological
collector makes it his business to bring honu' with him from rude
iMumtries. So generally is this case that it may safely be said
that if we are without the inunerals of a language we are, in nine
cases out of ten, without any sample at all of it. Their value as
sam])les for philological pm-poses has been noticed in more than
one paper of the present writer's her(i and elsewhere^; their value
in the way of materials for a history of Arithmetic being evident
— evidently high.
V>\\t the ordinary way in which the comparisons are made be-
tween the numerals gives us, very often, little or notliing hut
broad ditt'erences and strong contrasts. Take for instance the
following tabhis.
English. Eskimo. Ai.ki'iian. Kamskahai.k.
one atjinu'U nttakon kcnnnis.
livo nialgok iiUuk nittium.
three piiiajut kjinkini tslmsliqiiat,
I'oiie istainat Iliitsliin tsliaslicha.
five tatliinat sshang kooiiidas.
No wonder that the tongues thus represented seem unlike.
Hut let us go farther — in the first place reniendjering that, in
most cases, it is only as far as /?iv' that the ruder languages have
distinct nunu>rals ; in other Avords that from six onwards they
count upon the same principle as W do after ten, i. c. they join
together some two, »n' more, of the previous numerals ; even as we,
by adding seven and (ni^ make sciH'ti-lecn. The exact details, of
course, difl'er; the general principle, however, is the same viz.:
that after jive the mnnerals become, more or less, compound,
just as, with us, they become so after Icn.
AKDI'.NUA AM) ('()K1!I(J KNDA.
4lt
AVitli this prclimiuary obscrv.-ition U-t us ask wliat will ho thn .
Kaiiiskadahr for seven avIkmi nillaiiu = Iwo, and JiHindas = five.
Tho ansAvor is oitlier nitldmi-kumilas or ktiDithts-nillanu. Hut tlio
Kamskadalc lui|)poiis to liavc a separate word for m", viz. Idelntux.
What theuV The word for ftt ven may he one of two thinj^'s it may
either ==■ G + I, or j + -• The former heiiig the case, and
kemmis = onc^ tlic Kamskadale for neven slioidd he either Icemmis-
/nl/ciKts or kilkoas-heininis. Hut it is ueitlier one nor the other. It
is ittakh-lcmi. Now as ciylil ■=■ Islink-lenu Ave kuoAv this Avord to he
compound. Hut Avliat are its elements V AVe fail to tind them
amongst the simpler Avords expressiA'o of one, /wv», three, four,
five. We fail to find them amongst these if Ave look to the
Kamskadale only — not, hoAvcA'er, if Ave go farther. The Aleutian
for one :=^ (tlldknn ; the Aleutian for six zn^ dltu-on. And what
might 1)0 the Aleutian for seven Y Ea'cu nllttkli-allun , litth' more
than illakh lenu in a broader form.
'J'ho Jukahiri giA'es a similar phenomenon.
Such is the notice of tlie care Avith Avhicli certain comparisons
should he made before Ave venture to commit ourselves to nega-
tiA'e statements.
'['here is an affinity amongst the American languages, and (tliere
being this) there are also the elements of a classification. 'I'luMua-
jority, hoAvever, of the Americanlanguages must be classified accor-
ding to lijpes rather than de/inilinns. I'pon the nature of this differ-
ence, as Avell as upon the cause I have Avritt(Mi more fully else-
Avlierc. It is sufficient for present purposes to say that it applies to
the languages of North Americain genera], and (of these) to those
of the jtarts beyond the Kocky ^Fountains nmre especially. Eskimo
characteristics appear i)i the Athabaskan, Athabaskan in the
Kolucb forms of speech. F oni these the ][aidah leads to the
(Jhiunnesyan (Avhich is, ueA'ertheless , a very outlying form of
.speech) and the JIailtsa, akin to the Hillechula, Avhich, itself,
loads to the Atiia. Hy slightly raising the value of the class Ave
bring in the Ivutani, the Nutkan and the Chinuk.
In the (Miinuk neighbourhood av(> move via the .fakon, Kahir
puya, Sahaptin, Shoshoni, and Jjufuanii to the languages of Cali-
fornia and the I'ueblos; and thence soutliAvards.
In American languages sim])lo com]»arison does but little. We
n\ay test this in tAvo Avays. We may place, side by side, two
languages knoAvn to be undoubtedly, but also knoAvn to be not
very clos(dy, allied. Such, for instance, are the (Jennan and
(jlreek, the Latin and Ivussian , the English and liithuanic, all of
Avhich are Indo-European, and all of Avliich , Avlien placed in
simple juxta-position, by no means shoAv themscdves in any very
palpable manner as such. This may be seen from the following
tabic, Avhich is far from being tlie first Avhich the present Avritev
412
ADIU'.NDA AM) r'OKUIOKXnA,
lias coin|)il(>(l ; and that with tlio special view of asc(M'taiiiin<j hy
induction (and not a priori) the value of coniparison.s of the kind
in ([iicstion.
lvN(ii,i,sii. li.VTi.v. Cayiisi:.
mjiii liomo yUfiiit
woman tniilier jjintklilkiiiu .
fatlicr ])aler piiitet ,
motlicr iiiatrr pcnin ,
sou filiiis Will
(1au<iliter Hlia wtli ...,
head ,.. caput talsli
linir criiiis tkhlokumut .,
ear uuiU taksli
eye ocultis hUkamiisli ....
nu.se niisiis pitkhlokeri ...,,
mouth OH 8nmkhak.sli....,
ton^ruc Wijina push
toulh dens tcnif ,
hand manus cpip
fin^cr.s digit! epip
feet pedes tish
hlood sanguis tiwcnsh ,
house doinus nisht
axe SGCuris yengthukin-sh
knife uultcr sliekt
shoe.s ealcei taitklilo
sky civlum ndjahiwaia.
sun...
moon
star
day...
night
sul hiiewi.sh
luiui katkhltn])
Stella tkhlikliMsh
dies eweiu
uux ftalp
tire ignis tetsli
water aqua ii^kkaini.sli
rain pluvia tishtkitkiilmiting
snow 7iix poi
earth terra lingsh
river rivits lushmi
stone lapis tipit
tree arhor lauik
meat car< pithuli
dog canis uilapang
beaver castor pieka
bear ursa limeaksh
bird avi.s tianiyiwa
great magnus yaumna
cold frigidiis slmnga
white albns tklilaklkhlako ...
black nigcr sh]viipshl<upu
red ruber lakaitlakaitn
I ego ining
thou tu niki
he ille nip
one units na
WlLLAMKT.
atshanggo.
punimaike.
sima.
sinni.
tawakhai.
tsiiiiapinna.
taniutklii.
amntkhl.
pokta.
kwalakkh.
unan.
mandi.
mamtshutkhl.
pi'iti.
tlakvva.
alakwa.
puiif.
meLiuu.
hammeih (—fire),
kliucshtan.
hekemistali.
ulumof.
aniiank.
ainpiun.
utap.
atuininank.
nmpiuni.
atitshikini.
hammeih.
mampnka.
nkwii.
nukpeik.
linnkhalop.
mantsal.
andi.
htuitawativhl.
umhuk.
mantal.
akaipi.
alotufan.
pdkalfuna.
pnl.
pAngkallti.
kommou.
niaicum.
tshal.
tshii.
maha.
kak.
wi'iiin.
AUDKNDA AM) COilllUiKNUA.
413
Enolt"'!. Latin, Cavisk. Wit.i.amkt.
two duu leplia ki'iiii.
three Ires nuitniii upsliin.
four qindiior ]ii(»iiig t/ioiii!.
Hv(; iiuiiiiinc t.'iwit hiiwHii.
isix ,,. scv noiiitl tat'.
seven seijtem iKulip psliiiiiniua.
eight ortu iioirTuU kiTiiiiuiji.
nine novem tiinaiiiHishinishiii wunwnha.
ten decern ningitelp tinilia.
Again — tlio process iiuiy l)o mo,lilio(l by tfiking two languages
known to he clnscly allied, and asking how far a simple compari-
son of their vocabularies exhibits that alliance on the surface,
f. (J. : —
KNor-rsu. IJeavku iNnrAN.
one it la day
two ouk sliay day ...
three ta day
lour dini day
five tint zoon e de ay
six int 7A\d ha
seven ta e wayt zay ...
eiglit etznd een tay ...
nine Icala gay ne ad ay
ten kay nay day
a man taz eu
a woman iay <iuay
a girl id a/, uo
a boy tax yuz e
interpreter ... nao day ay
trader nieeoo tay
moose-deer... tiay tchin tay ..
rein-deer may tzee
beaver t^^a
dug th^c
rabbit kagh
bear zns
woh' tsliee o nay
fox e yay tiiay
('lUPl'KWYAN.
ittia he.
nank hay.
ta he.
dunk lie.
sa soot la he.
I'goot ha he.
tluz ud dunk he.
I'goot dung he.
itla ml lia.
Iiona.
dinnay you.
tzay (luay.
ed diiuia gay.
dinnay yoo azay.
dinnay tee ghaltay.
ma kad ray.
tunnehee hee.
ed liun.
tza.
tlce.
kagli.
zus.
noo nee yay.
nag hee dthav.
The difference is great: but tlie two forms of speedi are nuitn-
ally intelligible. On the otlicr hand, tlie Cayuse and AVillamet
are more alike than the English and Latin.
Next to the, details of our nietliod, and the principles of our
classification, the more nnportant of the sp<'cial (juestions connnand
attention. Upon the relations of tlie Eskimo to the other
languages of America I have long ago expressed my opinion.
I now add the following remarks upon the prevalence of the
doctrine which separated them.
Let us imagine an American or British etlmologist speculating
414
AItI)i;\I)A AM) roRKKiKNUV.
on tlio ori}^in and unity of the Kiirope.in po])ulations and arriving,
in tli(i course of liis investigations, at Finniark, or ary of those
nortliern parts of Scandinavia where the Norwegian and liix])-
huider conn^ in innnediate geographical contact. What would be
firstV Even tliis — ch»sc geograpliical contact accompanied hy a
reniarkahle contrast in the way (tf tlic ethnoh»gy: ditfereuce in
Iiahits, dilVerenc(> in aptitudes, difll'erenco in civilisation, dift'ereuce
of creed, dift'erence of ])liysical form, ditt'erence of language.
But tlie ditl["erent manner in which the southern tribes of La]) •
land comport themselves in respect to their nearest neighbours,
according as they lie Avest or east, illustr;;tes this view. On tht-
side of Norway i'ow contrasts are more definite and striking than
that between tlie nomad Lap with his reindeer, and reindeer-skin
liabiliments and the industrial and highly civilized Norwegian.
No similarity of habits is here; no affinity of language; little on
intermixture, in the way of marriage. "^^IMieir physical frames are
as different as their moral dispositions no and social habits. Nor
is this difficult to explain. The Norwegian is not only a mend»er
of another stock, but his original home was in a southern, or com-
])aratively southern, climate. It was Germany rather Scandinavia ;
i'or Scandinavia was, originally, exclusively Lap or Fin. lint
the German family encroaclied nortlnvards; and by displacenu'nt
after displacement obliterated those members of the Jjap stock
whose occupancy was Southern and Central Scandinavia, until
nothing Avas left but its extreme northern representatives in the
nntst northern and least favored parts of the peninsula. By these
means two strongly contrasted populations were brotight in ch)se
geographical contact — this being the present condition all ah)iig
the South Eastern, or NorAvegian, boundary of Laphuul.
But it is by no means tlie present condition of those jiarts of
Ivussian Lapland Avhere the ]jap population touches that of Fin-
land Proper.
Here, although the Lap and Fin differ, the difference lies
Avithin a far narrower limit than that Avliich divides the Lap from
th(» NorAvegian or the SAvede. The stature of the La]i is less than
that of the Fin; though the Fin is more short than tall, and tlu^
Lap is far from being so stunted as books and pictures nmke
him. The habits, too, differ. The reindeer goes Avith tlie Lap;
the coAV Avith the Fin. Other points differ also. On the Avhole,
hoAvever, the Fin physiognomy is Lap , and the J^apFin; and
ti.n languages are allied.
Furthermore^ — the Fin graduates into the Wotiak, theZirianean,
the Permian; the ]*ermian into the Tsheremiss, the Mordvin &.c.
In other Avords, if Ave follow the Lap eastwards avc come into a
AvhoIe fancy of congeners. ( )n the Avest, hoAVCA'er, the further
Ave Avent, the l(>ss Lap Avas everything. Instead of being Lap it
AUDKNDA AM) COHIlIfiKNDA.
415
was Novwog'ian, 8\vo(li.sli, Diuiisli, or (Icnnan. TIk* last, of tlioso,
liownvcr, would lead us into the Saruiatiau tauiily, and this would
Itring us round to the Fins of South Finland. 'I'lio time, hoAVcvcr,
nnvy eonio when Russia will have so encroached upon the Fin
]»oj)ulations to the south of tlu^ Arctic (Jivcle as for t\w liap and
Slave t(» come in innnediat(^ contact; and when this contact is
eiVected there will be contrast also— contrast less strong', i)er-
haps, than that between the Lap and Swede, but still contrast.
Dlutalis mutandis — this seems to have been the case with the
Fskimo and the North American Indians as they are popularly
called — popularly but inaccuratcdy ; inasmuch as the ])resent
writer consiclers tlu^ Fskimo to be as truly American as any other
occupants of the soil of America. On the I'jast there lias been en-
croachment, displacement, and, as an c^tt'ect thereof, two strongly
contrasted populations in close geographical contact — viz.: the
Eskimos and the northern members of tiie Algonkin fanuly. On
the west, where the change has been bvss, the Athabaskans, the
Ivohitshes, and the Fskimos graduate to each other, coming under
the same category, and forming part of one and the same class;
that class being by no nu'ans a narrow, though not an inordinate-
ly, Avide one.
Anotlier special question is 'hat concerning the origin ol' the
Nahuatl, Astecs, or Mexicans. 'J'he maritime hypothesis I have
abandoned. 'JMie doctrine that their civilisation was iNFaya I re-
tain. ' I doubt, however, whether they originated anywhere. By
this I nu^an that they are, though not ([uit(^ in silii , nearly so. In
th(^ northermost parts of their area they may so entircdy. When 1
refined on this — the conunon sense — view of them I was, like
many others, misled by the peculiar phonesis. What it is may
lie better seen by an example than explained. Contrast the two
following columns. How smoothly the words on the right run,
how hai'shly sound (when they can be sounded) those of the left.
Xot, however, that they give us the actual sounds of the com-
bination h/il &.Q,. All that this means is that tliere is stnne extra-
ordinary sound to ho. expressed that no simple sign or no com-
mon combination will represent. In Mr. Jlab^'s vocabularies it
is represented by a single special sign.
EN<iI.ISlI. SeMSH. ClHNfK. SlloSlIiiNl.
man skaltanicklio ... tklileUala tnka.
s^^niaum tlvliluUi'i kwuti.
«k()kosea tklknsk^s natsi.
shiiut/<m tklalokli iiaint.s«ts.
akt«lt etsliamiks wa.
]».'ins ^kliliain.-uiia ... apui.
woman
llOjl
(jiii
child
I'allicr.
mother ski'iis tklilian.ia
pia.
41 ()
AI)UKNI>A AND COllHKi KN'DA.
ENfii.isii. Skmhu. Ciiinuk. Shoshon'i.
wife makhoiiakli ... iiiaklu'kal wepui.
son skokiisea ctsoklia natsl.
(l/iiKjIilcr ,st«mt.-<liilalt ... okuv/klia nanai.
hfotliev katsliki (el<ler) kapklm tamve.
sistur tkIkiki;L> tkhliau naiiiei.
Now if tlio Astcc pliniiosis bo, more akin to tlio Solisli ami its
coiigoiu^rs than to the- Sho.shoni and other interjacent forms of
Kpeeeli, Ave get an element of al'linity Avliieli connects \\\v more
distant Avhilst it separates the nearer lauynages. Overvalue tliis,
and yon may he misled.
Now, not to mention the fact of this ])h()nesis being an over-
valued character, there is clear proof in the recent additions to
the comparative phih)logy of (Jalifornia that its distribution is, by
no means, wliat it Avas, originally, supposed to be. This may be
seen from the following lists.
From the North of California.
English. Wish-osk.
hoy ligeritl ,
married weliowut'l .,
/irr/d wiitwetl ....,
hair (lahHl ,
fare kulitsouetl .,
t)eard tseh'pl
Jioilij tall ,
I'uol wehlilil
village niolil
chief kuwque'h'tl
a.xe iiiahtl ,
pipe maht'letl
wind ralitegut'l ..
duck hahalitl ....,
WiVOT.
kushaina.
luKiiich.
metwet.
jiaht'l.
siilatek.
cheirpl.
hit'l.
wellih'tl.
katswalf'tl.
kaiovvuh.
mehtl.
iii.ilitlel.
ruktagun.
hahahlih.
(2.)
English. IIipaii.
neck hosewatl...
vil/ai/e
chief ,
Ijoiu
a.ve luehlcohlewatl
Tahlkwaii.
wall' tiki.
howiniicquutl.
chotlta.
In the South of California,
English. Dimutno. Cuchan.
leg cvvith'l niisith'l.
tu-dai/ enyal'l
lo-ntorrow inatinyat'i
Al)l»i;Nr).\ A\l> COKKKIKNDA.
117
rosiroNi.
Enhmhii. . DiniiNo. Ci ciian.
hread meyiil'l
ear Iimiwit'l siiiytlrl.
neck n'yetli'l.
arm ....
hand ...
friend .
I'cather .
selli iseth'I.
iiyct'l.
s.'iliwitlrl.
1 cannot conclndo without an ox})rossion of rogrct that the j^Toat
work of Aih'hni}^ is .still onlyi in' the condition of a second, or
(at best) hnt a third edition. There is Vater's Supplement, and
Jiilg-'s fSnpplenient to Vater. But there is nothing that brings it
up to the present time.
Much might be done by Buschmann and perhaps others. But
this is not enough. It recjuires translation. 'V\u' few French
writers who treat on Ethnological JMiilology know nothing about
it. The Italians and .Spanish are, n foiiinri , in outer darkness as
to its contents. The Russians and Scandinavians know all about
it — but the Russians and Scandinavians are not the scholars in
whose hands the first hand information falls first. The Ameri-
cans know it but imperfectly. If Turner has has had easy access
to it, Gallatin had not: whilst Hales, with great powers, has been
(with the exc(>ption of his discovery of the Athabaskan affinities
of the Umkwa and Tlatskanai, out of which Turner s fixation of
the Apatch, Navaho, and Jecorilla, and, afterAvards, my own
of the Iloopah, seems to have been developed.) little more than
a collector — a preeminent great collector — of raw materials.
Nevertheless, the Atna class is his.
However, the jNlithridates, for America at least, wants trans-
lation as well as revision. It is a work in which many weak
points may be (and have been) discovered. Klaproth , himself a
man who (though he has saved many an en([uirer nuich trouble)
has but few friends , has virulently attacked it. Its higher classi-
fications are, undoubtedly, but low. Nevertheless, it is not only a
great work, but the basis of all others. Should any one doubt its
acumen let him read the part which , treating on the Chikkasah,
demurrs to the identification of the Natchez with that and other
forms of speech. Since it was written a specimen of the Natchez
language has shewn its validity.
I think that the Natchez has yet to take its full importance.
If the language of the Tat'fisus it was, probably, the chief
language of Tennessee. But the Creek, or JMuscogulgc , broke it
11]). iMeanwhile the fragmentary Catawba, with which I believe
that the Caddo was connected had its congeners far to westward.
I also think that the Uchc represents the old language of
Florida — the Cherokee being conterminoiis with the Catawba.
27
418
ADDKNDA AM> COUUKiliNJiA.
Tf SO, tlic floctriiu' of the. f'niwliimcntal affinity Itctwofii the
J'.'iwiii, (!!ul(|o, (!at!i\vl)a, and ('licrokcc ;;'aiiis ;;;ronn(l.
TiiP llchc (Icnnnwls special invcstij-ation. Tlic 'rin((uin and
Tiimiacana slionid lie coni^tavcd with it. Tlicn wliy ar<' tlicy not V
Fow works arc more inaccossildc than a Spanish .trie, IHccitmuriu,
or ('ulccAsmii. 'V\w (UtUi I'or th(\s(' cncjnirics, littlo known, arc still
U'ss attainaldc. AVithout these, and witliout a niinntc stndy, ol
tlie tirst-liand authorities we can do hut little hut sny<i,est. All
that is sugj;'cst(Ml here is that the (U^tails^ of Fhtrida (in its
widest sense) and J^ouisiana must he treated under the doctrine
that the ahoriy'ines are represented hy the con{;;eners (»f the Woe-
con, ('atawha, Uche, Natchej!, 'I'in([uin, and Tiuuiacann, inordi-
nat(dy displaced hy the (Mierokc^es and (Greeks; who (for a great
extent of their present area) must he considered as intrusive.
>
r ItctWOCii the
<> i in((iiin and
' arc tlicy imt V
rU', lUcciiiuiiriit,
;nown , arc still
liiuitc stiuly, (if
it suggest. All
I'Morida (in its
cr the doctrine
irs (tf the Vs w-
lacuna, inordi-
dio (for a great
s intrusive.
->^